






■P 












tali, 

^1 V .,'.. 5&5ffi 








Class 
Book 



iui:m:mt:i) my 



NEW METHOD 



OF LEARNING 



THE FRENCH LANGUAGE; 

EMBRACING BOTH THE 

&naintic ano gnntfjelfc iH tu> f Instruction ; 

BEING 

A. PLAIN AND PRACTICAL WAY OP ACQUIRING THE ART 

OF 

READING, SPEAKING, AND COMPOSING FRENCH. 

OK THE PLAN OF WOODBURY'S METHOD "WITD: GEEman. 

By LOUIS FASQUELLE, LL.D. 

PROFESSOR OP MODERN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE IN THE UNIVERSITY OF 

MICHIGAN, CORRESPONDING MEMBER OP THE NATIONAL INSTITUTE, 

AUTHOR OP "JUVENILE FRENCH COUR8E," "THE COLLOQUIAL 

FRENCH READER," "MANUAL OF FRENCH 

CONVERSATION,*' ETC. 

Autant de langues on parte, autant de fois on est homme. — Charles T. 



REVISED AND IMPROVED. 



NEW YORK: 
IVISON, PHLNNEY & CO, 48 & 50 WALKER STREET. 

CHICAGO: S. C. GRIGGS & CO, 39 & 41 LAKE ST. 
boston: brown, taggard & chase. Philadelphia: sower, barnes fc co., 

AND J. B. LIPPINCOTT Sc CO. CINCINNATI; MOORE, WILSTACH, KEYS A CO. 

SAVANNAH: J. M. COOPER Sc CO. ST. LOUIS: KEITH & WOODS. NEW 

ORLEANS I BLOOMFIELD, STEEL Sc CO. DETROIT : F. RAYMOND & CO. 

T8 6 1. 



We have published for the use of Teachers, 

" A Key to the Exercises in Fasquelle's New French 

Method, with occasional Notes and References to the Ptules, by 

Louis Fasquelle, LL.D., etc." Price 75 cts. The "Key" can be 

sent by mail, by sending the publisbers tbe price in P. 0. stamps. 

Ivison, Phinney & Co., 48 & 50 "Walker St. 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 18C0, by 
LOUIS FASQUELLE 
in me cicik'o offio» of tho District Court of the United States for the 
District of Michigan. 



BLBCTBOTYPBD BY rillNTFn BY 

Smith « McDousax., J. D. Bbdford & Co., 

BBj KMAN-ST. Hfi FltANKI.IXST. 



AND LITEEATUEE, 

THEOUGHOUT THE UNITED STATES, 

©Ijis i) 1 it m £ 

IS MOST RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED. 



AMERICAN EDUCATIONAL SERIES. 



A COURSE OF PRACTICAL AND PROGRESSIVE 
SCHOOL AND COLLEGE TEXT BOOKS; 

IN WHOLE OR IN" PART, OFFICIALLY ADOPTED BY THE 

STATE SUPERINTENDENTS OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION 
AXD BOARDS OF EDUCATION, 

IN NEABLY EVEBT STATE -WHERE ANT OFFICIAL EXAMINATION AND ADOPTION 
HAS BEES MADE. 

FIFTEEN MILLIONS 

have been sold, and the circulation is steadily increasing. They are also 
officially commended and principally used in the PUBLIC SCHOOLS of 
New York, Philadelphia, and many other large cities, and in the principal 
NORMAL SCHOOLS throughout the Union. 

They are recommended by TWENTY EDUCATIONAL JOURNALS, 
and by One Hundred aud Fifty other most respectable Journals — Lite- 
rary, Religious, etc. 

Prom Superintendents of States, Counties, and Cities, from Presidents 
and Professors of Colleges, and from Teachers and Practical Educators, 
and tho Press throughout the Union, we have 

OVER 200 ROYAL OCTAVO PAGES OF TESTIMONIALS 
to the superior merit of these Books, selections from which will be sent 
free, on application. 

THE SERIES EMBRACES 

BANDERS' NEW READERS, SPELLERS, ETC. 

ROBINSON'S COMPLETE SERIES OF MATHEMATICS. 
THOMSON'S PRACTICAL ARITHMETICS. 
WILLSON'S HISTORICAL SERIES. 

WELLS' CD. A.) SCIENTIFIC SERIES. 
WELLS' iW. 11. ) GRAMMARS. Revised. 
OOLTON A PITCH'S GEOGRAPHIES. 

GRAY'S (ASA) BOTANIES. Graded. 2,500 cuts. 

BRADBURY'S SCHOOL MUSIC BOOKS. 10 books. 
LLEfl FRENCH SERIES. 
WOODBURY'S GERMAN 8ERIE8. 

nil. HOOCK'S ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. 
BFTOHOOOK'S NEW GEOLOGY. 

SPENOERIAN PENMANSHIP. New edition. 9 books. 

O'DONNELL'S PENMANSHIP. 81 ks. 

BRYANT & STRATTONS BOOKKEEPING. 

KiHUSTER'S DRAWING BOOKS— beautifully engraved. 
IVISON & PHINNEY'S SCHOOL RECORDS, DIA. 
BIES, REGISTERS, ETC., ETC., ETC 

Z3ST DES0RIPT1TE CATALOGUE and CIRCULARS, with mattei 
interesting to TeacherSp descriptions of books, notices, testimonials, prices, 

. on request. 
liberal Terms for Specimen Copies and first supplies for Schools. 

IVISON, PHINNEY & CO., Publishers, 
48 & 50 Walker St., New York. 



PREFACE 



The universality of the French language furnishes sufficient 
proof of its utility. Throughout Europe, in many parts of Asia, 
Africa, and America, no education is complete without a knowl- 
edge of that tongue, which in more than one country of Europe 
is emphatically called " the language." Its merits are becoming 
so well appreciated in this country, that it is almost unnecessary 
to particularize them, to speak of its unsurpassed precision and 
clearness, and of its capability of expressiug every idea, in the 
most laconic and in the most ornamental style. The language 
of France, that happy compound of the Celtic, the Romanic and 
the Teutonic elements, is equally adapted to the lightest litera- 
ture and to the most profound diction of science. The rich 
mines of French literature, too long but imperfectly known here, 
offer in every department of knowledge treasures equal to those 
presented by the literature of any other nation. 

Many works have been published in this country and in Eng- 
land to facilitate the acquisition of the French language ; but 
during his more than twenty years' practice in teaching the 
modern languages, the author of this volume has in vain looked 
for the appearance of a book which, like several of the- French 
grammars published in Germany, should unite in due propor- 
tions theory and practice. To the high merits of several of the 
theoretical grammars he bears his most cheerful testimony ; yet, 
the student might go through them, and know but little of the 
idiomatic or practical part of the language. Several of the 
practical works, though well executed according to the plans 
which their authors had laid, neglect grammatical rules, if not 
entirely, at least far too much ; and the student may, after hav- 
ing devoted a long time to the mere memorizing of sentences, 



VI PREFACE. 

find himself in possession of a number of set phrases, valuable, 
it is true, but from -which, destitute of landmarks, the slightest 
deviation must lead him into unknown regions. 

A work which, uniting practice with theory, should attempt 
to avoid the difficulties mentioned above, had been long contem- 
plated by the author of these pages, when " Woodbury's New 
Method with the German" made its appearance. Finding in 
that work the two systems, the analytic and the synthetic, beau- 
tifully blended and well elaborated, he had no hesitation in 
adopting the general plan of Mr. Woodbury's Grammar, in pre- 
paring his long intended treatise on the French. 

The work commences with a comprehensive treatise on pro- 
nunciation. The power of the letters, as initials, medials and 
finals, is fully explained under the different letters. Peculiar 
care has been taken to render this part sufficiently full, in order 
to provide the student with a satisfactory guide and adviser, in 
the principal difficulties of the French pronunciation. The words 
presenting peculiarities of pronunciation are placed as excep- 
tions to the rules given in this part. 

In the commencement of the First Part of this grammar, the 
rules are given in the most simple form, and the idioms are 
gradually introduced and explained ; copious references to the 
Second, or more theoretical Part, render further information 
easily attainable. After the rules of every lesson, comes a 
resume of examples in illustration of them, as also of preced- 
ing ones, containing often new idioms and conversational phrases. 
The examples on the rules, the resumes, and the French exer- 
cises to be rendered into English and consisting almost entirely 
of questions and answers, combine, it is thought, all the benefits 
presented by the practical grammars, while the rules in the 
lessons, and the ease with which reference may be had to the 
Second Part, present all the advantages of the theoretical treat- 
ises. It will be easily seen that the teacher and student will 
find here the practice, with as little or as much of the theory as 
they may desire. 

The grammatical rules and idioms arc introduced gradually, 
so as not to offer too many difficulties at once. Care has been 
taken not to present the rules as abstract and arbitrary laws ; 



PREFACE. VH 

while the resemblance or difference of construction between the 
two languages is carefully pointed out. 

Exercises to be rendered into French are placed at the end of 
every lesson. The materials for these are found in the exam- 
ples to the rules, in the resumes, in the French exercises and in 
the vocabularies preceding the same. Besides all this, the stu- 
dent is furnished with the means of carrying on, in connection 
with the regular course already indicated, a series of exercises 
in French composition, at once easy, interesting, and profitable 
in the highest degree. 

The grouping of the tenses of the verbs and the classification 
of the irregularities, will, it is hoped, simplify this part of gram- 
mar. In the former, the student will see that by learning a 
tense in one conjugation, he often learns it in the others ; in the 
latter, he will perceive that the deviations of the irregular verbs 
are often very trifling and confined to particular tenses. 

An attempt is made in the "Practical Resumes" Lessons 98 
and 99, to simplify as much as possible the somewhat complex 
subject of the past participle. ' 

The rules of the Second, or theoretical Part, are deduced 
from the most reliable sources ; they are nearly all illustrated by 
short extracts from the best French authors. This will, it is 
hoped, while giving classical authority to the rules, inspire the 
student with a desire of becoming more intimately acquainted 
with the authors from whose works the examples are taken. It 
will be perceived, also, that the sentiments contained in the ex- 
tracts have not been overlooked. 

In the Second Part, the verbs are. given in their fullest form. 
The irregular, defective, peculiar (See § 49), and unipersonal 
verbs are placed alphabetically. 

The author would here respectfully suggest, not with a view 
of offering advice to experienced teachers, but as a mode which 
he has found beneficial in practice, that the student commence 
to learn the verbs from the paradigms in the Second Part, as soon 
as he has acquired some little knowledge of the pronunciation, 
and this simultaneously with his learning the lessons of the First 
Part. The verbs, in the French, and in the other so called 
Romanic languages, are more complicated and require more 



VUl PREFACK, 

study than the verbs in the German and other Teutonic lan- 
guages. Having, in this manner, acquired some knowledge of 
the verbs, the student will, by the time he, in his progress 
through the first part, reaches the groupings of the tenses men- 
tioned above, be able to recognize the verbs as old friends, and 
better to appreciate the classification of the irregularities. This 
course is advised not as indispensable, but as beneficial. 

The reading lessons, in prose and in verse, extracted from the 
best sources, and containing grammatical references to both 
parts of the work, will not be unacceptable to the student. A 
vocabulary for these lessons is placed immediately after them. 

Among the numerous works which have been consulted dur- 
ing the preparation of this grammar, the author would mention 
with gratitude the labors of the French Academy, Laveaux, 
Lemare, Bescher, Girault-Duvivier, Boniface, Bescherelle, 
Landais, etc. 

With a sinceie hope that the present volume may assist the 
American student in obtaining a knowledge of the beautiful 
language of France, it is respectfully submitted. 



The numerous editions of this grammar which have been 
issued, having rendered a renewal of the stereotype plates neces- 
sary, the Author has taken this opportunity of giving to the 
work a thorough review, and, without changing the arrangement, 
of introducing such improvements as the kind suggestions of 
several experienced Instructors, and its use in his own classes, 
for nearly ten years, have pointed out to him as desirable. 

L. F. 

University of Michigan, ) 
Ann Arbor, May, 1860. J 



GENERAL INDEX. 



A (a), prep. § 142, (2). 

Abbreviations, p. 281. 

Accents, Lesson 2. 

Acheter, to buy, § 49, (5) ; its gov- 
ernment, L. 50, 1. 

Accorder, s,' to agree; said also of 
watches, L. 92, 3. 

Active verb, § 43, (2), (3.) 

Active Voice, used in French in 
cases where the passive is used in 
English, L. 35, 2 ; L. 46, 3 ; § 128, 
(5.); §113,(1.) 

Adjectives, § 14-1. Qualifying 
adjectives, § 14-2. Degrees of 
signification, § 14-2. Gender 
and number of, § 1 5. Formation 
of feminine of, § 16, L. 13. Irregu- 
lar adjectives, § 16, (8.) Adjectives 
having no feminine, § 16, (9.) 
Plural of, § 17, L. 14. Agree- 
ment of adjectives with nouns, 
§ 18; § 83 ; L. 13, L. 14. Relat- 
ing to several nouns, § 18, (3); 
L. 14, 1, 2. Determining adjec- 
tives, § 19. Demonstrative, L. 9 ; 
§ 20; § 93. Possessive, L. 9; 
§ 21; § 94; Remarks on, § 95. 
Agree with object possessed, § 21, 
(2) ; L. 9, 3. Numeral adjectives, 
§ 22, L. 19 ; place of, § 96. Car- 
dinal adjectives, § 22, (1), (2), (4); 
Variations of, § 23 ; Observation 
on, § 24. Ordinal numbers, § 23, 
(3), (5). Observation on, § 25. 
Indefinite adjectives, § 30 ; § 97. 
Verbal adjectives, syntax of, § 65. 
Remarks on feu, nu, &c, § 84. 
Adjectives used adverbially, § 67, 
(3) ; § 84, (5). Place of adjec- 
tives, L. 15 ; § 85 ; § 86. Adjec- 
tives preceding noun, § 85, (11). 
Adjectives differing in meaning 
before and after, § 86. Regi- 
men or government of, § 87 ; 
§ 88 ; § 89 ; § 92 ; L. 79. Ad- 
jectives requiring a different pre- 
position in French and English, 
§90. 

Adverbs, § 67. Formed from adjec- 
tives, § 68. Degrees of significa- 
tion, § 69. Adverbs forming a 



comparison of themselves, § 70. 
Syntax of, § 136. Place of, § 136; 
L. 34; L. 41. Observation on, 
§ 137. Adverbs of negation, 
§ 138. Adverbs of quantity fol- 
lowed by de, L. 18. 

A droite, to the right, L. 70, 6. 

A gauche, to the left, L. 70, 6. 

A fieur de, even with, L. 80, 2. 

A force de, by dint of, L. 80, 2. 

A l'egard de, with regard to, L. 80, 2. 

A raison de, at the rate of, L. 80, 2. 

Au dehors, outside, L. 80, 2. 

Au dedans, inside, L. 80, 2. 

Au dela, beyond, L. 80, 2. 

Age, avoir used for, L. 20, 6. 

A la campagne, in the country, 
L. 34, 8. 

A la chasse, hunting, L. 34, 8. 

A la peche, fishing, L. 34, 8. 

A l'anglaise, a la franeaise, after the 
English, French fashions, L. 69,3. 

A l'ecole, at school ; a l'e'glise, at 
church, L. 25, 6. 

A l'endroit, right side out; a l'en- 
vers, wrong side cut, L. 69, 1. 

A l'insu, unknown to, L. 82. 

Alphabet, L. 1. 

Aller, to go, used for proximate fu- 
ture, L. 26, 1. Aller trouver, to 
go to, L. 26, 3. S'en aller, to go 
away, L. 40 ; 1, 2 ; L. 47, 1. 
Aller, to fit, to sit, L. 47, 2. Aller 
a pied, a eheval, en voiture, to 
walk, ride, go in a carriage, L. 62, 
Examples. 

Amis (un de mes), a friend of mine, 
L. 67, 3. 

Amuser, (s',)to take pleasure in, etc., 
L. 38, 6. 

Analogy between many French and 
English words, § 147. 

Answers in French should be ex- 
plicit, L. 24, 12. 

Apporter, amener, to bring, carry, 
L. 44, 6. 

Approcher, (s',) to draw near, L. 
39, 6. 

Articles, § 13; L. 4, 1, 2. Elision 
of, L. 4, 2; § 13, (7); § 146. 
Contraction of, § 13, (8) ; L. 5, 1 ; 



GENERAL INDEX. 



L. 25, 6. English article a or 
an, § 14, (9). Recapitulation of 
articles, § 13. Syntax of, § 77. 
Use of, § 77, (1), (2), (3), etc. Be- 
fore words used in partitive sense, 
§ 78, (2), (3), (4), (5), (6), (7); 
§ 13,(10); L. 6. 1; L. 7, 5 ; L. 8, 
4; L. 12, 3; L. 29, 8. Article 
used before words in general sense, 
and abstract nouns, § 77, (1), (2); 
L. 8, 2, 3 ; L. 23, 11 ; L. 29 and 
30. Article omitted before num- 
ber of a sovereign, L. 30, 3. 
Article le used before parts of the 
body, L. 63, 5. Use of article in- 
stead of possessive adjective, 
§ 77, (9); L. 37, 1; L. G3, 5; 
L. 60, 3. Repetition of, § 80. 
Remarks on the use of, § 81. 
Idioms in which the article is 
omitted, § 82. 

Aspirate II, L. 3, p. 25. H not 
aspirate in heroine, etc., L. 3, 
p. 25, note. 

Asseoir, (s',) to sit down, L. 36, 4. 

Asscz, enough, its place, L. 34, 3. 

Aujourd'hui, to-day, its place, L. 
41, 5. 

Au lieu de, instead of, L. 35, 4. 

Au re voir, till I see you again, L. 
89. 4. 

Auxiliary verbs, § 43, (8); L. 43, 
J; 46. Use ofj § 46. Paradigms 
of, g 47. 

Avancer, to gain, said of clocks, etc., 
L. 92, 1. 

Avant, lirfcre, prep. § 142, (1). 

Avoir, to have, used idiomatically 
wiili ijk lque chose, chaud, fro id, 
etc, L. 8, 1. With a>utume,besoin, 
(/••.. L. 21, I. Used for the day 
of the month, L. 19, 6 ; for age, 
L. 20, 6. Avoir lieu, to take place, 
L. 35, 3. Avoir mal, to have a 
juitn, dr., L. 66, 1. Avoir d 

-, L. 66, 2. Avoir, to hold, 
L. 66, 3. Avoir chaud aux mains. 
L. 66, .'i. Avoir beau, to be in vain, 
L. 67, 1. Avoir, used for dimen- 
sion, size, L. 68, 1. Avoir, nega- 
tively, 5- 4", (2). Interrogatively, 
§ it, (.".). Interrogatively aud 
negatively, g 17, (1). 

Tjl-.av, bel, handsome, fine, L. 13, 6. 

Capitals, uso of, % 145. 



Cardinal numbers, § 22, (2); § 24. 
Variations of, § 23. Use of, after 
names of sovereigns, L. 30, 3 ; 
§ 26, (3). For the day of the 
month, § 26, (1). 

Cases, § 2. 

Ce, demons, prn. § 37, (6); § 108; 
§ 116; L. 81. Used for he, she, 
before etre, L. 82, 1. C'est moi, 
L. 81, 1. 

— , demons, adj., § 20, (1); L. 10, 1, 2. 

Cedilla, L. 3, 6. 

Ce que, what, L. 31, 4. 

Celui qui, he who, L. 81, 4. 

Chacun, each one, § 41, (2). 

Chaque, each, % 30, (4). 

Changer d'habit, to change one's coat; 
changer de maison, to move, L. 58, 
1. Changer, to exchange, L. 58, 2. 

Chez, prep, at the house of, § 142, 
(3) ; L. 24, 9. 

Collective nouns, § 3, (5), (6). Num- 
ber of verbs after collective nouns, 
L. 85. 

Collocation of words, §144 

Combien de temps, how long; com- 
bien dofois? how often? L. 44, 1. 
Combien ya-t-il? how far? how 
long since? L. 57, 4. 

Comparison of adjectives and ad- 
verbs. L. 16; L. 17. 

Composing French, plan of exercises 
for, p. 103; list ofwordafor,p. 271. 

Compound nouns, § 3, (7). § 9; L. 
59. Gender o£ § 5,(15). 

Conditional mode, § 45, 2d, (3). 
Use of, § 12.".. Formation and 
termination of L. 62, 1, 2. Irre- 
gularities of, L. 62, 4. Not used 
after si, if, L. 62, 6; § 125. 

Conjugation of verbs. First conju- 
gation, paradigm, § 48. Peculiari- 
ties of some verba, ^ 49. Second 
conjugation, paradigm, § 50. 
Third conjugation, paradigm, ^ 
51. Peculiarities of verbs of 
third conjugation, § 49; £ 52. 
Fourth conjugation, paradigm, $5 
53. Pa 

Rule, § 55. Reflective verbs, para- 
digm, £ 56. Negative form of, 
>; o". Interrogative form. 
Interrogative and negative form, 
§ 69. 1 'iiipeison.il verbs, para- 
digm, § 61, 2. Terminations of 
regular verbs, S 60. Tabic of 
irregular verbs, g 62. 






GENERAL INDEX. 



Connaitre, to be acquainted with, L. 

30, 6. Connaitre quelqu'un a la 
voix, to know some one by the voice, 
L. 87, 4. Connaitre de vue, to 
know by sight, etc., L. 87, 5. Se 
connaitre a. to be a judge of, L. 
87, 6. 

Conjunctions, § 73. Lists of, § 73, 
(2). Syntax of, § 143. Govern- 
ment of, § 127 ; § 143. Requir- 
ing subjunctive, § 143, (2) ; infin- 
itive, § 143, (1); conditional or 
indicative, § 143, (3); si, if, § 125, 
(3) ; L. 62, 6. Examples of con- 
junctions, L. 100. 

Consonants, L. 3. 

Convenir, to be becoming, L. 49, 2. 

Coucher (se), to retire, to go to bed, L. 
37, 5. 

Dans, prep, in, § 142, (2). 

Davantage, more, L. 16, note. 

Day of month, week, not preceded 

by preposition, L. 26, 10. 
Degrees of comparison of adjectives, 

L. 16; L. 17. 
Demain, to-morrow, its place, L. 41,5. 
Demander, to ask, its government, 

L. 50, 1. 
Demettre (se), le bras, etc., to dislo- 
cate one's arm, etc., L. 93, 1. To 

resign a place, L. 93, 2. 
Demonstrative adjective, § 20. See 

Adjective. 
Demonstrative pronoun, § 36. See 

Pronoun. 
Depecher (se), to make haste, L. 40, 7. 
Devant, prep, before, § 142, (1). 
Devenir, to become, L. 85, 5. 
Devoir, to owe, expressing future, 

obligation, L. 35, 5. 
Dimension, etc., L. 68. 
Diphthongs, sounds of, L. 2, p. 19. 
Dont, prn. of whom, of which, L. 

31, 8. 

Elision, § 146. Of article, L. 4, 2 : 

§ 13, (7"). Of pronoun ye, L. 4, 5. 

Of preposition de, L. 6, 3. Of ne, 

L. 7, 3. Of pronouns le, la, L. 

. 9, 2. 

Eloigner (s'), to go from, to leave, L. 
39, 6. 

Emparerj (s'), to seize, to lay hold of, 
L. 93, 3. 

Empecher, (s'), to help, to prevent 
one's self, L. 93, 4. 



Emporter, Emmener, to take away, 
L. 44, 6. 

En, pronoun, § 39, (17); § 95, (5); 
§ 110; § 103, (1); § 104; L. 
15, 7 ; L. 22, 3. Before a past 
participle, § 135, (7); L. 42, 11, 
12. Used instead of possessive 
adjective, § 95, (5); L. 96, 1, 2. 

En, prep. § 142, (2) ; L. 34, 5, 6, 7. 

Encore, more, etc., L. 17, 3. 

Endormir (s'), to fall asleep, L. 39, 5. 

Ennuyer, to weary, L. 38, 4. S'en- 
nuyer, to become weary, L. 38, 5. 

Entendre parler, to hear about, of, L. 
35, 7. 

Entendre, to understand, L. 96, 3. 
Se faire entendre, to make one's 
self understood,!*. 9G. 4. Followed 
by another verb, L. 97, 4. 

Envoyer chercher, to send for, L. 
26, 5. 

Epouser, to marry, said only of par- 
ties, L. 67, 2. 

Essayer, to try on, L. 47, 4. 

Est-ce que, prefixed to the verb, § 
98; L. 25. 

Etre, conjugation of, § 47, (5). 
Number of etre after ce, § 116. 
Used for aller, to go, L. 43, 5. For 
to belong, L. 47, 5 ; L. 91, 2. Etre 
riche de, to be worth, L. 49, 5. 
Etre en retard, to be late, and 
other idioms with etre, L. 91, 1. 
Y etre, to be at home, in, L. 91, 3. 

Euphonic t, L. 4, 6. 

Eveiller (s'), to awake, L. 39, 5. 

Every day, tousles jours, L. 26, 8. 

Exercises in composing French, 
p. 270. 

Facher (se), to be or become angry, 
L. 40, 4. 

Faire, before another verb, to cause, 
to have, L. 32, 3, 4 ; L. 97, 4. 
Faire faire, to have made, L. 32, 4 ; 
L. 63, 1. Faire raccommoder, to 
have mended. Faire la cuisine, 
faire cuire, to cook. Faire bouillir, 
to boil, L. 63, 1. Faire peur, to 
frighten ; faire attention, to pay 
attention; faire tort, to injure; 
faire du mal, to hurt, L. 63, 3. 

, used unipersonally. in speak- 
ing of the weather, L, 33, 5. 

Falloir, to be necessary, L. 48. 

Feminine terminations, § 6, (2), (3). 

Feu, adj., late, § 84, (1). 



GKNEEAL INDEX. 



Future absolute, § 45, (2). Use of, 
§ 124. Formation of, § 61 ; L. 60, 

1, 2, 3. Irregularities of, L. 61, 
1, 2, 3, 4. Future anterior, § 45, 
(2), 3. Use ot; § 124. Forma- 
tion of, L. 60, 4. Future used in 
French where the present is used 
in English, L. 61, 5. 

Gendeb, § 4. By the meaning, § 5. 

By the termination, § 6. 
G'-iier, to incommode, trouble, etc., L. 

83, 5. Se gener, to constrain or 

trouble one's self, L. S3, 5. 
ople, L. 95, 2, 3. 4. 
Government iSse Regimen. 
Gre, "■.'/. Lou gre, mal gre, etc. 

L. 88. 5. 
Guere (ne), but fttffe, L. 17, 5. 

IT \ter (se), to hasten, L. 40, 7. 
Hier, yesterday, its place, L. 41, 5. 

Hour of the day, L. 20; L. 92. 

Imi'i'.uativk mode, .-" 16, 3d, 
of, § 12''>. Terminations of, L. 
to. 1 Irregul iriti >s, I.. To, 3, l. 
Two imperatives coming together, 
£ 100, (6). Imperative followed 
by a verb, L. 71, 1. 

Imperfect of indicative, § 46, (2\ 2d. 
Ose of, § 1 19; L 53. Formation 
and terminations, L. 53. Irregu- 
larities, I. 5 ;. 

Imperfect of subjunotive, ;■' 45,(5), 

2. D8Q Of, 1 . '<■'■ 
of, I.. 75, 1. 2, 3. 

I,. 75, i. trr gularities, L 75, ■"■. 
Importer, n'iraporto, no 

qu'importe? what matters it f L. 
01. 1.2. 

In. dans, en, d, T.. r; t. 5. 6. 
Indicative mo (2.) 

1 5, (2), l . Use 
ot; ?• 1 is. Terminations, I.. 2::. 6. 
Infinitive mode, ?' 45, &±h, 
. f. § 12s. Important nil. 
( n. (.">). Verb precedi d by an- 
, put in infinitive, L 21, 2. 

Inquieter is'i. L 93, 5. 

Interj 1 ■ 

'.': I. 
Intern n of, L. 

!6, 1; L. 

56, 1. 



Irregular verbs, L. 24. Table of; § 62. 

It, coining before verb to be followed 
by /, etc. L. 81. It used abso- 
lutely before verb to be, L. SI, 1. 

Jusqu'ou, hoivfar? L. 44, 3. 
Jusqu'a, until, as far as, L. 44, 4. 

Laisser, to leave, to neglect, to forget 

to bring, L. 86, 4. Followed by 

another verb, L. 97, 4. 
La plupart, most. Number of verb 

after, L. 85, 3. 
Le, meaning so, it, etc., L. 46. I, 5. 
Le mien, mine, etc., L. 9, 6; L. 12. 6. 
Lequel, etc., which, L. 18. 6; L. 31,' 7. 
Lever, (se), to rise, L. 37, 6. 
L'un, L'autre, one another, £ 41, (10). 
L'un et l'autre, both, § 41. (11): L. 

19, 3. 

Madame, Mademoiselle, used before 
names of kindred, L. 2 1 
Before titles, L. 29, 6. Plural of, 
1, 29, 7. 
Mal. sore, pain, etc., L. 66. Mal do 
toothache, mal do U'te, 
headache, L, 66. 
Marcher, to walk, L. 36, 6. 
Marier, to marry, to perform the 
;/, L. 67, •_'. Se marier, to 
git married, L.67, 2. litre marie, 
to be viarr,(tl,L. 67,2. See £pouser. 
Measure, wei :ht. price by, 1. 
Mime, same, even, etc, £ 30,(6); 

■'. (2). 
Mener, porter, to take, to carry, L. 

•t I, 6. 
Mitt re, to put on, L. 32, 1. ! 
le convert, to lay the cloth, L. 32, 1. 
Mettre a memo, (0 enable; mettre 
pied a tcrre, to alight; mettre a 
la porte, to turn out of doors ; met- 
tre au fait, to acquaint, etc., L. 
Be mettre, to dress one's 
self to sit down, L. 60, 2. 
Mettre a l'heure, to set a watch, L. 

92, 2. 
Midi, minuit, norm, midnight, L. 20, 2. 
' I.".. Indicative, £ 15, 1st, 
(2). Conditional, g 46, 2d, (3). 
tmperative, ? 46, 3d, M). 

ve, § •!■"'. ith, (5), Infinitive, 
■■■ Participle, ^ 46, 

Moi, toi, etc., used instead of nomi- 
pronouna, L. 17, 6. 



QENEEAL INDKX 



xia 



Mon, ma, posg. adj., agree with ob- 
ject possessed, L. 9, 3, 4. 

Monde, world, people, L. 95, 1; Tout 
le moude, every body, L. 95. 

Monsieur, used before names of kin- 
dred, L. 24, note. Before titles, 
L. 29, 6. Plural of, L. 29, 7. 

Month, day of, L. 19, 6 ; L. 26, 10. 

Must, falloir, etc., L. 48 ; § 62. 

Naitre, to be born, Je suisne, I was 
bom, L. 43, note. 

Nasal sounds, p. 21. 

Ne, negative, § 138. Place of, L. 7, 
1. Ne — que, only, L. 19, 2. Ne, 
idiomatic, § 127, 3 ; § 138, (4), 
(5) ; L. 72, 9. Ne — plus, no — 
more, L. 17, 4. Ne — guere, L. 
17, 5. 

Ni, neither, nor, L. 7, 4. Article 
used or not after ni, L. 8, 3, 4. 

Ni Tun, ni l'autre, neither, L. 84, 4, 5. 

N'importe, no matter, L. 94, 1. 

Negative sentence, L. 7. 

Negative, second, suppressed after 
certain Verbs, § 138, (2). 

N'est-ee pas? Is it not? L. 94, 3. 

Neuter verbs, § 43, (5). Their aux- 
iliary, L. 43 ; § 46. 

Nominative. See Subject. 

Non, no, Je dis que non, I say no, 
L. 82, 3. 

Notre, votre, our, your, etc., L. 9, 5. 
Le notre, ours, L. 9, 6. 

Noun, § 3. Proper, § 3,(3). Common, 
i* 3, (4). Collective, § 3, (5), (6), 
Compound, § 3, (7). Taken in a 
partitive sense, § 13, (10); § 78, 
(1), (2) : L. 6, 1 ; L. 29, 8. Taken 
in a general sense, § 77, (1), (2) ; 
L. 8, 2. Gender by the meaning, 
§ 5. By the termination, § 6. 
Plural of, §8; L. 11. Plural of 
compound, § 9 ; L. 59. Syntax 
of, § 76. Place of subject in 
affirmative and negative sentences, 
§ 76, (1), (2). In interjected sen- 
tences, § 76, (3). In interrogative 
sentences, § 76, (4), (5); L. 6, 4; 
L. 56, 1. Place of regimen, § 76, 
(6), (?), (8), (9); L. 56, 2, 3. Ee- 
spective places of possessor and 
object possessed, § 76, (10) ; L. 5, 
3. Of object and its substance, 
§ 76, (11); L. 5, 4; L. 59, 6. Of 
object and its use, § 76, (12), (13), 
(14); L. 59, 7. 



Nouveau, nouvel, new, L. 13, 6. 

Nu, bare, adj. § 84, (2). 

Nul, no, § 30, (7). 

Nulle part, no where, L. 25, 8. 

Number, § 1, (5). See Different 

Parts of Speech. 
Number. See Numeral Adjectives. 

Ordinal adverbs of number, § 29. 
Numeral collective nouns, § 27. 
Numerals, fractions, § 28. 

On, one, people, they, § 41, (4), (5) 

§ 113 ; L. 35, 1, 2. 
Onze, eleven, etc., article not elided 

before, L. 19, 7. 
Ordinal numbers, § 22, (3), (5). Not 

used after names of sovereigns or 

for days of the month, L. 30, 3 ; 
A § 26, (1), (3). 
Oter, to take off, to take away, L. 

32, 2. 
Ou, or, agreement of verb with nouns 

connected by, L. 84, 2, 3. 
Oui, yes, Je dis que oui, I say yes, L. 

82, 3. 

Paradigms of auxiliary verbs, § 47. 
For others, see Conjugations. 

Par ou ? which way ? L. 44, 5. 

Participle, past, § 45, 6th, (7). 
Without an auxiliary, § 66, (3); 
L. 42, 10; L. 98, 1. Accom- 
panied by etre, § 134, (2) ; L. 42, 
6 ; L. 98, 3. In reflective verbs, 
§ 135, (1), (2) ; L. 45, 2 ; L. 98, 
6; L. 99, 4. In neuter verbs, 
L. 98, 3. Accompanied by avoir, 
§ 134, (3) ; L. 42, 5 ; L. 98, 4. 
Never agrees with indirect regi- 
men, L. 42, 9. Neuter verbs with 
avoir, § 135, (6) ; L. 99, 2. Of 
unipersonal verbs, L. 45, 6 ; L. 
99, 3. Never agrees with en, § 135, 
(7); L. 42, 11, 12; L. 99, 8. Fol- 
lowed by an infinitive, § 135, (3) ; 
L. 98, 7 ; L. 99, 5. Of passive 
verbs. L. 46 ; L. 98, 2. Fait always 
invariable before an infinitive, L. 
63, 2; L. 99, 7. After le peu, 
§ 135, (8). 

present § 64 ; L. 97. 

Partitive sense, nouns taken in, L. 6, 
1;§ 13,(10); §78,(1), (2) ; L. 29,8. 

Pas, point, not, difference, § 138, (1). 
Place of, L. 1, 1, 2. Omitted when 
a second negative occurs, § 138, 
(3) ; L. 7, 4. Omitted after cer- 
tain verbs, § 138, (2). 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Passer (se), to do without, L. 39, 1. 

Passive voice, § 113, (1). 

Passive verb, § 43, (4) ; L. 46. Con- 
jugation of, § 54. Rule, § 55. Its 
participle, L. 46, 2 ; L. 98, 2. 

Past anterior, § 45, (2), 5. Use of 
§ 122 ; L. 55. 

Past definite, § 45, (2), 3. Use of 
§ 120; L. 51. Its terminations 
and irregularities, L. 52. 

Past indefinite, § 45, (2), 4. Use of, 
§ 121; L. 41. 

Past of subjunctive, § 45, (5), 3. 

Payer, to pay, its government, L. 50. 

Personne, no body, § 41, (6) ; L. 7, 7. 

Persons, § 31, (3.) 

Place, of subject, L. 56, 1, respective 
place of noun, direct and indirect 
regimen, L. 56, 1, 2, 3; § 76,(7), 
(8), (9). In interjected sentences, 
g 76, (3). Of noun in interrogative 
sentences, § 76, (4), (5) ; L. 56, 1 ; 
L. 6, 4. Of adjective, L. 8, 5; L. 
15; § 85; § 86. Of pronoun 
subject or nominative, § 98. Of 
regimen pronoun, L. 9, 1 ; L. 27 ; 
L. 28; § 101; £ 102. Place of 
en and y, % 104 ; L. 57. Of adverb, 
§ 136; L. 34 ; L. 41, 4, 5. Of verb, 
§ lit. 

Plaire (se), to take pleasure in, L. 40. 
Used unipersonally, eonmie il vous 
plaira, as you please, L. 89, 3. 

Pleuvoir, to rain, L. 33, 3. 

Pluperfect of indicative, £ 45, (2), 6. 
Use of, § 123; L. 55, 4. 

of subjunctive, § 45, (5), 

4 ; L. 75, 6. 

Plural of nouns, § 8; L. 11. Of com- 
pound nouns, §9 ; L. 59. Nouns 
having no plural, £ 10. Nouns 
having no singular, ^ 11. Plural 
of adjectives, § 17 ; L. 14, 3. Moral 
or physical properties of man, 
single in the individual, not put in 
the plural, L. 66, 5. 

Plus de, more than, before a number, 
L. 20, 7. " 

riusieurs, several, £ 30, (9); L. 18, 7. 

1'iiur, in <>n/t r to, L. 28, 8. 

Porter, to carry, to wear, L. 23, 10 ; 
L. 1 1. 6. Be porter, to be, to do, 
L. 36, 

Preposition,! '*■ Table of princi- 
pal, ?' 7-j. Regimen or govern- 
ment of, ? 130. Governing with- 
out anot her preposition, 



By means of de, § 139, 2. By d, 
% 139, 3. Rules on govermentof, 
§ 140. Repetition of, § 141. 
Observations on, § 142, 

Present tense, used in French, where 
past used in English, L. 57, 2. 

Promener (se), to walk, ride, etc., for 
pleasure or health, L. 36, 5. 

Prendre, to take, its government, L. 
50, 1. 

Prendre garde, to take care; prendre 
le deuil, to go into mourning; 
prendre la peine, to take the trou- 
ble; prendre les devants, to go be- 
fore ; prendre un parti, to take a 
resolution ; prendre du the, du 
cafe, to take tea, coffee, L. 71, 3. 

Prendre lo the, to take one's tea, 
L. 71, note. 

Pronouns, £ 31. Personal, § 32. Re- 
marks on, £ 33. Use of moi, toi, 
instead of subject or nominative 
pronouns, § 33, (8), etc. Use of re- 
flective, L. 37. Reflective pro- 
noun se, § 33, (12), (13). Soi, 
(14). Possessive pronouns, t; .; t ; 
L. 9. Remarks on, £ 35. Demon- 
strative pronouns, §36; L. 9. Re* 
marks on, § ■'!?. (V, demonstra- 
tive pronoun, £ 37, (6); £ 108; 
8 116; L. 81. Used tor he, she, 
L s'-'. Celui, celle, celui-ci, olle-ci, 
£ 20 ; L. 10. Ceci, cela, L. 10, 6. 
Relative pronouns, >i 38 ; 1. 31. 
Remarks on, Jj 3'.). En, £ .'!'.), 
(17); 8 95, (.">); £ 110; if 103, 
(li. Place of En, § 101. Y, 
I (18); § 103 (2); Placed 
7/, £ 101; § ill. Dont, I.. 31, 8. 
Syntax of pronouns, i; '.w. Place 
of subject or nominative. 
Repetition of, ?; 99 j L 87. Place 
of regimen pronouns, £ 100; 
L. 9, 1; L. 27. Respective place 
of regimen pronouns, j; Mil ; I.. 
28. Rule on this subject, £ 102. 
Repetition of regimen pronoun, 
§ 105; L. 27, 7. Hull's on pos- 
■ pronouns, § 106. On 

den strative pronouns, £ 107. 

Un relative pronoun-. 

Qi-e, rcl. prn., g 109. Xcvcr Sup- 
pressed, L. L9, 1 ; L 31, B 
interrogative, L 18, G ; L 31, 5. 

Que, coni.. never suppressed, L 19, 
1. Quo, idiomatic, L. 82, 3. 



GENEEAL INDEX. 



Quel, which, what, § 30, (10) ; § 109 ; 
L. 18, 4. 

Quelque, § 30, (12) ; § 97 ; L. 18, 
7 ; L. 88. 

Quel — que, quelque — que, govern 
the subjunctive, L. 88, 3. 

Quelque chose, something, anything, 
L. 7, 6. Require de before an 
adjective, L. 18, 3. Not used in 
negative sentences, L. 7, 6. 

Quelque part, somevjhere, anywhere, 
L. 25, 8. 

Quelqu'un, § 41, 1 ; L. 7, 6. 

Qu'est-ce que, used idiomatically for 
what ? L. 82, 2. 

Quiconque, whoever, § 41, (9). 

Quitter, to leave, abandon, etc., L. 
86, 3. 

Quoi, what, L. 31, 6. 

Qui, who, whom, used absolutely, 
§ 39, (5). 

Rappeler (se), to remember, recollect, 
L. 37, 2. 

Reading Lessons, p. 474. 

Recevoir des nouvelles, to hear from, 
L. 35, 6. 

Reflective verb, § 43, (6). Conju- 
gation of, § 56; L. 36. Often 
used in French for the English 
passive, L. 36, 2. Its auxiliary is 
etre, L. 45 ; § 46. Its participle, 
§ 135 ; L. 45 ; L. 98, 5 ; L. 99, 4. 

Regarder, to concern, L. 94, 5. 

Remercier, to thank, Je vous remer- 
cie, equivalent to a refusal, L. 89, 2. 

Resume of rules on participle past, 
L. 98 ; L. 99. 

Rien, nothing, etc., L. 7, 7 ; L. 18, 3. 

Regime, regimen or object, § 2. 
Direct, § 2, (2) ; § 42, (4) ; L. 56, 
2, 3; § 76. Indirect, § 2, (3); 
§42,(5); L. 56, 2, 3; § 76. 

Regimen or government of adjec- 
tives, § 87; L. 79. After etre 
unipersonal, § 87, (4); L. 79, 3. 
Adjective followed by de, § 88. 
By d, § 89. By different preposi- 
tions in both languages, § 90. 
Regimen of verbs, § 129 ; L. 21, 4; 
L. 50 ; L. 76, 77, 78. Verbs fol- 
lowed by no preposition, § 130 ; L. 
76, 1. By a, § 131. By de, § 132 ; 
L. 21, 4; L. 77. By a preposi- 
tion in French and by none in 
in English, L. 78, 1. 2. By a 
different prep, in both, L. 78, 3. 
Regimen of prepositions, § 139 ; 



L. 80. Important rules on regi- 
men, § 92 ; § 133 ; § 140 ; L. 80, 5. 

Regimen of prendre, to take; voler, 
to steal; acheter, to buy; deman- 
der, to ask; payer, to pay, L. 50, 1. 

Rejouir (se), to rejoice, L. 40, 5. 

Remettre, to set a dislocated bone, 
etc., L. 93, examples. 

Repetition of demonstrative adjec- 
tives, § 93. Of possessive adjec- 
tives, | 21, (4). Of articles, § 80, 
L. 6, 5; L. 86. Of subject or 
nominative pronouns, § 99; L. 
87. Of regimen or objective pro- 
nouns, § 105; L. 87. Of adverbs, 
§ 137. Of prepositions, § 141. 

Rester, used unip., to remain, to have 
left, L. 85, 4. 

Reste de, left, L. 85, 4. 

Retarder, to lose, to put back, said of 
watches, etc., L. 92, 1. 

Savoir, to know, and connaitre, to 
be acquainted with, L. 30, 5. 

Seoir, to suit, become, L. 47, 3. Used 
unipersonally, L. 49, 1. 

Servir (se), to use, L. 39, 2. Servir, 
to help at table, L. 89, 1. 

S'il vous plait, if you please, L. 89, 3. 

Si, conj., § 125, (3). Should not pre- 
cede conditional mode, L. 62, 6. 

Souvenir (se), to remember, recollect, 
L. 37, 2. 
rendered by le, L. 46, 4. 
h, parts of, § 1, (1). 

Stem of a verb, L. 23. 

Subject or nominative, § 2,(1) ; § 42, 
(2). Verb having several sub- 
jects in different persons, L. 83, 2. 
Agreement of verbs with subjects, 
L. 83, 1; L. 84; § 114; § 115. 

Subjunctive mode, § 45, 4th, (5). 
Use of, § 127 ; § 143 ; L. 72, 8, 9, 
10. Present of, § 45, (5), 1. Ter- 
minations of, L. 72. Subjunctive 
used after verbs expressing con- 
sent, command, etc., followed by 
que, L. 72, 8. After several uni- 
personal verbs followed by que, L. 
73, 1. After certain conjunctions, 
§ 143 ; L. 73, 4. After croire, espe- 
rer, etc., interrogative or negative, 
L. 74, 2. After another verb, un- 
certain, and preceded by relative 
pronoun or a superlative, L. 74, 3, 
4. Past of subjunctive, L. 72, 7. 

Substantive. See Noun. 



GENERAL INDEX. 



Superlative absolute, § 14, (11) ; L. 
17, 1. Superlative relative, § 14, 
(9); L. 17, 2. 

Syntax, £ 75. Of noun, § 76. Arti- 
cle, §77. Adjective, § 33. Pro- 
noun, § 93. Verb, § 114. Parti- 
ciple, § 134. Adverb, § 136. Prepo- 
sition, § 139. Conjunction, § 143. 

Tatre, to conceal, L. 96, 5. Se taire, 
to be silent, L. 96, 5. 

Tarder, to tarry, to long, L. 5S, 3. 

Tel, such, % 41, (12), (13). Monsieur 
un tol, Sir. such a one, £ 41, 13. 

Tenir, to hold, used in the sense of to 
keep. Tenir sa parole, to keep 
one's word, tenir la porte ouvertc, 
to keep the door open, etc., eta, L. 
90, 1. Tenir an langage, to make 
use of language, crpressioris, etc., 
L. 90, 2. Tenir, to be attached, 
etc., L 90, 3. Faire tenir, to for- 
ward, L. 90, 5. So tenir, to re- 
main, to abide by, etc., L. 90, 6. 

leasee of verbs, > 15. Formation 
of, (§ ''.l i. See Different Ti 

Terminations of regular verbs, £ 60. 
Of indicative, L. 23, 5. of imper- 
fect of indicative, L 63, 5. Of 
past definite, L 5L Of future, 
L. 60. Of conditional, L. 62. Of 
imperative, L 7o. Of subjunc- ' 
tive, L 72. Of imperfect of sub- 
junctive, L 7."j. i if infinitive, L 
21, l. i >f presenl participle, L 
23, 3. I >f past participle, L. 28, l. 

Time of day, L 20. 

Times, number of, in a given space, 
L 68, l. 

Tout, «.V. eta, § 30, (15), (10); g 97, 

(1), (."»), (6). Tout, every, I.. 26, 

i..ut, the whole, L. 26, 9. 

Tout, entirely, quite, variable by 

euphony, L. 88, 4. 

Tromper, to deceive, L. 38, 1. Se 
tromper, to be mistaken, etc., L. 
38, 2. 

TjK, uno, a, an, one, g 13, (4), (11); 
L. 6, 2. Not used before nouns 
placed in apposition, L. 30, 4. 

TJnipersonal verba, L. 33 ; g 43, (71 
Paradigm of, § 61-2. Auxfl. and 
partte ofuoipers. verbs. I.. 15, '■'. 1. 

VALOIB, to !»• inyrlh, L. 19, 3 ; to be 

better. L 49, 6. 
Venir, to come, used to indicate past 



just elapsed, L. 26, 2. Tenir 
trouver, to come to, L. 26, 3. 

Verbal adjectives, £ 65 ; L. 97. 

Verbs, Four Conjugations of, L. 21 ; 
§ 42. Subject or nominative of, 
| 42, (2). Regimen or object 
of, § 42, (3). Different sorts of 
verbs, § 43. Active, £ 43, (•-)• 
(3); L. 43. Passive. § 43, (4i; L. 
46. Neuter, § 43, (5); L. 43. 
Reflective, £ 43, (6) ; § 56 ; L. 36. 
TJnipersonal, L. 33 ; £ 43, 7 ; 
§ 61-2. Auxiliary verbs. £ 4."., 
(8). Use of, § 46; L. 43. L. 45. 
Modes and tenses of, £ 45. See 
Different Modes and Tenses, Jr- 
regular verbs, L. 24. Table of, 
ij 62. Syntax of the verb, £ 1 14. 
Agreement of the verb with sub- 
ject, § 114; L. 83; L. 84; L. 85. 
Verb after a collective noun, 
£ 115; L. 85, 1, 2. 3. Number 
of verb alter ce, £ 116. Verb 
alter several subjects in different 
persons, £ 117. Use of : 
£118. See Different Tenses. Regi- 
men or government of verbs. See 
Regimen. 

Veuillez, be so kind, L. 70, 4. 

Vocabulary to the Reading Lessons, 
p. 493. 

Voici, here is. L. .". 1.1. 

Voila, there is, L. 34, 4. 

Voler, to rob, steal, its government, 
L. 50, 1. 

Voub.ir dire, to mean, L. 32, 5, 6. 

(en), to bear a grudge, etc., 

L 94, 6. 

Vowels, L. 2. 

WHAT, rel. prn., ceque, L. 31, 4; que, 

L. 31, 5. 
, interrogative, rendered by, 

qu'est-ce que, L. 82, 2. 
"Whole (the), le tout, L. 26, 9. 
Will, used in the sense of with, ren- 
dered by vouloir, L. 60, 5. 
Words, variable, § 1, (3). Invariable, 

§ 1, (*). 
T avoir, to be there, § 61-2 ; L. 

33, 4. Used for ago, L. 41, 6. 

T avoir, followed by the i 

when the action continues, L. 

57, 2. 
Y. prn. A adv. £ 39, (18); g 103, 

(2). Place of, § 101: § 111; 

L. 21. 11. 



FASQUELL E'S 

NEW FRENCH COURSE, 

PAET FIKST. 
LEgON I. LESSON I. 



A 


a 


B 


b 


C 


c 


D 


d 


E 


e 


F 


f 


G 
H 


h 


I 


i 


J 
K 


J 

k 


L 


1 


M 


m 


N 


n 








P 

Q 

R 


P 

q 

r 


S 


s 


T 


t 


U 


u 


V 


V 


X 


X 


Y 
Z 


7 

z 



THE LETTERS. 




ibet contains 


twenty-five letters 




Old names. 

ah 


New names. 1 

ah 


Examples. 

amas. 


bay 
say 
day 
a 


be 5 
ke 6 
de° 
a 


barre. 
cas, cil. 
dard. 
effet. 


eff 


fe 


frere. 


J a y 2 

ash. 


ghe 

he 


grele. 
haie. 


e 


e 


idee. 


jee a 
kah 


j e 
ke 


jais. 
kali. 


ell 


le 


lit. 


emm 


me 


mat. 


enn 


ne 


natte. 








orge. 


pay 

ku 
err 3 


pe 
ke 

re 


pere. 

quadre. 

rat. 


ess 


se 


sole. 


tay 


te 


tort. 


u 4 


u 


urne. 


vay 
eeks 


V 

xe T 


vase, 
rixe. 


e grec 
zed 


e grec 
ze 8 


yeas. 

zele. 



W, called in French double V, might be added, as many for- 
eign words which have that letter, have been adopted into the 
French language. 

1 The new names of the French letters are seldom used. 

2 Like s in pleasure. 3 Nearly like err in error. 

* No corresponding sound in English.. B Nearly like be in globe. 

* Nearly like ke and de in cake and grade. The e of the other letters ha3 
the same sound. 7 kse. 8 se in rose. 



18 DEUXIEME LEgON. 

LEgOX H. LESSON II. 

THE VOWELS. 

Vowels are rendered long or short by certain marks placed over 
them. These marks, which are three in number, are called accents. 

The acute accent ( ' ) is placed over e, to give it a sharp or close 
sound. (See 4. e.) 

The grave accent ( v ) is placed over e, to give to that vowel a 
grave or open sound. (See 5. e.) It is also put on a, at, or to, Id, 
there, and on the u of o«, there, to distinguish those words from a. Has 
la, the, and ou, or. The grave accent, however, does not change the 
sound of a and u. 

The circumflex accent ( A ) is placed over a, e, i, o, it, to give to those 
letters a long and broad sound. 1 

1. a like a in mat, rat. Examples, face, face; bateau, boat; tableau, 

picture ; patte, paw ; malade, sick. 

2. i like a in bar, far. Ex. (ige, age ; chateau, castle ; jxite, paste; 

blame, blame; crane, cra?tium. 

3. c nearly like u in cur, and frequently silent at the end of poly- 

syllables. Ex. le, the; me, me; te, thee; que, that; meublc, 
e of furniture ; peuple, people; rime, rime. 

4. 6 like a in fife. Ex. etc, summer; amitie, friendship; /lev/, 

raised ; ep< ■ •. sword, 

5. e like e in met. Ex. p/re, father ; frt'rc, brotlw ; mete, mother ; 

olive, pupil. 
G. 6 nearly like a in (fare, /arr. Ex. rAv, dream; extreme, ex- 
tniue; crime, cream ; crt'pe, crujie ; fon't, forest. 

7. i nearly like ee in reed, crcecZ. Ex. nw'di, mid-dag ; id, here; 

Kni, finished ; credit, credit. 

8. i like ee in eel, feel. Ex. fie, island; gtte, lodging/ e*pitre, ejpi 

dime, ////c ; abime, a&y.s.s. 

9. o between the o in roi and that in robe, or that of nor and ?;o. 

Ex. robe, robe; globe, globe; cacbot, dungeon; haricot, / 

10. 6 like o in 6o«e, wo. Ex. depot, dejwsit ; preVot, jirovost ; b&entot, 

soon; suppot, supporter. 

11. u. The exact French sound of this letter is not found in Eng- 

lish. The position of the lips in whistling, is very nearly the 

1 This accent indicates the suppression of the letter .« after tlio vowel on 
which it is placed; fete, tite, bite, were formerly written, fiwte, 
the s was not sounded, but gave to the preceding vowel that prolonged 
sound, now represented by the eircumllex accent. 



THE DIPHTHONGS, &C. 19 

position which they should have in emitting the French u. Ex. 
itrne, urn; hme, moon; but, aim; tvibu, tribe ;tribut, tribute; 
elu, elected. 

12. u is the u with a prolonged sound. Ex. mure, mulberry ; du, 

due; cvu, growth; bruler, to burn. 

13. y. See 29, y, page 20. 

Exercise 1. 

1. (a) Table, table; fable, fable ; chat, cat; eclat, splendor; arbre, 

tree; tard, late; balle, ball. 

2. (a,) ame, soul ; blame, blame ; batir, to build : pate, paste ; age, 

age ; mat, mast. 

3. (e) me, me; de, of; que, that ; elle, sAe; malle, mail ; parle, 

speak; fourche, fork ; salle, AaZ/. 

4. (e) pre, meadow ; alle, <jrone / donne, Rivera / passe, passee, past ; 

eleve, raised ; armee, army. 

5. (e) tres, very; apres, after ; achete, buy; mere, mother; espere, 

hope ; leve, raise ; chere, fare ; chevre, goat. 

6. (e) meme, same; careme, Lent; arret, arrest; tempete, tempest; 

tete, head ; bete, fceastf. 

7. (i) lit, Z>e<2; dit, said/ dire, to say ; lire, to ?-eacZ; lime,/Zfe; cire, 

wax; rite, rife. 

8. (i) diner, to dine ; He, isle; dime, tithe; abime, abyss; epitre, 

epistle; gite, lodging. 

9. (o) mot, word; cachot, dungeon ; repos, rest; trot, trot; globe, 

globe ; carrosse, coach. 

10. (6) tot, soon; plutot, rather ; roti, roast meat; depot, deposit; 

prevot, provost. 

11. (u) bu, drank; cru, believed; du, o/ #ie; elu, elected; menu, 

minute ; prevu, foreseen ; ecu, crown. 

12. (u) chute, /aZZ ; brulot, fireship ; mur, rzpe ; dument, duly ; il 

fut, he might be ; nous fumes, we were. 

THE DIPHTHONGS AND COMBINED VOWELS. 

14. A vowel surmounted by a diaeresis (•■) cannot form a diph- 
thong with another vowel ; it is pronounced separately. Ex., 
hair — Exception : e at the end of a few words, such as cigue, 
hemlock, is silent, the u being pronounced like u. 

15. E accented (e) and followed by a vowel, is pronounced separ- 
ately. Ex. obeir, to obey ; geant, giant. 

16. ai, ei, preceding a liquid I (see Consonants, 13) do not form a 



20 DETJXlfiME LEgON, 

diphthong; a is then pronounced as in mat, and case;' in 
pair. The i seems merely to indicate the liquid sound of the 
I. Ex. penile, straw ; oredle, ear. 

17. ai is like a in/ate. Ex. }ai, Ihave; je fera/ ; I will make; bote, 

hay ; mai, May ; bakn", broom. 

When the diphthong ai is followed by a final s, d, or i, it 
assumes a broader sound, resembling the French c, or e in the 
English word met. Ex. j'aven's, I had; je ferais, I should 
make ; lai't, mz'/k ; laid, i^/fy. 

18. au nearly like oh! in English. Ex. taux, rate ; chaud, warm. 

E preceding au is blended with that diphthong without chang- 
ing its sound. Ex. beau, handsome ; chateau, castle ; tableau, 
picture; eau, water. 

19. ei nearly like a in fate. Ex. beige, serge; neige, snow ; setgle, 

rye; reme, queen; pezgne, comb. 

20. cu approaches the sound of u in muff. Ex. jew, play ; liet/., p/acc; 

pew, 7u7/e/ pettr, fear; chalear, heat. Exceptions, in c u. had ; 
j'ews, Sec, I had; j'eusse, etc., J might have ; cu is pronounced 
like u alone. 

21. ia nearly like ia in medial. Ex. il ha, he bound; il or/a, he cried ; 

dialogue, dialogue. 

22. ic like ec in tee. Ex. il be, 7*c binds ; il (Studt'e, 7ie studies ; harpM, 

harpy ; line, the soft part of bread. 

23. oi nearly like wa in was. Ex. cro/x, cross; il bo/t, 7*e drinks ; 

Toi, king. 
21. ou like oo in cool. Ex. doux, so/if / coup, blow; nous, we / xous, 
you ; cou, neck. 

II sah<a, he saluted ; il remua, he moved; il con- 
tribua, he contributed. 



2G. ue / sr = ' . « . II salue, Ae salutes ; il rcmue, Tie moves : il eon- 
~ g tribue, 7ie contributes. 

2 produ/t, produce ; condu/te, con Juctf ; \ui t him; 
bruit, noise; il re"dw/<, Ac reduces. 

28. uo / •* \ (3 duo, due*. 

29. y when initial, when coming between two consonants, or when 

forming a syllable of itself, has the sound of the French i. 
Ex. style, style ; type, type; yeux, eues; Fprcs, Ypres ; y, there. 
Between two vowels y has the power of two t"s, one of which 
forms a diphthong with the preceding, and the other with the 
following vowel; the syllabic division taking place between 
the t's. Ex. moyen, means ; essayer, to try ; nettoyer, to clean; 
citoyen, citizen ; abbaye, abbey ; these words are pronounced 



THE NASAL SOUNDS. 21 

as if they were written moi-ien, essai-ier, nettoi-ier, citoi-ien, 
abbaiAe. The words, pays, country ; paysage, landscape ; pay- 
san, peasant, are pronounced pi-is, pe-isage, pt-isan. 

Exercise 2. 

17. (ai) je donnai, I gave ; je parlerai, I will speak; j'allai, I went ; 

je cherchai, I sought ; je menai, lied ; j'irai, I will go. 
(ais) je donnais, I was giving ; je parlerais, I would speak; j'allais, 
I was going ; je cherchais, I was seeking ; je menais, / was 
leading ; j'irais, I would go. 

18. (au, eau) inaux, evils ; chameau, camel; chevaux, horses; beau, 

handsome ; nouveau, new ; troupeau, flock. 

19. (ei) neige, snow ; veine, vein; reine, queen; Seine, Seine; je 

peigne, I comb ; sein, bosom. 

20. (eu) peu, little; peur, fear; leur, their; il meurt, he dies; soeur, 

sister; ceuf, egg ; lueur, light. 
(eu) Hke v.. J'eus, / had ; tu eus, thou hadst ; il eut, he had ; 
eu, had. 

21. (ia) liant, binding; il Ha, he bound; partial, partial ; il cria, ho 

cried ; il nia, he denied ; il pria, he prayed. 

22. (ie) garantie, guarantee; il prie, 7*e prays ; il ]ie } he binds ; ilrie, 

Ae 7?ia?/ laugh ; il nie, Ae denies. 

23. (oi) loi, ?aw; moi, me; il voit, Ae sees; il boit, Ae drinks; roi, 

fan^ / droit, riyA^ / il croit, he believes. 

24. (ou) bout, end ; il coud, he sews ; il moud, he grinds ; coupe, cup; 

loup, wolf; coup, blow; croute, crust. 

25. (ua) nuage, cloud; nuance, shade; il salua, he saluted; il remua, 

he moved ; il contribua, he contributed. 

26. (ue) nue, cloud; lue, f. read; recue, f. received; il salue, he 

salutes ; il remue, he moves. 

27. (ui) lui, him ; luisant, shining ; cuire, to bake ; cuit, baked ; nuire, 

to injure ; produire, to produce. 

29. (y) thyrse, thyrsus ; type, /^pe ; style, sft/Ze ; yeux, eyes ; Tvetot, 

Yvetot ; payer, to pay ; envoyer, to send ; abbaye, abbey ; 
essayer, to try ; pays, country ; paysage, landscape ; paysan, 
peasant. 

THE NASAL SOUNDS. 

30. The combination of the vowels with the consonant m or n 
produces what the French call le son nasal, the nasal sound. 

31. When the consonant m or n is doubled, or is immediately fol- 



22 



DEUXI^ME LE5ON. 



32. am 

an 

ean 

cm 

en 



30, 



pronounced 

nearly 
like an in 
pant, want. 



30 



lowed by a vowel, 1 the nasal sound does not take place. 
Ex. innocent, innocent; immobile, immovable ; inutile, useless ; 
inoui, unheard of. The syllables in and im in the words in- 
nocent and immobile, are pronounced nearly as in English ; 
the syllabic division 2 of i-nu-ti-le and i-nou-i, will explain 
the reason of the absence of the nasal sound in those words, 
ample, ample; chambre, chamber ; lampe, 
Tamp. 
ro an, year ; banc, bench; dans, in; man* 
*cu teau, cloak. 

a membre, limb ; emporter, to carry away ; 
3 trembler, to tremble. 

en, in; dent, tooth; prendre, to take; 
rendre, to render. 

33. en final is sometimes pronounced like en in then. Ex. Eden, Eden. 

34. en in the third person plural of verbs is silent. Ex. ils lL?e>it, 
ils portent, ils donnent; pronounce ils liz, ils port, ils donn. 

en after i at the end of a word, is pronounced nearly like an in 

Bank, crank. Ex. bien, well; lie??, tie; rien, nothing. 
im "1 somewhat f timbre, stamp; impossible, impossible; im- 
portant, important. 
\in, flax; p?'n, pine; cr?*n, horse-hair ; \in, 

wine. 
tombe, tomb ; comble, height; sombre, dark ; 

tomber, to fall 
mon, my ; ton, thy ; son, his; bond, bound; 

pontj bridge. 
bumble, humble; parfwm, perfume. 
un, one; chacun, each one; importtsn, im- 
portunate. 

Exercise 3. 
Innocent, innocent; inutile, useless; diner, dinner; immortel, 

immortal; une, one ; lune, moon: dunes, downs. 
32. am ambre, amber ; chambre, chamber; A. lam, Adam; ramper, to 
■ ; ample, ample; lampe, lamp. 
an tante, aunt; manteau, cloak; plan, plan; plancher, floor; 

rang, rank ; sang, blood ; enfant, child. 

1 The wonls ennui, ennuyer, emmener, enivrer, enorgueillir, fori, 
tiona to this rule The first syllable of ennui, ennuyer, emmener, is nasal; 
7 r are pronounced en-nwrer, en-01 : 
3 For the division of words into syllables, see Reading Lessons, page 474. 



38. nm 



:;i. 



Uke an in I 
crank, 
sank. 
pronounced 
nearly like 
on in song, 

wrong. 
nearly like 
un in hunt- 
in'', wrung. 



THE CONSONANTS. 23 

em remplir, to fill ; temple, temple; temps, weather; assemblee, 
assembly ; trembler, to tremble ; membre, limb. 

en sentir, to feel; tente, tent; pente, declivity ; je rends, I ren- 
der; je prends, I take ; je sens, I feel. 

33. en amen, amen; specimen, specimen. 

34. en ils donnent, they give; ils parlent, they speak; ils ecrivent, 

they write ; ils cherchent, they seek. 

35. ien le mien, mine ; le tien, thine ; le sien, his. 

36. im simple, simple; timbre, stamp; daim, deer; faim, hunger; 

imposteur, impostor ; important, important. 
in fin, fine; pain, bread ; demain, to morrow ; crin, horse-hair ; 
vin, wine ; bain, bath ; teindre, to dye ; peindre, to paint. 

37. om sombre, dark; nom, name; ombre, shadow ; tombe, tomb ; 

nombre, number ; comble, height. 
on pont, bridge ; honte, shame ; montre, watch ; raison, reason ; 
maison, house; fondre, to melt; non, no. 

38. um humble, humble ; parfum, perfume ; humblement, humbly. 
un lundi, Monday ; brun, brown ; alun, alum ; emprunter, to 

borrow; importun, importunate; un, one. 



LEQON in. ' LESSON HI. 

THE CONSONANTS. 

1. At the beginning of words or syllables, most consonants are 
sounded as in English. 

2. A final consonant is generally silent. The letters c, f, 1, r, 
however, when final, are generally pronounced. 

3. The final consonant of a word is generally carried to the next 
word, when that word begins with a vowel or an h mute. 
(See 10, h.) 

4. For illustrations and exceptions, see the several letters. 

5. B initial is pronounced as in English. In the middle of words, 

and at the end of proper names, b is sounded. Ex. a&diquer, 
to abdicate, Job, Cale&, &c. B is also pronounced in radoufr, 
refitting of a vessel, and rum&, (pronounced romb,) point of the 
compass. It is silent in plom6, lead ; aplom6, perpendicularity. 
"When b is doubled, only one of these letters is pronounced. 
Ex. abbe, abbot ; safr&at. 

6. C has its proper sound (k) before a, o, u, 1, n, r. Ex. cabane, 

cottage; cou, neck; ecu, crown; enclin, inclined; Cneius, 
Cneius ; croire, to believe. 
c before e and i, and with the cedilla (c) before a, o, or u, has 



24 TJK OI SIE ME LEgOK. 

the sound of s ; ceci, this ; cendres, ashes ; facade, front ; fa- 

rou, fashion ; ret;u, received. 
ch is pronounced like sh in she. Ex. char, car; c/iarbon, coal; 

c7iangement, change. 
c in the words vermicelle and violoncelle, is pronounced like s7i. 
ch is pronounced like k, in a few words derived from the Greek. 

Ex. chaos, anacAronisme, c/ironique, patriarc/iat, orc/iestre, &c 

In patriarcAe, arc/ieveque, Acheron, ch is pronounced like sh. 

In MicAel-Ange, Michael Angelo, it sounds like k. 
c final is sounded, except when preceded by n. Ex. avcc, with ; 

arc, bow; sac, bag ; sue, juice; Turc, Turk. 

Exceptions : it is silent in accroc, rent ; broc, jug ; clerc, clerk ; 

estomac, stomach; lacs, snares ; marc, mark ; purr. pork ; tabac, 

tobacco — ch is silent in almanac7i. 
c is pronounced like g in second, second, and fecond, fruitful, 

and their derivatives, 
c final is seldom pronounced upon the next word. 

7. D has the same sound as in English. Ex. (fame, lady. D is pro- 

nounced in the middle of words. Ex. adverbe, adverb ; ad- 
mirer, to admire. 

d is silent at the end of words, except in proper names : as in 
iJavid, David ; in the word sud, soutli, and i:i a few foreign 
words, as le Cid, the Cid ; le Talmud, the Talmud, &e. 

d final, coming before a word commencing with a vowel or an 
h mute, assumes the sound of t: grand liomme, is pronounced 
gran tomme ; coud-il, does he sew? vend-il, docs he sell .' are 
pronounced cou-til, ven-til. 

8. F is pronounced as in English. Ex. /ie'vre, fever //iacre, hack- 

ney-coach. 
f final is generally sounded. Ex. soi/ thirst; chef, chief ; sui/, 
tallow. 

Exceptions; cle/, key ; cer/ stag ; chef-d'oeuvre, master-^ 
ceu/-dur, hard-egg; oeu/-frais, fresh egg; bcea/-frais, fresh 
beef ; bceu/-sale, salt beef. In the plural of the words ecu/ and 
bceu/ / is always silent. 

Tin; f of neu/ nine, is silent before a consonant, and sounds 
like o before a vowel or h mute; neu/livres, pronounce «<"■ 
Urns; neu/ homines, neu/ enfant-, pronounce neu-vommes, 
neu-venfants. 

9. G- is always hard (that is like g in game) before a, o, u. Ex. 

f/arde, guard ' ; <70nd, hinge; ai'/u, acute. 
g before e and i has always the soft sound, (that of s- in pleasure). 
Ex. yerbe, sheaf; <jendre, son-in-law ; </ibier, game; grilel 



THE CONSONANT! 



25 



gua, 



gn 



10. H 



guo, gue, gui, are pronounced gha, gho, ghe, ghi, i. e., the u is 

silent. Ex. il \egua, he bequeathed ; leguons, let us bequeath ; 

guerre, war ; guit&re, guitar. 

Exceptions: In aiguille, needle, Guise, &c, the two vowels 

are sounded. The ue of gue final is mute, unless a diseresis 

is on the e, as in cigu'e, hemlock. 

is pronounced like ni in union. Ex. regne, reign; peigne, 

comb ; daigjier, to deign ; sai^ner, to bleed. 

Exceptions : 6rmde, Pro^ne, stagnant, ignee, &c. 

final takes the sound of k before a vowel or an h mute : — 

sang humain, human blood, is pronounced san kumain. 

is mute or aspirate. H mute (having of itself no sound) is, 

when preceded by a word subject to elision, (§ 146) treated 

as a vowel. H aspirate is always initial, the breathing or 

aspiration is very slight, but not entirely absent, as is advanced 

by some grammarians. 

As it is important, on account of elision and of the pro- 
nunciation of the last consonant of a word preceding h, to 
know when it is aspirate or not, we will give a list of the 
words which commence with h aspirate, omitting however 
the derivatives and a few words seldom used. 



Hableur 


Harangue 


Have 


Horde 


Hache 


Haras 


Havre 


Hors 


Hagard 


Harasser 


Havresao 


Hotte 


Haie 


Harceler 


Heler 


Hottentot 


Haillons 


Hardes 


Hennir 


Houblon 


Haine 


Hardi 


Henri 


Houille 


Hair 


Harem 


Heraut 


Houlette 


Haire 


Hareng 


Herisson 


Houppe 


Haler 


Hargneux 


Herisser 


Houri 


Halage 


Haricot 


Heron 


Houppelande 


Hale 


Haridelle 


Heros 1 


Housse 


Halle 


Harnais 


Hetre 


Houx 


Hallebarde 


Harpe 


Herse 


Huche 


Hallier 


Harpie 


Heurter 


Huee 


Halte 


Harpon 


Hibou 


Huguenot 


Hamac 


Hasard 


Hideux 


Huit 


Hameau 


Hater 


Hierarchie 


Humer 


Hanche 


Hausser 


Hoquet 


Huppo 


Hangar 


Haut 


Hollande* 


Hure 


Hanneton 


Hautbois 


Homard 


Hurler 


Hanter 


Hautesse 


Honte 


Hussard 



1 Tho h of the other words having the same derivation, heroine, hero- 
isme, heroique, &c, is not aspirated. 

2 We say, however, du fromage d'Hollande, Dutch cheese ; de la toile 
d'llollande, Dutch linen. 



£3 TBOISIfcME LEgON. 

1 1. J is pronounced like s in pleasure. Ex. jour, day ; jamais, never. 
K sounds like k in English. Ex. &an, khan; Mogramme, a 

French weight. 

12. L in the combinations il, ill, not initial, but in the middle or at 

the end of words, has the liquid sound found in the English 
word brilliant Many of the French, however, give to the 
liquid I the sound of ye, in the English word eye. This pro- 
nunciation is now so common, that it is no longer deemed 
wrong. Ex. paiTZe, straw; HUe, daughter; batZ, lease; 
travai7, labor. 

Exceptions: ft7, thread; BresiZ, Brazil; Ni7, Nile; mil, mille, 
thousand ; civi7, civil ; proft7, profile; xille, town, and its deriv- 
atives; tranquiTZe, tranqm7Zite, &c, quiet, quietness, dtc. 
11 in Sully has the liquid sound. 

is silent in bariZ, barrel; cheniZ, kennel ; coutiZ, ticking; fusiZ, 
gun; fiZs, son; fourniZ, bakehouse; griZ, gridiron ; outiZ, tool; 
persiZ, parsley ; pouZs, pulse ; sourciZ, eyebrow; genti/shommes, 
noblemen. 

13. M i initial are pronounced as in English. For these letters in 

14. N ) combination with the vowels, see Nasal Sounds, (page 21). 

Final consonants after in and n are generally silent. Ex. 

temps, weather ; jo romps, jo prends, / break, J take, 
m is silent in condamncr, to condenui ; automne, autumn. 
n final, and not belonging to a noun, is carried to the next won], 

when this word begins with a vowel or an h mute, if the two 

words are closely connected. Ex. un bo» enfant, a good child ; 

mo// ami, mi/ friend ; pronounce bon nenjunt, mmi mimi. 

15. P is generally sounded as in English. P is however silent in 

baptemc, baptism; baptiser, to baptize; eheptel, chattel ; 

conipte, account; dompter, to subdue; exempt, exempt; 

sept, seven ; scptieme, seventh, 
p final is silent. Ex coup, blow ; drap, cloth. 

Exceptions : cap, cape ; and proper names generally, 
p final is not carried to the next word. 

16. Q qu is pronounced like k. Ex. question, question ; qui, vim; 

(/"alite, qualm/ : uc final is silent after q. Ex. pratigtte, prae- 
tice. 

Exception-: qu is pronounced as in English in agttatique, 
egruateur, 6qttesA i, equation, in-guarto, ligue'ner, 

5!<adra^e : naiie, quadruple, guadrupede, Quinte-Curoe, (/><in- 
til.cn, quintuple, juirinaL 
q final is sounded. It is however mute in co<?-d'Inde, turkey ; 



THE CONSONANTS. 27 

and in cinq, five, when followed by a word commencing with 
a consonant. 

17. R. The French r is pronounced with greater force than the 

English. 
it is pronounced like r. Ex. arriver, to arrive; arranger, to 
arrange. 

Exceptions : in the future and conditional of acquerir, to ac- 
quire; courir, to run, and mourir, to die, the two r's are dis- 
tinctly sounded. Ex. je courrai, je mourrai, je courrais, je 
mourrais, j'acquerrais, &c. 

r final is pronounced when preceded by a, i, o, u. Ex. car, 
for ; finir, to finish ; cor, hunting horn ; pur, pure. 
Exception : monsieur, air. 

r preceded by e is generally sounded in monosyllables. Ex. 
fer, iron ; cher, dear. 

r preceded by e is silent in words of more than one syllable. 
Ex. parler, to speak ; manger, to eat ; chercher, to seek. 
Exceptions : r is sounded in amer, belveder, cancer, cuiller, 
ether, enfer, hiver, Jupiter, Lucifer, magister. 
The final r of an infinitive is not often carried to the next 
word in conversation. In serious reading it is generally car- 
ried to the next word. 

18. S has generally the same sound as in English. 

s between two vowels is pronounced as in the English words 
rose, prose. Ex. base, base ; vase, vase ; pause, pause ; chose, 
thing. 

Exceptions : s in words composed of a particle, or an adjec- 
tive, and a word commencing with s, preserves the hissing 
sound. Ex. parasol, parasol; vraisemblable, likely; desue- 
tude, desuetude ; preseance, precedence, &c. 

s is pronounced in Christ, but not in Jesus-Christ, 
sc is pronounced as in English. Ex. scandale, scandal ; science, 
science. 
sch is pronounced like sh, in the words schisme, sc7usmatique, 
sc7iiste, sc7ierif, sc7ieik, sc7ielling — It is pronounced sk in 
sc7ze"me. 

s final is generally silent. Ex. pas, step ; mais, hut ; jus, juice. 
Exceptions : s is pronounced in aloes, aloes ; as, ace ; atlas, 
atlas ; blocus, blockade ; cens, census ; chorus, chorus ; en sus, 
besides; gratis," gratis ; lapis, lapis; laps, lapse; iris, iris; 
mais, maize ; mars, March ; mceurs, manners ; ours, bear ; 
prospectus, prospectus ; Rheims, Rubens; vis, screio ; and in 



28 TEOISIEHE LEgON. 

Latin and Greek names ending in s — Delos, Romulus, &c. 
In fils, son, s may be pronounced or not. 
s is carried to the next word when the word commences with 
a vowel or an h mute ; it lias then the sound of z — bons 
amis, good friends, is pronounced bon zami. In conversa- 
tion the final s of verbs is not always carried to the next 
word. 

19. T is pronounced like t in table. Ex. tard, late; tort, wrong. 

t has the sound of the English c in cedar, in the combinations 
tied, tiel, Hon, final or in the middle of words. The French 
words in which the above combinations occur, are very much 
like the English words which have the same meaning, and in 
which ti has the sound of sh. Ex. partial, partial ; esscnticl, 
essentiel ; observation, observation. Words in which those 
terminations are preceded by s or x, are excepted ; the t 
therefore in bastion, question, mixtion, &c, retains its proper 
sound. 

t has the sound of c in cedar, in words ending in atie, derived 
from the Greek, and having in English the termination eg, 
aristocratie, democratic, &c; also in initier to initiate; pa- 
tience, patience ; ineptie, absurdity; minutie, minutia; Dal- 
matic, Dabnatia ; Dalmatien, Dalmatian ; Douiineu, Gratien, 
Egyptien, &c. 

In other words ending in tie, and in those ending in tie and 
tier, the t lias its proper sound. I . guarantee; 

moiiiG, half ; amitii, friendship ; chantier, dock-yard ; metier, 
trade. 

th sounds always like t alone. Ex. the, tea ; th§se, fl V 

t final is generally silent. Ex. hut, aim ; mot, word; wort, fate. 
Exceptions: / is sounded m brut, chut, correct, dot, dire</, 
deficit, fa/, exact, net, pr&erit, suspect, strict, Chnst, but not 
in Jesus-Christ. StC 

t in sept, lmit, vingt, is sounded except when it comes befuro 
a consonant. 

t is seldom carried to the next word ; t in el (and) is always 
silent. 

20. V is a little softer than the English v. Ex. fiande, meat ; voile, 

21. "W which is found only in foreign words, is pronounced like v. 

Ex, (Fbrtemberg, HPestphalie. In a few other words it has 
the pronunciation of the English w. Ex. whig, IfAwt, 

22. X initial, whieh in French is only found in a few words, is pro- 



THE CONSONANTS. 29 

nounced like gz. Ex. xylon, cotton-plant; Xavier, Xeno- 

phon, Xante, Xantippe. 

Xerxes is pronounced gzercess. 
x following an initial e, and preceding a vowel or an h, is also 

sounded like gz. Ex. exil, exile ; examiner, to examine ; ex- 

hiber, to exhibit. 
x not following an initial e, but coming between two vowels, 

sounds like ks. Ex. axe, axis; luxe, luxury; Alexandre, 

Alexander ; maxime, maxim. ; sexe, sex. 
x sounds like ss in the following words: six, six; dice, ten; 

soixante, sixty ; Bruxelles, Brussels ; Auxonne, Auxerre, Aix- 

en-Provence. 

In sixieme, dixieme, deuxiSme, dix-sept, dix-huit, dix-neuf, 

it is pronounced like z in zone. 
x final is generally silent. Ex. prix, -price ; croix, cross ; voix, 

voice. 

Exceptions : x is sounded like ks at the end of names of 

Greek and Latin origin. Ex. Ajax, Styx, etc. In Aix-la- 

Chapelle it has the same sound. 

The x of deux, six, dix, coming before a consonant is silent, 

except in the cases mentioned above ; i e., in dix-sept, dix- 
huit, dix-neuf. 
x when carried to the next word, sounds like z. 
23. Z sounds as in the English words zinc, zone. Ex. zele, zeal ; 

zenith, zenith. 
z final is generally silent. Ex. nez, nose; chez, with, cfcc, 

allez, go. 

Exceptions : gaz, gas. In Metz, Suez, &c, it sounds like ss. 
•z final is generally carried to the next word when that word 

commences with a vowel, or an h mute. 

Exercise 4. 

5. (b) baume, balsam ; blessure, wound ; bran, brown ; absolution, 

absolution; abstrait, abstract; abbaye, abbey ; Jacob, Jacob. 

6. (c) cacher, to conceal; coin, corner; decuple, decuple; cire, 

wax; cinq, five; chercher, to seek ; je cache, I conceal ; pa- 
triarche, patriarch; patriarchat, patriarchate; chambre, 
chamber; arche, arch; changer, to change; orchestre, 
orchestra; charbon, coal; sac, bag; sue, juice; clerc, clerk; 
banc, bench; &a,nc, flank ; second, second ; fecond, fruitful; 
facon, fashion ; recu, received. 

7. (d) daim, deer; don, gift; admirer, to admire; bord, border; 



30 TEOISIEME LE5"ON. 

nord, north ; sud, south ; Obed, Obed ; Talmud, Talmud ; 
grand age, advanced age ; renjd-il, does he render f prend-il, 
does he take ? 

8. (f) foin, hay ; faim, hunger ; froid, cold ; bref, short ; soif, thirst ; 

suif, tallow ; clef, key ; chef, chief; chef-d'eeuvre, master- 
piece ; ceuf, egg ; ceufs, eggs ; ceuf frais, fresh egg ; bceuf, ox, 
beef; bceufs, oxen ; neuf maisons, nine houses ; neuf chevaux, 
nine horses; neuf amis, nine friends. 

9. £g) gager, to let ; gosier, throat ; gibier, game ; guide, gro'de ; 

hgue, league; il ligua, Tie leagued ; nous liguons, we league ; 
aiguille, needle; aiguillon, goad; eigne, hemlock ; digne, 
worthy ; regne, reign ; Eipagne, Spain ; Pologne, Poland ; 
brugnon, nectarine ; soignant, talcing care; joignant, joining ; 
stagnant, stagnant ; rang honorable, honorable rank. 

10. (h) hate, haste; honte, shame; haut, high; herbe, herbage; 

almanach, almanac. 

11. (j) jujube, jujube; jeune, young ; juger, to judge; jurer, to 

swear ; jonc, rush; joindre, to join ; dejeuner, to breakfast; 
Juif, Jew ; jeu, play. 

12. (1) lame, blade; loi, law; illegal, illegal; illicite, unlaioful ; 

paille, strata ; soleil, sun ; pareil, similar ; bail, lease ; railler, 

to rail; souiller, to soil; caille, quail ; canaille, rabble; ville, 

town; village, village; mille, mile, thousand; peril, pm7; 

pointilleux, punctilious ; baril, barrel; fusil, y?m ; Lcntil- 

homme, nobleman; gentilsbommes, noblemen; bouteille, 

bottle. 
13.(mn)mon, my; marge, margin; nom, name; champ, field; 

moine, monk; prompt, quick; condamner, to condemn; 

faim, hunger ; son argent, his money ; bon appetit, good 

appetite ; lien etroit, close connection. 
15. (p) partir, to go away ; coup, blow ; temps, tueathcr ; drap, 

cloth; sept, seven; baptume, baptism; cap, cape ; Ali-p, 

Aleppo. 
1G. (q) querir, to fetch ; quitter, to have; musique, music; logique, 

logic; quarante, forty; quoi, what; aquatique, aquatic; 

Quintilien, Qtiintilian ; cinq, five; cinq livres, five books. 
17. (r) ranger, to arrange ; errer, to err ; arriver, to arrive : verser, 

to pour ; je courrai, I will run ; jo courais, I teas running ; 

jouir, to enjoy ; car, for; plaisir, pleasure; amer, bitter ; 

parler, to speak; changer, to change; fer, iron; hivcr, 

wmfer. 
IS. (f) silence, silence; soin, care; sans, without; base, ftase; rose, 



THE ARTICLE. 31 

rose; chose, thing; observer, to observe; rasoir, razor; 
parasol, parasol; science, science; schisme, schism; scie, 
saw ; scheme, scheme ; gras, fat ; pas, step ; lambris, wain- 
scot; Barras, Barras ; Eomulus, Samoa; vous avez, you 
have ; nous aimons, we love. 

19. (t) tiers, third; tiare, tiara; tort, wrong ; 'portion, portion; 

sanction, sanction ; essential, essential ; partiality, partiality , 
section, section; question, question; bastion, bastion; obser- 
vation, observation; minutie, minutia; democratie, demo- 
cracy ; amitie, friendship ; initiation, initiation ; mot, word ; 
lot, lot ; sept, seven ; sept livres, seven books ; et, and ; vingt 
livres, twenty boohs. 

20. (v) voir, to see ; va, go ; leve, raise; lever, to raise; visage,' face ; 

vive, f. lively. 

21. (w) Westphalie, Weimar, Wurms, Wurtemberg. 

22. (x) xylon, cotton plant ; Xenophon ; exiler, to exile ; excuser, to 

excuse; luxe, luxury; Alexandre, Alexander; maxime, 
maxim ; soixantidme, sixtieth ; six, six ; sixieme, sixth ; six 
livres, six books ; Bruxelles, Brussels ; Aix-la-Chapelle ; dix, 
ten; Phenix; Ajax; deux homme.3, two men; dix amis, 
ten friends. 

23. (z) zele, zeal; zone, zone; zoologie, zoology; vous Hsez, you 

read ; nez, nose ; Metz ; allez-y, go there ; venez ici, come 

here. 

HpW° For the division of words into syllables, see Reading 

Lessons, page 474. 



LEgON IV. LESSON IV. 

THE ARTICLE LE, LA. — GEITOER. 

1. In French the article [§ 13, (2.)] has, in the singular, a distinct 
form for each gender. 

Le fils, the son; La fille, the daughter, tJie girl; 

Le frcre, the brother; La sceur, the sister. 

2. Before a word commencing with a vowel or an h mute, [L. 3, 10,] 
the article is the same for both genders. [§ 13, (7.)] Ex.' 

L'ai'eul, the grandfather / L'ai'eule, the grandmother ; 

L'hote, the landlord; L'h6tesse, the landlady. 



22 



QUATEIEME LEyON. 



3. There are in French only two genders, the masculine and the 
feminine. [§ 4.] Every noun, whether denoting an animate or an 
inanimate object, belongs to one of these two genders. 



Masc. L'homme, the man ; 
Le livre, the hook; 
L'arbre. the tree ; 



Fem. 



La femme, the woman , 
La table, the table; 
La plume, the pen ; 



Le lion, the lion ; 
Le papier, the paper} 

Le bois, the wood. 

La lionne, /he lioness ; 
La leuille/i 1 -//'-' leaf; 
La pone, Mc door. 



4. Avoir, to iia rr, in the Present of tiie Indicative. 



Affirmatively. 

In as, [§33.(1.) (2.)] 

11 a, 
Kile a, 

TODS, 

I -,.■,', 

Ha oat, in. 
Elles unt, C 



I hare ; 

He has; 

She has; 

■ 

They have ; 
They have; 



Interrogatively. 



Ai-jo? 
As-tu ? 
A-t-il ? 
A-t-elle? 

-IHlllS? 

Avez-vous? 
Ont-ils? m. 
Ont-cllos? f. 



Hare I? 
JJast thou? 

lias sht t 



6. The c of the pronoun jc is elided, when that pronoun comes 
before a vowel or an /< mute. [§ 1 MS.J 

G. In interrogative sentences, when the ihird person singular of a 
verb ends with a vowel, and is immediately followed by a pronoun, a 
t, called euphonic, must be placed between the verb and the pronoun. 

A-t-il? Has he? A-t-ello? Has she? 

Resume of Examples. 

re a la viand / lave the 

oafe, etj'ai I'eau. 
L'homme a le paw, l'eniant a lo sel, i is the bread, the cltihl has 

el DO IS avons 1 • poivre. the salt, and wc ha. 



Avoine, f. oats; 

r. in. butcher; 
Boulanger, in. baker; 

Eau, 1". 

Karine, f. 

Pille, C pir^ daughter; 



Exercise 5. 

Frdra, m. 6r 9 
Livre, m. fooft; 

Madame, madam • 

Mademoiselle, mtss; 
Meunier, m. miller; 
Monsieur, Mr 

Oui, yes ; 
Pain. in. bread: 



riuino, f.pen; 
Qui; </•/</> ; 
Sel, in. 
Seuloment, wity; 

: /aWe; 
Tln : , m 

Yin. in. 






1. Qui a le pain? 2. Le boulanger a le pain. 3. A-t-il la fa 
Oui, monsieur; il a la farine. 5. Avons-nous la viande V G. Oui, a 



CONTEACTION OF THE ARTICLE. 33 

vous avez la viande et le pain. 7. Le meunier a la farine. 8. Le 
boulanger a la farine et le ble. 9. Avons-nous le livre et la plume ? 
10. Oui, mademoiselle; vous avez le livre et la plume. 11. Leboucher 
a la viande. 12. Le meunier a la viande, et j 'ai le cafe. 13. Avez- 
vous l'eau et le sel ? 14. Oui, monsieur ; nous avons l'eau, le sel, et 
l'avoine. 15. Avons-nous le the ? 16. Non, monsieur ; la fille a le 
the, le vinaigre^et le sel. 17. Ai-je le vin ? 18. Non, madame ; 
vous avez seulement le vinaigre et la viande. 19. Avez-vous la table ? 
20. Oui, madame ; j'ai la table. 

EXERCISE 6. 

1. Have you the wheat ? 2. Tes, sir ; I have the wheat. 3. Who 
has the meat ? 4. The butcher has the meat and the salt. 5. Has 
he the oats ? 6. No, madam ; the horse has the oats. 7. Have we 
the wheat ? 8. You have the wheat and the flour. 9. "Who has the 
salt? 10. I have the salt and the meat. 11. Have we the vinegar, 
the tea, and the coffee ? 12. No, sir ; the brother has the vinegar. 
13. Who has the horse ? 14. The baker has the horse. 15. Have 
we the book and the pen? 16. No, miss; the girl has the pen, and 
the miller has the book. 17. Have you the table, sir ? 18. No, sir; 
I have only the book. 19. Who has the table ? 20. We have the 
table, the pen, and the book. 



LEQON V. LESSON V. 

CONTEACTION OF THE ARTICLE, &C. 

1. The article le, with the preposition de preceding, must be con- 
tracted into du, when it comes before a word in the masculine singu- 
lar, commencing with a consonant or an h aspirated. [L. 3, 10; 
§ 13, (8.) (9.)] 

Du frere, of the Irofher; Du chateau, of the castle; 

Du heros, of the hero ; Du chemin, of the way. 

2. Before feminine words, and before masculine words commencing 
with a vowel, or an h mute, the article le is not blended with the pre- 
position. 

De la dame, f. of the lady; De 1'amie, f. of the female friend ; 

De l'argent, m. of the money; De l'honneur, m. of. the honor. 

3. In French, the name of the possessor follows the name of the 
object possessed. [§ 76, (10.)] 

La raaison du medecin, T7ie physician's house ; 

L'arbre du jardin, The tree of the garden ; 

La lettro de la sceur, The sister's letter. 



34 CIKQUIIIlIE LEgON. 

4. The name of the material of which an object is composed fol- 
lows always the name of the object; the two words being connected, 
by the preposition de (d' before a vowel or an h mute). [§ 7G, (11.)] 

L'habit de drap, The cloth coat ; 

La robe de soie, The silk dress ; 

La montre d'or, The gold watch. 

Resume of Examples. 

Lo taflleur a l'habit do drap du The tailor lias the physician's cloth 

medecin. coat. 

Vous avez la lettre de la sceur du You have the baker's sister's letter, (the 

boulangcr. letter of the sister of the baker.) 

A-t-il le livro de la dame? Has he the lady's book I 

Exercise 7. 

Argent, m. silver, money ; Couteau, m. knife; Porte-crayon, m. pencil- 

Las, in. stocking ; Cuir, in. leather. case; 

Bois, m. wood; Dame, f. lady; Robe, f. dress. 

Chapeau, m. hat; l>rap, m. c Satin, in. satin: 

Charpentier, m. carpen- Foin, m. hay; Sceur, 1'. sister; 

tar; Habit, m.coai; Soie, C silk; 

liiier, m. shoema- Laine, f. wool, woollen; Soulier, m. shoe; 

tar; Maia, but; Table, f. table; 

Coton. Tailleur, m. tailor. 

1. Avez-vous la montre d'or? 2. Otii, madame; j'ai la montro 
d'or et le chapeau de soie. 3. Monsieur, avez-vous Ic livredu tailleur? 
4. Non, monsieur; j'ai le livro du mddecin. 5. Ont-ils le pain du 
ooulanger? C. lis out le pain du boulangcr et la fanne du meunier. 
i. Avez-vous le porte-crayon d'argeut? 8. Oui, monsieur; nous 
9. Avons-noua I'avoine du cheval ? 
10. Vous avez I'avoine et le foin du cheval. 11. Quia l'habit de drap 
du charpentier ? 12. Lo cordonnicr a le chapeau de soie du tailleur. 
1".. Le tailleur a le Soulier de cuir du cordonmer. 14. Avez-vous la 
de bois? 15. Oui, monsieur; j'ai la table de bois du charpentier. 
IC Ont-ils le couteau d'argent? 17. lis ont le couteau d'ai 
IS. Le frerc du mddecin a la montre d'argent. 19. La sceur du 
nnier a la robe de soie. 20. A-t-elle le Soulier de cuir? 
21. Non, madame; elle a le Soulier de satin. 22. Avons-noua le bee 
do laine ? 23. Non, monsieur ; vous avez le bas do soie du tailleur. 
24. Qui a le bas de coton? 2.3. Lo meMecin a le bas de colon. 2G. La 
dame a le Soulier de satin do la sceur du boulangcr. 

Exercise 8. 
1. LTave you the tailor's book ? 2. No, sir ; I have the p! 
watch. 3. Who has the gold watch ? 4. The lady has the gold watch 



NOUNS USED IN THE PARTITIVE SENSE. 35 

and the silver pencil-case. 5. Have you the tailor's shoe ? 6. I have 
the tailor's cloth shoe. 7. Have we the wooden table ? 8. Yes, sir ; 
you have the wooden table. 9. Have they the silver knife ? 10. They 
have the silver knife. 11. The lady has the silver knife and the 
gold pencil-case. 12. Has she the satin dress ? 13. The physician's 
sister has the satin dress. 14. Who has the wood ? 15. The car- 
penter's brother has the wood. 16. Have you the woollen stocking ? 
17. No, sir ; but I have the cotton stocking. 18. Who has the 
baker's bread? 19. We have the baker's bread and the miller's 
flour. 20. Have we the horse's hay ? 21. You have the horse's 
oats. 22. Have we the tailor's silk hat ? 23. Yes, sir ; you have the 
tailor's silk hat and the shoemaker's leather shoe. 24. Have you the 
cloth shoe of the physician's sister ? 25. No, madam ; I have the 
lady's silk dress. 



LEgON VI. LESSON VI. 

NOUNS USED IN THE PARTITIVE SENSE. 

1. The article, contracted with or preceded by the preposition de, 
according to Rules 1 and 2 of Lesson 5, is placed in French before 
words used in a partitive sense. Such words may generally be known 
in English when some or any is or may be prefixed to them. [§ 13, 
(10.) § 78, (1.)] 

Du pain, Bread, or some bread; 

De la viande, Meat, or some meat ; 

De l'argent, Money, or some money. 

2. The French numeral adjective, un, m. une, f. answers to the 
English indefinite article, a or an. [§ 13, (4.) (11.)] 

Unhomme, A man; 

Une femme, A woman. 

3. The e of the preposition de is elided before un and une. [§ 146.] 

D'un livre, m. Of or from a book ; 

D'une maison, f. Of or from a house. 

4. When the nominative or subject of an interrogative sentence is 
a noun, it should be placed before the verb ; and immediately after 
the verb, in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in compound tenses, 
a pronoun must be placed, agreeing with the nominative in gender and 
number. [§ 76, (4.) (5.)j. See also L. 56, R. 1. 



so 



SIXIE ME LKgON. 



Le medecin a-t-il de l'argent ? 
Le boucher a-t-il de la viande ? 
Le libraire a-t-d du papier ? 
La dame a-t-elle de la soie ? 



Has the physician money t 
Has the butcher meat? 
Has the bookseller paper t 
Has the lady silk ? 



Resume of Examples. 



Avez-vous du pain ? 

Vous avez du pain, du beurre, et du 
fromage. 

Votre frere a-t-d une livre de beurre ? 

Avez-vous le livre d'un libraire? 

Non, j'ai le livre d'une dame. 

La sceur du medeciu a-t-elle du pa- 
pier et do L'encre ? 



Have you bread? 

You have bread,, butter, and cheese. 

Has your brother a pound of butter ? 
Have you a bookseller's book ? 
No, 1 have a lady's book. 
His the physician's sister paper and 
ink? 



5. It will be seen by some of the above examples, that the ar- 
ticle must be repeated before every noun used in a partitive sense. 



Acajou, m. mahogany , 
Acier, m. 
Auioord'hui, 

in. butler; 

Boeufj m 

Caii ; , in. 
Cuiller, :. 

De, in. thimble; 



Exercise 9. 

Encre, f. ink; 

. m. yrocer ; 
FUa, in. son; 
Fourchetta, tfork; 

(hint, in. 

Libraire, m. bookseller; 

I.i\ iv, m 

Livre, l*. pound; 



Mn, f. my; 
Morceau, in. piece; 
Papier, in. paper ; 
Plume, F. 
Sucre, in. sugar J 
\ in, in. 
Votre, y>>ur ; 
The, in. tea. 



1. Avez-vous de la viande? 2. Oui, monsieur; j'ai unc livre de 
viande. 3. Votre fils a-t-il un morceau de pain? 4. Oui, mac lame; 
il a un morceau de pain. .".. Le libraire a-t-il un livre? G. II a do 
Fencre et du papier. 7. Votre sceur a-t-elle une montre d'or ? 8. 
Ellc a une montre d'oret un de d'argent 9. Le boulanger a-t-il du 
v;n ..a de la bi ' loulanger a du the et du cafe". 11. Votre 

? 12. II a du fromage et du beurre. 13. La 
■t-elle une cuiller d'argent ? 14. La dame a une cuiller et uno 
fourchetl 15. Le boucher a-t-il de la viande aujourd'hui ? 

1"6. Oui, monsieur ; il a un bceuf. 17. Le cliarpentwr 

a-t-il une table? 18. Oui, monsieur; il a une table d 'acajou. 

1.' livre du m^decin^/20. Non, mada 
le livre de . 21. Qui a du csOK et du sucre ? 22. ' 

a du cafd et du sucre. "J.°.. La :-reur du libraire a-' 
24. Nod, monsieur; maia elle a un livre. -'>. A-t-elle un.- plume 
X. -ii, monsieur; elle a une plume d'or. -7. Vous 
avea le porte-crayon du medecin, 



the negative sentence, etc. 37 

Exercise 10. 
1. Have you any tea ? 2. Yes, madam ; I have a pound of tea. 
3. Who has bread ? 4. The baker, has bread, butter, and cheese. 
5. Has the tailor cloth ? 6. The tailor has a piece of cloth. 7. Has 
the physician gold ? 8. Yes, sir ; the physician has gold and silver. 
9. Has the lady a silver watch ? 10. Yes, miss (madam) ; the lady has 
a silver watch and a gold pen. 11. Has your sister silk? 12. Yes, 
sir; she has silk and cotton. 13. Have you a knife ? 14. Yes, sir; 
I have a steel knife and a silver fork. 15. Have you meat to-day, 
sir? 16. Yes, sir; I have a piece of beef. 17. Has your carpenter 
a mahogany table ? 18. Yes, sir ; he has a mahogany table. 19. Has 
your sister a glove ? 20. Yes, sir-; my sister has a silk glove. 
21. Has the bookseller's son a gold pencil case? 22. Yes, sir; he 
has a gold pencil case and a steel pen. 23. Who has your sister's 
watch? 24. Your brother has the gold watch and the silk hat. 
25. We have gold, silver, and steel. (See Rule 5.) 



LEQON VII. LESSON VII. 

THE NEGATIVE SENTENCE, ETC. 

• 1. To render a sentence negative, ne is placed before the verb, and 
pas after it. 

Je n'ai pas le clieval. i" have not the horse. 

Vous n'avez pas la maison. You have not the house. 

2. When the verb is in a compound tense, [§ 45, (8.)] the first 
negative ne is placed before the auxiliary, and the second between 
the auxiliary and the participle. 

Je n'ai pas eu le cheval. / have not had the horse. 

Yous n'avez pas eu la maison. You have not had the house. 

3. It will be seen in the above examples that the e of ne is elided, 
when the verb begins with a vowel. [§ 146.] 

4. When the words ni, neither ; rien, nothing ; jamais, never ; per- 
eonne, no one, nobody, occur, the word ne only is used, and those 
words take the place of pas. 

Je n'ai ni le livre ni le papier. I have neither the booh nor the paper. 

Avez-vous quelque chose ? Save you any thing f 

Nous n'avons rien. We have nothing, or not any thing. 

Personne n'a le livre. [§ 41, (6.)] No one has the book. 

Youa n'avez jamais le couteau. You never have the knife. 



38 SEPTIEME LEgON. 

5. A noun used in a partitive sense (Lesson 6, Rule 1), and being 
the object of a verb conjugated negatively, should not be preceded 
by the article, but by the preposition de only. 1 [§ 78, (7.)]. 

Nous n'avons pas d'argent. We have no money. 

Tous n'avez pas do viande. You have no meat. 

6. Quelqu'un, some one, any one ; [§ 41, (7.)] quelque chose, some- 
thing, any thing ; should only be used in an affirmative or interroga- 
tive sentence, or in a sentence which is negative and interrogative at 
the same time. 

Avons-nous quelqu'un ? Have we any one? 

Avez-vous quelque chose ? Have you any thing ? 

N 'avons-nous pas quelque chose? Have we not something ? 

7. In a negative sentence, ne — personne, signifies nobody, not any 
body ; and ne — rien, nothing, not any thing. 

Je n'ai personne. I have no one, not any one. 

Vous n'avez rien. You have nothing, or not any thing. 

8. Avoir, to jta vk, in- the Present of Tm: Indicative, 

vely. Negatively and Interrogatively. 

Jen'aipae, Ihauenot; N'ai-jepas? Have I not f 

Tu n'as pas, Thou hast not; N'as-tupas? Hast thou not? 

II n'a pas, has not; N'a-t-il pas? His he not? 

EUe ii a pas, Slie has not; N'a-t-elle pas ? Has she not? 

Nous n'avons pas, We have not; N'avous-nous pas ? Haven 

Vous n'avez pas, Tou have not; N'avez- vous pas? J/nre you not? 

lis n'ont pas, m. They have not; N'ont-ils pas ? m. Have they not? 

Elles n'ont pas, £ Tiny have not. N'ont-elles pas ? f Have they not? 

Rbsuhjb of Ex ami -lis. 

Le taillcur a-t-il lc bouton? Has the tailor the button ? 

Lc tailleur n'a pas lo bouton. The tailor has not Ou 

11 n'a pas en le drap. He has not had the cloth. 

II o'a ni lc bois ni le fer. He has neither the wood nor the 

Ai-jede la viande? Have I 

Vous n'avez pas de viande, (R. 5.) Tou have no meat. 

Avons-nous quelque chose? >■ any thing? 

Nous n'avons rien. We have nothing, or not any thing. 

]foas n'avons jamais de cafe, (R. 5.) We never ha 

Vous n'avez pas de livre. Tou have no i 

1 When, however, tbS sentence is interrogative as well as n< 
article is sometimes used. In thoso cases, however, ne and pas are reu- 
dered by not instead of no. 

N'avons-nous pas de l'argent? laoney? 

N'avez-vous pas de la viande? ; meat? 

Without the article. 
N'avons-nous pas d'argent ? Have we no money? 

N'avez-vous pas do viande ? Have you no meat? 



the negative sentence. 39 

Exercise 11. 

Ami, m. friend; Drap, m. cloth; Personne, m. nobody ; 

Anglelerre, ft England; Dutout, at all; Quelque chose, m. some- 

Aussi, also; France, f France; thing, any thing ; 

Autre, other ; Histoire, f. history ; Quelqu'un, m. some one, 

Chapelier, ra. hatter ; Libraire, m. bookseller; any one; 

Chien, m. dog ; Marchand, m. merchant ; Soie, f. silk ; 

Coton, m. cotton; Mon, m. my; Velours, m. velvet; 

Cousin, m. cousin ; Ni, neither, nor ; Voisin, m. neighbor. 
Deux, two ; 

1. Le chapelier a-t-il de la soie ? 2. Le chapelier n'a pas de soie, 
mais il a du velours. 3. A-t-il du velours de coton ? 4. Non, mon- 
sieur ; il n'a pas de velours de coton, il a du velours de soie. 5. Avez- 
vous de la viande ? 6. Oui, monsieur ; j'ai de la viande. 7. Le me- 
decin n'a pas d'argent. 8. Qui a de 1' argent ? 9. Le marchand n'a 
pas d'argent, mais il a du drap, du velours et de la soie. 10. Avez- 
vous quelque chose ? 11. Non, monsieur; je n'ai rien du tout. 12. Le 
tailleur a-t-il deux boutons d'argent? 13. Non, monsieur; il a deux 
boutons de soie. 14. Qui a votre chien ? 15. Le voisin a le chien de 
mon cousin. 16. N'a-t-il pas votre cheval aussi ? 17. Non, monsieur; 
il a le cheval de votre ami. 18. Avez-vous l'histoire de France ? 
19. Non, madame ; je n'ai ni l'histoire de France ni l'histoire d' An- 
gleterre. 20. N'avez-vous ni le livre ni le papier? 21. Non, made- 
moiselle; je n'ai ni l'un ni 1'autre. 22. Qui a du papier? 23. Le 
libraire n'a pas de papier. 24. Quelqu'un a-t-il un livre ? 25. Per- 
sonne n'a de livre. 

Exercise 12. 

1. Has the baker velvet ? 2. No, sir ; the baker has no velvet. 
3. Who has silk velvet ? 4. The hatter has silk velvet and a silk hat. 
5. Have you two silver buttons ? 6. No, sir ; I have a cloth coat, a 
silk hat, and a velvet shoe. 7. Has your neighbor a wooden table ? 
8. Tes, sir ; he has a mahogany table. 9. Has your cousin a history 
of England? 10. No, sir; he has a history of France. 11. I have 
neither the cloth nor the velvet. 12. We have neither the meat nor 
the coffee. 13. Has any one a book ?^LjL4. Your cousin has a book, 
a velvet coat, and a silk hat. 15. Have you the physician's book ? 

16. Tes, madam ; I have the physician's book, and the lady's gold pen. 

17. Has the merchant cloth? 18. The merchant has no cloth, but he 
has money. 19. Who has your neighbor's dog ? 20. Nobody has 
my neighbor's dog. 21. Has any one my book ? 22. No one has 
your book. 23. Has your cousin's brother any thing ? 24. No, sir ; 
he has nothing. 25. Who has your friend's book ? 26. Your brother 
has my cousin's book. 27. Has he the tailor's coat ? 28. He has not 
the tailor's coat. 29. We have neither the cloth nor the silk. 



40 HUITIEME LE^ON, 



LEgox Yin. LESSON VIII. 

IDIOMS FORMED WITH AVOIR, TO UA VE, &C. 

1. The verb avoir is used idiomatically, in French, with the words 
quelque chose, chaud, froid, /aim, honte, peur, raison, tort, soif, S07n- 
meil. 

J'ai quelque chose. Something is the matter with me. 

II a chaud. He is warm. 

Elle a faim. Slie is hungry. 

Nous avons honte. We are ashamed. 

Vous avez pcur. You, are afraid. 

lis ont tort. Tlo.y are wrong. 

Avez-vous raison? Are you right? 

J'ai sommeiL J am sb epy. 

2. A noun, whether taken in a general or in a particular sense, is, 
in French, commonly preceded by the article le, in its different forms. 
[§ 77, (1.) (2.)] 

Le pain est necessaire. Bread is necessary. 

II a le pain. He has the in ad. 

3. A noun, preceded by the article le, retains that article after ni, 
nor, neither; but a noun taken in a partitive sense, [L. 6, l f ] takes 
after ni, neither article nor preposition. 

Jo n'ai ni l'arbro ni le janlin. / have neither the tree nor the garden. 

Nous n'avons ui arbre ni jardin. We have neither tree nor gardm. 

A. A noun, taken in a partitive sense, and preceded by an adjec- 
tive, takes merely the preposition dc. [? 78, (3.)J 

5. The following adjectives are generally placed before the noun. 

Bean, handsome, Brave, worthy; Gros, large, big; Mauvais, 

fine, beautiful: young; Meilleur, 

Bon,good; Grand, £r ■at, large; Joli, -pretty ; Petit, small; 

Yieux, old; Yilaiii, ugly. 

liKSl'Mt: OF E.VVMI'i 

Avoz-vous quelque choae 1 Is anything the mntfrr with yout 

Je n'ai rien, (UteraUy, Ihave nothing.) Nothing is k me. 

frere a-t-il chaud ? Is your brother warm ? 

11 n'a ii i froid ni obaud. He 

eura-t-elle faim ou soif? I ry or thirsty t 

Bile n'a pas faim. maifl lonte. She is not hungry, but ash i 

Votre ami a-t-il Bommeilf Is y py ? 

Mod ami n'a :.i Bommeil ni peur. My fr> nor afraid. 

OUfl raison on tort? 

i ifl du lait ou du viii? Havi you milk or winet 

i lait ni vin, [R. 3.] I ha 

.- le lait ou le vin? Havt you 

i le lait in le vin. [R. 3.] i tk* wine. 

Avez-vous de beau drap et de bon Have yuu handsome cloth and good 



IDIOMS WITH AVOIE, ETC. 41 

ExEJRCISE 13. 

Au contraire, on the con- Fusil, m. gun ; Petit, small, little ; 

trary ; Froid, m. cold; Peur, f. fear, afraid ; 

Bouton, m. button; Gros, large; Quel, what, which; 

Capitaiue, m. captain; Houte,f. shame,ashamed ; Kaison, f. reason, right; 

Cousin, m. cousin ; Mais, but ; Rien, nothing ; 

Chaud, m. heat, warm; Marteau, m. hammer ; Tort, m. wrong; 

Faim, f. hunger, hungry ; Meuuisier, m. joiner ; Sel, m. salt ; 

Fer, m. iron. Poivre, m. pepper ; Sornmeil, m. sleep, sleepy. 
Ferblantier, m. tinman ; 

1. Qui a sornmeil ? 2. Mon frere a faim, mais il n'a pas sornmeil. 
3. Avez-vous raison ou tort? 4. J'ai raison, je n'ai pas tort. 5. Avez- 
vous le bon fusil de mon frere ? 6. Je n'ai pas le fusil. 7. Avez-vous 
froid aujourd'hui? 8. Je n'ai pas froid; au contraire, j'ai chaud. 
9. Avez-vous de bon pain? 10. Je n'ai pas de pain. 11. N avez- 
vous pas faim ? 12. Je n'ai ni faim ni soif. 13. Avez-vous honte ? 
14. Je n'ai ni honte ni peur. 15. Avons-nous du poivre ou du sel ?. 
16. Vous n'avez ni poivre ni sel. 17. Quel livre avez-vous ? 18. J'ai 
le livre de mon cousin. 19. Avez-vous le marteau de fer ou le mar- 
teau d'argent ? 20. Je n'ai ni le marteau de fer ni le marteau d'argent, 
j'ai le marteau de bois du ferblantier. 21. Avez-vous quelque chose? 
22. Je n'ai rien. 23. Avez-vous le gros livre du libraire ? 24. Je n'ai 
ni le gros livre du libraire, ni le petit livre du menuisier; j'ai le bon 
livre du capitaine. 

Exercise 14. 

1. Are you sleepy, sir ? 2. No, sir ; I am not sleepy, but I am 
hungry. 3. Have you pepper or salt ? 4. I have neither pepper nor 
salt ; I have cheese. 5. Is your brother thirsty or hungry ? 6. My 
brother is neither thirsty nor hungry. 7. Is your sister right or 
"wrong ? 8. She is not wrong, she is right. 9. Is the good joiner 
afraid ? 10. He is not afraid, but ashamed. 11. Have you milk or 
cheese ? 12. I have neither milk nor cheese ; I have butter. .13. Have 
you the fine cloth or the good tea? 14. I have neither the fine cloth 
nor the good tea. 15. Is any thing the matter with you, my good 
friend ? 16. Nothing is the matter with me, my good sir. 17. Have 
you no bread ? 18. Yes, madam ; I have good bread, good butter, and 
good cheese. 19. Is the carpenter sleepy ? 20. The carpenter is not 
sleepy, but the tinman is hungry. 21. Have you the tinman's wooden 
hammer ? 22. I have not the wooden hammer. 23. "Which hammer 
have you ? 24. I have the steel hammer. 25. Have you a good cloth 
coat ? 26. No, sir ; but I have a silk dress. 27. Has the tailor the good 
gold button ? 28. Yes, sir ; he has the good gold button. 29. Who 
has my brother's gold watch ? 30. Some one has the gold watch. 



42 NEUVIEME LEgOU. 

LE£ON IX. LESSON IX. 

THE PRONOUN - Z£l THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES AXD PKOXOUXS. 

1. The pronouns le, Mm, it ; la, her, it, are, in French, placed before 
the verb. 1 These pronouns assume the gender of the nouns which 
they represent. 

Toyez-vous le couteau ? m. Do you see the 'knife t 

Je ]e vois. J see it. 

Yoyons-nous la fourchetto ? /. Do we see the fork? 

Nous la voyons. We see it. 

2. The vowel of the pronouns le and la, is elided before a verb 
commencing with a vowel or an h mute. [| 146.] 

Avez-vouslo baton? m. Have you, the stick? 

Je l'ai. than 

Avons-nous la caiino ? / Have we the cane ? 

Nous I We have it. 

3. The possessive adjectives mon, m. ma,/, my ; ton, m. ta,/, thy ; 

.. /, hie, her, agree in gender with the object possessed, that is 
with the noun following them. [| 21, (1.) (2.)] 

Men pn] litre, 771. -Vy d 

Avez-vous ma lettro? /. you my letttrt 

Jl a Son ftisil, ;.". //■ /civ fttS ;/'</*. 

11 ;i Ba crava V/c /(«.-■ Tits cravat. 

•t. Before a feminine noun in the singular, commencing with a 

VOWel "i - an h mute, the masculine form, mon, ion, son, is used. 
E§ 21,(3.)] 

.T'ai ' Jhnrc my < 

m habitude,/ P is his or her habit. 

Lo general a .-on an The general has his army. 

5. The adjectives notre, our; votre, your; leur, f/teir, are used 
without variation, before a noun of either gender, in the singular. 
[§21,(1.)] 

Notre argent^ m. Mwr. 

Votre canne,/ Fouri 

Leur t< rre, /. TVietV fancf. 

C. The possessive pronouns le mien, ?//. la miennc, /. mine ; le 
. la tienne,/. tJiine; lo sien, m. la sienne, /. his or hers fie 
notre, m. la ndtre,/ ows; le votre, m. la votre,/ yours; le leur, ?». 
'. ffetrs, can never bo prefixed to nouns. Th 

I person singular, anil in tho/frs* and second persons 
plural of the imperative used ajlirmativchj. 



POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUN'S. 43 

ding those pronouns, and forming an indispensable part of them, 
takes the gender of the object possessed; 1 mien, tien, sien, vary for 
the feminine — notre and votre, used as pronouns, have the circumflex 
accent. 



J'ai votre livre et le mien. 
Elle a sa robe et la mienne. 
Vous avez votre plume et la n6tre. 



I have your book and mine. 
She has her dress and mine. 
You have your pen and ours. 



Resume oe Examples. 



Votre ami a-t-il le mouton ? 

II l'a, elle l'a. 

II ne l'a pas. 

N'avez-vous pas l'encrier d'argent ? 

Nous ne l'avons pas. 

Avez-vous votre fusil ou le mien ? 

Je n'ai ni le votre ni le mien. 

Son epouse a-t-elle sa robe ou la 

votre ? 
Elle n'a ni la sienne ni la votre. 
Ne l'avez-vous pas ? 
Votre frere ne l'a-t-il pas ? 



Has your friend the sheep or mutton ? 

He has it, she has it. 

He has it not. 

Have you not the silver inkstand ? 

We have it not. 

Have you your gun or mine ? 

I have neither yours nor mine. 

Has his wife her dress or yours ? 

Size has neither hers nor yours. 

Have you it not ? 

Has not your brother it ? 



Assiette, f. plate ; 
Biscuit, m. biscuit; 
Boeuf, m. beef; 
Boucher, m. butcher ; 
Commode, f. chest of 

drawers, bureau; 
Couteau, m. knife; 



Exercise 15. 

Crayon, m. pencil ; 
Cuisinier, m. cook ; 
Fourchette. £ fork ; 
Matelot, m. sailor ; 
Mouton, m. mutton, 
sheep ; 



Parent, m. relation ; 
Plat, m. dish; 
Poisson, m.fish; 
Porcelaine, f. china; 
Sofa, m. sofa ; 
Tout, all; 



Miroir, m. looking-glass ; Veau, m. veal, calf. 

1. Avez-vous la fourchette d'argent? 2. Oui, monsieur; je l'ai. 
3. Le cuisinier a-t-il le boeuf? 4. Non, monsieur; ll ne l'a pas. 
5. Quel mouton avez-vous? 6. J'ai le bon mouton et le boii veau 
du boucher. 7. Votre parent a-t-il la commode ? 8. Non, monsieur ; 
il ne l'a pas. 9. A-t-il mon poisson ? 10. Qui a tout le biscuit du 
boulanger? 11. Le matelot n'a ni son pain ni son biscuit. 12.'A-t-il 
son couteau et sa fourchette? 13. II n'a ni son couteau ni sa four- 
chette, il a son assiette [R. 4], 14. Quel plat a-t-il ? 15. 11 a le jo^i 
plat de porcelaine. 16. Avez-vous le mien ou le sien ? 17. Je n'ai 
ni le votre ni le sien, j'ai le notre. 18. Avez-vous peur, monsieur ? 
19. Non, madame; je n'ai pas peur, j'ai faim. 20. Quelqu'un a-t-il 



1 The article is also contracted with the preposition de into du, (see L. 5, 
R. 1) ; and with the proposition d into au, when the possessive pronoun 
refers to a noun in the masculine singular. 

De votre pere et du mien. Of your father- and mine. 

A son pere et au mien. To his father and mine. 



44 DIXIIlMB LB5ON. 

ma montre d'or ? 21. Non, monsieur ; personne nc l'a. 22. Qu'avez- 
vous, monsieur ? 23. Je n'ai rien. 24. Avez-vous le sofa d'aeajou 
de mon menuisier? 25. Non, monsieur; je ne l'ai pas. 26. J'ai 
son joli miroir et son bon crayon. 

Exercise 16. 
1. Have you the silver pencil case ? 2. No, sir ; I have it not. 
3. Have you my brother's plate ? 4. Tes, madam ; I have it. 5. Has 
the butcher the good biscuit ? 6. He has it not, he has the good 
beef, the good mutton, and the good veal. 7. Have you my knife 
and (my) fork ?» 8. I have neither your knife nor your fork. 
9. Who has the good sailor's biscuit? 10. The baker has it, and I 
have mine. 11. Have you mine also?., 12. I have neither yours 
nor his. 13. Are you hungry ? 14. I am not hungry, I am thirsty 
and sleepy. 15. Are you not ashamed? 16. No, sir; I am not 
ashamed, but I am cold. 17. Is your relation right or wrong? 18. My 
relation is right, sir. 19. Has he my china dish or my silver knife? 
20. He has neither your china dish nor your silver knife, he has 
your china plat 1'. 21. Has any one my silver pencil-case? 22. No 
one has it, but your brother has your cloth coat. 23, Have yon 
mine or his? _!4. I have yours. 25. Has the baker the mahogany 
chest of drawers? 26. He has it not; he lias the mahogany sofa. 
27. lias flic tinman my plate? 28. He has not your plate ; he has 
mine. 29. Which sofa have you? 30. I have my brother's sofa. 
31. I have neither his uor yours; I have mine. 



LI' (ON X. LESSON X. 

THE DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 

1. The demonstrative adjectives ce, m. cette,/. this or that, arc al- 
ways placed before nouns; they agree in gender with these nouns. 
[§20, (1.)] 

Avez-vous ee parapluie? m. Have you this or that -umbrella t 

Vous n'avez pas cette bouteille,/ You have not tins or Vint bottle. 

2. Before a word masculine singular, commencing with a vowel or 
an h mute, cd takes the place of ce. [j 20, (1).] 

1 The possessive adjective must in French bo repeated boforo every 
noun [§21, (4.)] 



DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES AND PEONOUNS. 45 

N'avez-vous pas cet argent ? Have you not this or that money ? 

Vous avez eu cet honneur. You have had this or that honor- 

3. When it is deemed necessary to express, in French, the differ- 
ence existing in English between the words this and that, the adverbs 
ci and la may be placed after the nouns. [§ 20, (2.)] 

Je n'ai pas ce parasol-ci ; j'ai ce pa- I have not this parasol; I have that 
rasol-la, parasol. 

4. The demonstrative pronouns, celui, m. celle, f. this or that, are 
used to represent nouns, but are never joined with them like adjec- 
tives. [§36, §37, (1.)] 

tFai mon parapluie et celui de votre I have rny umbrella and your brother's, 

frere, i. e., that of your brother. 

Vous avez ma robe et celle de ma You have my dress and my sister's, i. e., 

sceur, that of my sister. 

5. The pronouns celui, celle, with the addition of the words ci and 
Id, are used in the sense of this one, that one, the latter, the former. 
[§ 37, (4).] They agree in gender with the word which they repre- 
sent. 

Vous avez celui-ci, mais vous n'avez You have this one (the latter), but you 
pas celui-la. have not that one (the former). 

6. The pronouns ceci and cela, are used absolutely, that is, without 
a noun, in pointing out objects. 

Nous n'avons pas ceci, nous avons We have not this, we have that. 

cela, 
Ceci ou cela, This or thai. 

Resume of E±amples. 

Avez- vous le livre de cet homme ? Have you that man's book ? 

Je n'ai pas son livre, j'ai le mien. I have not his book, I have mine. 

Le cuisinier a-t-il ce parapluie ? Has the cook that umbrella ? 

II n'a pas ce parapluie-ci, il a ce He has not this umbrella, he has that 

parapluie-la, (R. 3.) umbrella. 

Avez- vous celui de votre frere ? Have you your brother's f that of 

your brother. 

Je n'ai pas celui de mon frere ; j'ai / have not my brother's ; I have my 

celui de ma sceur, (R. 4.) sister's ; i. e., that of my brother, 

that of my sister. 

Avez-vous celui-ci ou celui-la 1 Have you this one or that one ? 

Je c'ai ni celui-ci ni celui-la. I have neither the latter nor thefi 

Quelle robe avez-vous ? /. Which dress have you ? 

J'ai celle-ci. J have this (one.) 

Avez-vous ceci ou cela ? (R. 6.) Have you this or that ? 



46 diiieme le§on. 

Exercise 17. 

Ardoise, f. slate ; Lettre, £ letter ; Saliere, f. salt stand ; 

Balai, m. broom; Malle, f trunk; Enerier, m. inkstand; 

Bois, m. wood ; Parasol, m. parasol; Etranger, m. stranger, 

Bouteille, £ bottle; Poulet, m. chicken; foreigner; 

Dame, £ lady ; Plomb, m. lead ; Lait, m. milk ; 

Fromage, m. cheese ; Ne-plus, no longer, not Parapluie, m. umbrella ; 

Jaruinier, m. gardener; anymore; Yolaille, £ poultry. 

1. Votre frere a-t-il son enerier d'argent ? 2. Une l'a plus, il a un 
enerier de plomb. 3. Avons-nous la lettre de l'etranger ? 4. Oui, 
monsieur ; nous avorts celle de l'etranger [R. 4.J 5. Votre sceur n'a 
pas son ardoise, mais elle a son chapeau de satin. 6. Le menuisier 
a-t-il votre bois ou le sien ? 7. H n'a ni le mien ni le sien, U a celui 
du jardinier. 8. Avez-vous mon bon parapluie de soie? 9. J'ai 
votre parapluie de soie et votre parasol de satin. 10. Avez-vous ma 
bouteille ? 11. Je n'ai pas votre bouteille, j'ai la malle de votre 
scour. 12. Le domestique a-t-il cette saliere ?>' 13. II n'a pas cette 
galiere-ei ; il a eelle-la. 14. Avez-vous le bon ou le mauvais poulet ? 
15. Je n'ai ni celui-ci ni celui-la. 16. Quel poulet avez-vous ? 17. J'ai 
celui du cuisinier. 18. Le boulangcr a-t-il de la volaille? [L. 6. 
R. 1.] 19. Le boulanger n'a pas de volaille, il a du lait [L. 7, R. 5.] 
20. Avee-vous votre fromage ou le mien ? 21. Je n'ai ni le votre ni 
le mien, j'ai celui du matelot. 22. Quelqu'un a-t-il faim ? 23. Per- 
sonne n'a faim. 24. Avez-vous quelque chose ? 25. Non, monsieur ; 
je n'ai rien. 

Exercise 18. 

1 . Has your brother that lady's umbrella ? 2. My brother has that 
lady's umbrella. 3. Have you this parasol or that one? 4. I have 
neither this (one) nor that (one). 5. Have you the stranger's gold 
watch? G. No, sir; I have the baker's.* 7. Who has my slate? 
8. I have your slate and your brother's. 9. llc.3 the cook a silver 
salt stand ? 10. The cook has a silver salt stand and a silver dish. 
11. Has the cook tins poultry or that? 12. He has neither this nor 
that. 13. Has he this bread or that? 14. IL; has neither this nor 
that, he has the baker's good bread. 15. Have you my cotton paia- 
Bol? 16. I have not your cotton parasol, I have your silk parasol 
17. Has ilio gardener a leather trunk ? 18. The gardener has a leather 
trunk. 19. "Who has my good cheese? 20. Nobody has your 

■, but some one has your brother's. 21. Have y<>n n 
his? 22. I have neither yours nor his, I havi 
the cook this bottle or that broom ? 24. He has this bottl 
yuu a lead inkstand ? 26. No, sir; 1 have a china inkstand. 27. Has 



PLURAL OF NOUNS. 47 

the stranger poultry ? 28. The stranger has no poultry, but he has 
money. 29. Your brother is hungry and thirsty, afraid and sleepy. 
30. Is any one ashamed ? 31. No, sir ; nobody is ashamed. 32. Is 
your brother right or wrong? 33. My brother is right, and yours is 
wrong. 34. Your sister has neither her satin hat nor her velvet 
hat. 



LEQON XL LESSON XL 

PLUBAL OP NOUNS (§ 8). 

1. The plural in French, is generally formed, as in English, by the 
addition of s to the singular. 

Un homme, une femme, A man, a woman ; 

Deux hommes, deux femmes, Two men, two women. 

The form le of the article becomes plural by the addition of s, 
and may be placed before plural nouns of either gender. 

Les hommes, les femmes, Tlie men, the ivomen. 

2. 1st Exception to Rule 1. Nouns ending in s, x } z remain un- 
changed for the plural. 

Le bas, les bas, The stocking, the stockings ; 

La voix, les voix, The voice, the voices ; 

Le nez, les nez, The nose, the noses. 

3. 2d Exception. Nouns ending with au, and eu, take x for the 
plural. 

Le bateau, les bateaux, The hoat, the boats ; 

Le lieu, les lieux, The place, the places. 

4. 3d Exception. The following nouns ending in ou, take x for 
the plural: bijou, Jewel; caillou ; pebble ; chou, cabbage; genou, knee; 
hibou, owl ; joujou, plaything. 

Les bijoux, les cailloux, les choux, Tlie jewels, the pebbles, the cabbages ; 
Leshibous, les genoux, les joujoiix, The owls, the knees, the playthings. 

5. 4th Exception. The following nouns ending in ail change that 
termination into aux for the plural: bail, lease; corail, coral; email, 
enamel; soupirail, air-hole; sous-bail, under-lease; travail, labor. 

Les baux, les coraux, les emaux, Tlie leases, the corals, the enamels; 
Les soupiraux, les travaux, les sous- The air-holes, the labors, the under- 
baux, leases. 



43 



ONZIE ME LEg ON, 



6. 5th Exception. Nouns ending in al form their plural in aux. 

Le cheval, les chevaux, The horse, the horses; 

Le general, les generaux, The general, the generals. 

Bal, ball; carnaval, carnival; cliacal, jackal; regal, treat, follow tho 
general rule. 

7. 6th Exception. Ciel, heaven; ceil, eye; and aieul, ancestor, 
form their plural irregularly. 

Les cieux, les yeux, les ai'eux, The heavens, the eyes, the ancestors. 

For further rules see § 8, § 9, and § 10 of the Second Part 
Resume of Examples. 



Les Anglais ont-ils les chevaux du 

general ? 
Les generaux n'ont pas les bijoux. 
Les eniants ont-ils les cailloux? 
Les yeux de l'enlant. 
Les tableaux de cetto eglisc. 
Avez-vous les oiseaux de ce bois? 
Avez-vous les enoriera d'argentde 

ma soeur? 
J'ai lea bijoux d'argeut et d'or do 

l">'tr. : 
Les rois n'ont-ils pas los palais do 

marbre ? 



Have the English the generaVs 

The generals have not the jewels. 
Uave the children the pebbles t 
The child's eyes. 
Tlie pictures of that church. 
Have you the birds of that wood! 
Have you my sister's sQoer inkstands t 

I have the gold and silver jewels oftlie 

jner. 
Have nut the kings the marble pal- 
aces? 



Baril, m. barrel; 
Bas, in. stocking; 

Chocolat, m. cliocolate; 
Bijou, in. 

Cliou, m. cabbage; 

Knlant, m. child; 
Per, 111. iron; 
Fils, in. 50?i ; 



Exercise 19. 

General, in. general; 
Oilet, in. waistcoat; 
Grand, adj., large, great; 
Jardin, m. garden; 
Jdujou, in. plaything; 

Man-hand. 111. merchant,; 

ManVhal, m. blacksmith; 
Marteau, m. hammer; 



Mauvais, bad; 
Meunier, in. miller; 
Morceau, m. piece; 
Oiseau, in. bird; 
Petit, small; 
l'airo, ■(. j 
Poivre, m. 
Qu', que, what; 
liien, nothing. 



1. Avez-vous les marteauxdu cliarpcnticr? 2. Nous avons les mar- 
teaux du marechaL 3. Les marechaux ont-ils deux marteaux do 
bois ? 4. lis ont deux martcaux de fcr. 5. Les gcneraiix ont-ils les 
ohapeaux de soie de I' enfant? 6. Us ont les bijoux et les joujoux 
de lVnfant. 7. Les enfants ont-ils les oiseaux de votre bois ? 8. lis 
n'ont pas les oiseaux de mon bois, mais ils ont les chevaux de mon 
general 9. Le marechaJ a-t-il une paire do bas delaine? 10. Lo 
marechal a deux paires de bas de laine. 11. Monsieur; n'avez-vous 
17 12. Nou, monsieur; j'ai chaud. L">. A.ve*-vous du cale) 
oU du chocolat? 11. Jc n'ai ui cafe ni chocolat 15. N'avcz-voua 



PLURAL OP PRONOUNS, ETC. 49 

pas les choux de mon grand jardin ? 16. J'ai les legumes de votre 
petit jardin. 17. Votre fils, qu'a-t-il? 18. Mon fils n'a rien. 
19. Avez-vous deux morceaux de pain ? 20. Le meunier a un mor- 
ceau de pain, et deux barils de farine. 21. L'epicier a-t-il du cafe, du 
the, du chocolat, et du poivre ? 22. II a du the et du cafe, et le cho- 
colat et le poivre de votre marchand. 23. Qui a de l'argent ? 24. Je 
n'ai pas d'argent, mais j'ai du papier. 25. Avez-vous de bon papier ? 
26. J'ai de mauvais papier. s 

Exercise 29. 

1. Have you my brother's horses ? 2. I have not your brother's 
horses, I have your cousin's hats. 3. Have the blacksmiths good 
iron ? 4. The blacksmith has two pieces of iron. 5. Have you two 
pairs of stockings ? 6. I have one pair of stockings, and two pairs 
of gloves. 7. Has your sister the gold jewels? 8. My sister has 
the gold jewels, and the paper playthings. 9. Have you the cabbages 
in your garden ? 10. We have two cabbages in our garden. 11. Have 
you the silk hats ? 12. The generals have the silk hats. 13. Have 
you coffee or sugar? 14. We have neither coffee nor sugar. 
15. Is your brother ashamed? 16. My brother is neither 
ashamed nor afraid. 17. Who has two barrels of flour ? 18. The 
miller has two barrels of flour. 19. Have the birds bread ? 20. The 
birds have no bread. 21. Has the merchant tea, chocolate, sugar 
and pepper ? 22. He has sugar and pepper, but he has neither tea 
nor chocolate. 23. What has your sister? 24. She has nothing. 
25. What is the matter with your brother ? 26. Nothing is the mat- 
ter with him. 27. Is he not cold ? 28. He is not cold, he is warm. 
29. Is he wrong? 30. He is not wrong, he is right. 31. Have you 
two cloth coats ? 32. I have only one cloth coat, but I have two 
satin waistcoats. 33. Who has my brother's letter ? 34. Your -sis- 
ter has it. 35. Your sister has it not. 



LEQON" XII. LESSON XII. 

THE PLURAL, CONTINUED. 

1. The plural form of the pronouns le, him or it ; la, her or it, is 
les, them, for both genders. Its place is also before the verb. 

Vous les avez. Les avez-vous ? You have them. Have you them ? 
Nous ne les avons pas. We have them not. 

3 



50 DOUZIEME LEgON". 

2. The plural of the article, preceded by the preposition de, of, or 
from, is des for both genders. 

Des livres, des plumes, Of or from the books, of the pens ; 

Dea freres, des sceurs, Of or from the brothers, of the sisters. 

3. The same form of the article is placed before plural nouns used 
in a partitive sense. [L. 6, R. 1.] 

J'ai des habits. / have clothes. 

Vous avez des maisons. You have houses. 

4. Rule 5, Lesson 7, and Rule 4, Lesson 8, apply also to plural 
nouns used partitively. See also note, page 38. 

Nous n'avons pas de livres. We have no books. 

Tous avez de bons crayons. You have good pencils. 

5. The plural form of the possessive adjectives, mon, ton, son t 
notre, voire, leur, is mes, my; tes, thy ; ses, his, her; nos, our; vos, 
your ; leurs, their, for both genders. 

Mes freres, mes soeurs, My brothers, my sisters; 

Nos livres, uos plumes, Our books, our pens. 

6. The possessive pronouns, 2e mien, la viienne, etc., [L. 0, R. G,] 
form their plural as follows :' 

Mas. Fern. Mas. or Fem. 

Les miens, Les miennes, mine; Les notres, own, 

D B miens, Des miennes, of mine; Dea n6tres, of ours; 

Les tiens, Les tiennes, thine; Les votrea, y 

Des tiens, Des tiennes, of thine ; Des votres, of yours; 

Les siens, Les siennes, his or hers ; Les leurs, th 

Des siens, Des siennes, of his or hers ; Des leurs, of Utcirs ; 

Vos maisons et les miennes, Your houses and mine ; 

Yos champs et les siens, Your fields and his : 

Les siens, les votres et los nfirres, His, yours and ours ; 

Des miens, des votres ct des leurs, Of mine, of yours, and of theirs. 

7. The demonstrative adjectives, ce, ecl, cctte, have ces fur their 
plural. 

Ces hommes, ces femmes. Tliese men, these women. 

8. The demonstrative pronoun, celui, m. this or that, makee 

the plural The feminine form, celle, merely takes the s in the 
plural. 

Mes chandeliers (m.) ct ceux do vos My r 

freres. broOu 

Yos chandolles (f.) ct cellcs do nos 

voisins. 

1 Aux miens, m., aux miennes,/. to m L 25, R. C. 



PLURAL OF PRONOUNS, ETC. 



51 



Resume op Examples. 



Votre frere a-t-il mes ehevaux ? . 

II n'a ni les votres ni les siens. 

A-t-il ceux de nos voisins ? 

II ne les a pas. 

Ma sceur a-t-elle vos plumes, ou 

celles de ma cousine ? 
Elle n'a ni les miennes ni celles de 

ma cousine, elle a les siennes. 
Avons-nous des marteaux? 
Vous n'avez pas de marteaux. 
Vous avez de jolis crayons. 
Avez-vous les habits des enfants ? 
Je n'ai pas les habits des enfants. 
Vous avez les chapeaux des dames. 
Avez vous ceux-ci, ou ceux-la. ? 



Has your brother my horses ? 

He has neither yours nor his. 

Has he those of our neighbors ? 

He has them not. 

Has my sister your pens, or my cous- 
in's, f. ? (or those of my cousin). 

She has neither mine, nor my cousin's, 
she has her own. 

Have we hammers f 

You have no hammers. 

You have •pretty pencils. 

Have you the children's clothes ? 

I have not the children's clothes. 

You have the ladies' hats. 

Have you these or those ? 



Acajou, m. mahogany ; 

Aubergiste, m. innkeev- 
er; 

Blanc -he, white ; 

Chaise, f. chair; 

Chandelier, m. candle- 
stick ; 



EXERCISE 21. 

Chandelle, f. candle ; Fusil, m. n ; 

Cousine, f. cousin ; Laine, f. wool ; 

Crin, m. horse-hair ; Marbre, m. marble ; 

ISbeniste, m. cabinet- Matelas, m. mattress; 

maker; Meilleure, better; 

Ferblanc, m. tin; Ouvrier, m. workman; 

Ferblantier, m. tinman ; Voyageur, m. traveller. 



1. Avez- vous les marteaux des marechaux ? 2. Oui, monsieur ; je 
les ai. 3. Ne les avez-vous pas? 4. Non, monsieur; nous ne les 
avons pas. 5. L'ouvrier les a. 6. L'aubergiste a-t-il vos ehevaux ? 
7. L'aubergiste n'a ni mes ehevaux ni les votres, il a les siens. 8. Le 
medecin a-t-il des livres? 9. Oui, monsieur; il a de bons livres. 
10. N'avez-vous pas mes meilleures plumes? 11. Oui, monsieur; 
j'ai vos meilleures plumes, les miennes, et celles de votre cousine. 
12. Le voyageur a-t-il de bons fusils ? 13. II n'a pas de bons fusils, 
il a des fusils de fer. 14. Le matelot n'a-t-il pas mes matelas de 
crin ? 15. II ne les a pas. 16. Qu'a-t-il ? 17. H a les matelas de 
laine de l'ebeniste. 18. L'ebeniste a-t-il des tables d' acajou ? 19. Oui, 
madame ; il a des tables d' acajou ^et des tables de marbre blanc. 
20. Avez-vous mes chaises ou les votres ? 21. Je n'ai ni les votres 
ni les miennes, j'ai celles de l'ebeniste. 22. N'avez-vous pas som- 
meil? 23. Non, monsieur; je n'ai ni sommeil ni faim. 24. Le fer- 
blantier a-t-il vos chandeliers de fer ? 25. Non, monsieur ; il a ceux 
du marechal. 

Exercise 22. 

-. Have you my tables or yours ? 2. I have neither yours nor 
mine, I have the innkeeper's. 3. Have you them? 4. No, sir; I have 
them not. 5. Has your sister my horses? 6. Yes, sir; she has 



52 TEEIZIEME lEfON. 

your two horses, and your brother's. 7. Are you right or wrong ? 
8. I am right, I am not -wrong. 9. Has the tinman my silver can- 
dlesticks or yours ? 10. He has neither your silver candlesticks nor 
mine. 11. What has he ? 12. He has the cabinet-maker's wooden 
tables. 13. Has he your mahogany chairs ? 14. No, sir; he has my 
•white marble tables. - 15. Have you these tables or those ? 16. I 
have neither these nor those, I have the cabinet-maker's. 17. Have 
you good pencil-cases? 18. No, sir; but I have good pencils. 
19. Has the traveller iron guns ? 20. Yes, sir ; he has mine, yours, 
and his. 21. Has he not your brother's ? 22. He has not my brother's. 
23. Has the workman my iron hammers? 24. Yes, sir; he has 
them. 25. Has my brother your pens or my cousin's ? 26. He has 
mine and yours. 27. Have you the children's clothes ? 2S. Yes, 
madam ; 1 have them. 29. Have j r ou your sister's hat? 30. I have 
rqy cousin's./. 31. Is any thing the matter with your brother? 
32. He is cold and hungry. 33. Have you horses ? 34. Yes, sir ; I 
have two horses. 35. I have two horse-hair mattresses and one 
wool mattress. 



LEQON XIII. LESSON XIII. 

AOBEEMENT OF ADJECTIVES — FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. The adjective in French, whatever may be its place, 1 agrees in 
gender and number with the noun which it qualifies [?' 15, ( I 

2. Adjectives ending with e mute, i. c, not accented, retain that 

termination lor the feminine. 

Un garcon aimable, An amiable boy ; 

Une fille aimable, An amiable girl 

3. Adjectives not ending in e mute, take c for the feminine. 

Un garcon diligent, A diligent boy; 

Une lillo diligento, A diligent girl 

4. Exceptions. Adjectives ending in el, eil, en, el, on and as, 
double the last consonant and take e for the feminine. 

Mas. Fern. Mas. Fem. 

Essentiel, cssentiello, essential; Sujet, oujetto, subject; 

Vermeil, vcrmeille, Vermillion; Bon, bonne, good; 

Ancien, ancienne, ancient; Baa, basse, low. 

5. Adjectives ending in /change the /into re; those ending in x 
change that letter into se for tin- feminine. 

1 For the place of adjectives sou L. 15, and Rule 5, J 



AGREEMENT OE ADJECTIV: 



53 



Un habit neuij 
A new coat ; 
Un homme heureux, 
A happy man; 



Une robe neuve, 
A new dress ; 
Une femme heureuse 
A happy woman. 



6. The adjectives beau, handsome ; fan, foolish ; mou, soft • nouveau, 
new; vieux, old, become lei, fol, mol, nouvel, and vieil, 1 before a 
noun masculine commencing with a vowel or an h mute j the last 
consonant of the latter form is doubled, and e added for the feminine, 
Ex., belle, folle, nouvelle, vieille. 

7. Additional rules and exceptions will be found, § 16 of the 
Second Part of this Grammar. 

8. Conjugation of the Present of the Indicative of 

Etre, to be. 

Interrogatively. 



Affirm 


xtively. 


Je suis, 


lam; 


Tues, 


Tlwu art ; 


11 est, 


He is; 


Elle est, 


She is ; 


Nous sommes 


We are ; 


Vous etes, 


You are ; 


lis sont, m. 


They are ; 


Elles sont, f. 


They are; 



Suis-je ? 


Ami? 


Es-tu ? 


Art thou ? 


Est-il ? 


Is he? 


Est-elle ? 


Is she ? 


Sommes-nous ? 


Are we ? 


Etes- vous ? 


Are you ? 


Sont-ils? m. 


Are they ? 


Sont-elles? £ 


Are they f 



Resume of Examples. 
Avez-vous un garcon diligent et une Have you a diligent boy and a dili- 



fille diligente ? 
Mon garcon est diligent, mais ma 

fille est paresseuse [R. 5.] 
Cette coutume est-elle ancienne ? 
Cette coutume n'est pas ancienne, 

elle est nouvelle [R. 6.] 
Yotre plume est-elle bonne ou mau- 

vaise ? 
Ma sceur est tres vive [R. 5.] 
Yotre maison est-elle meilleure que 

la mienne ? 
La maison de ma sceur est aussi 

bonne que la votre. 



gent girl ? 
My boy is diligent, but my daughter 

is idle. 
Is this custom ancient ? 
This custom is not ancient, it is new. 

Is your pen good or bad ? 

My sister is very lively. 

Is your house belter than mine ? 



Beau, bel, belle, hand- 
some ; 
Bon, good; 
Content, e, pleased ; 
Cravate, f. cravat; 
Dame, f. lady ; 
Encrier, m. inkstand , 



My sister's 
■ yours. 

Exercise 23. 
Fille, f. daughter, girl 
Habit, m. coat ; 
Heureux,-se, happy; 
Ici, here; 
Meilleur, e, letter; 
Neuf,-ve, new; 
Paire, f. pair ; 



Excellent, e, excellent; Parapluie, m. umbrella; 



Parasol, m. parasol; 
Parent, m. relation; 
Petit, e. small ; 
Paresseux,-se, idle; 
Porcelaine, f. china; 
Que, than ; 
Vieux, vieille, old; 
Vif, vive, quick, lively. 



1 Vieux is also used before a noun commencing with a 
Bilent h. 



jwei or a 



54 TEEIZIEME LEgOX. 

1. Cette dame est-elle contente ? 2. Non, monsieur ; cette dame 
n'est pas contente. 3. Votre fille est-elle vive ? 4. Mon fils est tres 
vif, et ma fille est paresseuse. 5. N'a-t-elle pas tort ? G. Elle n'a 
pas raison. 7. Yotre cousine est-elle heureuse ? 8. Oui, madame ; elle 
est bonne, belle et heureuse. 9. A-t-elle des amis ? 10. Oui, monsieur ; 
elle a des parents et des amis. 11. A-t-clle une robe neuve et de vieux 
souliers ? 12. Elle a de vieux souliers et une vieille robe. 13. Totro 
frere n'a-t-il pas un bel habit [E. G.] ? 14. E a un bel habit et une 
bonne cravatc. 15. Avez-vous de bonne viande, monsieur ? 1G. J'ai 
de la viande excellente. 17. Cette viande-ci est-elle meilleure quo 
celle-la ? 18. Celle-ei est meilleure que celle-li. 19. Votre ami a-t-il le 
bel encrier de porcelaine? 20. Son encrier est beau, mais il n'est 
pas de porcelaine. 21. Quelqu'un a-t-il faim? 22. Fersonne n'afaim. 
23. Les generaux sont-ils ici ? 24. Les generaux et les mareehaux 
sont ici. 25. J'ai voa parasols et vos parapluies, et ccux de vos 
enfants. 

Exercise 24. 
1. Is your tittle sister pleased? 2. Yes, madam; she is pleased. 
3. Is that little girl handsome? 4. That little girl is not handsome, 
but she is good. 5. Have you good cloth and good silk? G. My 
cloth and' silk are hen'. 7. la your sister happy? 8. My sister is 
good and happy. 9. Has that physician's sister friends? 10. No, 
madam; she has no friends. 11. Is your meat good? 12. My meat 
is good, but my cheese is better. 13. Has the bookseller a hand- 
some china inkstand ? 11. He has a fine silver inkstand and a pair 
of leather shoes. 15. Have you my silk parasols? 1G. I h.: 
cotton umbrellas. 17. Is your brother's coat handsome f 18. My 
brother has a handsome coat and an old silk cravat. 19. Have you 
relations ami friends? 20. I have no relations, but I have friends. 
21. Is that handsome lady wrong? 22. That handsome lady is not 
wrong. 23. Have you handsome china? 24. Our china is haul- 
some and good. 25. It is bettor than yours. 2(1. Is not that little 
girl hungry? 27. That handsome little girl is neither hungry nor 
thirst)-. 28. What is the matter with her ? 29. She has neither re- 
lations nor friends. 30. Is this gold watch good ? 31. Th 
good, but that one is lnt tor. 3'J. Have you it? 33. I have it, but I 
have not your sister's. 34. I have neither yours nor mine, I hare 
your mother's. 

1 The article, the possessive and tlio demonstrative adjective, and the 
prepositions <i and de are repeated before every noun. 

Mon fn'-ro et ma soeur, M>j brother and tki 

A votre frere et an mien, To yo <--i (><>) mine. ; 

Do iioa livrea et des votres, Of our books and ( of) yours. 



PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 55 

LEQON" XIV. LESSON XIV. 

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 

1. An adjective qualifying a plural noun, or two or more singular 
nouns of the same gender, assumes the gender of the noun or nouns 
and is put in the plural. [§ 18.] 

les arbres et les fruits sont beaux. The trees and fruits are fine. 
Les fleurs et les plantes sont belles. The flowers and plants are fine. 
Vos jardins sont tres beaux. Tour gardens are very fine. 

2. An adjective qualifying two or more nouns of different genders, 
is put in the plural masculine. 

Mou frere et ma soeur sont contents. My brother and sister are pleased. 
Le canif et la plume sont bons. The penknife and pen are good. 

3. The plural of the feminine of adjectives is invariably formed by 
the addition of an s. 



Vous avez de jolies maisons. You have pretty 

Ces demoiselles sont attentives. Those young ladies are attentive. 

4. The plural of the masculine of adjectives is generally formed by 
the addition of an s. 

Ces ecoliers sont attentifs. Those scholars are attentive. 

Vos bois sont magnifiques. Tour woods are magnificent. 

5. The terminations s and x are not changed for the plural mascu- 
line. 

Nos fruits sont mauvaia. Our fruits are bad. 

Vos oiseaux sont hideux. Tour birds are hideous. 

6. To the termination eau, x is added for the plural masculine. 
Vos champs sont tres beaux Tour fields are very fine. 

7. The termination al is generally changed into aux for the plural 
masculine [§ 17 (3.), Third Exception]. 

Les hommes sont egaux. Men are equal. 

8. For more explicit rules and for exceptions, see § 17, Second Part. 

9. Present of the Indicative of IItee, to be. 
Negatively. Negatively and Interrogatively. 

Jo ne suis pas, I am not; Ne suis-je pas ? Am 1 not? 

Tu n'es pas, Thou art not; N'es-tu pas? Art thou not? 

II n'est pas, Ms is not ; N'est-il pas ? Is he not ? 

Elle n'est pas, She is not', N'est-elle pas? Is she not? 

Nous ne sommes pas, We are not ; Ne sommes-nous pas ? Are we not ? 

Vous n'etes pas, Tou are not ; N'etes-vous pas ? Are you not ? 

lis ne sont pas, m. They are not; Ne sont-ils pas ? m. Are they not? 

Elles ne sont pas, f. They are not; Ne sont-elles pas? f. Are they not ? 



56 QUATOEZIfiME LIS COX. 

Resume op Examples. 

Avez-vous des ecoliers attentifs ? Have you, attentive scholars ? 

Mes ecoliers et mes ecolieres sont My scholars (male and female) are 

tres attentifs et tres studieux. very attentive and very studious. 

Ces demoiselles sont-elles studieuses ? Are those young ladies studious ? 

Elles ne sont pas tres studieuses. They are not very studious. 

Ces regies sont-elles generates? Are those rules general f 

Ces principes sont generaux. Those principles are general. 

Leurs kabillements sont superbes. Their clothes are superb. 

Avez-vous peur de ces chevaux Are you afraid of those restive horses? 

retifs ? 

Tos montres d'or sont excellentes. Your gold watches are excellent. 

Les miennes sont-elles nieilleures Are mine better than yours ? 

que les votres ? 

Les votres sont meilleurcs. Yours are better 

Exercise 25. 

A; greable, agreeable; Mauvais, e, tad; Souvcnt, often ; 

Aine, c, elder; Mule, f. mule; Travail, m. labor; 

AHemande, )'. German; Oisif, ve, idle; Tres, very; 

Jamais, never; Pantoufles, f. slippers; Utile, useful; 

Indulgent, c. indulgent; Personne, m. nobody ; Velours, m. velvet; 

Laine, f. wool, woollen; Retif, ve, restive; YifJ ve, quick, lively. 
Maroquin, m. morocco; 

1. Les chevaux do notre ami sont-ils retifs? 2. Ses chevaux no 
Bont pas re*tifs, mais scs mules sont tres rdtives. 3. Les chevaux et 
les mules de votre frere sont excellents. -1. Vos sceurs sont-elles 
tresvives? 5. Mesl 9 sceurs sont tics vi is. 0. S.>ut-ils 

souvent oisifs ? 7. Non, monsieur ; me3 soeurs ne sont jamais 
8. Avez-vous peur do votrc frere? 0. Non, monsieur ; je i 
■iMi'. 10. Ne sommes-nous pas indulgents ? 11. \ 
indulgents, et vous avez raison. 12. Ai-jo vos livres ? 13. Vous ne 

z ceux de mon frere aine. 1 k Ne .'■ 
vous pas? 15. Je ne les ai pas. 1G. Avez-vous une bonne pair© de 
bas dc laine ? 17. J'ai une belle paire de bas de soie. 18. Avez-voua 
les bonnes maisons ou les mauvaises? 19. Je n'ai ni les bonnes ni 
les mauvaises, j'ai celles de ma cousine. 20. Le travail cst-il agre- 
.able? 21. Lc travail est utile et agreable. 22. Avez-vous mes 
beaux souliers de maroquin ? 23. Jo n'ai pas vos beaux souliers de 
maroquin, j'ai vos belles pantoufles de velours. 2-1. Ave/.-. 
pantoufles de votre sceur, ou les miennes? 25. Jo n'ai ni les votres 
ni cellos de votre BceurJ'ai celles de l'Allemand«ii 

Exebcisb 26. 

1. Are your brothers and sisters very | 
2. Mj brothers are quick, butiny sisters arc not quick. 3. 1 1 



PLACE OF ADJECTIVES, ETC. 57 

not two restive horses ?* 4. No, but I have a restive mule. 5. Have 
you not two good pairs of silk gloves ? 6. I have a good pair of 
cotton gloves, and two pairs of silk gloves. 7. Are you not afraid 
of your friends ? 8. No, sir; I am never afraid of my friends. 9. I 
am afraid of nobody. 10. Are you right or wrong? 11. I am right. 
12. -Have you my beautiful leather slippers, or my old satin slip- 
pers ? 13. I have your old leather shoes and your velvet slippers. 
14. Are those ladies pleased? 15. Those ladies aie pleased, and they 
are right. 16. Has the G-erman lady your father's shoes or mine ? 
17. She has neither his nor yours, she has my sister's. 18. Has 
your elder brother good houses ? 19. His houses are better than 
yours and than mine. 2 20. Are his houses old ? 21. His houses 
are old, but they are good. 22. Have you them ? 33. No, sir ; I 
have them not, I have no houses. 24. Have you my brother's or 
my sister's ? 25. Tour sister has hers and my mother's. 26. Are 
your scholars attentive ? 27. My scholars are very attentive and 
very studious. 28. Are those German ladies studious? 29. They 
are very studious and very attentive. 30. Are you often wrong ? 
31. Yes, sir ; I am often wrong. 32. Is labor agreeable ? 33. Yes, 
sir ; labor is agreeable and useful. 34. We have them, and you have 
them not. 



LEgON XV. LESSON XV. 

PLACE OP ADJECTIVES. RELATIVE PEOKOUK HIT. 

1. The adjective, in French, follows the noun much more fre- 
quently than it precedes it. [§ 85, (l.)J 

Vous ajez des amis fideles. You have faithful friends. 

Ma soeur a des livres instructifs. My sister has instructive books. 

2. Those adjectives which generally precede the nouns have been 
mentioned in Lesson 8, Eule 5., and will be also found § 85, (11.) 

Nous avons de belles maisons. We have beautiful houses. 

Votre jolie petite fiUe est studieuse. Tour pretty little girl is studious. 

3. The adjectives which are placed after nouns are : — 1st, All par- 
ticiples, present and past, used adjectively. 

Nous avons une histoire interessante. We have an interesting history. 
Vous avez des enfants polis. You have polite children. 

1 See Rule 5 of next Lesson. 

a Que meaning which and que conjunction are never understood in 
French, they must bo repeated before every noun, pronoun, and verb. 
See L. 19, R. 1. ' 

3* 



58 QUI NZ IE ME LEgON. 

4. 2d, All such as express form, color, taste ; such as relate to 
hearing and touching ; such as denote the matter of which an object is 
composed; as also such as refer to nationality, 1 or to any defects of 
the body. [§ 85, (4.) (5.) (6.) (7.)] 

Nos parents ont des chapeaux noirs. Our relations have black hats. 

Yous avez des pommes douces. You have sweet apples. 

Toila de la cire molle. There is soft wax. 

Cette dame espagnolo a un enfant Tliat Spanish lady has a lame child. 
boitcux. 

5. 3d, Almost all adjectives ending in al, able, ible, (que and if 

Ces hommes liberaux sont aimes. Those liberal men are loved. 
Yoiia un esprit ralsonnablo. That is a reasonable mind. 

Yoila un esclavo fugitil". That is a fugitive slave. 

6. Some adjectives have a different meaning according to their 
position before or after the noun. [See list, § 86.] 

Un bravo homme, a worthy man; Un horame brave, a brave man. 

7. En is used for the English words some or any, expressed or 
understood, but not followed by a noun; en has also the sense of 

of them, thereof generally understood in English sentences, par- 
ticularly in answers to questions. [§ 39, (17.) ? 104, § 110, (2.)(3.)] 

-yous des souliera do cuir ? Have you leather shoes f 

I ai. I hare sonic, I have (of them). 

Votre fils en a-t-il? lias your son any 1 

?. An adjective used substantively, and having a partitive signiGca- 
tion (in a sentence containing the pronoun en), must be preceded by 
the preposition de, in the same manner as if the noun were expressed. 
[Sec l:.' 1. L. 8.] 

Avcz-voua do bonnes plumes? Have you good pens? 

Non, maiaj'en ai de mauvaises. Ko, but 1 have bad ones. 

R&SUlf£ of Exmmpi.ks. 

Avez-vous do beaux jarditis? Have you fine gardens? 

<lui. jell at ^e beaux. [It. 7.] 

Votre frero n'a-t-il pas des souliera Has not your brother black shoes 1 

noirs? 

71 n'en a pas, maia ma sccur en a. Tie has none, but my sister has some. 

Nfa-trelle pas aussi uuo robo Has she not also a white dress t 

blanche? 

Oui, ellc en a une. Yes, she has one. 
Hon, elle n'en a pas. hehaa none. 

Qui in a une ? W/io has one 1 

yui n'en a pas? Who has nonet 

1 Such adjectives, in French, do not commence with a capital. 



PLACE OF ADJECTIVES, ETC. 59 

Le boucher n'a-t-il pas do la viande Has not the hutcher fresh meat? 

fraiche ? (See note, page 38.) 

II en a, il n'en a pas. He has some, he has none. 

II en a beaucoup. He has much (of it). 

11 n'en a guere. He has but little (of it). 

II en a deux livres. He has two pounds (of il). 

Exercise 27. 

Amusant, e, amusing; Bijou, ra. jewel; Laine, f. wool ; 

Americain,e, American; Blanc, blanche, white; Mademoiselle, f. Miss; 

Anglais, e, English; Brave, brave, ivorthy ; Monsieur, m. sir, Mr., 
Arabe, Arabian; Chale, m. shawl; gentleman; 

Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Couteau, m. knife ; Noir, e, black ; 

er ; Francais, e, French ; Parent, m. relation ; 

Beaucoup, much, many ; Guere, little, but little ; Soldat, m. soldier ; 

Beige, Belgian ; Guitare, f. guitar ; Terre, f. land. 

1. Avez-vous une bonne guitare ? 2. Oui, monsieur ; j'ai une 
guitare excellente. 3. Avez-vous de bons habits ? 4. Oui, madame ; 
j'ai de bons habits noirs et de belles robes blanches. 5. Votre mere 
n'a-t-elle pas un chale -de soie ? 6. Oui, mademoiselle ; elle en a un 
de soie et un de laine. 7. L'aubergiste a-t-il de bons chevaux 
anglais ? 8. L'aubergiste a des chevaux anglais, francais, et 
arabes. 9. II en a de superbes. 10. L'ami de votre frere a-t-il des 
bijoux d'or ? 11. Oui, monsieur; il en a. 12. A-t-il aussi des bijoux 
.d'argent? 13. II en a aussi. 14. En a-t-il beaucoup? 15. Non, 
monsieur; il n'en a' guere. 16. Votre ami a-t-il des parents? 
17. Oui, monsieur ; il en a. 18. Ce monsieur a-t-il une bonne plume 
d'acier, ou une belle plume d'or ? 19. II en a une d'acier, et nous 
en avons une d'or. 20. Le general n'a-t-il pas de bons soldats? 
21. II en a de tres braves. 22. Les Americains n'ont-ils pas de bonne 
terre ? 23. Us en ont d'excellente. 24? Le marchand a-t-il des 
couteaux anglais ou francais ? 25. Les couteaux du marchand ne 
sont ni anglais ni francais, ils sont beiges. 

, Exercise 28. 
1. Has your brother Arabian horses ? 2. Tes, sir ; he has some. 
3. Has he handsome ones ? 4. Yes, sir ; he has handsome ones. 
5. Are the good Americans wrong? 6. No, miss (madam); they 
are not wrong, they are right. 7. Have you a French shawl ? 
8. Yes, sir ; I have one, I have a handsome French shawl. 9. Has 
your innkeeper your silver knife or mine ? 10. He has neither yours 
nor mine, he has his sister's handsome steel knife. 11. Has the Belgian 
a good guitar? 12. He has an excellent French guitar. 13. He has 
an excellent one. 14. Has the gentleman amusing books ? 15. Yes, 
sir; he has two. 16. Has the general French or Arabian horses? 



60 SEIZIKJIE LE^ON. 

17. He has French and Arabian horses, but he has no English horses. 

18. Who has Arabian horses ? 19. The Arabian has some. 20. Has 
the Englishman any? 21. The Englishman has some. 22. Has 
your friend's sister a good steel pen ? 23. My friend's sister has one, 
but my relations have none. 24. Are you not wrong, sir ? 25. Yes, 
madam ; I am wrong. 26. Are those knives English ? 27. No, 
sir ; they are Belgian. 28. Have you relations ? 29. I have two, 
and they are here (id). 30. Has the English butcher meat? 31. Yes, 
sir; he has much. 32. Has he much money? 33. He has but 
little. 34. Has the Belgian general brave soldiers? 35. Yes, sir; he 
has good ones. 



LE£ON XVI. LESSON XVI. 

COMPABISON. 

1. Adjectives and adverbs arc always compared in French, as they 
often an- in English, by means of adverbs. 

beau, plussouvent, More beautiful, oflentr. 

•J. The first part of the comparison for the degree in qualify is 

made by : 

Aussi, as, or as vxu ■■h ; \ . _. . , 

,„ / These adverbs oomo almost alwnvs 

I I us, ( ( 

> before an adjective, a participle, or an 
Pas ansa, pas si, not so, not as; (.,.,, 

grand, as tall. Tins grand, I 

..■I, not as tall. Moins grand, less tall, not as (all. 

.".. Por tl - degree in quantity w< 

Autanl de, us much, as many; \ Coming almost always be- 

f fore a noun, an adject.. 

:■■ much or as many ; I substantively, or a post 

J or demonstrative pronoun. 

Autnnt de livres, as many I - i de bona, as many good ones. 

Moins des miens, less of mint. 

1. The second part of the compi i by: 

08, than: when it does not pr do a word expressing ft quantity 

•■ 'I wiili the word following the first adverb of the comparison. 

Autant de livres que votre frere, As many I 

Tout autant d'or que sa sn-ur, Quite as much gold as hit • 

Plus diligent <mo sa suiur, More diligent than his sitter. 



COMPAEI SON. 



CI 



Que de, as, than : before a word expressing a quantity compared with 
that expressed by the word following the adverb of the first part. 



Plus de livres que de maisons, 

Autant d'or que d'argent, 

J'ai tout autant de sucre que de 



More books than houses. 
As much gold as silver. 
I have quite (or just) as much sugar 
as coffee. 



Resume op Examples. 



Avez-vous autant de livres anglais, 

que de livres italiens ? 
J'en ai tout autant. 
J'ai autant de ceux-ci que de ceux- 
la. 
II est aussi heureux que vous. 
Avez-vous plus d'assiettes que de 

plats? 
J'ai plus de ceux-ci que de celles-la. 
Est-il plus complaisant que ses 

freres ? 
Le Francais a-t-il moms de legumes 

que de fruits? 
II a moins de livres que de manus- 

crits. 
II n'a pas autant de ceux-ci que 

de ceux-la. 
En a-t-il moins que voire frere ? 



II en a tout autant. 



Have you as many English books as 

Italian books ? 
I have just as many. 
I have as many of these as of those. 

He is as happy as you. 

Have you more plates than dishes ? 

I have more of these than of those. 
Is he more obliging than his brothers f 

Has the Frenchman fewer vegetables 

than fruits ? 
He has fewer books than manuscripts. 

He has not as many of these as of 

those. 
Has he less (of them) than your 

brother ? 
He has quite as many. 



Exercise 29. 

Per, m. iron ; Manuserit, m. manu- 

Fromage, m. cheese; script; 

Hollandais, m. Dutch- Marechal, m. blacksmith; 

man; Modestie, f modesty; 

Italien, ne, Italian; Soie, f. silk; 

Tres, very ; 

Verre, m. glass. 



Bleu, e, blue ; 

Courage, m. courage , 

Davantage,* more; 

Drap, m. cloth ; 

Ennemi, m. enemy; 

Espagnol, e, Spaniard; Jardin, m. garden; 

Estampe, f. engraving ; Manteau, m. cloak; 

1. Etes-vous aussi content que votre frere ? 2. Je suis aussi con- 
tent que votre frere. 3. Votre pere a-t-il autant de courage que de 
modestie ? 4. ]1 a moins de modestie que de courage. 5. Le 
libraire a-t-il autant de manuscrits que d'estampes ? 6. II a plus de 
celles-ci que de ceux-la. „ 7. A-t-il autant d'amis que d'ennemis? 
8. Ha plus de ceux-ci que de ceux-la. 9. A-t-il autant de pain que 
de fromage? 10. II a tout autant de celui-ci que de celui-la. 
11. Le marechal a-t-il plus de chevaux que votre frere ? 12. II en a 
plus que mon pere, et plus que mon frere. 13. N'avez-vous pas 

1 Davantage means more. It can never be placed before a noun ; it may 
be used instead of plus, at the end of a sentence. 



62 DIX-SEPTIEME LE£OX. 

froid ? 14. Non, monsieur ; je n'ai pas froid, j'ai tres ehaud. 15. Avez- 
vous deux manteaux de drap? 16. J'en ai un de drap et un de ve- 
lours bleu. 17. N'avez-vous pas plus de verres que d'aasjettes ? 
IS. Xous en avons davantagc. 19. Le ruarechal a-t-il phis de fer 
que d'acier ? 20. II n'a pas autant de celui-ei que de celui-la. 
21. II a moins de celui-ci que de celui-lu. 22. Les Hollandais ont-ils 
de beaux jardins? 23. Leurs jardins sont tres beaux. 2-1. Les 
jardins des Italien3 sont plus beaux que ceux des Espaguols. 

Exeucise 30. 
1. Are you more attentive than your sister ? 2. I am not a* atten- 
tive as your brother. 3. Have you more courage than my brother? 
4. I have quite as much. 5. Has the blacksmith as much moo 
iron? G. He has more of the latter than of the former. [L. 10, EL .".J 
7. lias he more modesty than the Spaniard? 8. He has more. 
ft. He has more than your friend's Bister. 10. Are you not cold, sir? 
11. Noysir; but I am afraid and sleepy. 1 Li. Has tin- Dutchman 
more cheese than the Italian ? 13. He has more cheese and more 
y. 11. Have you as much English silk as Italian silk ? 15. 1 
.'. Id. Who has more friends than 
. ire. 18. Has the Span:: 
:' his ? 1:'. El f mine than i I 

L'ii. 1 '■ loaks than cl 

of these than of those. 22. II 

ind good leather shoes. 24. lla\ 
plates than dishes? 25. 
but I have : 
27. N neither cold nor warm. 

30. W e money than the carpenter ? 31. Th 

32, Who lias mor 

Hit has mi 

your friend? 3.'<. I am mure attentive thai. 



I.I'.miN XVII. LESSON XVII. 

1. The superlative \ or bicn, 

I 2, (1 \.)] 

n s"'nt ir.'s utiles. v useful 

tre Uillcur est bion obUgeaot 



COMPARISON, ETC. 63 

- 2. The superlative relative is formed by adding the article le, la, 

les, to a comparative. [§ 14-2, (9.)] 

Yotre neves est le plus savant de tous. Your nephew is the most learned of all. 

3. Encore is used in French in the sense of more, some more, any 
more, still, — used affirmatively and interrogatively, but not nega- 
tively. 

Avez-vous encore du cafe ? Have you any more coffee ? 

J'ai encore du cafe. / have more (or some more) coffee. 

J'en ai encore. i" have some more, or some left. 

4. Ne-^plus is used in the sense of not any more, and no more, or 
none left. 

Je n'ai plus de livres. I have no more books. 

Je n'ai plus de chocolat. 1 have no chocolate left. 

5. Ne — guere means but little, but few. 

Je n'ai guere d'amis. I have but feio friends. 

Je n'en ai guere. i" have but few — but little. 

6. The pronouns moi, toi, lui, eux, are used instead of the nom- 
inative pronouns je, tu, il, ils, after the g/ue of a comparison, when 
the verb is understood. 

Yous etes plus heureux que moi. You are happier than I. 

Vous avez plus de merite que lui. You have more merit than he. 

Resume of Examples, 

Votre marchand est bien obligeant. Your merchant is very obliging. 

Voila, le meilleur de ces garcons. That is the best of those boys. 

Nous avons encore des amis. We have some more (or still) friends. 

Vous avez encore du credit. You have still (or yet) credit. 

Avez-vous encore une piastre? Have you a dollar left? 

Le macon a-t-il encore des briques 1 Has the mason more bricks ? 

II n'en a plus. He has no more — he has none left. 

II n'a plus de briques. He has no more bricks. 

II n'en a guere. He has but few. 

II n'en a plus guere. He has but few left. 

Je n'ai guere de livres. I have but few books. 

Avez-vous plus de courage que lui ? Have you more courage than he ? 

II a moins de courage que moi. He has less courage than I. 

Combien de piastres avez-voua en- How many dollars have you still, or 
core ? have you left ? 

Exercise 31. 

Correct, e, correct; Dictionnaire, m. diction- Savant, e, learned; 

Courage, m. courage ; ary ; Sceur, f. sister ; 

Credit, m. credit; Neveu, m. nephew ; Saladc, f. salad; 

Beaucoup, much ; Niece, f. niece ; Tante, f. aunt ; 

Boyer, Boyer ; Nouvelles, f. news; Tous, all; 

Jardin, m. garden ; Quel, which, which one ; Ville, f. town, city. 



64 DIX SEPTIEME LEQON. 

1. Votre dictionnaire est-il tres correct? 2. II est plus correct que 
celui de Boyer. 3. Votre dictionnaire est le plus correct de tous. 
4. Quel est le meilleur de ces jardins ? 5. Celui-ci est le meilleur de 
tous les jardins de la ville. 6. Avez-vous encore de l'argent ? 7. Je 
n'ai plus d'argent, mais j'ai encore du credit. 8. Avons-nous encore 
de la salade ? 9. Nous n'en avons plus. 10. Nous n'avons plus de 
viande. 11. Qui en a encore? 12. Mes freres et mes sceurs en ont 
encore. 13. En avez-vous encore beaucoup ? 14. Je n'en ai plu3 
gucre. 15. Votre tante a-t-elle plus de robes que votre niece? 
1G. Elle n'en a pas beaucoup. 17. Votre neveu est-il plus savant 
que votre niece ? 18. II n'est pas aussi savant qu'elle. 19. Elle est 
plus savante que lui. 20. Avez-vous encore froid ? 21. Je n'ai plus 
froid, j'ai bien chaud. 22. N' avez-vous plus de nouvelles ? 23. Jo 
n'en ai plus. 24. En avez-vous beaucoup ? 25. Je n'en ai guere. 

Exercise 32. 

1. ITas your brother a very good dictionary? 2. TJis dictionary is 
not very correct 3. Has your father more courage than he? 1. He 
has much more courage than your oephew. 5. Have your brothers 
credit? G. They have but little credit, but they have money. 7. Is 
your aunt obliging? 8. My aunt is very obliging. 9. Have you still 
books, pens and paper? 10. I have no more books, but I have still 
good pens and excellent English paper. 11. Who has still paper? 
12. [ have no more, but my brother has some more. 13. Bar 
any news, sir? 14. No, madam ; I have none to-day. 15. Have yon 
tch wood a> my brother's son? 16. I have more th;in you or he. 
17. Axe yon still wrong? 18. No, -ir, I am do longer ( phut) wrong, 
1 am right 19. Are your sisters still hungry? 20. Tiny arc neither 
hungry nor thirsty, but they are still sleepy. 21. Is your niece as 
learned as I is more learned than he and {g%te) his aunt 

23. Save you no aews, sir? 24 No, madam; I have no more d 
25. Who has news? 2G. I have no more. 27. Have you them all? 
28. 3TeS,sir; I have them all. 29. Has your aunt much of it left? 
30, Sue has but little more of it. 31. Has your brother anymore 
English horses? 32. He has no more. 3.1. He has two more. 34 Have 
you a handsome French shawl left ? 35. I have no more French 
shawls, but I have an English one. 



ADVERBS OE QUANTITY, ETC. 65 



LEgON XVIII. LESSON XVIII. 

ADVERBS OF QUANTITY. — QUELQUE CHOSE, &C. 

1. The adverbs of quantity, combien, how much, how many ; trop, 
too much, too many; beaucoup, much, many; assez, enough; peu, 
little, few ; guere, but little, few ; and the word pas, meaning no, when 
coming before a noun or an adjective, are followed by the preposi- 
tion de. 

Combien de fleurs avez-vous ? How many flowers have you. 

J'ai beaucoup de fleurs. J have many flowers. 

Vous avez trop de loisir. You have too much leisure. 

Notre sceur a assez de temps. Our sister has time 



2. The adverb lien, used in the sense of beaucoup, (much, many,) is 
followed by the preposition de, joined to or blended with the article 
le, la, les. [L. 6.] 

Vous avez bien de la complaisance. You have much "kindness. 
Elle a bien des amis. She has many friends. 

3. Quelque chose, something, any thing [L. 7, 6.] and rien, nothing, 
not any thing, take de before an adjective. 

Votre ami a quelque chose d'agre- Your friend has something pleasant. 

able. 

Avez-vous quelque chose de bon? Have you any thing good? 

Je n'ai rien de bon. / have nothing (not any thing) good. 

4. Quel, m., quelle, f., quels, m. p., quelles, f. p., are used interro- 
gatively for which or what before a noun. 

Quelle serviette avez-vous ? Wliat or which napkin have you ? 

Quelles bourses votre ami a-t-il ? What purses has your friend ? 

5. Que is used for ivhat before a verb. 

Qu'avez-vous ? What is the matter with you 1 

6. Lequel, m., laquelle, f., lesquels, m. p., lesqueV.es, f. p., are used 
absolutely for the word which, not followed by a noun, and equiva- 
lent to which one, which ones. 

Lequel votre ills a-t-il? Which (one) has your son? 

Lesquelles avons-nous ? Which (ones) have we ? 

7. Quelques is used before a plural noun for a few, some; quelques 
wis, m., quelques unes, £, are used absolutely, with the same mean- 
ing — Plusieurs means several, and is invariable. 

le Danois a-t-il quelques pommes? Has the Dane a few apples f 
II en a quelques unes. He has a few. 

II en a plusieurs. He has several. 



CG 



DII-HUITILME LECOU. 



Resumk of Examples. 



Combien de poircs avcz-vous ? 
Nous avoD3 beaucoup de poires. 
Nous en avons beaucoup. 
Nous avons assez de cerises. 
Nous uen avons pas assez. 
Yous n'avez guere de pecbes. 
Votre jardinier a bien dcs pecbes. 
Navez-vous pas de pechcs ? 
J'ai beaucoup de pecbes et d'abri- 

cots. 
Lo boucber a-t-il quelquo cboso de 

bon? 
II a quelquo cboso do bon ct do 

inauvais. 
II n'a rien de bon. 
Que lies poires avcz-vous? 
Nous avons celles de vutre sceur. 
Quel habit m. avez-vi 
Nous avona celui du tailleur. 
bon '! 

- 'US? 

Lesquela votre Opera a-t-il? 
J'ai du fruit niur. 



How many pears have yout 

We have many pears. 

We have many (of them). 

We hare cherries enough. 

We have not enough (of them). 

You have but few peaches. 

Your gardener has many peaches. 

Have you no peaches f 

1 have many j^aches and apricots. 

Has, the butcher any thing good? 

He has something good and bad. 

He has not any thing (nothing) good. 
What or which j^ears have yout 

Which or tcliat coat have yout 
We have the tad 

What have you goodt 
yout 

ij' i ur brother t 
fruit. 



Abricot, m. aj 
Anana, 
Beam . 

y ; 



ExEBCISB 33. 

Jardinier, in. g i 

Kb ur, 1. 

; rehouse ; 
Miir, «■. 
< 'Ih-lf, n,. 



Toivro, in. 
Porame, 1" i 
Pomme do terro, f 

Prune, f plum ; 
Sucre, in. augar ; 
Thd i ... 



a-i-il ? 2. Tl n'en a 
i na- 
.': -I. II a'en a guere, mais il a beaucoup debeurrei 
& Votre jardinier a-t-il beaucoup de cerises? i'>. 11 a plu 
que de prunes. 7. Les prun< - 

8, I. • meilleures que les prunes. 9. Avcz-vous quel- 

10. Nuns in avons quelques 

bricots. 11. ■ a-t-il (juel- 

son jardin? 12. II a quelque i 
13. I! a de I ■ belles fleura. 1 1. 

jardinier. 1^. N"av« v.-\ 

; jo no les ai pus. 20. CJui en a beaucoup ? 21. Pi 



NUMBERS. — DAY OF TIIE MONTH. 07 

a beaucoup. 22. J'en ai quelques unes. 23. Avez-vous assez de 
the? 24. J'en ai assez. 25. J'en ai plus que lui. 
Exercise 34. 
1. Has your gardener many vegetables ? 2. Yes, sir ; he has many. 
3. How many gardens has he ? 4. He has several gardens and seve- 
ral houses. 5. Have you many books ? 6. I have but few, but my 
friend has many. 7. What coat has your brother ? 8. He has a good 
cloth coat. 9. Has your uncle many peaches ? 10. He has but few 
peaches, but he has many cherries. 11. How many plums has the 
tailor ? 12. The tailor has no plums, he has cloth and silk. 13. What 
silk has your friend the merchant ? 14. He has a great deal (beau- 
coup) of silk, and a great deal of money. 15. Has the gardener any 
thing good in (dans) his garden ? 16. He has many pineapples. 
17. Has he more vegetables than fruit? 18. He has more of this than 
of those. 19. Has your uncle many pears and cherries ? 20. He has 
a few, and he has many apples and plums. 21. Have you a few ? 
22. I have still many, but my brother has no more. 23. Which 
peaches has he ? 24. He has large (grosses) peaches. 25. Which 
(ones) have you ? 26. I have the best peaches. 27. Has the mer- 
chant any thing good in Iris warehouse ? 28. He has nothing good in 
his warehouse, but he has something good in his garden. 29. How 
many potatoes has the foreigner ? 30. He has not many. 31. Has he 
good vegetables ? 32. He has good vegetables. 33. Is he right or 
wrong ? 34. He is right, but you are wrong. 35. He has neither 
this book nor that, he has the bookseller's. 



LECON XIX. LESSON XIX. 

THE NUMBERS THE BAY OP THE MONTH. 

1. The relative pronoun, que, whom, which, that, and the conjunc- 
tion, que, that, are never omitted in French, and must be repeated 
before every verb depending on them. [§ 109.] 

Les crayons que j'ai, sont meilleurs Thepencils (which) I have, are letter 
que ceux que vous avez. than those (which) you have. 

2. Ke, before the verb, and que after it, are used in the sense of 
only, but. 

Jo n'ai qu'un ami. I have hut one friend. 

3. L'un et l'autre, means both; les uns et les autres, these and 
those, the latter and the former. [§ 41, (11.)] 

Yous avez l'un et l'autre. You have both. 



GS 



DIX-XEUTIEME L E £ O X . 



4. Cardinal 


and Ordinal jSTcmbeks as far as twenty. [§ 22, 23.] 




Cardinal. 


Ordinal. 


TTn, m. une, 


f. One, a, an. 


Piemier, m. e, / 


First, 


Deux, 


Two, 


Second, i to. e,/. 








Peuxiemc, 


Second, 


Troi?, 


Three, 


Troisieme, 


Tliird, 


Quatre, 


Four, 


Quatricme, 


Fourth, 


Cinq, 


Five, 


Cinquiemc, 


Fifth, 


Six, 


Six, 


Sixieme, 


Sixth, 


Sept, 


Seven, 


Septic mo, 


Seventh, 


lluit, 


Eight, 


Huitieme, 


Eighth, 


Neu$ 


Nine. 


Neuviemc, 


Mnth, 


Dix, 


Ten, 


Dixierae, 


Tenth, 


Onzo, 


Eleven, 


Onzieme, 


Eleventh, 


Douze, 


Twelve, 


Douzieme, 


Twelfth, 


Treize, 


Thirt,, n, 


Treizieme, 


Thirteenth, 


Quatorze, 


Fur-teen, 


Quatorzicme, 


Fourteenth, 


Quinze, 


Fifteen, 


Quinzieme, 


Fifteenth, 


Seize, 


Sixteen, 


Si izienie, 


nth, 


lnx-.-< pt, 


Seventeen, 


ptieme, 


Seventeenth, 


Dix-huit, 


tleen, 


Dix-huitieme, 


Eighteenth, 


]>ix-neuf, 


teen, 


Dix-neuvieme, 


nth, 


Yingt, 


Twenty. 


Vingtieme, 


Twentieth. 



5. The cardinal numbers are used, in French, for the day of the 
month, except the first, f >r which the ordinal number j 
Bubstil 



Le dix aout, lo cinq juillet, 

Le premier du moia prochain. 



hejffth tf July. 
/ next month. 



C. The verb avoir. I (2.)] for the day 

of the month. The verb Ore may also be used. 



Quel jour du moia avons-nous? 
ns le vingt 

dix. 



What day of the month is itt 

I ■ th. 
To-day is the b nth. 



7. B< ford the word onze, the article le or la is not i 
Noua avona le onze de deccmbro, It is th- eleventh of D 

R&BUlrfl OF EXAMPLES. 



L'eiivricr a-t-il lea outila quo vous 
[Ue j'ai, Pent- II 

bonnes que ceUes que v u 
is? 

lis mon 
ir. re en a i ■ 
Avons-noua le quatorze du moia? 



workman the t 

Are the huuses which 1 have, as good 

as tlio.se which you /. 
II iw ma youf 

I 

Is it the fourteenth day of the 
month T 



lu this word and its derivatives, c liaa tho sound of g hard. 



NUMBKES. — DAY OF ^WMOSflD. GO 

Non, monsieur; nous n'avonsquelo XTo, sir; it is only the eleventh. 

onze. 

Lequel de ces deux volumes avez- Which of those two volumes have you 1 

vous ? 

J'ai 1'iin et l'autre. I have loth. 

Avez-vous la premiere place, ou la Have you the first, or the second 

deuxieme ? place ? 

J'ai la premiere, et mon frere a la I have the first, and my brother has 

deuxieme. the second. 

Exercise 35. 

Aujourd'hui, to-day; Fevrier, m. February ; Outil, m. tool; 

Canelle, f. cinnamon; Franc, m. franc; Ouvrage, m. work; 

Centime, m. centime — Histoire, f. history; CEuvres, f. works; 

the lOOtfi part of a Italien, m. Italian; Place, f. place ; 

franc; Kilogramme, m. kilo- Quart, m. quarter; 
Combien, how much, how gramme — about two Septembre, m. Septem- 

many ; pounds ; her ; 

Cravate, f. cravat; Menuisier, m. joiner ; Volume, m. volume. 

Demi, half, § 84, (2.) Mousseline, f. muslin; 

1. Le cheval que vous avez est-il bon ? 2. II est meilleur que celui 
que vous avez, et que celui de notre ami. 3. Combien d'enfants avez- 
vous ? 4. Je n'en ai qu'un, mais l'ltalien en a plus que moi. 5. Avons- 
nous le dix septembre ? 6. Non, monsieur ; nous avons le neuf de 
fevrier. 7. Avez-vous ma cravate de soie, ou ma cravate de mousse- 
line ? 8. J'ai l'une et l'autre. J6. Avez-vous huit kilogrammes de 
canelle? 10. ISTon, monsieur'] je n'en ai qu'un demi-kilogramme. 
11. Combien de francs avez-vous, monsieur? 12. Je n'ai qu'un demi- 
franc, mais mon ami a un franc et demi. 13. Votre sceur a-t-elle 
vingt-cinq centimes ? 14. Oui, monsieur ; elle a un quart de franc. 
15. N'avons-nous pas le premier aout? 16. Non, monsieur; nous 
avons le six septembre. 17. Est-ce aujourd'hui le dix ? 18. Non, 
monsieur j c'est le onze. 19. Votre frere a-t-il la premiere place ? 
20. Non, monsieur; il a la dixieme. 21. Yotre menuisier a-t-il 
beaucoup d'outils ? 22. Oui, monsieur ; il en a beaucoup. 23. Cet 
ouvrage a-t-il dix volumes ? 24. Non, monsieur ; il n'en a que neuf. 
25. J'ai le sixieme volume des ceuvres de Moliere, et le premier vo- 
lume de l'histoire de France de Michelet. 

Exercise 16. 
1. Is that cinnamon good ? 2. That cinnamon is better than yours 
and your brother's. [R. 1.] 3. What day of the month is it to-day ? 
4. It is the sixth. 5. Has your father twenty francs ? 6. No, sir; he 
has only six francs fifty centimes. 7. How many volumes has your 
work ? 8. It has many, it has fifteen. 9. Has the joiner read (lu) the 
second volume of Michelet's history of France ? 10. Yes, sir ; he has 



TO vn'GTioE lEgox. 

read the second volume (of it). 11. Has your friend Moliere's works ? 
12. He has only two volumes of them. 13. Have you my cloth coat 
or my velvet coat ? 11. We have both. 15. We have this and that. 
16. How much cinnamon have you? 17. We have two kilogrammes. 
]8. How many centimes has the merchant ? 19. He has twenty-six. 
20. Have you the third or the fourth place ? 21. 1 have neither the 
third nor the fourth, I have the tenth. 22. Are you not ashamed to- 
day ? 23. No, sir ; I am not ashamed, but I am afraid. 24. Have 
you a quarter of a franc ? 25. No, sir ; but I have half a franc. 
20. Is it the sixth of July ? 27. No, sir ; it is the fourth of March. 
28. Has your uncle six children ? 29. No, sir ; he has only one. 
30. Have you ten kilogrammes of meat? 31. I have only five kilo- 
grammes. 32. Is the butcher's meat good ? 33. It (elle) is not very 
good. 34. How many kilogrammes have you (of it)? 35. I have 
only two, but my brother has four. 



LEQON XX. LESSON XX. 

Tin; TIMK OF THE 1>.\V. — AOB, ETC. 

1. For the time of the day, the verb Ctre is used unipcrsonally in 
• as the verb to be is used 111 English for 
L The word heure, sing heurea, plur. represents the 
ions, o'clock, or time, and must always be expressed. 

• o'clock (time) isitt 
II eat one b 

Jl est dix heuros. It is ten; it is ten o'clock. 

': in the day, and minuit, for mul- 
nujht, or twdoe <it night. J'ouzc hcurcs is nev< ipt in tho 

hours. 

Kst-il ini.li? Est-Q minuit? Is il noon ? Is it mulnvjhtt 

I ] answer to the English expres- 
sions, a juai . &c. 

II est neaf hemes si quart r nine. 

J 1 is /in// oft* r 
It is half ajl 

•1. Jfirihs un quart. itnules, answer to tho English ex- 

pressions, a quarhr Injure, twenty minutes before, &e. 



THE TIME OP THE DAT, ETC. 71 

H est dix heures moms un quart. II wants a quarter of ten. 
II est neuf heures moins dix mi- It is ten minutes before nine. 
nutes. 

5. The word demi, preceding the word heure, does not vary. 
Placed after it, it is variable. [§ 84, (2.) (3.)] 

Une demi-heure. Half an hour. 

Une heure et demie. An hour and a half. 

6. The verb avoir, is used actively [§ 43, (2,) (3,)] in French, in 
speaking of age, and the word, an, year, is always expressed. 

Quel age avez-vous ? How old are~you ? lit. What age have 

you? 
J'ai plus de vingt ans. I am more than twenty. 

7. Plus de, moins de, are used for more than, less than, before a 
number. 

Avons-nous plus de dix metres de Have we more than ten metres of this 

cette toile d'Hollande ? Holland (Holland linen) 1 

Vous en avez moins de six aunes. You have less than six ells of it. 

Resume of Examples. 

II n'est pas encore deux heures. It is not yet two o'clock. 

Est-il une heure et demie ? Is it half-past one ? 

II est midi et quart ou midi et demi. It is a quarter or half-past twelve. 

II est huit heures moins un quart. It wants a quarter of eight. 

Quel age votre fils a-t-il ? How old is your son ? 

II n'a que dix-huit ans. He is only eighteen years old. 

Votre beau-frere n'a-t-il pas plus de Is not your brother-in-law more than 

dix-neuf ans ? nineteen years old ? 

Ma belle-soeur n'a pas moins de dix- My sister-in-law is not less than eigh- 

huit ans et demi. teen years and a half. 

Est-il plus de dix heures d votre Is it more than ten o 1 clock by your 

montre ? watch ? 

II n'est que neuf heures d mon It is only nine by my clock. 

horloge. 

Votre fils est-il plus age que le Is your son older than mine t 

mien? 

II est plus jeune que le votre. He is younger than yours. 

EXEECISE 37. 

Age, e, old; Cela, that; Jour, m. day ; 

Aune, f. e«; Cinquante, fifty ; Maintenant, now; 

Beau-frere, m. brother- Cousin-germain, m. first Mars, m. March; 

in-law ; cousin ; Metre, m. metre, a French 

Beau-fils, m. son-in-law ; Enfant, m. child ; measure; about three 

Beau-pere, m. father-in- Fevrier, m. February; French feet ; about 1.09 

law ; Horloge, f. clock ; yards ; 

Belle-mere, f. mother-in- Indienne, f. printed cal- Mois, m. month ; 

law; ico ; B,uban, m. ribbon; 

Belle-sceur, f sister-in- Italienne, f. Italian; Tard, late; 

Jeune, young ; Verge, f. yard. 



72 VINGTIEME LE5ON. 

1. Votre beau-frere est-il plus age que le mien ? 2. Le votre est 
plus jeune que le mien. 3. Quel age votre belle-mere a-t-elle ? 4. Eile 
a pres de cinquante ans. 5. Quelle heure est-il maintenant ? G. II 
est six heures passees. 7. Etes-vous certain de cela? 8. Oui, 
monsieur ; j'en suis certain. 9. Est-il plus de deux heures d votre 
montre? 10. II n'est que midi a ma montre. 11. Avez-vous plus 
de cinq ans, mon enfant ? 12. Je n'ai pas encore quatre ans. 
13. Avez-vous plus de six verges d'indienne ? 14. J'en ai moins do 
trois metres. 15. Combien d'aunes de ruban votre beau-pere a-t-il ? 
1G. II n'a guere do ruban, il n'en a qu'une demi-aune. 17. Est-il midi 
moins un quart ? 18. II est plus tard, monsieur ; il est midi et quart 
19. Quel jour du mois avons-nous ? 20. Nous avons le six octobxe. 
21. N'est-ce pas le huit fevrier ? 22. Non, madame; e'est le Luit de 
mars. 23. Combien de jardins votre cousin-germain a-t-il ? 21. II 
n'en a qu'un, mais il est trus beau. 25. II en a plus de dix. 

Exercise 38. 

1. How old is your brother-in-law? 2. Ho is fifty years old. 
3. b yonr aster-in-law older than mine? 4. No, sir; my sister-in- 
law :- \ [3 your son twenty-five years old? 
G. No, madam; he is only sixteen 7. What day of the month is 
it to-day? 8. It is the eleventh. 9. Have you the twentieth 
riand's workB? 10. No, madam; v. 
ith. 11. What o'clock is it, sir ? 12. Itisonlytwi 

1".. Is it no later? 14. It wants a quarter of one. 15, It U a quar- 
ter after five. 16. How many yards of this Holland (I 
lui(I>\ £) have you ? 17. I have ten ells and a half. 18. I ha\ 

yards of Italian silk. 1" •thcr- 

in-law younger than your father-in-law? 20. Sb . than 

he. 21. Are you twenty years old ? 'si. No, sir; I am only i 
teen and a half 23. We arc sure (s6r) that it is ten o'clo. 
are sure that it is noon. 25. Is it twenty minutes of ten ? 2d 
sir; it is a quarter b<foro twelve (midi). 27. How many houses 

only one, but my sister-in-law has 
29. Have you mine (f.) or yours? 30. I have neither yours nor 
mine. I have your son-in-law's. 31. Has your mother-in-law fivo 
of that printed calico? 32. She has only two yards of it. 
33. What o'clock \i it by (a) your watch? 34. It is hall- 
four, by my watch. 35. It is more than seven o'clock by mino 
(i la mienne.) 



TIIE FOUR CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. 73 

LEgON XXL LESSON XXL 

THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS OF VERES. 

1. The four classes or conjugations, into which the French verbs 
are divided are distinguished by the endings of the present of the 
infinitive [§ 44]. The first conjugation ends in er ; as chanter, to 
sing ; donner, to give; parler, to speak; chercher, to seek. 

The second conjugation ends in ir ; as ch^rir, to cherish; ptjnir, 
to punish ; munir, to provide ; finir, to finish. 

The termination of the infinitive of the regular verbs of the third 
conjugation, is evoir ; as devoir, to owe ; recevoir, to receive ; that 
of the irregular verbs is oir, as valoir, to he worth. 

The fourth conjugation ends in re : as, rendre, to render ; fendre, 
to split; tendre, to stretch ; vendre, to sell. 

2. A verb preceded by another verb (other than the auxiliaries 
avoir and ttre), or by a preposition (other than en), is put in the 
present of the infinitive. 

II va travailler ou lire, He is going to work or to read. 

3. In French, verbs are often connected with others by preposi- 
tions not answering literally to those which accompany the same 
verbs in English. They also often come together without preposi- 
tions. The student will find in § 129, and the following sections of 
the Second Part, lists of verbs, with the prepositions which they re- 
quire after them. 

4. The following idioms are followed by the preposition de when 
they come before a verb (§ 132) : 

Avoir besom, to want; Avoir le temps, to have time or few- 
Avoir coutume, to be accustomed ; ure ; 

Avoir dessein, to intend, to design; Avoir peur, to be afraid; 

Avoir envie, to have a wish, a desire; Avoir raison, to be right; 

Avoir honte, to be ashamed, ; Avoir regret, to regret ; 

Avoir intention, or l'intention, to in- Avoir tort, to be ivrong; 

tend; Avoir sujet, to have reason ; 

Avoir 1© courage, to have courage ; Avoir soin, to take care. 

Cet enfant a besoin de dormir, That child wants to sleep. 

Vous avez honte de courir, You are ashamed to run. 

Resume of Examples. 

Avez- vous quelque chose a, dire ? Have you any thing to say ? 

Je . ' / have nothing to say. 

To s rien a ecrire ? Has your sister nothing to write f 

EH . • . . ecrire. She has two letters to write. 

4 



74 VINGT ET UNIEME L E £ O N. 

A-t-elle le temps de le3 ecrire ? Has slie time to write them t 

Elle n'a pas dessein de les ecrire. She does not design to write them. 

Elle n'a pas l'iutention de les ecrire. She does not intend to niite them. 

Elle n'a pas envie de les ecrire. Slie has no desire to write them. 

Avez-vous peur de danser ? Are you afraid to dance t 

Je n'ai pas honte de danser. J am not ashamed to dance. 

Votrc cousin a raison de sortir. Your cousin is right to go out. 

N'avcz-vous pas soin d'ecrire 1 Do you not take care to write t 

Avez-vous le courage de lui parler ? Have you Vie courage to speak to him t 

Exercise 39. 

Acheter, to buy ; Faire, to make, to do; Marcher, to walk; 

Champ, m. field; - Fatigue, c, tired, weary; Mars, m. March; 

Danser, to dance; Gazette, f. newspaper; Ne — rien, nothing; 

I»e bonne heure, early; Juillet, m. July ; Page, C 

Dormir, to sleep; Juin, m. June; Seize, sixteen ; 

Ecrire, to write; Lire, to read; Travailler, to work, labor. 

1. Votre bellc-merc a-t-elle quelque chose a (aire? 2. E3Ie n'a rien 
a faire. 3. A-t-elle deux pages S ecrire? 4. Non, monsieur ; elle 
n'en a qu'une. 5. Avez-vous l'intcntion de lire cettc gazette ? 6. Oui, 
madame; j'ai ("intention de la lire. 7. Avez-vous raison d'aofaeterun 
habit de velours? 8. J'ai raison d'en acheter on. 9. Votre petite 
Bile a-trelle beeoin de dormir ? 10. Oui, monsieur; elle a besoin de 
dormir, elk i oua peur de tomber? 12. Je 

n'ai pas peur de tomb r. 13. Lojardinier a-t-il le temps tie travaiHer 
dans les champs? 1 1. II n'a pas envie de travailler dans les champs. 
16. Vos champs sont-ils que les miens? 1<'>. Di 

jilus grands que les vdtres, 17. Avez-vous honte de marcher? 
n'ai pas honte de marcher, mais j'ai honte de danser. 19. 
. itre flls a-t-il ? 20. 11 a seize ans. 21. A deux 

mars on le cinq juin? 22. Nous avons le vingt-huit juillet. 2:'. 
il n.idi? 24. Non, monsieur ; il n'e mi.li, il n'est quo 

onze 1 henres et demie. 25. Il est encore de bonne heure. 

ExEBCISH 40. 

1. "What ha"* your brother-in-law to do? 2. lie has ; 
writo. :?. Does he want to work ? •!. r<?s, sir; he wai 
9 he intend to read my book? <i. lie doi j not in 
your I .-• no time. 7. Is your 

B. My sister is not ashamed to walk, but my brother i a 

9. Has y. 
nothm is afraid to 

madam; it is not late, it is early. 13. Ha\ a 1 my 

1 No elision takes place Wfuro onzc, onxu 



AVOIE BESOI2ST, ETC. 75 

sister's letter (f.) ? 14. Have you the courage to go to the war ? 15. 1 
have not the courage to go to the war. 16. Is your sister right to buy 
a silk dress (f.) ? 17. Yes, sir; she is right to buy one. 18. Does 
that child want to sleep ? 19. No, sir ; that child does not want to 
sleep, he is not tired. 20. Has your brother's gardener a wish to 
work in my garden? 21. He has a wish to work in {clans) mine. 
22. How old is that child ? 23. That child is ten years old. 24. What 
is the day of the month ? 25. It is the ninth of March. 26. Are you 
afraid to walk ? 27. I am not afraid to walk, but I am tired. 28. Have 
you time to read my brother's book ? 29. I have 'time to read his 
book. 30. Has the joiner a wish to speak? 31. He has a wish to 
work and to read. 32. Is your son afraid of falling ? 33. He is not 
afraid of falling, but he is afraid of working. 34. What o'clock is it ? 
35. It is twelve. 



LEgON XXII. LESSON XXII. 

AVOIR EESOIN, ETC. £TRE EACHE, ETC. 

1. The expressions, avoir besoin, to want; avoir soin, to take care; 
avoir honte, to be ashamed ; avoir peur, to be afraid, require also the 
preposition de before a noun. Those idioms mean literally, to have 
need, to have care, etc. 

Avez-vous besoin de votre frere ? Do you want your brother f 

J'ai soin de mes effets. I take care of my things. 

II a honte de sa conduite. He is ashamed of his conduct. 

Elle a peur du chien. She is afraid of the dog. 

2. As these expressions require the preposition de before their ob- 
ject, they will, of course, require the same preposition before the 
pronoun representing that object. 

J'ai besoin de vous. I want you. 

J'ai soin de lui. I take care of him. 

De qui avez-vous besoin ? Whom do you want ? 

De quoi a-t-elle besoin ? What does she want ? 

3. When the object is not a person, and has been mentioned be- 
fore, the pronoun en takes the place of the preposition de, and that 
of the pronoun representing the object. 

Avez-vous besoin de votre cheval? Bo you want your horse ? 

J'en ai besoin. / want it. 

4. The expressions, etre fache, to be sorry ; etre etonne, to be aston- 



VINGT-DEUXIEME LECOJT. 



ished ; etre content, to be satisfied, require the preposition de before a 
noun or pronoun. [§ 88.] 



Je suis fuche de son malheur. 
Je suis etonne de sa conduite. 
Je suis coutont do luL 



lam sorry for his misfortune, 
lam astonished at his conduct 
I am pleased with him. 



5. £tre fuche, in the sense of to be angry, requires the preposition 
contre. 

Tous t-tes fache contre moL You are angry with me. 

G. For rules on the government of adjectives, see § 87, and fol- 
lowing Sections. 

Resume of Examples. 



Avoz-vous besoin d'argent? 
J'ai beeoin d'argent 
Je n'cii ai pas besoin. [R. 3.] 
En avc/.-vous I 

J'en ai beeoin, ej mon fri.ro en a 
besoin 

■in do votro I 
luL 1 

I • M besoin ? 
iiniro. 
■▼< >us .soin do votro livro? 
J'en ai soin. 

J'ai «<>in do lui.' 

Votre frere .-til f&che* contra moi? 
J'en si pear. 

itO? 

Je nai 

A v- /-\ .' choso? 

Jo n'ai beeoin d 



Do you want money? 
I want numey. 
I do not want any. 
Do you want anyT 
1 want some, and my broQier wants 
some too. 

want your brother t 
Mm, 

mil 
J want a dictionary. 

ifyourbookt 
I 

Do you yiurfaUicrt 

him. 
• angry with met 

Are you air, tut if this do<j t 
' him. 

rniedf 
/ am a 

I j ttitli'jt 

I want ;. 



ExEBi IBS 11. 

Carcon, m. 



Lire, to read; 
l'arlf r, to speak; 

r, to work ; 
Vieox 



ii. want, need; 

Oondoite, f. conduct; 

int ; 

unme, m. young 
wish, desire; man ; 

1. Qui a besoin de pain ? 2. Personnc n'en a besoin, 8. NWcz- 

I in de votre domestique? 4. Oui. ■ 

Votre jardinier a-t-il 

1 Tho word en should bo avoided, as much as possible, in relation to 



AVOIR BESOIN, ETC. 77 

madame ; il en a soin. 7. A-t-il bien soin de son vieux pere ? 8. Oui, 
monsieur ; il a bien soin de lui. 9. Votre garcon a-t-il honte de sa 
conduite? 10. Oui, monsieur; il en a honte. 11. Avez-vous peur 
de ce cbeval-ci ou de celui-la ? 12. Je n'ai peur ni de celui-ci ni de 
celui-la. 13. Notre domestique a-t-il soin de vos effets ? 14. II en 
a bien soin. 15. Avez-vous peur de parler ou de lire ? 16. Je n'ai 
peur ni de parler ni de lire. 17. Etes-vous etonne de cette affaire ? 
18. Je n'en suis pas etonne. 19. En etes-vous fache? 20. Oui, 
monsieur ; j'en suis bien fache. 4^21. Avez-vous besoin dece garcon? 
22. Oui, madame ; j'ai besoin de lui. 23. N' avez-vous pas besoin de 
son livre? 24. Je n'en ai pas besoin. 25. Avez-vous envie de 
travailler ou de lire ? 26. Je n'ai envie ni de travailler ni de lire, 
j'ai envie de me reposer car je suis fatigue. 

Exeecise 42. 

1. Do you want your servant ? 2. Yes, sir ; I want him. 3. Does 
your brother-in-law want you ? 4. He wants me and my brother. 1 
5. Does he not want money ? 6. He does not want money, he has 
enough. 7. Is your brother sorry for his conduct ? 8. He is very 
sorry for his conduct, and very angry with you. 9. Does he take 
good (bien) care of his books ? 10. He takes good care of them. 
11. How many volumes has he ? 12. He has more than you, he has 
more than twenty. j^3. What does the young man want? 14. He 
wants his clothes. -j-15. Do you want to rest (yous reposer) f 16. Is 
not your brother astonished at this? 17. He is astonished at it. 
18. Have you a wish to read your brother's books ? 19. I have a 
wish to read them, but I have no time. 20. Have you time to work ? 
21. I have time to work, but I have no time to read.^,22. Does the 
young brother take care of his things? 23. He takes good care of 
them. 24. Is that little boy afraid of the dog? 25. He is not 
afraid of the dog, he is afraid of the horse. 26. Do you want bread ? 
27. I do not want any. 28. Are you pleased with your brother's 
conduct ? 29. I am pleased with it. 30. Has your brother a wish 
to read my book ? 31. He has no desire to read your book, he is 
weary. 32. Is that young man angry with you, or with his friends ? 
33. He is neither angry with me nor with his friends. 34. Do you 
want my dictionary ? 35. I want your dictionary and your brother's. 

1 Repeat the preposition de. 



78 



YINGT-TKOISIEME LEgON. 



LEgox xxm. 



LESSON XXIII. 



THE PEESENT AM) PAST rAETICTPLES.- 
THE INDICATIVE. 



-THE PEESENT OF 



1. If the ending or distinguishing characteristic of the conjugation 
of a verb, in the present of the infinitive, be removed, the part re- 
maining will be the stem of the verb : — 



1st Conj. 
Chant-er 



2d Conj. 
Fin-ir 



3d Conj. 
Ree-evoir 



4th Conj. 
Bend-re. 



2. To that stem are added, in the different simple tenses of a reg- 
ular verb, the terminations proper to the conjugation to -which it be- 
longs. [§ GO.] 

3. rAHTICrPLE Tni 





Chant-ant 


Fin-issant 


Bec-evaat 


Bend-ant 




£>t?i'Jlh'J 






ing. 






!. Ta;:ti.ii-i.i: Fast. 






Chteoi-i 


Fin-i 




Rend-u 




Bung 






red. 




5. Tluminations of tiii: Presxnt or titk Ijjdicativi:. 


Jo 


clmnt -o 


fin -is 


roc -oia 


rend -s 


/ 


(■hi J 


fnith 






Tu 


pari 


clii'-r -is 


ape re 


rend -s 


Thou 




Chfi 






It 


done -o 


(burn -it 


perc -oil 
gawrt 


tend 


11 


(/'>-•« 


/U' ■'■■ ' 




Nona eh, nli -oils 


pan 






We 


seek 


jnininh 


■ five 


hew 


port -cz 


Baifl -issez 


d 


1 -C7, 


Tarn 


curry 


mCm 




J Is 


Dim -int 


an -issent 




raord 


They 


lore, like 






Mf 



0. The present oftho indicative has but one form in French, there- 
fore Je chante, may be rendered ii , / sing, I dosinj } or 
J u ui ringing. 

7. The plural of the present of the indicative may \<'- formed from 
the participle present by changing ant int 

mkm a; finiaaant, no event, now recevona; 

rendant, nous rendons. 






See g 52, (1). 



THE PRESENT OP THE INDICATIVE. 79 

8. This rule holds good not only in all the regular, but in almost 
all the irregular verbs. 

9. Verbs may be conjugated interrogatively in French (except in 
the first person singular of the present of the indicative,) [§ 98, (4.) 
(5.), L. 25, R. 1.] by placing the pronoun after the verb, in all the 
simple tenses, and between the auxiliary and the participle, in the 
compound tenses. 

Chantez-vous bien ? Do you sing well ? 

Avez-vous bien chante ? Have you sung well? 
N'avez-vous pas bien chante? Have you not sung well? 

[L. 7, R. 2.] 

Ne chantez-vous pas bien ? Do you not sing well ? 

Yotre pere parle-t-il bien 1 [L. Does your father speak well ? 

4, R. 6— L. 6, R. 4.] 

10. The verb porter means to carry. It means also to wear, in 
speaking of garments ; apporter means to bring, and emporter, to 
carry away. Aimer means to love, to like, to be fond of, and takes the 
preposition a before another verb. 

Quel habit portez-vous ? What coat do you wear ? 

Je porte un habit de drap noir. i" wear a coat of black cloth. 

Votre frere qu'apporte-t-il ? [L. What does your brother bring ? 

4, R. 6.] 

II apporte de l'argent a son ami He brings money to his friend. 

11. A noun used in a general sense [§ 77 (1.)] takes the article Ze, 
la, T, or les. 

Aimez-vous le bceuf ou le mouton ? Do you like beef or mutton ? 
Je n'aime ni le boeuf ni le mouton. I like neitJier beef nor mutton. 

Resume op Examples. 

Chantez-vous une chanson ita- Do you sing an Italian song? 

lienne ? 

Nous ehantons des chansons alle- We sing German songs. 

mandes. 

Portez-vous ce livre a l'homme ? Do you carry this book to the man ? 

Non, je le porte a mon frere. No, I carry it to my brother. 

p]rnportez-vous tout votre argent ? Do you carry away all your money ? 

J'en emporte seulement une partie. i" carry away only a part of it. 

Pinissez-vous votre lecon aujour- Do you finish your lesson to-day ? 

d'hui? 

Nous la finissons ce matin. We finish it this morning. 

N'aimez-vous pas les enfants? Do you not like children ? 

Je les aime beaucoup. / like them much. 

Recevez-vous beaucoup de lettres ? Do you receive many letters? 

Nous en recevons beaucoup. We receive many. 

Vendez-vous des marchandises ? Do you sell goods ? 

Nous en vendons beaucoup. We sell many. 

Votre frere aime le bceuf et le mouton. Your brother likes beef and mutton. 



80 YINGT-TROISIKilE LE^'OX. 

EXEECISE 4?>. 

C3P We shall hereafter put a hyphen between the stem and the termination of 

the verbs placed in the vocabularies. The number indicates the conjugation. 

Aim-er, 1. to love, to like, Donn-er, 1. to give; Xon sculemcnt, notonlj; 

to be fond of; Fin-ir, 2. to finish ; Lecture, f. reading; 

Autre, • Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish; Farce que, because; 

Assez, enough; Gard-er, 1. to A ep; Faille, £ i 

Ghapeao, m. hat; Gucre, but I Ford-: 

• r, 2. to cherish ; Habits, m. p. clothes, Tort-er. 1. to car 
L'hi.rt-h-er, 1. to seek, to garments; 

look . fat; Reo-evour, 3. to ret 

Compagnon, m. comp^ 

ion; Mairhand, m. merchant; Toujours, aiwagt] 

Dame, f. lady; Matin, m. morning; Travail, in. fcri 

De bonne heure, early; Marchandis 

D-evuir, 3. to owe; Neveu, m. nephew ; Vend- 

1. Totre raCre rume-t-<lV la lecture? [7/1. 11. J 2. Oui, matlemoi- 

-■-il ? 1. T! 

6. Oni, 
inon>. 7. Fourn 

? [B. 11] 10. 

I 

: 
I 

21. 1; aujourd'hui? 

audi i 

. ! 1. 
1. P 

'". 11. J 

•1. 11 

than Qfteea 7. A 






IEUEGULAE TEELS. CUEZ, ETC. 81 

right to finish mine early, and you are wrong not to (de ne pas) fin- 
ish yours. 9. Do you receive much money to-day ? 10. I receivo 
but little. 11. Do we give our best books to that little child ? 12. We 
do not give them, we keep them because we want them. 13. Do 
you sell your two horses ? 14. We do not sell our two horses, we 
keep one of them. 15. Do you finish your work this morning? 
16. Yes, sir; I finish it this morning early:/ 17. Does your brother- 
in-law like fine clothes ? 18. Yes, madam ; he likes fine clothes. 
19. Do you seek my nephew? 20. Yes, sir; we seek him. 
21. Does he lose his time ? 22. He loses not only his time, but ho 
loses money. 23. How much money has he lost to-day ? 24. He 
has lost more than ten dollars. 25. Does your joiner finish your 
house ? 26. He finishes my house and my brother's. 27. Do you 
sell good hats ? 28. We sell silk hats, and silk hats are good. 
[R. 11.] 29. How old is your companion? 30. He is twelve years 
old, and his sister is fifteen. 31. Does your brother like meat? 
32. He likes meat and bread. 33. Do you receive your goods at 
two o'clock ? 34. We receive them at half after twelve. 35. We 
receive them ten minutes before one. 



LEQOX XXIV. LESSOX XXIV. 

IEEEGTjXAE VEBES. CHEZ, ETC. 

1. There are in French, as in other languages, verbs which are 
called irregular, because they are not conjugated according to the 
rule, or model verb of the conjugation to which they belong. [§ 62.] 

2. Many irregular verbs have tenses which are conjugated regu- 
larly. 

3. The singular of the present of the indicative of the irregular 
verbs, is almost always irregular. 

4. In verbs ending in yer, the y is changed into i before an e mute. 1 
[§49.] 

5. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verds, 

Aller, 1. to go ; Envoyer, 1. to send; Venir, 2. to come ; 

Je vai3, / go, do go, or J'envoiepl. 4.] I send, do Je viens, I come, do come, 

am going; send, or am sending ; or am coming; 

Tu vas, Tu envoies, Tu viens, 

II va, II envoie. II vient, 

Nous allons, Nous envoyons, Nous venous, 

Vous allez, Yous envoyez, ■ Yous venez, 

lis vont, Us envoient [R. 4.] I]s viennenf. 

1 Many French authors do mot make that change, but write fenvoye, etc. 
4* 



82 VI.VGT-QUATEIOE LE^OX. 

G. All veri>3 ending in enir are conjugated like venir. 

7. The student will find, in § 62, the irregular verbs alphabetically 
arranged. He should always consult that table, when meeting with 
an irregular verb. 

S. The expression a, la maison, is used for the English at home, at 
Jiis or her house, etc. 

Le chirurgien est-il a la maison ? Is the surgeon at home t 

M011 freve est a la maison. My broUier is at home. 

9. The preposition chez, placed before a noun or pronoun, answers 
to the English, at the house of, with (meaning at the residence o/), 
amony, etc. [§ 142, (3.)] 

Chez mni, chez lui, chez cllo, At my house, at his house, at her house. 

:.i>us, ehcz vous, chez cux, m. At our house, at your house, at Uieir 
■ Ilea, /. house. 

. is literally, at the house 0/ me, at Ute house of him, etc 

hBoeur, At my father's, at my sister's. 

10L ' vers to tho English with, meaning merely 

t/» thecomptu 

Come with us, or with him. 

11. The word y mean* to it, at it, at that place, there. It is gener- 
ally ]' ■ -1 refers alv thing xueu- 

j 104.] 

lb f / ; '.- Hater m y<wr house? 

; ste is Onere, 

12. " rraot, ni in 1 

. \iliary or a 1 by a nomi 

/ have. 

some. Tho words oui or tion, without a verb, would however 

vous chez lui aujourd'hui ? Th you go fa his house to-day t 

hornet 
Oui, monsieur; nous en avoni r • ue have. 

K.'. ■: ■:'. OF K\'AM1 

Ofi lc colonel est-il ? 

• ■iher's. 
t 
...uiiour ; il u'y e*t pas. A'o, sir; he u noL 



IRREGULAR VERBS. CHEZ, ETC. 



83 



Madame votro mere est-elle a la Is your mother at home ? 

maison? 1 
Non, madame ; elle n'y est pas. 
Allez-vous chez nous, ou chez lui ? 



Nous allons chez le capitaine. 
N'est-il pas chez votre frere ? 
Non, monsieur ; il est chez noua. 



No, madam ; she is not. 

Do you go to our house, or to his 

house ? 
We go to the captain's. 
Is he not at your brother 'st 
No, sir ; he is at our house. 



N'envoyez-vous pas vos habits chez Do you not send your clothes to your 

vos soeurs ? sisters' t 

Je les envoie chez elles. / send them to their house. 

N'allez-vous pas chez ce monsieur ? Do you not go to that gentleman's ? 

Je n'y vais pas, 2 je n'ai pas le temps I do not, [R. 12.] I have not time to 



d'y aller aujourd'hui. 



AU-er, 1. ir. to go ; 
Ami, m. friend; 
Associe, m. partner; 
Capitaine. m. captain; 
Demeur-er, 1. to live, 

dwell ; 
Gilet, m. waistcoat; 



there to-day. 
Exercise 45. 

Horloger, m. watch-ma- Peintre, m. painter ; 

Jeer ; Relieur, m. book-binder; 

Hollandais, e, Dutch; Rest-er, 1. to remain, 
Magasin, m. warehouse, live ; 

store, shop; Russe, Russian; 

Maison, f. house ; Ven-ir, 2. ir, to come ; 

Matin, m. morning ; Voisin, e, 



1. Ou allez-vous mon ami ? 2. Je vais chez monsieur votre pere, 
est-il a la maison? 3. II y est ce matin. 4. D'ou venez-vous? 
5. Nous venons de chez vous et de chez votre sceur. 6. Qui est chez 
nous ? 7. Mon voisin y est aujourd'hui. 8. Ou avez-vous l'inten- 
tion de porter ces livres ? 9. J'ai l'intention de les porter chez le fils 
du medecin. 10. Avez-vous tort de rester chez vous ? 11. "Je n'ai 
pas tort de rester a la maison. 12. L'horloger a-t-il de bonnes 
montres chez lui? v 13. II n'a pas de montres chez lui, il en a dans 
son magasin. 14. 'Chez qui portez-vous vos livres ? 15. Je les 
porte chez le relieur. , 16. Allez-vous chez le capitaine hollandais ? 
17. Nous n' allons pas chez le capitaine hollandais, nous allons chez 
le major russe. 18. Est-il chez vous ou chez votre frere? 19. II 
demeure chez nous. 20. Ne demeurons-nous pas chez votre tailleur ? 
21. Vous y demeurez. 22. Votre peintre d'ou. vient-il ? 23. II vient 
de chez son associe. 24. Ou portez-vous mes souliers et mon gilet ? 
25. Je porte vos souliers chez le cordonnier, et votre gilet chez le 
tailleur. 

Exercise 46. 

1. Where does your friend go ? 2. He is going [L. 23, R. 0], to 
your house or to your, brother's. 3. Does he not intend to go to 

1 The French, in speaking to a person whom they respect, prefix the 
word Monsieur, Madame, or Mademoiselle to the word representing their 
interlocutor's relations, or friends. 

a See § 103, (2.) 



84 VINGT-CINQUIEME LE?ON. 

your partner's ? 4. He intends to go there, but he has no time to-day. 
5. What do you "want to-day ? 6. I want my waistcoat, which (qui) 
is at the tailor's. 7. Are your clothes at the painter's ? 8. They arc 
not there, they are at the tailor's. 9. Where do you live, my friend ? 
10. I live at your sister-in-law's. 11. Is your father at home ? 12. No, 
sir ; he is not. 13. Where does your servant carry the wood ? 11. lie 
carries it to the Russian captain's. 15. Does the gentleman who (qui) 
is with your father, live at his house? YlG. No, sir; he lives with 
me. 17. Is he wrong to live with you? 18. No, sir; he is right 
to live with me. 19. Whence (cFoii) comes the carpenter? 20. lie 
comes from his partner's house. 21. Has he two partners ? 22. No, 
sir; he has only one, who lives her- Have you time to 

go to our house, this morning? 2 1. We have time to go (here. 25. We 
intend to go there, and to Bpeak to your sister. 26. Is she at your 

. . Save you brea 1, butter, 
and cheese at home ? 29. We have bread and butt We 

have : «ur watch at 

33. Have you •■■■■ 
watches? 34. I! Who intends to go 

to my father's, this mornin .ends to go there. 



ON XXV. JON XXV. 

rjrXKBBOG OTVE FORM OE THE PRESENT OF THE US 

1. In tl 

which in thai person ha 
I in .•/• r or gir, the common into 
!. T.> r.'ii'i.-r tho verb in 
. [ to th i 

trop? 'inch? 

-ilar of the h 
\>>ir, /<> be a 

Irs? 
tbien vow tlois-jo? 



INTERROGATIVE FORMS, ETC. 85 

3. The form est-ce que is always allowable, and in conversation and 
familiar writing generally preferable, 1 even when the first person 
singular of the present of the indicative of a verb has several syl- 
lables, [§ 98, (6.)] 

Est-ce que je vous envoie des livres ? Do I send you boohs ? 
Est-ce que je commence a parler ? Do I begin to speak ? 

4. Est-ce que may in conversation, be used with all the persons of 
those tenses susceptible of being conjugated interrogatively : — Qu' est- 
ce que vous lisez ? may be said, instead of, Que lisez-vous ? What do 
you read? 

5. Interrogative Form of the Indicative Present of 

Aller, to go. Envoter, to send. Venir, to come. 

Est-ce que je vais ? do I Est-ce que j'envoie ? do Est-ce que je viens ? do I 

go, or am I going ? I send, or am I sending ? come, or am I coming t 

Vas-tu ? Envoies-tu ? Viens-tu ? 

Va-t-il? Envoie-t-il? Vient-il? 

Allons-nous ? Envoyons-nous ? Venons-nous ? 

Allez-vous ? Envoyez-vous ? Venez-vous ? 

Vont-ils ? Envoient-ils ? Viennent-ils ? 

6. The article h, preceded by the preposition d is contracted into 
au before a noun masculine commencing, with a consonant, or an h 
aspirate ; and into aux before a plural noun. [§ 13, (8.)] 

Allez-vous au bal ou au marche ? Do you go to the ball or to market ? 

7. A l'eglise means at or to church; a l'ecole, at or to school : — 
Nous allons & l'eglise et a l'ecole. We go to church and to school. 

8. Quelque part, means somewhere, anywhere ; nulle part, nowhere. 

Voire neveu ou est-il ? Where is your nephew ? 

II est quelque part. He is somewhere. 

II n'est nulle part. He is nowhere. 

Resume op Examples. 

Est-ce que je vais a l'ecole ? Do I go to school? 

Vous allez a l'eglise aujourd'hui. You go to church to-day. 

Est-ce que je commence mon travail? Do I begin my work? 

Est-ce que je parle anglais ? Do I speak English ? 

Est-ce quo j'envoie ce livre a mon Do I send this book to my brother? 

frere ? 

Allez-vous au marche demain ? Do you go to market to-morrow ? 

J' j vais apres-demain. I go there the day after to-morrow. 

1 No Frenchman, for example )( jwould ever say demande-je'? do I ask 7 
apportc-je? do I bring? etc., except perhaps in oratorical style or in poetry. 
This rule will apply also to the imperfect and past definite. 



86 VIXGT-CINQUIKME LE^OX. 

Envoyez-vous vos enfants a lecole? Do you send your children to school t 

Je lcs envoie chcz le professeur. I send them to the professor's. 

Je les j envoie cette apres-midl I send them there this afternoon. 

Vos habits ou sont-ils ? Where are your clothes t 

lis sont quelque part They are somewhere. 

lis ne sont nulle part Tht y are nowhere, 

Est-co que je demeure chez vous ? Do I live at your house t 

ExEKClSE 4 7. 

Absent, e, absent; Cuir. m. lather; Xoir, <\ Hack; 

Adresse, f. address; Depuis, 6 Pcrruquier, m. hair-dress- 

;■•, f. bank; ••, C school; er ; 

Banquier, m. banker; Ecolicr, m. scholar; 
LihY-t, m. note, I 'irch; 

Chapelier, m. hatter ; M.ir- i.- . in. market; 

Concert, m. concert; No-point, not, (a ai . jreen. 

Ooap-er, 1. to cut; c limn pas;) 

1. OQcst-cccju>^ l.z chez le chapelier. 3.1 

que je vaia a la banque? -1. Vous allea a la banque el au concert. 
• je coupe voire Luis ? ( tupes zu mon OOifl 

_ 

d portea us noir. 9. \ 

10. II \a a I'^glise, a !'•' 

1 1. Ne va-(-il pas chez le perruquier? 12. II ne va nullo 

ooir. 15. 

pas chez lui 17. V"ient-fl 

.:. ? 18. II a I'inl 19. A-t-il 

[la grando envi aie il 

n'a paa de l met 2L I ' 

B-VOU8 CO billet i la I 
24. Je l'cnvoie it. sou adresse. 

1. T k hat? 2. You Trcar n hand 

hat. 3. Does the banker go to the bail 

4. II 

7. I 1 

them, yet written K Do 1 send 

10. Y( a lend m i 

1 1. Does your bro! 

1 T! ii«, but in no other caso. This I 

of the eliaiou ol* i. 



IDIOMATIC USE OF ALLBE, VENIE, ETC, 87 

do not go anywhere. 15. Where do you go ? 16. I am going to 
your brother's, is he at home ? 17. He is not at home, he is ab- 
sent. 18. Does your brother live in this village ? 19. He does 
not; [L. 24. 12] he lives at my nephew's. 20. Are you wrong 
to go to school? 21. No, sir; I am right to go to church and to 
school. 22. Do you wish to come to my house ? 23. I like to go to 
your house, and to your brother's. 24. When are you coming to 
our house ? 25. To-morrow, if I have time. 26. Does the banker 
like to come here ? 27. He likes to come to your house. 28. Is the 
hair-dresser coming ? 29. He is not yet coming. 30. What are you 
sending to the scholar ? 31. I am sending books, paper, and clothes. 
32. Where is he ? 33. He is at school. 34. Is the school in the vil- 
lage ? 35. It is there. 



LEQON XXVI. LESSON XXVI. 

IDIOMATIC USE OP ALLER, VESTIK, ETC. 

1. The verb aller, is used, in French, in the same manner as the 
verb to go, in English, to indicate a proximate future. 

Allez-vous ecrire ce matin ? Are you going to write this morning t 

Je vais ecrire mes lettres. I am going to write my letters. 

2. The verb venir is used idiomatically, in French, to indicate a 
past just elapsed. It requires, in this signification, the preposition de 
before another verb. 

Je viens d'ecrire mes lettres. J have just written my letters. 

Nous venons de recevoir des lettres. We have just received letters. 

3. Aller trouver, venir trouver, are used in the sense of to go to, 
io come to, in connection with nouns or pronouns representing 

persons. 

Allez trouver le ferblantier. Go to the tinman. 

J'ai envie d'aller le trouver. / have a desire to go to him. 

Venez me trouver a dix heures. Come to me at ten o'clock. 

4. Alter chercher, means to go for, to go and fetch. 

Allez chercher le medecin. Go and fetch the physician. 

Je vais chercher du sucre et du cafe. I am going for coffee and sugar. 

5. Envoy er chercher, means to send for, to send and fetch. 

Envoyer chercher le marchand. Send for the merchant. 

J'envoie chercher des legumes. I send for vegetables. 



88 VINGT-SIXIEME LI^ON. 

G. The first and second persons of the plural of the imperative 
are, with few exceptions, the same as the corresponding persons of 
the present of the indicative. The pronouns nous, vous, are not 
used with the imperative. 

7. Plural of the Imperative of Aller, En-voter, and Vans. 

Allons, let us go; Envoyons, lei us send; Tenons, let us come; 

Allez, </o; Euvoyez, send ; . come. 

8. Tous, m. toutes, f. followed by the article les and a plural noun, 
are used, in French, in the same sense as the word every in English. 

fr&re vient tons lee jours. Y"tr broOi v day. 

.i:-/. a lYe< la tone tee matins. You go to school every in 

9. Tout, m. tout*, f. followed by 7c or la and the noun in the 
singular, are used for the English expression the whole, coming beforo 
a noun. 

II rcsto ici touto la j lie remains here the rchole day. 

10. ': <">r of the month, pointed out as the timo 
of an appointment or of an OOCU1 ded bj a \ | 

tiuti in 1 

I lundi ou mardi. Come on Monday or Tuesday. 

•iuzo ou lo ecizo avriL Come • ■-i the ji/teenth or sixteenth 
April. 

11. When 

artic! 

t nous trouvcr le lundi. 
J 1 \ .i tr u'. an ., <4 to your father \n the afternoon. 

l; : m '. «.r Kx'am;: 

- father. 

■ 

II V.l 

I india. II " <day. 

•her. 

I Do you send for Arabic books? 
m 

tte dame lundi? Do you ' idayt 

.I'ai I 'intention d'v aller mardi. 

rodi. / 'days. 

lo dimaocho. to c hm rch Sundays. 



idiomatic use of ailee, yekie, etc. 89 

Exercise 49. 

Annee, f. year; Dimanche, m. Sunday; Mardi, m. Tuesday; 

Apprend-re,4.ir. to learn; Ecossais, e, Scotch ; Mercredi, m. Wednes- 
Apres-midi, f. afternoon ; Ecri-re, 4. ir. to write ; day ; 

Commene-er, 1. to com- Enseign-er, 1. to teach; Musi que, f. music ; 

mence; Excepte, except; Prochain, e, next; 

Compagne, £ compan- Jeudi, m. Thursday; Vendredi, m. Friday; 

ion ; Journee, f. day ; Rest-er, 1. to remain, 

Connaissances, £ ac- Irlandais, e, Irish ; live ; 

quaintances ; Lundi, m. Monday ; Samedi, Saturday ; 

Demain, to-morrow ; Malade, sick ; Teinturier, m. dyer. 

1. Qu'allez-vous faire ? 2. Je vais apprendre rues lecons. 
3. N'allez-vous pas ecrire a vos connaissances ? 4. Je ne vais ecrire 
a personne. 5. Qui vient de vous parler ? 6. L'Irlandais vient de 
nous parler. 7. Quand l'Ecossaise va-t-elle vous enseigner la mu- 
sique ? V 8. Elle va me 1' enseigner l'annee prochaine. 9. Va-t-elle 
commencer mardi ou mercredi ? 10. Elle ne va commencer ni mardi 
ni mercredi, elle a l'intention de commencer jeudi, si elle a le temps. 

11. Votre compagne va-t-elle a l'eglise tous les dimanches ? 12. Elle 
y va tous les dimanches et tous les mercredis. 13. Qui allez-vous 
trouver ? 14. Je ne vais trouver personne. 15. N'avez-vous pas 
l'intention de venir me trouver demain ? 16. J'ai l'intention d'aller 
trouver votre teinturier. 17. Envoy ez- vous ehercher le medecin? 
18. Quand je suis malade, je l'envoie ehercher. 19. Eeste-t-il avec 
vous toute la journee ? 20. II ne reste chez moi que quelques 
minutes. 21. Allez-vous a l'ecole le matin ? 22. J'y vais le matin 
et l'apres-midi. 23. Y allez-vous tous les jours ? 24. J'y vais tous 
les jours, excepte le lundi et le dimanche. 25. Le samedi, je reste 
chez nous, et le dimanche, je vais a l'eglise. 

Exercise 50. 
1. What is the Irishman going to do ? 2. He is going to teach 
music. 3. Has he just commenced his work ? 4. He has just com- 
menced it. 5. "Who has just written to you ? 6. The dyer has just 
written to me. 7. Does your little boy go to church every day ? 
8. No, sir ; he goes to church Sundays, and he goes to school every 
clay. 9. Do you go for the physician ? 10. I send for him because 
my sister is sick. 11. Do you go to my physician, or to yours ? 

12. I go to mine, yours is not at home. 13. Where is he. 14. He 
is at your father's, or at your brother's. 15. Do you intend to 
send for the physician ? 16. I intend to send for him. 17. Am I 
right to send for the Scotchman? :. 18. You are right to send for 
him. 19. Do you go to your father in the afternoon? 20. I go to 



90 VIXGT-SErTliilE LECOX. 

liim in the morning. 21. Does your brother go to your uncle's every 
Monday ? 2'J. He goes there every Sunday. 23. Are you going 
to learn music ? 2-i. My niece is going to learn it. if she has tune. 
- ">. Am I going to read or to write ? 20. You are going to read to- 
morrow. 27. Does he go to your house every day ? 28. He cornea 
to us every Wednesday. 29. At what hour? 30. At a quarter 
before nine. 31. Does he come early or late? 32. He OOSMfl at a 
quarter after nine. 33. What do you send for? 34. We send for 
wine, bread, butter, and < . What do you go for ? 30. Wo 

go for vegetable?, meat and sugar. o7. We want sugar I 
morning. 

*-•-» 

»N XX VI I. LESSON XXVII. 

P] \. i: OF i m: PBOKOl BIB, 

(\.t) 01 . e.\- 

plural i 

.limn. : loim him. 

.1 voua aime. 

2, 1 Of the 

preaed 

or and 

II Don :>'tir. 

rally placed q 

i 
comt ; \ 

pheaL 

them. 



I 



PLACE OF PRONOUNS. 



91 



5. The words en and y follow the above rules, except the 3d. 
J'en parle, j'y pense. I speak of it, I think of it. 

G. The pronoun used as indirect regimen, answering to the geni- 
tive or ablative of the Latin, and to the indirect object which, in 
English, is separated from the verb by a preposition other than to, is 
in French, always placed after the verb. 

Je parle de lui, d'elle, d'eux. I speak of him, of her, of them. 
Je reste avec vous et avec eux. J remain with you and with them. 

7. All pronouns used as objects of verbs, must be repeated. 

Je les aime, je les respecte, je I love, respect and honor them. 
les honore. 



Resume of Examples. See § 32. 



M'entendez-vous ? 

Je ne vous entends pas. 

Les entendez-vous ? 

Je les vois et je les entends. 

II nous aime et il nous honore. 

Me parlez-vous de votre ami ? 

Je vous parle de lui. [R. 6.] 

Nous parlez-vous do ces dames ? 

Je vous parle d'elles. 

Ne leur parlez-vous pas ? 

Je n'ai pas envie de leur parler. 

Parlez-lui. 

Ne lui parlez pas. 

Allez a lui, courez a lui. 

Parlez-leur. Ne leur parlez pas. 



Do you hear or understand me ? 

I do not understand or hear you. 

Do you hear them ? 

I see them and understand them. 

He loves and honors us. 

Do you speak to me of your friend? 

I speak to you of him. 

Do you speak to us about those ladies ? 

I speak to you of them. 

Do you not speak to them ? 

I have no wish to speak to them. 

Speak to him or her. 

Do not speak to him. 

Go to him, run to him. 

Speak to them. Do not speak to them. 



Exercise 51. 

Affaire, f. affair ; Compagnon, m. compan- Matin, m. morning; 

Arbre, m. tree; ion; Nouvelle, f. news; 

Avis, m. advice; Leja, already; Pens-er, 1, to think; 

Cerisier, m. cherry-tree ; Ecri-re, 4. ir. to write ; Poirier, m. pear-tree ; 

Communiqu-er, 1. to com- Exemple, m. example ; Pommier, m. apple-tree ; 

municate; Envoy-er, 1. ir. to send; Respect-er, 1. to respect. 

1. Allez- vous lui ecrire ? 2. Je vais lui ecrire et lui communiquer 
cette nouvelle. 3. Allez-vous lui parler de moi ? 4. Je vais lui par- 
ler de vous et de votre compagnon. 5. Leur envoyez-vous de beaux 
arbres ?v^6. Je leur envoie des pommiers, des poiriers, et des cerisiers. 

7. Ne m'envoyez-vous pas des cerisiers? (See note, page 38.) 

8. Je ne vous en envoie pas, vous en avez deja. 9. Avez-vous raison 
de leur parler de cette affaire ? 10. Je n'ai pas tort de leur parler de 
cette affaire? 11. Venez & nous demain matin. 12. Venez nous 



VINGT-UUITIEHE L E £ O X . 

trouvcr cctte apres-midi. 13. Allez-vous les trouver tous lcs jours? 
14. Je vais Its trouver tous les soirs. 15. Leur donnez-vous do bons 
avis? 16. Je leur donne de bons avis et de bons exemples. 17. Nous 
parlez-vous de voa soeurs? 18. Je vous parle d'elles. 19. Ne uous 
parlez-vous pas de nos freres? 20. Je vous parle d'eux. 21. No 
les aimez-vous i .. is les aimons et nous k-s rasp 

23. Pensez-vous a ce livre, ou n*y ] ; ill 21. Nous y 

oa et nous en parlons. 25. Nous n'y penson 

5 2 . 
1. "When arc you going to write to your brother? 2. T cu 

Do you intend to write 
■1. I intend to wi 3 mdaj. 

.". II.;-.. y i a v. • . 1 have n n 

at his 

Lhem? 10. ^ 

l 9b I 

■ 

i 



XXVIII. \ XX VI II. 

■ 
plural, i.. U-jJ 



KESPECTIYE PLACE OF THE PEONOUNS. 93 

Je vous le donne. J give it to you. 

H me le donne. He gives it to me. 

II nous le donne. He gives it to us. 

2. When the pronoun used as an indirect object (dative), is in the 
third person singular or plural, it must be placed after the direct 
object. [§101,(2.)] 

Nous le lui donnons. We give it to him. 

Nous le leur donnons. We give it to them. 

3. The above rules of precedence apply also to the imperative used 
negatively. 

Ne nous le donnez pas. [R. 1.] Do not give U to us. 

Ne le lui donnez pas. [R. 2.] Do not give it him. 

4. With the imperative used affirmatively, the direct object pre- 
cedes in all cases the indirect object. [§ 101, (5.)] 

Donnez-le-nous. Give it to us. 

Montrez-le-leur. Show it to them. 

5. En and y always follow the other pronouns. 

Je lui en donne. I give him some. 

II nous y envoie. He sends us thither. 

6. Present of the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs. 

Voir, to see ; Vouloir, to will, be wiV Pouvoir, to le able ; 
ling ; 

Je vois, 1 see, do sec, or Je veux, I will or am Je puis, I can, I may, 

am seeing; willing; I am able; 

Tu vois, Te veux, Tu peux, 1 

H voit, II veut, II peut, 

Nous voyons, Nous voulons, Nous pouvons, 

Vous voyez, Vous voulez, Vous pouvez, 

lis voient, Us veulent, Us peuvent. 

7. The above verbs take no preposition before another verb. 

8. The preposition pour is used to render the preposition to, when 
the latter means in order to. 

Je vais chez vous, pour parler a 1 go to your house, to speak to your 
votre frere, et pour vous voir. brother, and to see you. 

J'ai besoin d'argent pour acheter 2" want money to (in order to) buy 
des marchandises. goods. 

Kesume op Examples. 

Voulez-vous nous le donner? Will you give it to us f 

Je veux vous le preter. i" will lend it to you. 

Pouvez- vous me les donner ? Can you give them to Trie f 

1 After the verbs, pouvoir, to be able; oser, to dare; savoir, to know; the 
negative pas may be omitted. 



94 VIJfGT-DUITIEME LEgox. 

Je ne puis vous les donner. I cannot give them to you. 

Votre i'rere peut-il le lui envover? Can your brother send it to himt 

II ne veut pas le lui envover. He uill not send it to him. 

Qui vcut le leur prater? Who will I id it to 'Jam t 

Pers«nne ne veut le leur preter. Xo one will lend it to them. 

Envoyez-les-nous. Send them to us. 

STe Doaa les envoyez pas. Do not send them to us. 
Donnez-nous-eu. 

IT en onvovez pas. Do not send them any. 

ee-le-leor, {our les contcutcr. them (in order) to M 

them. 

Je puis vous l'y envoyer. lean send it to you there. 

Kxni:< isi: 53. 

Com mis, m. clerk ; 

Pologne, C 1 
Pre'ter, 1. (<■ I 
. i. ir. to betii 

Oubli- 
. .. 

1. Voules-vo :- I - le lui 

i 

i . 

' :eliT. 

i a parier '( 12. Je 

i '! I 1. J( 

22. Je lui 

1. V. 

you, if you will f;J 
i ufruiJ of forgetting it? [L. 3 I am 



USE OF THE AKTICLE. 95 

not afraid of forgetting it. 10. Will you send them to him ? 11. I 
intend to send them to him, if I have time. 12. Do you speak to 
him of your journey ? 13. I speak to him of my journey. 14. I 
speak to them of it. 15. Can you communicate it to him ? 1G. I 
have a wish to communicate it to him. 17. Do you see your ac- 
quaintances every Monday ?— -18. I see them every Monday, and every 
Thursday. 19. Where do you intend to see them ? 20. I intend to 
see them at your brother's, and at your sister's. 21. Can you send 
him there every day ? 22. I can send him there every Sunday, if 
he wishes (s'il le veuf). 23. Can you give them to me ? 24. I can 
give them to you. 25. Who will lend them books ? 26. No one 
will lend them any. 27. Your bookseller is willing to sell them 
good books and good paper. 28. Is he at home ? 29. He is at his 
brother's. 30. Are you wrong to pay your debts ? 31. I am right 
to pay them. 32. Will you send it to us ? 33. I am willing to send 
it to you, if you want it. 34. Are you willing to give them to us? 
35. We are willing to give them to your acquaintances. 



LEQON XXIX. LESSON XXIX. 

USE OF THE AETICLE. (§ 77.) 

1. The article le, la, les, as already stated, is used in French before 
nouns taken in a general sense. 

Les jarclins sont les ornements des Gardens are the ornaments of vil- 
villages et des campagnes. lages and of rural districts. 

2. The article is also used in French, as in English, before nouns 
taken in a particular sense. 

Les jardins de ce village sont su- The gardens of this village are su- 
perbes. peri. 

3. It is also used before abstract nouns, before verbs, and adjectives 
used substantively. 

La paresse est odieuse. . Idleness is odious. 

La jeunesse n'est pas toujours do- Youth is not always tractable. 

cile. 

Le boire et le manger sont neces- Eating and drinking are necessary to 

saires a, la vie. life. 

4. The article is used before the names of countries, provinces, 
rivers, winds, and mountains. [§ 77, (3.) (4.)] 

La France est plus grande qdp l'ltalie. France is larger than Italy. 
La Normandie est tres fertile. Normandy is very fertile. 



VIN-GT-NEUYIKME L E £ O X 



5. The article is used before titles. 

Le general Cavaignac. 
Le marechal Nej. 



General Cavaignac 
Marsha: 



C. In respectful address or discourse, the words, monsieur, ma- 
dame, mademoiselle are placed before titles and designations of re- 
lationship. 

Monsieur le president (Mr. 



.--■llo votro soeur. 



\r sister. 



7. The plural of monsieur, madame, and inadcinoiselle, is memi 

■'• iiiuiscfles. 

8. The student should be careful to distinguish a noun taken in a 
d or in a particular sense, from one taken in a partitive 

rartilivt sense. 
Nous avons des I 

<>ks. 

i 



General or particular dense. 
- UvxeSj 

■ 
We have the books. 






La m- ible. 

r.il. 

.r.i dcajardins do co < 



J'ai I'll 



: id .' 



Muu 1. 



rat 

Flower- 

wen of tfu go 
1>) yy>u inti-nd visiting 1 

Is Cap 

I 

My brntiicr is nut fond of praises. 



Aim-cr, 1. to L 

ApportH • 

I 

••.oral; 



\rrry; 

£tudi-er, 1. to study; 
crry; 



itplierry ( 
in. vegetable ; 

Lundi, i " 



1. A/nez-vous le pain ou la viandc? '_'. J'aimc le | 
. t le fruit. 3. Avons-nous des pdehea dans uotrc jardin ? 4 



TTSE OF THE ARTICLE. 97 

avons des peches, des fraises, des framboises, et des cerises. 5. Mon- 
sieur votre frere aime-t-il les cerises ? 6. II n'aime guere les cerises, 
il prefere les ^prunes. 7. Avez-vous des legumes ? 8. Je n'aime 
point les legumes. 9. Nous n'avons ni legumes ni fruits. [L. 8, 3. 4.] 
10. Nous n'aimons ni les legumes ni les fruits. 11. Allez-vous tous 
les jours dans le bois de monsieur votre frere ? 12. Je n'y vais pas 
tous les jours. 13. Yotre sceur apporte-t-elle les fleurs ? 14. Ello 
les apporte. 15. Madame votre mere apporte-t-elle des fleurs? 
16. Eile en apporte tous les lundis. 17. Voyez-vous le general Ber- 
trand ? 18. Je ne le vois pas, je vois le caporal Duchene. 19. Mes- 
demoiselles vos sceurs sont-elles fatiguees? 20. Mes sceurs sont 
fatiguees d'etudier. 21. Monsieur le president est-il cbez lui? 
22. Non, monsieur ; il est cbez monsieur le colonel Dumont. 23. De- 
meure-t-il loin d'ici? 24. II ne demeure pas loin d'ici. 25. Ou. 
demeure-t-il ? 26. U demeure cbez monsieur le capitaine Lebrun. 

Exercise 56. 
1. Does your sister like flowers ? 2. My sister likes flowers, and 
my brother is fond of books. 3. Is be wrong to like books ? 4. No, 
sir ; be is right to bke books and flowers. 5. Have you many flowers 
in your gardens ? 6. We have many flowers and mucb fruit. 7. Is 
your cousin fond of raspberries ? 8. My cousin is fond of raspberries 
and 1 strawberries. 9. Is the captain fond of praises ? 10. He is not 
fond of praises. 11. Has the gardener brought you vegetables? 
12. He has brought me vegetables and fruit. 1 13. Is he ashamed to 
bring you vegetables ? 14. He is neither ashamed nor afraid to sell 
vegetables. 15. Is your mother tired ? 16. My mother is not tired. 
] 7. Is your brother at Colonel D's ? 18. He lives at Colonel D's, but 
he is not at home at present (a present). 19. How many peaches 
have you? 20. I have not many peaches, but I have many plums. 
21. Does Captain B. like peaches?/ 22. He likes peaches, 1 plums, 
raspberries, and strawberries. 23. 'Are you going into (dans) your 
brother's wood ? 24. I go there every morning. 25. Is General L. 
here ? 26. No, sir ; he is not here, he is at your cousin's. 27. Does 
your friend, General H, live far from here ? 28. He does not lire far 
from here, he lives at his brother's. 29. Have you fine flowers in 
your garden? 30. "We have very fine flowers; we are fond of 
flowers. 31. Do you give them to him? 32. I give them to you. 
33. I give you some. 34. I give them some. 35. Give us some. 
36. Do not give us any. 

1 The student must not forget that the article is repeated before every 
noun. 

5 



98 TBEXTIOE LEfOX. 

LE0ON XXX. SON XXX. 

CBB OF Till: ARTICLE, O >N n.\ l i;i>. 

1. Adjectives of nation will, according 
be preceded l>y the article. [?' 145.] 

II apprend le Bra 

1 alkmauJ, et ritauen, 

rbjparfer, the article may be omitted before an ad- 

gaia. 

The numb 

. A. 

''• ' B04 i;i 

[ualifled by .. 

• i or tiik I . 

11 appr 

UMQt lis connaisscnt 

ana to be acq\ 

..rtiol ? 



use of the article. 99 

Resume op Examples. 

Le Capitaine G-. sait-il le francais ? Does Captain G. know French ? 

II ne le sait pas, mais il 1'apprend. He does not know it, but learns it. 

Connaissez-vous le Docteur L. ? Bo you know Dr. L. 7 

Je ne le connais pas, mais je sais ou I am not acquainted with him, but 1 

il demeure. know where he lives. 

Ce monsieur est-il peintre ? Is that gentleman a painter t 

Non, il est architecte. No, he is an architect. 

Oe monsieur est un architecte dis- That gentleman is a distinguished 

tingue. architect. 

Oe Francais parle grec et arabe. Tliat Frenchman speaks Greek and 

Arabic. 

II parle le grec, l'arabe, et l'italien. He speaks the Greek, Arabic, and 

Italian languages. 

Avez-vous vu Charles dix, frere de Have you seen Charles the Tenth, a 

Louis dix-huil ? brother of Louis the Eighteenth f 

Exercise 57. 

Allemand, e, German ; Grec, que, Greek ; Quatorze, fourteen ; 

Ancien, ne, ancient ; Hongrois, e. Hungarian ; Quatre, four ; 
Anglais, e, English ; Langue, f. language; Russe, Russian; 
Chinois, e, Chinese; Moderne, modern; Sue"dois, e, Swedish, 

Danois,e, Danish, Dane; Pays, m. country ; Swede; 

Fort, very ; Polonais, e, Polish, Pole ; Tapissier, m. upholsterer. 

1. Connaissez-vous ce monsieur ? 2. Oui, madame ; je le connais 
fort bien. 3. Savez-vous de quel pays il est? 4. II est hongrois. 
5. Parle-t-il allemand ? 6. II parle allemand, polonais, russe, sue- 
dois, et danois. 7. N'est-il pas medecin ? 8. Nbn, monsieur ; avant 
la revolution, il etait capitaine. 9. Avez-vous envie d'apprendre le 
russe?' 10. J'ai envie d'apprendre le russe et le grec moderne. 
11. Connaissez-vous les messieurs qui parlent a votre soeur ? 12. Je 
ne les connais pas. 13. Savez-vous ou ils demeurent ? 14. lis de- 
meurent chez le tapissier de votre frere. 15. N'avez-vous pas l'his- 
toire de Louis quatorze, dans votre bibliotheque y 16. Je n'ai ni 
cclle de Louis quatorze, ni celle de Henri quatre. 17. Avez-vous 
tort d'apprendre le chinois ? 18. Je n'ai pas tort d'apprendre le chi- 
nois. 19. Yos compagnons apprennent-ils les langues anciennes ? 
20. Ils savent plusieurs langues anciennes et modernes. 21. Parlez- 
vous anglais ? 22. Je sais 1' anglais et je le parle. 23. Connaissez- 
vous 1' Anglais que nous voyons ? 24. Je ne le connais pas. 25. II 
ne me connait pas, et je ne le connais pas. 

Exercise 58. 
1. Does our physician know French ? 2. He knows French, Eng- 
lish, and German. 3. Does he know the French physician ? 4. He 
knows him very well. 5. Are you acquainted with that lady ? G. I 



100 TiiE^TE ex trzriiiicB le^ox. 

am not acquainted with her. 7. Is she a German or a Swede. 
• is neither a German nor a Swede, she is a Russian. 9. Do you 

id to speak to her? 10. I intend to speak to her in {en) English. 
11. Does she know English? 12. She knows several langui 

peaks English, Dan: . and Hungarian. 13. Is your 

brother a colonel? 14. No, sir; he is a captain. 15. Is tout up- 
holsterer a Dane? 1G. Die is not a Dane, he is a Swede., 17. Are 
you a Frenchman 7 18. JTo, sir; I am a Hungarian 19. D 
know Chinese? 20. I know Chinese, Russian, and modern Greek. 
1M. Are yon wrong to I -am I 

learn languages. 23. Do you know the Englishman who liv 
your broth m acquainted with him. 25. I am \, 

■ d with him. 26. Do ; 

. 1 have DO 

30. Have you no time? 31, 1 have but 
little lime. 32. W learn ? 33. We I 

We do 

.:n it. 



ON xxxi. ; xxxi. 

I 1 i\ i: PSOX 

- 

lin. 77k: flown* vrh ich are i I 

. itin? 

■'.om. which, may be said of I" ■ 

• -1.] 

•*r-ij.» u-hnm we see. 
I ifl QOUfl api-renona. 






RELATIVE PEONOUNS, 



101 



5. Que answers to the English pronoun what, used absolutely be- 
fore a verb. 

Que pensez-vous de cela? Wliat do you think of that? 

G. Quoi, what, when not used as an exclamation, is generally pre- 
ceded by a preposition, and relates only to things. 



De quoi voulez-vous parler ? 
A quoi pensez-vous ? 



Of what do you wish to speak ? 
Of what do you think ? 



7. Lequel, m., laquelle,/, lesquels, m. p., lesquelles,/ p., which, or 
which one, [L. 18. 6] or which ones, relate to persons or things. 
They may be preceded by a preposition, contracted or not with the 
article. 



Lequel avez-vous apporte ? 
Duquel (de laquelle) parlez-vous ? 



Which one have you brought? 
Of which one do you speak ? 



8. Dont, of which, or of whom, whose, may relate to persons or 
things, in the masculine or feminine, singular or plural. It can never 
be used absolutely, and must always be preceded by an antecedent. 
It is preferable to de qui or duquel, etc. 

Les fleurs dont vous me parlez. The flowers of which you speak to me. 

Les demoiselles dont votre sceur vous The young ladies of whom your sister 
parle. speaks to you. 

9. Present op the Indicative of the Irregular Verbs, 

Di-re, 4. to say. Fai-re, 4. to make, to do. Mett-re, 4. to put. 

Je dis, / say, do say, or Je fais, / make, or do, 1 Je mets, I put, do put, or 

am saying. am making or doing. am putting. 

Tu dis, Tu fais, Tu mets, 

II dit, II fait, II met, 

Nous disons, Nous faisons, [L. 63, note.] Nous mettons, 

Vous dites, Vous faites, Vous mettez, 

Us disent. lis font. lis mettent, 

Resume of 
Connaissez-vous le monsieur qui 

parle a notre cousin ? 
Je connais celui qui lui parle. 
Comprenez-vous ce que je vous dis ? 
Qui vous a parle de cette affaire ? 
L' Anglais dont vous parlez est ici. 



L'Espagnol dont la soeur est ici. 
Que faites- vous ce matin ? 
Que dites-vous a notre ami ? 
Nous faisons ce que vous nous dites. 
Pour qui faites-vous cet habit ? 
De quoi parlez-vous a votre frere ? 
Nous faisjms ce que nous pouvons. 
Nous parlous de ce dont vous parlez. 



Examples. 

Bo you know the gentleman who 

speaks to our cousin? 
Iknow him who speaks to him. 
Do you understand what I say to you ? 
Who has spoken to you of this affair ? 
The Englishman of whom you speak 

is here. 
TJie Spaniard whose sister is here. 
What do you do this morning ? 
What do you say to our friend? 
We do that which (what) you say to us. 
For whom do you make this coat ? 
Of what do you speak to your brother ? 
We do what we can. 
We speak of that of which you speak. 



102 teexte et {txtik'mb lki;os. 

Exercise 59. 

Arriv-cr, 1. to arrive; ITabillement, m. dress, Preaque, almost; 

Avec, wiUi ; chih Ilkn. nothing ; 

Holla', ; Recommaad-er, 1. to re- 

Oommand-er.l. to order; Linge, m. 1 com:-. 

Scotch; Monsieur.i r. in. shoe; 

Eulont, lq. child; me; Vrai, e, true. 
Tlaiiir, in. ± '. 

1. Qui eonnaisscz-vous ? 2. Nona connaissona lea HoDandai 
vous nous parlcz. 3. Qucllos lecons apprenez-vous ? 4. No a 
prenon 

til vrai ? 6. ~- De 'l' 1 ' Qma 

parlcz-vou* '.- ,'arri- 

na qui viont d'arriver? I 1 
que n 
L2. 1 Sire. 

- 
..■'.' 20. I 
' i leer, dire? 

1. B want ? 2. v. 

oot know 1 

.-(). 11. w 

: '. lie mtk< 



METTRE, 6TER, PAIEE, ETC. 103 

sister is here. 27. Is your brother wrong to do what he does? 
28. He cannot be wrong to do it. 29. What are you doing ? 30. I 
am doing that which you do. 31. Where do you put my books ? 
32. Into (dans) your brother's trunk. 33. Is your brother here ? 
34. He is not here. 35. He is at my brother's, or at my father's. 



LEQON XXXII. LESSON XXXH. 

PLAN OF THE EXERCISES IN COMPOSING- FEENCH. 

Hitherto the student has been occupied exclusively in acquiring 
facts, forms and principles, and in translating, by the aid of these, 
French into English and again English into French. Following still 
the plan of the work, let him now undertake the higher business of 
endeavoring to compose in French. With this intent, let him take 
some of the words, given for this purpose, in the lists at page 271, and 
seek to incorporate them in sentences entirely his own. The words 
taken from the lists, are to be used merely as things suggestive of 
thought. The form which, in any given case, the sentence may 
assume, should be determined by the models found in the Lessons 
preceding • for, every sentence which the pupil has once mastered in 
the regular course of the Lessons, is or should be to him a model, on 
which he may at pleasure build other constructions of his own. 
Indeed, this constructing sentences according to models, that is, 
shaping one's thoughts according to the forms and idioms peculiar to 
a foreign tongue, is the true and only secret of speaking and writing 
that language well. The pupil, therefore, as he passes along in the 
ordinary course of the Lessons, should frequently be found applying 
his knowledge in the way of actually composing independent sen- 
tences. In this way he will soon acquire a facility and accuracy in 
the language, which are hardly otherwise attainable at all. 



METTRE, OTER, EAIEE, ETC. 

1. The verb mettre is used in the same sense as the English to put 
on, in speaking of garments. Mettre h convert, means to lay the 
cloth, or set the table. 

Quel chapcau mettez-vous? What hat do you put on ? 

Yotre frere met son habit noir. Your brother puts on his Mack coat. 

La domestique va mettre le couvert. The servant is going to lay the cloth. 



104 



TEENTE-DEUXIEUE LEQON. 



Won domestique ute son chapeau. 
6tez co livre de la table. 



2. Otar means to take off, to take away, to take out. 

My servant takes off his hat. 
Take away that book from tfie table. 
i pas 6te le diner? Have they not taken away Vie dinner t 

3. The verb /aire is used before another verb, in the sense of to 
have, to 

• r ■ lYit-i] kltir unc maison? Does you brother have a house built? 
11 en bit batir plus dune. He has more Uian one built. 

4. It may be used in the same sense before its own infinitive. 



ire tin lial lit do drap. 
ilea faire cks soulicrs do euir. 



- made. 



5. Vouhir, [L. 28. 6.] followed ! 1 in the sense of to 



Que voulez-voua din? 

lie diro? 



you meanf 

sitter mean t 






■ 
I 

■ 
■ 

\ 

I 









/ 



lean? 
cant 



your shoes end stock- 



v 



to lay / 
I 

things. 

61. 

l . to 



i 



1 






iu. dinner ; 

l'ra, e, ruuly; 



WluU! 



MBTTEE, dTEK, PAIEE, ETC. 105 

1. Le General N. met-il son uniforme ? 2. H ne le met point. 
3. Pourguoi ne portez-vous point votre manteau noir ? 4. J'ai peur 
de le gater. 5. Mettez-vous vos souliers de satin tous les matins ? 
6. Je ne les mets que les dimanches,, 7. II est midi, le domestique 
met-il le couvert ? 8. II ne le met pas encore, il va le mettre tout-a- 
l'heure. 9. Le diner n'est-il pas pret ? 10. Le domestique 6te-t-il 
le couvert ? 11. II ne l'ote pas encore, il n'a pas le temps de l'oter. 
12. Otez-vous votre habit, quand vous avez chaud? 13. Je l'ote, 
quand j'ai trop chaud. 14. Faites-vous faire un habit de drap ? 15. Je 
fais faire un habit de drap, et un gilet de satin noir. 16. Ne faites- 
vous point raccommoder vos pantoufles de velours ? 17. Ne faites- 
vous pas creuser une cave ? 18. Je fais creuser une grande cave. 
19. L'apothicaire, que veut-il dire ? 20. II veut dire qu'il a besoin 
d' argent. 21. Savez-vous ce que cela veut dire ? 22. Cela veut dire 
que votre frere est fache contre vous. 23. Avez-vous envie de met- 
tre votre manteau ? 24. J'ai l'intention de le mettre, car j'ai grand 
froid. 25. Je vais l'oter, car j'ai chaud. 

Exercise (St. 

1. Do you take off your coat ? 2. I do not take off my coat; I put 
it on. 3. Do you take off your cloak, when you are cold ? 4. When 
I am cold, I put it on. 5. Does your little boy take off his shoes and 
stockings ? [§ 21, (4.)] 6. He takes them off, but he is going to put 
them on again. 7. Does that little girl lay the cloth ? 8. She lays 
the cloth every day at noon (midi). 9. Does she take away the 
things after dinner? 10. She takes away the things every day. 
II. Do you intend to have a coat made ? 12. 1 intend to have a coat 
made. 13. I am going to have a coat and vest made. 14. Does 
your brother have his boots mended? 15. He has them mended. 
16. What does your son mean ? 17. I do not know what he means. 
18. Is he angry with me, or with my brother ? 19. He is neither 
angry with you, nor with your brother. 20. Is he afraid to spoil his 
coat ? 21. He is not afraid to spoil it. 22. Does the druggist want 
money ? 23. He does not want money. 24. Does your sister take 
my book from the table ? 25. She does not take it away. 26. Why 
do you take off your shoes ? 27. I take them off because they hurt 
me (gtnenf). 28. Do you intend to have a house built ? 29. I in- 
tend to have one built. 30. Does the tailor spoil your coat ? 31. He 
does not spoil it. 32. Who spoils your clothes? 33. No person 
spoils them. 34. What hat do you wear ? 35. I wear a black hat. 



106 TEENTE-TBOISIEME LEJON. 

LEgON XXXIII. LESSON XXXIII. 

UXIPEESOXAL YEEES. 

1. The unipersonal verb is conjugated only in the third person 
singular of a tense. Its nominative pronoun, il, t7, is used absolutely, 
u e. , it represents no noun previously i 

II pleut aujourJ'huL /.' rains to-day. 

2. The unipersonal verb assumes the termination of the class or 
conjugation to which it I always uuiper- 

and will be foun I 
and il* irregular, will bo found in the personal form in tfa 

3. Pbbeht of the Ini-icativk of t v\i. Yr.nns, 

lit, to be tiicre: JP. .: 
II y a, there is, thenar,-. 11 pleat, it rains, il u 11 noige, it snotcs, il is 

srui 

had: t\aw: 

:haws, 

J be followed by a 

gams in the market 

j trden. 

■ually 

, 

■ scoLL 

■ ither, 
ips est beau co matin. The tceaUier is fine this morning. 

il ca miUin ? rain this morning t 

n DO ] '•'», it snows. 

■ I 
.tin? 

•' 

Yn-t-ii ptauriean . .'.onset 

woi? 



UNIPERSONAL VERBS. 107 

II y a plus de deux personnes. There are more than two persons. 

N'y a-t-il personue a l'eglise ? • Is there nobody at church ? 

II n'y a encore personne. There is as yet no one there. 

Est-il trop tot ? Is it too soon ? 

Au contraire, U est trop tard. On the contrary, it is too late. 

Fait-il froid ou chaud aujourd'hui 1 Is it cold or warm to-day ? 

II fait chaud et humide. It is warm and damp. 

Fait-il du vent, ou du brouillard? Is it windy, or foggy? 

II fait un temps bien desagreable. It is very disagreeable weather. 

Le temps n'est pas agreable. The weather is not agreeable. 

Exercise 63. 

Assemblee, f. assembly, Couvert, e, elovdy ; Manuscrit, m. manu- 

party ; Fjcurie, f. stable ; script ■ 

Bibliotheque, £ library; £pais, se, thick; Superbe, very beautiful; 

Brouillard, m. fog ; Foin, m. hay ; Veau, m. veal ; 

Chambre, f. room; Gibier, m. game; Vent, m. wind; 

Cinquante, fifty ; Humide, damp ; Volaille, £ poultry. 

1. Quel temps fait-il aujourd'hui? 2. H fait un temps superbe. 
3. Fait-il tres beau temps aujourd'hui ? 4. II fait un temps couvert 
et humide. 5. Pleut-il beaucoup ce matin ? 6. II ne pleut pas en- 
core, mais il va pleuvoir. 7. Fait-il du vent ou du brouillard ? 8. II 
ne fait pas de vent. 9. Le brouillard est tres epais. 10. Combien 
de personnes y a-t-il a, l'assemblee? 11. II y a plus de deux cents 
[L. 20. 7.] personnes. 12. Wj a-t-il pas beaucoup de manuscrits 
dans votre bibliotheque ? 13. II n'y en a pas beaucoup, il n'y en a 
que cinquante-cinq. 14. Fait-il trop froid pour vous, dans cette 
chambre ? 15. II n'y fait ni trop froid ni trop chaud. 16. Y a-t-il 
beaucoup de foin dans votre ecurie ? 17. II y en a assez pour mon 
cheval. 18. Eestez-vous a la maison, quand il pleut ? 19. Quand il 
pleut, je reste a la maison, mais quand il fait beau temps je vais chez 
mon cousin. 20. Y a-t-il de la viande au marche? 21. II y en a 
beaucoup ; il „y a aussi du gibier. 22. II y a du veau, du mouton, et 
de la volaille. 23. N'y a-t-il pas aussi des legumes et des fruits ? 
24. II n'y en a pas. 25. Hyena aussi. 

Exercise 64. 
1. Are you cold this morning ? 2. I am not cold, it is warm this 
morning. 3. Is it foggy or windy ? 4. It is neither foggy nor windy, 
it rains in torrents (a verse). 5. Is it going to rain or to snow ? 
'C. It is going to freeze, it is very cold. 7. It is windy and foggy. 
8. Is there any body at your brother's to-day ? 9. My brother is at 
home, and my sister is at church. 10. Is there any meat in the (au) 
market ? 11. There is meat and poultry. 12. Is it too warm or too 
cold, for your sister, in this room ? *f3. It is not so warm in this 
room, as in your brother's library. 14. Are there good English 
5* 



10S 



TKEXTE-QL'AT Kl JBJCS LSQ OK. 



books in your sister's library? 15. There arc Eomo good one?. 

16. Are there peaches and plums in your garden? 17. There arc 

many. IS. Do you remain at 3-our brother's, when it snows? 

10. When it snows, wo remain at home. 20. Are there ladies at 

your mother's ? 21. Tour two sisters are there to-day. 22. Have 

you time to go and fetch them ? 23. I have no time this morning. 

24 I- your horse in the Btable? 25. It is not there, it is at my 

Does it hail this morning? 27. It does not hail, it 

. 2 VFhat weather is it this m< i 1. It is very fine 

1? 31. It is neither too warm nor too 



does not snow every da] 



LEQON XXXIV. LESSON XXX IV. 

i-r.v. 1: or Tin: .v;>\ 

!-, and h 

'-'. WTk d B v rb is in the in;: ..: £» 

ne au-i 

. -i lire. 

Qt rally 

■ 

m you 
I it ia 

trunk. 
C " J ' • < jr>, to 



PLACE Or THE ADVERB 



109 



reside, followed by the name of a part of the earth, a country, or 
province. 



Notre ami est en France. 
Vous allez en Italie. 



Our friend is in France. 
You go to Italy. 



7. The preposition & is used for the words at or to, in or into, be- 
fore the name of a town, city, or village, preceded by the verbs men- 
tioned above. 

II va a Paris lo mois prochain. He is going to Paris next month. 

8. The same preposition is used in the expressions a la campagne, 
& la ville, 1 a la chasse, a la peche, au marche, etc. 

Nous allons a la campagne. We go into the country. 

Vous n'allez pas a la ville. You do not go to the city. 

Je vais a la chasse et a la peche. I go hunting and fishing. 

II ne va pas au marche. He does not go to market. 

9. Indicative Present op the Irregular Verbs, 
Condui-re, 4. to conduct. £cri-re, 4. to write. Li-re, 4. to read. 

Je conduis, I conduct, do J'ecris, / write, do write, Je lis, / read, do read, or 

conduct, etc. or am writing ; am reading ; 

Tu conduis, Tu ecris, Tu lis, 

II conduit, II ecrit, II lit, 

Nous conduisons, Nous ecrivons, Nous lisons, 

Vous conduiscz, Vous ecrivez, Vous lisez, 

lis conduisent. lis ecrivent. lis lisent. 



Resume of Examples. 



Votre parent ecrit-il bien ? 

II ecrit assez bien. 

Nous avons assez de livres. 

Nous sommes assez attentifs a nos 



Voila la demoiselle dont vous parlez. 



Hoes your relation write well ? 
He writes tolerably. 
We have books enough. 
We are attentive enough to our les- 
sons. 
There is the young lady of whom you 



Votre cheval n'est-il pas dans le Is not your horse in the field? 

champ ? 
II n'y est pas, il est dans le jardin. 
Allez-vous en France cette annee ? 
Nous allons a Paris et a Lyon. 
Ou conduisez-vous ce jeune homme ? 
Je le conduis en Allemagne. 
Demeurez-vous & la ville? 
Nous demeurons a la campagne. 
Allez-vous souvent a, la chasse ? 
Nous allons quelquefois a, la peche. 



It is not there, it is in the garden. 
Ho you go to France this year ? 
We go to Paris and to Lyons. 
Wliere do you take this young man 1 
I take him to Germany. 
Do you live in the city ? 
We live in the country. 
Do you go often hunting ? 
We sometimes go fishing. 



1 fitre a la ville, to be, or rather, to dwell in the city, and not in the country. 
fitre dans la ville, to be within the city. £tre en ville, to be out, not to be at 
home, to be in the city. 



110 TBBXTX-QU ATBISHB L E <; O X . 

Exercise G5. 

m. partner; Forr. Ian*; 

Cariit; m. IVrrv, f. /■ 

\ ille, i'. b en, city; 
. hunting; 
CuLuuiis, iu. clerk, Bend-re, -i. to return; Voyage, m. y 

1. £crivez-vou3 encore la m-' 2. Je n'ecria plus la mdme, 

j'en ecris unc autre. 3. Voti oentT 4. 11 
fort bion, inais il : 

at pour acb \t. mais j'ai 

rinten .7. VoilS votre livre, en 
avuz-\ u'en ai paa besoin,j'en ai un aul 

voos encore besoin do mon canif? 10. Je u'en ai plug h 

vous ! -t-fl a la vuTe? 12. II ne 

derm . !-il a 

1 1. II n'aii 15. II va 

I'intentiond 

21. Je ne d ni a 

•J L Voire 
monsieur; il est a rtfoole. 

1. I' rk write as v. a ? 2. He • 

: y son. 3. ! 
it looks en 
some more. 5. B B. 1 

id it 7. D 

MX v. 

13. D 

1 7. How mai 

•;, ! 18. 1 



OK, AVOIR LIEU, DEVOIR, ETC. Ill 

there, but not often. 27. Does that young lady read as well as her 
sister ? \ 28. She reads better than her sister, but her sister reads 
better than I. 29. Is there any one at your house ? 30. My father 
is at home. 31. Is your brother-in-law absent ? 32. My brother- 
in-law is at your house. 33. There is no one at home to-day. 



LEQON XXXV. LESSON XXXV. 

ON, AVOIR LIEU, DEVOIR, ETC. 

1. The indefinite pronoun on has no exact equivalent in English. 
It may be rendered by one, we, they, people, etc., according to the 
context. On has, of course, no antecedent, and seldom refers to a 
particular person, [§ 41, (4.) (5.) § 113.] 

On doit honorer la vertu. We should honor virtue. 

On nous apporte de l'argent. Money is brought to us. 

2. As may be seen in the last example, on is often the nominative 
of an active verb, which is best rendered in English by the passive, 
[§ 113, (1.)] 

On dit que votre epouse est ici. It is said that your wife is here. 

On raconte des histoires singulieres. Singular histories are related. 

On recolte beaucoup de ble en Much wheat is harvested (grown) in 
France. France. 

3. Avoir lieu answers to the English expression, to take place. 
Cela a lieu tous les jours. Thai takes place every day. 

4. Au lieu de answers to the English, instead of. The verb which 
follows it must, according to Rule 2, Lesson 21, be put in the in- 
finitive. 

Au lieu d'etudier, il joue. Instead of studying, he plays. 

5. Devoir, to owe, is used before an infinitive, like the English verb, 
to he, to express obligation. 

Je dois lui ecrire demain. I am to write to him to-morrow. 

Nous devons j aller demain. We are to go there to-morrow. 

6. Recevoir des nouvelles, means, to hear from. 

Devez-vous recevoir des nouvelles Are you to hear from your sister? 
do votre soeur? 

7. Entendre parler, answers to the English phrase, to hear o/or about. 

Entendez-vous souvent parler de Do you often hear of your friends? 
vos amis ? 



11- TEENTE-Ci:* QUIEit E LEro.\. 

R£buik£ of Examples. 
Qno dit-on de nous dans la villo ? What do they say of us in the city 1 

roua People do not speak of you. 

Nemange-t-onpaa tousles joara? !•■ ' a yf 

On mange quand on a bun, eat when they are k 

:\x- de Poor en California, ■..,,. 

l'it-.n quelque cboso do nouveau? / ; newt 

I 'a ne 'lit rien do nouveaa 

A-Umrefa dee noavelleede George? Has any i Heard from 

On n'a point cntondu parlor de lui. Nothing ha " him. 

On o*a : 

erire d n.-tro ami? 
lui ecrire domain, Jam to wriU 

it-U avoir lien co soir? Is the con emmgt 

'tin- 
's l'rvro. / 

II danso au lien do ma 

irt, to 

• 
: 

1 I. <i|, i 

! 

17. M 

21 

1. V, 

hat luucugol . 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. 113 

Africa ? 4. It is said that much gold is found in California. 5. Do they 
bring you books every day ? 6. Books are brought to me [R. 2] 
every day, but I have no time to read them. 7. What should one 
do (doit-on /aire) when one is sick ? 8. One should send for a physi- 
cian. 9. Do you send for my brother ? 10. I am to send for him 
this morning. 11. Do you hear from your son every day? 12. I 
hear from him every time that your brother comes. 13. Does tho 
sale (venie, f.) take place to-day ? 14. It takes place this afternoon. 
15. At what time (heure) does it take place ? 16. It takes place at 
half after three. 17. I have a wish to go there, but my brother is 
sick. IS. What am I to do ? 19. Tou are to write to your brother, 
who, it i3 said (dit on), is very sick. 20. Is he to leave for Africa ? 
21. He is to leave for Algiers. 22. Do you come instead of your 
father ? 23. I am to write instead of him. 24. Does the concert 
take place this morning ? 25. It is to take place this afternoon. 
26. Do you know at what hour? 27. At a quarter before five. 
28. Is your brother coming ? 29. My brother is not coming, he has 
no time. 30. Are you angry with your brother ? 31. I am not 
angry with him. 32. Is there any thing new ? (Is any thing new 
said ?) 33. There is nothing new. 34. What is said of him ? 35. Noth- 
ing is said of him. 



LEgON XXXVI. LESSON XXXVI. 

REFLECTIVE VEEES. [§ 43, (6.) § 56]. 

1. A verb is called reflective or pronominal, when it is conjugated 
with two pronouns of the same person, i. e., the usual nominative 
pronoun, and the pronouns me, te, se, etc. [§ 56.] In these verbs, the 
subject is represented as acting upon itself. 

Je m'applique a l'etude. I apply (myself) to study. 

Je me propose de voyager. I propose to (myself) to travel, i. e., it 

is my intention to travel. 

In these verbs, the second pronoun is in fact only the objective 
pronoun direct or indirect, which, according to Rules 1 and 2, Lesson 
27, is placed before the verb. 

2. The reflective form of the verb, which is much more frequently 
used in French than in English, often answers to the passive form so 
common in the latter language. 

Cela se voit tons les jours. \ ^ *» **» ™p ^- literalI 7: 

J l That sees itself every day. 

Cette marchandise se vend facile- ( That merchandise is easily sold. 

ment. ( That merchandise sells itself easily. 



Cela se fait ainsL 



That is done thus. 
That does itself so. 



11-t TEESTE-SlXI^i: LEQOH. 

3. The verb se porter, literally, to carry one* self, is used idiomati- 
cally for to do or to he in speaking of health. 

Comment vous portez-vous ? Uow do you 

Je me portc trcs bien. lam very 

4. S'asscoir, [3. ir. see § G2.] to t- also a reflective verb. 

:Kro s'assied. Your brother sits down. 

;;ns to walk, to ride, etc., for pleasure, or health. 

• promt no tous les jours. I take 

Jo me pro:;. -.: ride. 

attar a cher*. 
-vous bcaucoup tous les Do you walk much every day? 

■ 

Sb roitT-Ett, .iovalk S'xs*r-iv., 3. ir. to stf 

do; or rt down ; 

■ 
do ; aw: : down; 

Tu i 

lis so portent. lis s 

■ town. 

t-il? 

I 
. 



r^l'LECTIYE VEBBS. 115 

Votis promenez-vous tous les jours ? Bo you take a vjalk every day ? 

Je me promeno en voituro au- I take a ride to-day (in a carriage). 

jourd'hui. 

Vos amis se promenent-ils a cheval ? Bo your friends take a ride ? 

N'aimez-vous pas a marcher ? Bo you not like walking ? 

J'aime beaucoup a aller a cheval. J like riding much. 

Aimez-vous a vous promener ? Bo you like walking (for pleasure) ? 

Asseyons-nous, s'il vous plait. Let us sit down, if you please. 

Ne nous asseyons-nous pas ? Bo we not sit down ? 

JSTe nous asseyons pas, il est trop Let us not sit down, it is too late. 

tard. 

Combien ce drap so vend-il la 1 For how much is that cloth sold a 

verge ? yard ? 

II se vend vingt-cinq francs le metre. It is sold twenty-five francs tJie metre. 

Comment cela s'appelle-t-il? How is that called? What is the 

name of that ? 

Comment vous appelez-vous [§ 49, What is your name ? How do you 

(4.)] ? call yourself? 

Exercise 69. 

Banquier, m. banker ; Magnifique, magnificent; Pied, m.foot; 
Comment, how ; Matin, m. morning ■ Port-er, to carry, wear ; 

Cheval, m. horse ; Mieux, better ; Quelquefois, sometimes ; 

Drap, m. cloth; Oblige, e, obliged; Quitt-er, 1. to leave; 

Fatigue, e, weary, tired; Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out; Yoiture, f. carriage. 

1. Comment ce monsieur s'appelle-t-il ? 2. Je ne sais comment 
il s'appelle. 3. Cette dame ne s'appelle-t-elle pas L. ? 4. Non, 
madame, elle s'appelle M. 5. Monsieur votre pere se porte-t-il bien 
ce matin ? 6. II se porte beaucoup mieux. 7. Fait-il beau temps 
aujourd'hui ? 8. II fait un temps magnifique ; n'allez-vous pas vous 
promener ? 9. Nous n'avons ni cheval ni voiture. 10. Ne pouvez- 
vous marcher ? 11. Je suis trop fatigue pour marcher. 12. N'allez- 
vous pas a cheval tous les matins ? 13. Je me promene tous les 
matins. 14. Comment vous promenez-vous? 15. Quelquefois a, 
pied, et quelquefois en voiture. 16. A qui vous adressez-vous, quand 
vous avez besoin d' argent ? 17. Je m'adresse a, mon banquier ? 
18. Ne voulez-vous pas vous asseoir ? 19. Nous vous sommes bien 
obliges. 20. Ce drap se vend-il fort bien ? 21. II se vend fort cher. 

22. Ne devez-vous pas aller a la campagne, s'il fait beau temps? 

23. Votre frere doit-il quitter la ville aujourd'hui ? 24. II doit partir 
demain matin. 25. Ma sceur se promene tous les matins. 

Exeecise 70. 
1. Does your sister walk every day ? 2. She takes a -walk every 
morning. 3. She likes riding on horseback, and in a carriage. 

i The English a or an, before a measure, is rendered into French by the 
article le, or la, etc. 



116 TIlK.VTr-SEPTIKME LE£ON. 

4. What is that little girl called ? 5. She \a called L. 6. Is not Uiat 
gentleman called L. ? 7. No, sir ; he is called G., and his cousin is. 
called H. 8. How is your brother? 9. My brother is very well, bat 
my sister is not well. 10. How are your two daughters ? 11. 
are tolerably well to-day. 12. Will you i. gentlemen ? 

13. We are mueh obliged to you, madam, we have no: 
1 ;. Does thai book sell well? 1T>. I trefl. 16, 11 

that sil!< Bold an ell (fcume)1 17. It i 

.1 you 
Jk? 20. I have no time to walk, 21. To whom does 
:• apply ? 22. He appli h his 

25. When d 

> go tO Franco, ; D 
say t.:" | .;, too 

a goud hor. 



LB "\ XXXVII. LESSON xxxvir. 

: 

■ 

niir [2. ir. S 

■ 

Nou<» n ,}« r havin.j been do 

priu i 



USE OP REFLECTIVE PRONOUN, ETC. 117 



4. Se souvenir, takes the preposition de before a noun or pronoun, 
as well as before an infinitive. 



Vous souvenez-vous de cette affaire ? 

Je ne m'en souviens pas. 

Je me souviens de lui avoir ecrit. 



Do you remember that affair t 

I do not remember it. 

I remember having written to him. 



5. Se coucher, corresponds to the English verbs to retire, to go to 
Je me couche de bonne heure. I retire early. 

G. Se lever [§ 49, (6.)] means to rise, to get up. 
Je me lave au point du jour. J rise at the break of day. 

Resume op Examples. 



Vous coupez-vous les ongles ? 

Je me coupe les ongles et les che- 

veux. 
Vous coupez-vous les doigts ? 
Je me coupe souvent les doigts, 

quand je taille ma plume. 
Vous rappelez-vous [§ 49, (4.)] les 

malheurs du frere de votre ami ? 
Je me rappelle ses malheurs. 
Je me les rappelle distinctement. 
Je me rappelle de l'avoir vu. 
Vous souvenez-vous de cela ? 
Je ne m'en souviens pas du tout. 
A quelle heure vous couchez-vous ? 
Nous nous couchons tous les jours 

au coucher du soleil. 
Nous nous levous de meilleure heure 

que vous, — au lever du soleil. 
II se leve a cinq heures du matin, et 

il se couche a dix heures et de- 

mie du soir. 



of 



Do you cut your nails ? 
J cut my nails and hair. 

Do you cut your fingers ? 

I often cut my fingers, when I mend 

my pen. 
Do you remember the misj 

your friend's brother? 
I remember his misfortunes. 
I recollect them distinctly. 
I remember having seen him. 
Do you remember that ? 
I do not remember it at all. 
At what hour do you retire f 
We go to bed every day at sunset. 

We rise earlier than you, — at sun' 
rise. 

He rises at five o'clock in the morn- 
ing, and goes to bed at half after 
ten in the evening. 



Exercise Yl. 



Associe, m. partner ; 

Bois, m. wood ; 

Boucher, m. butcher ; tier ; 

Se brul-er, 1. ref. to Doigt, m. finger; 

bum one's self; Fer, m. iron; 

Charpentier, m. carpen- Feu, m. fire ; 

ter; Main, f. hand; 

Se chauff-er, 1. ref to S'occuper, 1. to occupy 



warm one's self; 



Cheveux, m. pL hair ; Parfaitement, perfectly ; 
De meilleure heure, ear- Perruquier, m. hair- 
dresser ; 
Poele, m. stove ; 
Pouce, m. thumb ; 
Promesse, f promise ; 
Se souvenir, 2. to remem- 
ber (see Venir, § 62.) ; 



one's self; 



Travaill-er, 1. to work. 



1. Le perruquier se coupe-t-il le pouce ? 2. Non, monsieur ; il se 
coupe les cheveux. 3. Le charpentier ne se coupe-t-il pas la main ? 
4. II ne se coupe pas la main, il coupe le bois. 5. Ne vous rappelez- 
vous pas cette dame ? 6. Je me rappelle cette dame et ces messieurs. 



118 TKEXTE-SEPTIEME LBQOXT. 

7. De quoi vous occupez-vous ? S. Xous nous occupona dc nus af- 
faire-. 9. Vous Bouvenez-vous dea fusils do votre pdre? 10. Je 
en souviens point du tout jyll. I ■ alc-t- 

elle pas? 12. Elle ne so brule pas, il u'y a pas de feu dans Le | 
13. Pourquoi le boucher no so cbauffe-t-il paa ? 1 1. Tarcequ'll n'a 

~\ont-ils do meilleurc heui 
16. Ila Be con ihenl de bonne h is les i 

qc veut-il p . 18. II n'a 

■ 

1 M 22. Jo n ■ : 

se C' 

Qaand 

. te bicn, ou • I 

1. i .•..•11, I 

; 
L. ? 

■ 

thnmb 

It. I- 

I lltlr- 
:t my 

- .. 

miafartune . :uber 



SE TKOMPEK, S EKHUTEK, ETC. 119 

LECON XXXVIII. LESSON XXXVIII. 

SE TEOMPEE, s'eNISTCTYER, ETC. 

1. The verb tromper, conjugated actively, corresponds to the Eng- 
lish verb to deceive. 

II trompe tout le monde. • He deceives every body. 

2. Conjugated reflectively, se tromper means to be mistaken; liter- 
ally, to deceive one's self. 

On se trompe bien souvent. One is often mistaken. 

3. JEnnuyer, [§ 49, (2.)] used actively, means to weary the mind, to 
. tease, to bore. 

Cet homme ennuie ses auditeurs. That man wearies his hearers. 

Vous nous ennuyez par vos de- You tease, or weary us by your ques- 
mandes. tions. 

4. S'ennuyer has no exact correspondent in English. It signifies 
generally, to be or to become mentally weary of any thing or place. 

Nous nous ennuyons ici. We are weary of being here. 

Vous ennuyez- vous a la campagne ? Are you weary of being in the country ? 

Je m'ennuie partout. I find no amusement anywhere. 

5. Je m'ennuie means in fact, 7" am mentally weary, I want change, 
amusement, occupation, etc. 

6. S'amuser, answers to the English expressions, to amuse one's 
self to take pleasure in, to spend one's time in, to find amusement in, to 
enjoy one's self. 

Nous nous amusons a. la campagne. We enjoy ourselves in the country. 
Vous vous amusez a des bagatelles. You spend your time in trifles. 

Resume of Examples. 

On se trompe souvent soi-meme, en We often deceive ourselves, while seek- 

cherchant a, tromper les autres. ing to deceive others. 

Votre commis ne se trompe-t-il pas ? Is not your clerk mistaken ? 

II se trompe bien rarement. He is very rarely mistaken. 

Ne vous trompez-vous pas frequem- Are you not frequently mistaken ? 

ment? 

Tout le monde est sujet a se trom- Every one is apt to be mistaken. 

per. 

Ce marehand trompe tout le monde. That merchant deceives every body. 

Sa conversation nous ennuie. His conversation icearies us. 

Vous ennuyez vos amis par vos You weary your friends by your 

plaintes. complaints. 

Est-ce que je ne vous ennuie pas ? Do I not weary you ? 

Vous ennuyez-vous chez nous ? Are you weary of remaining with us ? 

Je m'ennuie a la ville, et je m'amuse I become weary of the city, and find 

a la campagne. amusement in the country. 

A quoi vous amusez-vous ? With what do you amuse yourself? 

Je m'amuse a lire l'allemand. i" amuse myself in reading German. 



120 TEEXTE-UriTIKJIE L E C O N . 

Exercise "73. 

Apprend-re, 4. ir. to Entend-re, 1. to h at; Quand, when; 

Euauvor, L. Set £ 49,(2.) Quelquefois, sometimes; 

Banquier, m. banker; Langue, E language; Rec-evoir, 3. to 

Client, in. client, au- Malade, i Rev-enir, 2. ir. to come 

•lire, in. bill; back; 

l>eiut;ur-er, 1. to dwell; Prefer-er, 1. to prefer; Tromp-cr, 1. to 

1. Aimcz-vous u demeurer a la oampagne ? 2. Je prefers la cam- 
pagne a. la ville. D. Vousennuj tven( a lacampagne? 

I jo m'ennoie I ne, je reviena a la v 

General L. ? G. On n'entend pas parferdehiL 

7. Voos trompesr-vons quelquefoia? 8. Tout le monde se trompe 

•. Le banqmer trompe-t-il sea clients? 10. 11 do 

trompc i.i j amis, il nc trompe perBonne. 11. No 

mpes-Toos pas dans ce memoire ? 12. Je ne me trompe pas. 

13. Vow re? ] 1. Je m'an 

I'aflemand et le franoaia, 15. Avea-voos tort (Tapprendre 

]•- Ian/ :• n '::•■■. 17. V OOS rnnuyt'7.- 

vous souvi-nt ? 1-. Je m'ennoie quand jo o'ai rien&fiure, 19. A 

mpagne? 20. Nona 
. Bona le teste de Ujoornee. 
»ura l:. ii? 'j'j. Nous Bommee quelque- 
chercher lo moMecin? 2 
renvojona ohercher. Is cheroher, 

K\i;i:< -isi: VI. 

1. Are] 2. lam oot mistaken. .">. Is sot the 

banker i 

6. He does 

nobody. 7. Are you □ 
■ not intend to deceive lii: 
tistakc ? 10. He i the bill 

1. Do you 1. '! ]•_'. 1 

i 
I weary you 

16. Do 



SB PASSEE, SE SERVIE, ETC. 121 

the contrary, it amuses us. 24. Is your brother heard from? 
25. Nothing is heard of him. [L. 35.] 26. Is your sister -well? 
27. No, sir ; she is sick. 28. Do I weary you ? 29. You do not 
weary me. 30. Am I mistaken ? 31. You are not mistaken. 32. Is 
he often mistaken ? 33. He is often mistaken. 34. Do you not rise 
late? 35. No, sir; I rise early. 



LEgON XXXIX. LESSON XXXIX. 

SE PASSEE, SE SERVIE, ETC. 

1. The reflective verb, se passer, is used idiomatically in the sense 
of to do without. It is followed by the preposition de, when it 
comes before a noun or a verb. 

Vous passez-vous de ce iivre ? Do you do without that book ? 
Je ne puis m'en passer. I cannot do without it. 

2. Se servir [2. ir. see § 62], to use, also requires the preposition de 
before its object. 

Je me sers de votre cani£ - I use your penknife. 

Je ne m'en sers pas. I do not use it. 

3. The second example of the two rules above, shows that when 
the object of those verbs is a thing, it is represented in the sentence 
by the pronoun en. 

Je m'en sers, je m'en passe. I use it, I do without it. 

4. The pronoun 1 used as indirect object of a reflective verb, if rep- 
resenting a person, follows the verb [§ 100, (4.)] 

Je puis me passer de lui. 7" can do without him. 

Je m'adresse a vous et a elle. I apply to you and to her. 

5. S'endormir [2. ir. see § 62.], to fall asleep, and s'eveiller, to 
awake, are also reflective. 

Jo m'endors aussitot que je me- I fall asleep as soon as I go to bed. 

coucbe. 
Je m'eveille a. six lieures du matin. i" awake at six o'clock in the morning. 

6. S'approcher, to come near, to approach ; s' eloigner, to draw bach, 
to leave, take the preposition de before a noun. Their object, when 
a pronoun, is subject to Rules 3 and 4 above. 

Yotre fils s'approche-t-il du feu? Does your son draw near the fire? 

11 ne s'en approche pas. He does not come near it. 

II s'eloigne de moi et de vous. He goes from me and from you. 

1 The rule does not apply to the reflective pronoun, which is sometimes 
an indirect object. 



122 



T Ii E N T E - X i: U V 1 1! M E I. E Q O X. 



RjBSUME OF 

Tous servcz-vous de ce couteau ? 
Je ne m'en sera pas; il ne coupe pan. 
De quels couteaux vous servez-vous ? 
Nous nous servons do couteaux 

d'acier. 
Pouvez-vous vous passer d'argent ? 

• pouvoos Doug en passer. 
Voua passez-vooa de votre mattre? 

i ■ lui. 
Vous actresses- vous a ces messieurs? 
N ius nous adressons a eux et a vous. 
Vous vous endormez (adlemeai. 
J>- m'ereillede tree bonne b 
l'ourquoi vous approchoz-vous du 

Jc m'en approche, parce quo j'ai 
froid ? 

us eloignous du feu. 
Nous m his en i kugaoaa. 

.- approohons denotro pere. 
Nous uous apfruehoaa do luL 



Examples. 

I>o you use (hat knife? 
I do not use it ; i 
What knit s du you use? 
steel knives. 

do without it. 
Ih you do without your- teacher t 

■ hi in. 
Do you cq>ply t<> those gentlemen t 
■i and to you. 

I '/(/. 
Why do you come near 

I come near it, became I am cold. 

a fin. 

■ 

whim. 



Etcisa :.'•. 

also; Onlin.iir. nifiil, general- 

ly, 

Feu, i Plume, f. | 

Fourchette, Lfork; Pourquoi, why; 
I ; Heure, E • 

qua, in. . ' ' Quart, nv qwmrter; 

lant ; Taill-cr, to timid. 

1. Pouvee-vous V( pouvoni nous en 

votra 

pluma ? 1. J Ne voales- 

du feu ? G. je n'ai 

oid. 7. Pourquoi cea demoisel ifenA- 

qu'il y fait trop !. 

enfant I moi 

:.mn frfee. 11. A quelle heure vous eveillez-vous le matin? 

12. J< 

. 

1 3. Je ■ . dont 

. 
• -t-il du feu? 21. ! parce qu'il 

chaud, 22. Pourquoi votre domestique s'en approche-t-il ? 2 
ipproche pour sc chauffer, lii. Vuus ennuyea-voua ioi ? 2o. Jo 



s'en allee, se plaiite, etc. 123 

Exercise 76. 
1. Will you lend me your penknife? 2. I cannot do without 
it, I want it to mend my pen. 3. Do you wish to use my book ? 
4. I wish to use it, will you lend it to me ? 5. What knife does 
3'our brother use ? 6. He uses my father's knife, and my brother's 
fork. 7. Will you not draw near the fire ? ' 8. We are much obliged 
to 3 r ou, we are warm. 9. Is that young lady warm enough ? [L. 34, 
3.] 10. She is very cold. 11. Tell her (dites-lui) to come near the 
fire ? 12. Why do you go from the fire ? 13. We are too warm. 
14. Does your brother leave the window ? 15. He leaves the win- 
dow, because he is cold. 16. To whom does that gentleman apply ? 
17. He applies to me and to my brother. 18. Why does he not ap- 
ply to me ? 19. Because he is ashamed to speak to you. 20. Do 
you awake early every morning? 21. I awake early, when I go to 
bed early. 22. Why do you go to sleep ? 23. I go to sleep because 
I am tired. 24. Are you afraid to go near your father ? 25. I am 
not afraid to approach him. 26. Can you do without us ? 27. We 
cannot do without you, but we can do without your brother. 28. Do 
you want my brother's horse ? 29. No, sir ; we can do without it. 
30. Do you intend to do without money? 31. You know very 
well that we cannot do without it. 32. Is your brother weary of 
being here ? 33. He is not weary of being here. 34. Come near 
the fire, my "child. 



LECON XL. LESSON XL. 

S'EN AIXER, SE PEAIKE, ETC. 

1. The verb alter (1. ir. § 62.), conjugated reflectively, and pre- 
ceded by the word era, i. e.. s'era aller, corresponds to the English ex- 
pressions to go away, to leave. 

2. Indicative Present of the Verb S'en Aller, to go away- 
Je m'ec vais, I go away; Nous nous en al- We go away ; 
Tu t'en vas, Thou art going away ; Ions, 

11 s'en va, He goes away ; Vousvous en allez, You are going 

away ; 
lis s'en vont, They go away. 

3. The same Tense Conjugated Interrogatively. 
Est-ce que je m'en Do I go away? Nous en allons- Do we go away ? 

vais ? nous ? 

T'en vas-tu ? Art thou going Yous en allez- Do you go away? 

away ? vous ? 

B'en va-t-il ? Is he going away ? S'en vont-ils? Do they go away ? 



12 1 QUAE.VXTIJHE LECOX, 

4. Se facher, to be or become angry, requires the preposition contre 
. • noun or pronoun following it. 

Be f.'tche-t-il contre votre frere J Does h 

:.rro\m. Hi is angry with him. 

IXD rien. 

,'")Ve, is followfl by the pr 
. >tre bonheur. I rejoice al your happi 

■ 

Ids A In cam] Hike I 

7. - ; .r/.v(V, take d 

MSM. 

1 I 

* 

- 

it newer 

torn t 
Da <iui>i i 

joateOQI du 

1!" 

S 

' 

8 
\ 

at tsk 77. 

I /or ; 

rival i Mulliour, m. misfortune; & rnaine, t. i 

! < r«; /vrt; 

Midi, 

2. Je in'- :. 



s'en allee, se plaiee, etc. 125 

p]ais pas ici. 5. Vous plaisez-vous mieux chez votre tante qu'ici ? 
6. Je m'y plais mieux. 7. N'avez-vous pas tort de vou3 en aller si 
tot ? 8. J'ai raison de in' en aller. 9. Ne vous rejouissez-vous pas 
des malheurs d'autrui? 10. Nous ne nous en rejouissons point. 
11. Cet homme se fache-t-il contre le jardiaier? 12. II se fache 
contre lui, parce qu'il ne veut pas se depecherj/ 13. Se fache-t-il bien 
souvent ? 14. II se fache a, tout moment, il se fache d'un rien. 15. Ne 
vous depechez-vous jamais ? 16. Je me depeche toujours, quand j'ai 
quelque chose a faire. 17. Ne vous plaisez-vous pas a courir et a 
jouer ? 18. Je me plais a jouer, et mon frere se plait a lire. 19. Vous 
rejouissez-vous de l'arrivee de I'ambassadeur turc? 20. Je m'en 
rejouis. 21. Ne vous plaisez-vous pas en Amerique ? 22. Je m'y 
plais beaucoup mieux qu'en France. 23. Votre ecolier ne se plait-il 
pas chez vous ? 24. II se plait chez moi, mais il desire retourner 
chez son pere. 25. Depechez-vous, il est deja midi. 

Exercise 78. 

1. At what hour does your friend go away ? 2. He goes away 
every morning at nine o'clock. 3. Do you go away with (avec) him ? 
4. I go away with him, when I have time. 5. Will you make haste 
to finish your letter ? 6. I make haste to finish it. 7. Does the gar- 
dener get angry with his brother ? 8. He gets angry with him, when 
he does not make haste. 9. Make haste my friend, it is teu o'clock. 
10. Why do you not make haste? 11. I like to play, but I do not 
like to study. 12. Do you like to stay at my house ? 13. I like to 
stay there. 14. Do you rejoice at the arrival of your mother? 
15. I rejoice at it. 16. Is not your brother wrong to go away so 
soon ? 17 He is right to go away, he has much to do at home. 
18. Do you rejoice at other people's misfortunes? 19. I do not re- 
joice at them. 20. I rejoice at your success. 21. Does not your 
brother draw near the fire ? 22. He goes from the fire, he is too 
warm. 23. Does that young lady get angry with you ? 24. She 
gets angry at trifles (de rien). 25. Do you like to be in Paris? 26. I 
like to be there. 27. Can you do without me to-day ? 28. We 
cannot do without you ; make haste to finish your work (ouvrage). 
29. Do you want your penknife ? 30. I want to use it. 31. Make 
haste to rise, it is six o'clock. 32. Is it fine weather ? 33. No, sir ; 
it rains. 34. Is your father well this morning ? 35. Yes, sir ; he is 
very well. 



126 QUAEAXTE E T UNljtiS.lt LET OX. 

LEQOX XLI. LESSON XLL 

THE TAST INDEFINITE. [§ 121.] 

1. The past indefinite is composed of the present of the ind ; cative 
of one of the auxiliary verbs, avoir and ,'tr- and the par- 
ticiple past of a verb. See the different paradigms of verbs, g -17 
and following sections. 

J'ai parle, jo suis arriv''. J have spoken, I have arrived. 

2. The past indefinite is used to express an action entirely 

med at a time of which a part is not yet elaj 
or at a time entirely past, but not specified. [§121, i 1.) f-Mj 

J'ai v:; matin. / have seen your father this morning. 

Je no vousai pas i I have not you. 

3. The past indefinite may also be used, when the til 
fied. [i 121,(3.)] 

ii .'-crit la sotn 
Jo lai r U»t month. 

den 

•1. 

orally ; 

I 

Jo Lie 1 ha 

of manner ending in mm 
advci; • between th 

I 1. !. 

y avoir, {] I 

B an. 

R 

to us. 
-.1 fail mon habit ? 
kxmier a Oui scd soulier& T/.t shot i 



THE PAST INDEFINITE. 127 

Votre frere a dit quelque chose. Tour brother said something. 

Votre sceur qu'a-t-elle dit ? What did your sister say f 
N'avez-vous rien dit a rnon cousin ? Have you told my cousin nothing ? 

Je ne lui ai rien dit. I have told him nothing. 

Je ne l'ai jamais rencontre. I have never met him. 

Je ne leur ai jamais parle. i" never spoke to them. 

Qu'avez-vous fait aujourd'hui ? What have you done to-day? 

Hier, nous n'avons pas travaille. We did not work yesterday. 

En avez-vous souvent parle ? Have you often spoken about it ? 

Je leur en ai souvent parle. / have often spoken to them about it. 

Je ne le leur ai pas encore dit. I have not yet told them of it. 

N'avez-vous pas assez ecrit? Have you not written enough? 

II m'a ecrit, il y a longtemps. He wrote to me, a long time ago. 

II nous a repondu, il 7 a un mois. He replied to us, a month ago. 

Exercise 79. 

Avocat, m. barrister ; G-arcon, m. boy ; Mis, from mettre, put on ; 

Cela, ceci, that, this; Hier, yesterday; Plant-er, 1. to plant; 

Dit, told, said ; Journee, f. day • Poirier, m. pear-tree ; 

Etudi-er, 1. to study ; Lu, from lire, read ; Soulier, m. shoe ; 

Gant, m. glove ; Ministre, m. minister ; Vu, from voir, seen. 

1. Qui vous a dit cela ? 2. L'avocat me l'a dit. 3. Lui avez-vous 
parle de cette affaire ? 4. Je ne lui en ai pas encore parle. 5. L' avez- 
vous vu dernierement ? 6. Je l'ai vu, il y a quelques jours. 7. N'avez- 
vous pas ecrit hier? 8. Nous avons lu et ecrit toute la journee, 
[L. 26, (9.)] 9. N'avez-vous pas ote vos gants et vos souliers ? 10. Je 
n'ai pas ote mes gants, mais j'ai ote" rnon chapeau. 11. Le tailleur 
n'a-t-il pas mis son chapeau ? 12. Oui, monsieur ; il a mis son cha- 
peau. 13. Qu'avez-vous fait & ee petit garcon ? 14. Je ne lui ai rien 
fait. 15. Ne lui avez-vous point dit que je suis ici ? 16. Je ne le lui 
ai pas encore dit. 17. Qu'avez-vous etudie ce matin ? 18. Nous avons 
etudie nos lecons, et nous avons lu nos livres. 19. Le jardinier du mi- 
nistre a-t-il plante le poirier ? 20. II l'a plante, il y a plus de huit jours. 
21. Avez-vous achete un habit de drap noir ? 22. Fen ai achete un. 
23. L'avez-vous porte aujourd'hui? 24. Je ne l'ai pas encore porte. 
25. Nous avons mis nos souliers et nos bas ce matin. 

Exercise 80. 

1. Have you studied to-day ? 2. "We have no time to study, we 
have read a page. 3. Have you not written to my brother ? 4. I 
have not yet written to him. 5. Has not the German written to my 
mother ? 6. He has not yet written to her. 7. Have you told (a) 
my mother that I have taken (pris) this book ? 8. I have not yet 
seen your mother. 9. What have you done this morning ? 10. We 
have done nothing. 11. Have you taken off your coat ? 12. I have 



128 QUAEAUTE-DETJXliME LE^OX. 

not taken off my coat, it is too cold. 13. Has the bookseller writ- 
t li to your brother? 14. He wrote to him, a long time ago. 15. Did 
he write to him, a month ago ? 1G. He wrote to him, more than a 
year ago. 1". Have you planted a pear-tree ? 18. We have planted 
several. 19. Is it too cold to (pour) plant trees? 20. It is too warm. 
21. What has the gardener done to your little boy ? 22. lie Las done 
nothing to him. 23. Has any one done any thing to him ? 24. Xo 
one has done any thing to him. 25. Is any thing the matter with him ? 
2G. Nothing is the matter with him. 27. Baa your father put on his 
black hat ? 2& Xo. sir; he has not put on his blade hat. 211 What 
hafl your brother said? 30. lie has said nothing. 31. Has your 
I -Id yon tl: told it me. 33. Did yon not work 

day? 3 !. We did DO< work yesterday, we have nothing to do. 
35. Your little boy has done nothing to-day. 



ON XLII. LESSON XLII. 

THE PAST PABXft rri.i:. [§ 134.] 

'•■. which, in French, forma a part of ev 

a its termination. 
will find in the table of the terminations of the 
I e past participle 
of th m oinine terminations of the 

»und in the alpha 

■ of ill- feminine termination is always an <- mute. 
•1. 'i 

•"'■ i ipanied by I new 

i 

77«j youni lulirr. sany. 

ia its 
ler and number .•! 

Ma :i„. 

a us. 

Phe participle, a )mpanied by the auxiliary 

r with its din 
S 42, 1 1. J when the object prece I 



THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 129 

Les dames que nous avons vues. Tlie ladies whom we have seen. 
Les lettres que nous avons lues. Tlie letters which we have read. 

8. When the regime direct or objective (accusative) follows the 
participle, no agreement takes place, [§ 134, (5.)] 

Avez-vous vu les dames ? Save you seen the ladies ? 

Avons-nous lu les lettres ? Save we read the letters ? 

9. A past participle never agrees with its regime indirect, or indi- 
rect object (dative or ablative), [§ 2, (3.) § 42, (5.)] 

Les dames a, qui nous avons parle. The ladies to whom we have spoken. 

10. The past participle used adjectively, that is, without an aux- 
iliary, foUows the rule of the adjective, [§ 66, (3.) § 134, (1.)] 

Des litres bien imprimes. Wellprinted books. 

11. The participle, preceded by the relative pronoun en, remains 
invariable, although the en should relate to a feminine or plural 
noun, [§ 135, (7.)] 

Avez-vous apporte des plumes ? Have you drought pens ? 

J'en ai apporte. / have brought some. 

12. The presence of en does not, however, prevent the agreement 
of the participle, when it is preceded by a direct regimen, [§ 135, 
(7-)] 

Les plumes que j'en ai apportees. Thepens which Ihave brought from it 

Resume of Examples. 

Tos soeurs ont-elles ecrit ? Save your sisters written ? 

Elles n'ont pas encore ecrit. They have not yet written. 

Les lettres que nous avons ecrites. The letters which we have written. 

Avez-vous ecrit vos lettres ? Save you written your letters ? 

Je les ai lues; je les ai ecrites. I have read them; Ihave written them. 

Les avez-vous apportees ? Save you brought them ? 

Je ne les ai pas apportees. / have not brought them. 

Avez-vous appele' ces dames ? Save you called those ladies ? 

Je ne les ai pas appelees. Ihave not called them. 

Qui avez-vous vu ce matin ? Whom have you seen this morning ? 

Nous avons vu ces demoiselles. We have seen those young ladies. 

Nous les avons vues. We have seen them. 

Nous ne leur avons pas parle. We have not spoken to them. 

Avez-vous des livres relies ? Save you bound books ? 

J'ai des livres broches. i" have unbound {stitched, in paper 

covers,) books. 

Avez-vous achete des pommes? Save you bought apples? 

J'en ai achete. Ihave bought some. 

Nous en avons achete. We have bought some. 

Nous les en avons persuades. We have persuaded them of it. 
6* 



130 QUAEAXTE-DEUXIKHE LEgOX. 

EXERCISH 81. 

Achct-or, 1. to huy, Dit, from Diro, 4. ir. Marc-hand, m. merchant; 

[§ 40, (5.)] said; Musique, 1*. m 

Apport-er, 1. to briny ; Entenu-re, 4. to hear ; Oubli-er, 1. to forget; 

r. 1. to call, Examin-er, 1. to exam- Point, not, a stronger 

[§ 49, (4 ] ine; n than pas; 

Broch-er, I. to stitch; Exptee, on purj I, to receive; 

Bour- er; r, 1. to bind] 

Cass-er, 1. io .: Reveana, m. p. income; 

Commission, f. errand; Gravure, £ engraving; Taeae, f. ea$>; 

Dcnm-er, 1. to give; La Yu, /rem voir, 3. ir 

1. Nona svee-TOus apport^nos habits? 2. Nous ne lea avona paa 

encore app i : rubliea? 4. N 

pas oublies, mais nous : eu lo tempe da tea importer. 

irqooi n'avei appele" lea marchanda ? G. Jo ]» 

appi!.' ntendu. 7. A atenduoette 

[ue ? 8. Jc P a li s jofiea 

I 
. ■ 

J* lea 
16, .1,- i,. 

17. Jo, 
I 
L'n. A-t-i 11 

ochcto" 

nlieS. 
•Jl. \ -lites, 

26. Jo a'ai pas oubliu rotrt coin- 
mission. 

1. II. I my cup*? 2. I have not yr-t seen thorn. 

8. I! 

your Boaters? • ;. She baa n 

1" Have nay acnwlf 

11. 91 

12. W 
II. Ha 

broken them on ; 



USE OE THE AUXILIARIES. 131 

every month ? 21. She receives it every six months. 22. Is the 
house which you have bought large ? 23. I have bought no house. 
24. Did you receive a letter from your father yesterday ? 25. I re- 
received a letter from him, four days ago. 26. Have you spoken to 
those ladies ? 27. I have spoken to them. 28. Have you given 
them flowers ? 29. 1 have given them some (en). 30. Are the books 
which you have bought bound ? 31. No, sir ; they are in paper 
covers. 32. Have you examined that house ? 33. I have not ex- 
amined it. 34. Your brother (en) has examined several (plusieurs). 



LEgON XLIIL LESSON XLIIL 

USE OE THE AUXILIARIES (§ 46). 

1. The active verb, [§ 43, (2.) (3.)] that is, the verb which has or 
may have a direct regimen or object, always takes avoir as its aux- 
iliary [(§ 46, (1.)] 

Nous avons ecrit a notre banquier. We have written to our banker. 

2. Most neuter verbs, 1 i. €., verbs which cannot have a direct object,'' 
take also the auxiliary avoir. 

Nous avons couru, marche, parle. We have run, walked, spoken. 

3. The compound tenses of a few neuter verbs are, however, con- 
jugated with ttre : aller, to go • arriver, to arrive ; entrer, to enter, 
to go in; rentrer, to go in again; tomber, to' fall; deceder, mourir, 
to die; naitre, to be born; partir, to start; venir, to come; parvenir, 
to succeed; de venir, to become; revenir, to return. 

' A quelle heure etes-vous venu ? ' At what hour did you come ? 
Je suis 2 ne en France. I was lorn in France. 

4. A few neuter verbs [see list § 46, (3.)] take avoir, when they 
express action, and ttre, when they express situation. 

Totre frere a-t-il sorti ce matin ? Has your brother gone out this morn- 
ing ? i. e., Has he been out ? 

Votre frere est-il sorti ? Has your brother gone out ? i. e., Is he 

out now ? 

5. The past indefinite of the verb ttre [4. ir.] (J'ai etc, &c.) is 

'"There are in French," says Girault Duvivier, "about COO neuter 
verbs; and of these upwards of 550 take avoir." 

2 Observe that when the person spoken of, is living, the French use the 
present and not the past of the auxiliary, with the past participle of naitre, 
to be bom : Cette dame est nee en Angleterre. That lady (is) was born in 
England. Mon frere est ne en France. My brother (is) was born in France. 



1 33 QL"AKAXTE-TROISliME LE^OX. 

. instead of the past indefinite of otter (Je suis all ) ; when speak- 
ing of a place whore one has l> ■• :i. 

i.viii n ,'t- ; a Paris. 
J'ai ete a l'eglise co matin. / went to chunk r. 

6. When, however, we are still in a given place, or on the road 
Is it, the expression, Je su - used, 

dan has gone fa London. 
Votre aOBOI i urc h. 

Ri • 

: rrn bal hier au Boil 
nou3. 

■ 

voir son J'. 

•j.strrday (and 

.. moaon; 

; 

• '■ 

to be 
\. \ 

moo. pore? 12. T 

aujourd'hui ? 14. II n'a : 






MENEE, POUTER, AMENEE, ETC. 133 

a, la maison ? 16. Non, madame ; il est sorti. 17. Quand est-il 
sorti ? 18. II est sorti il y a une lieure. 19. Votre chapelier est-il 
arrive aujourd'hui, ou bier ? 20. II est arrive bier, a quatre beures 
du matin. 2.1. Notre tailleur a-t-il ete voir son pere aujourd'hui ? 
22. II est parti pour Lyon. 23. L'orfevre de mon cousin n'est-il pas 
parti pour l'Espagne ? 24. Non, monsieur; il est retourne en Alle- 
magne. 25. Ma sceur a ete a l'eglise ce matin, et die est allee a 
l'ecole, il y a une demi-beure. 

Exercise 84. 
1. Is tbe physician at home ? 2. No, sir ; be is not at home ; be 
is out. 3. Have you been out this morning ? 4. No, sir ; I have not 
been out ; I am sick. 5. Is your sister's little girl out ? 6. Tes, sir ; 
she is out, she is at my brother's. 7. At what hour did the hatter 
arrive ? 8. He arrived last evening at nine. 9. Did the jeweller go 
to Paris, or to Lyons this year? 10. He went to Paris six months 
ago, but be is back (de retour). 11. Did you go to my brother, or to 
my sister ? 12. I have not had time to go to them. 13. Where 
was that gentleman born ? 14. He was born in England, in Exeter, 
or in Portsmouth. 15. Was not your sister born in Paris? 16. No, 
sir; she was born in Madrid, in Spain. 17. Did you tell me that 
your brother has bought a good house ? 18. He has bought a very 
good house, in London. < 19. Do you know at what time the watch- 
maker arrived ? 20. He arrived this morning, at a quarter btfore 
five. 21. Has he brought much jewelry ? 22. He has not brought 
much jewelry, but he has brought many watches (montre, f.) 23. Has 
he been in Prance, or in G-ermany ? 24. He has been in Prance, in 
Germany, and in Switzerland (Suisse). 25. Is your sister in (d ca 
maison), sir? 26. No, sir; she is out, she has gone to church. 
27. Did she go to school yesterday? 28. She went to school, and 
to church. 29. Is she there now? 30. No sir; she is back. 
31. Has the hatter arrived ? 32. Tes, sir; be has arrived. 33. "When 
cbd he arrive ? 34. He arrived yesterday, at nine o'clock in thi 
morning. 

LEgON XLIV. LESSON XLIY. 

MENER, PORTER, AMENER, APPORTER, ETC. 
1. Comhien de temps corresponds with the English expression 
how long. 

Combieu de temps avez-voua de- How long did you live in Italy f 
meure en Italie ? 



134 QUAE A>TTE- QU ATE ItM E LET OX. 

2. Combien de fois answers to the English, how often, how many 
times. 

Combien de fois y avez-voua e'te ? Hjw many times have you been there 1 

3. Jusquou is used for how far, what distant 
Jusqn'oa avez-voua Bow far hare you been ? 

4. Jusqu'd quelle '. \ :t hour.) means also, how 

Juaqu'a quelle heure avez-vuus at- IL-w ]a c did you wait? 
tendu? 

5. Cot) means whence; par ou, rectibn. 

ami? IT 

Pai I I!'.. r ■_, , | | 

take, to carry; anioner, appor: 

I 

v, etc. 

IV: I 

// 

.' 
. ans. 

• bcuro avcz-voua Em 

it josqu'A minuit. V t/nM midnight. 

W 
onent d'Aix-la-Chap lie. 

77xry cane 
fiUfl a Z) 

j ■ l'y ported ell 

IT ItiarrlifT. 
D6 l< ttPB :'i l.i 

on choral, yemporte / 1 



ME]STEK, POETEE, AMEUEE, ETC. 135 

EXEECISE 85. 

Bruit, m. noise ; Ici, here ; Pied, m. foot ; 

Drap, m. cloth; Loin, far; Quitt-cr, 1. to leave; 

Eleve, m. pupil; Magn'ifique, magnificent ; Soieries, f. p. silk goods, 

Tils, m. son ; Midi, noon ; Voiture, carriage ; 

Fin, e, fine ; Nouvelle, f. news ; Voyageur, m. traveller; 

1. Le jeune liomme est-il alle loin ? 2. II n'est pas alle bien loin, 
il n'est alle que jusqu'a Paris. 3. Vos enfants font trop de bruit, 
pourquoi ne les emmenez-vous pa's ? 4. Us sont malades, ils ne peu- 
vent marcher. 5. Comment les avez-vous amenes ici ? 6. Je les ai 
amenes en voiture. 7. A quelle 'lieure amenez-vous le medecin? 

8. Je l'amene tous les jours a midi. 9. Combien de fois par jour 
menez-vous vos eleves a l'eglise ? 10. Je les mene a l'eglise deux 
fois par jour. 11. Combien de fois y avez-vous ete ? 12. J'y ai ete 
plusieurs fois. 13. Par ou ces voyageurs sont-ils venus ? 14. Ils 
sont venus par Amiens et par Rouen. 15. D'ou apportez-vous cette 
nouvelle? 16. Je l'apporte de Cologne. 17. D'ou. avez-vous amend 
ces superbes chevaux ? 18. Je les ai amenes d' Angleterre. 19. Si 
vous quittez la Prance, avez-vous l'intention d'emmener votre fils ? 
20. J'ai l'intention de l'emmener. 21. Qu'avez-vous apporte do 
France ? 22. Nous avons apporte de magnifiques soieries, des draps 
fins, et des chapeaux de Lyon. 23. Avez-vous amene votre fille & 
pied ou 3, cheval ? 24. Je l'ai amenee en voiture. 25. Vos freres 
nous ont apporte des livres. 

Exeecise 86. 

1. How long did your son live in London ? 2. He lived there 
ten years. 3. How far has the physician gone ? 4. The physician 
has gone as far as Cologne. 5. Has he taken his son with him ? 
6. He has not taken him. 7. How have you brought your two lit- 
tle girls ? 8. I brought one in a carriage, and I carried the other. 

9. Is she too little to walk ? 10. She is not too small to walk, but 
she is sick. 11. Have you brought your horse ? 12. We have brought 
two horses. 13. Have you brought the books which you have pro- 
mised me (promis) $ 14. I have forgotten to bring them. 15. Has 
that lady brought her eldest (aine) son ? 16. She has brought all 
her children. 17. How did they come? 18. They came in a 
carriage. 19. Which way did your brother come from Germany ? 
20. He came by Aix-la-Chapelle and Brussels. 21. Do you intend 
to take your son to school this afternoon ? 22. I do not intend 
to take him there, it is too cold. 23. Is that child too sick to walk? 
24. He is too sick to walk, and I intend to carry him. 25. Why do 



100 QT7 ARAXIE-CIXQV I 13 ME LE^OX. 

you not take him in a carriage? 26. My brother lias taken my 
horse away. 27. Have you brought the physician ? 28. I have not 
brought him, no one is sick at our house. 29. Will you take this 
book to church? 30. I have another, I do not want it. 31. Have 
you taken my letter to the post-office? 32. I have forgotten it. 
33. How late did you write? 34 I wrote until midnight (minuit). 
.nee do your sisters come ? 30. They come from Paris. 



LEQON XLV. - 'X XLV. 

ai Mi.i.vKV a\i> i-AUii. iri i: OF i:::iii:< u\ i: am> t nitku- 
BONAX VXBBS. 

■ pronominal \ 

. 

conjugated 

. iii.it regimen pre- 

todent 

or an 

la m.iin. 

It wi!'. 

■ 

II a pin, 

t. \ 

. ilheiir. '.' me A".< ha] 

A-l-il.- ' 

. hero f 



REFLECTIVE AND UNIPEESONAL V Eli US. 137 

6. The past participle of a unipersonal verb is always invariable 
[§ 135, (6.)] 
Les pluies qu'il y a eu cet ete. The rains which we have had this 

summer. 

Resume of Examples. 

Les Italiennes se sont-elles prome- Did the Italian ladies take a ivalle ? 

nees ? 
Oui, monsieur ; elles se sont prome- Yes, sir ; they have taken a walk. 

nees. 

Nous nous sommes apercus de cela. We perceived that. 

Yotre mere s'est-elle bieu portee ? Has your mother been ivell ? 

Vos soeurs se sont-elles assises ? Did your sisters sit down ? 

Cette marckandise s'est-elle bien Did that merchandise sell well ? 

vendue ? 

Yos enfants se sont-ils appliques a. Did your children apply to study f 

1' etude? 

lis s'y sont appliques. Tliey applied to it. 

Nous nous sommes donne de la We gave {to) ourselves trouble. 

peine. [§ 135, (1.)] 

Quel temps a-t-il fait ce matin ? What weather was it this morning? 

N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps ? Was it not fine weather 1 

Quel malheur est-il arrive ? What misfortune has happened ? 

Vous est-il arrive quelque chose ? Das any thing happened to you ? 

11 ne m'est rien arrive. Nothing has happened to me. 

ExEEClSE 87. 

Acier, m. steel ; S'asse-oir, 3. ir. ref. to Plu, from pleuvoir,ramec?; 

S'adress-er, 1. ref. to ap- sit down; Plume, f. pen ; 

ply (to a person or S'ermuy-er, 1. pec. [§ Se port-er, 1. ref. to be 

place) ; 49.] to grow weary ; or do ; 

S'aperc-evoir, 3. ref. to G-rel-er, 1. pec. to hail; Se tromp-er, 1. ref to be 

perceive; Hollandais, e, Dutch; mistaken; 

S'appliqu-er, 1. to apply Neig-er, 1. pec. to snow ; Se serv-ir. 2. ir. ref. to use; 

(to a thing) ; Peine, f. trouble ; Se vend-re, 4. ref. to sell. 

1. A qui vos soeurs se sont-elles adressees ? 2. Elles se sont 
adressees a moi. 3. Ne se sont-elles pas trompees? [L. 38, 1.] 

4. Elles se sont trompees. 5. Vous etes-vous apercu de votre 
erreur? 6. Je ne m' en suis pas apercu. 7. Vous etes-vous ennuyes 

5, la campagne ? 8. Nous nous y sommes ennuyes. [L. 38, 4.] 
9. Ces demoiselles se sont-elles ennuyees chez vous ? 10. Elles s'y 
sont ennuyees. 11. De quoi vous etes-vous servie pour ecrire, 
mademoiselle ? [L. 39, 2.] 12. Je me suis servie d'une plume d'or. 

13. Ces ecolieres ne se sont-elles pas servies de plumes d'acier? 

14. Elles se sont servies de plumes d'argent. 15. La Hollandaise 
s'est-elle assise? 16. Eile ne s'est point assise. 17. Lui est-il arrive 
un malheur ? 18. II ne lui est rien arrive, elle ne se porte pas tres 
bien. 19. Nev s'est-elle pas donne [§ 135, (1.)] de la peine pour rien? 



138 QUAEANTE-SIXIKME LEO ON. 

20. Cette soie ne s'est-elle pas bien vendue? 21. Elle s'est trds 
bien vendue. 22. N'a-t-il pas fait beau temps toute la joumee? 
23. Non, monsieur ; il a plu, 1 il a neige* et il a grele. 24. N'est-il rim 

arrive aux deux dames que nous avons vues ce matin? 115. Non, 
madame; il ne leur est rien arrivj. 

ExsaaSE 88. 

1. Has it rained to-day ? 2. It has not rained, but it lias baile 1 
and snowed. 3. lias any thing happened to your little bay? 
•1. Nothing has happened to him, but In 1 i> sick to-day. 5. 1 ' 

• sit down at ; I nol sit down, she was 

7. Did that cloth Sell well? 8. It sold well, we have Bold 

it all 9. Did you perceive you L0. We perceived 

it. 11. W. taken in tin's affair? 12. 

!:. 13. Wi ■ is w< ary of being 

in the 1 1. Tli. \- v, :' being at my brother's. 

1.",. V. 

I a silver pen. 17. Have you used my pen- 

I it. 19. Whal bas happened to yon? 

i. Has your mother been well? 

'. 23. Did your brothers apply to their 

i ad have lin- 

26. It. 

r taken much trouble iu 

28. B a much trouble for nothing. 29. Did 

ralk? 30. They walked this morning. .''.1. How 

! they walk 

each "tli. r the hand ':) 
:;t. We sho k i . 
much (beam 



I.I".( ON Xi.VI. LESSON XI.YI. 

Tin: PASSIVE vi i:::. I g B I.) 

- Bra, in all 
.-• participle <■!' an . 

and number with 

.*:, B 



THE PASSIVE VERB. 139 

Ces vieillards sont respectes. Tlwse old men are respected. 

Ces enf'auts sont aimes de tout lo Those children are loved by every- 
monde. body. 

3. The genius of the French language seems to prefer the active 
to the passive voice. Many expressions, which are in the passive in 
English, are accordingly rendered into French by the active or re- 
flective [§ 128, (5.) § 113, (1.)]. 

Cette maison est a louer ou a vendre. Tliat house is to be let or sold. 

Ma soeur est a, plaindre. My sister is to be pitied. 

Cet homme est a craindre. That man is to be feared. 

Get homme s'appelle H. [L. 36, E. 2.] Thai man is called II. 

Cet homme se trompc. [L. 38, R 2.] That man is mistaken. 

On dit que cela est ainsi. [L. 35, R. 2.] It is said that it is so. 

On nous a dit cela. [L. 35, R. 2.] We have been told that. 

4. In answer to a question [see L. 24, E. 12], the pronoun le cor- 
responds in signification with the English word so, or it, expressed 
or understood. Le refers then to a noun not determined (not preceded 
by an article or a possessive adjective), to an adjective, to a verb or 
even to a whole sentence. 

Ces enfants sont-ils aimes ? Are those children loved? 

lis ne le sont pas. They are not (so). 

Ces demoiselles sont-elles soeurs? Are those young ladies sisters ? 

Elles ne le sont pas. They are not. 

5. "When le refers to a determined noun, it often corresponds in 
signification to the pronoun he, she, or they, which may or may not be 
expressed in the English sentence. Le must then assume the gender 
and number of the noun to which it refers. 

Etes-vous la soeur de mon ami? Are you the sister of my friend? 
Je la suis. / am (she). 



Resume of Examples. 

Leur conduite est-elle approuvee ? Is their conduct approved ? 

Elle n'est approuvee de personne. It is approved by nobody. 

Cette dame est-elle estimee et res- Is that lady esteemed and respected ? 

pectee ? 

Elle n'est ni estimee ni respectee. She is neither esteemed nor respected. 

Ces marehandises sont a vendre. Those goods are to be sold (for sale). 

Ces enfants sont a- plaindre. Those children are to be pitied. 

A-t-on dit quelque chose a mon frere ? Has anything been said to my brother ? 

On ne lui a rien dit. Nothing has been said to him. 

Savez-vous comment cela s'appelle ? Do you know how that is called ? 

Madame, etes-vous maitresse ici ? Madame, are you mistress here ? 

Je ne le suis pas, Monsieur. I am not (so), sir. 

Etes-vous la maitresse de la maison ? Are you the mistress of the house ? 

Je la suis. lam (she). 



140 quaeamte-sixieme leo ox. 

Exercise 89. 

S'appel-er, 1. poo. to be Croi-re, 4. ir. to believe; Fun-ir, 2. io punish; 

calif d [§ 4L». (4.iJ; £colier, m. scholar; Rarement, seldom ; 
Auteur, m. author; Jardiu, iu. garden; Relieur, m. bookbinder J 

Bl&n-er, 1. to blame; Lou-er, 1. to lei, to praise; Souvent, often ; 

Mere, f. mother; Us-er, 1. to wear out; 

Conduite, £ conduct; Paresseaz, Be, idle; Vend-re, -i. tosdl; 

1. Totre mOre est-clle aimee de sa scour? 2. Elle est aimee de 

son frere el de sa bobut. 3. Les Italiens sont-ils aimesdes Francois? 

•1. Vos ecobere ne sont-ils pas bl&mes ? 5. lis sont bl&mes quelque- 

>uvent punis? 7. Ds sont rarement punis. 8. Tar 

qui etes-vous puni, qnand voua 9. Je ae buis jamais 

puni in. Sa conduite a-t-.lle e*te" approuvee? 11. Efle a i'u' ap- 

• .m le moude. 12. EUe a e*te* approuve*e par 1 see amis. 

I:;, < ' , e time" de tout le monda 

15. Le jardin da relieur est-il ft vendre <>n a, louer? 1G. On dit 

qu'il est & louer. 17. Le menuisier a-t-il fait (aire >m habit? 18. 11 

L9 I kbits que vous ..•• i z a< betes Bont-fls 

i ai fail faire d'autres, 21. I'ii- 

on qu 22. < >n oe !<■ d 

avoua rues & 
OBurs? "J l. Ellea oe le 
dit q . L'offlcier tjuc vie&t d'ar- 

. 

90. 

1. ' I ither blamed DOf 

body '( 1. She is 

. 5. W !.■: I Noth- 

b :•:. 7. I >■> W>ii kuOM 

5. 1 . ave 

piti( i ? 1". 

! ' 

lie. 13. An 

. win M they 
blamed when they arc idle. l">. Is that 

■ mod, and r>- 

i by i \. ,v bo ly . 17. Whal has bc< d told you ? 1 
brother is n 

i not 21. 1 

1 The prq>osiUou.s de uud par urc used indifferently naive 



s'en alleb, £tee, etc. 141 

you pleased with your son's conduct ? 22. No, sir; I am not, for lie 
is blamed by every body. 23. How is that large (gros) man called ? 
24. It is said that he is called H. 25. What is your brother's name ? 
26. He is called James. 27. Have you been told that my brother 
has arrived? 28. "We have been told so. 29. Are the goods which 
your brother has brought, for sale? 30. They are not for sale. 
31. Has the bookbinder had a coat made ? 32. He has had a coat 
made. 33. Is his other coat worn out? 34. The coat which he 
bought last year is worn out. 



LEQON XLVIL LESSON XLVII. 

s'en allee, etbe, etc. 

1. In the compound tenses of the verb s'en aller, 'to go away, 
[L. 40. 1, 2], the pronoun en will of course keep its general place, 
after the other pronouns and he/ore the auxiliary. It must never 
come between the auxiliary and the participle. 

Je m'en suis alle, / went away ; Nous nous en We went away ; 

sommes alles, 
Tu t'en es alle, Tlwu didst go Vous vous en etes You went away ; 

away ; alles, 

II s'en est alle, He went away ; Us s'en sont alles, They went away. 

Les dames s'en sont allees. The ladies have gone away. 

Les messieurs s'en sont alles. The gentlemen have gone away. 

2. The verb aller when referring to articles of dress answers to the 
English, to fit, to sit. 

Mon habit va bien. ^ My coat fits or sits well. 

3. Seoir, [3. ir. see table § 62.] answers to the English, to suit, to 
become. 

Ce chapeau ne vous sied point. That hat does not become you. 

4. Essayer, (§ 49.) corresponds in signification to the English, to 
try on. 

J'ai essaye mon gilet, il ne me va I have tried my waiscoat, it does not 
pas bien. fit me well. 

5. Eire is often used in French for appartenir, to belong, [§ 106, (3.)] 
Elle est a mon cousin. It is my cousin's. 



145 



QTT AB ANTE -S E P TI B M B LErox. 



Resume op Examples. 



A quelle heure voua en 6tes-vous 

all-? 

Jo m'en soia alle a neuf heui 
11 i'ii s-voua allies : 
lames 7 

i ird. 

i a ? 
Kilo ne me va paa bi 

• I fort Men? 
Je I'ai essayed maia il ne me va paa 

bien. 
11 va bi£n a mon Brere. 
II me gene, il me Berre (rop. 
Oette robe ne lui va p 

. & mi 'i ? 
i ni a moi ni 
nt-fla done? 
I 
J'ai apporte oeux d 



At what hour did you go away f 

I went away at nine <' 

"j too soon, ladiu 1 

i 

;/ well t 
I hare I g not/U 

H H. 

■<uch. 

■ 

to you. 
■ they then t 

mjhtt 
I 



I 

1 
1 



'.'1. 



Ton-ir, 2. Ir. to hold; 



von( pas 



1. v 

I. I '.lies 
I .li'iiiiirr 

re alio*. 7. A quelle beore 
I 
I obil que voua 
? 10. II im- i ni & lui ni 1 moi, 
-t-il bien? 12. I! lui va i 
cl il lui > - 1 1. 11 Pa fail 

A !.! made- 

' va-t-;l 

mi.-ux q k ., mteuz. 

I. 1 
21. ' 
22, Je I'ai i ' : couleur n- 

couleura 



FALLOIE, ^ 143 

Exercise 92. 
1. Have your friends gone away ? 2. They have not gone away, 
they are still here. 3. At what hour did your mother go away? 
4. She went away early this morning. 5. Did your little sister go 
away late ? 6. She went away too soon. 7. Does your sister's new 
dress become her ? 8. It does not become her. 9. Why does it 
not become her ? 10. Dark colors never become her. 11. Do light 
colors become your brother's wife ? 12. They become ' her very 
well. 13. Are your new boots too narrow, or too wide ? 14. They 
are neither too narrow nor too wide, they fit very well. 15. Does 
your brother's waistcoat fit him? 16. It fits him, but it does not 
become him. 17. Light colors never become him. 18. Does 
your coat press you ? 19. It does not press me, it is by far too 
wide. 20. Whose house is that? 21. It is my father's and 
brother's. 22. Whose books have you brought this morning ? 23. 1 have 
brought my brother's and sister's. 24. Whose dresses are those ? 
25. They are my mother's, my sister's, and my cousin's. 26. Are 
not those German books yours ? 27. They are not mine, they are 
my friend's. 28. Are those pens yours or mine? 29. They 
neither yours nor mine, they are my brother's. 30. Does tl 
fit you well ? 31. Yes, sir ; it fits me well, but it does not 1 
me. 32. Is your hat too small ? 33. It is too large. 34. A: 
gloves too large ? 25. They are too small, I cannot put then 



LEgON XLVIII. LESSON XLVIII. 

EAIXOIK, TO BE NECESSARY, ETC. 

1. The verb falloir [3. ir.], to be necessary, is always conjugated 
unipersonally. See table, § 62, page 364. 

II faut, il a fallu. It is necessary, it was or has been ne- 

cessary. 
II faut etudier tous les jours. It is necessary to study every day. 

2. As falloir has always a unipersonal pronoun for its nominative 
or subject, a pronoun in the indirect regimen (dative — me, ie, lui, 
nous, vous, leur,) placed before the verb, will be equivalent to the 
pronoun used as nominative to the English verbs must, to be 

etc. 



II me faut ecrire un theme. I must write an exercise. 

Ou nous faut-il aller? Where must we go ? 



.EAXTK-HUITIEilE LETOX. 

.,/• is used in the signification of to leant, to need, to be 
.ne necessity of having. 

. me taut un livre. 1 I ■ 

II lui taut de l'argent. Me is in want of money. 

4. When must is used in the last acceptation, and has a noun as 
it* nominative, the noun in the corresponding French sentence 
should be in the indirect regimen preceded by a- 

II l'aut un livre ;\ ma soeur. 

lir.-IMl': OV Kx.VMIM 

To\ir npprendro uno langue, il faut To team a language, it is 7iecessary to 

study. 
11 faut alter d « "~'J io 'J° *<■' chureh and io 

II faut rector d la mateon V '" remain at home. 

11 me faut lire DO ton livre. J must rend a QOQ& book. 

U lui taut alter v.>ir Ba "•'" / Me her n 

laui-il lire? must they read? 

■il ? 

credit V . credit. 

, •;.■ ii it, j f nines 1 

intv-rini] francs. / 

nt ; lut-il a voire // 

'' i'0. 

.1 I U. :••]:. RKUtl 

Bzxbi i-i 

Aii'T trouver, Port, very, very much; 

Ourra 
-. m. LOOM . im-.i], 

Envoyer, I. ir. ; 

i r.'iii 

ianyt 1'iui: Qoand, 

1. Que iaut-il (aire aujourd'hui? 2. Anjourd'hui, il faut travailler. 
;;. A-t-il lallu travailler fort, pour finir L'ouvrage a temps ? I. 11 a 
l.illu travaill.T toute lajoumde. 5. Q 

id ecrire aujourd'hui 7. M«' faut-il alter trouver 

moo pdra ? 8. Q voua faul aller le trouver, il i parter. 

.1 besom de quekrae chose ? 1<>. II lui faut deslivree, dee pi 

I'enore. 11. Ne lui faut-il pae aussi de l'argent V 1-- H '"' •'" 

faul beauooup pour pay. i en ore quelque 

1 1. II De me faul plus rien, j'ai toul ce qu'fl me faut I 

> Another construction of these sentences will bo fouud Lmmq '-'-'. l, -• 
Lesson 7. 



SEOIE, COHTE1TIE, VALOIE, ETC. 145 

faut-il pas du papier a votre sceur ? 16. II ne lui en faut pas da- 
vantage. 1 17. Que faut-il envoyer au chirurgien? IS. II faut lui 
envoyer de l'argent, il en a grand besoin. 19. La modiste a-t-elle 
tout ce qu'il lui faut? 20. Elle n'a pas tout ce qu'il lui faut. 21. Com- 
bien vous faut-il ? 22. II me faut cinq francs. 23. Ne vous faut-il 
pas davantage ? 24. II ne me faut pas davantage. 25. Que lui faut- 
il pour sa peine ? 26. II demande un franc vingt-cinq centimes. 

Exercise 94. 
1. What must we do? 2. Tou must bring your book and learn 
your lesson. 3. Is it necessary to write to your brother to-day ? 4. It 
is not necessary to write to him. 5. Has it been necessary to speak 
to your father ? 6. It has been necessary to speak to him. 7. Is it 
necessary to go to D. to-day? 8. It is necessary to go there (y). 
9. Must I go to your sister ? 10. Tou must go to her, she wishes to 
speak to you. 11. How much money must your brother have? 
12. He must have ten francs fifty centimes. 13. How many books 
does your sister want ? 14. She must have many books, she reads 
(lit) much. 15. What will you send to the surgeon ? 16. We must 
send him our horse; his own (le sieri) is sick. 17. Must he not have 
paper? 18. He must have some ; he has letters to write. 19. Must 
he have much ? 20. He must have a quire (mam, f). 21. Do you 
want any thing more ? (See No. 13, in the French exercise above.) 
22. I need something more. 23. I need nothing more. 24. Must 
you have one hundred francs ? 25. 1 must have ten dollars. 26. What 
does the surgeon want ? 27. He must have money, to (pour) pay 
his debts. 28. Has the tailor all that he wants ? 29. He has not all 
that he wants. 30. The milliner has received all that she wants. 
31. What must you have for your trouble ? 32. How much do you 
want ? 33. How much do we want ? 34. What must I do ? 35. You 
must write a letter. 36. What must she write ? 37. She must write 
four pages. 38. She must go to church. 

«S ' « r. » • » «» 

LEQON XLLX. LESSON" XLIX. 

SEOIE, CO]SrVENTE, VAXOIK, ETC. 

1. The verb seoir [3. ir. Lesson 47, Eule 3.], is also used uniper- 
sonally. 

]Q ne vous sied pas de parler ainsL It does not become you to speak thus. 

1 This adverb should never be placed before a substantive. 

7 



146 Q r A K A N T E - N E U V I E M E L E C O K . 

2. The verb con ■ I uni- 

| 

11 convbut cb lui e /; w ad visa . 

verb vahir [see table, § 02.] co:: 

::iuisoa vaut ting millo francs. T^-i/ 1 house is i 

•1. Ne rien valoi valoir 

grand'chose, /o be worth little, not to I- ■//. 

Ce drop no vaut ricn. Thai 

If olre maisou no vaut pas grand'chose. On. • 

5. £tre riche de . . . i 
is the nominal 

mill 

l; Bi \mpi bs. 

II M \ 

repro 

it «o. 

idler. /' ' 

I . eotre jardin i 

rien. 

■ 

-. l ' ■ •• •. i 

- 

. to deserve, 
else; Cuaine, £ cJuiin; 



SEOIR, COlfYENIE, YALOIE, ETC. 147 

Montre, f. watch ; Pouvoir, 3. ir. to be able ; Tout au plus, at most ; 

Negligence, f. neglect; Reprock-er, 1. to re- ~V a, from aller, to go ; 
Negotiant, m. merchant; proach ; Vingtaine,f. about twenty. 

1. Vous sied-il de nous reproclier notre negligence ? 2. II me 
sied de vous faire des reproches, quand vous le meritez. 3. Vous 
convient-il d' aller trouver mon frefie ? 4. II ne me convient pas 
d'aller le trouver, j'ai autre chose h faire. 5. Combien ce champ 
peut-il valoir ? 6. II peut valoir une vingtaine [§ 27, (2.)] de mille 
francs. "77 Valez-vous mieux que votre frere ? 8. Mon frere vaut 
beaucoup mieux que moi. 9. Ce couteau ne vaut-il pas plus que le 
votre? 10. Le mien est meilleur, il vaut da vantage. 11. Combien 
votre 'montre vaut-elle ? 12. Elle ne vaut pas grand'chose, elle ne 
va pas bien. 13. De combien le negotiant est-il riche ? 14. Je ne 
puis vous le dire au juste, il est riche d'une centaine de mille francs." 
15. Ne vaut-il pas mieux rester ici que d'aller au marche ? 16. II 
vaut mieux aller au marche. 17. Yotre chaine d'or vaut-elle plus 
que la mienne? 18. Elle vaut tout autant. 19. Elle ne vaut pas 
grand'chose, elle est cassee. 20. Cela vaut-il cinquante francs? 
21. Cela vaut tout au. plus deux francs. 22. Avez-vous demande 
au marchand ce que cela vaut? 23. Je ne le lui ai pas demande. 
24. II m' assure que cela vaut une centaine de francs. 

Exercise 96. 
1. How much is my house worth ? 2. It is worth about twenty- 
thousand francs. 3. Is that horse worth as much as this one? 

4. This horse is worth two hundred dollars, and that one three hundred. 

5. Is it worth the while to write to your brother ? 6. It is not worth 
the while. 7. Is it worth the while to go out, when one does not 
wish to walk ? 8. It is not (n'eri) worth the while. 9. Does it suit 
you to write to my brother to-morrow ? 10. It does not suit me to 
write to him. 11. Does it become you to reproach me with my neg- 
lect ? 12. It becomes me to blame (bldmer) you when you deserve 
it. 13. What is that man worth? 14. I cannot tell you exactly, 
about fifty thousand francs. 15. Is that cloth good ? 16. No, sir ; 
ifc is good for nothing. 17. Is your gun worth as much as mine ? 
18. Tes, sir • it is worth more. 19. Will you go to my father's ? 
20. No, sir; I have something else to do. 21. Is it better to go to 
market early than late ? 22. It is better to go early. 23. How 
much may your horse be worth ? 24. It is not worth mucb, it is 
very old. 25. Is your watch better than mine ? 26. It is not worth 
much, it does not go. 27. Is that book worth two francs ? 28. It is 
worth one, at most. 29. Have you asked your sister what that 



148 CIX Q TANTIEME LE^OX. 

book is worth? 30. 1 have not. [L. 21, R. 12; L. 40, R. 4.] 31. What 
must I do ? 32. You must speak to your father. 33. Must he have 
money? 34. lie must have some. 35. Has he not sold his horse ? 
30. He has sold it, but it is not -worth much. 



LEQON L. LESSON L. 

im:i:\i>i:k, a< SORTER, iu:mamh:i:. 

1. "When the verbfl prendre [I. ir. .<:(-<' j- 62.], to take; volor, to rob, 
to at' payer, to pa>/, are 
followed by J regimens in the 

-. if nouns, arc imt t" be separated from the 
n ; if pron form of the direct 

I 

livre? ' 

11, r 

- 

2. ' ipanied by ■ 

; 

: 

.'. ;;!, [f a noun, be preceded b; 

: . : the indirect 

; Die book. 

lash- I'.'inan. 

/ one stolen y>ur books from 
!/"" f 
. 2.] 1 me. 

lea Boulicrs au curdon- lias Vie .•shoemaker been ]>aid fur Uis 

lui a pas cii' r them. 

f 



; 



PRENDRE, ACHETER, DEMANDER, ETC. 149 

Qui avez-vous demande ? Whom have you asked for ? 

• J'ai demande mon frere aine. I inquired for my eldest brother. 

Avez-vous demande de l'argent a Have you asked your friend for 

votre ami? money? 

Je ne lui en ai pas demande. I have not asked him for any. 

Exercise 97. 

Chapelier, m. hatter ; Legume, m. vegetable ; Eend-re, 4. to return ; 

Crayon, m. pencil; Loyer, m. rent; Renseignements, m. p. 

Demeur-er, 1. to dwell, to Pantoufle, f. slipper ; information ; 

live; Paysan, m. peasant; Eevenus, m. p. income; 

Penetre, f. window ; Proprietaire, m. land- Tout, e, all ; 

Prapp-er, 1. to knock; lord; Voyageur, m. traveller; 

1. Que vous a-t-on pris ? 2. On m'a pris mes livres, mes crayons, et 
mon canif. 3. Savez-vous qui vous les a pris ? 4. Je ne connais pas 
celui qui me les a pris, mais je sais qu'il demeure ici. .' 5. Avez-vous 
demande vos livres ? 6. Je les ai demandes a mon cousin. 7. Vous 
les a-t-il rendus ? 8. II me les a payes. 9. Vous a-t-on vole beaucoup 
de fruit cette annee ? 10. On m'a vole des legumes, mais on ne m'a 
point vole de fruit. 11. Avez-vous paye votre chapeau au paysan ? 
12. Je ne le lui ai pas paye, je l'ai paye au chapelier. 13. A qui avez- 
vous demande des renseignements ? 14. J'en ai demande au voya- 
geur. 15. Savez-vous qui vient de frapper a la porte ? 16. C'est M. 
L., qui vous demande. 17. Qui avez-vous demande? 18. J'ai demande 
votre frere. 19. Votre frere a-t-il paye toutes ses dettes ? 20. H ne 
les a pas encore payees, parce qu'il n'a pas recu ses revenus. 21. Lui 
avez-vous paye ce que vous lui avez achete ? 22. Je le lui ai paye. 
23. Ne leur avez-vous pas paye votre loyer ? 24. Je le leur ai paye. 
25. Us nous ont paye notre maison. 

Exercise 98. 
1. Have you paid your landlord ? 2. I have paid him my rent. 

3. Have you paid him for the windows which you have broken ? 

4. I have paid him for them. 5. Has the hatter paid for all his hats ? 

6. He has not paid for them, he has bought them on credit (a credit). 

7. Do you pay what you owe, every day ? 8. I pay my butcher 
every week. 9. Have you paid him for his meat ? 10. I have paid 
him for it. 11. Eor whom did you inquire this morning ? 12. I in- 
quired for your brother. 13. Why did you not inquire for my father ? 
14. I know that your father is in England. 15. Has the hatter been 
paid for his hats ? 16. He has been paid for them. 17. Has your 
money been taken from you ? 18. My hat has been stolen from me. 
19. Have you asked your brother for your money? 20. I have asked 
him for it, but he cannot return it to me. 21. Has he no money? 



150 



CINQTTAHTE E T UNIEME L E r O N" . 



22. He has just paid all his debts, and lie has no i i 

23. Have you asked your father for money? 24. I have not 

him for any, I know that he has none. 25. From what bookseQer 
have you bought your books? 26. I bought them from your book- 
ou 'wrong to pay your del';-? 28. I am right to 
pay them. 20. Who is inquiring for me? 30. The physician is in- 
quiring for you 31. Who knocks? '■'•-. Your shoemaker knocks, 



LE< o\" T.I. LESSON LI. 

Tin; PAST DJBFUN1TJC. (§ I - 

L The past definite may be called tl tZ tense 

of the French, rt is used to ■< definite 

The time mu • y por- 

L "One night at least," Bay the besl French 

... tion took ; 

...r in mind i indefinite [L -11. J 

owever, may 
the indefinil •. the indefin 

would at times appear 

;.- the 

! with 

'i i y the par- 

J'ulhii a L'egliae bier \urch yesterday 



•1. TsRM ' 





chant 


fill 






/ 












-as 


-is 


•oa 


-is 


77iou 


donn •* 








11 


fimn 




•it 
























H'U-jht 








VoOl 






.1 
















-irout 


■urent 


-ircnt 


yvy 




united 


ttctmt 





THE PAST DEFINITE. 



151 



5. It will be seen that the terminations of the second, and fourth 
conjugations are alike. 

Resume of Examples. 

On nous parla de vous hier. They spoke to us of you yesterday. 

Le banquier nous donna de l'argent The banker gave us money last year. 

l'annee derniere. 

Le banquier nous a donne de l'ar- The hanker has given us money. 

gent. 

Le professeur nous parla de yous, The professor spoke to us about you, 

l'annee derniere. last year. 

II nous a parle de ses amis, et des Be spoke to us of his friends, and of 

notres. ours. 

Pendant notre voyage, il nous ra- During our journey, he related to us 

conta ses aventures. his adventures. 

II nous a raconte l'bistoire de sa vie. He related to us the history of his life. 



Exercise 99. 

Aine, e, elder, eldest; Se lev-er, 1. ref. to rise ; Proprietes, f. p. property ; 

Avec, with; Lorsque, when; Eacont-er, 1. to relate; 

Se coucb-er, 1. ref. to go Lyon, Lyons ; Eemerci-er, 1. to thank ; 

to bed; Neuf, ve, new ; Sejour, ra. stay; 

Dernier, e, last ; Ordinairement, general- Semaine, f. week; 

S'ecbapp-er, 1. ref. to ly ; Soldat, m. soldier ; 

escape; Pendant, during; Tard, late; 

Habillement, m. dress ; Pri-er, 1. to beg ; Trop tot, too soon. 



1. Le banquier recut-il beaucoup d'argent la semaine derniere? 

I. H en recut beaucoup. 3. Aussitot que vous apercutes votre frere, 
be lui parlates-vous pas ? 4. Des que je l'apercus, je lui parlai. 
5. Avez-vous deja porte vos habillements neufs ? 6. Je ne les ai pas 
encore portes. 7. Quand il vous donna de l'argent hier, le remer- 
ciates-vous ? 8. Je le remerciai, et je le priai de vous remercier. 
9. Avez-vous trouve vos livres ? 10. Je ne les ai pas encore trouves. 

II. Lorsque vous vintes nous voir, ne finites-vous pas vos affaires 
avec mon pere? 12. Je les finis alors, et je le payai. 13. N' avez- 
vous pas vu votre sceur ainee, pendant votre sejour a Lyon ? 14. Je 
ne l'ai pas vue. 15. Ne vous couchates-vous pas trop tot, hier au 
soir ? 16. Je me couchai tard. 17. A quelle heure vous etes-vous 
leve ce matin ? 18. Je me suis leve a" cinq heures ; je me leve ordi- 
nairement de bonne heure. . 19. Ne cherchates-vous pas h vous 
echapper de votre prison, l'annee derniere ? 20. Je n'ai jamais cherche 
a m'echapper. 21. Avez-vous vendu vos proprietes? 22. Je ne 
les ai pas vendues. 23. Qu' avez-vous donne au soldat ? 24. Je ne 
lui ai rien donne. 25. Pendant son sejour a B. } nous lui donnames 
tout ce qu'il voulut. 



1^2 c i xt qu a h tb-d e u x i £ h b le(;os 

Exercise 100. 

1. What did you receive last week ? 2. We received fifty francs 

from your friend, and twenty-live from your brother. 3. Did you 

take your son to church with you yesterday ? 4. I did not take him 

there (y). 5. What did y year? G. "We lost our money, 

our clothe?, and our horses. 7. Have you looked (eherch&s) for 

P 8. I looked for them, but did not find them. D. Did they 

speak of your brother yesterday? 10. They spoke of him and of 

you. 11. What did the physician . • me 

nothing: 13. At what hour did your j sterday ? 14* She 

15. 1 H 1 j ' 16. We 

. 7. Eas your i ousin sold all h. 

i i 11. -us 
_ >. He related them 
. 21. I'M ■ your father? 

22. ! I 

■i him. 

80. I have 
i.. r. 31. When 
bank him ? 32. I did not 

it line v. /her. 



T.i:<<)\ i.n. LESSON LII. 

P L8T DBFEHTXJB, COOTIK! ED. 

I. The 1 

- 

Tn 



Vora, to see; 










1 -m 














v - 





a which an 
n coni' 



THE PAST DEFINITE, 



153 



2. Avoir and etre, it will be perceived, take in this tense a new- 
stem, e-us, /-us ; etre and lire, though belonging to the 4th conjuga- 
tion, take the terminations of the 3d, and voir, a verb of the 3d, takes 
the terminations of the 4th. 

3. In other instances, the stem of the verb drops some of its let- 
ters, and sometimes adopts others. This may be seen in the verbs 

Craindre, 
to fear ; 
craign -is 
craign -is 
craigu -it 
craign -imes 
craign -ites 
craign -irent 

4. Like venir, are conjugated all verbs ending in enir ; like crain- 
dre, connaitre, and conduire, those ending in indre, aitre, aud uire; 
and like prendre, those composed of this verb and a prefix : as, com- 
prendre, surprendre, &c. 

5. We would at all times refer the student to the table of irregu- 
lar verbs, § 62, for those tenses of the irregular verbs, with which he 
is not familiar. 

Resume op Examples. 
Ne conduisites-vous point votre fils Did you not take your son to 



Venir, 


Prendre, 


to 


come; 


to take; 


Je 


v -ins 


pr 


-is 


Tu 


v -ins 


pr 


-is 


11 


v -int 


pr 


-it 


Nous 


v -inmes 


pr 


-imes 


Vous 


v -intes 


pr 


-ites 


lis 


v -inrent 


pr 


-irent 



30NNA1TRE, 


Condutre, 


to know ; 


to conduct. 


conn -us 


conduis -is 


conn -us 


conduis -is 


conn -ut 


conduis -it 


conn -umes 


conduis -imes 


conn -utes 


conduis -ites 


conn -urent 


conduis -irent 



en Espagne, l'annee derniere ? 
Je Vy conduisis, et je Yy laissai. 
Aussitot que vous vites votre frere, 

ne le reconnutes-vous pas ? 
Je le reconnus, aussitot que je 

l'apergus. 



last year? 

1 took him thither, and left him. 

As soon as you saw your brother, did 
you not recognize him ? 

I recognized him, as soon as 1 per- 
ceived him. 



voir ? 
II vint me voir; il fut bien etonne 

de trouver chez moi, un de ses 

anciens amis. 
Ne prites-vous pas conge de vos 

amis, hier? 
Je pris conge d'eux, et je les priai 

de m'ecrire. 



Le pharmacien ne vint-il pas vous Did not the apothecary come to see 

you? 

Ee came to see me; he was much 

astonished to find one of his old 

friends, at my house. 

Did you not take leave of your friends, 

yesterday ? 
I took leave of them, and begged them 
to write to me. 
Exercise 101. 
Accompagner, 1. to ac- De mon mieux, as well Eistoire, f. history; 

company ; as I could; Inform-er, 1. to inform; 

A la fin, at last ; Se depech-er, 1. ref. to Notaire, m. notary ; 

Amicalement, kindly ; make haste ; Lu, from lire, 4. ir. to 

Arrivee, f. arrival ; Des que, as soon as ; read ; 

Attend-re, 4. to wait for; Ecolier, m. scholar; Peintre, m. painter; 

Au secours, to the assis- S'ennuy-er, 1. pec. lobe- Perd-re, 2. to lose; 

tance ; come weary ; Sans, without ; 

Conge, m. leave ; Se hat-er, 1. ref. to Secour-ir, 2. ir. to sue' 

Cour-ir, 2. ir. to run; hasten; cor. 

7* 



154 CIXQUAXTE-DEUXIE3IE LEgON. 

1. Xos eeoliers s'ennuyerent-ils hier d'attendre si longtemps? 

2. lis furent obliges d'attendre si longtemps, qu'S la fin ils perdirent 

patience. 3. Ne recutes-vous point votre parent amicalement, lors-, 

qu'il vint vous voir? 4. Je le recus de mon mieux. 5. Ne lutes- 

vous pas la lettre de votre frere, avant hier ? G. Je la lus, et je l'en- 

voyai u raon oncle. 7. Ne courutes-vous pas an secours de votre 

frere, aussitut que vous le vitea en danger? . 8. Je me hatai de Le 

... 9. Ne vous etes- vous pas dep&mes de venir? 10. Nous 

nous sommc? depeche& 11. Aussitdtque vous eutes apercu mon frere, 

ne m'informates-vous pas de son arrivee ? \'2. Je vous en informal 

13. A quelle beure votre Boeur est-eUe venue aujourdlini? 14. Elle 

one ;"i miili. 17j. Voa compagnons vinrent-ils hier vous prier do 

16. Ils vinrent me voir, mais ils me quitterent 

me parler de leur \ 17. Ne pei i an 

tableau, l'ani '. ; 18. Je peignis un tableau d'histoire. 

? 20. II le finit hier. 
uvelle, 
j.-urie lmiume a-t-^teris ■ 
. 24. 11 a pris conge de lui. 'lo. 11 prit Congo de lui 
hier. 

Y.w.\:< \sa 102. 

1. I ;.? 2. He accompanied 

l ! your companion 
irning. 

.-. i... h 1 have lent you ? G. I 

At what ti::, 

nine. 

'.). II L0. Be painted all day 

11. I), >l yon not ran 

; .-aw hint in i L2. Ibl 

bat did you do w 
soon. r my brother. 15. Did you tab 

rmany last year? 16. [ took her then 
your children to i y ? ! -. I took them I 

19. Do you paint a historical picture? -<>. I paint. 

: |>atiy 
her? Bd !'"r 

tha notary, aa aoon as you heard from your lathi nl for 

him. 2& When did the notary tak 

this morning at nine. 27. Has the apothr 
hid letter ? 28. lie has not yet finished it 20. Were you not 



THE IMPERFECT. 155 

much (lien) astonished yesterday to see that lady ? 30. I was not 
astonished to see her. 31. Did you make haste to read your book, 
last night {hier au soir) ? 32. I made haste to read it. 33. Have 
you finished it ? 34. I have not yet finished it. 



LEQON LIII. LESSON LIII. 

THE IMPERFECT. (§ 119.) 

1. The imperfect, or simultaneous past tense, may be called the 
descriptive tense of the French. The action which it represents, or 
the situation which it describes, is imperfect of itself. This tense 
leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action zmdetermined. 
It may often be rendered in English by the auxiliary was, and the 
participle present of the verb [§ 119, 120.] 

J'ecrivais ce matin quand vous etes I was writing this morning when you 

entre. came in. 

Je passais hier quand vous m'ap- I was passing yesterday when you 

pelates. called me. 

2. The imperfect is also used to express an action which is cus- 
tomary or often repeated. It may then be rendered in English by the 
words used to, placed before the verb. 

L'annee derniere, j'allais tous les Last year, I went (used to go) every 

jours a l'ecole. day to school. 

Quand nous demeurions a la cam- When we lived, (used to live) in the 

pagne, nous nous couchions or- country, we used to go to bed at nine 

dinairement aneuf heures. o'clock. 

3. The imperfect can seldom be rendered in English by the past 
tense which takes did 1 as an auxiliary. The past definite never cor- 
responds in meaning to the English imperfect, composed of the 
auxiliary "was," and the participle present. It cannot be rendered 
by the verb preceded by " used to." 

J'allais a, la chasse hier matin quand I was going hunting yesterday morn- 
nous nous rencontrames. ing when we met (did meet). 
J'allai a la chasse hier matin. I went (did go) hunting yesterday 
morning. 

4. The imperfect is formed from the participle present, by changing 
ant into ais, etc., § 61. It may also be formed by adding ais, etc., to 

1 Except when, in interrogative sentences, did is used as an auxiliary 
to used to expressed or understood. 



156 



CI.XQl-AN.TE-TEOISIEME L E £ O N 



the stem of the verb, for the 1st and 4th conjugations, issais, etc., for 
the 2d, and evais for the 3d. 



5. TERMINATIONS OF THE I.MPERFECT OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 



Je chant -ais 

/ K<i» tinging 

Tu pari -ais 

Jhou wutupeaWng 

II donn -ait 

PCh -ions 

Vous port -iez 
I 
Da aim -aient 

TJiey we 



nn 

u<<* finishing 

i b r -jasaia 
icatt ohtriaMng 

loiirn - 

.' -king 

pun 

'■-hing 
BaiB 

mi -isaaient 

were uniting 



-evaia 

IO<U rect icing 

apero -evaia 

■ .>/'//;/ 

perc -wait 
-eviona 

d 

■( roient 



rend -ais 

tea* rendering 

vend -ais 

IM / mlling 

tend -ait 

WOI tending 

entend -ions 

wring 
perd -ioz 

mord -aicnt 
«cd/« biting. 



EXAMPLES. 



J'aim.i: 

■ 



'y lo read M« 

/ . room when || 

, 

< your father when y 
in F 

- 

i-uj. 
I whs lot faOur. 



. 



■ 

Demeur- 

•an; 



N 

Ment-er, l. to 

Pantoufi 



pas, almost none, 
Retrouv-er, 1. to find 
rcise ; 



1. De «i»ii parliez-vooa co matin qaand trotnrwT 

N'aiinii'Z- 
- mieuz 1<- boeuf que le mouton, autrefoi '( t. .1 

Qvendatfl 

rairc. 7. I o libra lu beau- 

atin ? 8. 11 a vendu beaucoup 
jourd'hu.. ;-vous beaucoup d pie voua 



THE IMPERFECT. 157 

etiez libraire? 10. Je n'en vendais presque pas. 11. Votre frere 
portait-il un habit vert, lorsqu'il demeurait a Londres ? 12. II portait 
un habit brun et des pantoufles noires. 13. Que cherchiez-vous ? 
14. Je cherchais mon livre. 15. Depuis quand l'aviez-vous perdu ? 
16. Je l'avais perdu depuis hier. 17. L'avez-vous retrouve ? 18. Je 
l'avais retrouve, mais je l'ai perdu de nouveau. 19. Ce boulanger 
vous fournissait-il de bon pain ? 20. II nous en fournissait d' excel- 
lent. 21. Punissiez-vous souvent vos ecoliers ? 22. Je les punissais 
quand ils le meritaient. 23. Ou. etiez-vous ce matin, quand je vous 
cherchais? 24. J'etais dans ma chambre. 25. Je finissais mon 
theme. . 

Exercise 104. 

1. Who was at your house this morning ? 2. My friend G-. was 
there, and was looking for you. 3. Were you looking for me this 
morning? 4. I was not looking for you, I was looking for your 
scholar. 5. Did you speak to my father yesterday ? 6. I was speak- 
ing to him, when they brought me your letter. 7. Did you use to 
sell much meat, when you lived in B. ? 8. I sold much meat, because 
I was a butcher. 9. Did your father use to wear a white hat, when 
he lived in London ? 10. He used to wear a black hat, and my brother 
wore a black coat. 11. Were you singing when my father came ? 
12. No, sir ; I was finishing my exercise. 13. Had you lost your 
pencil this morning ? 14. I had lost it, and was looking for it when 
you spoke to me. 15. Has your brother paid all that he owed? 
16. He has not paid for his coat. 17. How was your mother when 
she lived in Italy ? 18. She was very well. 19. You used to like 
reading (la lecture,) did your sister (use to) like it also ? 20. She 
liked it also. 21. Where was your sister this morning, when I was 
looking for her ? 22. She was at my mother's. 23. What song were 
you singing this morning? 24. I was singing an Italian song. 
25. Have you been afraid to speak to me ? 26. I have never been 
afraid to speak to you. 27. Have you brought my book ? 28. I 
have not brought it. 29. Of what were you speaking ? 30. I was 
speaking of nothing. 31. What were you giving to my brother ? 
32. I was not giving him any thing. 33. What were you carrying? 
34. I was carrying a tree. 35. Where were you carrying it? 36. I 
was carrying it home. 



158 C I N Q U A H T E - Q U ATB I E M E LD g X. 

LEgON LIV. LESSON LIV. 

THE EMPERPECT, CONTINUED. 

1. The imperfect of the indicative of every French verb, regular 
or irregular, ends in ats, ais, at*, w><\ fea, atent 

2L No verb of the first conjugation br, is irregular in this tense. 

3. The only irregularity found in the irregular verbs of the scrum! 
conjugation in. is that, to form the imperfect, the stem of these verbs 

. ven-ir, Je ven-ais, cour-ir, Je 
Exception: Fuir, to flee — -jefuyaia. 

4. The irregular verbs of the third conjugation out, change that 
termination (oir) jular verba of the same: 

.-uir. fiiv-m's. [exceptions: Be-oir, to become, 
ipounds, and dechoir, [tee i i'<-.] 
which the stem of the irregular verba of the fourth 
conjugation undergoes, in this tense, are too various to admit of ■ 
.. We, however, offer the folloi 

CraIRDM, /.)/«ir. 

Je crai 
How. tat 

Je conduit 

8. Like] Scrire are conjugated, in thi i verbs 

in wh m : aa comprendre, 

: ■ lain. In- and 000- 

. an 

s; as, lire,/* 

fain-. 

rire, ta r I their compounds. 

7. niettre and its compounds, and 

The participle present, from which the French grammariaE 
fine the imp ..■ irregulariti( 

valant. prenant, ecrivant, craignant, ooadnisaiit. 

1> 'i B OF IaamplkS. 

DOtre ami avait-U pour? \$ our friend afraid t 

I! a'avail pear de rii a. 

■voua paa b. aoin de m 

■ ■ lui. We wanted him. 

irehand n'avaft-U paa beeoin D 'ant want money t 

■ .ut grand besoin. ZA, hud .jnat need 



TIIE IMPERFECT. 159 

Quelle voiture conduisiez-vous ? What carriage were you driving ? 

Pour qui me preniez-vous ? For whom were you taking me t 

Je venais vous trouver quand je I was coming to you when I met you. 

vous reneontrai. 

A qui ecriviez-vous ce matin ? To whom we'i e you writing this morn- 
ing? 

J'ecrivais a ma scaur et a, mon I was writing to my sister and to my 

frere. brother. 

Exercise 105. 

Autrement, otherwise ; Oubli-er, 1. to forget; Teind-re, 4. ir. h dye; 

Cass-er, 1. to break; Peche, f. fishing; Teinturier, m. dyer; 

Chasse, f. hunting ; Peind-re, 4. ir. to paint ; Toile, f. linen cloth; 

Dire, 4. ir. to say ; Keven-ir, 2. ir. to re- Rencontr-er, 1. to meet; 
Montre, f. watch ; turn ; Val-oir, 3. ir. to be worth ; 

Moius, (au) at least ; Sav-oir, 3. ir. to know ; Ven-ir, 2. ir. to come, to 

Mort, e, dead; Setromp-er, 1. to be mis- have just; L. 26, 2. 
Offens-er, 1. to offend; taken; Vite, quickly. 

1. Pourquoi n' ecriviez-vous pas plus vite ce matin ? 2. Parce que 
j'avais peur de me tromper. 3. Ne craigniez-vous pas d'offenser 
cette dame ? 4. Je craignais de l'offenser, mais je ne pouvais faire 
autrement ? 5. Que peigniez-vous ce matin ? 6. Je peignais un 
tableau d'histoire. 7. Votre teinturier que teignait-il ? 8. II teignait 
du drap, de la soie, et de la toile. 9. De quelle couleur les teignait- 
il ? 10. II teignait le drap en noir, et la soie et la toile en vert. 
11. Conduisiez-vous le jeune Polonais a l'ecole, lorsque je vous ai 
rencontre ? 12. Je conduisais mon fils aine a l'eglise. 13. Que lisiez- 
vous ? 14. Je lisais des livres que je venais d'acheter. 15. Ne saviez- 
vous pas que ce monsieur est mort ? 16. Je l'avais oublie. 17. Com- 
bien la montre que vous avez cassee valait-elle ? 18. Elle valait au 
moins deux cents francs. 19. Ne valait-il pas mieux rester ici, que 
d'aller a, la chasse ? 20. II valait beaucoup mieux aller a l'ecole. 
21. Votre ami que vous disait-il ? 22. II me disait que son frere est 
revenu d'Espagne. 23. N'alliez-vous pas h la chasse tous les jours, 
lorsque vous demeuriez a la campagne ? 24. J'allais souvent a la 
peche. 25. Mon fr£re allait tous les jours eL l'ecole, quand il etait ici. 

Exercise 106. 
1. "Were you afraid this morning when you came to our house ? 
2. I was afraid. 3. Of what were you afraid ? 4. I was afraid of 
the horse. 5. Was not your friend afraid of falling? (de tomber. 
See L. 21, E. 2, 4.) 6. He was not afraid of falling, but he was 
afraid of making a mistake (de se tromper. See 2. in Exercise above.') 
7. "Were you not afraid of offending your brother ? 8. I was afraid 
of offending him. 9. "Were you taking your son to school ? 10. I 



1G0 CINQU AKTE-CINQUlillE LEgON. 

was conducting him to school. 11. "Was the dyer dyeing your coat? 

12. He was not dyeing my coat,, he was dyeing silk. 13. What color 

was he dyeing the silk ? 14. He was dyeing some red, and some 

green. 15. Was he dyeing his linen cloth black or green ? 1G. He 

was neither dyeing it black nor green, he was dyeing it pink (rose). 

17. Were you aware (sa bat your uncle is dead? 18. I 

:.<>t know it (imperfect). 19. What was the gentleman read- 

20. He was reading a letter which he had just received. 

21. Wert you cold when you came here? 22. 1 was cold, hun- 

and thirsty. 23. Were you not ashamed of your couduct? 

24. 5. Were you not in want 

ney? 26. I waa not in want of it. 27. Did you not want 

We did not want him. !!'.). Whither w.r. 

i your house. 31. Were 
riving your broth •' 32. I was driving my own Qa 

v or t.i me ''. S 1. I was 
writing t.i y<>ur IV STour friend was taking me for 

your el I 



ON I.V. 3SON I.V. 

jiii: i\i \mi:i;i..i: am>iiii: PLUPBEFBCT. (.4 122,123.) 

■Hied from the past definite of the anx- 
\ 
. 
•_'. Ti." past anterior 

tion. The latter immediately 
follows the former, and often ■'■■ 
i 
I 
quand, 

allai. 

3. This tense partakes of finite. 

• t is composed of the imperfect of the auxiliary 

and i 

pplied nearly all the nil' 
of the imperfect. The .. .atiou 



PAST ANTERIOR AlfD PLUPERFECT. 101 

which it depicts, is frequently a customary one, or one often re- 
peated. 

Des que j'avais fini ma tacheje m'en As soon as my tash was finished, I 
aliais. used to go away. 

Resume of Examples. 

Aviez-vous eu soin de vos effets ? Had you taken care of your things ? 

J 'en avais eu soin. / had taken care of them. 

N'aviez-voua pas eu besoin de moi ? Had you not wanted me f 

J'avais eu besoin de vous et de votre I had wanted you and your brother. 

frere. 

N'aviez-vous pas eu 1'intention de Had you not intended to speak to me ? 

me parler? 

Nous avions eu envie de dormir. We had had a wish to sleep. 

Des que vous eutes fini yotre lettre, As soon as you had finished your Utter, 

ne la portates-vous pas a la poste ? did you not carry it to the post-office? 

Des que vous aviez fini vos lettres, As soon as your letters were finished, 

ne les portiez-vous pas a la poste ? did you not (commonly) take them 
to the post-office ? 

Des que vous fates arrive, ne corn- As soon as you had arrived, did you 

mencates-vous pas a ecrlre ? not commence writing ? 

Des que vous etiez arrive, ne com- As soon as you used to arrive, did you 

menciez-vous pas a ecrire ? not (generally) commence writing f 

Exercise 107. 

Arret-er, 1. to stop; lilgar-er, 1. to mislay; Perd-re, 1. ir. to lose ; 

Dal, m. ball; Invit-er, 1. to invite; Bemont-er, 1. to wind 

Bourse, f. purse ; Se lev-er, ref. to rise ; up ; . 

Se coucher, 1. ref. to go Malade, sick ; Eetrouv-er, 1. to find 

to bed ; Musicien, m. musician ; again ; 

Dangereusement, dan- Oubli-er, 1. to forget ; Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go out; 

gerously ; Part-ir, 2. to set out ; Spectacle, m. play. 

Diner, m. dinner ; 

1. "Re saviez-vous pas ou le musicien etait alle ? 2. Je savaia 
qu'il etait alle a Paris. 3. Ne vous avait-on pas dit que votre frere 
est mort? 4. On m'avait dit qu'il etait dangereusement malade. 
5. Ne vous couchiez-vous pas ordinairement, des que vous aviez fini 
vos lecons? 6. Des que je les avais finies, j'allais au spectacle. 

7. Des que vous eutes fini vos lecons, que fites-vous hier au soir? 

8. Aussitot que je les eus finies, j'allai au bal. 9. Cette petite fille 
n'avait-elle pas envie de dormir ? 10. Elle avait plus envie de dormir 
que d'etudier. 11. Qu' aviez-vous fait de (with) votre livre, quand je 
vous le demandai ? 12. Je 1' avais egare. 13. Ou 1' aviez-vous egare ? 
14. Je l'avais oublie dans le jardin. 15. Pourquoi votre montre etait- 
elle arretee ? 16. Parce que j'avais oublie de la remonter. 17. L'hor- 
loger ne l'avait-il pas remontee ? 18. II avait oublie de le faire. 
19. N' aviez-vous pas perdu votre bourse? 20. Je l'avais perdue, 



1G2 COQUANTE-SIXIKilE LE^ON. 

maisjel'ai retrouvee. 21. Totre cousin etait-il parti? 22. H n'etait 
pas encore parti. 23. £tait-il sorti? 24. II dtait sorti avec ma mere.- 
25. Oii etait-il allc ? 2C. 11 etuit alle ehez men ire re, qui l'avait 
invite u, diner. 

ExXBdBK 108. 

1. Had you not intended to speak to my brother? 2. I had in- 
tended to speak to him, but lie had gone. 3. Did your Bister go to 
bed last evening, as Boon as >lu- had read (Zu) her book? I. 
went to bed as soon as she had read it. .">. Did she usually 
had read her book ? 6. 8 
■ bad read six pages. 7. Were you told that your 
'-:': 8. I was told thai she had been dangerously 
9. Did yotl know what you had done with your pen ? 10. 1 knew 
that I had mislaid it. 11. Had youi I heiS? 12. 

had! 13. How many of your books have 

you mislaid? 14. I had mislaid five, but my brother has found 
had you ] ( si them? 16. I had left them in the 
.. 17. Qad your brother's watch stopped ? is. [t had stopped. 
19. Why had it I. He had forgotten to wind it up. 

21. II P.) 22. lb' had not 1. 

2 ;. I had wanted your lit- 

I ;• ? 26. She was cut With your brother. 

•j7. n bad gone thither. 

29. B He had nut yel gone, he intended to 

at five 31. Had you spoken to him, when I rday? 

I had spoken to him. 33. Had you told him that my sister is 

. ; he 
i 



ON l.\ I. LESSON 1.VI. 

ri.A'i: OF i tin Bl BJECT am> or 'iiu: OBJ] 

1. We have - >• n [L •'•. R 6 (4.)] a rule fur the | 

nominative of an 
tudent, we I om intro- 

vuxny ; and quand, when ; the noun may It placed immedia 



PLACE OP SUBJECT AND OBJECT. 



163 



the verb. This construction is similar to that of the English inter- 
rogative sentence, when the verb has no auxiliary [§ 76, (5.)] 



Where are our friends and relations ? 
Wliat writes your correspondent ? 



Oil sont nos amis et nos parents ? 
Qu'ecrit votre correspondant ? 

2. "When there are, in a French sentence, two regimens of equal 
length, the direct should precede the indirect [§ 76, (7.)]. 

Avez-vous donne les jouets a Ten- Have you given the child the play- 

fant ? things ? 

Avez-vous donne cette lettre a Have you given the man that letter ? 

rkomme ? 

3. The regime indirect precedes the direct, when the latter is fol- 
lowed by a relative pronoun, or by other words qualifying it, and 
rendering it much longer than the indirect [§ 76, (8)]. The indirect 
regimen should also precede the direct, when the sentence would 
otherwise be equivocal [§ 76, (9)]. 

Avez-vous donne a l'enfant, les jouets Save you given the child, the plarj- 
que vous lui aviez promis ? things which you had promised 

him ? 



Resume op Examples. 



Quel age a cette demoiselle ? 
Que veulent dire ces messieurs ? 
Ou sont alles messieurs vos freres? 
Combien d'enfants a ce monsieur ? 

Avez-vous paye cet argent au mar- 

chand ? 
J'ai paye mon habit au tailleur. 
Vous avez paye au tailleur, le gilet 

que vous avez achete. 
N'aviez-vous pas demande cela a 

l'enfant? 



How old is that young lady ? 

What do those gentlemen mean ? 

Wliere have yourbrothers gone ? 

How many children has that gentle- 
man? 

Have you paid the merchant that 
money ? 

I paid the tailor for my coat. 

You have paid the tailor for the waist- 
coat which you have bought. 

Had you not asked the child for that? 



Exeecise 109. 



Accompagn-er, 1. to ac- 
company ; 
Aine, e, eldest ; 
Associe, m. partner ; 
Aubera:iste,m. landlord; 
Bouteule; f. bottle; 



Chaine, f. chain; 
Chapeau, m. hat, 

net ; 
Cinquante, f. fifty ; 
Cle£ f. key ; 
Commis, m. clerk ; 



Dernier, e, last; 
bon- Pres, near, nearly ; 

Proprietaire, m. landlord; 
Rend-re, 4. to return ; 
Serrurier, m. locksmith; 
Serviette, f. napkin. 



1. Ou etaient vos parents l'annee dernieYe ? , 2. Us ctaient en An- 
gleterre. 3. Ou sont restes les messieurs qui vous accompagnaient 
ce matin ? 4. Us sont restes chez leurs associes. 5. Que lisaient 
vos amies, lorsque vous les avez quittees ? 6. Elles lisaient les nou- 
velles qu'eUes venaient de recevoir. 7. Que dit monsieur votre pere ? 



-J 



1G4 Cn'QUAXTE-SIXIOE LE^OS. 

8. II ne clit rien. 9. Quel age a co monsieur ? 10. II a pivs do cin- 
quantc ans. 11. Quel age ont vos enfauts ? 12. L'aine* a dix ans, et 
le plus jeune a six ans. 13. Avez-vous demande* votre chaine d'or a 
ce monsieur? 14. Je la lui ai demandee. 15. Avez-vous rendu au 
Commis, l'argent qu'il vous avait prete? 16. Je le lui ai rendu. 
17. Aviez-youa envie d'envoyer vos clefs au serrurier ? IS. J'avais 
envie de les lui envoj^er, car elles sot: 1 19. Aviez-vons 

oublio de payer VOtre habit au tailleur? 20. J'avais oublie de le 
lui payer. 21. Valait-il la peine d'envoyer ces plumes a l'ecolier ? 

22. II ne valait pas la peine de les lui envoyer, il en avait d'autres. 

23. Valait-il la] L'aubergiste ? 21. II 
valait. la peine de lea lui envoyer, car il n'en avait p.:-. "J.". Aviz- 
vous deinan le des serviettes a, Vutre pjre ? 20. Je n'ai pas voulu 

lui en demander. 

EXEB4 UM 110. 

1. What does the tailor i: • ... ? 2. I do nd know what he means. 
is your eld( • r at my 

. '.' B. Be was 
7. II 'W many I 
I 

the letter 
• to her, I left it upon 

man who 1. that pen- 

at my father . to him ? 

■■ r which I 1 : i 

r 11. B 1 It at 

■ i him. 16. Has your mother paid the 

1 her for 

- 

21. I had n wi-li to send it to | ,,,-tli the 

while to give your brother that hook ? 
il to him, foi 

i the while to Bend them 

iksmith ? 
81. He baa ten. 32 

. 
letter? Jo. 1 have lui gotten to give it to him. 



PLACE 0! THE TEEB, ETC. 1G5 



LEQON LVII. LESSON LVII. 

PLACE OP VERB. PRESENT TENSE USED IN PKENCH, WHERE 

THE PAST IS USED IN ENGLISH, ETC. 

1. The French avoid placing the verb at the end of such sentences 
as the following when the nominative is a noun. 

Dites moi on demeure M. H. Tell me where Mr. H. lives. 

Je ne sais ou est mon pere. I do not know where my father is. 

Savez-vous oil est George ? Do you know where George is 1 

2. In speaking of a state, condition, or action, commenced in the 
past, but still continuing, the French use the present of the indica- 
tive. The past is commonly used in English in similar cases. 

Combien de temps y a-t-il qu'il est How long has he been here ? 

ici? 

II y a deux heures qu'il ecrit. He has been writing these two hours. 

Hyaun mois qu'il demeure a Paris. He has lived in Paris one month. 

II y a deux ans qu'il est mort. He has been dead these two years. 

3. When, however, the state no longer continues, the past may be 
used in French, in the same manner as it is used in English. 

Combien de temps avez-vous de- How long did you live in L. t 

meure a, L. ? 

Combien de mois avez-vous appris How many months did you learn 

l'allemand ? German 1 

H y a un mois que je ne l'ai vu. I have not seen him this month. 

. 4. Combien y a-t-il . . . Combien de milles y a-t-il . . . Quelle 
distance y a-t-il ? answer to the English expressions How far . . . 
How many miles is it ... What is the distance, etc. 

Resume op Examples. 

Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous How long have you had that house ? 

avez cette maison ? 

II y a deux ans que nous l'avons. We have had it these two years. 

Combien de temps avez-vous eu How long did you have this house ? 

cette maison ? 

Nous l'avons eue dix ans. We had it ten years. 

Combien de temps y a-t-il que votre How long has your brother been 

frere apprend le grec ? learning Greek ? 

H y a six ans qu'il l'apprend. He has been learning it six years. 

Quelle distance y a-t-il de Calais a How far is it from Calais to Bou- 

Boulogne ? logne ? 

II y a huit lieues de Calais a Bou- It is eight leagues from Calais to 

logne. Boulogne. 



1gg cikquante-septieme let on. 

Exercise 111. 

Compagnie, f. company; Maintetmnt, «<w; 

An, m.,ann e, f. j/«ir; Demeurer, 1. toliv&; Mois, 
Angleierre, !'. ■ mi, c, fta^; 

. tired; H6,from oaitre, -i. to he 
to wo. Imprimeur, m. printer ; 

- J.i. uo. £ Itd'jue ; Verger, in. orchard; 

Loudivs, London; Viem 

1. Combicn dc temps y a-t-il que M. L. demeure a Paris ? 2. II y 

- qu'il y demeure. 3. N'a-t-il pas demeure* si Lyon? 1. 11 y 

a demeure" autrefois. 5. Pouvez-vous me «Iire oii est le fils du 

'i 6. II y a un an qu'il est en A.ngleterre. 7. Savee-vous 

are M. B. ? 8.11 demeurait autrefoia & Rouen: je ne sais 

pas ou il demeure maintenant 9. Y a-t-il longtempa que v.. us dtes 

ici? 10. II y a plus de deux moi mmea ici 11. Oom- 

? 12. 11 y a un an 
que nou- ce( imprimeur est-il nd? II. 

. il y o do Paris a Vienne ? ir>. 11 

17. V a-t-il longtemps quo la compa 

.'. V a-t-il 
20. II y a plu 
.. luc. 21. V. a-t-il p.is plus d'uno demi-heure que 

. 'in'. Hi' en eal 
lee ce moroeau do 

j ■ 1'atl. lids. 

■ [SE 1 12. 

'_'. IT- 1 lias 1 

you ii"t know where my father lives? 
4. I know where he lives, but I 1 

.:i lived ill I':.: < i. 1 1 

• '■ • • i It- lived 

smith live '( in. Be lives at my broth r'a 11. li 
12. I Lave been waitu 

; \ v. 

1 7. Bow 

. 

I. HOW far i 

one hundred and sixteen leagues from Paris (■> Lj 



CHANGER, TAttDER. 167 

to Turin ? 22. It is farther from Lyons to Turin than from Lyons to 
Geneva. 23. How long did your father live in Germany ? (Alle- 
magne.) 24. He lived in Germany two years, and in England six 
months. 25. How long have you lived in Paris ? 26. We have 
been here six months. ' 27. How long did you live in Rome ? 28. We 
lived there more than a year. 29. How long has your brother been 
gone ? 30. He has been gone these two years. 31. Have you been 
learning German more than one year? 32. I have been learning it 
more than four years. 33. Your sister has been learning music one 
year and a half. 



LEQON LVIII. LESSON LVIII. 

CHANGER, TARDER. 

1. Changer [1. see § 49, (1.)], used in the sense of to change, to leave 
one thing for another, is followed by the preposition de ; changer 
d'habit, de chapeau, etc., to put on another coat, hat, etc. ; changer 
d'avis, to change one's mind ; changer de maison, to move, to change 
houses ; changer de place, changer de pays, changer de climat, to go 
to another place, country, climate ; changer de nom, to change one's 
name. The student will perceive that the noun following changer, is 
not preceded by a possessive adjective, like the noun of the English 
sentence. 

Voulez-vous changer d'habit? Will you change your coat? 

Ce monsieur a change de nom. That gentleman has changed his name. 

2. Changer contre, means to exchange for ; changer pour, to change 
for, to get change for. 

Voulez-vous changer votre chapeau Will you exchange your hat for mine? 

contre le mien ? 
Changcz ce billet pour de l'argent. Change that bill for silver. 

3. Tarder means to tarry, to he long in coming. Tarder, used 
unipersonally, and accompanied by an indirect object, means to long, 
to wish for. 

Votre soeur tarde bien ei venir. Tour sister is very long coming. 

II me tarde de la voir. I long to see her. 

Resume of Examples. 

N!avez-vous pas change d'apparte- Have you not taken another apart- 

ment ? ment t 

Nous avons change de maison. We have changed houses. 



108 CINQUAXTE-IIUITIKME LECOS. 

Vi itre fr're a change do conduite. Tour brother Las changed hie conduct. 

i change 1 de religion. That lady has changed her religion. 

Contra qaoi avez-vous change votre For what have you exchanged your 

cheval ? horse t 

J .ii beaoin de monuaic, pouvez-vous I want change, can you change me 

me changer cette piece do vingt this twenty franc j 

frani 

Ce garcon a bcaueoup taidS. v much. 

II nous tardait d'arriver. rrive. 

11 lour tardait de revoir leaTa amis. They longed to see their friends agairi. 

U mo tardo do revoir la Franco. / long to sec trance again. 

ELoracmi 113. 

Air, m. air; .Tonne, young ; V:\yt. m. country; 

Avi-, in. mind, meaning : " 

Bentr-er, 1. to come in 
>I ■ >iii i;. i- . again, I 

Gonduite, C conduct; Mmiill .'•, , . Vie, !. 

in. countenance, 
I .', last; 

L C'.t lioiiimo n'a-t-il : ' rie? 2. D a change* de oon- 

de maitiv? 
hi de Pachi 

anteau? G. 1 
change-in 1 
ouvent 9. ; 

10. 1! :i'a 
... 
d'air? 1j. I 

'.' 1 l. Je oe I'ai plus, je l'al 

IG. Jo l'ai 1 
te jeune bomme qui demeurait ici lo mi 17. Le mar- 

I pciii-il me 1 ? 18. II oe 

. 

1 mbien 
y a-i-il dan . II y en a ving< et on, 

bean- 

2 I. Ne VOU3 tardo-t-il pas duller en Italic ? 25. II mc I 
d'y idler. 

1 1 I. 

1. Why do you not cl i rea- 

your father cb 

■ ; but vrc ii 

! your 



PLURAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 169 

religion ? 8. No, sir ; I have not changed my religion. 9. Do you 
not change your place very often ? 10. I change my place when 1 
am tired, i 11. Does not your sister change her mind every day? 
12. She does not change her mind every day. 13. Was not your 
brother afraid, did not his countenance change ? 14. His counte- 
nance changed, but he was not afraid. 15. Have you not changed 
rooms (chambre, f.) ? 16. I have not changed rooms, my room is 
very good. 17. Do you not long to be in France ? 18. I long to 
be there. ^19. Does not your mother tarry too long? 20. She is 
very long in coming. 21. Have you changed the forty franc piece ? 
22. I have not changed it yet . 23. Why have you not changed it ? 
24. Because your father has no change. 25. Have you the change 
for a guinea? 26. No, sir; I have only twelve shillings. 27. How 
many cents are there in a dollar ? 28. There are one hundred. 
29. Has that gentleman exchanged that house ? 30. Yes, sir; he has 
exchanged it for a warehouse. 31. Will you exchange your hat for 
mine ? 32. No, sir ; your hat is too small for me. 33. With whom 
have you exchanged your horse ? 34. I have exchanged it with my 
brother. 35. I have exchanged it for a white one. 



LEQON LIX. LESSON LIX. 

PLURAL OP COMPOUND NOUNS. 

1. We have given in Lesson 11, rules for forming the plural of 
nouns, but have in accordance with our plan of not presenting too 
many difficulties at once, deferred until the present Lesson, the rules 
for the formation of the plural of compound nouns. 

2. When a noun is composed of two substantives, or of a substan- 
tive and an adjective, both take the form of the plural : un chef-lieu, 
des chefs-lieux, a chief place, chief places ; un gentilhomme, des 
gentilshommes, a nobleman, noblemen [§ 9, (1.) (3.)]. 

3. When, however, two nouns are connected by a preposition, the 
first only becomes plural : Tin chef-d'oeuvre, des chefs-d'oeuvre, a, 
master-piece, master-pieces [§ 9, (2.)]. 

4. In words composed of a noun and a verb, preposition or ad- 
verb, the noun only becomes plural ; passe-port, passe-ports, pass- 
port, passports [§ 9, (6.)]. 

5. Words composed of two verbs, or of a verb, an adverb, and a 



170 CIXQUAXTE-XEUVIKME LE^ON. 

preposition, are invariable : un passe-partout, des passe-partout, 
master-key, master-keys [§ 0. (8.)]- 

G. We have seen [L. 5, R. 4.] iliat the name of the material al- 
ways follows the name of the object, and that both are united I 
preposition de. The name of the profession or occupation, al 
lows the noun representing the individual, and the same preposition 
de connects the two : un mattre d'armes, </ /< ncing-mask r ; un maitre 
de dessin, a drawing master ; un marehand de farine, a dealer • 
[§76, (12.) §81, (4.)} 

7. The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, etc., always preeedes the BOUO 
•wet by which it is impelled, or the puxpo 
which it is adapted; the nam.' of an apartment, thai of the 086 to 
which it i- appropriated. The connecting prepoaition is A; on 
monlin a vapeur, a .-(•■m, m«H; un bateau a vapeur, a steamboat: \m 
moulin a ran. <i la sallc a manger, the dinin<j-room 

!; si mi or Rxaxfi 

Lillo • 

I departementfl 

Los i 

Bailed ma: 

. 

I 

lllli! 

I '.\ i tu tax 1 1">. 

Chat-huant, m. • Fain I • ir, 2. 

C bat ; fad ; 

1. r'aut-il avoir i; 
en avoir un. .".. I. 

ime mieux y< 

■ ' n'ai 

ixjiut do pa&je-partuut, jy u'ai (pie des tick ord 



PLURAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 171 

fr£re est-il venu clans un bateau a vapeur ? 10. II est venu dans un 
bateau a voiles. 11. Avez-vous une voiture a" quatre chevaux? 

12. Non, monsieur ; nous n'avons qu'un cabriolet a un eheval. 

13. Votre frere a-t-il bati un moulia a vapeur? 14. II a fait batir 
deux moulins, l'un a vent et l'autre a eau. 15. Votre compagnon 
a-t-il engage un maitre d'armes? 16. Non, monsieur; il a deja un 
maitre de dessin, et un maitre de danse. 17. Combien de chambres 
a coucher avez-vous ? 18. Nous en avons deux. 19. Avez-vous 
une bouteille de vin ? 20. Non, monsieur ; mais j'ai une bouteille a 
vin (wine-bottle) [§ 81.]. 21. Voyez-vous les chats-huants? 22. Non, 
mais je vois les chauves-souris. 23. J'ai une voiture a quatre 
roues. 

Exercise 116. 

1. Is your father in England ? 2. No, sir ; he is in France with 
my brother. 3. Have they taken passports ? 4. Yes, sir ; they have 
taken two. 5. Is it necessary to have a passport to travel in Amer- 
ica ? 6. No, sir ; but it is necessary to have one to travel in Italy. 
7. Is there a steamboat from Calais to Dover (Douvres) ? 8. There 
are several. 9. Is there a railroad from Paris to Brussels (Bruxettes)? 

10. There is one from Paris to Brussels, and one from Paris to Tours. 

11. Has your brother bought a wind-mill? 12. No, sir; but he 
has built a steam-mill. 13. Are there many wind-mills in America ? 

14. No, sir ; but there are many water and steam-mills. 15. Have 
your sisters a dancing-master ?V 16. They have a dancing-master, and 
a music master. 17. Does your cousin learn drawing ? 18. He does 
not learn it, he cannot find a drawing-master. 19. Is the fencing- 
master in the dining-room ? 20. No, sir ; he is in the drawing-room. 
21. Is your cousin in his bed-room? 22. No, sir; he is out (sorti). 
23. How many rooms are there in your house. 24. Pive ; a kitchen, 
a dining-room, a drawing-room, and two bed-rooms. 25. Are there 
owls here ? 26. Yes, sir ; and bats too. 27. Have you seen those 
master-pieces ? 28. Yes, sir ; I have seen them. 29. Have you sent 
them to the chief place of the department ? 30. I have sent them 
there. 31. Have you a two-horse gig? 32. I have a four-horse 
one. 33. Has your brother a two-wheel carriage ? 34. He has a 
two-seat carriage (a deux sieges). 



172 



SOIXAXTIEME LETOJf. 



LE£ON LX. LESSON LX. 

Till: TWO FUTDBKS, SIMPLE, AM» AXTKIUOK. [§ 124.] 

1. The future of every verb, in the French language, ends with 

. rout. 
-• ' J his : ■"- ■• in all the regular verb?, as also in the irregular i 
not mentioned in the H formed from the present 

the first and Becond conjuga- 
tions, and the oir and rt of the third and fourth, into the terminations 
already given, and here again re] 

IATTOH Of Tii ii i: OF Tin: RsotTLAB YXRDB, 

chante -mi Bni -mi racer -ad rand -mi 
i 

f" -r.is vend •m 

Thou 
11 donno -ra fourni -ra - r;l 

antand -rani 
•rea 

'rr V will l*i*s 

l'< -root nord -rout 

uniU lite 

I participle of the verb, 
conjugated with tl 

when rendering English into I .1.1 l>r> 

I . this latter uiva- 

lcnt to 

' . m f ) 
-vous pas lui ■'■ you not will. 

if rife 

In the first example wiU is used as an auxiliai -. 
i it Is used a 

R I '. AMPI.Eg. 

B you speak to Oial grnllc- 

■ 



THE TWO' .FUTURES, ETC. 173 

Ne vendrez-vous pas vos proprieties ? Will you not sell your property ? 

Que voulez-vous avoir ? What do you wish to have ? 

Que veut lire votre frere ? What will your brother read ? 

Apporterez-vous des pommes ? Will you bring apples ? 

Nous amenerons nos enfants. We will bring our children. 

Yous apporterez des legumes. You will bring vegetables. 

Exercise 117. 

Abreuvoir, m. watering Champ, m. field; Men-er, 1. [§49, (6.)] to 

place; Chateau, m. villa; take, to lead; 

Appel-er, 1. [§ 49, (4.)] Colporteur, m. pedlar, Se promen-er, 1. ref. 
to call ; hawker ; [§ 49, (6.)] to walk or 

Apres-midi, f. afternoon; Donner a. manger, fo/eec£; ride for pleasure, or 

Avoine, f. oats ; Ecurie, f. stable ; health ; 

Ble, m. wheat ; Foin, m. hay ; Recolt-er, 1. to harvest; 

Cachet-er, 1. [§ 49, (4.)] Geler, 1. [§ 49, (5.)] to Sem-er, 1. [§ 49, (6.)] to 
to seal ; freeze ; sow. 

1. Menerez-vous vos enfants a l'ecole ? 2. Je les menerai a 
l'ecole et a l'eglise. 3. Le jardinier apportera-t-il des legumes au 
inarch e? 4. II y en apportera. 5. Ou menerez-vous ce cheval? 
6. Je le menerai a l'ecurie. 7. Lui donnerez-vous a, manger? 
8. Je lui donnerai du foin et de l'avoine. 9. Lui donnerez-vous de 
l'eau? 10. Je le menerai a l'abreuvoir. 11. Paierez-[§ 49, (2.)] vous 
ce que vOus devez ? 12. Ne voulez-vous pas vous promener ? 13. Je 
me promenerai cette apres-midi. 14. Vous promenerez-vous a pied, 
ou a cheval ? 15. Je me promenerai a cheval, et ma sceur se prome- 
nera en voiture. 16. Marcherez-vous beaucoup, dans votre voyage 
a Paris ? 17. Nous ne marcherons pas du tout. 18. N'appellerez- 
[§ 49, (4.)] vous pas le colporteur ? 19. Je ne l'appellerai pas. 
20. N'acheterez- [§ 49, (5.)] vous pas ce chateau? 21. Nous l'ach§- 
terons si nous pouvons. 22. Ne gelera-t-il pas [§ 49, (5.)] cette 
nuit ? 23. Je ne le crois pas, il fait trop chaud. 24. Ne semerez- 
[§ 49, (6.)] vous pas tout le ble que vous recolterez ? 25. Je n'en 
semerai qu'une partie, je vendrai le reste. 26. Je cachetterai mes 
lettres, et je les porterai a la poste. 

Exercise 118. 

1. Will not the gentleman call his children ? 2. He will call his 
children and his sister's! 3. Will you not bring your children? 
4. I cannot bring them. 5. Will you not take a ride this afternoon? 
6. We will ride in a carriage to-morrow. 7. Will you not buy my 
father's horses ? 8. I shall .not buy them, I have no money. 9. Will 
you not call the pedlar ? 1*0. I do not wish to call him, I do not 
wish to buy anything. 11. Will you pay the tailor? 12. I will 
pay him for my coat. 13. Will it not freeze to-morrow. 14. It will 



174 S0IXA2TTE ET UXIKHE LECON. 

freeze to-morrow ; it is very cold. 15. Will you not sow oats in 
this field ? (See note, Lesson 7). 1G. 1 will not sow oats I will sow 
wheat there. 17. Will you take your sister to school? 18. I will 
take her there this afternoon. 19. Will you not take your son to 
market? 20. I will not take him there. 21. Will not the gardener 
take his horse to the watering place? 22. He will take him there. 
23. \\ oat3 to your horse? 2 \. I will give him hay. 

•j.".. Will you bring your son with you? 26. I will bring him to- 
morrow. 27. Will he bring his horse ? 28. He will bring his hone 

image. 20. Why do you carry that little child? 30. I 

too aid walk. 31. Will your brother sell his property? 

32. He will only s.-ll part of it 33. Will not yourservant carry the 

I U seal it an i him. 

35. Will you feed my b . L will not feed him, 1 have 



LEX 1011 I. XI. 30N I.XI. 

n:i;i:<.t LABTXIBfl 01 Tin: PI n ki:. 

ption afler, 1 1 
■/. make in the fill 62.] 

• bich end in 

tenir, 
L 

impounds, double the r in the future ; — 
•>/. Cueillir, 

l;i the third c 

! ' 

•rati 

of t! 

plo and ant 
adverb of time, in cases similar to those in whi 

iut and perfect of the indicative, with a/u.' 



IRREGULARITIES OF THE FUTURE. 



175 



Quand vous verrez ces messieurs. . . When you see those gentlemen . . . 
Des que vous aurez recu eette lettre As soon as you have received this 
vous partirez. letter you will leave. 

Resume of Examples. 



Irez-vous en France cette annee ? 

Nous irons en France et en Italie. 

Nous vous enverrons chercher. 

Ne viendrez-vous pas nous trouver ? 

Ne nous assierons-nous pas ? 

Quand ils viendront, j'aurai ma 

Cela vaudra-t-il la peine? 

Cet habit ira-t-il bien ? 

II faudra leur envoyer de l'argent. 



Shall you go to France this year f 
We shall go to France and Italy. 
We shall send for you. 
Will you not come to us ? 
Shall we not sit down ? 
Wlien they come, I shall have my letter. 
Will that be worth the while ? 
Will that coat jit well ? 
It will be necessary to send them 
money. 



Exercise 119. 
Avec, with ; G-uitare, f. guitar ; 

Bientot, soon; Lentement, slowly; 

Connait-re, 4. ir. to Malade, ill, sick; 

know ; Marcli-er, to walk, to g 

Demain, to-morrow; on foot; 

Demeure, f. dwelling; Moi-meme, myself; 
Fraise, f. strawberry ; Ou, where ; 



Part-ir, 2. ir. to set out, 
to leave; 

Permett-re, 4. ir. to per- 
mit; 

Plaisir, m. pleasure; 

Pret-er, 1. to lend ; 

Sort-ir, 2. ir. to go out. 



1. Ne viendrez-vous pas nous voir demain ? 2. J'irai vous voir, si 
le temps le permet. 3. N'enverrez-vous pas chercher le medecin, si 
votre fils est malade ? 4. Je l'irai chercher moi-meme. 5. Quand je 
serai fatigue, je marcherai plus lentement. 6. Quand vous connaitrez 
sa demeure, irez-vous le voir ? 7. J'irai le voir, aussitot que je saurai 
ou. il demeure. 8. Ne le verrez-vous pas aujourd'hui? 9. Je le 
verrai cette apres-midi. 10. Pourrez-vous nous accompagner ? 
11. Je le ferai avec beaucoup de plaisir. 12. Ne leur enverrez-vous 
point des fraises ? 13. Je leur en enverrai, quand les miennes seront 
mures. 14. Ne faudra-t-il pas leur ecrire bientot ? 15. Quand nous 
aurons recu des nouvelles de leur parent, il faudra leur ecrire. 
16. Que ferons-nous demain ? 17. Nous irons a la chasse. 18. N'irez- 
vous pas chez votre pere ? 19. Nous irons certainement. 20. Quand 
votre guitare sera arrivee, la preterez-vous ? 21. Je ne pourrai la 
preter. 22. A quelle heure partirez-vous demain ? 23. Je partirai 
a cinq heures du matin. 24. Ne sortirez-vous pas ce soir ? 25. Je 
ne sortirai pas, et je me coucherai de bonne heure. 

Exercise 120. 
1. Will you send for the physician ? 2. I will send for him this 
afternoon. 3. Will not the little girl go and fetch apples ? 4. She 
will send for some. 5. Will you not sit down,, when you are tired ? 



170 SOIIANTE-DEUXlillE LEJOX. 

G. We will not sit down, we have no time. 7. What will your 
brother do, when he is toed ? [R. 5.] S. He will do what [ce qm] 
he can. [R. 5.] 9. Will it be worth the while to (de) write to him? 

10. It will not be worth the while, for (car) he will not come. 

11. Will it not be necessary to speak to the merchant? 12. It will 
not be necessary to speak to him. 13. Will it ho necessary for us to 

iassports? 1-1. It will be ] /! le f<tu<lr<i.) IT). Will 

not your little boy walk more slowly, when he is tired ? 10. When 

tired, he will sit down.- 17. What will your sister do to-mor- 

;i go to chur hool 19. Will she nut 

come! 21. Will you walk, 

or go on hon i '-"-'. 1 ahall 

'_■ :. i'. iuse my 
carriaj adon. - j">. When will you see them I 

'_'7. Will ti' 

_ I. When you 

30. 1 will n.>t speak to 

him. 31. ' • 01 you <!■>? 

will you send it • 5. Will you 

v. .11 send it to-murru\v. 37. They will i 
to you • 



•»\ I. XII. I B980N I A"! I. 

1 1 1 i . 
1. The the future, l>y 

I 

I 

■ns punir 
n 

- 

:d lot* ikouUl unite .. 



THE TWO CONDITIONALS. 177 

4. The irregularities of the conditional do not appear in the ter- 
minations, but in the stem of the verb. They are precisely the same 
as those of the future. Those irregularities will be found in the last 
lesson, and need not be repeated here. The conditional of any irreg- 
ular verb may be formed, by placing after the last r of the future, the 
terminations of the imperfect of the indicative. 

5. The conditional past is formed from the conditional present of 
one of the auxiliaries, avoir, etre, and the past participle of the verb 
[§ 125, (2.)] 

J'aurais ecrit, je me serais flatte. I should have written, I should have 



6. The two futures and the two conditionals should not be used 
after the conjunction si (if). But in such case, the present and the 
imperfect of the indicative should be used. 

S'il pouvait quitter son pere, il vien- If he could leave Ms father, he would 

drait. come. 

Si j'etaia a votre place, j'irais. If I were in your place, I would go. 

Resume oe Examples. 

Nous irions a. la chasse, si nous We would go hunting, if we had time. 

avions le temps. 

Je lirais, si j'avais des livres ici. I would read,if I had books here. 

J'aimerais mieux aller a pied qu'a, I would prefer walking to riding. 

cheval. ' 

Votre mere se porterait mieux k Your mother would be better in Paris. 

Paris. 

Nous nous passerions facilement de We might easily do without thai book. 

ce hvre. 

Ne vaudrait-il pas mieux lui ecrire? Would it not be better to write to him ? 

Ne faudrait-il pas lui ecrire ? Would it not be necessary to write to 

him? 

Je m'assierais, si j'etais fatigue. I would sit down if I were tired. 

Cet habit m'irait bien, s'il etait assoz That coat would fit me well, if it were 

large. broad enough. 

Exercise 121. 
S'amus-er, 1. ref. to S'ennuy-er, 1. ref. [§49.] Peut-etre, perhaps; 

amuse one's self; to be or become weary ; Se tromp-er, 1. ref. to be 

S'approch-er, 1. ref. to Interromp-re, 4. ir. to mistaken; 

come near ; interrupt ; Se por-ter, 1. ref. to be 

Certainement, certainly ; Invit-er, 1. to invite ; or do ; 

S'eloign-er, 1. ref. to go Mett-re, 4. ir. to put on; Seeh-er, 1. to dry ; 

from ; Mouill-er, 1. to wet ; Vite, quick, quickly ; 

Demeur-er, 1. to live ; 6t-er, 1. to take off; Voyage, m. journey. 

1. Quel habit mettriez-vous, si vous alliez a la chasse? 2. Je 
mettrais un habit vert. 3. N'oteriez-vous pas vos bottes, si elles 
etaient rnouulees ? 4. Je les oterais, et je les ferais se'eher. 5. Si 



178 SOIXANTE-DEtrXIKME LE£ON. 

vous avicz froid, ne vous approcheriez-vous pas du feu ? G. Je m'en 
approeherais certainenient. 7. Yotre petit gareon ne s'en eloigne- 
ruit-il pas, s'il avait trop cbaud? 8. II s'en eloignerait bien vito. 
9. Vous ennuieriez-vous iei ? TO. Je ne m'ennuierais pa-, je m'amuse- 
rau a, lire. 11. Ne vous tromperiez-voua pas, si vous faiaiea z\ 
cul? 12. Je mc troinperais peut-etre, Bi j'&ais iuterrompu. 13. Yieu- 
driez-vous, si on vous iuvitait? 14 Je viendrais aveo beaueoup do 
plaisir. 15. Ne vous porteriez-vous pas mieux, si vous lisirz m 
1G. Je me p i oup mieuz. 17. Ne faudraifr-fl pas mi parler 

de v< • I 3. II faudrait lui en parler. 19. Oombien d'argent 

• miHe francs, bJ je faisa 
raudraib-il pas mieux lui parler, que lui ficrire? 
vaudrait mi< z h ma place, quo 

i je lui 
■. olontieri vus lettrea a la 

K\i.i:< : ;: 122. 
1. Would you not read if you had time? 2. T would read two 
hour.- i raid your brother 

trarch? 4. Ho would put <in a black coat 

.1 1 put on a straw hat, 

I you not draw [L. 39, G.] 

We would draw Mar it. 

'. 1 would take it oil', if 

ha invited 

12. [won ["other's, if tln-y in- 

.• on your l wet? 

11. £ ; not put them on. 15. Bow much 

18. Wa would 
". 
18. I - lould not 1 L9. Would it 

NT tO 

. 21. Would you read the book, if I lent it to you? 
22. I 

1 I -. I go. 26. If 

••• to him ? 

. 

:.w, would j '. I ahould n 

31. Would 3 

33. Would you not sit down if 34 1 would sit down, 
if I v. 



FAIBE USED IDIOMATICALLY, ETC. 1*79 

LEQON LXIIL LESSON LXHI. 

EAIKE USED IDIOMATICALLY, ETC. 

1. The verb faire 1 is used in the formation of a number of idiomatic 
sentences. See L. 32, R 3, 4. Faire faire, to have made, to bespeak ; 
faire raccommoder, to have mended ; faire la cuisine, to cook ; faire cuire, 
to cook, to bake; faire bouillir, to boil; faire rotir, to roast; faire 
chauffer, to warm (in speaking of food) ; faire bonne chere, to live 
well. 

Nous avons fait faire des habits. We have had clothes made. 

Vous faites raccommoder vos gilets. You have your waistcoats mended. 

2. The past participle of faire never varies, when it precedes an 
infinitive. 

Les livres que vous avez fait venir. The books which you have sent for. 

3. Faire peur, to frighten ; faire attention, to pay attention ; faire 
tort, to injure ; faire mal, faire du mal, to hurt, take a before a noun. 

Ecus avons fait peur a cos enfants. We have frightened those children. 
Vous leur avez fait mal. You have hurt them 

4. The last example will show that, when a noun preceded by d, 
expressed or understood, is replaced by a pronoun, that pronoun will 
take the form of the indirect regimen (dative). By an exception to 
the rules for the place of personal pronouns, when faire attention has 
for its indirect object a pronoun representing a person, that pronoun 
follows the verb. 

Nous ferons attention a, lui. We will pay attention to him. 

5. In speaking of the parts of the body, the French use the article, 
le, la, les, etc., instead of the possessive adjective, [§ 77, (9.)] when 
the possession is expressed by a reflective (L. 37, E. 1.) or other per- 
sonal pronoun, or by some other word in the sentence. 

Vous m'avez fait mal a, la main. You have hurt my hand. 

Le bras lui fait mal. His arm hurts or pains him. 

Resume oe Examples. 
Ferez-vous raccommoder vos sou- Will you have your shoes mended ? 

liers ? 
Je ferais faire un habit, si j'avais de / would bespeak a coat, if I had 

1' argent. money. 

1 In the present participle of faire and its compounds, in the first person 
plural of the present of the indicative and the imperative, and throughout 
the imperfect, the ai of the first syllable is pronounced nearly like u in tub ; 
also in the word bienfaisance. 



lbO SOIXANTK-l'liOISIOi; LEO ON. 

II ne sait pas fairs la cuisine. lie does not I Ling. 

Avez-voua fail i.-uire votre viande ? 11 sat t 

Perez-roua chauffer votre bouillon? Will you warm your broth t 

Yous lui avez lait mal an coude. You have Iturt his i 

Voua m'avez fait mal au pied. You have hurt my fobL 

Yous avez fait peiudro votro mai- You, have liad your new house 2 
son neuve. 

ExEUCISE 1-23. 

2. to I '/il J ; 

Bouillon, in. broth; '(on; Pied, '■ 

6nw ure, i. Poignet, m. 1 rist; 

Chi 11. 1; , Tete, f. 

M:iin. !'. ■'. Tout :\ l'heure,&y- 
Lpaule, £ shoulder ; March-er,l. toafcg . ul, in. uv/Vi, 1 

L Qaand 1 . ? 2. Ten ferai bAtir una 

l'annee prochaine, 1 '.. -voos fait bouil- 

Iir ce I. Je I'ai . Lo caisitter a-t-il 

m? ..<;. 11 ne l'a pas encore Pail chauffer, 

7 ' . . . -VOUS ] 

• 

1 es petites nUee? 
10. Nona leox » a ion ■ votre 

. Lb ntion. I - fait mal I 

1 1. Je if lui ai pas fail maL 1".. N u Gut 

mal A fail maL 17. < >u . 1 mal 

■ • a la main. 19. Ne hli 

•. Je lui ai fait mal a repaule. 
mal? 22. 11 u'a fail mal 
mal au pied? 24. V01 
pied, 1 L 25. La Uke, L'epaule, lo bra 

, etla muiu rue font mal. [K. .">. ] 

Ezra be 1 S t. 

1. "Will you lmve your coat mended? 2. I will not 

iur brother i. painted? I. He 

■ 

Save j 

9 I' hifl arm pain him ? 1". Y 
pain him. 11. W 

13. Hav< i 

hurt my angers (doigts). 15. Duu your cook underatan 



PAUSE, CONTINUED. 181 

1G. lie understands cooking. 17. Has the cook roasted that leg of 
mutton ? 18. He has boiled it. 19. Has he not warmed it ? 20. He 
has not had time to warm it. 21. Has the physician sent for en- 
gravings ? 22. He has sent for books. 23. Have you hurt his 
elbow ? 24. I have not hurt his elbow, but his hand. 25. Have I 
not hurt your fingers ? -f-2G. You have hurt my wrist. 27. "Where 
have you hurt your son? 28. I have not hurt him. 29. Would the 
cook boil that meat, if he had time? 30. He would not boil it, he 
would roast it. 31. When will he warm your broth ? 32. He will 
warm it by-and-by, if he has time. 33. If you had stepped upon 
my foot, would you not have hurt me? 34. I should certainly have 
hurt you, if I had stepped upon your foot. 



LEgON LXIV. LESSON LXIV. 

FAIEE, CONTINUED. 

1. Faire connaissance, to become, or get acquainted, takes the prepo- 
sition avec before its object. Faire un mille, etc., faire un voyage, 
faire un tour de promenade, mean to go, or travel a mile, etc., to go 
on a journey, to take a walk. 

Nous avons fait vingt milles a, che- We travelled twenty miles on horse- 
val. lack. 

2. Faire ses adieux, faire des emplettes, faire des progres, faire des 
questions, faire du feu, correspond in signification to the English ex- 
pressions, to bid farewell, to make purchases, to improve or progress, to 
ask questions, to make afire. 

J'ai fait mes adieux a, mee parents. I lid farewell to my relations. 
Avez-vous fait du feu dans ma Have you made afire in my room ? 
chambre ? 

3. Faire sortir means, to send out, or to order out; faire entrer, to 
let in, to bid come in ; faire attendre, to keep waiting. 

Vous les avez fait entrer dans ma You made them come into my room. 

chambre. 
Vous avez fait attendre mon pere. You made my father wait. 

4. Faire son possible, to do one's best, takes the preposition pour. 
Faire semblant, to pretend; faire usage, to make use, are followed 
by de. 

Nous avons fait notre possible. We have done our lest. 

Nous avons fait semblant de lire. We pretended to read. 



182 soiiante-quateieme lecon. 

Resume of Examples. 

Nous avons fait connaissance avcc ire have become acquainted with 

cux. them. 

Yuus avez fait vingt licucs en dLs You travelled twenty leagues in ten 

lieures. hours. 

Nous feroos un tour de promenade. We shall take a walk. 

Je lui ai fait plusiours questions. las ral questions. 

lis nous out fait lours adienx. Tfiey have bid us/arewelL 

Vous nous avez fait attendre. You have modi us wait. 

Cet enf uit fait semblant de dormir. That child \ 
Vous fkites Bemblant do lire. 

Nous ferons notre possible pour lo We will do our best to see him. 
voir. 

EXBBCESB 126. 

lad; be- M e'ndiant, m. beggar; 

ciant, in. mm 
Faire L'aamdne, to pttM Quart, m. jt»ar 
Elarec 
i-ir, 2. ir. to ».' . ss-ir, 2. to mec 

Lii.ii'-, r. league; 

■ ce monsieur ? 

2. ■• • il fait-i] une lieue en un quart 

matin une lit 5. Leur 

ai fait. 1 7. Queues 

Je leur ai demande" B'iJto avaient 

fait •! lours 

c'tii'lcs? lc \'.< n'i n font pas beaucoup, ils riennent raremenf ft 

1\'<< !■■. 11. rous, feriez-vous semblant de<dormir? 

12, 3 iblant de dormir. 13. Pourquoi 

rcemendiant? 14. Ma mere vient do lui 

1'anmdna 15. Le negotiant Giit-il usage de son credit ? 16. H 

(ii But usage. 17. I ments ce malade fa H. 11 

lillon. 19. . 

•? 20. Je fais ton! mon pos ible. 21. Aves-vous fait ei 

'. Je les ai ! . 
- avons-nous fait atl udr< ? 'J 1. Vbus nou 

. 

liainos, olios So f&chl 

.. DBS 126. 

1. Does thai child pretend to road? 2. He pretends to read. 

3. D" an pretend t • de< p ? 1. He d( 

5. Will you take a walk 

' Bee Lesson 42. 11, and § 136, (7.) 



FAIKE, CONTINUED. 183 

this morning ? 6. I would do so with pleasure, if I had time. 
7. Have you become acquainted with the physician? 8. I have 
not yet become acquainted with him. 9. How many questions 
have you asked (d) the child ? 10. I asked him many questions. 
11. Have you asked him if he had studied his lesson ? 12. I did 
not ask him. 1'13. Will not that little girl do her best to learn her 
lesson ? 14. She will do her best to learn it. 15. Of what food do 
you make use, when you are sick ? 16. "We make use of bread 
and rice. 17. Have you forgotten to bid farewell to your mother ? 
18. I had not forgotten it, I intended to go to her house this after- 
noon. 4-19. With whom have you become acquainted ? 20. With 
the bookseller. 21. Do you not keep those ladies waiting ? 22. I 
do not keep them waiting, they are not ready (prttes). 23. Do I 
make you wait ? 24. Tou do not make me wait. 25. Have you 
left your children in your room? 26. I have not done so (le). 
27. Have you sent them out ? 28. I have not sent them out, I have 
let them remain where they were. 29. Have you made purchases 
this morning ? 30. I have made none, I have no money. 31. Has 
the servant made a fire in my room ? 32. He has made one. 33. Will 
you do your best to come to-morrow ? 34. I will do my best to 
come early. 35. We travelled yesterday forty leagues in sixteen 
hours. 



LEQON LXY. LESSON LXV. 

PAIRE, CONTINUED. 

1. Faire is also used in the sense of playing the part of, or pretend- 
ing to be. 

II fait le grand seigneur. He plays the great lord. 

2. Faire also means to matter, to concern, to help. 

Cela ne fait rien. That is no matter. 

Cela no vous fait rien. That is nothing to you, does not con- 

cern you. 
Qu'est-ce que cela nous fait ? What is that to us f 

Je ne puis qu'y faire. I cannot help it. 

3. Se faire mal, conjugated reflectively, means to hurt one's self. 
Se faire is used reflectively, in the sense of the English verbs, to be- 
come, to turn. It is also used with the signification of the words 



1S4 



SOlXANTE-CINQUIKilE LE^ON 



cause, have, get, etc. Se /aire takes Ctre as its auxiliary, ff -1G. 
L. 45.] 

Je mo suis fait medecin. lhave become aphye 

Je me suis fait fairo une pairo do I have had a pair of loots made for 

J have had my leurd shaved. 
Nous nous sommes fait couper les We have had our ha 

dievcux. 
Je me suli fait rual au doigt. I have hurt my/i 

4. B sides the instances mentioned [L. 33 ; R .3.], /aire is used 
unipcrsonally in many idiomatic 62 

r, il fait nuit. i'jht- 

laboue, il fait de la p 
Jl fait clair de loos, il fait obscur. i dark. 

il Hiit bou id, iJ fait chsr id. . d-.ar hire. 

R&81 •: .': OF ExAJCPl 



Co jcunc liommc fait Ifl 

I 

■ 

■ i.'.tir one in.. 

11 oomm lard 

11 fait 



i, j man plays Vic 

:■> me, 
■ to it 1 

Emuflkb 

/ 

• me. 

inst 



Y.x\.v.< IBS 127. 

Peintre, 

Tnnnour, m. I 
; I in] >.-rt ii. ran, in. n'-v 

I 

i. workman; Vitrier, in. tf 

1. Pourquoi cet ouvrier foit-il ' malade, 

l.iit-il 

:.- ? I. II 1 1>- I fait le fou, 5. 6 

ici ? 6. II ! 
re rimpertinent, 7. Cela fait-il q 

olument rien. >. I it-il fairo q i 

leur fait rien du tout 1 1. N • 

j 
byoataer? 11. Non, moiu 



AVOIR MAI, ETC. 185 

ne s'est-il pas fait vitrier? 16. II s' est fait tanneur, et son frere s'est 
fait soldat. 1 7 . La modiste ne s'est-elle pas fait couper les cheveux ? 
18. Elle se les est fait couper. 19. Ne vous levez-vous pas aussitot 
qu'il fait jour? 20. Oui, monsieur; je me leve de tres bonne heure. 
21. Ne fait-il pas clair de lune? 22. II fait tres clair, mais il ne 
fait pas clair de lune. 23. Fait-il bon vivre en Amerique ? 24. II 
fait tr£s bon vivre en Amerique, les denrees y sont 3. bon marche. 

Exercise 128. 
1. Does not that gentleman play the learned man? 2. He plays 
the lord and fool at the same time (d lafois). 3. Does not that boy 
pretend to be sick ? 4. He pretends to be sick, he does not wish to 
study his lessons. 5. When you have no wish to work, do you pre- 
tend to be sick. 6. I neveV pretend to be sick. 7. Is it muddy to- 
day ? 8. It is not muddy, it is dusty. 9. Will it be moonlight this 
evening? 10. It will not be moonlight, it will be very dark. 11. Is 
it comfortable here? 12. It is very comfortable. 13. Is it too 
warm or too cold? 14. It is neither too warm nor too cold here. 
15. Will you have your hair cut ? t 16. I had my hair cut yesterday 
morning. 17. Will you not go home, it is beginning to grow late ? 
18. Is it not very dark out ? (dehors.) Vl9. It is not dark, it is moon- 
light. 20. Has not the glazier turned goldsmith ? 21. He has not 
turned goldsmith, he has turned soldier. 22. Does that concern 
your brother ? 23. That does not concern him. 24. Are you not 
sorry for that ? 25. I am sorry for it, but I cannot help it. 26. Why 
do you get shaved ? 27. Because I cannot shave myself. 28. Have 
you not hurt those children ? 29. I have not hurt them. 30. Have 
you not hurt your arm? 31. No, sir; but I have hurt my head. 
32. Has not your sister hurt her hand ? 33. She has hurt her hand, 
and my mother has hurt her elbow. 34. Have you not hurt your 
head ? 35. I have not hurt my head, but I have hurt my hand. 



LEgON LXVI. LESSON LXVL 

AVOIR MAI, ETC. 

1. Avoir mal, means to have a pain or ache, a sore. When used 
in relation to one of the limbs, it means generally, to have a sore, a 
bruise, a cut, etc. The name of the part of the body is preceded by 
the preposition d and the article [See L. 63, E. 5, § 77, (9.)] 

N'avez-vous pas mal au doigt ? Have, you not a sore finger ? 

Je n'ai pas mal a la tete. My head does not ache. 



180 



SOIXANTE-SIIIEilE LE£ON. 



2. Avoir line douleur, or des douleurs, corresponds to the English 
to have a pain or paths. 

iPai une douleur au bras. J have a pain in my arm. 

3. The construction mentioned in Rule 1. is used utter avoir, taken 
in the sense of tenir, to hold, and after avoir /raid, and avoir chaud 

63, Rule 5.) 

Voua avez les armcs a la main. Ton have, your arms in your hands. 

J'ai chaud aux mains et aux pious. My hands and/set are u-unn. 

4. The article ?<», etc., is used before words indicating moral and 

properties, in cases where the English use a or «», or omit 
the article. When, however, an adjective precedes the noun, un, une ; 
. are at tim< • 



une a I'espril justo. 
Votre Boeur a lea 



77iat lady has a correct 

ter has Had; < 



6. A moral or physical pi h in the individual i 

is not put in the plural in French, though the reference be to a num- 

Tltose ladies have correct m 
M.onssosontQut mal have hurt their h» ids. 



;.'; or Examples. 



mal au pied? 
1 i de tete. 

'■ 

Muii frere a le 

.-in a mal an 
I trine. 

.in? 



Je tt'ai ri. d I la main. 

lud aux mains, et froM aux 

iilin. 



:1achc 
. 

hache. 

tide. 

handt 

r with your 

thing in my hand. 
Nothing is I tih my 

'rvld. 
Tour - 

Ulemen have J Jo man iwses. 



K\i:i:. 61 129. 

Bleu, e. blue ; Mal 

Bouche, f. moidh; 

tooth; Mal d'on 



AVOIR MAI, ETC. 187 

1. Ce jenne hamme a-t-il mal a, la gorge ? 2. Oui, monsieur ; il 
y a deux jours qu'il a le mal de gorge. 3. Avez-vous souvent mal 
a, la tete ? 4. J'ai le mal de tete presque tous les jours. 5. N'avez- 
vous pas mal au bras ? 6. J'ai mal au bras, et a la main. 7. Votre 
sceur a-t-elle le mal d'oreille ? 8. Oui, madamc ; elle a le mal d'oreille 
et le mal de dents. 9. N'avez-vous pas froid a, la tete ? 10. Non, 
monsieur; mais j'ai froid aux doigts. 11. N'avez-vous point froid 
au visage ? 12. ISTon, monsieur ; je n'y ai point froid. 13. Cc mon- 
sieur a-t-il le nez aquilin ? 14. II a le ncz aquilin, et la bouche 
grande. 15. Cette demoiselle a-t-elle de belles dents ? 16. Elle a 
de belles dents, et de beaux yeux. 17. Ce petit garcon a-t-il les 
pieds petits? 18. II a les pieds petits, et les mains grandes. 

19. Votre niece n'a-t-elle pas les yeux bleus ? 20. iSTon, monsieur ; 
elle a les yeux noirs. 21. Vos ecoliers se sont41s fait mal au visage ? 
22. lis se sont fait mal a la poitrine. 23. Yos filles ont-elles une 
bonne memoire ? 24. Elles ont la memoire excellente. 25. Ces 
Italiennes n'ont pas le teint frais. 

ExEECISE 130. 
1. What is the matter with your hand ? 2. I have had a sore hand 
these ten days. 3. Has your brother sore fingers ? 4. He has sore 
fingers, and a sore hand. 5. What has your brother in his hand ? 
6. He has a pen in his hand. 7. Has your little boy a sore throat ? 
8. He has a sore throat. 9. Has not your eldest sister the tooth- 
ache ? 10. She has not the toothache, but she has a sore finger. 
11. Why does not the soldier walk ? 12. He cannot walk, he has a 
sore foot. 13. Have you not sore feet? 14. My feet are not sore. 
15. If your fingers were sore, would you write ? 16. If I had sore 
fingers, I should not write. 17. If your brother had the headache, 
would he study his lesson ? 18. He could not study his lesson, if 
he had the headache. 19. Has not that gentleman pains in his chest ? 

20. He has pains in his chest and in his side. 21. Has your little 
girl black eyes, or blue eyes? 22. She has black eyes, and a fresh 
complexion. 23. Has not your daughter the tooth-ache ? 24. She 
has the tooth-ache, and the ear-ache. 25. Are not your hands and 
feet cold ? 26. My hands are cold, but my feet are warm. 27. Have 
not those ladies aquiline noses ? 28. They have aquiline noses, and 
a fair complexion (le teint beau). 29. Has your sister large hands ? 
30. No, sir; my sister has small hands. 31. Have not those little 
girls hurt their heads ? 32. They have not hurt their heads, they 
have hurt their faces. 33. That little boy has black hair (cheveux). 



188 SOIXAXTE-SEI'IIKJIE LEfOX. 

LEgOX LXVII. LESSON LXVII. 

AVOIR BEAU, ETC. 

1. Avoir beau — Thus avez beau, corresponds in signification to tho 
English expression, it is in vain for you to. It must bo followed by 
the infinitive. 

Vous avcz beau dire, il no viendra Ji he u-ill 

pas. hvt come. 

2. fipouser, marier, to marry, have, in French, a different mean- 
ing. Marier, conjugated actively, can only have as its nominative 
tin' person performing the ceremony, or giving one or both of tho 
parties in m - its nominative, the contracting 

. and must always be followed by a direct regimen. So 
mariei and marier, conjugated passively, take the 

Mr. L. has married his daughter to 

Mr. a. 

M. I.. Mr. 0. has married Mr. L.'s dawjli- 

m. i ;. < t mi; . 

.:icr. 
.".. J ■, I a/ milir. 

■ 

Il i M .'. OF l'.\ AM. 

lis 01 • ■. they 

■ 

:■ '■ ' ■ ■ "■ 
with him, 

p of B. has viarrud vnj 

Loon- ma oou- Cbj u 0. ha* married roy em um , 

:ie xis 
to • 

. • cousin has ■ 

one] a cpouao uuo do m t d has married a s<- 

socura. 



avoir beau, etc. 189 

Exercise 131. 

Afne, c, elder, eldest; Devoir, 3. to owe, to be Parent, e, relation; 
Archeveque, m. arch- about; Princesse, f. princess ; 

bishop ; lupous, pi. couple, man Prochain, e, next ; 

Cadet, te, younger ; and wife ; Savoir, 3. ir. to know ; 

Demoiselle, f. young Infanterie, f. infantry ; Regiment, m. regiment; 

lady; lilveque, m. bishop; Vieillard, old man. 

1. Votre ni£ce ne va-t-elle pag se marier? 2. Elle se maricra 
l'annee prochaine. 3. Qui epousera-t-elle ? 4. Elle epousera le fils 
aine du general M. 5. Savez-vous qui a marie ces deux epoux ? 
6. L'archeveque de Paris les a maries. 7. N'a-t-il pas aussi marie 
Mile. L. ? 8. II l'a mariee avec M. Gr. 9. Qui votre demoiselle a-t- 
elle epouse ? 10. Elle a epouse M. L., capitaine au 2& me regiment 
d'infanterie. 11. Ce vieillard n'a-t-il pas tort de se marier ? 12. II 
n'a pas tort de se marier, mais il a tort d' epouser cette demoiselle. 
13. Quand ces princesses vont-elles se marier? 14. Elles se ma- 
rieront le mois prochain. 15. Qui les mariera? 16. L'eveque 
d' Arras les mariera. 17. Qui doivent-elles epouser? 18. L'ainee 
doit epouser M. W., et la cadette M. Gr. 19. Le capitaine G, n'a-t-il 
pas epouse une de vos parentes ? 20. Oui, monsieur ; il a epouse 
une de mes cousine's. 21. Qui est cette demoiselle ? 22. C'est 
une de mes sceurs. 23. N'avez-vous pas un de mes livres ? 24. J'ai 
un de vos livres, et une de vos plumes. 25. Je viens de parler a une 
de vos sceurs. 

Exercise 132. 

1. Is your brother going to marry Miss L. ? 2. Yes, sir ; it is in 
vain for us to speak to him, he will marry her. 3. Will not your 
father marry your sister to Mr. Gr. ? 4. No, sir; he will marry her 
to Mr. L. 5. Is Captain H. married ? 6. No, sir ; he is not yet 
married, but he will be married next year. 7. Whom does he in- 
tend to marry ? 8. He intends to marry a cousin of mine, who is 
at my brother's. 9. Who will marry them ? 10. My eldest brother 
intends to marry them. 11. Is your youngest sister married? 12. No, 
sir ; she is not married. 13. Is she going to be married ? 14. She 
will marry when she is [L. 61, 5.] old enough (assez agee). 15. Whom 
did Colonel J. marry? 16. He married a sister of mine. 17. How 
long have they been married [L. 57, 2.] ? 18. They have been mar- 
ried two years. 19. Is not that young lady wrong to get married ? 
20. She is wrong to marry, she is too young. 21. Who married 
General S. and Miss N. ? 22. The bishop of Arras married them. 
23. Did not the archbishop of York marry that couple ? 24. The 



190 SOIXANTE-UUITIK3IE LE^OX. 

archbishop of Paris married them. 25. "Will not your aunt marry ? 
2G. She -will not many. 27. Is not your sister at homo ? 28. No, 
sir ; she is with (chez) an aunt of mine. 29. Is your brother at your 
house? 30. No, sir; he is with one of my relations. 31. Is he 

married? 02. He is not married. 33. Is Captain H. married? 
3-i. lie was married last week. 35. He married Miss 11. 



LEQON LXVTII. LESSON LXVIII. 

DIMENSION, WHIGHT, ETC. 

1. The verb avoir i- used in expressing (he size of an object. The 
preposition de precedes the noun of dimension. When there is no 
verb in the senteiire, the preposition must be placed before the num- 
id again before the noun of dimension. 

ur.till.- a >. I I high, 

haul 

□ lour. Thai ■ 
l'ii.: table de quae i mg, 

guour. 

, and the verb ,'lre is 

the number 

i ploa grand quo i r than J by tu> 

deux ; 

.'!. YY: • is used 

the noun exj measure, weight, etc. When the 

remuiii i mentioned 

the pr<-: 

■:. ■ rend nn franc la livr< . 

: jour. 11'- car 

i we speak of the number of 

' time. 

<j day, 

II, \MIM IS. 

i .its pieds do Thai i 

hauteur. 



DIMENSION, WEIGHT, ETC. 



]91 



Cet etang a huit pieds de profon- 

deur. 
Une charabre do quinze pieds de 

longueur, sur dix-huit de largeur, 

et huit de hauteur. 
De quelle taille est votre frere ? 
Sa taille est de cinq pieds huit 

pouces. 
Notre ami est-il grand ou petit ? 
Jl est de taille moyenne. 
Votre maison est plus haute que la 

mienne do cinq pieds. 
Je vais a, l'ecole deux fois par jour. 
II nous paie huit francs par semaine. 



That pond ■ 



deep. 



A room fifteen feet long, by 
feet broad, and eight feet high. 

How tall is your brother ? 

His height is five feet eight inches. 

Is our friend tall or short ? 

His height is middling. 

Your house is higher than mine 

five feet. 
I go to school twice a day. 
He pays us eight francs a week. 



Exercise 133. 

Bon marche, cheap ; Grandeur, f. size ; 
Cassonade, f. brown su- Hauteur, f. height ; 

gar ; Largeur, f. breadth; 

!Ecossais, e. Scotch, Longueur, f. length; 

Scotchman; Loyer, m. rent; 

^paisseur, f. thickness; Metre, m. metre; 
£to£fe, f. stuff; Moyen, ne, middling; 



Profondeur, f. depth; 
Pouce, m. inch; 
Semaine, f. week ; 
Taille, f. height, size; 
Une fois, once ; 
Verge, f. perch, yard, 
rod. 



1. Votre maison est-elle grande? 2. Elle a cinquante pieds de 
long, et vingt-cinq de large. 3. Quelle longueur votre jardin a-t-il ? 
4. II a vingt-cinq verges de longueur, et douze de largeur. 5. De 
quelle grandeur est ee livre ? 6. II a dix-huit pouces de longueur, 
treize de largeur, et trois d'epaisseur. 7. Votre maison est-elle 
plus longue que celle-ci ? 8. Elle est plus longue de deux pieds. 
9. Quelle profondeur a ce puits ? 10. De quelle hauteur est ce 
cloeher? 11. II a trois cent cinquante-trois pieds de hauteur. 12. De 
quelle taille est cet officier? 13. II est de haute taille. 14. De 
combien cet Ecossais est-il plus grand que son frere ? 15. II est plus 
grand de toute la tete. 16. N'etes-vous pas de beaucoup plus grand 
que moi? 17. Je suis plus grand que vous de tro, pouces. 
18. Combien cette etoffe se vend-elle la verge ? 19. Elu. se vend 
trois francs le metre. 20. La cassonade ne se vend-elle pas cher ? 
21. Elle se vend & bon marche. 22. Combien de lettres ecrivez-vous 
par semaine ? 23. Je n'en ecris que six par semaine. 24. Combien 
payez-vous par semaine pour votre loyer ? 25. Je ne paie que dix 
francs par semaine. 

Exercise 134. 
1. How large is your father's garden ? 2. It is twenty-five rods 
long, and ten broad. 3. Is your cousin's house large ? 4. It is fifty- 
six feet long, and forty broad. 5. Is your house larger than mine ? 



102 SOIXAXTE-XEUVIilllE LE^ON. 

G. It is larger than yours by ten feet. 7. Do you knew how deep 
that well is? 8. It is twenty-five feet deep, and six feet broad. 
9. How is that cloth sold a metre ? 10. It is sold forty-five francs a 
metre. 11. How much do you receive a week for your work? 12. I 
receive fifty francs a week for my work. 13. How much does your 
friend pay a month for his board (jyension, f.) ? 14. lb' pays seventy 
francs a month. 15. Are you taller than your cousin? 1G. I am 
taller than he, by the whole head. 17. Is nut your nephew taller than 
your son? IS. lie is taller than my son, by three inches. 19. How 
large is this room? 20. It is sixty feet long by forty. 21. What 
size is your brother? 22. He is tall, he is taller than I. 23. How 
many books do you read a week ? 21. I read ten volumes a week. 
L".. Eow is butter sold a pound? 2G. Butter is sold two francs a 
pound. 1*7. Do you know how much your son earns a day? 
28. II- I a: ns as much as yours, lie earns ten I nines a day. 29. Etow 
much h that silk worth a metre? 30. It is worth six francs a metre. 
31. < >ur friend's stature is middling. 32. Do you go to church twice 
a day? 33. I go to church once a day. .".I. Does your son go to 
the pust-uilkc every day ? 3o. He qocs thither six times a day. 



I.IVuN I. XIX. 30N LXIX. 

mi:iti:i\ si: Mi:rn:i', i:i.\ 

ir.) forms in French, many idiomatic exp- 
Mettre a mdme <;- . tnettre pied & terre, to alight, to land; 

mettre le pied, to $et one** foot ; mettre a la porte, to <um • 
mettre au fait de, /" aeeguaini with ; mettre & 1'abri, to shelter; mettro 
a fombre, to pui in fht >' UU habil a I'endroit, a l'cuvcrs, 

\l side out, wrong n 

ITooa 1'avons mis a mi mo do con- We enabled him to know the truth. 

naitre la v'-rit'-. 
11 u mis oet insolent a la porto. tied that insolent person out <f 

doors. 

2. Mdtrc, conjugated reflectively, i. e., tr mrttrr, me 

.id.-, to sit down to table; 
omc anyry, to put one's self in! > 

II se met a l'ombre, au soloil. He places himself in the sliade, in the 

sun. 

3. ,SV mrttre, followed by an infinitive, means to - 
lis se mircnt ;\ plcurer. Tlu ,; 



METTEE, SE METTRE, ETC. 193 

A Tanglaise, a la frangaise, are used elliptically for, it la mode 
francaise, a la mode anglaise, after the French, after the English 
fashion. 

Resume op Examples. 

Ce cavalier a mis pied a terre. That horseman has come down from 

his horse. 
Vous n'osez mettre lo pied chez lui. You dare not set your foot inside his 

house. 
Mettez ces enfants a l'abri de la pluie. Shelter those children from the rain. 
Yous avez mis votre manteau a You have •put on your cloak inside out. 

l'envers. 
Ce monsieur se met toujours a Pan- Tliat gentleman always dresses after 

glaise. the English fashion. 

Hier, nous nous mimes a table a dix Yesterday, we sat down to table at ten 

heures. o'clock. 

Pourquoi vous mettez- vous a Torn- Why do you go into the shade f 

bre? 
Ces enfants se mirent a rire. Those children commenced laughing. 

Pourquoi ne vous mettez- vous pas & Why do you not set yourself to work ? 

l'ouvrage ? 
Je vais me mettre en pension. 1 will commence boarding. 

Nous allons nous mettre en voyage. We are going to commence our jour- 
ney. 

Exercise 135 

A l'italienne, after the Effets, m. p. things; Etudi-er, 1. to study ; 

Italian fashion ; Entr-er, 1. to come in; Mise, f. mettle, dressed; 

A merveille, exceedingly Endroit, m. right side ; Pluie, f. rain ; 

well; Envers, m. wrong side ; Eire, 4. ir. to laugh ; 

Couvert, See L. 32, 1. ; Etourdi, e, giddy per- Soleil, m. sun; 

Defend-re, 4. to forbid ; son ; Tablier, m. apron. 

1. Avez- vous defendu a cet homme de mettre le pied chez vous ? 
2. Je le lui ai defendu. 3. Avez-vous mis ces effets a" l'abri de la 
pluie? 4. Je les ai mis a l'abri de la pluie et du vent. 5. Avez-vous 
mis votre frere au fait de cette affaire ? 6. Je ne Ten ai pas mis au 
fait. 7. Ne l'avez-vous pas mis a meme d'etudier? 8. Je l'ai mis a 
meme de s'instruire, s'il desire le faire. 9. Voulez-vous mettre cela 
decote? 10. Je vais le mettre au soleil. 11. Votre ami n'a-t-il 
pas voulu entrer? 12. II n'a point voulu mettre pied a terre. 
13. Yotre teinturier n'a-t-il pas mis son tablier a l'envers ? 14. Non, 
monsieur ; il l'a mis^ l'endroit. 15. N'avez-vous pas mis cet etourdi 
a" la porte ? 16. Nous lui avons ferme la porte au nez (in Ms face)._± 
17. A quelle beure vous mettez-vous a table ? 18, Aussitot que le ' 
couvert sera mis [L. 61, (5.)]. 19. Cet homme se met-il bien? 
20. II se met toujours a l'anglaise, ou a l'italienne. 21. Ces enfants 
ne se mirent-ils pas a pleurer ? 22. Au lieu de se mettre a pleurer, 
ils se mirent a rire. 23. Pourquoi ne vous mettez-vous pas h 



194 



SOIXANTE-DIXIEME LEO OX. 



c'crirc ? 24. II est temps de so mettre a table. 25. Ces Sicilicnncs 
sont-elles bicn inises ? 26. Elles sont niises a merYcille {extremely 
well dresst J.) 

Exercise 13C. 

1. Dill the gentleman alight this morning? 2. He would not 

audit, he had no time. 3. Have you put that insolent person out of 

doors ? 4. No, sir ; but I forbade him to set his foot in my house. 

5. Did you shelter those litde children from the rain ? 0. I sheltered 

them from the rain and the wind. 7. Have you enabled your son 

to Btudy medicine >? 8. I enabled him to Btudy medi- 

ifhe wishes to do so. 9. Have you pot on your coat inside 

10. I have not put it on inside out, but right side out. 11. Did 

yon i .; it v.. urself in a passion? 12. No, sir; I did not be< 

angry. 13. Did you sit down to table at four o'clock, yesterday? 

• down to table at six o'clock. 15. Do you intend to 

ence boarding? 1<">. I intend to board with Mr. L (che*M. L.) 

17. Whend yourjourney? L8. We commence our 

lorrow iii-nnn- 19. Did your sou commence 

. immenced weeping. 2L Why do you not 
.. ace working ? 22. B< : • commence 

fashion? 24. 
25. Are 1 lose ladies well dn 
emery well dre ed. 27. Will you not place 
1 will place myself in the sun, I a: 

\ i, mi-; it is righl aide out. 
;;1 _ i ,th? 32. It is th.- wrong Bide, 

■ 1 after the English fashion? 84. 1 am 
Italian fadhion. 35. You are well dre. 



LE£ON I. XX. 



\ I. XX. 



- 1 iii- imi'i:i:aiivk. 
•'.ATiox OF tiik I Mi-i r. viivi: or tiii: RlOULAB A*Enns. 



Qu'il 



-o 
tUta 

],ul -O 

dona -ous 

■lire 

ii -ez 
*•<■* 
Qu'il3 port -out 

Ut them curry 



fin -U 

finish 

oher 

i.t hiu, 
burn 

pan 

LI Uiem tciic 



aperc 

1,1 an g 

i 

d 

U t Um on • 



rend -a 

MM. I -O 

. otend 



th, 



;,»c 



THE IMPERATIVE. 195 

2. The second person singular, and the first and second persons 
plural of the imperative, are the same as the first person singular, and 
the first and second persons plural, of the present of the indicative. 
The pronouns are dropped. 

Je parle, park; je finis, finis. I speak, speak; I finish, finish. 

3. Exceptions — Avoir, to have, makes in those persons of the im- 
perative, aie, ayons, ayez ; etre, to he : sois, soyons, soyeg ; savoir, to 
know : sache, sachons, sachez / and aller, va, and vas before y not fol- 
lowed by an infinitive. 

4. Vouloir has only the Becond person plural, veuillez, have the 
goodness to ... . 

5. A third person singular and plural is given, in the imperative, by 
most of the French grammarians. These parts, however, belong 
properly to the subjunctive, as they express rather a strong wish than 
a command. The English expressions, let him speak, that he may 
speak, are rendered in French by qit'il parle. 

G. A droite, a gauche, correspond in signification to the English 
to the right, to the left. 

Allez a droite, a gauche. Go to the right, to the left. 

7. For the place of the pronouns in connection with the imperative, 
see Lesson 27, Rule 1, 4 ; Lesson 28, Eule 1, 2, 3, 4. 

Resume of Examples. 

Prenons la premiere rue a droite. Let us take the first street to the right 

Ne cherchez plus a le tromper. Seek no longer to deceive him. 

Sachons nous contenter du neces- Let us know how to content ourselves 

saire. with necessaries. 

Paites bien attention a ce que vous Pay great attention to what you say. 

dites. 

Dites toujours la verite. Always tell the truth. 

Allons ! messieurs ; depechez-vous. Come ! gentlemen ; make haste. 

Tenez, monsieur ; voila votre argent. Here, sir; here is your money. 

Yeuillez accepter ce present. Be so kind as to accept this present. 

EXEECISE 137. 
Clef, f. key ; Prochain, e, next ; Renvoy-er, 1. to send 

Crayon, m. pencil; Promett-re, 4. ir. to pro- back; 

Institutrice, f. teacher ; mise ; Sans faute, without fail ; 

Obe-ir, 2. to obey ; Rapport-er, 1. to bring Se serv-ir, 2. ref. to use ; 

Partie, f. part ; back; Tiers, m. third; 

Precepteur, m. instruc- Pemett-re, 4. ir. to de- Verrez, 3. ir. from voir, 
tor; liver; to see. 

1. Envoy ez chercher le medecin ; votre petit garcon est malade. 
2. Nous l'avons deja envoye chercher. 3. Vous n'avez pas besoin 



196 SO IX ANTE-DIXIEME L E C N . 

de votrc crayon, pretez-le-moi [L. 27, K. 4 ; L. 28, R. 4]. 4. Je ne 
saurais vous le prdter, je m'en sera. 5. Donnea-le-moi, ou me lc 
pretcz (ou pretez-le-moi). [§ 100, (G.)] 0. Jo l'ai promis a votrc in- 
stitutrice. 7. Si vous ne le lui avez pas dit, dites-le-lui aussitot quo 
possible. 3. Ne le lui dites pas encore. 9. Parlez-lui-en, [§ 39, 17.] 
la prochaine fois que vous le verrez. 10. Ayez patience, mon ami, 
votre peVe ne tardera pas u venir. 11. Obeissez a votrc precepteur. 
12. Je Lui ol ela toujoura. 13. Donncz-lui-cn one bonne partie. 14, Je 
lui en ai deja donne* plus dea deux tiers. 15. Avcz-vous porte* oetta 

. . Berrurier? 10. J'ai oubbe* de la lui remettre. 17. Port 
lui sans faute cctte apreVmidi. 18. Veuillez me dire ou demeure 
M. I ;. 19. Prenez la premidre rue & gauche, il demeure dans la deo- 
20. Allons, mesdemoiselles, d^pdchona-noua. 
2L M- -in ■:'.-!■■•-■- y 1'- plna tot possible, 22. Ne me les rapportex pas, 
23, i; :..-i domain, 24. Portona-les-y. 25. No les y 

:. mais ne les Lui donnei | 

.. [SB 138. 
1 ,; man 2. 1 have already given him 

I it to him, if you will not give 
;. I will not lend it to h mg la- 

to give me a pen. 7.1 
. and speak to 
' 10. 1 will Bend 
as you can. 12. Do nol do bo (&), 
< ie, children ( learn 

or lend him 
have (fe) time. 16. Eave pa* 
. bild, the merchant will Boon come. 17. Send it to him, 
..■ i< to him. 18. Write to bim ihia ail moon, withr 
L [9, i ■., i bim, if I had time. 20. Lei 

■ to the right 
22. Pay attention to whal your brot ' '1 the. 

truth. 24 Lei na read that book to-day. 

our iustm." 
me back I '••■ '■■"' . v " ;1 - 

bring them back to me, read them 80. Le! ua hai 

on have money. 31. Lei usspeak to them, they 
Tell them that I intend to write to them to- 
Go to church this afternoon, ■ 

j them there, but bring tl 



VERB AFTER THE IMPERATIVE, ETC. 



197 



LEQON LXXI. 



LESSON LXXI. 



VERB AFTER THE IMPERATIVE, ETC. 

1. A verb, following another verb in the imperative, is put in the 
infinitive, (according to general Eule, L. 21, 2.) The conjunction 
which often comes between the two verbs, in English, is not used in 
French. 



Allez parler au musicien. 
Allez faire votre ouvrage. 
Courez voir c 



Go and speak to the musician. 
Go and do your work. 
Run and see those gentlemen. 

2. Prendre garde, to take care, to take heed; when followed by an- 
other verb in the infinitive, means to take care not to. 

Prenez garde de tomber. Take care not to fall. 

3. Prendre le deuil, means to go into mourning ; prendre la peine, 
to take the trouble ; prendre les devants, to go on before ; prendre un 
parti, to take a determination ; prendre du cafe, du the, &c, to take 
coffee, tea, &c. 

Resume op Examples. 

Send for the upholsterer. 

Go and fetch your umbrella. 

Bun and see your father. 

Let us take care not to hurt ourselves. 

Take care not to tear your clothes. 

Have you not put on mourning ? 

Take the trouble to sit down. 

Take tea or coffee. 

What resolution have you taken f 



Envoyez chercher le tapissier. 
Allez chercher votre parapluio. 
Courez voir votre pere. 
Prenons garde de nous blesser. 
Prenez garde de declarer vos habits. 
N'avez-vous pas pris le deuil? 
Prenez la peine de vous asseoir. 
Prenez du the ou du cafe. 
Quel parti avez-vous pris ? 



Exercise 139. 

Attend-re, 4 to expect, G-at-er, 1. to spoil; Robe, f. dress; 

to wait for; Gouverneur, m. govern- Soin, m. care; 
Chocolat, m. chocolate; nor; Tomb-er, 1. to fall, 

Courrier, m. courier; Lorsque, when; Tacher, 1. to stain, to 

Croi-re, 4 ir. to believe ; Port-er, 1. to wear ; spot ; 

Dechir-er, 1. to tear ; Quelquefois, sometimes ; Se tai-re, 4. ir. to be silent. 



1. Allez voir mon frere, il a quelque chose a vous communiquer. 
2. Courez leur dire que je les attends. 3. Mon frere a bien pris 
garde de dechirer ses habits. 4. Votre cousine a-t-elle pris garde de 
tacher sa robe ? 5. Elle a pris garde de tomber, car en tombant elle 
l'aurait gatee. 6. Ces petites filles ont-elles pris le deuil ? 7. Elles 
viennent de le prendre. 8. Pour qui prenez- vous le deuil ? 9. Je 
porte le deuil de ma mere. 10. Prenez-vous du the ou du cafe le 



198 SOIXASTE-OXZlhlE LE£ON. 

matin? 11. Xous prenons du the ct du cafe. 12. No prencz-vous 
pas quelquefois du cbocolat ? Yd. 2S*ous n'en prenons quo lorsque 
nous sommos malades. 14. Quel parti le gouverneur a-t-il pris? 
15. II a pris le parti de se taire. 16. Prendrez-vous mon parti, (my 
pari) ou oelui de votrc lils? 17. Jo prendrai le voire, si jo crbis que 
vous avez raison. 18. Pourquoi no prenez-vous pas la peine de lire. 
L9. Parce qu'elle n'en vain pas la peine. 20. Votre cour- 
rier a-t-il pris les devants? 21. 11 n'a pu prendre les deranta 
L"_". N'avea-VOUa pas tort de prendre son parti? 23. Je n'ai pas tort 
ile le prendre. 24. Aves-vous pris i ? 2">. Nona 

n'avons pas pris (our) le the, nous avona pris le c 

V.w.iu [SB 1 10. 
1. Has your brother taken care not to spoil his bat? 2. lie baa 
;>"il it, be bas only one. 3. Go and speak to your 
you not lake n cup I 
6. What have you said to 

:1 ? 7. I Lave told hi K her 

i bai 

• it 10. II a ? 1 1. He baa doI yet 

12. At what horn tea 1 at your 

l i. Do yon take tea' <>r 

? 15. We take coffee, I 

17. I to has not 1 d able to 

1 -. \\ '!. 19. 1 have 

the r 

21. 1 i them. 22. What 

our brother < i mined to ;• 

broiii . Ar.- you I 

I n« >f afraid i ■ 
hi- part ? 29. I an 

i. I will tak 
road 'W my 

: end. •"■ 1. I 

Iceo by 

vicudrai acuk-uicut ■ vnly come to Uic (m 



THE SUBJUNCTITK. 199 

LEQON LXXII. LESSON LXXII. 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. All the French verbs, regular and irregular, end in this tense 
with e, es, e, ions, iez, ent. 

2. Conjugation op the Present of the Subjunctive of the 

Eegular Verbs. 

Que je chant -e fin -isse rec -oive rend -e 

That I may sing may finish may receive may render 

Que tu pari -es cher -isses aperc -oives vend -es 

Tliat thou may est speak mayest cherish mayest perceive may est sell 

Qu'il donn -e fourn -isse perc -oive tend -e 

That he may give may furnish may gather may tend, 

Que nous cherch -ions pun -issions cone -evions entend -ions 

That we may seek may punish may conceive may hear 

Que vous port -iez sais -issiez d -eviez perd -iez 

That you may carry may seise may owe may lose 

Qu'ils aim -ent un -issent dec -oivent mord -ent 

That they may love may unite may deceive may bite 

3. In the first conjugation, the subjunctive is, in the singular, simi- 
lar to the present of the indicative. Exception : aller— je vais, que 
j aille. 

4. The first and second persons plural of the subjunctive, in the 
four conjugations, are the same as the corresponding persons of the 
imperfect of the indicative. The third person plural is like the cor- 
responding person in the indicative present. Exceptions : avoir, 
subjunctive, nous ayons, vous ay ez, its aient; savoir: nous sachions, 
vous sachiez, Us sachent ; etre : nous soyons, vous soyez, ils soient; faire : 
nous fassions, nous fassiez, ils f assent; aller: ils aillent / vouloir : ils 
veuiUent; valoir: ils vaillent. 

5. The subjunctive may also be formed from the participle present, 
by changing ant into e, es, e, ions, iez, ent : as, chantant, je cJiante ; 
finissant, je jinisse ; ouvrant, fouvre; sachant, je sache; craignant, 
je craigne. 

6. The verbs presenting exceptions to this last rule are the fol- 
lowing, which the student will find conjugated in the Second Part 
of this grammar, § 62. 



Acquerir 


Concevoir 


Mourir 


Prendre, 


Savoir Venir 


Aller 


Decevoir 


Mouvoir 


(and 


Tenir (and (and 


Apercevoir 


Devoir 


Percevoir 


its com- 


its com- its com- 


Avoir 


£tre 


Pouvoir 


pounds) 


pounds) pounds) 


Boire 


Faire 


Pourvoir 


Recevoir 


Valoir Vouloir 



7. The past of the subjunctive is formed from the subjunctive 



200 SOIXAXTE-DOUZIEUE LEfON. 

present of one of the auxiliaries, avoir, itre, and the past participle 
of a verb [§ 45]. 

Que j'aie parle, que je sois verm. That 1 may have spoken, that I may 
have came. 

8. A verb is put in the subjunctive, when it is preceded by the 
conjunction que, and another verb expressing consent, command, 

...mt, duty, necessity, regret, fear, appreheu- 
L27, (2.)] 

Je vcux quo vous lui parlicz. you to speak to him, 

Je desire quo vous arriviez a temps. / wish you to arrive in time. 

9. When the tlr-t verb expresses far or apprehension, the verb 

Iso !><• preceded by ne, which, however, has 
no negative sense [s 1-7, I | (5.) (I !. ij 

Jo crains qu'il no tombo. I am a/raid lest he fall. 

10. . avoir penr, 
trembler, t>> trend •! in connection wi 

ne, when we wish for tl timent of the action or occur- 

Jo tremble qu'il 

of Examples. 

; t me to drink 
.'• allies voir. • Mm. 

. . time. 

■ master may . 

matter m>iy not pun- 

t nut 

, that. 
\ . .1 aille A !a c 

Que voule/.-vous que j What mt t>> (thai I 

f 
uik-uxquo vous me payiez. I would ratlter Vial you should pay 

111. 

:iiU; 

. ;i:t ; 
id. bracelet; 
tody; unhealthy; Tomb-er, 1. tu/alL 



USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 201 

1. Que voulez-vous que nous fassions? 2. Je desire que vous 
fassiez attention 3, vos etudes. 3. Ne craignez-vous pas que la pluie 
ne vous empeche de sortir ? 4. Nous craignons fortement que la 
pluie ne nous empeche de remplir nos engagements. 5. Doutez-vous 
qu'il soit chez lui maintenant ? 6. Je doute qu'il y soit, il est deja 
dix heures. 7. Exigez-vous qu'il parte de bonne heure? 8. Je 
m'etonne qu'il ne soit pas deja parti. 9. Aimez-vous mieux que 
je vous rende ces bracelets ? 10. J'aime mieux que vous me les 
payiez. 11. Votre voisin craint-il que son enfant ne sorte ? 12. II 
craint qu'il ne tombe dans la rue. 13. Ne desirez-vous pas que vos 
eleves vous obeissent? 14. Je souhaite qu'ils m' obeissent et qu'ils 
obeissent a leurs professeurs. 15. Ne craignez-vous pas que cet 
artisan ne tombe malade ? 16. Je crains qu'il ne tombe malade, car 
son atelier est tres malsain. 17. Ne regrettez-vous pas qu'il soit 
oblige de travailler ? 18. Je regrette qu'il soit oblige de travailler 
au dessus de ses forces. 19. Ne desirez-vous pas qu'on lui apprenne 
cette nouvelle ? 20. Je desire qu'cn la lui apprenne le plus tot pos- 
sible. 21. Votre pere ne veut-il pas que vous achetiez un magasin ? 
22. II veut que j'achete un moulin a scie. 23. Desirez-vous que je 
vous quitte ? 24. Je desire que vous restiez avec moi. 25. Je veux 
que vous partiez ce matin. 

Exercise 142. 
1. Do you wish me to speak to the mechanic ? 2. I wish you to 
tell him to (de) come here to-morrow morning. 3. What do you 
wish me to do ? 4. I wish you to bring me a book. 5. Do you not 
wish me to read your letter ? 6. I wish you to read it, and (que) 
give it to my sisters. 7. Does not your sister fear lest the rain may 
prevent her going out ? 8. She fears that the rain may prevent our 
going out. 9'. Do you doubt that your father be at home now ? 
10. I doubt his being there. 11. Do you require me to do my work 
now ? 12. I wish you to do your work before going out (avant de 
sortir). 13. Do you not regret your being obliged to work ? 14. I 
do not regret my being obliged to work. 15. Are you not astonished 
that he knows that? 16. I am astonished that he knows all. 
17. Do you require me to pay him to day ? 18. I wish you to pay 
him to-morrow. 19. What would you have me do (See No. 1, of 
the above exercise) ? 20. I will have you pay him immediately. 
21. Do you fear lest the master punish your son ? 22. I fear that he 
may not punish him. 23. What would you have me say ? 24. I 
would have you say the truth. 25. Does not your father wish you 
to buy a house ? 26. He wishes me to buy a warehouse. 27. Do 
9* 



202 SOIXANTE-TKEIZIEME LEgON. 

you wish us to leave you ? 28. I wish you to go away to-morrow. 
29. Do you wish me to stay witli you ? 30. I wish you to stay 
here. 31. Do you wish me to tell him that news? 32. I wish you 
to tell it to him. 33. Do you wish your children to obey their 
teacher ? 34. I wish them to obey him. 



LEgON LXXIII. LESSON LXXIII. 

USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE, CONTINUED. 

1. A v I by the conjunction que and one of the uni- 

■al verba; il 1 •■. it matter*, it is 

important j il coovient, it is proper, becoming; il vaut niieux, it is 

leases, suits; il se pent, il peut Be faire, it may be ; 

il est temps, it is time ; 
'.' is proper ; 

■ . it is urgent, or by 
, v.iil, or propriety, 
L27, (4.)] 

II bat Vtst remain here. 

.. net you should be retcanleJ. 

•j. The unipewonal verl rns the indicative pic a m i or the 

future, y, and followed by que, coming 

.• vnii, true; 
■<!, and 

• 

In qu'il vicnt ou qu'il II .'.« eertetfl that he comes or that he 

. ira. ivi'U i 

connection, 

U • u certain that he will 

■t. Alter oertain conjunctions, afin q 'that; qnoiqni 

(hough, 

r|uevousfaasiez, quoiquevous Wfiatever you may do, whatever you 
may aay. 

important rule?, on tho government of conjunctions, will 
be found in said § 143. 



USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



203 



Resume of Examples. 



Que faut-il que votre soeur fasse ? 
Faut-il que je lui ecrive ? 
II est necessaire que vous lui ecriviez. 
II est temps que vous lui donniez son 

argent. 
N'est-il pas facheux qu'il soit arrive 

si tard ? 
H est certain qu'il est arrive. 
II n'est point certain qu'il se soit 



Restez ici jusqu'a ce qu'il arrive. 
Pourvu que vous finissiez a temps. 



What must your sister do t 

Must I write to him ? 

It is necessary for you to write to him. 

It is time that you should give him his 
money. 

Is it not a pity that he {should have) 
arrived so late ? 

It is certain that he has arrived. 

It is not certain that he has hurt him- 
self. 

Remain here until he comes. 

Provided that you finish in time. 



Exercise 143. 

Affaire, f. affair ; Fourn-ir, 2. to furnish; 

Ainsi, thus ■ Se lev-er, 1. ref. to rise ; 

Creancier, m. creditor ; Linge. m. linen ; 
Se couck-er, 1. ref. to Manqu-er, 1. to want; 

retire; Necessaire, m. necessa- 

Dire, 4. ir. to say ; ries ; 

Emprunt-er, 1. to oor- Ordre, m. order ; 



Point, m. point, degree; 

Pourvu que, provided 
that; 

Eegl-er, 1. to regulate; 

Rest-er, 1. to remain; 

Satisfai-re, 4. ir. to sat- 
isfy , 



Oubli-er, 1. to forget; Tel, le, such; 

1. Que faut-il que je dise ? 2. II faut que vous disiez ce que vous 
avez entendu. 3. Ne faut-il pas que je finisse cette histoire ? 4. II 
n'est pas necessaire que vous la finissiez. 5. N'est-il pas a, propos 
que je satisfasse mes creanciers ? 6. II est a, propos que vous le fassiez. 

7. N'est-il pas juste que je vous paie ce que je vous ai emprunte ? 

8. II est juste que vous me le payiez. 9. Se peut-il que votre frere 
ait oublie sa famille ? 10. II ne peut pas se faire qu'il l'ait oubliee. 

11. Est-il certain que votre frere se soit oublie a un tel point? 

12. II est certain qu'il s'est oublie. 13. II est bien facheux qu'il se 
soit oublie ainsi. 14. Resterez-vous jusqu'a ce que j'aie mis ordre a 
mes affaires? 15. Je resterai jusqu'a ce que vous les ayez reglees. 

16. Ne faudra-t-il pas que je fournisse des provisions a cette famille ? 

17. II faudra que vous lui en fournissiez, pourvu que vous en ayez. 

18. Ne vaudra-t-il pas mieus que vous lui pretiez de l'argent, que de 
le laisser manquer du necessaire ? 19. II vaudra mieux que nous 
lui en pretions. 20. Que faut-il que nous fassions ? 21. II faut que 
vous portiez ce linge chez moi. 22. N'est-il pas temps que je me 
couche ? 23. II est temps que vous vous coucbiez. 24. Faut-il que 
je me leve ? 25. II faut que vous vous leviez. 

Exercise 144. 
1. What must our friend do ? 2. He must remain at our house 
until I come. 3. What must our neighbor do ? 4. He must put his 



204 SOIXANTE-QUATOKZIE1IE LE^ON". 

affairs in order. 5. Is it not right that you should pay your credi- 
tors ? G. It is right that I should pay them. 7. Is it time for your 
little boy to go to school ? S. It is time for him to go to school, it is 
ten o'clock. 0. Must I write to your correspondent to-day or to- 
morrow? 10. You must write to him to-morrow morning. 11. la 
it not a pity that your brother has torn his cap (casquette)? 12. It is 
a pity that he has torn it. 13. Is it D icessary for your mother to 
14. It is not necessary that she finish it. lf>. Is it 
certain that your son has forgotten his money ? 1G It is certain that 
he has forgotten it. 17. It is by no means certain that he has for- 
d it. 18. Must you furnish money to that mechanic? l!>. I 
must furnish him some, he has none. 20. Whatever you may do 
you will not Bucceed (riussir). 21. Whatever your brother may 

. |. 22. Musi I write to you? 
i! must wri1 24. I 1 " you wish me to be sick? 25. I 

to tell you 

28. Do you wish 

I wish you to go there. J<>. Must I 

32. Must 

d immediately. 3-4. It is 

.. lve o'clock. 



LEU ON I. XXIV. LESSON I.XXIV. 

I BH "I" Till: Bl I-..1IN. Tl\ K, ( "M 

m ; gager 

, . ■ ■■ • , and 

. n and positive, are 
. 
Note]. 

2. The a' hen used in I i. and eonju- 

•wed by the subjunctive, 
ibtful 

ded by anothi r verb and 



USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 205 

put in the subjunctive, while there is an idea of uncertainty, and in 
the indicative, when the idea is certain [§ 127, (2.) Note]. 

J'ai un homme qui me rendra ser- I have a man who will oblige me. 

vice. 

J'ai besoin d'un homme qui me Iivant a man who will (may) oblige 

rende service. me. 

4. A verb, preceded by a superlative relative, or by the words, le 
seul, le premier, le dernier, is put in the subjunctive [§ 127]. 

Voila le seul chapeau que j'aie. Tliat is the only hat I have. 
Yoila le meilleur homme que je There is the best man 1 know. 
connaisse. 

Resume op Examples. 

Je crois que le concert a eu lieu. / believe that the concert took place. 

Je ne pense pas que notre ami / do not think that our friend will 

vieime. come. 

J'espere que vous apprendrez cela 1 hope that you will learn that by 

par cceur. heart. 

Je ne pense pas qu'il puisse appren- I do not think that he can learn all 

dre tout cela par coeur. that by heart. 

Je crois que ce marehand s'enrichit / believe that this merchant grows rich 

aux depens d'autrui. at the expense of others. 

Je ne crois pas qu'il s'enrichisse a I do not believe that he enriches him- 

vos depens. self at your evpense. 

Je ne crois pas que vous reussissiez I do not believe that you will succeed 

a gagner votre vie. in earning your living. 

J'ai une carafe qui contient un litre. I have a decanter which holds a litre. 

Je cherche une carafe qui contienne I seek a decanter which holds a litre. 

un litre. 

Je vous prete le meilleur chapeau I lend you the best hat 1 have, on con- 

que j'aie, a condition que vous me dition that you will return it to me 

le rendiez demain. to-morrow. 

EXERCISE 145. 

S'asse-oir, 3. ir. ref. to Fort, strong ; Rentr-er, 1. to come in 

sit down ; Litre, m. litre, about a again ; 
Compt-er, 1. to depend; quart. Sorte, f. kind; 

Cristal, m. crystal; Negotiant, m. merchant; Sum-re, 4. ir. to suffice; 

Debout, standing; Parasol, m. parasol; Tanneur, m. tanner; 

Dur-er, 1. to wear, last; Portier, m. porter; Tard-er, 1. to tarry. 

1. Pensez-vous que ce drap dure longtemps? 2. Je crois qu'il 
durera bien, car il est fort. 3. Croyez-vous que notre portier tarde 3, 
rentrer ? 4. Je crois qu'il ne tardera pas. 5. Desirez-vous que nous 
restions debout? 6. Je desire au contraire que vous vous as- 
seyiez. 7. Croyez-vous que ces etudiants puissent apprendre cinq 
pages par cceur, en deux heures ? 8. Je crois que c'est impossible. 
9. Esperez-vous que notre ami arrive de bonne heure ? 10. J'espere 



20G SOIXA^TE-QUATOKZIilME LEgON. 

qu'il arrivera bientot. 11. Quelle sorte de carafe vous faut-il ? 
12. H m'en faut une qui contienne un litre. 13. J'tn ai une do 
crista], qui contient deux litre?. 14. Pensez-vous que cc negotiant 
s'enrichisse a vos depens ? 15. Je sais qu'il s'enrichit aux depens 
d'autrui. 16. Quel parasol pensez-vous me preter ? 17. Je pense 
vou3 preter le meilleur que j'aie. IS. Le tanneur reussira-t-il a, 
gagner sa vie ? 19. Je ne crois pas qu'il y rfiussisse. 20. Pensez- 
vous que cet argent suffise a votre pure ? 21. Je erois qu'il lui 
suffira. 22. Croyez-vous que ces messieurs comptent sur moi? 
23. Je sais qu'ils comptent sur vous. 24. Pensez-vous que le concert 
ait lieu aujourd'hui ? 25. Je crois qu'il n'aura pas lieu. 

Exercise 140. 

1. Do you believe that the concert has taken place ? 2. I believe 
that it has ; you 1 elieve that your sister's dress 

■will wear well ? 4. I think that it will wear well, for the silk is very 
good. ■".. 1' re that our friend will succeed in earning a 

livelihood? G. I I «d in it (jf), for he is very dili- 

gent. 7. Do you think that the tanner grows rich at my expense? 

the expense of others. 9. Does 

cpense ? 10. lie grows 

rich a 11. What kind of a house must you have 

(vous faut-if) ? \1. I i which baa ten rooms. 

12. 1 rooms. 14. What kind 

of a d which holds three ' 

16. 1 baveonewl i . I will lend it to you. 17. What 

coat will yi IS. I will send you the best 1 have, take 

• tin it. 19. Do you think that the student will learn all 
that : 20. I do not think that be will learn it. 21. Do 

you b that he will 

soon. 23. Do you think that your father -i • 24. I 

i. 25. Does not thai gentleman de- 
pend upon i think that he depends upon your brother. 
27. Will the I hope that he will 

ad me your umbrella? 30. I 

will lend it to you with pleasure. 31. Does my brother remain 

standing? 32. Be does not \ lown. 33. Do you wish 

•mi? 34, I wish you to remain standing. 35. I wish 

that he may come. 



USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 207 

LEQON LXXV. LESSON LXXV. 

THE IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. The terminations of the imperfect of the subjunctive are, in all 
the verbs, regular and irregular, of the four conjugations, sse, sses, t, 
ssions, ssiez, ssent. 

2. The vowel preceding the t of the third person singular, always 
takes the circumflex accent. 

3. Conjugation of the Imperfect of the Subjunctive of the 

Eegular Yerbs. 

Que je chant -asse fin -isse rec -usse rend -isse 

That I might sing might finidb might receive might render 

Que tu pari -asses cher -isses aperc -usses vend -isses 

Ihat thou mightest speak mightest cherish mightest perceive mightest sell 

Qu'il donn -at fourn -it perc -ut tend -it 

That he might give might furnish might gather might tend 

Que nous cherch -assions pun -issions cone -ussions entend -ission3 

That we might seek might punish might conceive might Jiear 

Que vous port -assiez sals -issiez d -ussiez perd -issiez 

That you might carry might seise might owe might lose 

Qu'ils aim -assent un -issent dec -ussent mord -issent 

That they might love might unite might deceive might bite 

4. This tense may be formed from the past definite, [L. 51] by 
changing, for the first conjugation, the final i of the first person sin- 
gular of the past definite into sse, sses, etc., and adding se, ses, etc., to 
the same person in the other three conjugations. This rule has no 
exceptions. 

J'allai, fallasse ; je finis, jefinisse. I went, I might go ; I finished, I might 

finish. 

5. All the observations made Lesson 52, on the changes of the 
stem of the irregular verbs, in the past definite, apply equally to the 
imperfect of the subjunctive. 

6. The pluperfect of the subjunctive is formed from the imperfect 
of the same mode, of one of the auxiliaries avoir, ttre, and the past 
participle of the verb. 

Que j'eusse fini ; que je fusse venu. That 1 might have finished, that 1 
might have. come. 

7. All the rules given on the use of the subjunctive, in the three 
preceding lessons, apply, of course, to the imperfect and pluperfect of 
the mode. 

8. In the same manner as the present or future of the indicative 
of the first part of a proposition, governs under the above-mentioned 



208 



S OIX ANTE-QUIXZI E ME LE£ON. 



rules, the verb of the second part, in the present or past of the sub- 
junctive, so the imperfect and other past tenses of the indicative, 
and the two conditionals, govern the verb iu the second part of the 
proposition, in the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive. 

Ne fallait-il pas que je lui parlasse ? Was it not necessary that I should 

speak to him t 

donnasso co It would be necessary for me to give 

him that book. 



II faudrait que je lui 
livre. 



Rksime of Examples. 



Voudriez-vouS que jc donnasso uu 

coup de baton A cet enfant? 
Je vondrais que voua tirassiez un 

ooup de fusil but cet 
Rxigeriez-voua que nous rcvins- 
ure? 
Iriee-vous que ccs homines 

- Bt? 

11 fall: I: 

voua mourus- 
frokL 

mourus- 
l'aim. 

t so un 
coup n piers? 



Would you wish me to give that child 

a blow with a stick f 

you to fire your gun 

upon that bird. 
Would you require us to rctur 

What would you wish those men to 

What did you wish me to do t 

It would be necessary for me to have 

my 171 
/ did not wish you to die with the 

' ym might die with 
want 

■i me to cast a glance 
fen 9 



Bard, m. 

• '>ad; 

1 

1 

Coup d'ceU, in. 

Fooet, in. whip; 



Exebcise 147. 

unkard; 

. hare; 
tier, t. sea; 

. new; 
Perdrix, C partridge! 

: I', to re- 



bl-er, 1. to r 

:. 111. r 

Sant.', i\ health ; 
S«»rt-ir, 2. ir to go out; 

Tir-er, 1. to fire, 



un habit ;1 d 

tlait-on que c 
-. oulait qu'il Be rendlt a. bod 
5. Faudrait-il que je dei bord de la m 

faudrait, pour ' 

ensez-vous pas que cet enfant re 
! s. Je ne pense pas qu'il lui ressemble. i>. A qui n 
t-'.! '.' 10. 1 .11. Consentiri.;'-. 

votre fir. oe? 12. Voudriez-voua i 

do fruid. 11. No vuulcz-vuus pao tiror sur Of 



GOVERHMEN"T OF VERBS. 209 

lieVre ? 15. Je tirerais sur cette becasse, si mon fusil etaifc charge. 

16. Combien de coups de fusil voudriez-vous que je tirasse ? 17. Si 
Tous aviez de la poudre, je voudrais que vous tirassiez sur cette per- 
drix. 18. Voulez-vous que je jette un coup d'ceil sur cette lettre ? 

19. Je voudrais que vous la lussiez. 20. Que voudriez-vous que je 
fi.-se? 21. Je voudrais que vous fissiez attention si, vos etudes. 

22. Faudrait-il que je sortisse ? 23. II faudrait que vous restassiez a, la 
maison. 24. Que voudriez-vous que je fisse a ce cheval ? 25. Je 
voudrais que vous lui donnassiez des coups de fouet. 

Exercise 148. 
1. What would you have me do ? 2. I would have you cast a 
glance upon this letter. 3. Would you wish me to give that dog 
blows with a stick ? 4. I would wish you to give that horse blows 
with a whip. 5. Would you require us to return at five o'clock ? 
6. I would require you to return early. 7. Do you think that your 
brother resembles your father ? 8. I do not think he resembles my 
father. 9. Whom do you think that he resembles ? 10. I think he 
resembles my mother. 11. How many shots have you fired ? 12. 1 
have fired five shots at that woodcock. 13. Would you not have me 
fire at that partridge ? 14. 1 would have you fire at that partridge, if 
your gun was loaded. 15. Where would it be necessary for me to 
dwell ? 16. It would be necessary for you to dwell on the sea-shore. 

17. Would you have me die with hunger? 18. I would not have you 
die of hunger. 19. Would you have your brother die with cold? 

20. I would not have him die with cold or want. 21. What would 
you have your son do ? 22. I would have him learn his lessons. 

23. Would you have him learn German ? 24. I would have him learn 
German and Spanish. 25. Have you fired (sur) at that hare ? 26. I 
have not fired at that hare. 27. Would it be necessary for me to go 
out? 28. It would be necessary for you to go out. 29. Would it be 
necessary for me to remain here ? 30. It would be necessary for you 
to go to church. 31. What did you wish? 32. I wished you to 
write to me. 33. Did you wish me to buy a coat half worn out ? 
31. I wished you to buy a good hat. 



LECON LXXVL LESSON LXXVI. 

REGIMEN' OR GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. (§ 129.) 

1. Many verbs come together, in French, without prepositions, 
which are, in English, joined by them. Many others are connected, in 



210 



SOIXANTE-SEIZIE3IE LE^ON, 



French, by prepositions different from those connecting the corres- 
ponding verbs in English. Xo satisfactory general rules can be 
given on this point We have given, in the Second Part of this 
grammar, [§ 130, 131, 132] copious lists of the verbs in general use, 
with the prepositions which follow them, when they come before 
other verbs. We have also hitherto noted the prepositions usually 
placed after the verbs introduced in our lessons. 

2. The student will recollect, that a verb following another verb 
(not avoir or itre) or a preposition (not en) must be in the infinitive. 

3. The following verbs, extracted from the list, § 130, although 
they in English, take a preposition before another verb, do not take 
one in French. 

ASer, 1. ir. to go Falloir, 3. ir. to he nc- Savoir, 3. ir. to know 

<ntend cessary Souhaiter, 1. 

Oourir, 2. ir. to run Mener, 1. to ■'■ ir. to le 

I 

r, l. to think Venir, 2. ir. to come 

■•we iir, '.'. ir. to be (Me Vouloir, 3. ir. 

1. ir. to send Prdteadre, i . to nquire, to 

_ 



mi'. OF 

'US? 

pere. 
donner a man- 

. D '.' 
I 

■ 

r -i-il ''a liaut, ou fn 

- 

Nous preforons louor li 

. line cbambre 



Ex AMD IS. 

■ :h ns f 

td Hint itoj'l 

Do you wish t < go up to my 

yaw father* a. 

on the ground 
floor 1 
Twish to 

L-ry. 

■ 



COSH i l'.». 

En limit, tip stairs, Plaistr, I 
Oompt-er, l. to cipher; 
Domain, I 

. ■ , i . 

- Pinc-er, 1. I ' story ; 

Violo 

; rez-de-chaussee ct deux cabim 
3. Ne pivierez-vous pas louer one chambre & oouoher an 



GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 211 

4. Nous preferons demeurer au rez-de-chaussee. 5. Ne pouvez-vous 
rester a diner avec nous aujourd'hui ? G. Je vous remercie, je pre- 
fere venir demain. 7. M. votre pere viendra-t-il demain dejeuner 
avec nous ? 8. II compte venir demain de bonne heure. 9. Que 
voulez-vous leur dire ? 10. Je veux les prier de me faire ce plaisir. 
11. Comptez-vous faire ce plaisir a, mon frere ? 12. J'espere le lui 
faire. 13. Preferez-vous demeurer en haut, ou en bas ? 14. Nous 
preferons demeurer en bas. 15. Que pensez-vous faire de ce jeune 
faisan ? 16. Nous pensons l'envoyer a M. votre beau-frere. 17. Ne 
savez-vous pas jouer du violon? 18. Je sais en jouer. 19. M"e. 
votre cousine sait elle toucher le piano ? 20. Elle sait toucher le 
piano et pincer la harpe. 21. Ne savez-vous pas ecrire ? 22. Nous 
savons lire, ecrire, et compter. 23. Savez-vous jouer de la guitare ? 
24. Nous ne savons pas en jouer. 25. Nous souhaitons trouver un 
appartement au rez-de-chaussee. 

Exercise 150. 
1. Does your brother-in-law intend to rent the ground floor ? 
2. He intends to rent two rooms in tbe second story. 3. How 
many rooms does your son intend to take ? 4. He intends to take 
two rooms in the second story. 5. Does he prefer to live on the 
second floor ? 6. He prefers to live on the ground floor. 7. Does 
your father wish to come to dinner with us to-morrow ? 8. He in- 
tends to come to-morrow, at two o'clock. 9. Do you prefer to live 
up stairs, or down stairs? 10. I prefer to live above. 11. Does 
your sister know how to play on the piano ? 12. She knows how to 
play on the piano. 13. "Where do you intend to live (demeurer) ? 
14. We intend to live at your father's. 15. Will you go up to my 
room ? 16. I will go down to your father's. 17. Do you wish to 
live on the ground floor ? 18. I wish to live on the second floor. 
19. Is it necessary to stay here ? 20. It is not necessary to stay 
here. 21. What do you think of doing with (de) your book ? 22. I 
think of giving it to my son. 23. What do you wish me to say to 
that gentleman ? 24. I wish to beg him to do me a favor. 25. Do 
you wish to send that pheasant to your mother ? 26. I wish to send 
it to her, she is sick. 27. Cannot your sister play on the violin? 

28. She cannot play on the violin, but she can play on the guitar. 

29. Does your sister wish to live up stairs ? 30. She prefers living 
down stairs. 31. Will you not do me that favor? 32. I will do it 
with pleasure. 33. Cannot your brother stay and dine with us to- 
day ? 34. He has promised my father to come and dine with him. 
35. Our friend knows how to read, write, and cipher. 



21 2 



SOIXAXTE-DU-SEPTUJIE LEQON, 



LEgox LXXVII. 



LESSON LXXVII. 



GOVEENMEXT OF VERBS, CONTINUED. 

1. Many verbs, in French, are joined with other verbs following, 

by means of the preposition do. of where the corresponding verb*, 

in English, either take DO preposition, or one other than of. Besides 

. &a [L 21. B. 4.], the Mowing verbs extracted from 

; 

i ish Disp us Negliger, to neglect 

Prier, 
■ cease fiviter, to avoid Promettre, topromise 

Commander, com- " one's Proposer, to / 



muni 

■■, to a tviet 
. to forbid 

l>ire, :, 



self 
Jurer, to 
Manquer, t >/o*J 
Menacer, to 'threaten 



Supplier, to mireat 
Trembler, to tremble, 
be in yreat /ear 



:.'. OF l'-\ LBCPLEB. 



lish learning (Jiat 



•i n'aohevez-- 1 
prendre ee metier? * 

. from (ton?) to continue our rfu* 

IAS. 

n ne oeeae de noos tounnenter. rmenmgiu. 

lubiana D ■ tnggoodn that 

X pas do lui fairo uno Do not neglect paying him a runt. 

pay a vmt to 
. iii. 'ii ami ? my fn 

pile d'alKr tout-dn.it cheZ J bej you w,U go straight home. 



.! venlt par le 

ohem'iD 

lui fairo mes 
oomp 

1 1 iper ? 
j'ai refuse* de lui taire 

ot '.' 

after. 

. 



/ advise you to comt by the railroad. 

; 

■ himf 

it to me to trust kim 
with this money ? 

Kim with it. 
■ to reproach him with his 



■ i IB 151. 
Qard-< r, 1. i 

day ■ 

nd-re, 4. ref. to re- \ 
pair; :■■■/ traveling. 



Oubli-er, 1. to forget; 
Rond-ro, 

; 



GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 213 

1. Pourquoi ne cessez-vous pas de lire ? 2. J'aurais tort de cesser 
de lire, avant de savoir ma lecon. 3. Avez-vous defendu a vutre 
jardinier d'arroser ces fleurs ? 4. Au contraire, je lui avais com- 
mande de les arroser. 5. Pourquoi a-t-il neglige de le faire ? 6. Parce 
qu'il a oublie d'apporter l'arrosoir. 7. Que desire faire M. F. ? 8. II 
brule de continuer 1' etude de la medecine. 9. N'avez-vous pas 
tort de faire des visites a ce monsieur ? 10. J'aurais tort de le ne- 
ghger. 11. N'avez-vous pas refuse de rendre ce service a, votre en- 
nemi ? 12. J'aurais eu tort de refuser de le lui rendre. 13. Quelle 
voie nous avez-vous conseille de prendre ? 14. Je vous ai conseille 
de prendre le bateau a vapeur. 15. Avez-vous menace de frapper cet 
enfant? 16. Je l'ai menace de le corriger. 17. Avez-vous refuse 
de vendre des marchandises a, mon frere ? 18. J'ai refuse de lui en 
vandre a credit. 19. Avez-vous dit a mon fils de se rendre a la 
maison? 20. Je l'ai prie d'y aller tout-droit. 21. Vous proposez- 
vous de venir la veille de Noel ? 22. Nous nous proposons de venir 
le lendemain. 23. Yotre compagnon se propose-t-il de garder le 
secret ? 24. II se propose de faire part de cela a tout le monde. 

Exeecise 152. 

1. Have you forbidden my cousin to speak to the gardener ? 2. I 
have not forbidden him to speak to him. 3. Has your mother ordered 
the gardener to water her roses (roses) ? 4. She has ordered him to 
water them. 5. Has he forgotten to do it ? 6. He has neglected to 
do it; he has not forgotten it. 7. What conveyance will you take to 
go to Paris ? 8. I advise you to take the railroad. 9. Have you told 
(a) your son to take the steamboat ? 10. No, sir ; I have told him 
to take the stage (diligence, f.). 11. Is not your brother wrong to 
neglect paying a visit to his brother-in-law ? 12. He is wrong to 
neglect it. 13. Does not that young German long to read that 
letter ? 14. He longs to continue his stndies. 15. Do you propose to 
trust him with that money ? 16. 1 propose to trust him with it. 17. Do 
you neglect to reproach him with his faults ? 18. 1 avoid to reproach 
him with them. 19. Have you threatened to punish your son? 20. I 
have threatened to strike him. 21. Do not fail to present my com- 
pliments to my sister's friends. 22. I will not fail, (je riy manquerai 
pas). 23. Have you refused to sell him goods ? 24. I have refused 
to sell him goods on credit. 25. Which mode of travelling do you 
advise me to take ? 26. I advise you to take the railroad. 27. Do 
you forbid him to come ? 28. I have forbidden his writing. 29. Have 
you failed to pay your gardener? 30. I have not failed to pay 



214 SOIXANTE-DIX-HUITIEilE LECON. 

him. 31. I have forgotten to pay you. 32. Do not neglect to 'write 
to me. 33. Tell him to go to my father. 34. Do not cease to work. 
35. Tell him to come Christmas Eve. 36. I have told him to come 
the day after. 



LECOX LXXVIII. LESSON LXXVIII. 

GOVERNMENT OF VERBS, CONTINUED. 

1. Many French verbs reach their objeci by means of prepositions, 
while the corresponding English verbs govern their object directly, 
that is, without intervening prepositions. Other French verbs reach 
their objeci through prepositions different from those used in English. 
bere B few verbs coining under those two classes, commen- 
cing with the first. 

bs which have a preposition before b noun, in French, but 
ah. . 

Plaire a, to , 
S'approcuer d<; to op- Manquera, (<* qffmdfio Sesouvenirda, tu remem- 
ber 
M dire d< . n ir de, to tve 

ler a, to rcsvm- 

Douter do, to doubt Burvivra a, to wwiH 

fichapper a, /< escape 

::. \'. rbs reaching thi ir objeci through different prepositions in the 
two lanj 

B'affligerd for Retnercier de, to thank 

■'< by fa 
Penser a, to think of Rire do, to laugh at 
Qemird Rougir de, to ottu h at 

B'informer de, to inquire out l a, to think </ 

about 

R&SUlrfl OF EXAMPI 
X'avc7.-vnus pas abuse do notrc pa- ITave you not aimed our patience t 
ties 

We l ■ 
• i a vos parents. Y»u i 

- 

j of your 

U think of tht 
>,*«■ riec*vo is p ■- de dos erreura ? 
d riona point 

.iuble-t-il p:ia a son pC-re? JJocs ht not rt tem ik hie father. 



government of verbs. 215 

Exercise 153. 

Arrangement, m. ar- Coeur, m. heart; Ne — plus, no more; 

rangement ; Devoir, m. duty ; Nouvelle, f. news ; 

Circonstance, f. circum- Faute, f. fault; Parent, m. relation; 

stance ; S'informer, 1. ref. to in- Peintre, m. painter ; 

Conduite, f. conduct ; quire ; Prochain, m. neighbor ; 

Complaisance, f. kind- Malheur, m. mis/or- Sellier, m. saddler; 

ness ; tune; Succes, m. success. 

1. Cet arrangement vous convient-il ? 2. II ne me convient pas, 
mais il convient a notre parent. 3. Cela ne deplait-il pas au peintre ? 
4. Votre conduite lui depkit beaucoup. 5. Ne craignez-vous pas 
d' abuser de la patience de votre ami ? 6. Je crains d'en abuser. 
7. Ne pensez-vous jamais a, vos devoirs? 8. J'y pense tous les jours. 
9. Avez-vous pense a votre frere aujourd'hui ? 10. J'ai pense a lui, 
et je me suis souvenu de ses bontes. 11. A-t-il eu soin de son pere, 
et lui a-t-il obei ? 12. II lui obeit constamment. 13. Ne lui a-t-il 
jamais desobei? 14. II lui a desobei plusieurs fois, mais il genii t de 
sa faute. 15. Ne les remerciez-vous pas de leur complaisance ? 
16. Je les en remercie de tout mon coeur. 17. Le sellier vous a-t-il 
felicite de votre succes ? 18. II m'en a felicite. 19. N' avez-vous 
pas ri de notre malheur ? 20. Nous n'en avons pas ri 5 nous ne rions 
jamais des malheurs d'autrui. 21. Ne vous souvenez-vous pas des 
nouvelles que je vous ai apprises ? 22. Je ne m'en souviens plus. 
23. Votre pere ne vous a-t-il pas defendu de medire de votre pro- 
chain ? 24. II me l'a defendu. 25. Nous nous sommes informes de 
toutes les circonstances decette affaire. 

Exercise 154. 
1. Have you not abused your friend's kindness? 2. I have not 
abused his kindness, I have abused his patience. 3. Does not your 
conduct displease your parents? 4. My conduct does not please 
them. 5. Why have you not obeyed your father ? 6. I have obeyed 
him Qui). 7. Have you not laughed at my mistakes ? 8. I have 
not laughed at your mistakes. 9. Has the young man laughed at 
the painter's mistakes ? 10. He has not laughed at his mistakes. 
11. Has your saddler laughed at your cousin's misfortunes? 12. He 
has not laughed at his misfortunes. 13. Do you ever laugh at the 
misfortunes of others ? 14. We never laugh at our neighbor's mis- 
fortunes. 15. Do you remember the lesson which you learnt yes- 
terday ? 16. I do not remember it (en). 17. Does that young lady 
resemble her mother? 18. She does not resemble her mother. 
19. Have you thanked your friend for his kindness ? 20. I have 
thanked him for it. 21. Has your mother forbidden you to read 



2 1 G S O I X A X T E - D I X - X E U V I E M E LEJON. 

that book7 22. She has forbidden it (me To). 23. Why do you 
irgive your enemies ? 24. I forgive them with all my heart. 
25. Do you not think of your duties? 2G. I think of them (y) every 
27. J lave you congratulated your friend? 28. I have con- 
gratulated him on his - I. Have you not slandered those 
•men? 30. I never slander my neighbor. 31. Does that house 
- tits me, bnt it does not suit my father. 33. Does 
that house suit the painter? 34. It suits him very well, but it is 
iall for me. 35. My father has forbidden my speaking to that 
gentleman. i 



LEgON I.XXIX. LESSON LXX1X. 

j:i:..imi:v OB Aiui-. n\ B& (§ B7^ 

1. The regimen, or < of an adjective, is generally a 

ation. The regimen is usually 
we, by means of a preposition. 

different, in French, from that oon- 
vi ith its regimen 

■ i unipersonally, the 

i.jj. 

• ir It is necessary to labor in order to 
live. 

•1. i icted from 1 \ DO, 

itiona different in French and 

ireuz dc, in love Meoontcnt do, displeased I'roprv a, /' 

ilaBant de. pnrta 

I ■ ucdwith fid fur 

lent avec, insolent 
j for Ik (ii towards 

Inqul • trds PoM envera, polite to, or 

l\rc de, intoxicated with Ex.. towards. 

■ iP Ell IMP] 

• yi>u not pleased with you- 

•ntent J urn very m I !h it 

: cuact in fulfilling 
remplir aea del his duties t 



EEGIMEN OE ADJECTIVES. 217 

Avez-voua rempli de vin cette bou- Have you filled that bottle with ivine? 

teille ? 

Avez-vous rempli d'argent votre Rave you filled your purse with 

bourse ? money f 

Je Tea ai remplie. I have filled it with it. 

II est tres facile de blamer les ac- It is very easy to blame the actions of 

tions d'autrui. others. 

II est glorieux de mourir pour sa It is glorious to die for one's country. 

patrie. 

H est plus agreable de voyager en It is more agreeable to travel in sum- 

ete qu'en hiver. mer than in winter. 

Exercise 155. 

Abatt-re, 4. ir. to cut Bois a. bruler, m. fire- Nettoy-er, 1. to clean; 

down ; wood ; Peuple, m. people ■; 

Achat, m. purchase ; Chagrine, e, vexed ; Pommier, m. apple-tree ; 

Arrach-er, 1. to pull up; Encre, f. ink; Prunier, m. plum-tree; 

Aubergiste, m. innkeep- Fendre, to cleave, split ; Roi, m. king ; 

er ; G-loire, f. glory ; Sei-er, 1. to saw ; 

Bourse, f. purse ; Liberte, f. liberty ; Tonneau, m. cask. 

1. Ce heros n'etait-il pas amoureux de la liberte et de la gloire ? 
2. II en etait amoureux. 3. Ce roi n'etait-il pas cheri de son 
peuple ? 4. II en etait cheri. 5. Ces negotiants ne sont-ils pas 
contents de leur achat ? 6. lis n'en sont pas contents. 7. N'etes- 
vous pas chagrine de ne pouvoir nous accompagner ? 8. J'en suis 
desole. 9. Savez-vous de quoi 1' aubergiste a rempli ce tonneau? 
10. II l'a rempli de vin. 11. De quoi ferez-vous remplir cette bou- 
teille, quand vous l'aurez fait nettoyer ? 12. Elle est deja remplie 
d'encre. 13. N'etes-vous pas bien fache d'avoir fait abattre vos 
pommiers ? 14. J'en suis bien content, car ils n'etaient bons a rien. 
15. N'est-il pas necessaire de faire arracher ces pruniers? 16. II 
n'est pas necessaire de les faire arracher. 17. Est-il possible de 
fendre ce morceau de bois ? 18. II est possible de le fendre. 
19. Etes-vous exact §, nettoyer vos habits ? 20. J'y suis tres exact. 
21. De quoi avez-vous rempli votre bourse? 22. Je l'ai remplie 
d'argent. 23. Est-il necessaire de faire scier votre bois a" bruler ? 
24. H est necessaire de le faire scier. 25. W etes-vous pas reconnais- 
sant des services qu'on vous rend ? 26. J'en euis tres reconnaissant. 

Exercise 156. 
1. Are you not grieved with having lost your money ? 2. I am 
sorry that I have lost my purse. 3. "With what will you fall that 
bottle ? 4. I will have it filled with ink. 5. Is it not necessary to 
have our wood sawed ? 6. It is necessary to have our fire-wood 
eawed. 7. Your garden is too small, is it not necessary to have some 
10 



218 QUATKE-YINGTIKAIE LE£OX. 

plum-trees pulled out ? 8. It is necessary to have some plum-trees 

cut down. 9. Have you filled your friend's purse with silver? 10. I 

have filled it with gold. 11. Are all your buttles filled with wine ? 

12. They are all filled with ink. 13. Are you sorry to have filled 

your bottles with ink ? 14. I am glad to have filled them with ink, 

for I want ink. 15. Are you pleased with this book? 16. Iain 

1 with it. 17. Is that land good for any thing ? IS. It is good 

for nothing. 19. Is that lady beloved by her children f 

beloved by her friends, and by her children. 21. Are you grateful 

for those Services ? L"J. I am grateful for them. 23. Is it not pos- 

to split that piece of wood? 24. It is not possible to split it. 

25. Is it agreeable to travel in winter? 26. It is not .is agreeable to 

travel in winter as in summer. 27. It is easy to blame others. 

28. Is it not glorious to die for oik's country? 29. It is glorious to 

. . 1 to die for one's country. 30. Have you filled the inkstand? 

Ded it with ink. .".'_'. Would it not be De- 

. to pull up all those trees? 33. It would not be necessary to 

pull them all OP, tor my garden is very large. ',',[. Henry the Fourth 

- be-lovcd by his people. 



LB ON I. XXX. LESSON I. XXX. 

c,..vi:i:\mi:nt 01 PREPOSITIONS, BTC. (§ I 

1. Son follow them without 

the ai 

! V2. d.ij dentin, 
•' / eli./. ,;.' On aunt, touchin ; 

(1.)] 

'-'• ' ' • ; tlnir object 

'from ; 
a fleui force de, by dint of; & l'e*gard de, with n 

I'in-u de, without the i \ unknown t 

■ Ihr rate of; an decs <le. thi.i w 

l, 2.} 
3. Others take i— quai 

•l. 9 

. regimen in common, provided they govern in the tame man- 
ner or . 



G0YEEX1IE5TT OP PREPOSITIONS. 



219 



Nous aimons et nous louons 1103 We love and praise our children. 

eufants. 

Ce jardin est utile et agreable a, That garden is useful and agreeable 

notre pere. to our father. 

Au dedans ou au dehors du roy- Within or without the kingdom. 

aurne. 

5. "When, however, two or more verbs, adjectives or prepositions 
coming together in the same sentence, do not govern their regimen 
in the same manner, they cannot have a regimen in common. The 
regimen must be repeated, or replaced by a pronoun, or another turn 
must be given to the sentence. The following sentences could not, 
therefore, be translated literally into French. 

Tliat man is useful to and loved by his family — I write to and receive letters 
from my brothers — To be exposed to or sheltered from the rain. We must 
say: 
Cet homme est utile a sa famille, et Tliat man is useful to Ms family, and 

il en est aime. he is beloved by them. 

J'ecris des lettres a mon frere, et I write letters to my brother, and re- 

j'en recois de lui. ceive some from him. 

£tre expose a la pluie, ou en etre To be exposed to the rain, or to be 

a l'abri. sheltered from it. 

Utile and aime, icrire and recevoir, expose and a talri, take dif- 
ferent regimens. 

Resume op Examples. 

We arrived before the battle. 



Nous sommea arrives avant la ba- 

taille. 
Yous vous asseyez toujours devant 

moi. 
Les avez-vous places sur la table ? 
Je les ai places dessous. 
Je les ai mis sous la chaise ou des- 

sus. 
lis demeurent derriere notre maison. 
J'ai loue une chambre de derriere. 
Nous occupons le devant de la mai- 
son. 
Je les ai rencontres derriere votre 

jardin. 
Yous avez achete cette terre a, l'insu 

de votre pere. 
J'ai paye le jardinier a. raison de 

deux francs par jour. 



You always sit before me. 

Wave you placed them upon the table t 

J have placed them under. 

I have put them under the chair or 

upon it. 
They lived behind our house. 
I have rented a back room. 
We occupy the front of the house. 

I met them behind your garden. 

You have bought that estate without 
the knowledge of your father. 

J paid the gardener at the rate of two 
francs per day. 



Exercise 157. 

Dessous, under, under Hectolitre, m. hectolitre, 

it; 100 litres; 

Dessus, above, upon it ; Plat, m. dish ; 
Dehors, outside, without; S'enrich-ir, 2. to become Pomme de terre, £ po- 



Assiette, f. plate ; 
Cout-er, 1. to cost ; 

inside, within , 



Derriere, m. back; 
Devant, m. front, 



rich ; 
Hors, out; 



tato ; 
Sur, upon, about. 



220 QUA THE- VI N GTI OE LE?02f. 

1. X ! avcz-vous pas ferine la porte de devaut ? 2. Xous l'avons 
fermee, ruais nous n'avons pad ferine la porte de derriere. 3. Qui 
est arrive avant moi '? 4. Le monsieur qui est as^is devant la feneire. 
.'. demeure derriere VOtre niaisou? G. 11 n'y a poiut de maison 
derriere la ndtre. 7. Ne pensez-VOUS pas qu'a* force de travailler, il 
iiira? S. Je ne erois pas qu'il 3*il vend ses mer- 

chandises a si bun marehe. 9. Apprend-il la nmsique a l'insu de 
'. 10. II L'apprend a lent- insu. 11. Vous etes-vous 
SOeur? 12. Je me suis marie a son insu. 
1:;. Notre ami nVst pas dans la maison, il est dehors; 14. 11 nVst 
pas hora de la \.: lans, 15. Avez-vous de l'argent but 

vous? 16. Je n'ai pas d'argent sur moi. 17. Demeurez-vous sur le 
devant de la maison? is. Nous demeuroni sur le 
devant 19. La cuisiniere a-t-elle m - but la table, oa 

platS, laS ruilleivs, ct lis 

ronrchettes sur la table. 21. I pommes de 

? il. Je I raiaon de cinq franca !': 

IIS bit reparer le dedans ou le dehors do la mai- 
MO ? -1. J'ai fait reparer l'interieur et l'exterieur. 

En a dsh 168. 

1. Save y d bought that house without your father's knowledge? 
2. I .i without his know! 3. Have you forgotten 

front dour? -1. I have -hut thefronl door and the back 
door. ■">. 1 have brought all coy p1 two or th 

7. II.' oocupii 

s. Whom ! behind that bouse? !•. I met d 

behind the bou 1". I >• ■• thai g» utl man live behind your 1 

11. N behind our house. - no bouse ; 

l ;. Hare you a kn I . ? 1 1. 1 have no knife 

me. 15. Di a knife about you ? I';, [nevei 

a knife about me. 17. mr brother i him? 

18. lie Las no money about him. 1'.'. Will you put these j 
\ipon the table, or under it? 20. I will put them in the drawer 
-l. How much have you given for that wheat? 
.t it at th.' i. the hectolitre. 

'l house out of the city? 24. It is not out of the eity; it [a 
with ter placed I 

She has put tlie plates upon tin- table, 
L'7. Have you had your ■ i ? 28. I ' 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, CE. 221 

you? 30. I have bought it at the rate of five francs the metre. 
31. Did you marry without your father's knowledge ? 32. I mar- 
ried without his knowledge. 33. Have you sold my books without 
my knowledge ? 34. I sold them without your knowledge. 35. I 
sold them without my sister's knowledge. 



LECON LXXXI. LESSON LXXXI. 

THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, CE. (§ 108.) 

1. The pronoun ce answers to the English pronoun it, used before 
the verb to be, in such sentences as, it is I, it is thou, etc. The latter 
pronouns (I, thou, etc.) are rendered by moi, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, 
eux, m., elks, f. The verb remains in the singular, except when the 
pronoun following it is in the third person plural, in which case it 
may be put in the plural or in the singular [§ 116, (2.)]. If the pro- 
noun is followed by qui, the verb is better in the plural, and, if fol- 
lowed by que, in the singular. 

C'est moi, c'est lui, c'est elle. It is I, it is he, it is she. 

Ce sont elles qui parlent. It is they who speak. 

C'est elles que nous eherclions. It is they whom we seek. 

2. If the relative pronoun qui and another verb follow etre, this 
second verb must agree in number and person with the pronoun pre- 
ceding the relative. 

C'est vous qui avez fait cela. It is you who have done that. 

C'est nous qui avons dechire cette It is we who have torn that silk. 
soie. 

3. Ce also renders the English pronoun it, used absolutely, but not 
unipersonally before the verb to be [§ 108, (5.)]. 

Ce fut en Allemagne qu'il trouva It was in Germany that he found his 
son ami. friend. 

4. Celui qui, celle qui, ceux qui, m., celles qui, /, are equivalent to 
the English pronouns, he who, she who, they who — celui que, celle que, 
ceux que, celles que, render he whom, etc. 

Celui ou celle qui chante. He or she who sings. 

Resume op Examples. 

Est-ce vous qui nous avez averti de Is it you who have warned us of 

cela ? this ? 

C'est nous qui vous en avons averti. It is we wlio have warned you of it. 



222 Q U A T RE -VINGT-UN I E ME LEgON. 

Est-co vons, mosdames, que nous Is it you, ladies, whom we have met? 

avons n ocoi 

Ce n'e.-t pas dous, e'est eux quo /if is not we, it is they whom you have 

you- avez vus. seen. 

Ce n'est pae vous, co sont eux qui It is not yov, it is they who have done 
ont fait oela that. 

i Aiigletcrro que jo vous ai It is in England that I saw you, 
vu. 

>us ccs deux Tortu- Do you know those two Portuguese t 

I qui p:u-le a M. L. / know ?iim who speaks to Mr. L. 

Exercise 159. 

Appel-er, 1. to oaB; OonnaJ8Bance,Cao9t(atn<- De temps on temps, ^om 
A tool all ance; time to lime ; 

Expliqu-er,l. imero, No., number tof 

Av.rt-ir. l. (o irarn ; Guerre, l. 

Dejour en \ovx t from day Phrase, 

1 r, 1. to over- today; Prelud-cr, \.topi\lude. 

W.'a 

1. i; [ui avezappele* votredomestique? 2. Co 

• ce vous, mon ami, <iui voulea 

a ton) ( pas ni"i, e'eel moo 

lui qui d averti ce matelot de son danger? 

moi '|ui I'm ai averti. 7. Eisfc-ce nous que 

luren jour? 8. Co n'est pas vous, e'eel bus que 

. qui noua avec combie' 

I i ladame. 1 I 

avec lui ? 12. < '•■ n'e i | 
t-ce vous, mesdami tisinee, 

<[U.' D : a] '! 1 I. ( "■ 

15. N' deux 

li qui parte a Madame L 17. I 

qui nous avea explique* 
ieur, <|ui demeurea 
21. C moi qui y demeure. 22. Entendea-voua oe* must- 

lui qui chante. 24. Je a'enteodi jkis biou 
celui ijui jout.-. 2'j. Nona entendons ceux qui pruludenL 

K\i BClSE 100. 

1. I- it you, my friend, who have warned me of my 

;t they whom you 

from «!a_v t'i day ? 4. It is nut they whom we i 
it you who have douc this ? C. It il you who 



DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN, CE. 223 

done it. 7. Was it in England that you bought this hat ? 8. It was 
not in England ; it was in Germany. 9. Was it not in Russia that 
you became acquainted with him ? 10. It was not in Russia ; it was 
in Italy. 11. Was it you who were calling us ? 12. It was not we ; 
it was he. 13. Are you not acquainted with the two Poles who 
are reading? 14. I know the one who is near you. 15. Is that 
(est-ce la) the lady whom you expected ? 16. It is not (she). 17. Is 
it you, gentlemen, who have loaded my brother with kindness ? 

18. It is not (we), sir ; we have not the pleasure of knowing him. 

19. Is it you who have been wounded in the (au) arm ? 20. It is 
not (I).V 21. Do you not hear those two ladies ? 22. I do not hear 
the one who sings. 23. I hear the one who plays. 24. Was it you 
who came to our house this morning ? 25. It was not I ; I was in 
London then (ahrs). 26. Was it you, sir, who did us that favor? 
27. It was not (I) ; it was my sister. 28. Was it your son who 
wished by all means to go to London ? 29. It was not he ; he is 
now in Germany. 30. Is it you who wrote that letter ? 31. We 
have written no letter. 32. Who lives at (au) No. 20 ? 33. I live 
there (c'est moi). 34. Is it we whom you have seen ? 35. It was 
not you whom I saw. 



LEQON LXXXII. LESSON LXXXII. 

CE, — IDIOMATIC USE OP QUE. 

1. The pronoun ce (and not the pronouns il, elle, etc.), must be 
used for he, she, they, coming before the verb to be, when that verb is 
followed by a noun, or an adjective used substantively, preceded by 
the, a or an, by some or any understood, or by a possessive or demon- 
strative adjective. When the word used in apposition with ce is plural, 
and in the third person, the verb is put in the plural, although ce re- 
mains unchanged [§ 108, (2.) (3.)]. 

C'est un Polonais. He is a Pole. 

Ce sont des Anglais. They are Englishmen. 

C'est cette dame qui m'a parle de It is that lady who spoke to me of 
vous. you. 

2. Ce is used as the nominative of the verb tire, in sentences like 
the following, and the conjunction que is used idiomatically after it. 
The verb in this case is not put in the plural. 

Qu'est-ce que ces enfants ? What are those children ? 

Qu'est-ce que Htalie ? What is Italy ? 

Qu'est-ce que le jardinage ? What is gardening t 



224 QUATEE-VIXGT-DEUXIKilE L E C O N . 

3. Que is used idiomatically in a number of sentences. In the 
fullowing it gives greater force to the expression. 

Ce sont do bons livres que les vutres ? Yours are indeed good books. 
Jo dis quo oui; je crois que non. I say yes ; J believe not. 

lli'.-i'Mi': op Examples. 

I messieurs qui parlent Who are the gentlemen who speak to 
a M. I..? Mr. L.I 

\ cousins, qui vicnneut They are my cousins, tvho have just 
dan 

hands? (' 

la riaaaeni They are Poles, they 
d'arri 

II ae -•:.'. paa i Lonais, ils sont Th-y arc not Poles, (hey are Jius- 

Polonaia, ce aont T. -j are Rut* 

qu ■ la Toaraine ? 

< ni a .:•• 1. 1 Praam 

your irindvw look on the 
was la rue? 

K\u:. i-;-: 161. 
i Soieriee, £ p, 

; ir; 
I 

r- Surpreod-ra, 1. ir. to 

1. I 

. mon- 
sieur : -■ .">. N'.- -..nt-. •■ p. ■ :. 

I VIM ? 

In. < '.■ n'. -t paa lui, 

12. O 

t freres. 1 

I 7 '. 
. 

I 

lui, monsieur; c'cst sur lc jardin qu'ell< 



AGEEEMENT OF VERB WITH SUBJECT. 225 

pas notre charron qui a fait cette roue ? 24. Ce n'est pas lui qui l'a 
faite. 25. Ce sont nos amis qui l'ont brisee, et c'est le menuisier qui 
l'a faite. 

Exercise 162. 

1. Is that lady your friend's sister ? 2. No, sir; she is a stranger. 

3. Who are the two gentlemen who are speaking to your sister ? 

4. They are Swiss gentlemen, i 5. Are those the gentlemen whom 
you have invited ? C. It is they (eux). 7. Do you not know that 
man? 8. I know him very well; he is the man who has stolen my 
wine. 9. What is Italy? 10. It is the garden of Europe. Til. Is 
not that the letter which you intended to carry to the post-office ? 
12. No, sir ; it is another. 13. Is the city of Havre fine ? 14. Tes, 
sir; Havre is truly a large and beautiful city. 15. Is not that the 
man whom you have caught stealing your fruit ? 16. It is not, it is 
another. 17. Is not this the cap that you have bought ? 18. Tes, 
sir ; I believe so. 19. Do not the windows of your room look on 
the street? 20. No, madam; they look on the garden. 21. Do not 
the windows of your dining-room look on the yard (cour) ? 22. No, 
sir ; they look on the lake (lac). 23. Is it that little child who has 
taken your preserves ? 24. It is his brother or his sister. 25. What 
are those engravings ? 26. They are engravings which I bought 
in Germany. 27. Are these gentlemen Scotch? 28. They are not 
Scotch ; they are Italian. 29. Are those ladies Scotch ? 30. No ; 
they are the Italian ladies who came yesterday. 31. "What is Mar- 
seille ? 32. It is one of the finest cities in (de) France. 33. Is it 
not your tailor who made that coat ? 34. It is not he, it is an Eng- 
lish tailor who made it. 35. It is your friend who broke my watch. 



LEgON LXXXIH. LESSON LXXXEI. 

AGEEEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 

1. In French, as in other languages, when a verb has two subjects 
in the singular, it is generally put in the plural [§ 114, (2.)]. 

L'oncle et la tante sont arrives. The uncle and aunt have arrived. 

2. When a verb has two or more subjects of different persons, it 
is put in the plural, and assumes the termination of the first perse? 
rather than that of the second or third, and the termination of the 



22G QUATEE-YINGT-TEOISIEilE LEgOlT. 

second in preference to that of the third. A pronoun recapitulating 1 

the others, is placed immediately before the verb. 

Tous et moi nous irons demain a la You and I will go hunting to-morrow. 



Yous et lui vous irez demain a l'ecole. You and he will go to school to-morrow. 
Sa rn> re et moi nous avons ecrit II is mother and I have written that 
oette lettre. letter. 

3. The above examples will show, that, when a verb has several 
subjects, all of them pronouns, or partly pronouns and partly nouns, 
irords moi, tui, lui, euXj are used instead ofje, ta, il, Us [§ 
LI.)] 
•i. Fur further rules on this Subject, see § 114 and 115, and also the 
BOO. 

6. I ponds in signification to the English to trou 

the way, and to hurt (in apeakmg of 

shoes ami </■■■ run. ( .r trouble one's self. 

Am I in your wag t 

I,' 31 mi': OF El vmi 
Ou in '■ •' y>u go, your brother and 

mo^noaa ir. •• oULgo to F.ngland. 

Iw/ u/ual. 

■i, noUS DOU H TJtey and I have hurt nr heads. 

mal a 

ipi yourselves 

! wdl without doubt incom- 

..'.'. It be in your 
de roua gener. 

me k" '"•-' Jamais chez mes / <n'nt with my 

ids. 

: mettcz-vous a Be under no constr ai nt; place your' 
■ildy. 
r les au- We do not like to incommode others. 

Nuus u'aimons pas i nous g'li' r. We do not like to incommode our- 

Enon tsa 168. 

A porto, at a loss; no means; So pr'tor. 1. rcf. to ad.>p> 

A profit) with a profit : 

arm; r. 1. to persist; So ;•<«"!/, *>- 

,-Tooa "if-ux. 

1 T' sometimes omitted by tho b 

Example, g 83, (10.) 



AGREEMENT OP VERB WITH SUBJECT. 227 

1. Si nous restions plus longtemps ici, nous craindrions de vous 
gener. 2. Vous ne nous genez nullement ; votre societe nous est 
tres agreable. 3. N'avez-vous pas ete trop prodigues, vous et votre 
frere ? 4. Lui et moi au contraire, nous avons ete tres economes. 
5. N'avez-vous pas tort de gener ce monsieur ? 6. Nous n'avons 
nullement envie de le gener. 7. Est-ce que mon bras vous gene, 
monsieur ? 8. Non, monsieur ; nous avons assez de place, vous ne 
me genez pas. 9. Ne devriez-vous pas vous preter aux circonstances ? 

10. Nous faisons, elle et moi, notre possible pour nous y preter. 

11. Ce jeune homme persiste-t-il dans sa resolution ? 12. Nous y 
persistans, lui et moi. 13. Persistez-vous tous deux a rester ici ? 

14. Nous y persistans tous deux. 15. Cet homme est-il gene dans 
ses affaires {uncomfortably situated, badly off) ? 16. II etait gene 
dans ses affaires, il y a un an. 17. Ne vous genez pas, monsieur. 
18. Je ne me gene jamais, monsieur. 19. Est-ce-que mon frere vous 
derange? 20. Nou, monsieur ? il ne me derange pas. 21. Je ne 
voudrais pas vous deranger. 22. Pardon, si je vous derange. 23. "Vous 
et votre associe vous avez vendu vos marchandises a perte. 24. Vous 
•et moi nous vendons toujours a profit. 25. Votre pere, votre frere, 
et moi nous avons achete des marchandises. 

Exercise 164. 
1 . Do we incommode you, my brother and I ? 2. No, sir ; you 
do not incommode us ; we are very glad to see you. 3. Are you not 
afraid to disturb your friend ? 4. We are afraid to disturb him, he 
has much to do. 5. Is my foot in your way, sir ? 6. No, sir ; your 
foot is not in my way. 7. Will you and your brother go to Ger- 
many this year ? 8. We intend to go there, he and I. 9. He, you 
and I should write our lessons. 10. Should you not, you and your 
friends, adapt yourselves to circumstances? 11.. We should do so, 
if it were possible. 12. Do I not disturb you, sir ? 13. Vou do not 
disturb me by any means. 14. Does not my little boy disturb you ? 

15. He does not disturb me. 16. He disturbs nobody. 17. Does 
not your partner sell his goods at a loss ? 18. He never sells at a 
loss. 19. He and I always sell at a profit. 20. Do you persist in 
your resolution ? 21. Your friend and I persist in our resolution. 
22. I never feel under constraint at your house. 23. Be under no 
constraint (make yourself at home). 24. Are you not wrong to in- 
commode them ? 25. I do not intend to incommode them. 26. "We 
do not like to incommode ourselves (to put ourselves out of the way). 
27. My little boy and I will, perhaps, be in your way. 28. No, sir j 



228 ^L'AXKil-Vl.N'GX-yrAXKlijIE LKl'OX. 

we are very glad of your company. 29. Do I disturb you ? 30. Xo, 
sir; you do not disturb us. 31. Do I disturb your father? 33. Xo, 
. disturb no one. 33. Excuse me. sir, if I disturb you. 
31. Have you not been very lavish? 33. Xo, sir; I assure you 
that your son and I have been very economical 



LEO >\ LXXXIV. LESSON LXXXIV. 

A.GBKEHKXT OP THE vi:i;i; WITH [T8 SUBJJB l", CO J t TUt O JtD . 

1. When a verb i* preceded by several nouns n< 

■ the nouns are in some way 
; dwells more i rcibly upon the la.-t. 

: ia chil- 

I Ut le t/; . ^Jy 

. oua Tour fri>-!„h, your ratal 

mited by the i •/, tho 

v vfl wn'fe to your 

■•■ (not 
pluraL 

' I rtfc 

- . 

■ 

: the pluraL 

y niTun ni f- 
I 'rni the act. 

Nl fun ni I'm 

. 

. .cut. 



agreement of tjeeb with subject. 229 

Resume of Examples. 

Ni l'un ni l'autre n'qnt trouve le vin Neither the one nor the other found 

bon. v the wine good. 

L'un et l'autre ont trouve le diner Both found the dinner lad. 

mauvais. 

Comment se trouvent messieurs vos How do your "brothers find themselves ? 

freres ? 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne se trouvent bien. Neither find themselves well. 

L'un et l'autre se trouverent au ren- They both found themselves at the ren- 



dezvous. 

Ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera elu presi- Neither will be elected president. 

dent. 

L'un ou l'autre y trouvera a, redire. One or the other will find fault with it. 

Lui ou vous vous avez trouve quelque He or you have found something to 

chose a redire a, notre conduite. blame in our conduct. 

Ni lui ni moi nous n'avons trouve a Neither he nor 1 have found any fault 

redire a la conduite de vos enfants. with your children's conduct. 

Exercise 165. 

Auteur, m. author; Plutot, rather; Se trouv-er, 1. ref. to find 

Devoir, m. duty ; Rempl-ir, 2. to fulfil; one's self; to be pres- 

Ecriture, f. writing. "Rati, m. roast meat ; ent. 

Eli-re, 4. ir. to elect; Secretaire, m. secretary ; Yeiller, 1. to watch; 

Expos-er, 1. to expose; Trouv-er, 1. to find, to Vie, f. life. 
Interet, m. interest ; like, to fancy ; 

1. Eemplissez-vous bien votre devoir ? 2. Nous ne le remplissons 
ni l'un ni l'autre. 3. Cherchent-ils l'un et l'autre a s'exposer? 4. Ni 
l'un ni l'autre ne cherchent a exposer leur vie (La Brityere). 5. M. 
votre pere et M me - votre mere, se trouvent-ils mieux aujourcl'hui ? 
6. Ni l'un ni l'autre ne se trouvent mieux. 7. Avez-vous trouve a 
redire a mon ecriture ou a celle de mon secretaire ? 8. <Te n'ai trouve 
a redire ni a l'une ni a l'autre. 9. Cet auteur ne trouve-t-il pas a 
redire a tout? 10. II trouve a redire a, tous les livres. 11. T 
trouvez-vous quelque chose a redire? 12. Ni lui ni moi nous n'y 
trouvons rien a redire. 13. Lui ou moi, nous veillerons a vos 
interets. 14. Ni lui ni moi nous ne cesserons de veiller a la con- 
duite de votre fils. 15. Nous y veillerons plutot que d'y trouver a, 
redire. 16. Lui et moi nous nous trouvames ensemble au rendez- 
vous. 17. Yous y trouverez-vous l'un ou l'autre ? 18. Nous nous 
y trouverons l'un ou l'autre. 19. L'un ou l'autre sera-t-il elu presi- 
dent? 20. Ni l'un ni l'autre ne sera elu. 21. Comment trouvez- 
vous ce roti ? 22. Je le trouve excellent. 23. Je trouve ce livre 
bon. 24. Je ne le trouve pas bon. 25. Je trouve cela bien fait. 

Exercise 166. 

1. How do you like that book? 2. Neither my sister nor I like 
it. 3. Did your brothers find the dinner good ? 4. Both found it 



230 QUATRE-YINGT-CINQUIKME LE^OS. 

very good. 5. Did the professor find fault with your conduct ? 
C. He did not find fault with it. 7. Neither be nor my father fiud 
fault with my conduct 8. Do they both watch over your 
duct? 9. They both watch over my conduct, and over my int 
10, Have you both fulfilled your duty? 11. Wo have fulfilled it. 
12. Have you not both criticised my writing? 13. Neither haeori ti- 
lt 11. Do not yo:: find themselves better to-day 7 
15. One finds herself better. 1G. The other does not hod herself so 
welL 17. Do not i find fault with ■ '.- 18. They 
find fault v. 19. Will cither be elected prefect of the 
Department? *J". Neither will 1>,' elected. 21. How do you like 
I find it very good. 23. Did your two friends 
arrive in tim inted place? '2b Neith in (A) 
time. 25. Do you find fault with that (eeZa)? 26. I do not find 
fault with it (//). 27. Wfll you both to this dan- 
bo it 2!>. l\< you find 
id ? 30. I do nol find fault with it. 

31. Do yon find fault with his writing? 32. I find fault witli it. for 

it is very bad. :;:' rmy interests? 84. My 

.;"». We will not cease to watch 



LEI I >N I. XX XV. LESSON I.X.WV. 

a<.ki:i:mi.m OV iii i : vi:i:r. with Tin: si . 1 1 n i i;i>. 

LA verb, ha 

| . 1 1 )J. 

- ■ * est grandc. 77j< crowd of the poor is p 

of the noun following the collective, unless attention b« par- 
ticularly the collective 5, (2)} 

- s recoivent A crowd of poor people receive assist- 
ance. 

3. The on nombrS, a numhrr, &'•., find the 

of quantity, /»". oaass, hat, moms, ■ 

Ism 

personally in the 

rttte is often used in the same niauner 
English word bfl. 



AGREEMENT OF VERB "WITH SUBJECT. 231 

II me reste deux francs. / have two francs left — or literally 

There remains to me two francs. 
Nous avons cinquante ecus de reste. We have fifty crowns left. 

5. Devenir (2. ir.) to become, with ctre as an auxiliary, corresponds 
in signification to the English to become, followed by of. It is also 
Englished by to become, or simply to turn. 

Qu'est devenu votre frere ? What has become of your brother ? 

II est en France, et est devenu He is in France and has turned law- 
avocat. yer. 

Resume op Examples. 

La plupart de mes heures sont con- Most of my hours are devoted to labor. 
au travail. 



La foule des humains est vouee au The mass of mankind is devoted to 

malheur. misfortune. 

La plus grande partie des voyageurs The greatest number of travellers say 

le disent, et le repetent. it, and repeat it. 

Ne vous reste-t-il que cela ? Have you only that left ? 

Voila tout ce qu'il me reste. That is all that I have left. 

Je ne sais ce qu'ils sont devenus. I do not know what has become of 

them. 

Je ne sais ce que vous deviendrez. I do not know what will become of you. 

Exercise 167. 

S'appliqu-er, 1. ref. to Chemin, m. way, road; Habile, skilful; 

apply ; Desol-er, 1. to desolate; Maigre, thin, lean; 

Apprenti, m. apprentice ; Fjgar-er, 1. to mislay ; Naissance, f. birth; 
Aveugle, blind; Bmplettes, £ p. purcha- Parent, m. relation; 

Bagatelle, f. trifle; ses ; Eue, f. street; 

Boiteux, se, lame; Ictat, m. trade; Savant, e, learned. 

1. La plupart de vos parents ne sont-ils pas venus vous voir ? 
2. Beaucoup sont venus. 3. Que sont devenus les autres ? 4. Je ne 
saurais vous dire ce qu'ils sont devenus. 5. Que deviendra ce jeune 
homme, s'il ne s'applique pas a 1' etude ? 6. Je ne sais pas ce qu'il 
deviendra. 7. Je sais qu'il ne deviendra jamais savant. 8. Combien 
de francs avez-vous de reste ? 9. II ne me reste qu'un franc. 

10. Combien vous restera-t-il, quand vous aurez fait vos emplettes ? 

11. H ne me restera qu'une bagatelle. 12. Cet apprenti est-il devenu 
habile dans son etat ? 13. II y est devenu habile. 14. Ce monsieur 
est-il aveugle de naissance, ou l'est-il devenu ? 15. II l'est devenu. 
16. Savez-vous ce que sont devenus ces jeunes gens? 17. Us sont 
devenus medecins. 18. Ne savez-vous pas ce que sont devenus mes 
livres ? 19. Us sont egares. 20. Ne deviendrez-vous pas boiteux, si 
vous marchez tant ? 21. Je deviendrai boiteux et maigre. 22. La 
foule ne s'est-elle pas egaree dans ce bois ? 23. La foule s'y est 



232 Q V AT H E- VI SGT -SIX I EM E Ili^ON. 

eVarce, ct n'a pu rctrouver son chemin. 24. Une nuee de barbares 
desoletant le pays. (Acad.) 25. Unc foule de citqyena ruines, 
remplissaient les rues de Stockholm. (Voltaire.) 

ExEBOSB 1G8. 
1. Have not most of your friends become rich? 2. Most of them 
have become poor. 3. Has not that young lady become learned? 
■1. I think that she wiD never become learned. 5. Is not the Ameri- 
mall? G. Tiie American army is small, but 
of the American Boldieraare very brave (©no 7. Oan yon 

tellmewhal tleman? B. I cannot tell you 

what of him. 9. Is y>nr brother blind by birth 

your brother born blind) ? 10. No, sir; he has become 80. 11. \ 
you born lame? 12. No, sir; I became bo three yean i 

to play I ■. m .i? 

1 1. N . ly. 15. Bow much of your 

16. 1 have only twenty-five francs left* 

17. Do yon know i have only a trifle 

ich shall yon have left to-morrow ? 20. I shall 

21.] only have two francs h-ft, when 

-. 22. What has becoinr of yOUT gram- 

: ' i you know what has 1 ■ 

p n the table. 26. Will 

not that gentleman become blind? 27. lb- will not become blind, 

Bkflful in his trade? 28. He 
• has become of him ? 81. He 
32. Did the crowd lose its way ? 
i oknd of lo 

(8auterelU.<) deflated uur country. 



LEgoN I.XXXYJ. lesson i.xxxvr. 

BXPB1 i PIOH OF 'i in: a;:i tCLE, ;\ i: aimij tivi:. 

I the possessive adjectives, 
which they 

f to abandon^ 



RE PETIT I ON . O F AETICL! 



233 



Vous avez quitte vos parents et vos You have left your relations and 

amis. friends. 

Nous avons quitte nos etudes. We have discontinued our studies. 

4. Laisser, to leave, to let, is generally said of things. It is, how- 
ever, said of persons in the sense of to suffer to remain. 

Yous avez laisse votre livre sur la You left your book upon the table. 
table. 

The examples below will illustrate the use of those two verbs. 

Resume of Examples. 

N'avez-vous pas quitte votre mai- Have you not left your house f 

son? 

J'ai quitte mon pays et mes parents, i" have left my country and relations. 

J'ai laisse ma bibliotheque en Eu- I left my library in Europe. 

rope. 

Ne voulez-vous pas laisser votre fils Will you not leave your son here 1 

ici? 

Je n'aime pas a, le quitter. J do not like to quit him. 

J'ai laisse votre lettre a, son domes- I left your letter with his servant. 

tique. 

Mon pere m'a laisse cinquante mille My father left me fifty thousand 

francs. francs. 

Les avez- vous laisses tranquilles ? Have you let them alone ? 

Je leur ai laisse le champ libre. / have left them a free choice {free 

room). 

Ce malade a quitte le lit. Tliat sick man has left his bed. 

Votre frere a quitte le barreau. Your brother has left the bar. 

Je vous laisserai ce cliapeau & ce I will let you have that hat at that 

prix. price. 



Exercise 169. 



A bon compte, cheap; Mauvais, e, bad; 

Carte, f. card; Moins, less ; 

Epee, f. sword, army Noyau, m. fruit-stone ; 

(figuratively). Pourquoi, why ; 

Habitude, f. habit; Pavie, m. clingston 

Jugc, m. judge; peach; 



Pension, f. boarding- 
school ; 
Portier, m. porter ; 
Prix, m. price; 
Eobe, f. gown; 
Service, m. service, army. 



1. Vos oncles, vos cousins, et vos neveux, ont-ils quitte le com- 
merce ? 2. lis ont quitte le commerce, et sont devenus medecins. 
3. Le capitaine G. n'a-t-il pas quitte le service ? 4. II a quitte la Trance, 
xnais il n'a pas quitte le service. 5. Ou avez-vous laisse votre fils ? 
6. Je l'ai laisse dans une pension. 7. Est-il trop jeune pour quitter 
ses etudes ? 8. II est trop jeune, il n'a que douze ans. 9. A qui 
avez-vous laisse votre carte de visite? 10. Je l'ai laissee chez le 
portier. 11. Pourquoi ne le laissez-vous pas parler ? 12. Parce qu'il 
est temps que nous vous quittions. 13. Me permettez-vous de lui 



!34 



QUATEE-TINGT-SErTIEMi; LKOOS. 



communiquer cela ? 14. Je vous laisse le champ libre ft cot egard. 
15. Cejeune homme n'a-t-il pas quitte" ses mauvaisea habitudes? 
1G. II lea a quitte'es. 17. M. L. n'a-t-il pas quitte la robe pour I'ep&J ? 
18. Oui, monsieur; il n'est plusjuge, il est capitaino. 19. Ces p&hes 
quittent-clles faeilement le noyau ? 20. Xon, monsieur ; ce BOnt dea 
pavies. 21. Je vous laisse cet habit pour cinquanto franca 22. A 
quel prix me le laisserez-vous ? 23. Jo vous le laisserai pour dix 
franca. 24. Je vous le laisse a, bon eomjite, je ne saurais vous le 
laisscr u inoins. 

Kxi:i:< -isic 170. 
1. The son, daughter, and cousin, have loft Paris. 2. My father 
mother, and sister, have loft me here. 3. Do you like to leai 
country ? I. I do not like to leave my friends and country. 5. My 
parents do not like to leave me her,-, I am too young. 0. Why 
does not your brother lei his Bon speak [L :>7, 4.]? 7. Because he 
liaa »'■ 8. Have you lei him alone? 9. 1 have let him 

alone, 10. Why do you ad let me alone? 11. I will lei them alone. 
12. Has your friend left his bed? 13. He has not yet left his bed, 
■ 1 1. II..- CaptainG. left the army ? 16. B 
:': the army. 1''.. Has QOl that gentleman left the army fo 

not left the army. 1 -. My friend has left the bar. 

18. Li what price will you let me have this silk? 20. I will let you 
• at two Branca a yard. 21. Can you not l<-t me have it for 

-'-'• ' l > 700 havi . ;. Will you let me have that honk for 

francs? 24 I \\;1 l.-t you have it for twenty-two. 25. I 
boI !•< you I & With whom (,i qui) have you 

W my l k? L'7. I lefl it with your Why did you not 

it with my servant? 29. Because he had left your house. 
30. Do you like to have your friends? 31. I do not I 
tbem, have you left your book? :;:',. I lefl it at my 

father's. :;i. Has that m nupcommeroe? (hamm 

::.".. He has not ojfeen it up. 36. Those peaches do not part 1 
from the stone, they are cliiiL.'st. 



in ON I.XX.Wll. LESSON I.XX.wir. 

BXPEXITIOH OF \-.>miv\ti\ 1: FBONOl S 
1. The nominative pronouns je, /-/. . ih } cJle.^ 

repeated, when the first verb of the 
and the Beoond affirmative, when the verba uro indifferen 



EEPETITION OF NOMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 235 

and when the different propositions are connected by conjunctions 
other than et, ou, ni, mais [§ 99. 2.] 

II ne lit pas ; il ecrit. He does not read ; Tie writes. 

Elle neviendra pas; elle est partie. She will not come; she is gone. 

2. The pronouns of the third person are often omitted before the 
second verb in cases not coming within the above rule. The other 
nominative pronouns are also, sometimes, omitted. We should not, 
however, advise the student to omit the latter pronouns. It is al- 
ways correct to repeat the nominative pronouns. 

3. The student will bear in mind, that the objective pronouns must 
always be repeated. 

4. Connaitre a, answers to the English expression, to Icnow by. 

Je le connais a sa demarche. I know him by his walk (carriage). 

5. Connaitre de nom, de visage, de vue, mean to know by name, by 
sight. 

6. Se connaitre a qnelque chose, or en quelque chose, corresponds 
in signification to the English expression, to be a judge of something, 

Vous vous connaissez en pierreries. You are a judge of precious stones. 

Resume of Examples. 

Je le connais, je l'aime, et je lui J know him, love him, and do justice 

rends justice. Gresset. to him. 

II s'ecoute, il se plait, il s'adonise, il He listens to himself, is phased with 
s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. himself, adorns himself, loves him- 

self. 
A quoi connaissez-vous ce mon- By what do you know that gentle- 

sieur ? man ? 

Je le connais a, son habit noir. I know him by his black coat. 

Je le connais de vue. I know him by sight. 

J'ai reconnu ma mere a la voix. 1 recognized my mother by her voice. 

A quoi vous connaissez-vous ? Of what are you a judge ? 

Je me connais en marchandises. lam a judge of goods. 

Je ne m'y connais pas. lam not a judge of it (of them). 

II ne s'y connait point du tout. He is not at all a judge of it (of 

them). 
II s'y connait mieux que moi. He is a better judge of it (of them), 

than I. 
Je m'y connais aussi bien que lui. 1 am as good a judge of it (of them), 
as lie. 

Exercise 171. 

Artisan, m. mechanic ; £toffe, f. fabric, cloth of Gracieux, se, graceful; 

Blond, e, light ; different kinds ; Grain, m. grain ; 

Boucle, e, curled; Fabricant, m. manufac- Orfevre, m. goldsmith; 

Chevelure, f. head of turer; CEuvre, f. work ; 

hair ; Forgeron, m. blacksmith; Poesie, f. poetry ; 

Cheveux, m. p. hair; Gestes, m. p. gestures; .Tout, quite. 



236 QUATKE-TIXGT-SEPlliilE LECON. 

1. Ne reconnaissez-vous point votre amie ? 2. Je la reeonnais a, 

sa cbevelure blonde. 3. A quoi reconnaissez-vous cette demoiselle ? 

4. Je la reconnais a sa demarche gracieuse. 5. N'auriez-vous point 

connu votre ami a, la voix ? G. Je l'y aurais reconnu. 7. A lVeuvre 

on connait 1'artisan (La Fontaixu. 8. Ne le reconnaitrez-vous point 

:>. Je L'y reconnaftrai. 10. Cet orfevre ne se con- 

nait-il point a cel.i? 11. II ne s'y connait point du tout 12. Vous 

y connaisscz-vous aussi bien que leforgeron? 13. Je m'y connais 

tout au.--.--i bien <[ue luL 1-1. Ne voua connaisses-vous point en 

m'y connaia gudre. 10. Le tabricant se oonnaft- 

il aussi bien en fitoffes qu'en grain? 17. II se connait beaucoup 

mieux a celles-la qu'a celui-ci 18. N -voua pas <■'• mon- 

iments? li>. .!•• 1.- connais a sea cheveux 

'-. 20. X' 1 70U8 dtes-voua pas fah connattre (toW yovrname) ? 

2L J'- me Buis fait connattre. 'J"_'. Ne nous ferona-nous pa& 

nalto 24. II Se l'erout coimaitre 

par leurs vertus, (th<y iciii make themselves known). 

EXK& [BE 172. 
1. D(-> you n<>t know tliat mat I know him by his 

B; me? 4. 1 1 

d .. 5. Do you n j Wend by bj 

iiim by bis black c at 7. I> • you 
kimw him w.ll ? s. I kn<>w him by Bight, but I have never spoken 

- - r : the blacksmith 
t will you know your book? L2. 1 
shall know it by th 13.B u not known your friend 

14. No, madam; I knew her by her light hair. 
15. Save you told your name? 16. 1 hare nol told my name. 
17. Did you katm . tuiad hair? 

knew her by it 10. Is the men of cloth? '_'• •. II • 

. b< tter judge of it than 
maim: 

•Idsmith as gi you f 24. I 

iu a judge? 2d I 
am a judge 27. Are nol your 

; not 
know that young lady by her d I know her by hi r 

they made themselves known? 
iwn by tlnir mi i 

rork? 31. The workman 
is known by hid work. Jo. lie i.s a judge of it. 



QUELQUE, QUEL QUE, TOUT, ETC. 237 

LEgON LXXXVIII. LESSON LXXXVIII. 

QUELQUE, QUEL QUE, TOUT, ETC. 

1. Quelque, whatsoever, however, some, any, followed by a noun 
takes the form of the plural. It is invariable, when it is followed 
by an adjective "or an adverb [§ 97, (1.) 2. 3]. 

Quelques livres que vous ayez. Wliatever books you may ha 

Quelque bons qu'ils soient. However good they may be. 

2. Quel que, followed by a verb, is written as two words, the first 
(quel) agreeing in gender and number with the nominative of that 
verb [§ 97, (l.j 1.]. 

Quelle? que soient vos vertus. Whatever your virtues may be. 

3. The above examples show that quelque — que, and quel — que, 
govern the subjunctive. 

4. Tout meaning entirely, quite, nothing, but, though an adverb, 
varies through euphony, before a feminine word, commencing with 
a consonant or an h aspirate. 

L'esperance, toute trompeuse qu'elle Hope, deceitful as it is, serves at least 

est, sert au moins a nous mener a to conduct us to the termination of 

■ la fin de la vie par un chemin life by an agreeable road. 
agreable. (La BkuySre.) 

5. The word gre signifying consent, will, meaning, &c, forms a 
number of idioms. 

Je lui sais [savoir, 3. ir.] bon gre de lam thankful to him (i. e. owe him 

cette action. good-wilt) for that action. 

II nous sait mauvais gre de cela. He is displeased with us for that. 

Resume of Examples. 

Ne le ferez-vous pas de bon gre ? Will you not do it willingly ? 

II s'est marie contre le gre de ses He married against the will of his 

parents. parents. 

Sa chevelure vole au gre du vent. His hair flies at' the will of the wind. 

Je sais mauvais gre a votre frere de i" am displeased at your brother for 

vouloir se meler de mes affaires. wishing to interfere with my affairs. 

Je lui en sais bon gre. Jam thankful to him for it. 

J'espere que vous ne me saurez pas J hope that you will not be displeased 

mauvais gre, si je ne vous ecris with me, if J do not write to you. 

pas. 

C'est, a mon gre, le meilleur enfant He is, to my thinking, the lest child 

du monde. in the world. 



2oS QUATEE-VIXGT-HUITIKHE LEgON. 

Exekcise 173. 

Bon gre, mal gre, willing Men-er,l./o take, io lead; Partir, 2. ir. to leave; 

or not willing; Nou-er, l.totie, io fasten; Quitt-er, 1. to leave: 

Chambre, £ room; Obligor, 1. to oblige; Secret) m. secret; 

Gard-er, 1. tolceep; Ofl're, E offer; Silence, m. silence; 

Lit. in. Recommand-er, 1. to re- Suite, t'. consequence; 
MaLa', in spite of; commend; Voter, 1. to jig. 

1. Savez-vous mauvais gre a votrc onclc do ce qu'il a (lit? 2. Jo 
no lui t n Baia aucun mauvais gre (Voltaire). 3. No mo sauriez- 
vous pas boa gro, ije voua menais avec moi ? 4. Je voua en saurais 
le meilleur gre" ilu monde. 5. Ne leur savez-vous paa bon gre*d'avoir 
garde* ce secret ? G. Jo lour sais bon gre do l'avoir garde. 7. No 
li or avez-voua paa recommande" de garder le silence? 8. Je leur ai 
recommande' de le garder. 9. Ce malade garde-t-il encore le lit? 

10. II ne garde plus le lit. mais il csl encore oblige' de garder la 

I i. Votre chevelore est-elle bien nouee? 12. Non, mon- 

. :.:. 13. Gkrderez-vous votre domestiqne? 

1 1. Je le garderai, il fait tout a mon gro*. 1~>. Quelquea offres qu'on 

■-■-, il ne vent pas me « juit t. -i- ? 16. Quclque bonnes que Boient 

• pas a mon gro*. 17. Quelles que soien^lea 

itte affaire, je vous sais bon gre" de voa intentions? 

1 -. l\mte beUe qu'elle est, elle n'esl pas a mon re*. 19. L'avee-voua 

fait malgro vous? 20. N :i. monsieur; j.- 1'ai fait de bon gro. 

2L Bon '^vr, mal gre, il partira, 22. Me garderea-tvoua !<• secrel ? 

28. Je vons le garderai. 24. II change d'opinion au gre* dee eVene- 

]-\ i i;. EBH 17 1. 

1. "Will he many against bis father's consent? 2. 1 To -will not 
marry ent ■">. Why are you displeased with 

me? 1. [am not displeased with you 6. [s your little girl's hair 
tied? G. It is not ti.-l : it wa with the wind. 7. What 

• •il think »>f my bo in my opinion, the best book 

that I have read (L. 74, 3, Ij. 9. Will you not be displeased with 
me, if I do not come to-day? 1". I shall not be displeased with 
11. Will you not read that letter? 12. However well written 
it may ho, I will not read it. 13. Are those ladies hand 

11. However handsome and good they may be, they do not 
my fancy. 15. Are you di pleased with my brother? 16. 

I am thankful to him for his intentions, whatever may I 
quencea of his conduct 17. Will you keep this 
Die)? 18. I will keep it willingly. 19. Does your si.sU.-r keep bet 



8BETIE, S'lL VOUS PLAtT, ETC. 239 

bed willingly? 20. She does not keep her room willingly. 21. Will- 
ingly or not, she must keep her room, when she is sick. 22. Will 
you keep silent on this point? 23. I will willingly. 24. I am 
thankful to you for your good intentions. 25. Are you thankful 
to him for this (de cela) ? 26. I am thankful to him for it. 27. Will 
the judge keep his servant? 28. He will keep him. 29. Does he 
do his work to his fancy ? 30. He does it to his fancy. 31. Is 
your brother obliged to keep in the house ? 32. He is obliged to 
keep his bed. 33. Has he not left his room? 34. He has not 
yet left his room; he is too sick to leave it. 35. I should be under 
the greatest obligations in the world to you, if you would do this. 



LEQON LXXXIX. LESSON LXXXIX. 

SEEVIR, S'lL VOUS PLAIT, ETC. 

1. Servir [2. ir.] is used in French in the sense of the English 
expression to help to. 

Que vous servirai-je ? To what shall I help you ? 

Nous servirai-je de la soupe ? Shall I help you to some soup ? 

Vous n'avez pas servi monsieur. You have not helped that gentleman. 

2. Je vous remercie, I thank you, said in answer to an offer, is in 
Trench a refusal. This phrase is never employed like the English 
expression, I thank you for (this or that), to signify a request. The 
French make use of other forms : — Oserai-je vous prier de . . . Oserai- 
je vous demander . . . Je vous prie de . . . Je vous prierai de . . . Je 
vous demanderai . . . 

Je vous demanderai une aile de cette I will thank you for a wing of that 
volaille, un morceau de ce roti ? fowl, a slice of that roast meat. 

3. S'il vous plait, corresponds to the English, if you please. The 
verb is used unipersonally in that sentence, and in the following. 

Comme il vous plaira. As you please. 

II ne me plait pas d'y aller. It does not suit or please me to go there. 

Que vous plait-il ? Wliat would you please to have ? 

4. Au plaisir de vous revoir, au revoir, adieu, jusqu'au revoir, mean, 
iill I have the pleasure of seeing you again, till I see you again, etc. 

Resume of Examples. 

<Ju'aurai-je le plaisir de vous servir ? To what shall I have the pleasure of 

helping you? 
, Je vous demanderai un morceau de I will thank you, or I will trouble you 
ce jambon, for a slice of that ham. 



240 Qt'ATE E - VINGT-NE UV I E M E LEgON. 



Yous offrirai-je un morceau de ce 

roti? 
Je voua rcmereio, monsieur; je 

prendrai de preference une aile 
rte volaille. 
N'a-tron pas encore Bervi? 
Je vous souhaite le bou soir. 
J'ai souhaito le bonjour a madame. 

I i complaisance do vous as- 

ira, aycz la complaisanco 
d'entrer. 



Shall I offer you a slice of this roast 

meat f 
I thank you, sir ; I tcould prefer a 

wing of that fowl. 

Is not the dinner yet on the tabic f 
I wish you good evening. 
I have wished the lady a good morn- 
ing. 
Have tlie goodness to sit down. 

Gentlemen, have the kindness to walk 
in. 



Pri-cr, 1 . to leg, to desire ; 
Remerctment, m. thanks; 

Roti, in. roast meat; 
Soupe, C soup; 
^ullisaniment, adv. suf- 
ficient! g ; 

Tranche, I 



EXEECISB 17,'). 

Adieu, m. adieu; Grace, f thanks; 

Aile, t wing ; Jarnbon, m. 

Attend-P 

ltuuilli, in. boiled utea', .\l>tt-ie. (se) ir. re!'. -1. 

i hrtolan, m. ortolan; 

lVrdrix, 1". jmrtrnlge; 

1. Monsieur, qu'anrai-je le plaiair de vous Bervir? 2. Jc voua de- 
manderai on morceau de oejambon 3. Jevouspriede Bervir cea 
1 ..-]<• voua demander on morceau dece bouilli? 
Je vous rends grace, 
it; j'en ai Buffisamment 7. Mademoiselle, aurai-je fnon- 
neur de voua Bervir ui i perdrix? 8. Je voua remercie, 

. : je prendrai de preference un de ces ortolans. 9. Monsieur, 
k ': 1". Ma< 
mademoiselle. 11. Jevoua en demanderai aprds. 12. .lean, pn$- 
isieur. 13. Ces tdgumes aont ddlicieux. 
bien aise que vous lea trouviez buns. 15. Mon- 
sieur, ne .. jeoir? 16. Mille remerciments, 
monaieur; moo pare m'attend ;1 la maison 17. N"e leur aves-i 
Bouhaite' le bonjour? 18. Je leur ai souhaite le bon aoir. 19. Leur 
adieu? 20. J'ai dit adieu amonfrere. 21. J'ai pria 
eux 22. Lea avez-vous pries 

-I. Messieurs, on a Bervi 2o. Ayee la oomplaiaanoe da 
vous mettre UO. 

ExKBCISfl 170. 
1. Madam, to what shall I help you? 2. T will trouble you for a 
slice of that ham. 3. Shall I of this fowl! 

Bir; I thank J 

■ of thisbham} 



TENIE, PAIEB TENIK, ETC. 241 

7. I thank you, sir ; I would prefer a slice of the partridge. 8. Shall 
I offer you a little of this boiled meat ? 9. I thank you, sir ; I have 
some. 10. Madam, shall I send you a little of this soup ? 11. Much 
obliged to you, sir [see No. 16, in the above exercise]. 12. Sir, will 
you have the goodness to help this young lady ? 13. With much 
pleasure, sir. 14. John, take this soup to the gentleman. 15. These 
ortolans are delicious. 16. 1 am very glad that you like them. 17. Is 
the dinner on the table ? 18. 2To, sir ; it is not yet on the ta*ble. 
19. It is too early. 20. Does it please you to go there ? 21. It does 
not please me to go to his house ; but I will go if you wish it. 
22. Shall I go with you ? 23. As you please. 24. Will not your friend 
sit down ? 25. He is much obliged to you; he has not time to-day. 
26. Have you wished your friend a good morning ? 27. I wished 
him a good evening. 28. Have you not bid him farewell ? 29. I 
have bid him farewell. 30. Have the goodness to sit down here. 
31. I have taken leave of them. 32. I have taken leave of all my 
friends. 33. Madam, have the goodness to walk in. 34. We are 
much obliged to you, sir. 35. Our father is waiting for us at home. 



LEQOX XC. LESSON" XC. 

TENIE, PAIEE TENIR, ETC. 

1. The verb tenir [2. ir.], to hold, often corresponds in signification 
to the English verb to keep; tenir un hotel, to keep a hotel; tenir table 
ouverte, to keep open table; tenir sa chambre propre, to keep one's 
room clean ; tenir la porte, les fenetres ouvertes, to keep the door, the 
windows open ; tenir les yeux ou verts, fermes, to keep one's eyes opened, 
shut ; tenir la tete droite, to keep one's head upright ; tenir sa parole, 
to keep one's word; tenir compagnie a quelqu'un, to stay or remain 
%vith some or any one. 

2. Tenir un langage singulier, tenir des propos .... des discours 

would be rendered in English by to make use of singular languoge, 
to use peculiar expressions, to advance things, &c. 

Co jeune homme tient des propos That young man says foolish things. 
insenses. 

3. Tenir is also used in the sense of being attached to, to be tena- 
cious of. 

Je tiens a mon argent, a la vie. lvalue (i. e. hold to) my money, my 

life. 
Je tiens a mon opinion. I am tenacious of my opinion. 

11 



24: 



QUATEE-TOGT-DIXIEME LE^ON 



4. Tenir is also used of a color ■which is fast or not. 

Cette couleur tiendra ou ne tiendra This color is fast li. c. holds) or not. 
pas. 

5. Faire tenir is used in the sense of to forward, to send. 

Faites-lui tenir cct argent, cetto Forward liim this money, this ktkr. 
lettre. 

B. Se tenir or s'en tenir conjugated reflectively, may often be ren- 
dered by to remain, to abide by, to be satisfied with. 

Tl se ticnt debout, assis. Be remains standing, seated. 

Je m'eu tiens a votre opinion. J am satisfied with your opinion. 



Resume of Examples. 



M. L. tient un liAtcl superbe. 

etite fille ne tient pas sa 
ofaambre Men propre, 

Pourquoi teuez-vous les portes ou- 

II f.it si (.baud quo nous tcnoDS 

droits, et les yeux 
ooverta 

Pounju/i ne toncz-vous pas votro 
|. role? 

1 votro soeur; 
olle eat mi. i 
I . •; propos bien 

singulars. 

S diseours bitn 
VOtre 'Imp tiendra- 
t-ellef 

.:r ee livro? 

-VOU3? 

■uej'ai dit 

I toujoura dc- 

D tiendra-t-il an pre- 
sent, qoi doit finir demain ? 

Massii.i OS. 



Mr. L Keeps a superb hotel. 

Your little girl does not keep her room 

■lean. 
Why do you keep the doors open t 

It is so warm that ipekeep all the win- 
dows open. 

• r head upright, and your 
eyes 

you not keep your word 7 

.'h your sister ; she is sick. 

Tour friend makes use of very singu- 
lar exprt ssions. 
Ton use very light language. 
Js the cd,,r of your cloth fast t 

sent him the' 

■ion 1 
I shall 

\Miy does he • 
ing T 

Ihepr 

row? 



EXEB IBB 177. 

Pool icr. m. conch man; Gena, pLjM IYTt-'t, ] 

ling; Ind -■ 

I * ; insolent, i commend; 

lieu, m. ; lace; 

Bn dehors, out, outside; Lyon, Ly\ 

B'earnumer, 1. re£ to get Unlade, tick; Bav-oir, ."., Ir. to know; 

a cold; Earfaitement, perfectly ; Vie, £ 



TENIE, PAIEE TENIR, 33 T C . 243 

1. Quel hotel votre here tient-il ? 2. H tient l'hotel de 1'Europe, 
rue de Lyon. 3. Votre petit garcon se tient-il bien propre ? 4. II 
se tient bien propre. 5. A quoi vous en tiendrez-vous ? 6. Je m'en 
tiendrai a, ce que je vous ai dit. 7. Ne savez-vous pas a, quoi vous 
en tenir ? 8. Je sais parfaitement a quoi m'en tenir. 9. Pourquoi 
vous tenez-vous debout ? 10. Parce que nous n'avons pas le temps 
de nous asseoir. 11. N'avez-vous point defendu a ces jeunes gens de 
tenir de tels propos ? 12. Je le leur ai defendu. 13. Votre cocher 
n'a-t-il pas tenu un langage bien insolent? 14. N'avez-vous pas 
peur de vous enrhumer, en tenant les portes ouvertes ? 15. Nous 
prefererions les tenir fermees. 16. Votre maitre vous recommande- 
t-il de tenir la tete droite ? 17. II me recommande de tenir les pieds 
en dehors. 18. Pourquoi votre ami ne vous tient-il pas compagnie ? 
19. Sa sceur est indisposee ; il est oblige de rester avec elle. 20. Votre 
oncle ne vous a-t-il pas tenu lieu de pere ? 21. II m'a tenu lieu de 
pere et de mere. 22. Eegarderez-vous de plus pres a cette affaire ? 
23. Non, monsieur; je m'en tiendrai & ce que j'en sais. 24. Ce 
medecin ne tient-il pas a son opinion ? 25. II y tient plus qu'il ne 
tient a la vie de ses malades. 



Exercise 178. 

1. Does that gentleman keep open table ? 2. He keeps a hotel in 
Paris. 3. Why do you keep the windows open ? 4. We keep them 
open, because we are too warm. 5. Has not your friend kept his 
word ? 6. He has kept his word ; he always keeps his word. 7. Have 
you not told your scholar to keep his head upright ? 8. I have told 
him to keep his head upright, and his eyes open. 9. Why do you 
not stay with your sister ? 10. Because I have promised to go to 
my cousin's this morning. 11. Have you forbidden your little boy 
to make use of these expressions? 12. I have forbidden him. 
13. Does he make use of insolent language? 14. He does not. 
15. What will be your decision? 16. I will abide by what I told 
your father. 17. Have you forwarded that money to your friend ? 
18. I have not yet forwarded it to him. 19. Will you forward it to 
him to-morrow ? 20. I will forward it to him, if I have an oppor- 
tunity. 21. Why do you not keep standing ? 22. Because I am 
weary. 23. Do you think that the color of your coat is fast ? 24. I 
think that it is fast ; it (elle) appears very good. 25. Will you not 
look closely into your brother's affairs ? 26. I shall not look closely 
into them. 27. I will be satisfied with your opinion. 28. Are you 
not too tenacious of your opinion ? 29. I am not too tenacious of 



244: QUATEE-VINGT-OXZIEME LEgON. 

it. 30. Does not your physician adhere too tenaciously to his 
opinion? 31. He adheres to it. 32. Does that lady hold your 
mother's place ? 33. She is a mother to me. 34. Our cousin is a 
father to us. 35. That physician does not value the life of his pa- 
tient. 



LEQON XCI. LESSON XCI. 

IDIOMATIC USE OF ETKE. 

1. The verb ttre forms a great many idioms besides those which 
we have already mentioned: etrc en retard, to be late, to tarry ; etrc 
en ctat, a. meine de, to be able to ; etre en peine tie, to be uneasy 
about; etre en vie. to he alive, to lire ; fitre en eheinin pour, to be on 
the iray to ; etrc au fait, au courant de, to be familiar with ; etre a la 
vcillc de, to be on the eve of; etre de trop, to be unnecessary, to be in 
tin way : etrc bien avec, to be on good terms with ; etre brouille avec, 
U with .' etre aux prises avec, /« be in open rupture, 
'He with ; etre d'avis, t" be of opinion, etc. 
. as already said [L. -17. 5.], is used in the sense of appar- 
tenir, to belong. It ia also employed in the sense of to behoove, to be- 
come. In the latter sense, it takes generally the preposition de before 
another verb. 

voua de lui fairo des ro- Does it become you to cast (make) re- 
proches? proaches upon him t 

\ ana a parlor. It is your turn to speak. 

3. Y etre is often used for to be at home, to be in. 

Vutre pere y cst-il ? Is your father at home t 

Mi.svsik of Examples. 

Xo sommos-nous pas defrop iei ? Are toe net in (he way Jicret 

Nous no somines pas bien avoc nos We are not on good terms with our 

pa rents. 

Ni'us sommes au courant do tout W arc familiar with all that. 

oela. 

Je suis a memo de satisfairo a sa I am able to sa'isfy his demand. 

d. inande. 

Nous soinmcs brouilles. We are not on good terms ; we are at 

variance. 

Ma scour est a la vcillo do so My sister is on the eve of her mar- 

niarier. 

Kous sommes d'avis quo vous allicz It is our opinion (hoi yu should go 

lui fain to him. 

C'e u'efli pas a lui do nous rcprocher 1 71 to riproacJi us 

notro bonte*. ' with our kindness. 



IDIOMATIC USE OF £ T B E . 245 

A qui est-ce a lire ? Whose turn is it to read? 

C'est a ma sceur a lire ce matin. It is my sister's turn to read this 

morning. 

Cette maison est a lui et a, moi. That house is his and mine. 

Elle est a moi, elle est a lui. It is mine, it is his. 

Ces souliers ne sont pas a nous. These shoes are not ours. 

lis appartiennent a notre frere. They belong to our brother. 

lis, lui appartiennent. They belong to him. 

Monsieur 1 n'y est paa. The gentleman is not at home. 

Madame y est. The lady is in. 

Exercise 179. 

Achet-er, 1. to buy ; S'embarqu-er, 1. ref. to Part-ir, 2. ir. to start, set 

Apparten-ir, 2. ir. to be- embark; out; 

long ; Gravure, f. engraving ; Proprietaire, m. land- 

Arriv-er, 1. to arrive ; Hote, m. host; lord; owner of the 

Correspondent, corres- Libraire, m. bookseller ; house. 

pondent; Mois, m. month; Punir, 2. to punish; 

Craind-re, 4. ir. to fear ; Montre, f. watch; Veille, £ eve, day be- 

Dev-oir, 3. to owe, to be ~Mort,dead ; from mourir, fore; 

obliged; to die; Vie, f. life. 

1. T a-t-il longtemps que vous etes brouilles ? 2. H y a plus d'un 
mois que je suis brouille avec lui. 3. Votre ami est-il encore en vie ? 
4. Non, monsieur ; il y a dix ans qu'il t est mort. 5. Votre corres- 
pondant est-il en chemin pour Paris ? 6. Je crois qu'il doit etre 
arrive. 7. Ce jeune homme n'est-il pas en retard ? 8. Oui, mon- 
sieur; il ne vient jamais a temps. 9. Ces gravures sont-elles §, 
vous, ou a votre libraire ? 10. EUes sont a moi ; je viens de les 
acheter. 11. Ne craignez-vous pas d'etre de trop ici? 12. Nous 
sommes trop bien avec notre bote pour craindre cela. 13. A qui 
est-ce a aller cliercher les livres ? 14. C'est a, moi a, les aller cbercher. 
15. Est-ce a vous de le punir, quand il le roerite ? 16. C'est a moi 
de le punir, car je lui tiens lieu de pere. 17. Ces maisons n'appar- 
tiennent-elles pas a notre proprietaire? 18. EUes ne lui appar- 
tiennent pas. 19. EUes sont a notre correspondant. 20. A qui 
sont ces lettres ? 21. EUes ne sont point a moi, elles sont a ma 
cousine. 22. Cette montre est a lui. 23. N'etes-vous point a la 
veille de partir pour Londres ? 24. Nous sommes a, la veiUe de nous 
embarquer pour Cadiz. 25. H y a longtemps que nous sommes 
aux prises. 

Exeecise 180. 
1. Are you able to pay him ? 2. I am not able to pay him ; I have 
not received my money. 3. Are you on good terms with your 

1 Monsieur, madame, not followed by a name, are generally understood 
to mean the master and mistress- of the house, the heads of the family. 



246 QUATEE-Yn'GT-DOUZIEME LE^OH. 

bookseller ? 4. J am not on good terms with him. 5. I am on bad 
terms with him. 6. How long have you been on bad terms with 
him ? 7. It is more than a month. 8. Are you not able to satisfy 
my friend's demand? 9. I am able to satisfy it (d'y sat is/ aire). 
10. Are you on your way to Xaples ? 11. Xo, sir; I am on my 
way to Rome. 12. Is not your physician on the eve of starting for 
Montpellier ? 13. He is on the eve of starting for Paris. 11. Am I 
in the way here ? 15. Xo, sir ; you are not in the way. 16. "Whose 
turn is it to speak ? 17. It is my turn to speak and to read. IS. Is 
it my place (d moi) to make apologies to him ? 19. It is your 
brother's place to apologize to him. 20. Does it become you to pun- 
ish that child? 21. It behooves mo to punish him. 22. Do you hold 
the place of a father towards him? 23. I hold the place of a father 
towards him. 24. Is that coat yours ? 25. No, sir ; it is not mine • 
it is my brother's. 26. Have you broken openly with him? 27. We 
have been quarrelling two months. 28. Is not that large house yours? 
29. No, c ir; it is not mine; it is my sister's. 30. Does it become 
your brother to reproach him with his kindness? 31. It does not 
become him to do it. 32. Whose turn is it to go and fetch the books? 
33, It is my place to go and fetch them. 31. Is the gentleman in ? 
35. Xo, sir; the gentleman is not in; but the lady (of the house) 
is in. 



LECOX XCII. LESSOX XCII. 

AVANTEH, r.KTAKDKn, ETC. 

1. Avancer, rctarder, correspond to the English verbs to gain, to 
lose, to put forward, to put bark, in speaking of a watch or clock, etc. 
The preposition dc is placed before the word expressing the vari- 
ation. 

Ma montro rctardo d'uno demi- My watch is half an hour too slow. 

heure. 
L.i mil -imo avanco d'un quart Mine is a quarter of an hour too fast. 

il'li'/urc. 
J'ai avanco cetto horloge d'uno 1 set that clock half an hour forward, 

demi-heure. 
Betardez votro montro do cinq Put your watch five minutes lack. 

minutes. 

L\ M./ttre [1. ir.] a, l'heure, means to set right, to put right, to set. 
Mettez cetto montro a l'heure. Set that watch right 

3. S'accorder, to agree, is said also of clocks, watches, etc. 



AVANCEK, KETARDEK, ETC. 



247 



Resume of Examples. 



Votre montre va-t-elle bien ? 

Elle retarde d'une demi-heure par 

jour. 
Elle avance d'un quart d'heure par 

semaine. 
De corobien avance-t-elle ? 
Je viens de mettre ma montre a 

l'heure. 
Si votre montre retarde, pourquoi ne 

l'avancez-vous pas ? 
Ma pendule avance, je viens de la 

retarder. 
Quelle heure est-il a votre montre ? 
Mon horloge sonne les heures et le3 

demies. 
J'ai oublie de la monter (or remon- 

ter). 
Votre montre est derangee. 
II faudra la faire nettoyer. 
La sonnerie en est derangee. 
Votre pendule et ma montre ne 

s'accordent pas. 
Les pendules a ressort vont mieux 

que les pendules a poids. 
L'norloge a sonne deux heures. 



Does your watch go well 9 
It loses half an hour a day. 

It gains a quarter of an hour a week. 

Sow much does it gain ? 

I have just set my watch right. 

If your watch loses, why do you not 

set it forward ? 
My clock gains, I have just set it 

lack. 
What o'clock is it by your watch ? 
My clock strikes the hour and the half 

hour. 
I have forgotten to wind it up. 

Tour watch is out of order. 
It will be necessary to have it cleaned. 
The striking part is out of order. 
Your clock and my watch do not 

agree. 
Spring clocks go better than weight 

clocks. 
The clock lias struck two. 



Exercise 181. 

Aiguille, f. hand ; Droit, e, straight ; 

S'arret-er, 1. ref. to Fele, e, cracked; 

stop; Juste, right, correct; 
Balancier, m. pendu- Matin, m. morning ; 

lum ; Perfection, f. perfection ; hand 

Boite, f. watch-case ; Plat, e, flat, thin ; Timbre. 

Cadran, m. face, dial Regl-er, 1. to regulate; clock 

Cass-er, 1. to break ; Repetition, (montre a) f. Vite, quick, quickly. 

Double, double; repeater ; 



Ressort, (grand) m. main- 
spring ; 

Secondes, (montre a) 
watch with a 



of 



1. N'avez-vous pas une montre a repetition ? 2. J'ai une montre 
d'or, a double boite. 3. Va-t-elle mieux que la mienne ? 4. Elle ne 
va pas bien, elle retarde d'une heure par jour. 5. Est-ce une montre 
a secondes ? 6. C'est une montre a secondes et a cadran d'or. 
7. Votre horloge ne sonne-t-elle pas ? 8. Elle ne sonne plus, le 
timbre en est casse. 9. Pourquoi ces pendules ne s'accordent-elles 
pas? 10. Parce que l'une avance et 1' autre retarde. 11. N'avez-vous 
point casse le grand ressort de votre montre ? 12. Je l'ai casse en la 
remontant. 13. Votre pendule est elle juste? 14. Oui, monsieur; 
elle est juste, je viens de la faire regler. 15. La sonnerie de cette 
pendule est-elle derangee 16. La sonnerie en est derangee, et le 



248 QTJATEE-TISGT-TEEIZIEME LEgOST. 

timbre en est fele. 17. La petite aiguille de ma motitre plate est 
cassee. 18. Le balancier de votre borloge n'est pas droit ? 19. De 
combi^n votre pendule avance-t-elle ? 20. Elle avance de cinq mi- 
nutes par jour. 21. La perfection d'une pendule n'est pas d'aller 
vite, mais d'etre reglee (Delelle). 22. Yotre montre s'arrete-t-elle 
souvent? 23. Elle s'arrete tous les matins. 24. Yotre pendule 
s'est arretee. 

Exercise 182. 
1. Does your watch gain or lose? 2. It does not lose; it goes 
very well. 3. It loses twenty-five minutes a day. 4. Does your 
cluck gain much? 5. It gains one hour a week. 6. How much 
does your sou's gold watch lose ? 7. It loses much ; it loses one 
hour inn.) twenty-four (heures). 8. I have put it forward one 
hour. 9. I will put it back half an hour. 10. Does not your clock 
strike the half hour? 11. No, sir; it only strikes the hour. 
12. Have you forgotten to wind up your repeater? 13. I have 
forgotten to wind it up, and it has stopped. 14. Is j T our silver watch 
out of order? 15. It is out of order, and it will be ne© 
have it cleaned. 1C>. What o'clock is it by your watch? 17. It is 
lock by my watch, but it gains. 18. How much does it 
gain a week? 19. It gains more than five minutes a day. 20. Is 
your watch right? 21. No, sir ; it i> not right; it is out of order. 
22. Does your clock Strike right ? 23. It does not strike right; the 
striking part is out of order. 24. Have you broken the hands of 
your clock ? 25. I have broken the hour hand and the dial. 26. Has 
: struck three ? 27. It has struck twelve. 28. It has stopped. 
29. Does it stop every morning? 30. It does nol Btop every morn- 
ing; it stops every evening. 31. Your watch does not agree with 
mine. 32. Have you broken the main-spring of your brother's 
watch? 33. He has broken it in winding it up. 34. My brother's 
watch is right ; he has had it cleaned and regulated. 



LEgON XCTII. LESSON' XClll. 

SE DEMETTRE, b'eMPAKER, ETC. 

1. Be demettre [4. ir.] le bras, le poignet, corresponds to the 
jsion to dialocai vrist, to ptit one's arm, writt 

In this sense sc demettre takes no preposition before 
its object 

Jo mo suis demis l'epaulo. I have dislocated my shoulder. 



SB DEMETTEE, SEMPAREE, ETC. 249 

2. Se demettre, used in the sense of to resign, to give up, takes the 
preposition de before its object. 

II s'est demis de sa place. He has resigned his place. 

3. S'emparer, to seize, to lay hold of, takes de before its object. 
II s'est empare de ce chapeau. Se seized upon this hat. 

4. S'empecher, to prevent one's self, to forbear, to help, takes de be- 
fore another verb. 

Je ne puis m'empecher de rire. / cannot help laughing. 
Je ne puis m'en empecher. / cannot help doing so. 

5. S'inquieter answers to the English expression, to he or become 
uneasy, to trouble one's self; it takes de before its object, be this ob- 
ject noun, pronoun or verb. 

Je ne m'inquiete pas'de cela. 1 am not uneasy about that. 

6. Se comporter answers to the expressions to behave, to deport 
one's self. 

7. S'attendre means to await, to expect. It takes d before its ob- 
ject. 

Je ne m'attendais pas a, cela. I did not expect that. 

Je ne m'y attendais pas. I did not expect it. 

Resume of Examples. 

Vous etes-vous demis l'epaule ? Have you dislocated your shoulder ? ! 

Je me la suis demise [L. 45, 2. I dislocated it. 

§ 135]. 

Cette demoiselle s'est demis le poi- Tliat young lady has dislocated her 

gnet. wrist. 

Qui le lui a remia ? Who set it for her ? 

Le Dr. L. a remis l'epaule a ma Dr. L. set my sister's shoulder. 

soeur. 

Vous etes-vous demis de votre Have you resigned your situation ? 

place ? 

Je m'en suis demis [§ 135, 7]. I have resigned it. 

Nous ne pouvions nous empecher We could not help smiling, during 

de sourire, pendant ce recit. that narration. 

Vous etes-vous empare de ce livre ? Have you seized that book t 

Je m'en suis empare. I laid hold of it. 

De quoi vous inquietez-vous ? Why do you trouble yourself? 

Je ne m'inquiete de rien. I trouble myself about nothing. 

Comment ce jeune homme se com- How does that young man behave ? 

porte-t-il ? 

II se comporte comme il faut. He behaves properly. 

Je ne m'attendais pas a, une telle I did not expect such an answer. 

reponse. 

Je ne m'y attendais nullement. / did not expect it, by any means. 
11* 



250 QUATEE-TINGT-TEEIZIEJIB LEgON, 



Exercise 183. 

A 1'avenir, in future ; Gauche, left; Paysan, m. peasant; 

Bras, m. arm; Mieux, better; Poiguet, m. wrist; 

Cass-er, 1. to break; Monde (tout lc), every Prusse, f. Prussia; 

Droit, e, right; body; Sejour, m. stay ; 

Durant, during; Oblige, obliged; Traitement, m. treat- 

Ecritoire, f. inkstand; Pareil, Je, similar, such ; meat ; 

Euncini, m. enemy ; Part, tpari; Yille, f. city. 

1. Ne vous etiez-vous pas demis lo bras ? 2. Je ne me l'etais pas 
demis ; je me l'etais casse. 3. Si vous alliez en Amerique, vous de- 
mettriez-vous de votre place ? 4. Je serais oblige de m'en dcmettre ? 
5. Y a-t-il longtemps que votre cousin s'est demis de la siennc ? 
G. II y a un mois qu'il s'en est demis. 7. L'enncmi s'est-il empare de 
la ville ? 8. II s'en est empare. 9. Votre fils se comportera-t-il 
mieux a l'avenir ? 10. II s'est tres bien comporte durant son sejour 
en Prusse. 11. Vous attendiez-vous a, un- pareil traitement de sa 
part? 12. Je ne m'y attendais pas. 13. A quoi vous attendiez- 
vous? 14. Je m'attendais & e*tre traits comme il faut. 15. Pourquoi 
-VOUS moque" de lui? 16. Parce que je n'ai pu m'en empe- 
chcr. 17. Si vous laissioz voire ecritoire ici, lepavsan s'en emparc- 
rait-il ? 18. II s'en emparerait certainement 19. Votre a- 
comporte-t-fl bien envers vous? 20. II se comporte bienenvers tout 
lc monde. 21. Qui a remis le poignet a voire scour? 22. Le Dr. 
G. lc lui a remis. 2:;. M. votre pore no s'est-il pas demis le bras 
droit cc matin? 24. II ne se Test pas demis; il so Test casse" ce 
matin i\ cinq heures. 

Exercise 184. 

1. Has not Dr. L. resigned fads place ? 2. He has not resigned it 
3. He would resign it, if he went to Germany. 4. Are you olthged 
i your place ? 5. I am not obliged to resign it. 6. Has your 
cousin dislocated his arm ? 7. He has not dislocated hia arm, but his 
shoulder. 8. Who set it for him ? 9. Doctor F. set it for him. 
10. Has not your mother dislocated her wrist? 11. She has not 
dislocated her wrist; she has broken her arm. 12. Has the enemy 
seized the town ? 13. The enemy has seized the town. 11. "Will 
not some one lay hold of your hat, if you leave it here ? 15. Somo 
one will lay hold of it. 1G. How has your son behoved this morn- 
ing? 17. He behaved very -well. 18. He always behaves properly. 
19. Do you not trouble yourself uselessly (inulilemeut)'! 20. 1 do 
not trouble myself at all (du tout). 21. Did you expect, such treat- 
ment from (de la pari de) your son? 22. I did not expect such 
treatment from him (dc sa part). 23. Does that young lady behavo 



n'impoete, x est-ce pas, etc. 251 

well towards her mother? 24. She behaves well towards every 
body. 25. Will you behave better in future ? 26. We will behave 
well. 27. Have you broken your finger (doigf) ? 28. 1 have broken 
my thumb (pouce). 29. Could you help going to sleep (de dormir) ? 
30. We could not help smiling. 31. My sisters could not help laugh- 
ing. 32. Why are you uneasy ? 33. Because my son does not be- 
have well. 34. Did your father expect to be well treated ? 35. He 
expected to be treated properly. 36. We did not expect such an 
answer. 



LEQON XCIV. LESSON XCIV. 

n'impokte, h'est-ce pas, etc. 

1. N'importe, an ellipsis of il riimporte, answers to the English 
expression no matter, it does not matter, never mind. 

Domiez-moi un livre, n'importe le- Give me a booh, no matter which. 
quel. 

2. Qu'importe? answers to the English phrase what matter? 
WJiat does it matter ? When that expression is followed by a plural 

subject the verb importer is put in the plural. 

Que nous importenfc leurs mur- What do we care for their mur- 
mures ? murs ? 

3. N'est-ce pas ? corresponds to the English expressions, is it not ? 
is he not, &c. ? do they not? following an assertion. 

II fait froid; n'est-ce pas? It is cold; is it not? 

4. N'est-ce pas ? frequently precedes the assertion. 

N'est-ce pas que votre frere est Your brother is come ; is he not ? 
arrive ? 

5. Regarder, to look at, is used in the sense of to concern. 
Cela regarde votre frere. Thai concerns your brother. 

6. En vouloir §, quelqu'un, a quelque chose, means to have a 
design against or upon, a grudge against any one, to he angry with 
one on account of something. 

II en veut a notre vie. He has a design against our life. 

Resume op Examples. 

Pourvu que vous veniez, n'importe Provided you come, no matter which 

par quel chemin. way. 

Pourvu qu'il le fasse, n'importe Provided he does it, no matter how. 

comment. 



252 QUATEE-YINGT-QTJATORZIEME LEQON. 

Apportez-moi quelque chose, n'im- Bring me something, no matter what. 
porte quoi. 

J'en mourrai ; n'importe 1 shall die through it ; no matter. 

II n'est pas satisfait ; qu'importe ? He is not satisfied with it ; what mat- 
ters it ? 

II refuse nos presents ; qu'importe ? He refuses our presents ; what does it 
matter ? 

Que nous importe cette affaire ? What do we care for that affair ? 

Que nous importe son arrivee ? Wliat is his arrival to us ? 

Vous viendrez ; n'est-ce pas? > y m u 

N est-ce pas que vous viendrez? J » y 

Est-ce que cela me regarde ? Does that concern me ? Is that any- 

thing to me? 

Cela ne regarde personne. That concerns nobody. Tliat is no- 

body's business. 

II en veut a nos biens. He has a design upon our property. 

II en veut a nos amis. He has a grudge against our friends. 

Cela vous regarde-t-il ? Is that your business t 

Exercise 185. 

Aecord-cr, 1. to grant; Effort, m. effo i; Pouv-oir, 3. ir. to be 

Approuv-er, 1. to ap- Basard, m. chance; able; 

Loin, fair : Qualite, f. quality ; 

Auteur, m. author; Sc moqu-er, 1. ref. to Sang, m. blood; 

Bien, • laugh at ; Va, from allcr, logo, 

Condamn-er, 1. to con- Murmure, m. mur'mur; Velours, m. velvet ; 

Pen, tittk; s-er, 1. to pour, shed; 

I'i .•niaiide, f. request; Plainte, f. complaint; Vil, e, vile ; 

1. Que vous apporterai-je de Londres? 2. Apportcz-nous ce quo 
vous pourrez, n'importe quoi. 3. Lui avcz-vous dit d'apporter du 
velours? 4. Jc lui ai (lit d'en apportcr, n'importe de quelle qualite. 
5. Pourvu que quelqu'un vienne, n'importe qui. G. Que m'importe 
qu'Arnaud m'approuve ou me condamne? (Boileau.) 7. Vou3 
accorde-t-il votre demande? 8. II refuse; qu'importe? 9. Est-il 
satisfait des efforts que vous avez faits ? 10. II n'en est pas satisfait ; 
qu'importe? 11. II n'a pas voulu nous reccvoir; peu m'importe. 
12. Qu'irapoi'tent les plaintes et les murmures des auteurs, si le public 
■ n moque? (FIbaud.) 13. Qu'importe qu'au hasard, un sang vil 
' ? ( Racine.) 14. Cela vous regarde ; n'est-ce pas ? 15. Cela 
ue me regarde pa3. 16. Cela ne regarde que moi. 17. Vous leur 
avez dit que ces affaires ne les regardaient pas; n'est-ce pas? 
18. Vous m'en voulez ; n'est-ce pas? — N'importe. 19. A qui en 
voulez-vouB? 20. Nous n'en voulons a personne. 21. Nous ne vous 
en voulons pas. 22. Vous m'en voudrez; n'est ce pas? 23. En 
vjoulez-vous ;1 la vi.- de votre ami ? 24. Je n'en veux i>as ft sa vie. 
25. II m'en veut; qu'importe? 2G. Va! Cesar est bien loin d'eu 
vouloir u sa vie ? (Voltaire). 



monde, tout le monde, etc. 253 

Exercise 186. 
1. Which way -will your brother come ? 2. Provided he comes 
to-morrow, it does not matter which way. 3. Will he write to 
your brother ? 4. He will not write to him ; but it is no matter. 
5. Will you not lend me a book ? 6. Which book do you wish to 
have ? 7. No matter which. 8. Shall I bring you some silk from 
Paris ? 9. Bring me what you can ; no matter what. 10. Does that 
concern your brother ? 11. That does not concern him, but it con- 
cerns me. 12. Does he refuse to write to us ? 13. He refuses to 
{de) write, but what does it matter ? 14. Bring me a book, no mat- 
ter which. 15. Tour brother will come, will he not ? 16. Has he 
been willing to receive your brother ? 17. He has refused to receive 
him, but no matter. 18. He is pleased, is he not ? 19. He is not 
pleased, but it is no matter. 20. Is that your business ? 21. It is 
my business. 22. It is my brother's business. 23. I have told you 
that it is nobody's business. 24. Has that man a design against your 
father's life ? 25. He has no design against his life, but he has a 
design upon his property. 26. Are you angry with us on that ac- 
count ? 27. I am not angry with you for this. 28. Have you a 
grudge against my friends ? 29. I have no grudge against them. 
30. That concerns you, does it not ? 31. That concerns me. 32. Is 
that your business ? 33. It is very warm this morning ; is it not ? 
34. My sister will come this afternoon ; will she not ? 35. If she 
does not come, it does not matter. 36. What is her coming, to us ? 



LEgON XCV. LESSON XCV. 

MONDE, TOUT LE MONDE, GENS, ETC. 

1. The word monde, world, is often used in French in a restricted 
sense. It has then the meaning of people, company, retinue, servants, 
etc. Tout le monde, is used for the English expression everybody. 

T avait-il beaucoup de monde 4 Were there many people at church ? 

l'eglise ? 

Se mettant a, la tete de son monde, Placing himself at the head of his 

il ouvrit lui-meme la porte. people, he himself opened the door. 
Voltaire. 

Tout le monde le croit. Every body believes it. 

2. The word gens also means people, and is of the masculine gen- 
der ; but, by a singular anomaly, the adjectives which precede gens 
are put in the feminine, while those which follow it must be in the 
masculine gender. 



254 QUATEE-TOGT-QUOZIEME L E g 5T . 



Cosontles meilleures gens dumonde. They are the best people in the world 
Ces gens sont fort dangereux. Those people are very dangerous. 

3. The "words tout, tel, quel, certain, not preceding immediately 
the word gens, are put in the masculine, except when the word 
coming between is an adjective, having a different termination in the 
two genders. 

Tous ees gens la etaient-ils ehre- Were all those people Cliristians t 

tiens ? Pascal. 

Tous ces gens la, sont sottement All llwse people are foolishly ingeni- 

ingenieux. J. J. Rousseau. ous. 

4. The words tout, tel, quel, certain, are put in the feminine when 
they precede immediately the word gens, or are separated from it by 
an adjective having a different termination in the feminine. 

Quelles gens etes-vous ? Quellessont Wliat people are you t Wliatisyour 

VOfl atVaircs ? (Racine.) business f 

Quelles bonnes et dignes gens 1 What good and worthy people ! 

RxsuMfi Examples. 



Apres s'etro fait eraindrc do tout lo 
mondo, il craignit tout le mondo 
aussi. Flkciiieu. 

II dit da mal do tout lo nionde. 

Tout le monde le dit. 

Avez-vous ameno beaucoup do 
monde ? 

Lo monde n'est pas encore arrive. 

II n'y avait pas grand mondo. 

II y a da monde avee lui. 

II a congedie tout sou monde. 

Ce capitaine a tout son monde. 

Voila de sottes gens. 

II s'arr-'-te chez tea premieres bonnes 
gens qa'il tr BoiSTE. 

II y a a la ville, comme ailleurs, do 
fort sottes gens, des gens fades, 
oisifs, desoccupes. La Bruyere. 

Quel-; braves gens! 

Quelles vdes et mecliautes gens I 



After having inspired every body with 
fear, he feared every body. 

Ue slanders every body. 

ody says so. 
Have you brought many people t 

The company has not yet come. 
Therewere not many people dure. 

• me person with him. 
He has discharged all his servauts 

tain has all his crew. 
Those are foolish people. 
lie stops with the first good people 

that he finds. 
Tliere art in the city, as elsewhere, 
very silly people, tedious, idle, un- 
empl 

1hy people! 
What vile and wicked people ! 



Exercise 187. 

S'accommoder, 1. rcf. Pes que, as soon as ; Pcrd-rc, 4. to lose ; 
to put up with, to agree Equipage, ta.crew; Raasembl-er, 1.1* bring 

with ; eill-er, 1. to awake; together; 

Attend-re, l. fo aivait, to tiens d'epee, military fteven-ir, 3. h*. fart turn; 
til' n ; Salon, m. th-inviny-rtinrn; 

Bord (ii. on board; Gens de lettrcs, men of Serv-ir, '-. ir. ft 
Campagne, f. country; letters; 

I'-iu I-er, 1. fascttle,ar- Gens de robe, lawyers; Yovag-cr, 1. [g -19.] to 
range; Patron, m. patron saint ; travel. 



MONDE, TOUT LE MONDE, ETC. 255 

1. Avez-vous rassemble beaucoup de monde chez vous ? 2. II n'esb 
venu que peu de monde. 3. A quelle heure servira-t-on le diner 
aujourd'hui ? 4. On le servira, des que notre monde sera venu. 
5. Le capitaine a-t-il tout son equipage a bord ? 6. Non, monsieur ; 
il a envoye du monde a terre. 7. Vos gens se levent-ils de bonne 
heure? 8. H faut que tous les jours, j'evehle tout mon monde 
(Racine). 9. Les Moscovites perdirent trois fois plus de monde que 
les Suedois (Voltaire). 10. Ou est madame votre mere ? 11. Elle 
est dans le salon, il y a du monde avec elle {company). 12. Tout le 
monde peut voyager comme moi (X. de Maistre). 13. Ainsi va le 
monde. 14. Elle attend pour quitter le monde, que le monde l'ait 
quittee (Flechier). 15. Vos gens sont-ils revenus de la campagne ? 
16. Nous attendons nos gens aujourd'hui. 17. T a-t-il ici une societe" 
de gens de lettres ? 18. Non, monsieur ; il n'y a qu'une societe de 
gens de robe. 19. Connaissez-vous ces braves gens ? 20. Je crois 
que ce sont des gens d'epee. 21. Tels sont les gens aujourd'hui. 
22. Telles gens, tels patrons (La Bruyere). 23. Tous mes gens 
sont malades. 24. II faut savoir s'accommoder de toutes gens 
(L'Academie). 25. Que pouvez-vous avoir a, demeler avec de telles 
gens? 

Exercise 188. 

1. Are there many people at your brother's ? 2. There are not 
many people there. 3. Does that young man slander every body ? 
4. He slanders nobody. 5. Have you brought many people with 
you ? 6. We have brought but few people with us. 7. Is there com- 
pany with your mother ? 8. There is no company with her. 9. Who 
has told you that? 10. Every body says so. 11. Has the company 
come ? 12. The company has not yet come. 13. Has your mother 
discharged two servants (domestiques) ? 14. She has discharged all 
her people. 15. Do you know those people ? 16. I know them 
very well ; they are very worthy people. 17. When he travels, he 
stops always with good people. 18. Are there foolish people here ? 
19. There are foolish people everywhere (partouf). 20. Do you 
awake your people every morning ? 21. Yes, sir; I must awake 
them every day. 22. What can your brother have to settle with 
those people ? 23. They are the best people in the world. 24. Were 
there many people at church this morning ? 25. There were not 
many people there. 26. Are your people sick ? 27. Yes, sir ; all 
my people are sick. 28. There is here a society of learned men. 
29. There are in Paris several societies of lawyers. 30. What 



256 QUATEE-TOGT-SEIZIEME LECON. 

■worthy people ! 31. "What good people ! 32. Do you expect your 
people to-day ? 33. We expect them this evening. 34. So goes 
the world. 35. Has your captain all his crew? 36. He has all his 
crew on board. 



LECOX XCYI. LESSON XCVI. 

EX, USED TO EXPRESS PROPERTY, ETC. 

1. When property or possession is affirmed of things inanimate, 
the relation of possession is often expressed by the relative pronoun 
en [§ 95, (5.)]. 

Voila un bcl arbro ; lo fruit en est That is a fine tree ; its fruit is ex- 
excellent. ceUenik 

2. When, however, the inanimate possessor is the subject of the 
same clause, the possessive adjective is used [§ 95, (4.)]. 

Cct arbro a perdu son fruit. Tliat tree has lost its fruit. 

3. Entendre, to hear, is used in the sense of to understand. It is 
also used reflectively. It means then, to be understood, to understand 

■'. or one another, or to agree ivitii one another. It means also, 
to be expert in any thin;/. In this latter sense it takes a before its 
regimen. This regimen is at times replaced by the pronoun y. 

Comment entendez-vous cela ? How do you understand ihatt 

entend That is u n d<- r stood. 

11 s'enteud aux affaires. He is expert in business. 

4. Se faire entendre corresponds to the English, to make one's self 
understood, to make one's self heard. 

Nous nous sommes fait entendre. We made ourselves understood. 

5. Taire [4. ir.] means to conceal, to keep to ones self. Se taire, to 
he silent. 

-vous. Taisons-nous. Be silent (hold your tongue). Let us 

be silent. 
Ditcs-lui dc so taire. Tell him to be silent. 

TIksume op Examples. 

L'autcur d'un bienfait est eelui qui The author of a good deed is the one 

en recoit les plus doux fruits. who receives its sweetest fruits. 
Dcclos. 

Totro jardin est magnifique; les Tour garden is magnificent; its trees 

arbrea cu sout BOperbea are very beautiful. 



EN, USED TO EXPRESS PROPERTY. 257 

La vie a ses plaisirs et ses peines. Life has its pleasures and Us troubles. 

L' etude a ses charmes. Study has its charms. 

Entendez-vou3 bien le latin ? Do you understand Latin well ? 

Cet avoue n' entend rien aux affaires. That attorney has no knowledge of 

business. 

II ne s'y entend pas. He is not expert in this. 

Je lui ai donne a entendre qu'il I gave him to understand that he was 

etait de trop ici. in the way here. 

Qu'entendez-vous par la ? What do you mean by that f 

II y avait tant de bruit, que nous There was so much noise, that we 

n'avons pu nous faire entendre. could not make ourselves heard. 

Taisez le premier, ce que vous vou- Keep to yourself,. that which you would 

lez qu'on taise. Latin Maxim. wish to have kept secret. 

Pourquoi ne vous taisez-vous pas ? Why are you not silent ? 

Nous l'avons fait taire. We made him hold his tongue (si- 
lenced him). 

Exercise 189. 

Agrement, m. pleasure ; Chirurgien, m. surgeon ; Manche, f. sleeve ; 
Avantage, m. advan- Consent-ir, 2. ir. to con- Mel-er, 1. to mix; 

tage.; sent; Muet, te, dumb, mute, 

Basque, f. skirt of a Court, e, short; Pays, m. country; 

coat; Force, f. force, power ; Eaison, f. reason; 

Brave, worthy ; Port, very ; Eeuss-ir, 2. to succeed. 

1. Est-ce un habit neuf que votre fils porte ? 2. C'est un habit 
neuf ; le drap en est tres fin. 3. Les manches n'en sont-elles pas trop 
courtes ? 4. Je crois que les manches en sont trop courtes et les 
basques trop longues. 5. La campagne n'a-t-elle pas ses avantages ? 
6. J'aime la campagne ; j'en connais les avantages. 7. Paris a ses 
agrements. 8. J'aime Paris ; j'en connais les agrements. 9. Ce chi- 
rurgien s'entend-il a la medecine ? 10. II n'y entend rien du tout. 
11. Entendez-vous la medecine? 12. Je ne m'y entend pas. 13. Je 
ne l'entends pas. 14. Je n'y entends ■ rien. 15. Avez-vous reussi a 
vous faire entendre ? 16. Nous n'y avons pas reussi. 17. Mon voi- 
sin est un brave homme, et je m'entends fort bien avec lui. 18. Faire 
taire certaines gens est un plus grand miracle que de faire parler les 
muets. (Balzac). 19. Savez-vous de quel pays est cet homme ? 
20. II tait son pays et sa naissance. 21. Par la force de la raison, 
elle apprit l'art de parler et de se taire (Flechier). 22. Voulez- 
vous vous taire, impertinente? vous venez toujours meler vos imper- 
tinences a. toutes choses (Moliere). 23. Qui se tait consent 
(Proverb). 

Exercise 190. 

1. Have you a very good garden ? 2. "We have a very large one, 
but its soil (terre, f.) is not good. 3. Is your brother's coat new ? 
4. He has a new coat, but its sleeves are too short. 5. Are not its 



258 QUATKE-TOGT-DIX-SEPTlillE LEfOX. 

skills too long ? 6. No, sir ; its skirts are too short. 7. Have you 
not heard that preacher (predXateur) ? 8. There was so much noise 
that I could not hear him. 9. Does not the country have its plea- 
sures? 10. The country has its pleasures. 11. Does not your bro- 
ther like the city ? 12. He likes the country ; he knows its pleasures. 
13. What does your brother mean by that ? 11. He means Avhat he 
says. 15. Is your father expert iu business? 1G. My lather has no 
knowledge of business. 17. Does that young man understand Eng- 
lish well ? 18. He understands French and English very well. 19. Do 
you agree well with your partner ? 20. My partner is an honest 
man [§ S6.] ; I agree very well with him. 21. Does that young man 
conceal his age ? 22. He conceals his age and his country. 23. 1 >< les 
your father understand medicine ? 24. He does not understand it. 
25. He has no knowledge of it. 26. Be silent, my child. '27. Tell 
that child to be silent. 28. Silence gives consent 29. Will you not 
be silent? 30. What have you given him to understand ? 31. We 
gave him to understand that study has its charms. 32. Have you 

silenced him? 33. Tea, air; we aflen 1 him. 31. Tell him to be 

■ '<. I have already (deja) told him to be silent. 3G. Let us 
be silent. 



LEgON XCVIL LESSON XCVII. 

THE PBBSBBT PABIICIFLB. — THE VERBAL Al'JKCTIVE, 

1. The present participle is invariable, and ends always in ant. It 

:. not situa-. il be rendered into English 

by an ad - rendered by the participle present^ <>r by the 

: by a relative pronoun. The pres- 
ent participle baa often, or may have a regimen. [? 64.] 

Cos homines, prevoyaut lo d men, foreseeing the danger 

..rent. 

2. The part of the verb used after the preposition en is always the 
at participle. 

En e'erivant, en lisant. In writing, in reading. 

?,. When the word ending in ant, is used to expre^ the qualities, 

9, or moral or physical situation of a noun, it i-< a verbal 

. and assumes, in its termination, the gender and number of 

the noun which it cpialiQcs. It must in this case be rendered into 

b by an adjective. 

Ces hommes sont prevoyants. Tliose mm are cautious, provident 



PRESENT PAETICIPLE, ETC. 259 

4. The verbs entendre, to hear ; faire, to cause, to make; laisser, to Jet, 
etc., followed by another verb completing their meaning, are not in 
French separated from that verb. In the corresponding sentences in 
English, the two verbs are usually separated by other words. 

J'ai laisse tomber mon couteau. / have let my knife fall {dropped). 
J'ai entendu dire cela. / have heard that said. 

Resume op Examples. 

Je eonnais des personnes, dormant I know z>ersons sleeping (who sleep) 

d'un sommeil si profond, que le so profoundly, that the noise of 

bruit de la foudre ne les reveille- thunder would not awake them. 

rait pas. Bescher. 

Les eaux dormantes sont meilleures Sleeping (still) waters are letter for 

pour les chevaux que les eaux horses than living waters. 

vives. Buffon. 

Nous avons trouve cette femme We found that woman dying. 

mourante. 

Cette femme, mourant dans la crainte That woman, dying in the fear of 

de Dieu, ne craignait point la God, did not fear death. 

mort. 

On est heureux en se contentant de One is happy in contenting one's self 

peu. with little. 

Avez-vous laisse passer ce voleur ? Have you let that thief pass ? 

Je l'ai laisse passer. I let him pass. 

Pourquoi avez-vous fait faire un Why have you had a coat made 

habit ? 

Je n'ai pas fait faire d'habit. I have had no coat made. 

J'ai laisse tomber quelque chose. / let something fall. 

Lui avez-vous entendu dire cela ? Have you heard him say that ? 

Je le lui ai entendu dire. I heard him say it. 

Je l'ai entendu dire. / heard it said. 

Je l'ai entendu dire a, ma sceur. / heard my sister say it. 

Exercise 191. 

S'appliqu-er, 1. ref. to Essayer, 1. to try ; Pleuv-oir, 3. ir. to rain; 

apply ; Se hat-er, 1. ref. to Prevenant, e, obliging ; 

Besoin, m. want; hasten; Preven-ir, 2. ir. to antici- 

Cbangement, m. altera- Lecture, f. reading; pate; 

tion; bligeant, e, obliging; Repet-er, 1. to repeat; 

Difficulte, f. difficulty ; Plai-re, 4. ir. to please; Suivant, e, following ; 

Emouss-er, 1. to blunt; Plume, I pen; Suiv-re, 4. ir. to follow ; 

Empecber, 1. to prevent; Pointe, f. point; Voyant, e, bright, showy. 

1. Ma cousine est-elle aussi oblige ante que la votre ? 2. Elle est 
aussi obligeante, et bien plus charmante que la mienne. 3. "Vos en- 
fants sont-ils prevenants ? 4. Mes enfants, prevenant tous mes be- 
soms ne me laissent rien a desirer. 5. Lisez bien attentivement les 
pages suivantes. 6. Ces demoiselles, suivant l'exemple de leur mere, 
s'appliquent a la lecture. 7. Les couleurs voyantes ne me plaisent 
point. 8. Mes sceurs, voyant qu'il allait pleuvoir, se h&terent de re- 



2G0 QUATEE-YIXGT-DIX-IIUITIKME LEO 03". 

venir. 9. Qu'avez-vous laisse tomber ? 10. J'ai laisse' tomber ma 
plume; la pointe en est emoussee. 11. Les avez-vous fait parler ? 
12. Je les ai fait parler. mais avec difticulte. 13. Avez-vous fait 
faire des cbangemeuts dans votre maison ? 14. J'y en ai fait faire. 
15. A quoi en avez-vous fait faire ? 1G. J'en ai fait faire a. la salle a, 
manger et au salun. 17. Avez-vous laisse passer cet bomme? 18. Je 
n'ai pas essaye de Ten empecher. 19. A qui (whom) avez-vous en- 
tendu dire cela ? 20. Je l'ai entendu dire a mon pdre. 21. Je le lui 
ai entendu rcpeter. 22. II vous l'a entendu dire. 23. II VOUS a vu 
faire cela, 24. II vous l'a vu faire. 25. Je l'ai vu passer. 
Exercise 192. 
1. Are still waters good for borses ? 2. Buflcn says that they are 
better for horses than living waters. 3. Are your sisters cautions ? 

re not very cautious. 5. My ing thai it was 

going to rain, brought their umbrellas. 6. What have you let fall? 
7. I have Lei my knife and book fall. S. Do very bright colors please 

ber? '.'. V,'\ bright colors do not please him. 1". Save 
/ 11. Have you seen the dying wo- 
man? 12. Your Bister, dying in the fear of Qod, was very happy. 
:. following your example, applied herself to study, 
It. Have you made them read ? 15. I made them read and write. 
l'i. I made my brother write. 17. 1 have had a book bound (rdiar), 

your father had alterations made in his house? 19. He has 
had some made in it 'J", [n which room has he had some made ? 
2L He baa bad • >me made in my brother's room. 22. Whom have 
you heard say that ? 23. I heard my sister say it 24. Have you 
heard him say that ? 25. 1 have not heard him say it. 26. Have 
you seen my father pas-? 27. I b 

heard him spei bim speak. 30. Let it fall 31. Do not 

let it full. 32. What has your brother dropped ? 33. He has dropped 

34. Whom bave you heard say that ? 35. 1 hoard your 

brother say it 30. I have heard you repeat it. 37. We have seen 



u:< <»\ WVI1I. LESSON xevm. 

|-i:\. in \l BJCSI mi'. OF Tin: BULKS ON Mil: PAST l'\i: 
TICIPLE. — I. 

The participl lbiable under any of the follo-u 

ditions: 

1. When employed as an adjective; in which case it a 
gender and number with the noun which it qualifies. 



RULES ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 2G1 

Des livres imprimes. Printed boohs. 

Ces feturnes paraissent bien abat- Those women appear very dejected. 
tues. 

2. When used in the formation of the tenses of passive verbs ; 
when it always agrees with the subject of the proposition. 

Elles sont bien recues de tout le They are well received by every 
monde. body. 

3. When employed in forming the compound tenses of neuter 
verbs having etre as an auxiliary ; in which place, as in the preceding 
case, it agrees with the subject or nominative. 

Votre soeur est partie ce matin. Tour sister went away this morning. 

4. When employed in forming the tenses of active verbs having 
avoir as an auxiliary; in which connection it agrees not with the 
subject, but with the direct object or regimen, provided that object 
precedes it. 

Les maisons que nous avons ache- The houses which we have bought. 
tees. 

5. When used along with etre in the formation of the compound 
tenses of reflective verbs, wherein the reflective pronoun is the direct 
object; in which position it agrees with that pronoun or direct 
object. 

Ces dames se sont flattees. Those ladies have flattered themselves. 

6. When used along with etre (as in Eule 5.) in the formation of 
the compound tenses of those reflective verbs, in which the reflective 
pronoun is not the direct, but the indirect object of the proposition ; 
in which event it agrees with the direct object, provided (as in Eule 
4.) that object precedes it. 

Les histoires qu'elles se sont racon- The stories which they related to each 
tees. other. 

7. When forming part of a compound tense of a verb governing a 
succeeding infinitive, it is at the same time preceded by a direct ob- 
ject, which is represented as performing the action denoted by the 
infinitive ; in which condition it agrees with that direct object. 

Les dames que j'ai entendues chan- The ladies whom I heard sing (sing- 
ter. ing). 

8. When, in a sentence containing the pronoun en, the participle 
is preceded by another object or regimen which is direct • in which 
case it agrees with that direct object 

Je les en ai avertis. I have warned them of it. 

Vous les en avez informes. You have informed them of it 



262 QUATEE-TINGT-DIX-HUITISME LEQON. 



Resume of 
Tous avez des livres bien relies. 
Vos Miles sont estimees. 
Ces terres sont bien labourees. 
Mes voisines sont toinbees d'ac- 

cord. 
Elles sont venues nous trouver. 
La victoire que nous avons rcm- 

portee. 
Les champs que vous avez laboures. 
Yous vous etes repcutis do votre 

iante. 
Elle .'-'est souvenue de sa promesse. 
Les soldats quej'ai vua passer. 
Les musicienaes que j'ai entenducs 
jouer. 

ration quo nous nous sommes 
•'■li^a 

ais qu'ellcs so 60nt 

Lee fruits que j'en ai recua 
Les oouveUes quej'eo 



Examples. 
You have well bound books. 
Your daughters are esteemed. 
Those lands are luell ploughed. 
My neighbours have come to an un- 
derstanding. 
They came to us. 
The victory which we have gained. 

Tlie fields which you have ploughed. 
You have repented (you) of your 

fault 
She remembered her promise. 
The soldiers whom 1 saw passing. 
Tfie musical ladies whom I heard 

playing. 
The indiscretion with which we re- 
proached one another. 

its which they related to on 6 

anotfu r. 
The fn; m it. 

T/ic news which J brought from it. 



A l'ordii 

Avert-;:-. 

Bone, C • 

Ooutume, (de), usually, 

Ciieill-ir, 2. to gather ; 

DechiflT-er, 1. to deci- 
pher ; 

!. to dis- 
eour\ 



ExBECISB 103. 

I aver ; 
Malade, tick j^rson; 
Merveille (a), wonder' 

fully, perfectly ; 

Parven-ir, -. ir. to suc- 

. I . to be, to 
do; 
Plus t.'.t. soon r, 
Bi-re, -l. ir. to laugh; 



So rcproeh-or, 1. ref. to 

- self i 
Se'rieux, Be, a 
Souri-re, i. ir. / 
s.iivaut, according to; 
Tomb-er, 1. to fall; 
Tomb-er d'acoord, income 

nderstandvng ; 
Trouv-er, 1. to Jiml; 
Vol-er, 1. to skal. 



trottve-t-elle pas bien fatiguee? 2. ESQe 
3. Votre scaur est-efte allee ft L'eglise 
Buivant Ba coatume? 4. Ma mere et ma socur y sont alleea 
f). Votre sceur < que de coutume ? 6. Hie est 

revenue plus tard qcra I'ordinaire. 7. Oette paurre malade 
/ 8. Elle eel as la boue. 9. Ma mSn 

parvenue ft decbiffrer ma lettre? 1<». pas parvenue. 

tieillie ? 12. Les Seurs que j'ai b 
Bont plus que vous m'avez envoye* 

n porte*e? 1 I. Elle s'eal portee a mtr- 
veille. 15. De quel lii rous Bervie, mademoiselle? L& Je 

lu vdtre. 17. Nous nous somm 
18. Quelles faul reprochees? 19. Lea fautesqu'i] 

prochdw nc BOBt pad Berieuses. 2U. Led avcz-vuus vus 



RULES OH THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 263 

rire ? 21. Je les ai vus sourire. 22. Les avez-vous vus voler des 
fruits? 23. Je les ai vus voler des pommes. 24. Les avez-vous 
avertis de leurs fautes ? 25. Je les en ai avertis. 26. Je ne les en 
ai pas avertis. 

Exercise 194. 
1. Are your books well bound ? 2. They are well bound, and 
well printed. 3. Did not your little girl find herself discouraged ? 
4. She found herself tired, but not discouraged. 5. Have your sis- 
ters come to an understanding ? 6. They have not come to an un- 
derstanding. 7. My brothers have come to an understanding. 
8. Who came to you ? 9. Your friends came to us. 10. Has not 
your sister gone to church ? 11. My sister has gone to church as 
usual. 12. Did your sister return sooner than usual ? 13. My sis- 
ter returned later than usual. 14. Are the fields which you have 
ploughed, large ? 15. The fields which I have bought are very large. 
16. Where are the gentlemen whom you saw pass? 17. The ladies 
whom I heard sing are in their room. 18. Did your poor sister fall? 
19. Did that poor sick woman fall in the mud ? 20. Did your sis- 
ter succeed in reading that book? 21. She succeeded in reading 
it. 22. Have you warned your sisters of their danger ? 23. I have 
warned them of it. 24. I have not warned them of it. 25. What 
pen has your mother used ? 26. She has used mine. 27. Have not 
those young ladies used my book ? 28. They have not used it. 
29. Has your mother been well ? 30. She has been perfectly well. 
31. Has she remembered her promise ? 32. She has remembered it. 
33. Have you seen those boys laugh ? 34. I have seen them smile. 
35. Have you seen them play ? 36. I have heard them play, 



LEgOU XCIX. LESSON XCIX. 

PRACTICAL RESUME OP THE RULES OJT THE PAST PAR- 
TICIPLE. II. 

The participle past is invariable : 

1. In active verbs, When the direct regimen follows the participle. 

Mes nieces ont etudie leurs lecons. My nieces have studied their lessons 
Elles ont neglige leurs etudes. They have neglected their studies. 

2. In neuter verbs conjugated with avoir. 

Mes cousines ont disparu. My cousins have disappeared. 

Les cinq heures qu'elles ont dormi. The Jive hours which they have slept. 



204 QUATBE-TINGT-DIX->"EUTIEME L E q O V. 

In the latter sentence, the word pendant is understood after heures. 

Les cinq heures pendant lesquelles The five hours during which they 
elles oat dorml slept. 

3. In unipersonal verbs, whether conjugated with Ctre or with 
avoir. 

Les chaleurs qu'il a fait cettc annee. The heat there has been this year. 
II est arrive bien des rnalheurs. Many misfortunes have happened. 

4. In reflective or pronominal verbs, of which the second pronoun 
is an indirect regimen, when no direct regimen precedes. 

Ello s'est propose de partir. She proposed to herself to leave. 

5. "When the participle precedes an infinitive, and is preceded by 
a direct regimen, and this direct regimen is not the actor, but the ob- 

' upon. In this ease the infinitive is generally rendered in 
English by to 'ice. 

osons que j'ai entendu chan- The songs which I heard (being) su}ig 

ter. 

C. When the fared regimen preceding a participle, is not the object 
of this particple, but of a verb following. 

quo jo vous ai conseillo The rule which I advised you to 

7. The participle of fairc. fait, followed by an infinitive, is always 
invariable. 

Jo les ai fait raccommodcr. 1 have had them mended. 

8. After the pronoun, en, when no direct regimen prec> 

m donne des flours? Jla you flowers t 

a a donn& Tu> y hare given me (some) of th*m. 

l; ' ai m:': <>r Examples. 

Kilos nous ont donne do bona con- They have given us good ad 

nous on ont don mat, 

lieaea qu'il a couru hich he ran. 

Lea anneea qoe cos c'diticea ont The yean thai those edifices have 

dure*. 

La belle journeo qu'il a fait hierl What a beautiful day it was yester- 
day ! 
plofl belle fi'to qu'il he finest feast that there lias 

deux de vos amis. 
- so sont nui. Tliosc young ladies have injured one 

and 

education 
de 1 • 1 : - of the clejihant a kind of art. 



RULES ON TIIE PAST PARTICIPLE. 265 

Elle s'est imagine l'idee de pouvoir She conceived the idea that sJie might 

reussir. succeed. 

Les i'ruits que j'ai vu voler. Tlie fruits which I saw bei?ig stolen. 

Les soldats blesses que j'ai vu por- The wounded soldiers whom I saw 

ter. (being) carried. 

La chanson que j'ai entendu chan- The song which I heard sung. 

ter. 

Les pommes que je vous ai defendu The apples which I forbade you to 

de manger. eat. 

Je les ai fait partir. I obliged them to leave. 

Elles m'ont apporte des oranges. They have brought me oranges. 

Elles m'en ont apporte. They have brought me {some) of them. 

Exercise 195. 

Auberge, f. inn ; Jou-er, 1. to play ; Nuit, £ night ; 

Bien, m. good; Habill-er, 1. to dress; Piece, f. piece; 

Dernier, e, last ; Dorm-ir, 2. to sleep ; Eacont-er, 1. to relate ; 

Disparait-re, 4. ir. to dis- Lion-d'Or, m. Golden Reven-ir, 2. ir. to re- 
appear; Lion; turn; 

Enterr-er, 1. to bury ; Mort, e, dead ; Soieries, silk goods, stiles. 

1. Quelle auberge vous a-t-on recommandee ? 2. On m'a recom- 
mande l'auberge du Lion-d'Or. 3. Quelles nouvelles avez-vous 
apportees? 4. J'ai apporte des nouvelles agreables. 5. Vos voisines 
sont-elles habillees ? 6. Elles ne sont pas encore habillees. 7. Ont- 
elles bien dormi, la nuit derniere ? 8. Elles n'ont pas bien dormi. 
9. Quand sont-elles arrivees ? 10. Elles sont arrivees a quatre 
heures et dernie. 11. Ont-elles dormi plus de cinq heures ? 12. Les 
six heures qu' elles ont dormi leur ont fait beaucoup de bien. 13. Vos 
Boeurs se sont-elles amusees? 14. En jouant, elles se sont fait 
mal au bras. 15. Se sont-elles raconte notre conversation ? 16. Elles 
se la sont racontee. 17. Vos amies ont-elles disparu? 18. Elles 
n'ont pas disparu ; elles sont revenues chez elles. 19. Les soldats 
que vous avez vus partir, sont-ils revenus ? 20. II sont morts ; je les 
ai vu enterrer. 21. Ne les avez-vous pas fait etudier ? 22. Je les 
ai fait lire. 23. Avez-vous apporte des soieries ? 24. Je n'en ai pas 
apporte. 25. Les soieries que j'en ai apportees sont superbes. 

Exercise 196. 
1. Have you not recommended my nieces? 2. I have recom- 
mended them. 3. Have you brought me good oranges ? 4. I have 
brought you some. 5. Have you given any to my daughters ? 6. I 
have given them some. 7. I would have given them some, if I had 
had many. 8. Have you not neglected your studies ? 9. I have 
not neglected them ; I never neglect them. 10. The years which 
that church has lasted, speak in favor (en faveur) of the architect. 
11. The ten miles which he has run, have fatigued him. 12. Have 
12 



2GG CENT 1 13 ME LEQON. 

your sisters injured each other? 13. They have nattered themselves. 
14. Did my friends present themselves? 15. There came three of 
your sisters. 1G. What did they imagine ? 17. They conceived the 
idea of reading Tasso (Le Tassv). 18. Have you seen them (m.J 
steal my apples ? 19. I saw them steal your peaches. 20. Iiuvo 
you heard them (f.) sing? 21. I have heard them sing. 22. ] i 
songs which I heard sung, are not new. 23. 1 found in your room 
the books which I had forbidden you to take. 24. The peaches 
which I have forbidden you to eat, are not ripe (mitres). 2o. Have 
you seen those soldiers ? 2G. I saw them pass last week". 27. I saw 
them carried to the hospital (d Vhdpital) this morning. 28. Have 
you brought oranges from France ? 29. I brought some. 30. The 
Oranges which I brought from it (en) are good. 31. Have you 
brought silk goods? 32. I have brought some. 33. I have brought 
none. 34. Are the silk goods which you brought from that place, 
3o. I brought but two pieces. 



1.IV"N I . LESSON C. 

EXAMPLES ZLLUSTBATIKG mi: VARIOUS USES OF TIIK l'Ul.V- 
« ir.u. COKJ1 NOTIONS. 

a hoiks oi'K. 

II n'en fem rien, d mains qu>: voua // will do nothing of the himl, 
Be lui j : Mm. 

A que vous ne prenies bien Unless you choose your turn 

votre temps, vous n'en viandres pas you will not accomplish it. 

Quel indigne plaisii pout avoir What unworthy pleasure am ava- 

Btqu wins What is the use of hoarding up uu- 

qu'uu. ne joui- I i.x. less we enjoy t 

■ 'ont nucuno force pour Therefl i 

M;i douleur serait trop 
bI je pouvais la de*p so 1 

ne I'entreprendrai pas. derta 

21 ml. . 

w RJ 

-! co qu'il ya do plus sage : au this is (he wisest t0O| . 
rests, e'est uus3i ce quH y a de plus is also the vuatjust. 
justs. Makmoxtel. 



VARIOUS USES OF CONJUNCTIONS, 



207 



Yoila les perils, voici le moyen de 
les eviter ; car enfin, le bras de Dieu 
n'est pas raccourei. Massillon. 

Le peuple se figure une felicite 
iiuagiuaire dans les situations ele- 
ve'es, ou il ne peut atteindre, et il 
croit (car tel est l'homme),que tout 
ce qu'il ne peut avoir, c'est cela 
meme qui est le bonheur qu'il 
cherqhe. Massillon. 



Those are the dangers, this is the 
way of avoiding them; for finally, 
the influence of God is not less pow- 
erful. 

The people picture to themselves 
an imaginary happiness in elevated 
stations which they cannot reach, and 
they believe (for such is man), that 
all that which they cannot obtain, 
forms that very happiness which 
they seek. 

COMME — QUE. 

Comme l'ambition n'a pas de As ambition has no limits, and as 

frein, et que la soif des richesses nous the thirst of riches devours us all, 

consume tous, il en resulte, que le the result is, that happiness avoids 

bonheur nous fuit, a mesure que nous us, as we proceed in our search after 

le cherchons. Th. Corneille. it. 



DONC. 



"Votre maitre vous aime; done 
vous devez l'aimer. 

Je suis, done, un temoin de leur 
peu de puissance. Racine. 

Et d'ou peut done venir ce change- 
ment extreme ? Voltaire. 

Si ce n'est toi, c'est done ton frere. 
— Je n'en ai pas. — C'est done quel- 
qu'un des tiens. La Fontaine. 

Allons done! repondit-on, et la 
transaction n'eut pas lieu. 

De Cussy. 



Your master loves you; therefore, 
you should love him. 

I am, therefore, a witness of their 
want of power. 

Whence, therefore, can this extreme 
change proceed? 

If it is not you, then it is your 
brother. — I have none. — Then it must 
be some one of your family. 

Well then! replied they, and the 
affair did not take place. 



DE MEUE QUE. 

De meme que le soleil brille sur As the sun shines upon the earth, 
la terre, de meme le juste brillera so will the just shine in heaven. 
dans les cieux. L'academie. 



C'est etre faible et timide que 
d'etre inaccessible et fier. 

Massillon. 
Une famille vertueuse est un vais- 
seau tenu pendant la tempete par 
deux ancres, la religion et les mceurs. 
Chateaubriand. 
Quel carnage de toutes parts ! 
On egorge a la fois les enfants, les 
vieillards, 
Et la sceur et le frere, 
Et la fille et la mere, 
Le fils dans les bras de son pere. 
Racine, Esther. 



To be inaccessible and proud, is to 
be weak and timid. 

A virtuous family is a vessel 
strengthened during the tempest by 
two anchors, religion and morals. 

What carnage on all sides ! 

They murder at once the children, 
the old men, the sister, and the broth- 
er, the daughter and the mother, the 
son in the arms of his father. 



2G8 



CEXTIEME L E £ O N 



LORSQUE — QUAXD. 



Lorsque 1'innocence habitait la 
terre. Bosscet. 

Quand vous me hai'riez, je uo m'en 
plaindrais pas. Racine. 

Quand nous n'aurious egard qu'au 
rcpos seul de notro vie, quand nous 
n'aurious point d'autre int ir& ioi- 
bas que de nous preparer des jours 
heureox, quel bonheur de prevenir 
d'avanee, et dVtouH'er dans lour 
naissance tant de passions violentes. 
Massillox. 



When innocence inhabited the 
earth. 

If even you hated me, J would not 
complain. 

If even we considered merely the 
repose of our lives, if even we had 
no other interest ttere than to pre- 
pare for ourselves happy day,*, what 
hajpiness it would be, to prevent be- 
forehand, to stifle in their birtti, to 
many violent passions. 



C'ctait di'ja la puissance impe- 
rial.-, qu'on lui a vue depois, 
avec l'asaentiment universe! des 
peoples, avec des formes moms 
mais plus digues peut-etra 

'I'll 1 1 B& 

L*harmonie ne Grappe pas Edmple- 
ment PoreOle, mats I esprit. 

Bou : 
\ la guerre de 

BUT la 'I E I 

. is brulant 

I. a Km, BBFOUOAtJUX 

11 n'y a point de mail qui tteu- 
oint ma Bile ft 

un muct. 13ia 



// was already the imperial power, 
of which we have since st.en him pos- 
but wilh ilte C07isen( <f the 
people, with forms less regal, bv& per- 
haps more worthy. 

Harmony does not only strike 
Oie ear, but the mind. 

T> keep on the defensive is a wise 
n in war, but it is not the 
:'iant. 

is no but in Uie matter ; 
J will not give my daughter to a 

mule. 



M. 



TTcuroux eclui qui Bait so conten- 
iM-u ! Boo Bommeil n'ost 

Tu\i>. D'HORACX. 
Voua perdes ainsi la oonflanon de 

\Mir reudus nt 
plusnaoUeB. 

TorvTATJffl. 

fast jamais si heUP 03 

malheuxeuz qu'on se l'imag 

La Bochbpoi i'\ri.n. 
loi sainte neconnalt pins, ni 

.i riche, nt noble, nirotuner, 

:ixo.v. 



Happy is he who can content hint- 
s' If with little ! His sleep is dis- 
turbed neither by Vie far, nor by 
the shamiful den 

TRANSIT 0» llnliWK. 

jfl thus thecon 

Oiem cither belttr or more sktlfuL 

li~ are nem or so un- 

• loejamcy. 

Tliat h"ly law know* M 
either poor or rich, noble or j'kbeian, 
master or slave. 



bona-noua A T 
•. Qi] I'.las me <lit-il on jour, 

Li 



Kow then, lei us qo to 

Now thru, i, u tome 

. the tunc of yuur childhood is 



VAEIOUS USES OF CONJUNCTIONS, 



2G9 



La fortune, soit bonne ou mau- 
vaise, soit passagere ou constante, 
ne pout rien sur l'ame du sage. 

Marmontel. 
La liberte de publier ses penseea, 
ou la liberte de la presse, doit t-tro 
regies sur la liberte meme d'agir. 
B. dk St. Pierre. 



Fortune, be it good or bad, be it 
transient or constant, has no power 
over the soul of the wise. 

The liberty of publishing one's 
thoughts, or the liberty of the press, 
should be regulated upon the liberty of 
action itself. 



PARCE QUE. 

Les grands homines entreprennent Great men undertake great things 

de grandes choses, parce gw'elles because they are great, and fools, 

sont grandes, et les fous parce qu'ils because they believe them easy. 
les croient faciles. Vauvenargues. 

La, tout est beau, parce que tout Every thing there is beautiful, be- 

est vrai. J. J. Rousseau. cause every thing is true. 



Le style le moins noble a pour- The least elevated style has, 
tant sa noblesse. Boileau. tbeless, its elevation. 



Pourquoi le demander, puisque 
vous le savez ? Racine. 

Ne vous lassez jamais d'examiner 
les causes des grands changements, 
puisque rien ne servira jamais tant 
a votre instruction. Bossuet. 

Puisque vous le voulez, je vais 
changer de style. Boileau. 



Why ash about it, since you know 
it? 

Never be weary of examining into 
the causes of great changes, since 
nothing will ever be of so much ser- 
vice to your instruction. 

Since you will have it so, I will 
my style. 



QUE. 



Jamais on ne vit un si grand es- 
emple, que le courage n'est point in- 
compatible avec la mollesse. 

Voltaire. 

A quoi vous servira d'avoir de 
1' esprit, si vous ne l'employez pas, et 
que vous ne vous appliquez pas ? 
Bossuet. 

Toutefois, que sert-il de me justi- 
fier ? Racine. 

Qu'il fasse ce qu'il lui plaira. 

Sais-tu quelque chose de plus? 

Ohl que oui. Brueys. 

C'est une maladie d'esprit, que de 
souhaiter des choses impossibles. 
Penelon. 

La veritable conversion du cceur 
fait autant aimer Dieu gw'on a aime 
les creatures. Pascal. 

Crois-tu que dans son cceur, il ait 
jure ta mort ? Racine. 



Never was such a striking exam- 
ple seen, that courage is not incom- 
patible with effeminacy. 

Of what use will be your wit, if 
you do not employ it, and do not ap- 
ply yourselves ? 

However, what is the use of justify- 
ing myself? 

Let him do what he pleases. 

Do you know any thing more f 

That I do! 

Wishing for impossible things, is a 
disease of the mind. 

The true conversion of the heart 
makes us love God as much as' we 
have loved the creatures. 

Do you believe that he has sworn 
your death in his heart ? 



270 



EXERCISES IN COMPOSING. 



Ce n'est pas que j'eusse rnieux fait It is not that I might have done 

que vous. Mhb. de Ssvigxe. letter than you. 

II a fallu que rues' malheurs m'aient It was necessary that my misfor- 

instruit, pour ni'apprendre ee que je tunes should instruct me, to teach vie 

ne voulais pas croire. Fenelon. what I would not believe. 

QT70IQUE. 

Quoique Dieu et la nature aient Although God and nature have 

fait to us les hommes egaux, en les made all men equal, in forming them 

formant d'une meme boue, la vanito from the same earth, human vanity 

humaine ne peut soull'rir cette ega- cannot bear thai equality. 
Jit ; . Bossuet. 



ST. 



Si vous lo voulicz, nous partitions 
ensemble. 

Si TOUa lo prenez sur co ton, jo 
me retire. 

Xul empire n'est siir, s'il n'a 
I'atnour pour ] R terra 

SMI I" taut, nuns part irons. 

Votre esprit a bouj 

quelqu 

I QHSa 



If you wislied it, we would go to- 

If you go on in this way, I with- 

Xo empire is safe, unless it has 
■ 

», we vill go, 
■ mind has always in reserve 
but 



lis repondirent, qu'fl f&Hait r<- 
tablir l'equitibre euro] n rompu; 

«|ii'il t'allait le r.'t.ililir SUVM sur le 
oontinent, oil il 6tsit tout a fidt 

di'truit. au moina sur i I • 

Tim B& 



, c ' | ':i I 'fl nele 

l'n in.il funesto et • 
re'pandil dans lea principal 

• que I'intem- 
dana lea 

qu'un commer apporte* 

li lieet 
de mort, soil que l'angi 

. la main pour frapp 
mallicurcuso province. FLBOHIBB. 



Tliey replied, that it was necessary 
to re-establish the disturbed Euro- 
pean balance ; thai a 
to restor- ,\ if not on the continent, 

'y destroyed, at 
least on the Oc 

Whether he does it, whether he 

• i! ami contagious ■ 
spread in the principal c 
Normandy ; be it thai 

, be it that a 

'■.' from 

i id death, 
bo it that tin 

his hand to smite that 

iote province. 



EXERCISES I\ COMPOSING. 

The words in the follow i tore intimated 

13), aa suggestive of thought. Tu conducting 
Leeta a particular word, a 



EXERCISES IN COMPOSING, 



271 



requires each pupil to compose a French sentence containing this 
term. The pupil is duly notified that he is at liberty to take any 
thought suggested by the word, and to produce a sentence of any 
form found in any of the foregoing Lessons ; regard being had all 
along to all the Rules, Notes, Exceptions, etc., that may bear upon 
the case. Thus, adopting as a model the sentence, Voire marcliand 
est Men ohligeant (Lesson 17, Resume) ; Le Danois a-i-il quelques 
pommes ? (Lesson 18, Rule 7) ; Connaissez-vous le Docteur L. f (Les- 
son 30, Resume) ; Ce monsieur est-il peintre ? etc., etc., let him en- 
deavor to produce others of the like kind. 

A little practice -will render the exercise both easy and interesting. 
It will soon come to be easy to incorporate not only one, but two, 
three or more of the words taken from the lists. 



Le Temps et ses Divisions. 



Time and its Divisions. 



Un siecle, an 


age, a century. 


Midi, 


noon. 


Un an, une annee, 


a year. 


L'apres-midi, 


the afternoon. 


Une saison, 


a season. 


Le soir, 


the evening. 


Un mois, 


a month. 


La nuit, 


the night. 


Une quinzaine, 


a fortnight. 


Minuit, 


midnight. 


Une semaine, 


a week. 


Aujourd'hui, 


to-day. 


Un jour, 


a day. 


Demain, 


to-morrow. 


Une heure, 
Une demi-heure, 


an hour, 
half an hour. 


Apres-demain, \ the da ? after to - 
1 ^ ( morrow. 


Un quart d'heure, 


j a quarter of 
( an hour. 


Hier, 

Avant-hier, 


yesterday. 
' the day before 
yesterday. 


Une minute, 


a minute. 




Une seconde, 


a second. 


La veille, 


the day before. 


Le matin, 


the morning. 


Le lever du soleil, 


sunrise. 


La matinee, 


the forenoon. 


Le coucher du sole! 


, sunset. 


Les Saisons. ! 


J. The Seasons. 


Le printemps, 


the spring. 


L'automne, (tonn) 


the autumn. 


L'ete, 


the summer. 


L'hiver, 


the winter. 


Les Mois. 


3. The Months. 


Janvier, 


January. 


Juillet, 


July. 


Fevrier, 


February. 


Aout, (oo) 


August. 


Mars, (Marss) 


March. 


Septembre, 


September. 


Avril, 


April. 


Octobre, 


October. 


Mai, 


May. 


Novembre, 


^November. 


Juin, 


June. 


Decernbre, 


December. 


Les Jours. 


4. The Days. 


Dimanche, 


Sunday. 


1 Jeudi, 


Thursday. 


Lundi, 


Monday. 


Vendredi, 


Friday. 


Mardi, 


Tuesday. 


Samedi, 


Saturday. 


Mercredi, 


"Wednesday. 


! Tous les jours, 


every day. 



LISTS OF TV O E D S 



Les Peixcipaux Pays 



L'Afrique, 

L'Algerie, 

L'Allemagne, 

L'Amerique, 

L'Angleterre, 

L'Autriche, 

■ \'v\ 
-riquo, 

'me, 



Africa. 

Algeria, Algiers. 
Germany. 
America. 

Austria. 

Arabia. 

Asia. 

Bavaria. 



la I :p'ta-ne.( Grande), Great Britain. 



• Canada, 

-tille, 
Le Chili, 

wo, 

La Fi.: 

'.iV3 de) 



Low. • I 
Upper Canada 

Chill 

China 



TriE Principal Countries. 

L'Hclv^tie, (see) Helvetia. 

La Hongrie, Hungary. 

L'Inde. India. 

Les Endes Occidentales, West Indies. 
Les Indes Orientalea, Last Indies. 



L'Irlandc, 
L'lslande, (iss) 

La Judee, 

t ique, 
La M( - 

:-!:tndie, 

La N"rv.'ge, 
-tine, 

Le Pi mont, 

U 1'' :•'•!. 

JO©, 

La Bar 
He, 

Clio, 



Ireland. 

Iceland. 

Japan. 

Judea. 

M> rico. 

Bfuscovy. 

Naptea 

Normandy. 

Norway. 

Pal( Btine. 

the Netherlands. 

Piedmont. 

Peru. 

Sardinia. 
Saxony. 

Si.-ily. 

- 

Switzerland. 

Syria 
Turkey. 

"Will! 



Nations. 



•ain, 
l"n AJ 

I'n A 
I'n Aj 

itique, 

. 

• union, 
I'n Br 

D i lien, 

. 'iilan, 
lien, 

On Dauoia, 



\ frican. 

an A; 

an .'. 
an A> 
a Bavarian. 

a i" 

a Bohemian. 

ladian. 
a Castilian. 

a Coi 

a Dane. 



6. 
On 

On 

Tn 

I'n 
On 

Tn 
Ci 
I'n 
I'm 

In 
I'n 
I'n 
Tn 

On 

Tn 
Un 

tJD 






GaUoia, 

lIanov. : rien, 
H.h. ti-n, 

III. lien, 

.luii; 
Nonnaud, 



• litnan. 
- ptian. 

■iiinan. 

a Welchman. 

a ( .mil. 

a Hanoverian, 
a Helvetian. 

a Urn 

an Indian, 
an Iridiman. 
an Icelander, 
a Ju] 

a .lew. 
a Mi 
a Mu 
a Ne i| 

a Norman. 



POE COMPOSING F BENCH, 



273 



Un Norvegien, 
Un Parisien, 
Un Peruvien, 
Un Persan, 
Un Piemontais, 
Un Polonaia, 
Un Prussien, 
Un Russe, 
Un Sarde, 



a Norwegian. 
a Parisian, 
a Peruvian. 



Piedrnontese. 

a Pole. 

a Prussian. 



a Sardinian. 



Un Savoyard, 
Un Saxon, 
Un Sicilien, 
Un Suedois, 
Un Suisse, 
Un Syrien, 
Un Turc, 

Un Wurtembergeois 



a Savoyard. 

a Saxon. 

a Sicilian. 

a Swede. 

a Swiss. 

a Syrian. 

a Turk. 

a Wurtein- 

bergian. 



Professions et Metiers. 7. Professions and Trades. 



Un acteur, 
Un apothicaire, 
Un artiste, 
Un aumonier, 
Un auteur, 
Un avooat, 
Un avoue, 
Un banquier, 
Un barbier, 
Un berger, 
Un bijoutier, 
Une blauchisseuse, 
Un bottier, 
Un boueher, 
Un boulanger, 
Un brasseur, 
Une brodeuse, 
Un carrossier, 
Un chapelier, 
Un charbonnier 
Un charcutier 
Un charlatan, 
Un charretier, 
Un charron, 
Un chaudronnier, 
Un chirurgien, 
Un cordier, 
Un cordonnier, 
Un corroyeur, 
Un coutelier, 
Une couturiere, 
Un couvreur, 
Un cure, 
Un dentiste, 
Un drapier, 
Un ebeniste, 
Un ecclesiastique 
Un epicier, 
Un eveque, 
Un faucheur, 
Un fermier, 
Un fripier, 
Une fruitiere, 



an actor. 

an apothecary. 

an artist. 

a chaplain. 

an author. 

a barrister. 

an attorney. 

a banker. 

a barber. 

a shepherd. 

a jeweller. 

a washerwoman. 

a bootmaker. 

a butcher. 

a baker. 

a brewer. 

an embroiderer. 

a coachmaker. 

a hatter. 

a coal-man. 

a pork butcher. 

a quack. 

a cartman. 

a waggonmaker. 

a coppersmith. 

a surgeon. 

a ropemaker. 

a shoemaker. 

a currier. 

a cutler. 



a slater, tiler. 

a vicar. 

a dentist. 

a draper. 

a cabinetmaker. 

a clergyman. 

a grocer. 

a bishop. 

a mower. 

a farmer. 

a fripperer. 

a fruit- woman. 



Un gantier, a glover. 

Un graveur, an engraver. 

Un horloger, a clock or watchmaker. 
Un instituteur, a schoolmaster. 

Une institutrice, a schoolmistress. 
Un imprimeur, a printer. 

Un jardinier, a gardener. 

Un joaillier, a jeweller. 

Un libraire, a bookseller. 

Un magon, a mason, a bricklayer. 
Un maitre d'ecole, a schoolmaster. 
Un manouvrier, a day-laborer. 

Un marchand de chevaux, ( a horse- 



Un maquignon, 

Un marechal ferrant, 

Un marechal, 

Un mcdecin, 

Un menuisier, 

Un moissonneur, 

Un musieien, 

Un naturaliste, 

Un negotiant, 

Un opticien, 

Un orateur, 

Un orfevre, a gold and silver smith. 

Le pape, the pope. 

Un parfumeur, a perfumer. 

Un patre, a shepherd, herdsman. 

Un peintre, a painter. 

Un perruquier, a hairdresser. 

Un philosophe, a philosopher. 



( dealer, 
a farrier, shoe- 

ing-smith. 

a blacksmith. 

a physician. 

a joiner. 

a reaper. 

a musician. 

a naturalist. 

a merchant. 

an optician. 

an orator. 



Uh predicateur, 
Un pretre, 
Un raffineur de 
sucre, de sel, 
Un ramoneur ', 
de cheminees, ; 
Un relieur, 
Un savetier, 
Un sculpteur, 



a preacher, 
a priest. 

a sugar, salt refiner. 

a chimney-sweeper. 

a bookbinder. 
a cobbler. 
a sculptor. 



12* 



274 



LISTS OF WOEDS 



Un sellier, 


a saddler. 


Un tisserand, 


a weaver. 


Un serrurier, 


a locksmith. 


Un tonuelier, 


a cooper. 


Un tailleur, 


a tailor. 


Un tourueur, 


a turner. 


Un tapiasier, 


an upholsterer. 


Un vitrier, 


a glazier. 


Un teinturier, 


a dyer. 


Un Toiturier, 


a cart man. 


L'HOMME. g 


Max 




Les anci-tres, 


the ancestors. 


Unfils, 


n son. 


Un arriere-petit-fils, \ a *»**«»*■ 


Le futur, 
La future, 


the bridegroom. 

tin- bride. 


Un beau-fils, a son-in-law. step-son. 


I'n gendra, 


a son-in-law. 


Un beau-fivrc, 


a brother-in-law. 


In grand-pere, 


a grandfather. 


Un bcau-pere, 


\ a father-in-law, 
"/ step-father. 


I'lii- grand's 
Unjenne bomme, 


a grandmother. 

a young num. 


Une bulle-fille, j 


a daughtertn-law, 
Btep-daughter. 


Une jeuue fille, •] 


i young woman, 
girl 


Til.- V [ 


\ a mother-in-law, 
'( step-mother. 


La jean youth. 
In junuau, unejumelle, a twin. 


I'm- belli 


.-•-in-law. 


I'n liuiri. 


a husband. 


it-grandfather. 


I'm- marraine, 


mother. 


One bra, 


a daughter-in-law. 


I.a Daifflanoe, 


the birth. 


:i, ) 


the . 


I'll!' 1H". 


a nurse. 


i'n Douveau marie, 


a bridegroom. 


1 in germain, ) tl 


I'm- nonveue mariee, a bride. 


• nn 




L'oncle, 


the undo. 






i'n arphelin, ) 
One orphehns, J 


an orphan. 


1 


child 


1 [ 


a consort 


i'n pa 


a godfather. 


in petit-flla, 


a grand-son, 


iUe, 


a family. 


In'- |»titc-lille, a 


grand-daughter. 


Une femme, 


a woman, wire. 


i.a tante, 


the aunt. 


lilies,/ 


p. betrothing. 


i ii viit; 


a widower. 


1 


in.' veuve, 




Vuu lill", 


a girl, a daughter. 


La vi 111 


old uge. 


Le Coiu\s Hujcaxk S 


Tin: IlrM.w 


Bony. 


Une aii 


an art i rv. 


ale. 


the shoulder. 


La barbe, 


beard. 


Li I'ini' (da dos), 


the spine. 


J. a DO 


the mouth. 


1 "!'i-, 


the whiskers. 




tin' arm. 


Le i'"i'-. 


the liver. 


J.- < ■• iville, 


the brain. 


Le iii mt. 


'. in ad 


La chair, 


the flesh. 




the gums. 




the eyi lashes. 


oil, 


ti • 




tlir heart 




throat 






; 


the hips. 








the leg. 




a rib. 


l..i i' hi.-. 


the rln i k. 




th'' ■ 


La lai 


the i 


|. ■ ■■ >ii.lr>, 


tlir elbow. 


La levra, 


the lip. 




tli" skull. 


i'n membra, 


a limb. 




tin- thigh. 


i..- I... tit. .ii, 


tl.e ehin. 




tin' finger. 


La mo lie, 


the : 


Lc doe, 


till.' 


.-tache, 


a mou 



FOE COMPOSING FRENCH 


275 


Un muscle, 


a muscle. 


La rate, 


the spleen. 


Uii nerfj 


a nerve. 


Les reins, 


the loins. 


Le uez, 


the nose. 


Le sang, 


the blood. 


Un ongle 


a nail. 


Le sein, 


the bosom. 


Un orteil, ) 
Un doigt du pied, J 


a toe. 


Les sourcils, 


the eyebrows. 


Un squelette, 


a skeleton. 


Un os, 


a bone 


Le talon, 


the heel. 


L'ouie, 


the hearing. 


Le teint, 


the complexion. 


Le palais, 


the palate 


Les tempes, 


the temples. 


La paupiere, 


the eyelid. 


La tete, 


the head. 


La peau, 


the skin. 


Un trait, 


a feature. 


Le pouce, 


the thumb. 


Une veine, 


a vein. 


Les poumons, 


the lungs. 


Le visage, 


the face. 


La prunelle, the pupil of the eye. 


La vue, 


the sight. 


Maladies, Infirmites, etc. 1 


). Maladies, Infirmities, etc. 


Une attaque, 


an attack, fit. 


La goutte, 


gout. 


Du baume, 


balsam. 


Une guerison, 


a cure. 


Le begaiement, 


stammering. 


L'hydropisie, 


dropsy. 


Une blessure, 


a wound. 


Une indisposition, 


an indisposition. 


La cecite, 


blindness. 


Louche, adj. 


squinting. 


Un chancre, 


a cancer. 


Un malaise, 


an indisposition. 


Une cicatrice, 


a scar. 


La migraine, 


the head-ache. 


La colique, 


colic. 


Le mutisme, 


dumbness. 


Une contusion, 


a bruise. 


De l'onguent, m. pommade, € f. salve. 


La crampe, 


cramp. 


Une ordonnance, 


a prescription. 


Une dislocation, 


a dislocation. 


La petite-verole, 


the small-pox. 


Un eraetique, 


an emetic. 


La pulmonie, 


consumption. 


Une enrlure, 


a swelling. 


Un remede, 


a remedy 


Un enrouement, 


a hoarseness. 


Un rhume, 


a cold. 


Une entorse, 


a sprain. 


La rougeole, 


the measles. 


L'epilepsie, 


epilepsy. 


Une saignee, 


a bleeding. 


Un evanouissement, 


fainting. 


La surdite, 


deafness. 


La fievre, 


fever. 


Une toux, 


a cough. 


La fievre nerveuse, 


nervous fever. 


Un ulcere, 


an ulcer. 


La fievre scarlatine, 


scarlet fever. 


Un vertige, 


dizziness. 



HABILLEJrENTS. 



11. 



Articles of Dress. 



a clasp. 



Une agrafe, 

Une aiguille, 

Une aiguille de cheveux, 

Une bague, 

Des bas, 

Du basin, 

De la batiste, 

De la bijouterie, 

Un bonnet, 

Une boucle, 

Une boucle, a lock of hair, curl. 

Des boucles d'oreilles, ear-rings. 

Une bourse, a purse. 

Un bracelet^ a bracelet. 

Des bretelles, braces, suspenders. 

Une brosse, a brush. 



hair-pin. 

a ring. 

stockings. 

dimity. 

cambric. 

jewelry. 

a cap. 

a buckle. 



Une brosse a dents, a tooth-brush. 
Un calecon, m. s. drawers. 

Une ceinture, a sash, belt, band. 



Du cirage, 


blacking. 


Des ciseaux, 


scissors. 


Une coiffure, 


a head-dress. 


Un collet, 


a collar. 


Un collier, 


a necklace. 


Du coton, 


cotton. 


Une cravate, 


a cravat. 


Du crepe, 


crape. 


De la dentelle, 


lace. 


Un diamant, 


a diamond. 


De la doublure, 


lining. 


Un ecrin, 


a casket, jewel-box. 



218 



LISTS OP TTORD 



Ui.e epe'e, 


a sword. 


Tn parapluie, 


an umbrella. 


Dea eperona, 


spurs. 


Ua parasol, 


a parasol. 


Uue epingle, 


a pin. 


Un pcignc, 


a comb. 


Un etui, m. 
Uu eventail, 


a needle-case. 
a tan. 


Des pendants-d 


«■* fss 


Un i la eon, 


a smelling-bottle. 


Une perle, 


B peal. 


La fourrure, 


the fur. 


Uue poche, 


a pocket 


Uu frac, 


a dr> ■- 


De la pominade 


pomatum. 


La Grai 


the fringe. 


Une redingote, 


at coat 


iture, 


the trimming. 


Une robe, 


a div- 


Du gn 


a tost, waistcoat 


Unerobedochambre, i a pressing- 

1 / gown. 






(tin, 


satin. 


I'll habit, 




1 >e la soie, 


silk. 


De I'ivt 


ivory. 


Un Soulier, 


a Bhoe. 




linen. 


l'n tabher, 


an apron. 






Da tail', tas, 






the 


Du velours, 


velvet 




muslin. 




a vest 


utolon, in. 




I , i \ 


a veil 


T. v 12. Town-, 


Eotjsk, Era 


. 


trie, 


a Btable. 


i 




\ 


the environs, 




BD 1 












i 








! 


. 




. 


a borough 




a « 








a Linn. 




a brick. 




a fouataia, m 11. 




1 

/ met) 


l'n four, 


. 






- 


a chimi 


l'n grand chemia. ) 

I'ruute, \ 






















1 






: 




In ha 


a li 




l'n hi p 


an Lo.-pii.il. 




a hut, 




liMhall.i-ity- 
U, town-hall. 




imaey. 


l'n m< d 


uituro. 


I 










charck- 


i.i in. i 


tot 




B 1m 11. 


Un iiiur. ) 
Une mo 






L 






l'n p . 




' 




























. 














tho custom-house. . 


1 


u board. 



FOR COMPOSING FEENCD, 



2T7 



Le plancher, 
Un poele, 
Une pompo, 
Un pont, 
Une porte, 



the floor. 

a stove. 

a pump. 

a bridge. 

a door, gate. 



a meadow. 



La poste, the post, post-office. 

Une poutre, a beam. 

Une prairie, 
Un pre, 

Une prison, a prison. 

Un puits, a well. 

Un quartier, a quarter. 

Une rampe, } (a balustrade of a 

d'escalier f ( staircase. 
Un rez-de-chaussee, a ground-floor. 
La sacristie, the vestry. 

Une salle, a parlor, sitting-room. 



Une salle a manger, a dining-room. 
Ui salon, a drawing-room, hall. 

Une serre, a conservatory. 

Une serre-chaude, a hct-house. 

Une serrure, a lock. 

Une sonnette, a bell. 

Un theatre, a theatre. 

Un toit, a roof. 

Une tour, a tower. 

Une tuile, a tile. 

Un verger, an orchard 

Un verrou, a bolt. 

Un vestibule, a hall, entry. 

La vigne, le vignoble, the vineyard. 
Un village, a village. 

Un volet, a window-shutter. 

Une voute, a vault. 



Meubles, etc. 



13. 



Une allumette, a match. 

Une allumette ) o <v„+-™ ™„+„t, 

chimique, } a fr^tion-match. 

De l'amadou, tinder. 

Une armoire, a cup-board. 

Une assiette, a plate. 

Un baril, a cask, barrel. 
Un bassin, a bowl, washbowl. 

Une baseinoire, a warming-pan. 

Un berceau, a cradle. 

Une boite a fusil, a tinder-bos. 

Une bougie, a taper.' 

Une bouilloire, a kettle. 

Un briquet, a fire-steel. 

Un cadre, a frame. 

Une cafetiere, a coffee-pot. 

Un candelabre, a chandelier. 

Une casserole, a saucepan. 

Une cassette, a box, casket. 

Une chandelle, a candle. 

Du charbon de bois, charcoal. 

Du charbon de terre, stone-coal. 

Une chaudiere, a boiler. 

Un coffre, a chest. 
Une commode, a chest of drawers. 

Une corbeille, a basket. 

Un couteau, a knife. 

Un crible, a sieve. 

Une cruche, a pitcher. 

Une cuiller,o?- cuillere, a spoon. 

Un cuvier, a tub. 

Un drap, a sheet. 

Une ecumoire, a skimmer. 

Un entonnoir, a funnel. 

Un essuie-main, a towel. 



FURNITURE, ETC. 

Un fer a repasser, a smoothing iron. 

Une fourchette, a fork. 

Un fourgon, a poker. 

Un foyer, a hearth. 

Une lampe, a lamp. 

Une lanterne, a lantern. 

Un lit, a bed. 

Un lit de plume, a feather bed. 

Une lumlere, a light. 

Un lustre, a sconce. 

Un marchepied, a footstool. 

Un mortier, a mortar. 

Les mouchettes, the snuffers. 

Un moutardier, a mustard-pot. 

Une nappe, a tablecloth. 

Un oreiller, a pillow. 

Un panier, a basket. 

Un paravent, a screen. 
Une peinture, a painting, a picture. 

Une pelle, a shovel. 

Une pierre a fusil, a flint. 

Les pincettes, the tongs. 

Une poele, a frying-pan. 

La poivriere, the pepper-box. 

Un pot, a kettle. 

Un pupitre, a desk. 

Une saliere, a saltcellar. 

Du savon, soap. 

Un seau, a pail. 

Une serviette, a napkin. 

Un sofa, a sofa. 

L T ne soucoupe, a saucer. 

Un soufflet, bellows. 

Une soupiere, a soup-tureen, 

Un sucrier, a sugar-dish, 



2VS 



LISTS OF W O It D S 



Une table, 
Un tableau, 

Una tablette, 
Un tapis, 
Une tasse, 
Une tueiere, 



a table. 

a picture. 

a shelf. 

a carpet. 
a tea-cup. 
a tea-pot. 



Un tire-boucbon, 
Un tiroir, 
Un traver.-in, 
Dea ustensilea de 

cuisine. 
Uu verre, 



a cork-screw, 
a drawer, 
a bolster. 

kitchen utensils. 

a glass. 



Plats, etc. 



14. 



Disiii> 



Du bceuf, beef 
Du b milli, boiled beef, boiled meat, 

Du bouillon, broth. 

i lie, a quaiL 

oard, a duck 

Stores, f. p. preserves, 
lette, 

I'n dindon, a turkey. 

il de mouton, a leg of mutton. 

ibon, ham. 

l"u burin, a rabbit 

I'n li'-vre, a hare. 

.ton, mutton. 

Un aeuf, an egg. 



Une omelette, 

I'll pi'itc, 

Une perdrix, 

Du pore, 

1'u poulet, 

Dee rafraichissements, 

I'u ruii. 

Une Baudsse, 
De la soupe, 

De 1.. BOupe maijjre, v 
; trte, 

I'u vcau, 

Pn vet 

De la rolaille, 



an omelet 
a pie. 
a pati 

pork. 
chicken 
refresh) 

roast meat. 

tsage. 

BOUp. 
egetable 

a tart. 

veaL 

vermicelJe. 

fowl. 



:v, BTOi 



15. 



. ;:ux, ktc. 



'. m., pi. aulx 
line, 
Uu bl£, 

Un champignon, 

I ■ 

I ifleur, 

1 

SOD, 

I 

i'n'- berbe, 
De la taitue, 



. crarlie. 

a rrm 

a can 
a cucumber. 

- 

n kernel. 
an herb. 

lettuce. 

lentils, 
maise. ■ 



Da millet. 

• 
Die, 

I'll panels, 

I "i penal, 
I'm- plante, 

One pomme d 

ilio, 

i'ii radia, 
lm r.iilort, 
I'm- rave, 
I'u riz, 
De la 
I'.' la sauge, 

I'u tlivm. 



millet. 
turnipBi 

onions. 

1 'alley. 

BorreL 

n pareuip. 

paralejr. 

a plant 

a potato. 

a Pint. 

radish (turnip). 

borse-radiah. 

a radish (long). 

Halad. 

aaga, 

thyme. 

a truffle. 



Abbess FsumBss, Fauna 16. Faun Tt.kfs, FnnTs. 
Unabr an apricot, l Un chataignier, a chesto 

an apricot-tree, i'n citron, •>. lemon. 

Une an an almond, i'n citronnier, a lem 

i nn almond-tn a qoinoa, 

a pineapple, 

a filbert. Une i 
I a el, 



FOE COMPOSING FRENCH. 



279 



Une fraise, 


a strawberry. 


Une orange, 


an orange. 


Une framboise, 


a raspberry. 


Un oranger, 


an orange-tree. 


Un framboisier, a raspberry-bush. 


Une pavie, a clingstone peach. 


Une groseille, a gooseberry, currant. 


Une peche, 


a peach. 


tt „ mm ;ii„, ( a currant, or goose- 
Un groseiller, j beny ^ uah f 


Un pecher, 
Une poire, 


a peach-tree, 
a pear. 


Un melon, 


a melon. 


Un poirier, 


a pear-tree. 


Une mure, 


a mulberry. 


Une pomme, 


an apple. 


Un murier, a 


mulberry-tree. 


Un pommier, 


an apple-tree. 


Une nefle, 


a medlar. 


Une prune, 


a plum. 


Une noisette, 


a hazel-nut. 


Un prunier, 


a plum-tree. 


Une noix, 


a nut. 


Du raisin, 


grapes. 


Uu noyer, 


a nut-tree. 


Une vigne, 


a grape vine. 


Aebres Forestiers. 1' 


', Forest Trees. 


Un bouleau, 


a birch. 


Un orme, 


an elm. 


Un buisson, 


a bush. 


Un peuplier, 


a poplar. 


Un ehene, 


an oak. 


Un rameau, 


a bough. 


L'ecorce, 


the bark. 


Un sapin, 


a pine. 


Un erable, 


a maple. 


Un saule, 


a willow. 


Un frene, 


an ash. 


Un tfileul, 


a linden-tree. 


Un hetre, 


a beech. 


Un tremble, 


an aspen. 


Un inelese, 


a larch. 


Un tronc, 


a trunk. 


Fleurs, 


ETC. 1 


3. Flowers, 


ETC. 


Une auricule, 


an auricula. 


Un ceillet, 


a pink. 


Un chardon, 


a thistle. 


Une ortie, 


a nettle. 


Du chevre-feuille, 


honeysuckle. 


Un pavot, 


a poppy. 


Une giroflee, 


a gillyflower. 


Une pensce, 


i forget-me-not. 


Une jacinthe, 


a hyacinth. 


Un pied d'alouette, 


a larkspur. 


Du jasmin, 


jessamine. 


Une primevere, 


a cowslip. 


Un lis, 


a lily. 


Une rose, 


a rose. 


Une marguerite, 


a daisy. 


Un tournesol, 


a sunflower. 


Une mauvaise herbe, 


a weed. 


Une tulipe, 


a tulip. 


Un myrte, 


* a myrtle. 


Une violette, 


a violet. 


OlSEATJS 


1 


). Birds. 


Un aigle, 


an eagle. 


Un corbeau, 


; a raven. 


Une aile, 


a wing. 


Une corneille, 


a crow. 


Une alouette, 


a lark. 


Un coucou, 


a cuckoo. 


Un autour, 


a hawk. 


Un cygne, 


a swan. 


Une autruche, 


an ostrich. 


Un dindon, 


a turkey. 


Le bee, 


the beak. 


Un faisan, 


a pheasant. 


Une becasse, 


a woodcock. 


Un geai, 


a jackdaw. 


Une becassine, 


a snipe. 


Une grive, 


a thrush. 


Une bergeronnette, 


a wagtail. 


Un heron, 


a heron. 


Une caille, 


a quail. 


Une hirondelle, 


a swallow. 


Un canard, 


a duck. 


Une linotte, 


a linnet. 


Un canari, 


a canary-bird. 


Un merle, 


a blackbird. 


Un chardonneret, 


a goldfinch. 


Une oie, 


a goose. 


Une chauve-souris, 


a bat. 


Un oiseau de proie, 


a bird of prey. 


Une cigogne, 


a stork. 


Un paon, 


a peacock. 


Une colombe, 


a dove. 


Un passereau, 


a sparrow. 



280 



LISTS OF WOEDS. 



Un perroqnet, 


a parrot 


Un roitelet, 


a wren. 


One perdris, 


a partridge. 


Un rossignol, 


a nightingale. 


Une pie, 


a magpie. 


Un rouge-gorge, 


a redbreast. 


l"n pig-eon, 


a pigeon. 


Vn serin, 


a canary-bird. 


Uue poule, 


a hen. 


Une tourterelle, 


a turtle-dove. 


Un poulet, 


a chicken. 


Un vautour, 


a vulture. 


QUADRUPEDES. 20. QUADRUPEDS. 


Vn agneau, 


a lamb. 


Un Eevre, 


a hare. 


. . i can, 


a badger. 


Un lion, 


B lion. 


star, 


a beaver. 


Un loup, 


a woK 


l"u <-rr; 




Une mule, 


a mule. 


T';i cha 


a cl 


On ours. 


a In ar. 


One ch 




I'n poulain, 


a cult. 


I'm chei 


a roebuck. 


l'n pourceao, 


a hog, swine. 


ireuil, 


lirrel. 


Un renard, 


a (hoc 




■ hrret 


Un singe, 


a monkey. 


T'n li.ri.sson, 




l'n'' taupe, 


B lilele. 


Un lapin. 


a rabbit. 


l'n tigre, 




^'»N'S. 21. 


fuQlo, 




: Ian, 


a whiting. 


1 


a whale. 


roe, 


a codfish. 






robe, 




r ! K '. 


:i OBip. 


I'iiii, 


a ihark. 


1 


a shrimp. 


.'-i"ii, 




; 












■'■•h.', 




I'm ban 


a bi 


i tin-, 


a turtle. 


: 


a r>. 1 i 


dte, 






U lobster. 


in torbotj 


a turi'i'l. 




2 


2. 




■' '. 










. 


I'n litnai/i'l), 




' tulle, 


rpillar. 


I'm' mouche, 


a By. 




topper. 


l'n papflkm, 


a butterfly. 






l'n.- 1 






■ 


I'll.- pui 


a bug. 


; 




1 




1 




i -Telle, 




.riui, 


an :int. 


| lit, 




■ 




One 1 




illon, 
















OCTILS, 


ETC. 2 


3. Tools, 




FJne aldne, 


an awl. 


I'll.- carabine. 








Une charm, 








l'n chi 




I'm- 1 • 




• ire, 




;• Ito, 


a wheelbarrow. 




a hatchet 


. V-t, 




Do l.i OOUBj 





ABBREVIATIONS. 



281 



Un compas, 


compasses. 


Un marteau, 


Un echafaudage, 


a scaffold. 


Une meule, 


Une echelle, 


a ladder. 


Un pain a cacheter, 


Une enclume, 


an anvil. 


Une pelle, 


Un etau, 


a vice. 


Une pince, 


Une faucille, 


' a sickle. 


Un pinceau, 


Une faux, 


a scythe. 


Une poulie, 


Un fleau, 


a flail. 


Un rabot, 


Un fusil, 


a gun. 


Un rouleau, 


Une hache, 


an axe. 


Une sabliere, 


Un hamecon, 


a fishhook. 


Une scie, 


Une herse, 


a harrow. 


Une serrure, 


Une houe, 


a hoe. 


Des tenailles, 


Une ligne, 


a line. 


Une truelle, 


Une lime, 


a file. 

■ ■ < ♦ 


Une vis, 



a hammer. 

a grindstone. 

a wafer. 

a shovel. 

a crowbar. 

a brush, pencil. 

a pulley. 

a plane. 

a roller. 

a sand-box. 

a saw. 

a lock. 

pincers. 

a trowel. 

a screw. 



ABKEVIATIONS. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



A. P. A protester. 

A. S. P. Accepte sous protet. 

A. S. P. 0. Accepte sous protet, pour 
a-compte. 

B on - Baron. 

C er - Chevalier. 

C te - Oomte. 

Osse. Comptesse. 

D 1 '- Docteur. 

j)r. j^d. Docteur-medecin. 

E. Est. f 

J.-O. Jesus-Christ. 

LL. AA. II. Leurs Altesses Impe- 
rials. 

LL. AA. RR. Leurs Altesses Roya- 
les. 

LL. AA. SS. Leurs Altesses Sere- 



Imper 



LL. Em. Leurs Eminences. 
LL. Ex. Leurs Excellences. 
LL. HH. Leurs Hautesses. 
LL. MM. Leurs Majestes. 
LL. MM. II. Leurs Majestes 

riales. 
LL. MM. RR. Leurs. Majestes Roya- 

les. 
M. ou M r - Monsieur. 
M B - ou M tre - Maitre. 
M. A. Maison assuree. 
M. A. C. I. Maison assuree contre 

l'incendie. 
M d - Marchand. 
M de - Marchande. 



To be protested. 

Accepted under protest 

Accepted under protest, on account. 

Baron. 

Chevalier, knight, sir. 

Count. 

Countess. 

Doctor. 

Doctor of medicine. 

East. 

Jesus Christ. 

Their Imperial Highnesses. 

Their Royal Highnesses. 

Their Most Serene Highnesses. 

Their Eminences. 
Their Excellencies. 
T/ieir Highnesses. 
Their Majesties. ' 
Their Imperial Majesties. 

Tlieir Eoyal Majesties. 

Sir, Mr. 

Master. 

House insured. 

House insured against fire. 

Dealer, shopkeeper, m. 
Dealer, shopkeeper, f. 



282 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



M :! "- Mademoiselle. 
M-"- Mouseigneur. 
M'- Marquis. 

i(juise. 
MM. Messieurs. 
M'"' Madame. 

Mat, Manuscrit 

-\. B. Not a tieno 
N. D. Notre-Dama 
X.-X.-K. Nord-nord-est 
X.-X.-< >. Nord-nord-ouest 

_ oti&nt 

•iautc. 
niero. 

gnear. 

J igucur Jl'sus- 

ord. 

I ■mm. 
i:. i". ;: 

S. A. !. Tmpt'rialo. 

B.A.B Etoyale. 

[ear. 

S. EL E 

a m. g 

s. M. . Britanniqne. 

B. M. I i btholiqae. 
B. M i 
B- M. i: loyale. 

B. M. r !. in a rim'- 

ti'IHH'. 

S. M. i 

- Ld-eud-ooast 



Miss. 

My lord. 
Marquis. 
Marchioness. 

M> ssrs. Gentlemen. 
Madam. Mrs. 

>ipt. 
Nota bene. 
Oar Lady. 
Xorth-itvrth-east. 
North-not 

'. in. 
■',(, £ 
2Hunber. 

nl. 
Our Lord Jesus Christ. 

II' rf. 

■7/i. 

rial Highness. 

Hi, ■-■II.. a Bishop). 

7/ j // . u u (the Turkish Kmporor). 

" 

I 

'rrs. 
SouQi-soiUh-vxsL 



FASQUELLE'S 

NEW FRENCH COURSE. 

PAET SECOND. 

§ 1. — Parts of Speech. 

(1.) There are, in French, ten sorts of words or parts of speech : 
Nouns or Substantives, Participles, 

Articles, Adverbs, 

Adjectives, Prepositions, 

Pronouns, Conjunctions, 

Verbs, Interjections. 

(2.) These are divided into variable, and invariable words. 
(3.) The variable words are those the termination of which ad- 
mits of various changes ; by these changes, various modifications of 
meaning are expressed. The variable words are of six kinds : 
The Noun, The Pronoun, 

The Article, The Verb, 

The Adjective, The Participle. 

(4.) The invariable words are those the termination of which 
never changes : 

The Adverb, The Conjunction, 

The Preposition, The Interjection. 

(5.) All variable parts of speech have two numbers : the singular, 
which denotes but -one, and the plural, which denotes more than one. 
(6.) All variable parts of speech, except the verb, have two gen- 
ders : the masculine and the feminine. 

§ 2. — Cases. 

The cases adopted by French grammarians are : 

(1.) The nominatif or sujet ; answering to the nominative or sub- 
ject of the English, and to the nominative of the Latin. 

(2.) The regime direct, or direct object of the English, accusative 
of the Latin. 

(3.) The regime indirect, indirect object of the English, answers to 
the oblique cases of the Latin, the genitive, dative, and ablative. 



2S4 GENDEE. — § 3, 4, 5. 

§ 3. — The Xorx or SrcsTAXTAnvE. 
(1.) The noun or substantive is a word -which serves to name a 
person or a thing; as Jean, John ; maison, house. 

(2.) There are two sorts of nouns : proper and common. 

A. proper noun is applied to a particular person, or thing ; as, 
X'tpoleon; Paris, Paris. 
(4.) A common noun belongs to a whole class of objects ; as, livre, 

•>mme, man. 
(5 ) Some common nouns, although singular in number. pr< 
to the mind the idea of Beveral persons or things, forming a colleo- 

V<7/<v nouns; as, troupe, 
uple, people. 
(6.) Collective noons are general, or partitive; general, when they 
lent an entire collection; as, I'armee d 

. n they represent ;i partial collection; as, 
i 

i 7.i A • 

■■in. 1 noon. 

. ■'■ ■. we shall 

• 

\ \. -QmtDEB. 

(l.i Ther y two genders: the 

■ 

and animals of the male kind, 

to women, and animals of the 
ne and fem 

i: DETKEMHONQ GENDER Bl THI M i: a.\ l.\. ;. 

(1.) bomme, (1.) Female I fernine, 

■i ; lionne, >'. 
'• cte to which male i to which female 

qaalil 

pirit); liine, 

■'. rhar- 

le printen 

GSvrier, /■ .- except l'< 



GENDER, 



285 



Masculine. 
(4.) The days of the week: 
lundi, Monday; mardi, Tuesday, 
etc. 

(5.) The names of the cardinal 
points and the winds : as, Test, 
the East; l'ouest, the West, etc. 
[See exceptions opposite.] 

(6.) The names used in the 
French decimal system : as, cen- 
time (hundredth part of a franc); 
kilogramme (1000 grammes, about 
two pounds); metre, etc. 

(7.) Metals : le fer, iron; l'acier, 
steel, etc. 

(8.) Colors: le vert, green; le 
jaune, yellow. 

(9.) The names of empires and 
kingdoms when ending with a 
consonant : le Danemarc, Den- 
mark ; le Bresil, Brazil. 

(10.) Mountains : le Jura, Mount 
Jura; le Puy-de-Dotne, 1 the 
Puy de Dome; le Cenis, le St. 
Bernard, Mount Cents, Mount St. 
Bernard. 

(11.) The names of rivers when 
ending with a consonant : le Rhin, 
the Rhine ; le Nil, the Nile. 



(12.) Trees, shrubs : le chene, 
the oak ; le frene, the ash ; le rosier, 
the rose-bush. [Exceptions op- 
posite.] 

(13.) The name of a language : 
as, le francais, French; l'alle- 
mand, German, etc. 

(14.) The letters of the alpha- 
bet : un a, an a ; un z, a z. 

(15.) Compound words formed 
of a verb and of a noun, either 
masculine or feminine, or of a 
pronoun and a verb : porte-feuille, 
pocket-book ; rendez-vous, rendez- 
vous. 



Feminine. 

(5.) Festivals : la Saint Jean, i.e. 
la fete de St. Jean, St. John's 
day ; la Chandeleur, Candlemas ; 
except Noel, Christ-mas, masc. 

Bise, a poetical term for North 
wind. Tramontane, a term ap- 
plied on the Mediterranean to the 
North wind. Brise, breeze ; mous- 
sons, trade-winds. 



(6.) The names of countries 
when ending in e mute : la France, 
l'Espagne, l'Amerique, etc. 

Exc. Bengale, Hanovre, Me- 
xique, Peloponese. 

(7.) Chains of mountains in the 
plural: les Alpes, the Alps; les 
Pyrenees, the Pyrenees ; les Vo- 
ges, les Cevennes, etc. 

(8.) The names of rivers when 
ending with e mute : la Seine, the 
Seine ; la Loire, the Loire. 

Exc. Le Rhone, the Rhone ; le 
Danube, le Tibre, le Cocyte, masc. 

(9.) Aubepine, hawthorn ; bour- 
daine, black alder ; epine, thorn ; 
hieble, dwarf-elder ; ronce, brier; 
yeuse, ilex. 



(10.) G-arde-robe, wardrobe ; 
perce-neige, spring-crocus ; perce- 
feuille, hare's-ear. 



1 The word Puy, from the Celtic puech, mountain, is applied to a num- 
ber of places in France : Puy-en-Velay ; Puy-notre-Dame, etc. 



280 GENDER, BY THE TEE 311 NATION. § 6. 

Masculine. Fern in ine. 

(16.) Nouns, pronouns, verbs, 
etc, used substantively : le boire 
et le manger, eating and drinking. 

! 17. i Number — sardinal, ordi- (11.) Moitie*, half ; anil all num- 
nal. an I proportional — used sub- bers ending with aine ; doueaine. 
stantively: le due, the tenth; le dozen; ceutaine, hundred, etc. 
ueuvieme, the ninth : le tiers, the 
third. [Exceptions opposite.] 

§ 6. — Gender, by the termination. 

(1.) The exceptions to the masculine will be found opposite the 
termination, in the feminine column ; and the exceptions to the feui- 
iniuc, iu the masculine column, also opposite. 





(2.) Consonants. 






B 




/■' minine T> rminatians. 






Tm»in- Example. Eiujlwh. 
ation. 


1 !'. 11 






i b radoub, 
Mil plumb. 


/ushij) 

lead. 


c 








BO 1 






10 D 






oc soc, 
DC 






ho tronc, 






■ lero, 






sc lisc, 




D 


>:n | 
n> nid, 


ntst. 




. niimd. 


tripod. 

Talmud. 




m marchand, 


int. 




Kl> 1 




P 


IF - 
DF 
Bf 1 


chief. 

sUij. 


Exo. — clef, hey; nef, ship, 

1 l hirst. 



rank. 
arrack 



GENDEE, BY THE TERMINATION. § 0. 2S7 



Masculine Terminations. 



Feminine Terminations. 



AL 


bal, 


ball. 




EL 


sel, 


salt. 




IL 


solei', 


sun. 




OL 


sol, 


soil. 




UL 


calcul, 


calculation. 


M 


AM 


Adam, 


Adam. 




EM 


harem, 


harem. 




IM 


daim, 


deer. 




Oil 


nom, 


name. 




UM 


parfum, 


perfume. 


N 


AN 


cadran, 


dial. 




EN 


examen, 


examination. 




IN 


raisin, 


grape. 




ON 


not preceded by is or gi 






si, ti, 


el 






baton, 


stick. 






gazon, 


turf. 






blason, 


blazon. 






bison, bison; horizon, ho- 


ISON 




rizon , 


oison, gosling 






poison 


, poison : tison 






firebrand. 


GION 








SION 




bastion, 


bastion ; bestion 


TION 




figure- 


head of a ship. 


XION 
P 


AP 


drap, 


cloth. 




OP 


galop, 


gallop. 




UP 


coup, 


blow. 


Q 


OQ 


coq-d'Inde, turkey. 








R 


AB 


char, 


car. 




EK 


fer, 


iron. 





Exc. — faim, hunger ; male- 
faim, excessive hunger. 



Exc. — fin, end; vaa,m,hand. 

Exc. — chanson, song; cuis- 
son, baking ; contre- 
facon, counterfeiting ; 
facon, mode ; moisson, 
harvest; moussons,tfra<2e- 
winds ; rancon, ransom. 

maison, house. 

[Exceptions opposite.] 

region, region. 

pension, pension. 

question, question. 

reflexion, reflection. 



ir plaisir, pleasure. 

or or, gold. 

UR not preceded by e 
azur, azure. 

bonheur, happiness ; coeur, 
heart ; choeur, chorus ; de- 
nominateur, denominator ; 
deshomieuT,dishonor;equa- 
teur, equator; exterieur, 



Exc. — cuiller, spoon ; mer, 

sea. 
chair, flesh. 

Exc. — tour, tower, cour, 

court. 
chaleur, heat. 
hauteur, height. 
[Exceptions, opposite.] 



GEXDEE, BY THE TEE MI NATION. ! 



Masculine Terminations, 
exterior ; honneur, honor ; 
inte'rieur, interior ; labeur, 
labor; mallieur, misfor- 
tune; multiplicateur, mul- 
tiplier; pleura, fears; t&- 
gtilateur, regulator ; vcuti- 
lateiir, ventilator. 



E — Continued. 

Feminine Terminations. 
eur — Continued. 

[Exceptions opposite.] 



AS 


bras. 


arm. 


la 




80 


19 






os 


OS, 


bone. 


US 






PS 




fther. 


i;~ 






AT 


cliiimt, 


clit/iatr. 


Ef 






IT 


lit. 


I...I. 






dm 










j,.nt, 








Exc. 
amaryllis, amaryJUa ; lire- 
Ms, s/ieej, ■ foia, time ; BOU- 
ria, mouse; vis, screw.-; 
oasis, oasis. 



X.'. 




fordt, 


forest. 


unit, 


n i<jli f. 


dot, 


dower. 



dent, (oaA ,• gea^ people; 

jlllllcllt. /m//r. 

part, aaare; bplapart, fa 
mot! 



A | 
















1\ 


prix, 








courronx, 


anger. 




HI 


lynx, 


/(/"'". 


a 


u 








f/. 








1/ 


riz, 




(3.) 1 

A 


A 









EXO. — OTOiZ, CT0W/ noix, 
><»/ ; paiZ, ]>e,,re ; v,,ix. 

perdrix, ;»/>•- 
frtfya ; poix. ptteA. 

ExO. — chaux, time .• Unix, 

eq/the; toux, ongA, 



EXO. — vinul.n, a snc/ o/«rf- 



A c mpl< . ruling in r mate (a majority of 

murine) would be, rrom its length, of little prai 
who would find it* . tionary than to 

Bnch list Wo will give I them 



GENDER, BY THE T E E M I N AT I O N . 



6. 289 



according to their gender, and placing the exceptions under the exam- 
ples given for the terminations, instead of putting them, as hitherto, 
in the opposite column. 



Masculine Terminations. 
abe astrolabe, astrolab. 

Exc. — Souabe, Suabia ; 
syllabe, syllable. 
acle miracle, miracle. 

Exc— debacle, breaking 
up of the ice ; made, a 
mineral. 
acre sacre, consecration. 

Exc. — nacre, mother of 
pearl. 
age courage, courage. 

Exc. — im&ge,image; rage, 

rage ; page, page of a 

booh ; cage, cage; nage, 

swimming; -plage, beach. 

aire salaire, salary. 

Exc. — affaire, affair; aire, 
floor; glaire, white of 
egg ; grammaire, gram- 
mar ; paire, pair ; jug- 
ulaire, jugular-vein ; 
haire, hair-cloth; ehaire, 
pulpit ; serpentaire, 
snake-root ; parietaire, 
pellitory ; and a few 
other names of plants. 
ARE hectare, hectare (a 
measure). 
astre cadastre, register. 
atjme chaume, thatch. 

Exc. — paume, tennis. 
K not immediately preceded 
by t or ti: abrege, 
abridgment. 
ege college, college. 

Exc. — Norvege, Norway. 
eme careme, Lent. 

Exc. — creme, cream ; 
breme, bream ; bireme, 
trireme, galley with two 
or three rows of oars. 
etre pretre, priest. 

Exc. — fenetre, window ; 
guerre, gaiter. 
etjrre beurre, butter. 
idre cidre, cider. 



Feminine Terminations. 
ace grace, grace. 

Exc. — espace, space, 
ade parade, parade. 

Exc. — stade, stadium; 
grade, grade. 
aie haie, hedge. 

ance importance, importance. 
anse danse, dance. 

asse masse, mass. 

Exc. — Parnasse, Par- 



ee nuee, cloud. 

Exc. — apogee, apogee; 
athee, atheist ; camee, 
cameo ; colisee, coli- 
seum ; coryphee, cory- 
pheus ; empyree, highest 
heaven ; lycee, lyceum ; 
mausolee, mausoleum ; 
musee, museum ; hj- 
menee, marriage; pe- 
rigee, perigee ; pygmee, 
pygmy; trochee, trochee ; 
trophee, trophy ; spon- 
dee, spondee ; scarabee, 
scarabee. 
eine baleine, whale, 
ence cadence, cadence. 

Exc. — silence, silence. 
ENNE antienne, anthem. 

Exc. — renne, reindeer 



ojjence. 
esse tristesse, sadness. 
ie charpie, lint. 

.Exc. — genie, genius ; peri- 
helie, perihelion ; incen- 
die, conflagration ; para- 
pluie, umbrella; pavie, 
clingstone peach. 
iere chaudidre, boiler. 

ine doctrine, doctrine. 
IQTJE pratique, practice. 
ive rive, shore. 

isse coulisse, sliding-shutter. 
lle paille, straw. 

Exc. — intervalle, interval ; 



290 



GEXDEE. § 1 , 



Masculine Terminations. 
isme prisme, prism. 
isque risque, risk. 

Exc. — bisque, soup. 
ISTE e"beniste, cabinet-maker. 
Exc. — batiste, cambric 
liste, list ; piste, track. 
tjge refuge, refuge, 
tste arbuste, shrub. 



PPE 
KRE 



Til': 

TTK 



rp.E 

WE 



Feminine Terminations. 

libelle, libel ; vermicelle, 
verm icelli ; violoncelle, 
violoncello ; eheviv- 
feuille, honey-suckle ; 
portei'euille, po<-ket-book; 
vaudeville, vaudeville. 

bosse, bunch. 

Exo. — a ilosse, colossus ; 
carrosse, fja'7i. 

nappe, table-cloth. 
■ ceded fry u. 

terre, fand 

Exc. — lierre, wy; parterre, 

r-garden; tonnerre, 

thund' r ; paratonnerre, 

lightning rod ; vi ire, 

glass. 

auntie, friendship. 

patte, 

Exc. — amulet te, amulet ; 
squelette, th 

nature, nature, 
■ ise. 
cuve, tub. 



mi'li, iwon. 

Exc. — f"i, faith; fourrni, 

ant ; ■PreB Blidl, 

noon ; )<>i, /-/«' : inerci, 

mercy. 



c rrvenu, WW 

Exr. — brn, ilaughtcr-in- 

: plu, 

tribu, (rJMi 
£ 7.— NOUOT M\- ii;vi: iv nvi: ACCEPTATION, am 






l sing.), 



MM IN nil. OTHER, 




Ifascu 




r 


ass 
















<■//. 








■ "iy). 


• 


ccirji. 


oma 






tore). 






male and female. 




apa 


crape. 


• 




delight. 


1 ipl.1, 





PLURAL OF NOUNS. — 8 8. 



291 



Masculine. 




Feminine. 


Espace, 


space. 


Espace, 


leading (in print- 
ing), 
writing-copy. 


Exemple, 


example. 


Exemple, 


Faux, 


forgery. 


Paux, 


scythe. 


Foret, 


drill. 


Foret, 


forest. 


Greffe, 


office of clerk of a 
court. 


Greffe, 


graft. 


Heliotrope, 


sun flower. 


Heliotrope, 


a mineral. 


Hymne, 


classical chant. 


Hymne, 


Christian hymn. 


Livre, 


book. 


Livre, 


pound. 


Manche, 


handle. 


Manche, 


sleeve, 


Memoire, 


memoir, bill. 


Memoire, 


memory. 


Mode, 


mode, (grammar,) 
system. 


Mode, 


fashion. 


Moule, 


mould, model. 


Moule, 


shell-fish. 


Mousse, 


cabin boy. 


Mousse, 


moss. 


CEuvre, (m. & 


f.) work. 


GEuvres, 


literary works. 


Office, 


divine service. 


Office, 


pantry. 


Ombre, 


a game. 


Ombre, 


shadow, spectre. 


Orgue (sing.), 


organ. 


Orgues (pi.), 


organ. 


Palme, 


hand, a measure. 


Palme, 


the advantage. 


Panache, 


plume. 


Panache, 


pea-hen. 


Parallele, 


comparison. 


Parallele, 


parallel line. 


Pendule, 


pendulum. 


Pendule, 


clock. 


Periode, 


acme, height. 


Periode, 


period, epoch. 


Pivoine, 


a bird. 


Pivoine, 


a flower. 


Plane, 


plane-tree.- 


Plane, 


joiner's tool. 


Platine, 


platina. 


Platines, 


small metallic 
plates. 


Poele, 


stove, pall. 


Poele, 


frying-pan. 


Poste, 


place, office. 


Poste, 


post-office. 


Pretexte, 


pretence. 


Pretexte, 


a Roman robe. 


Regale, 


organ-pipe. 


Regale, right 


of receiving the reve- 






nues of a vacant bishopric. 


Remise, 


hackney-coach. 


Remise, 


carriage-house. 


Serpentaire, 


constellation. 


Serpentaire, 


dragon-wort. 


Solde, 


balance of account. 


Solde, 


pay. 


Somme, 


nap, sleep. 


Somme, 


sum. 


Souris, 


smile. 


Souris, 


mouse. 


Tour, 


tour, turn, trick. 


Tour, 


tower. 


Vague, 


space, emptiness 


Vague, 


wave. 


Vase, 


vase, vessel. 


Vase, 


mire, slime. 


Voile, 


veil. 


Voile, 


sail. 



§ 8. — Formation of the Plural of Nouns. 
(1.) The plural in French, as in English, is formed by the addition 
of s to the singular. 

Singular. Plural. 

maison, liouse maisons, houses. 

ville, town; villes, towns. 

(2.) First exception. — Nouns ending in the singular with s, x, or z, 
have the same form in the plural. 



292 PLURAL OF NOUNS. — § 8 



Singular. 
fils, son ; 
voix, voice; 
nez, nose; 


Plural. 
fils, sons. 
voix, voices. 
nez, noses. 


(3.) Second exception. — Nouns 


ending in the singular with au and 


eu, take x in the pluraL 




Singular. 
chapeau, hat; 
feu, fire; 


Pbral 

chapcaux. hats; 
feux, ,/frBKi 


(4.) Third exception. — The following nouns ending in ou take ■ in 


the pluraL 

Singular. 
bijou. 

caillou, pel 
ebon, cabbage; 

joujou, playOiing; 


caillnux, pebbles. 
dhotu 

iux, An«fs. 
hiboui 

joujou x, jilay things. 


nouns ending in ail, change 
that terrninat. D ■ the plural. 


■ 
■ase; 

BOUph 

travail, labor; 


coru 
ema 

BOUpiratlX, air-holes. 
; BOUS-baOX, under-leases. 
traraox, labors. 



. .n. — The following nouna form their plural irreg- 
ularly. 

Plural. 

nil, • 

ootflfc CUwut 

(7.") fl fefl rrrrpt!..n. — Nouns ending in the singular with al, chanw 
■! into <ius in the plural.' 

Plural 
.red; p'ii. : rauv, generals. 

oberal MX, horses. 

mal. evils. 

, Ciel, ceil, aieul, travail, have t\v>. phi 

Singular. PluraL 

■ m ; 



lacaL, jackal; 



PLUKAL OF COMPOUND NOUNS — § 9. 293 

ceil, eye; yeux, eyes. 

ceil-de-bceuf, oval window oeils-de-bceuf, oval windows. 

aieul, ancestor; ai'eux, ancestors. 

ai'eul, grandfather ; aieuls, grandfathers. 

travail, labor; travaux, labors. 

travail, trave; travails, traves. 

§ 9. — Plural of Compound Nouns. 
(1.) When two nouns form a compound substantive, both take the 
plural ending. 

Singular. Plural. 

chef-lieu, chief place ; chefs-lieux, chief places. 

lieutenant-colonel, lieutenant- lieutenants-colonels, lieutenant- 

colonel ; colonels. 

(2.) When a compound noun is formed of two substantives joined 
by a preposition, the first only takes the plural ending. 
Singular. Plural. 

arc-en-ciel, rainbow; arcs-en-ciel, rainbows. 

chef-d'oeuvre, masterpiece; chefs-d'oeuvre, masterpieces. 

The words tete-a-tete and coq-a-1'ane (an incongruous discourse), remain 
unchanged in the plural. 

(3.) When a noun and an adjective form a compound noun, both 
are varied in the plural. 

Singular. Plural. 

gentilhomme, nobleman; gentilshommes, noblemen. 

porte-cochere, carriage-door ; portes-cocheres, carriage- doors. 

basse-cour, poultry-yard ; basses-cours, poultry-yards. 

(4.) For the sake of euphony, the mark of the plural 1 is omitted in 
the adjective of the following compound words. 

Singular. Plural. 

grand'mere, grandmother; grand'meres, grandmothers. 

grand'messe, high-mass; grand'messes, high-masses. 

(5.) The words, monsieur, sir, Mr., gentleman ; madame, madam, 
or Mrs., mademoiselle, miss, form their plural as foUows. 
Singular. Plural. 

monsieur, sir, etc. ; messieurs, sirs, gentlemen. 

madame, madam, etc. ; mesdames, ladies, etc. 

mademoiselle, miss, etc. ; mesdemoiselles, young ladies, etc. 

(6.) In words composed of a noun and a verb, a preposition, or an 
adverb, the noun takes the form of the plural ; provided, however, 
there is plurality in the idea. 

Singular. Plural. 

passe-port, passport ; passe-ports, passports. 

avant-garde, vanguard; avant-gardes, vanguards. 

1 The mark of the feminine also. 



294 



PLUKAL OF NOUNS. — § 10, 11, 12. 



(7.) Compound nouns of which the second word indicates plural- 
ity, take s in the singular and plural. 

Singular. Plural 

cure-dents, a tooth- cure-dents, toothy 

- 

| 8. i Words composed of two verbs, or of a verb joined to an ad- 
verb, or a preposition, are invariable. 

itor. rium!. 

poor-bo pour-b 

| 10.— Nouns which have no Plural. 
id.) The names of metals considered in th« . or, jroW; 

i 

eta 
,:;,) t virtues and ■ me names relating to 

and moral man : a<. la . 

beautiful, 

< i !._%■,,, Kg win, || ii \\ EE \<» SlXGULAB IV THB 

BiKKH i cvrar. 

Arrlics. 

1 

nbrca, 

Kuviv 

(HUB, 

§ 12. — PfiOPBS \ami>. 

, l , Pj invariable, '-yen 

when preceded by the plural article, lea. 1 

d'avoir pro- 

birth 8 •■■cas. 

B ITNOOABD. 

n used by tho French before uviduals, 

Sco second e.\ 



.oney. 










hin<j. 












, 


to U under arrest 








■ 




»hL 






. 


MoBurs, 


mm 




Moucl 




confines. 




i 






. 


•rns. 


Pleurs, 








•i time. 


* presents. 




rliirkness. 








environs. 


. 


window-glass. 



THE ARTICLE. § 13. 295 

Les Locke, les Montesquieu, les Locke, Montesquieu, J. J. Rous- 

J. J. Rousseau, en se levant en Eu- seau, as they arose in Europe, called 

rope,appel.-rent les peuples moclernes upon modem nations to claim their 

a la liberte. Chateaubriand. liberty. 

(2.) When proper names are used figuratively, they take the form 
of the plural. 

La France a eu ses Cesars et ses France has had its Ccesars and 
Pompees. Noel et Chapsal. Pompeys. 

That is, generals like Pompey and Cassar. 

Un coup d'ceil de Louis enfan- A glance from Louis produced 
tait des Corneilles. Delille. Corneilles. 

That is, poets like Corneille. 

§ 13. — The Article. 

(1.) The article is a word prefixed to a noun, or to a word used 
substantively, to determine the extent of its signification. 

(2.) Modern French grammarians recognize only one article, 

(3.) This article, contracted with the preposition de, is often used 
before a word in a partitive sense. [§ 78.] 

(4.) The words un, masc, une, fern., answering to the indefinite 
article a or an in English, are now, very properly, 1 classed with the 
numeral adjectives. We shall, however, for the sake of convenience, 
devote a few lines to them under this head. 

(5.) The article le, the, is la for the feminine, and les for the plural. 

(6.) The article is subject to two kinds of changes : elision [§ 146] 
and contraction. 

(7.) Elision is the suppression of the letters e, a, i, 2 which are re- 
placed by an apostrophe ['] before a vowel, or an h mute [see 
3, (10)] : thus, , 

l'esprit, the mind, instead of le esprit, 

l'amitie, the friendship, " la amitie. 



1'homme, the man, " le 

l'liuinanite, humanity, " la humanite. 

(8.) Contraction is the union of the article le, les, with one of the 
prepositions, a, de. Thus we say by contraction : 

au livre, to the look, instead of a le livre. 

aux fruits, to the fruits, " a les fruits, 

du livre, of the book, de le livre. 

des fruits, of the fruits, " de les fruits. 

1 No difference can be made in rendering English into French, between 
a and one, so that in French, un homme, means a man, or one man. The 
other numeral adjectives might, with as much propriety, have been called 
articles as this word un. 2 See § 146. 



296 T1IE ARTICLE. § 13. 

(9.) The contractions au, du, are not used before masculine words 
commencing with a vowel, or an h mute, nor before feminine words. 

a l'homme, to the man. 

a l'ami, to the friend. 

de l'homme, of the man. 

de l'ami, of the friend. 

(10.) The article used before words taken in a partitive sense 
[;' 78, (1)J, comes in connection or contraction with the preposition 
de. It is rendered in English by some or any, expressed or under- 
stood. 

du pain. m. bread, some bread, or of the bread (apart of). 

•:it, m. mo\ oaey (a port of I. 

de la viande, \. vital, some meat, of the meat (a jmrt if). 

,. r-plate (.< pa 
des livres, m. books, some books, if the books (a^tartof). 

(11. i indefinite article, a or on, is rendered in French 

luline, and unr t',.r the feminine. When those 

ition (/'', the c of the preposition 

dine. Feminine. 

(i man. '-nan. 

dun !i..:ii!ii.-, of <r from a man. d'une famine, <f ><r from a ivoman. 

u un hum:.. a use femme, at or to u woman. 

■■ above Obser* 

rord, < com 

I . I 

. •;■! of either 

J a lowd or ft mute, 
.1. M atf case*. J 

I mmencino with ~) . 

want, %cm the 
. tfotd ofeithi r ] ' \ ( 

IM5. J ** 

. ■ uline wind. ( com 
. i itinii i< - word, I 
ird of either | comm , at or to the 

. 
• the plural, in alt cases. J 

minioe ooon, 

) 
father and mother are in 
U. Dl 






THE ADJECTIVE. § 14-1, § 14-2. 297 

Z'amitia dans no3 coeurs verse un Friendship pours a peaceful happi- 

bonheur paisible. Demoustier. ness into our hearts. 

Z'honneur aux grands coeurs est Honor is dearer than life in noble 

plus cher que la vie. Corxeille. hearts. 

Les filles et les garcons chanterent The toys and girls sang in chorus. 
en choeur. B. de St. Pierre. 

Sur les rives du Grange, on voit On the banks of the Ganges, we see 

fleurir Tebene. Delille. the ebony in bloom. 

La violette se cache timidement, The violet conceals herself timidly, 

au milieu des filles de Z'ombre. in tlie midst of the daughters of the 

Deleuze. shade. 

Le remords se reveille au cri de Remorse is aroused by the cry of 

la nature. De Belloy. nature. 

La moitie des humains vit aux The half of mankind lives at the 

depens de Z'autre. Destouches. expense of the other. 

§ 14-1. — The Adjective. 

(1.) The adjective serves to denote the quality or manner of being 
of the noun. 

(2.) Adjectives are of two sorts : qualifying adjectives, and deter- 
mining adjectives. 

(3.) We call qualifying adjectives those which add to the idea of the 
object that of a quality proper to it; as, bon, good; noble, noble; 
courageux, courageous. 

(4.) Determining adjectives are those which add to the idea of the 
object that of a particular limitation or determination ; as, quelque, 
some; tout, aU; autre, other; mon, my ; nul, no; un, one; deux, 
two. 

§ 14-2. — Qualifying Adjectives. 

(1.) These adjectives may express qualities : 1. Simply; 2. "With 
comparison ; 3. Carried to a very high degree. Thence the three de- 
grees of qualification : the positive, the comparative, and the super- 
lative. 

(2.) The positive is nothing but the adjective in its simplest signi- 
fication : 

IToi, je suis a Paris irisle, pauvre, At Paris, I am sad, poor, and se- 
rectus. Boileatj. eluded. 

(3.) The comparative is the adjective expressing a comparison be- 
tween two or several objects. There is, then, between the objects 
compared, a relation of equality, superiority, or inferiority. 

(4.) The comparison of equality expresses a quality in the same de- 
gree in the objects compared. It is formed 1 by placing aussi, as, or 

1 In French, adjectives cannot be compared, as in English, by means of 
changes in the termination. With the exception of meilleur, better ; moin- 
dre, less ; and pire, worse, all comparisons must be formed by means of 
adverbs. 

13* 



298 QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. § 14-2. 

autant, as much, before the adjective, and the conjunction que, as } 
after it : 

L'Allemagne est aussi peuplee que Germany is as populous as France. 
la Fran Volta&e. 

A leor tete est le chien, superbe At their head stands the dog, as 

autant qu'utile. DBXILLK. noble as useful. 

o. The relation or comparison of superiority expresses a quality 
in a higher degree in one object than in another. This comparison 
b formed by placing plus, more, before the adjective, aud que, than, 
after it : 

Los actions sont plus sine'res que Actions are more suiccre tlian 
Mi i.r. DB SCUDI i:v. words. 

Le pied il'i fait que 

oelui du bu.-uC tas. than that of the ox. 

(G.) The comparison • quality in a lower 

irmed by placing moms, 
ter it: 

nt mains ' death are less fatal 

mtrta which uttack 

. 

rich arc comparatives of 
j iltts lortj which i . in the sense of 

Tl n'est meiOevr nmi ni parent :'<>>■ friend, no 

■ ices. 

1 kGenr, ;hsh words 

worse. -. and when I 

A 
nnining the na in English is: 

i. To cl to -• the v. ■ rd ' K r into I m anne r * 

If tli,- be made witl , tha word 

■ 
/,' id$ better | i o Wter man- II lit mieux quo son fi 
ner) than his I 

J. I na worse manner," it should be trans- 

. jilus mal: 
in a worse man- J\ lit p>is (plus mal) quo son ftvro. 
I . Aw broUier. 
3. When yon may substitute u a emaller amount or tfuan/rty" for the 
word 1 i«»» 

/A vca<w Jew (a smalicr amount) U lit moi/w qw. 
t/ia/i Am 



GENDER, ETC., OP ADJECTIVES. — § 15. 299 

Pire, instead of plus mauvais, which may however be used : 

Le remede est parfois pire que le Ttie remedy is at times worse than 
mal. Lenoble. the evil. 

Moindre, instead of plus petit, an expression also in use : 

Ce n'est pas etre petit que d'etre Being less than great is not being 
moindre qu'un grand. Boiste. small 

(8.) The superlative, or third degree of qualification, expresses the 
quality carried to a very high, or to the highest degree ; thence there 
are two sorts of superlatives : the relative and the absolute. 

(9.) The superlative relative marks a very high or the highest de- 
gree relatively, or with comparison. It is formed by placing, le, la, 
les, the ; mon, my ; ton, thy ; son, his ; notre, our ; votre, your ; leur, 
leurs, their, before the comparative of superiority or inferiority. 

Un bienfa : t recu est la plus sacree A benefit received is the most sa- 

de toutes les deltes. Mme. Necker. cred of all debts. 

La probity reconnue est le.pius stir Acknowledged probity is the most 

de tous les serments. (The same.) secure of all oaths. 

(10.) The words le plus, le mains, must be repeated before every 
adjective. 

Ce sont les livres les plus agre- Tliese books are the most agree- 

ables, les plus universelleinent lus, able, the most universally read, and 

et les plus utiles. the most useful. 
Berxardin de St. Pierre. 

(11.) The superlative absolute expresses also a very high degree, 
but absolutely, without comparison. It is formed by placing be- 
fore the adjective one of these words, ires, fort, infiniment, extreme- 
ment, etc. 

II y a a, la ville, comme ailleurs, There are in cities, as elsewhere, 

de fort sottes gens. La Bruyere. very silly people. 

Je vous prie de croire que je ne / beg you to believe that you are 

songe qu'a vous, et que vous m'etes my only thought, and that you are 

eztremement chere. extremely dear to me. 
Mme. de Sevigne. 

§ 15. — Gender and Number op Adjectiyes. 

(1.) The adjective has, of itself, neither gender nor number ; it 
must assume the gender and number of the noun to which it belongs. 

(2.) The termination of the adjective varies according to the gender 
and number of the noun which it qualifies or determines. 

Un homme prudent, Une femme prudente. 

A prudent man. A prudent woman. 

Des homines prudents, Des femmes prudentes. 

Prudent men. Prudent women. 



300 



i- E it i >' i x e 



10. 



§ 10. — Formation of the Femininjs of Adjectives. 
(1.) All adjectives ending with e mute, remain unchanged in the 



feminine. 

Masculine. 
I'n homme agr Cable. 
A i agreeable man. 
Ua mur aolide. 
A strong (solid) wall. 



mint, 
Une femme agnalle. 

Ah agreeable woman. 
Une maison solids. 

A strong (solid) house. 



'_' i Adjectives not ending in e mute, form their feminine by the 
addition of e. 



Masculine. 
I'm garcon diligent. 

A diligent l>oij. 
Un lioin Hi* 

•S3. 



.•line. 
Une lillf diliijenle. 
A diligent tjirL 
Une dam 

-1 pottfe Wy. 






■ 
■ 






Mas. 

il. 

pan.il, 

anden, 

boa 



1 -11«'. such. 

pareille, like. 
ancienne, 

muette, mute. 

bonne, good. 
oeuve, 

fat 



s>k, heureux, beureuse, happy 



(4.) The following, although ending with then terminations, form 
their feminia 

















ft 








'■•, 




) 




- 




close- ) 


doux, 


uee/, 1 














tiers, 


J 



- maAat t'« &«/< 



feminine. ( 



ninine 



complete, 
concrete. 

doooa 



aing the femi- 
nine : 

1st. ThOM Which are derived from the participle pretest of a 



FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 8 16. 



301 



French verb by dropping ant, and substituting eur, change the final 
letter (?•) into se } as 



Pres. Part. Masculine. 

dansawtf, whence dansewr ; 
troinpantf, trompew; 



Feminine. 

and thence danseuse. 

" trompeuse. 



malce in the fem- 
inine 



Here, however, note that chanteur, when signifying a professional 
singer, takes for the feminine cantatrice. Like anomalies appear in 
the following : 

ambassadeur, ambassador, 

bailleur, lessor, 

chasseur, hunter, 

demandeur, -plaintiff, 

defendeur, defendant, 

devineur, guesser, 

enchanteur, enchanter, 

gouverneur, governor, 

pecheur, sinner, 

serviteur, servant, I servante. 



bailleresse. 

chasseresse. 

demanderesse. 

defenderesse. 

devineresse. 

enchanteresse. 

gouvernante. 



2d. Those ending in tear and derived from the Latin, and conse- 
quently, not falling under the Rule (1st) just given, form the feminine 
by changing teur into trice; as, 



Masculine. 
acteur, actor, 
admirateur, admirer, 



Feminine. 
actrice, actress. 
admiratrice, admirer. 



Exceptions to Rule 1st, however, are the following : 



debiteur, debtor, 
executeur, executor, 
inspecteur, inspector, 
inventeur, inventor, 
persecuteur, persecutor, 



f debitrice. 
I executrice. 
make in the feminine < inspectrice. 
inventrice. 
[ persecutrice. 



3d. Those ending in erieur, also majeur, mineur, meilleur, follow 
the general rule, that is, add e to form the feminine ; as, 

exterieur, exterior, "] f exte'rieure. 

superieur, superior, superieure. 

majeur, of age, major, > make in the feminine < majeure, 
mineur, minor, j mineure. 

meilleur, better, J [_ meilleure. 

(6.) Adjectives, as also nouns, indicating occupation chiefly exer- 
cised by men, are alike in the masculine and the feminine ; as 7 

auteur, author, litterateur, literary person. 



302 



IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. § 17. 



(7.) The following adjectives having two forms for the masculine, 
form their feminine as follows : 



Masculine be/ore 


Masculine before 






a consonant. 


a vowel or h mute. 


Feminine. 






bel, 


belle, 


handsome 


fou, 


fol, 


folle, 




mou, 


mol, 


raolle, 




nouveau, 


nouvel, 


now 


new. 


vieux, 


vk-il, 


vieille. 


old. 



Irregular Adjecli 
(8.) The following adjectives form their feminine irregularly : 



. !iw:. 


Feminine. 




abaoute. 


\< inin, 1 


benigna 


blanc, 


blanche. 


infirm. 


. 




coke. 




oute. 


fevori, ■ 


!a\<>i it<-. 




fraiche. 


franc, free, frank. 


franobe. 


. 


gentille. 




[ue. 




Wbralque, used only of the 






- lete),a stripling, 


jouvenoella 


jllui. :iu. 


jimit lie. 


■ 




r, masterly, 


. 


malin, gnant, 


malii 


llJUl.it] 


mulatre or mulutresse. 






mil, null, none, 


lUlllf. 


oblong, oblong, 


oblongoa 


public, public, 


publ 


1, dianyed, 




irreit, 


. 


Sot, sdly, 




traitp'. traitor, treacherous, 


tiaitnsso. 




torque, 


viuillot, 


vieUlotte. 


The following have no feminine: 


artiaan, mechanic. 


in, jiartisan. 


■hestnul color. 


t> tuoin, 




i>li7i, vellum, of vellum- 



i; IT.— FOBKAXION OF THE PLURAL OP AoJSOTl 

—The plural of adj I med by the ad- 

dition of 5 to the masculine, or to the feminine termination. 



IKEEGULAE ADJECTIVES. — § 17. 303 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

grand, great, grands ; grande, grandcs. 

petit, small, petits; petite, petites. 

(2.) This rule has no exceptions, with regard to the feminine ter- 
mination. 

(3.) With regard to the masculine termination, it is subject to the 
three following exceptions : 

First Exception. — Adjectives ending in the singular with s or x, do 
not change their form in the plural. 

Singular. Plural. 

heureux, happy, heureux. 

doux, sweet, soft, doux. 

Second Exception. — Adjectives having in the singular the termina- 
tion eau, form their plural masculine by the addition of x. 

Singular. Plural. 

beau, handsome, beautiful, beaux, 

jumeau, twin, jumeaux. 

nouveau, nevj, nouveaux. 

Third Exception. — Adjectives ending in al, form their plural mas- 
culine by changing al into aiux. 



Singular. 


Plural. 


liberal, liberal, 


liberaux. 


national, national, 


nationaux. 


rural, rural, 


ruraux. 



"We quote from Bescherelle's Grammaire Nationale, those adjectives 
ending in al, which follow the general rule. 



Singular. 


Plural. 


amical, friendly. 


amicals. 


bancal, bandy-legged, 


bancals. 


fatal, fatal, 


fatals. 


final, final, 


finals. 


frugal, frugal, 


frugals. 


filial, filial, 


filials. 


glacial, frozen, icy 


glacials. 


initial, initial, 


initials. 


labial, labial, 


labials. 


matinal, early, 


matinals. 


medial, medial, 


medials. 


naval, naval, 


navals. 


pascal, paschal, 


pascals. 


penal, penal, 


penals. 


theatral, theatrical, 


theatrals. 



304 ADJECTIVES. § 18, 19. 

§ IS. — Agreement of Adjectives with Nouns. 
(1.) The adjective must agree, in gender and number, with the 
noun or pronoun which it qualifies : 

Masculine. Feminine. 

Singular. Plural Singular. Plural 

janlin, les beaux jardins ; la belle maison, les belles maisons. 
thcj the fine gardens; the fine house, 

le grand livre, !- j ; la grande carte, les grandes cartea 

r/*e Jarye look, the large looks; the large map, Ou 'large m 

(2.) This agreement must tat only when the adjective 

immediately precedes or follows the noun or pronoun, but also when 

it is separated by other words: 

Arm 
/•/.<-. — Plaiae A Dieu do to Singular. — L*hoanenr de | 

bon pour meriter la vie pour bor, de « man- 

M.u:i\ \r.\. 
mJ erv 
. 

r eon- 
■hauls ue b linationa qui Bont 

bona a rien de boa il foul .;■ Bervir Dieu. 

■'• ' ! Mill LI MviMINnN. 

Tfie vncked are never, in any cir- 

cumrtanrts, fitted {good) to perform *<i . ,/ fijUow i.\ 

ord i /. 

to two or :. ■ trees, 

wheth plural, and a ;,-,-, il 

put in the plural: 

' in'rno the same law, e tame 

sort J. .1. B fate. 

(i.i When the words which I of difffarant 

be put in the masculine plural: 

ma I try to rcmlr /,a rJ ,>j. lir ., 

mon cbiea 

y cannot be 
tie le fruit du crime. tfw fruUs < j crime. 

S3. 

DBTBBimrnra ob Determinatto Asnonra. 

4fet deinolisti.i 
the numeral, and the iud 



ADJECTIVES. — § 20. 305 

§ 20. — Demonstrative Adjectives. 

(1.) The demonstrative adjectives are used, when an object is to 
he particularly specified or pointed out. They are never, in French, 
used substantively, that is, without the nouns which they determine : 



Masculine. — Ce, this or that, placed before a word commencing with a 
consonant. 
Cet, this or that, placed before a word commencing with a 
vowel or an h mute. 
Feminine. — Cette, this or that, placed before all sorts of nouns. 



rf& 



Plural. 
Ces, for both genders. 

Examples. 
Masculine Singular. Feminine Singular. 

ce soldat, this or that soldier. cette femme, this or that woman. 

cet ami, that or this friend. cette epee, that or this sword. 

cet ho-mme, this or that man. cette harpe, this or that harp. 

Plural. 
ces homines, these or those men; ces femmes, these or those women. 

Voyez ce papillon ecliappe du torn- See that butterfly escaped from the 

beau ; tomb : his death was a slumber, and 

Sa mort fut un sommeO, et sa tombe his tomb a cradle. 
un berceau. Delille. 

. . . . Cet admirable don, That admirable gift, instinct, is 

L'instinct, sans doute est loin de doubtless far beneath majestic rea- 
l'auguste raison. (The same.) son. 

La, cette jeune plante en vase dis- There that young plant prepared 

posee, as a vase, receives the dew in its 

Dans sa coupe elegante accueille la elegant cup. 
rasee. (The same.) 

Ces honneurs que le vulgaire ad- Do these honors, admired by the 

mire, vulgar, awake the dead from their 

Reveillont-ils les morts au sein de sepulchres'? 
monuments ? Soulb\ 

(2.) "When is it necessary to make, in French, a difference similar 
to that existing between the English words this and that, the adverbs 
ci and la must be placed after the noun. 

ce livre-ci, this book (here), ce livre-la, that book (there). 

ces livres-ci, these books, ces livres-la, those books. 



30G POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES.— § 21. 

§ 21 - — Possessive Adjectives. 
(1.) The possessive adjective,, whieh are always joined to a noun 
relate to possession or property; they are: 

Singular. Plural, 

Masculine. Feminine. for both genders. 

adjectives take the gender and nun, 
the object p. 

Ill " n ,r ' ". ma suMir »(, wa, ^. 

■ i 

\iv:: 

"2? "' ° imencui w„l, . 

& mute, in order to preve, ,. vo vyWt . L 

or of a vowel and on Am 

son armee, Am army, but ,. 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. — 8 22 



307 



C'en est fait, rnon heure est venue. 
Boileau. 



All is over, my hour is come. 



(4.) The possessive adjectives must be repeated before every noun. 



Mon frere, ma soeur, et mes cou- 
sins sont a Paris. 



My hrother, sister, and cousins are 
at Paris. 



§ 22. — Numeral Adjectives. 

(1.) There are two kinds of numeral adjectives: the cardinal and 
the ordinal. 

(2.) The cardinal numbers indicate simply the number or quality, 
without any reference to order : as, un, one ; deux, two, etc. 

(3.) The ordinal numbers mark the order or rank which persons 
and things occupy : as, premier, first ; second, second, etc. 

"We shall, for the purposes of comparison, place the cardinal and 
ordinal numbers in parallel columns. 



(4 ) Cardinal Numbers. 




(5.) Ordinal Numbers 




un, feminine une, 


one. 


premier, feminine premiere, 


first. 


deux, 


2 


deuxieme or second, /. seconde, 2d. 


trois, 


3 


troisieme, 


3d. 


quatre, 


4 


quatrieme, 


4th. 


cinq, 


5 


cinquieme, 


5th. 


six, 


6 


sixieme, 


6th. 


sept, 


i 


septieme, 


Vth. 


huit, 


8 


huitieme, 


8th. 


neuf, 


9 


neuvieme, 


9th. 


dix, 


10 


dixieme, 


10th. 


onze, 


11 


onzieme, 


11th. 


douze, 


12 


douzieme, 


12th. 


treize, 


13 


treizieme, 


13th. 


quatorze, 


14 


quatorzieme, 


14th. 


quinze, 


15 


quinzieme, 


15th. 


seize, 


16 


seizieme, 


16th. 


dix-sept, 


17 


dix-septieme, 


17 th. 


dix-huit, 


18 


dix-huitieme, 


18th. 


dix-neuf, 


19 


dix-neuvieme, 


19th. 


vingt, 


20 


vingtieme, 


20th. 


vingt et un, 


21 


vingt et unieme, 


21st. 


vingt-deux, &c, 


22 


vingt- deuxieme, &c, 


22d. 


trente, 


30 


trentieme, 


30th. 


trente et un, 


31 


trente et unieme, 


31st. 


trente-deux, &c, 


32 


trente - deuxieme, 


32d. 


quarante, 


40 


quarantieme, 


40th. 


quarante et un, 


41 


quarante et unieme, 


41sfc. 


quarante-deux, &c, 


42 


quarante-deuxieme, 


42d. 


cinquante, 


50 


cinquantieme, 


50th. 


cinquante et un, 


51 


cinquante et unieme, 


51st. 


cinquante-deux, &c, 


52 


cinquante- deuxieme, 


52d. 


soixante, 


60 


soixantieme, 


60th. 


soixante et un, 


61 


soixante et unieme, 


61st 


soixante-deux, &c, 


62 


soixante-deuxieme, 


62d. 



308 



Xl'MEBAL ADJECTIVES.- 



23. 



Cardinal Xumhtrs. 


Ordinal Xumbers. 




Boixante-dix, 


70 


Eoixante-dixieme, 


70th. 


-ouzo, 


71 


-onzieme, 


71st. 


aoixante 


72 


soixante-douzieme, 


7 I'd. 


Boixaate-treuse, 


73 


BOixante-treizieme, 


7;:d. 


Boixante-qaatorze, 


U 


Boixaate-quaterzieme 


1Mb 


soixante-quinze, 


7;, 


soixante-qainzienie 


75th. 




7G 


si'ixaiito-sei/.i.'itu', 


7t:th. 


soixant.-dix-sept, 


77 


soixante-dix-septieme, 


11th. 


soixant -ilix-huit, 


78 


aoixante- dix-huitidme, 


7stl, 


1 -dix-ucutj 


7:» 


Boixante-dix-neuvieme, 


7'Jth. 


<j lativ-. 


80 


quatre-vingtieme, 


BOth. 


quatre-> 


81 


quatre-vingt-unieme, 


81st 


quatre-vtogt-d 


82 


quatre-vingt-deuxieme, 


B2d 


-lix, 


90 


quatre-vingt-dixidme, 


roth. 


qoatn 


!»! 


quatre-i ingt-on 


91st 


quatre-vi 


92 


quatre-vingt-don 


k.m. 


cent, 


100 


IVIlti'lllC, 


100th. 


cent-un, 


10] 


cent-unieme, 


LOlst 




200 


tieme, 


•2onth. 


t mi, 


201 




20lBt 








300th. 


.1-1111, 






30l8t 


mill.', 




milli ' mi-. 


1000th. 


..lie, 




deox inillirino, 


2000th. 


deux tnilli' cini 




deux mille tinquantl 


2050th. 


l.u million, 


1,000,000 


million. 1,000, 



g 23. -VaBIAXIOBB OW i hi: Cvkdinai. Nt'Mi:i:i:s. 

Owing cardinal uiimu re \ary : 
r_'.i l ooun to which it hi 

uu 

When used Bubstantrrel; . the form of the 

plural. 

. multiplied by one Dumber, and no! I" !- 
. another, tal • f the plural : 

'J ! 

yrars, the dnj 

. 

ij h'jusr, 

cents Era J. J. 



however, when mull 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. — § 24. 309 

followed by another, or if not followed by a number, used to indi- 
cate a particular epoch, do not take the form of the plural. 

quatre-vingt-cmq liommes, eighty-five men. 

cinq cent-dews: hommes, five hundred and two men. 

Charlemagne fut proclame em- Charlemagne was proclaimed em- 

pereur d'Occident, le jour de NoeL peror of the West, Christmas-day, in 

en huit cent. Voltaire. the year eight hundred. 

(5.) Mille — (thousand.) For the date of tbe year, reckoned from 
the commencement of the Christian era to the year two thousand of 
the same, we use the abbreviated form, mil. 

L'an mil huit cent cinquante, TJie year one thousand eight hun- 

dred and fifty. 

(6.) With regard to the years which have preceded our era, and 
those which will follow our present thousand, we write the full form, 
miUe. 

La premiere irruption des Gaulois, The first irruption of the Gauls 

eut lieu sous le regne de Tarquin, took place under the reign of Tarquin, 

environ l'an du monde trois mille about the year of the world 3416. 
quatre cent-seize. Vertot. 

(7.) Million, billion, take the plural form. 

§ 24. — Miscellaneous Observations on the Cardinal 

Numbers. 

(1.) In French, in computing from twenty to thirty, thirty to forty, 
&c, the larger number must always precede the smaller. We may 
not say, as often in English, one and twenty, but always vingt et un, 
vingt-deux, &c. 

(2.) The conjunction et, after vingt, trente, &c, is only used before 
un : thus we say vingt et un, twenty (and) one, and simply vingt-deux, 
iwenty-two, &c. 

(3.) The word one frequently precedes in English the words hun- 
dred and thousand ; it must not be rendered in French. "We say : 

mille hommes, one thousand men. 

cent francs, one hundred francs. 

(4.) When the words cent and miUe are used substantively before 
the name of objects generally reckoned or sold by the hundred or 
thousand in number or in weight, the word un may be placed before 
them, the name of the object being preceded by the preposition de. 

Un cent, un mille, (millier) de briques, 
One hundred, one thousand (of) bricks. 
Un cent (un quintal) de sucre, 
One hundred (weight) of sugar. 



310 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. — §25. 

(5.) The words septante, seventy ; octante, eighty ; and nonante, 
ninety ', are now nearly obsolete, being used only in a few provinces 
of France. They are, as may be seen in the preceding table, replaced 
by the awkward expressions, soixante-du^ixty-tcn; quatre-vingts, four- 
twenties (four score) ; quatre-vingt-dix, four-score-ten, etc. 

(6.) Before the words onze, eleven, and onzicme, eleventh, the arti- 
cle is not elided. "We say le onze, le onzieme, la onziime. In pro- 
nunciation, the s of the plural article les is silent when this article 
precedes onze or onziime. 

25.— Observations on the Ordinal Numbkbs. 

(1.) It will be Been that the ordinal numbers, with the exception of 
are formed from the cardinal — 

1. By -"""/; 

2. By the 1 1 an ■ riding with that vowel; 

3. By the addition tiding with a consonant; 

fifth. 
cj i All ordinal adjectives may take the form <>f the plural. 

ary for the feminine, and mako 
■ nde. 
.ue (first) is only used in composition with vingt, trente, 

a con- 
tinuation; secuuJ merely i 

l-t. W« may say of a work whi b i lots volumes: 

J 1 *] !••./••. ..- / have the second volume of that 

lunie do 

only two Vohl] I i say: 

. 
volute ■iry. 

ra may bo pla maa worda 

lively: 

of thirty years' dur 

ii 

" " 

.,, ii a 

/ "' " 

/ •' " 

" " 

•nil. 

• Thirty, /< : 



NUMERAL NOUNS, — 5 27. 



311 



5th. Of the others, sexagenaire, septuagenaire, and octogenaire only are 
in frequent use : 

Un octogenaire plantait, etc. A man eighty years old ivas plant- 

La Fontaine. ing trees. 

§ 26. — Rules. 
(1.) In speaking of the days of the month, the French use the car- 
dinal, not the ordinal number : 



le deux mars, 
le dix-sept avril, 
L'ouverture des Etats-generaux 
eut lieu le cinq rnai, It 89. Thiers. 

(2.) We must, however, say : 
le premier (not Vun) juin, 



the second of March. 
the seventeenth of April. 
The opening of the States-general 
took place on the fifth of May, 1189. 

the first of June. 



(3.) The cardinal numbers are also employed in speaking of sove- 
reigns and princes : 



Charles the Tenth. 

Lewis the Eighteenth. 

Lewis the Eleventh was thirty-eight 
years old, when he ascended the 
throne. 

The death of Gregory the Seventh 
did not extinguish the fire which he 
had kindled. 



Charles dix, 
Louis dix-huit, 
Louis onze avait trente-huit ana 
quand il monta sur le trone. 

Anquetil. 
La mort de Gregoire sept n'etei 
gnit pas le feu qu'il avait allume. 
Voltaire. 

(4.) We must say, however, 

Henri premier, Henry the First. 

(5.) Deux and second are, in this case, used indifferently : 

Charles deux, Charles second, Charles the Second. 
(6.) In speaking of Charles the Fifth, of Germany, and of the 
Pope Sixtus the Fifth, the obsolete word quint (fifth) is used. 

Char\es-qui?it, Charles the Fifth. 

Sixte-quint, Sixtus the Fifth. 

We shall, in order to render reference easier, place here some ob- 
servations on nouns and adverbs of number. 

§ 27. — Numeral Nouns. 
(1.) The numeral nouns in use with the French are : 



unite, 


unit ; 


trentaine, 


thirty ; 


couple, paire, 


couple, pair ; 


quarantaine, 


two score ; 


trio, 


trio, three; 


cinquantaine, 


fifty ; 


demi-douzaine, 


half dozen; 


soixantaiue, 


sixty ; 


lmitaine, 


eight days ; 


quatre- vingtaine, 


eighty ; 


neuvaine, 


nine (nine clays of 1 centaine, 


hundred ; 




prayer) ; 


deux centaines, &c. 


two hundred ; 


dizaine, 


ten, half a score; 


1 millier, 


one thousand; 


douzaine, 


dozen ; 


deux milliers, 


two thousand; 


quinzaine, 


fifteen, fortnight ; 


1 myriade, 


a myriad ; 


vingtaine, 


jcore, twenty; 


1 million, 


a million; 



312 INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. §30. 

(2.) The termination trine signifies sometimes nearly, and when 
added to words of number is equivalent to the English some, in cases 
like the following: I have some twenty books, i. e., about twenty 
books. J'ai une vingtainc de livres. 

§ 28. — Fractional Numerals. 

nn quart, one quarter ; an cinquieme, one fifth ; 

deux qaarts, two quarters ; deux cinquiemes, two fifths; 

trois quarts, three quarters ; un sixieme, eta, one sixth, etc. ; 

the third ; an dixieme, etc., one tenth) etc ; 

deux tiers, too thirds; an centieme, one hundredth; 

lamoitta, the half; onmulieme, one thousandth { 

il.) It wili be seen that, with the exception of tiers, quart and 
moitid, these numbers take the form of the ordinal numerals. They 
may. therefore, take the form of the plural when neee 

il'.i The •• when used adjectively and preceding the noun 

i- invariable. 

nnc (famj-heure, f., in hour. 

une demi-MU'-, f. half an ell. 

. oomiug after the noun to denote an additional \\v\t, it 
noun. 

une hi one hour and a half; 

one ell tad a hut/. 

When need substantively, demi may take the form of the 

plural. 

hoiioge sonno les heures ot Tlmt rWk strikes the hours and the 
los demies. half-hours. 

§ .10.— ()i:i>i\ \i Ai-\ ii.iN. 

C,>ii:it ri- lri.-iin nt, fourthly ; 

m the first CinquiememeDtj fifthly; 



(I.) Pren 



Deuxiemement) 
rnent, 

'< irdhj ; 



i place; Bixiemement, sixthly; 

Septic moment, 
secondly; D £i ememen £ t , :nthb / ' 



c_'. i Tl B86, like adverbs of manner, are formed by the addition of 
ment to the feminine form of the adjective. 

I, — Tnimiimii: AoJBCimS. 
n.'» The indefinite adj< jed when anything in to I 

Dted or referred to in a general or indefinite manner. They are, 



aucun, 


not any, not one; 


quel, 


what; 


. 




quelconque, 








qui k 




mil. 




tl, 
















INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. § 30. 313 



* (2.) Aucun is generally followed by a noun, with which it must 
agree. It is followed by ne when it comes before a verb. 

aucun homme, no man ; aucune femme, no woman. 

Aucun cheminde fieurs ne conduit No flowery path leads (o glory. 
a, la gloire. La Fontaine. 

On meprise tous ceux qui w'ont All those who have no virtue are 
aucune vertu. La Rochefoucauld. 



(3.) Aucun is by the French authors sometimes used in the plural. 

lis ne peuvent souffrir aucun em- TJiey can hear no legitimate domin- 
pire legitime, ne mettent aucunes ion, set no bounds to their crimes. 
bornes a leurs attentats. 

Montesquieu. 

Aticun and nul should be put in the plural, only before such words 
tas are not used in the singular, or have in the singular a different 
acceptation. 

(4.) Chaque is of both genders, and is used only in the singular. 
It always precedes the noun, and cannot be separated from it by an 
adjective or by a preposition. It should never be used without a noun. 

Chaque age a ses plaisirs, chaque Every age has its pleasures, every 
etat a ses charmes. Delille. situation its charms. 

(5.) Meme, placed before the noun, has the sense of same, in Eng- 
; lish. Placed after the noun, it means, generally, himself, herself, it- 
self or themselves. It may often be rendered by the word even. 
When meme is an adjective it may take the form of the plural, but 
does not vary on account of gender. 

c'est la meme vertu ; c'est la vertu meme ; 

it is the same virtue. it is virtue itself. 

Le peuple et les grands n'ont ni Tlie people and the great have 

les memes vertus, ni les mimes vices, neither the same virtues nor the same 

Vauvenaegues. vices. 

Les ecorces memes des vegetans: The bark even of vegetables is in 

sont en harmonie avec les tempera- harmony with the temperature of the 

tures de l'atmosphere. atmosphere. 
Bernaedin de St. Pieree. 

(6.) It is at times difficult to distinguish meme an adjective, from 
meme an adverb, which is invariable. [See § 97, (2,) (3.)] 

(7.) Nul is a stronger negative than aucun. It agrees in gender 
and number with the noun which it qualifies. Like aucun, when re- 
lating to the subject of the sentence, it requires ne before the verbs. 

Nul homme n'est heureus ; nulle No man is happy ; nothing can 
chose ne peut le rendre tel. Boiste. render him so. 

Nulle paix pour l'impie ; il la No peace for the impious ; he seeks 
cherche, elle le fait. Racine. it, it avoids him. 

14 



314 



INDEFINITE 



ADJECTIVES. § 30. 



(8). Nul is sometime? used alone, in the sense of no one 



nth his fortune, 
nor displeased with his own. wiL 



Nut n'est content de sa fortune, 
ni mecontent de son esprit. 

Mme. DESHOUU&BES. 

(9.) Plusieurs is, of course, always in the plural. Il does not Vdvy 
its form : 

II faut bien qu'il y ait plusieurs Tlicre must necessarily be 
raisons d'ennui. quand tout le monde reasons for ennui, when 
esc d'accord pour bailler. Flobian. yau 

(10.) Quel takes the gender and number of the noun to which it 
relates. It is sometimes immediately followed by its noun, from 
•which it may be separated by one or several words : 



Quel tableau ravissant presentent 
lea camp Dl i.ii.le. 

Quelle invisible force a soumia 
is? I., l: 

Quels sons harmonieux, quels efforts 
-ants, 

:.aissauco dgaleut les 



WHinl a delightful pictur 
country q 

What hand has con- 

■ ,, t 
Wlmt harmonious sounds, what 
i strains, equal the voice of 
gratitude t 



(11.) I :' s plaeed after the noun, and va 

for the plural: 



Mv 
. . . Tin: Acadshy. 



All 



n 



Ttvo . 

. . . . 



use of some (a certain number), or whatew 
pith the noun : 

Jl y a da nierite sans I'k'vatinn, 

: ■. ■ 1 \;iii.iii Bans 

La EU> hi ror. '.\ri i>. 

vains lauriers quo pro- 

ros Bans ravagcr la 
terra Bon I 

(13.) Quelque having the sense of about or some or Itowevcr, is in- 
variable : 



There is ; 

but there is no 
merit. 

What 
promisi , a hero without 

ravaging the earth. 



Quel ? Vbos avez 

oixante 
Raoi 
A.] i 

cents ;. .1 il vainqoit 

I i:r. 

cunemia de la \ 

La. RocnBTOCCACLr>. 



you 1 You I 
Oh I some sixty years. 

men, it 

■'I men may 
do not dare t 



THE PEONOUN. § 31,32. 315 

(14.) Tel makes in the feminine telle; in the plural masculine, 
tels; in the plural feminine telles. It agrees with the noun which it 
qualifies : 

tel livre, such book ; telle lettre, such letter ; 

tels livres, such books; telles lettres, such letters. 

(15.) Tout meaning every, is of course always in the singular 
but varies for the feminine : 

Tout citoyen doit servir son pays ; Every citizen should serve his 

le soldat de son sang, le pretre de country ; the soldier with his blood, 

sou zele. La Motte. the priest with his zeal. 

En ioute chose, il faut cousiderer In every thing, we must consider 

la tin. La Fontaine. the end. 

(16.) Tout, in the sense of all, agrees in gender and number with 
the noun to which it relates : 

tout l'argent, all the money; touie la toile, all the cloth. 

II etait au-dessus de tous ces He was above all those vain objects 

vains objets qui forment tous les which form all the desires and all the 

desirs et toutes les esperances des hopes of men. 
hommes. Massillon. 

See § 97 (5). 

§ 31. — The Pkqnottst. 

(1.) The pronoun, in French, as in other languages, is a word 
used to represent the noun, in order to prevent its too frequent 
repetition. 

(2.) The pronoun serves also to designate the parts which each 
person or thing takes in speech. This part is called person. 

(3.) There are three persons : the first, or that which speaks ; the 
second, or that spoken to ; the third, or that spoken of. 

(4.) There are five sorts of pronouns : 

The personal ; The demonstrative ; 

The possessive ; The relative ; 

The indefinite. 

§ 32. — The Personal Peonouns. 
(1.) The personal pronouns are so called because they seem to 
designate the three persons more especially than the other pronouns. 
These pronouns are : 

Nominative Form. JRefleciive Form. 

Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. 

1. je, I; nous, we;' me, myself; nous, ourselves; 

2. tu, thou; vous, you, ye; te, thyself; vous, yourselves ; 

!U, he, it, m. ; ils, m. they ; ) himself; 

'. [herself; se, themselves; 
elle, she, it, f. ; elles, f. they. &01 > ) itself; 



lis 



316 PERSONAL PRONOUNS, — § 33. 

(2.) Direct regimen, or Accusative. 
"When placed before the verb. When placed after a verb. 

Singular. Plural Singular. Plural. 

1. me, me; nous, t»; moi, me; nous, us; 

2. te, thee; vous, you; toi, thee; vous, you; 
him, t'tra.; . ., „,„ . ( both lc, him, it, m. : , .. J both 

la, heri it, (. ; les > them ' \ gend. £, her! it! f. ; les > ihem > \ gend. 
(3.) Indirect regimen, or Dative. 
"When placed before the verb. 
Singular. Plural. 

1. me, tome; nous, to us ; 

2. te, te vous. to you; 

a m i£w. ; leur.toftem; 

3<1U1 ' 1 1:?;;' '(bothers). 

When placed after the verb. 
Singular. Plural. 

moi, a ruoi, nous, a, nous, to us ; 

toi, a t >i. tor vous, a vous, to you; 

lui > j a die, [ to /uv; lcur - } a ellos, f. J io them - 

(4.) Indirect regimen ; (lenitive and Ablative. 

Always placed after the rerb. 

Singular. Plural. 

do moi, o/ or from me ; de nous, of or /rem us ; 

. " do vous, " you/ 

de lui, u Wr»; d'eux, ■ " them, m. ; 

" far; d'ellea, " (Aem, f. 

§ 33. — Rhicabks ox the Personal Pronouns. 

(1.) The French, as well as the English, use the second person 
plural for the second person singular, in addressing one person. 

(2.) The second person singular, however, is used, as in English, 
in addressing the Supreme Being: 

Grand Dieul tet increments sout Great God! thy judgments are 
remplia d'fiqoitd. Das Bihrbapx full of equity. 

(3.) It is also used in poetry, or to give more energy to the diction. 

mon souverain roi ! my sovereign king t 

Me void done tremblante et sculo Here I am trembling and alone be- 
devant toi. ILk im . /' 

(4)Il is used by parents to children, and also among intimate friends. 

(5.) The pronoun il is used unipcrsonally, in the same manner M 
the English pronoun it. 

il pleut, it rains ; 

(5.) Observe, that the personal pronouns of the third person nro 
not used lor the indirect regimen to represent inanimate 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 33. 317 

The relative pronouns en, of or from it [§ 39 (17)], t, to it [§ 39 (18)] 
are used instead of the personal pronouns. Thus, in speaking of a 
house, we do not say, Je lui ajouterai une aile, / will add a wing to it. 
We must say • 

J'y ajouterai une aile ; I will add a wing to it (thereto). 

In speaking of an author, we may say : 

Que pensez-vous de lui ? Wliat do you thinlc of him ? 

But in speaking of his book, we should say : 

Qu'era pensez-vous ? Wliat do you think of it (thereof) ? 

(6.) The word m£me, plural memes, may be used after the pronoun 
in the sense of self selves. 

le roi lui-meme. the Icing himself. 

la reine elle-meme. the queen herself. 

les princes eux-memes. the princes themselves. 

les princesses elles-memes. the princesses themselves. 

(7.) The pronouns, moi, toi, ltd, eux, are often used after the verb, 
to give greater force to a nominative pronoun of the same person, 
in those cases where the emphasis is placed on the nominative in 
English, or where the auxiliary do is used. 

je le dis, moi, I say so, or I do say so. 

it le dit, lui, he says so, or he does say so. 

(8.) The same pronouns, moi, ioi, lui, eux, are used instead of the 
nominative pronouns, je, tu, il, ils, for the English pronouns, I, thou, 
he, they, when those pronouns are employed without a verb in an 
answer, when they are used by themselves, or have a verb under- 
stood after them. 

Qui est arrive ce matin? Moi. Who arrived this morning ? I. 

Lui et moi. Vous et eux. He and I. You and they. 

Vous ecrivez rnieux que lui. You write better than he. 

Vous lisez aussi bien que moi. You read as well as I. 

(9.) The same pronouns are used in exclamations, and in those 
cases where the English pronouns, /, thou, etc., are followed by the 
relative pronoun who ; also after c'est, detail, etc. 

Moi, lui ceder ! I, yield to him ! 

Eux, aller a, Londres ! They, go to London ! 

Moi qui suis malade. I who am sick. 

Lui qui est officier. He who is an officer. 

Eux qui sont savants. They who are learned. 

C'est moi ; c'est lui. It is I; it is he. 

Ce sont eux. It is they. 

Penelope, sa femme, et moi qui Penelope his wife, and 1 who am 
suis sou fils, nous avons perdu l'es- his son, have lost the hope of seeing 
perance de le revoir. Fenelon. him again. 

(10.) These same pronouns are also used instead of the nomi- 
natives, je, tu, etc., when the verb has several subjects which are all 



31S 



POSSESSIVE PEOXOUSfS. — 8 34, 



pronouns or partly nouns and partly pronouns. The verb may then 
be immediately preceded by a pronoun in the plural, representing in 
one word all the preceding subjects. 

Yotre p'TC et moi, nous avons Tour father and I were a long 
ete longtcmps enuemis Tun do time enemies. 
FRNELON. 

Rica ct moi sommes peut-€tre lea Rica and 1 arc perhaps the first 
premiers. Montesquieu. 

(11.) The recapitulating pronoun and the verb sometimes come 
first in the sentence. 

■ ■us, vous ct moi, besoin You and I have need of tolerance. 
do tolSr Voltaire. 

(12.) The reflective pronoun be, himself, etc., ia used for both 
. and Cor both numbers; for persons and lor things; and 
always accompanies a verb. 

impont Tfie eyes of friendship an seldom 
raremeot Voltaire, dt ■■ 

procal and sometimes 
atext: 
theyfia 

• t!- tit, they fit ■ r, each other. 

Ml.) S ' etc, is of both genders and numbers, 

and is applied I I things. [( is used in general and inde- 

terminate imonly au indefinite pronoun lbr 

the nominal 

in d'un plus We have often need of one more 
petit qu 

II 'I pend toujours d 
honorablement Gibault-Duvivteb. honorably 

on the persona] pronouns, Bee Synta 
and follow 

| 3 [.— PossEssn i: Pronouns. 

pronouns which arc formed from the personal 
. represent, in the radical part, the possessor, while in ter- 
mination they always agree with the thi Some relate 

i-.i POSBESSIVSS RELATI1 ; ' BSOff. 

the — 
tutor. 

I 

1. Ie mion, la mienne, lea mil as, 1 

2. la ti'ii, la tii 

::. Ie aien, la ai , itt. 



POSSESSIVE PIS O NOUNS. — § 35. 319 

(3.) Two or more Persons: 



The object posses 


^ed being in the — 




Singular. 


Plural. 




Masculine. Feminine. 


Mas. and Fern. 




le nutre, la nutre, 
le votre, la votre, 
le leur, la leur, 


les nutres, 
les vutres, 
les leurs, 


ours ; 

yours; 

theirs. 



§ 35. — Remarks on the Possessive Pronouns. 
(1.) It may be seen from the above table that, as before said, the 
termination of the possessive pronoun agrees in gender and number 
with the object possessed. 

Totre canif et le mien, Totre plume et et la mienne. 

Tour penknife and mine. Your pen and mine. 

Yos freres et les miens. Yos soeurs et les miennes. 

Tour brothers and mine. Tour sisters and mine. 

On voit les maux d'autrui, d'un We see the misfortunes of others, 

autre ceil que les siens. Corneille. differently from our own. 

Les ministres du roi sentent que Tlie ministers of the king feel that 

leur gloire, commo la sienne, est their glory, like his own, is in na- 

dans le bonheur national. tional liappiness. 
Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

(2.) These pronouns should relate to a noun previously expressed. 
This rule is often violated in mercantile correspondence : 

J'ai recu la votre en date du, etc., I received yours dated the, etc. 
is incorrect. It should read thus : 
J'ai recu votre lettre en date du, etc. I received your letter dated, etc. 

(3.) These pronouns may, however, be used absolutely when we 
mean thereby our family, our relatives, or intimate friends. 

Moi, j'ai les miens, la cour, le peu- I have my family or friends, the 

pie a coutenter. La. Fontaine. court, the people to please. 

ilalheureux qui parte chez les Wretched is he who carries among 

siens le glaive et les flambeaux. his fellow-citizens the sword and the 

Colarpeau. torch. 

C'est a nous a payer pour les We must bear .the penalty of the 

crimes des noires. Racine. crimes of our family or ptopile. 

(4.) Le mien and le tien are also used absolutely as the word mine 
and thine in English, in the sense of possession, property: 

Et le mien et le Men, deux freres And mine and thine, two punciili- 

pointilleux. . Botleau. ous brothers. 

Le tien et le mien, sont les sources Mine and thine (meum and ticum) 

de toutes les divisions et de loutes are the sources of all divisions and 

les querelles. Girault-Duvivier. quarrels. 





Singular. 


Pkaral 


Masculine 


Feminine. 


Masculine. Feminine. 


cclui, 


celle, 


f this, 

\ (hat, CCUX ' ceUes » 


celui-ci, 


celle-ci, 


this, ccux-ci, colles-ci, 


celui-la, 


celle-la, 


that, ceux-la, cellos-la, 
ce, it, they. 




Absolute Demonstrative Pronouns. 




ceci, 

ccla, 


thai \ not use< * iu t,ie l ,lura '- 



320 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. — § 36, 37. 

§ 36. DEMONSTRATIVE TEOXOUXS. 

these ; 
those ; 
these ; 
those. 



§ 37. — "Remarks ox tiii: 1 >i:mo\sti;.vtive Pronouns. 
(1.) The demonstrative pronoun . no., assume the gen- 

der and number of the nouns which they represent 
Te ne connais d , 

•" ( l" tempa unless it be that of time. 

Stanislas Lbczujsky. 

lists which the heart 
"" 9 Qe '- l I which goodness de- 

tore. Ma- rva. 

I '-'-) These pron- , bsolutelv before </uf, ptt\ 

font, me manner i pronouns he, 

■ 

00 Bfflrvioe doit He who rentiers a service should 

: he who ne, . 

I . 

those 

■ la reli- th 
gion 

_ ( 3 -> . are used when ii i 

oote the comparative proximity or remotene 
.•.ana that 
celoi-d, (hi celui-la, that one. 

(4.) ' Mi, etc., are often used to express contrast or 

then equivali 
.• //i/.s- o/^, iha 

an brave A 

&it la guerre aux ennen .■ „.,.,iW do 

gainst 

linaire 

nir la beauteles talents: u ■;, ,„,;, . 

plaisentdaos tons lea temps; //.-■ .. i ho 

LeUe-la n a qu uu temps ,,,,., r plaire. /„:"■,• has but one time top 

vou 



RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 38,39. 321 

(5.) Ceci, cela, have no plural, and are used only of things. They 
do not refer to a word expressed before, but serve to point out objects : 
prenez ceci, take this. donnez-moi cela, give me that. 

J'ai deja dit ce qu'il faut faire, I have already said what should be 
quand un enfant veut avoir ceci et done, when a child will have this and 
cela. J. J. Rousseau. that. 

(6.) Ce, a pronoun, must not be confounded with the demonstra- 
tive adjective ce. The pronoun ce is often used without an antece- 
dent, as the nominative of the verb ttre in the same manner as the 
English pronoun it : 

c'est moi, it is I. c'est vous, it is you. 

Ce n'est plus le jouet d'une flamme It is no longer the sport of an un- 

servile ; worthy flame ; 

(Test Pyrrhus ; c'est le fils et le rival It is Pyrrhus ; it is the son and 

d' Achilla. Racine. the rival of Achilles. 

For particular rules on this pronoun, see § 108. 
§ 38. — Relative Pronouns. 

(1.) The relative pronouns are so named on account of the inti- 
mate relation which they have to a noun or pronoun which precedes, 
and of which they recall the idea. The noun or pronoun so preced- 
ing the relative pronoun is called the antecedent. 

(2.) Table op the Relative Pronouns. 

qui, who, which ; (sujet, nominal) de qui, of, from whom, ) Regime indi- 
que, whom, which; (reg. direct, ace.) dont, of, from whom; j- rect, genitive 

which; ) and ablative. 

a qui, to whom ; (regime indirect, dative.) 
lequel, who, which; composed of the article le and quel. 
Singular. Plural. 

Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine. 

lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, who, which; 

duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles, of, from, which ; 
auquel, a laquelle auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 
y, to it, of it, etc. en, of it, of them, etc. 

quoi, what, which, why, etc. 

§ 39. — Remarks on the Relative Pronouns. 
(1.) Qui, who, which, is generally the subject or nominative. It is 
used for both genders and numbers, for persons and for things. (See 
No. 6 of this §.) 

(2.) When used for things, qui cannot be preceded by a preposi- 
tion. Its use, in this respect, is restricted to the nominative. 
(3.) It is used relatively and absolutely. 

(4.) It is used relatively when it has an antecedent expressed. 
34* 



322 RELATIVE PP. O NOUNS. § 39. 

Le premier qui fut roi, fut un The first who became king, was an 

pere adore. Albert. adored father. 

L'amour avidement croit tout ce Love believes eagerly all that fiat- 

qui le fiatte. Racine. ters it. 

(5.) It is used absolutely when it has no antecedent expressed. 
It then offers to the mind a vague and indeterminate idea. It is 
rendered in English by he who, she who, ihey who. 

Qui vent parler sur tout, souvent TT7<o (he who) wishes to speak on 

parle au basard. Andrieux. every subject, speaks often at random. 

L&cbe, i?ui'veut mourir, courageux lie who wishes to die is a coward ; 

qui ]n'Ut vivre. RACINE, Jun. he who can support life has cpuraye. 

Qui ne fait des heureux, u'est He who does not render others 

pas digue do l'etre. happy, is not worthy to be so. 

(6.) Qui is also used absolutely "when it is interrogative. It may 
then be nominatif or regime : 

qui parlo? wlw speaks t qui voycz-vous? whom do you see? 

(7.) Que, whom, ichut. which, stands generally for the regime direct. 
This pronoun is used for persons and thing.-. It is of both genders 
and nu:: 

leslettresgi the letters which I ■- 

the men whom I Itaie seen. 

(8.) It is relative when it has an antecedent : 

La gloire prdte on charmo aux Glory lends a charm to the horrors 
a afiYonte. which . 

I 'I I.WIfiNK. 

que DOOfl Buivons, la pre- Of the laics which we follow, the 
■ -t l'luiiiiieur. VOLTAIRS. first is ho 

(9.) It is absolute when it has no antecedent, and signifies quelle 
chose? what thing f quoi? what? 

que vouloz-voua ? HI you (have) t 

que dit- what do people say t 

(10.) Quo!, what, IS invariable, and said only of things. It may 
be used absolutely and relatively : 

j'ignoro ce a quoi il pense, / am ignorant of what he thinJcs. 

In the above sentence it is relative, being preceded by its antc- 

it ce. 
(11.) Quoi, when absolute, means quelle chose, irhat thing? and is 
stly in interrogative and doubtful senti 

II y a dans cette affaire je ne Baia 77u re is in that of air 7 know not 

le je n'entendfl pas. what, which I do not icnderstand. 

L'Aoadbvib. 

11 y avail jc no Mis quoi dans sea There was I know not what, in his 
yeux percaata, qui me faiaail pi ur. piercing eyes, which inspired me with 
Fi.ni.lon. fear. 



RELATIVE PEONOUIfS, § 39. 323 

(12.) Dont, of whom, of which, whose, is used for both genders and 
numbers, for persons and for things. It is always employed rela- 
tively, and is, therefore, always preceded by an antecedent : 

Un plaisir dont on est assure de A pleasure of which we are sure 

se repentir, ne peut jamais etre tran- io repent, can never be a peaceful 

quille. Mme. de La Valliere. one. 

II faut plaindre le sort du prince We must pity the fate of that un- 

infortune, dont le coeur endurci n'a fortunate prince, ivhose hardened 

jamais pardonne. Chenier. heart has never forgiven. 

(13.) Dont is preferable to de qui, of ivhom, and duquel, of which. 
When, however, the pronoun has the sense of from whom, i. e., when 
used to denote a transfer, de qui is better: 

Le libraire de qui j'ai recu ces The bookseller from whom I have 
livres. received these boohs. 

(14.) Lequel, laquelle, lesquelles, who, which, should only be 
used in the nominative, and in the direct regimen, in order to avoid 
ambiguity. They may relate to persons or things : 

(Test un effet de la divine Provi- It is an act of divine Providence, 
dence, lequel attire l'admiration de which (act) attracts the admiration of 
tout le monde. Bussi-Rabutin. every one. 

(15.) Lequel, preceded by a preposition — that is, duquel, auquel, 
dans lequel, &c, must always be used for tilings in the indirect regi- 
men. The word qui, as has been mentioned above, cannot relate to 
things in the oblique cases : 

Un livre curieux serait celui dans That would be a curious booh in 
lequel on ne trouverait pas un men- which not a falsehood were found. 



Napoleon. 

La Seine, dans le lit de laquelle The Seine, in the bed of which the 

viennent se jeter l'Tonne, la Marne, Tonne, the Marne, and the Oise empty 

et l'Oise. themselves. 

(16.) Lequel, in all its modifications, may be used absolutely or 
interrogatively : 

lequel ? which one ? duquel ? of which one f 

lequel voyez-vous ? which one do you see ? 

(17.) En, of it, of them. This pronoun is of both genders and 
numbers, and relates almost always to animals and things. It is often 
used for the English words, some, any, when employed absolutely, 
or even when understood. It is also used as an indirect regimen 
in relation to things, and sometimes, but not often, in relation to 
persons [§ 92 (2)], instead of the personal pronouns lui, elles, eux, 
elks. [§ 103, Rule 1.] 

Vous en parlez, you speah of it. J'en ai, I have some of it. 



INDEFINITE PliONOl'XS 



40, 41. 



La fortune a son prix ; l'imprudent 

en abu.-e, 
L'hypoL-rite en medit, ct l'honnete 

lioumiu en use. Delille. 

Les iiinites des sciences sout com- 
nio l'horizon; plus on en approche, 
plus elles reculent. Mme. Neckeb. 
La vie est uu depot conlie par lo 

eiel ; 
Oser en disposer, c'est ctre criminel. 
GrBESSBT. 

(IS.) Y, to it, to than, thereto, of it, etc. This relative pronoun, of 
id numbers, is used instead of a lui, a die, cnlui, etc. 
It is used of things, and also adverbially in the sense of there. 

A'ij pense, J think of it. J'y donno mes soins, I devote my care to it. 



Fortune has its worth; Hie im- 
prudent abuses it, the hypocrite 
speaks evil of it, and the worthy 
inan uses it. 

The limits of science are like the 
horizon, the more we approach (them) 
the more they recede. 

Life is a trust confided by heaven; 
to dare to dispose of it, is a crime. 



J':ii connu le malheur, et j'y sais 
r-o. iip.it ir. i\i;n. 

plus, cher l'aulin; plus 
)'y pens.-. 

sens chancel r ma cruelle 
i; icinb, 

En qu tlque pays que j';i ■ ■ ■!••. \'y 



/ hare knoicn misfortune, and 1 
can sympathize with it. 

think no more of (his. dear 
PauUn; (lie longer I think of it, (he 
more I fed my cruel constancy waver. 

hove but liitle property ; join 
m y forlu . 

In whaU ver country I have been, 
I lived (there) as if / was to 

my life in i(. 



Ithougb numerous instances maybe found in which French 

ised y with r ns, these are licenses which 

it is i. 

£ In. — TNDKrrxiTE Pbonottns. 
lefinite pronouns indicate persons and things without 
. arc — 



autrui, 




qiii.rinquo, 


whoever, 


chacun, 


. one. 


l'un l'autro, 


one anothei 


I n. 


one, people, (hey. 


I'un i.t L'autre, 


both. 








such. 




some one, somebody. 


tout, 


every thing, all 



-Remarks ox the [^definite Pbokoutcs. 

loun is applied only to persons. It 
"I" form I't gender or number, and is used ouly as an 
imen. 

I dLscret; il The gentleman is 

mais. St. Evremond. aU\ 

tu ho /'" nnt unto oUfrs (hat which thou 

voudruis pus qu'ou te fit. to be done u 



INDEFINITE PliONOUNS. § 41. 325 

(2.) Chacun, every one, each one. When this pronoun is absolute, 
and means every one, everybody, it is invariable. 

Le sens commun n'est pas chose Common sense is no common 

commune, thing, though every one believes he 

Chacun pourtant, croit en avoir has enough of it. 
assez. Valaincourt. 
Chacun est prosterne devant les Every one bows before the fortu- 

gens heureux. Destouches. note. 

(3.) When chacun is used relatively, it may take the form of the 
feminine. 

Chacune de nous (des femmes) se Every one of us {women) thought 
pretendait superieure aux autres en herself superior in beauty to the 
beaute. Montesquieu. others. 

(4.) On {one, people, they) is always in the nominative ; and although 
always construed with a verb in the third person singular, it conveys 
most generally the idea of plurality. It is commonly used in indefinite 
sentences. 

On dit, people say, they say, it is said. On parle, somebody speaks, etc. 

On garde sans remords ce qu'ora We {one, people) keep without re- 
acquiert sans crime. Corneille. morse that which we {one, people) ac- 
quire without crime. 

On relit tout Racine ; on cboisit We {people, they) read again and 
dans Yoltaire. Delille. again all Racine ; we {etc.) select in 

Voltaire. 

On ne surmonte le vice qu'en le We conquer vice only by avoid- 
fuyant. Fenelon. ing it. 

(5.) On, coming immediately after the words et, si, ou, and 

qui, is generally preceded by the article T , used for euphony. 

Ce que Von concoit bien, s'ex- That which we understand well, we 

prime clairement. Boileau. express clearly. 

C'est d'un roi que Von tient cette It is from a king that we derive 

maxime auguste, this august maxim, that one is only 

Que jamais on n'est grand, qu'autant great in proportion as he is just. 

que Von est juste. Boileau. 

(6.) Personne, no one, nobody, used as an indefinite pronoun, is 
always masculine and singular. When used as nominative to a verb 
expressed, it is followed by ne. 

U n'est personne qui ne cherche a Tliere is no one who does not seek 

se rendre heureux. — Chinese thought, to render himself happy. 

Personne ne veut etre plaint de ses No one wishes to be pitied on ac- 

erreurs. Vauvenargues. count of his mistakes. 

Note. — The word personne, used as a noun, and meaning a particular 
person, is of the feminine gender. 

(7.) Quelqu'un, somebody, some one, any one, anybody, used abso- 
lutely, is invariable. 



32G 



INDEFINITE 



Envier quelquCun c'est s'avoucr To envy any one is confessing ont's 

son inferieur. Mlle. DE L'Espinasse. self his inferior. 

Quelqu'wn a-t-il jamais doute Has any one ever had serious 

serieuseuient de Fexistence de Dieu ? doubts of the existence of God ? 

GlRAULT-DUYIVIER. 

(3.) Quelqu'un, used relatively, changes for gender and number. It 
has then the sense of some of, some one of. 

Connaissez-vous quelquhine de ces Do you know any one of those 
dames, quelques-uns de ces mes- ladies, any of those gentlemen t 
sieurs? Girault-Duvivier. 

(0.) Qcicoxque, whoever, whosoever, is generally masculine, and 
has no plural. It is only said of persons : 



Quiconque flattc ses maitres, les 
trahit. Massillox. 

Quiconque est capable de mentir, 
est indignc d'etre coinpte au nombro 
des homines. Flxelox. 

Quiconque est soupconneux, invito 
la trahison. Voltaire. 



Wlwever flatters his masters, betrays 
them. 

Whoever is capable of falsehood is 
unworthy to be counted among the 
number of men. 

Whoever is susp>icious, invites 
treachery. 



(10.) L'rx i/actre, one another, each other, the one and the other. 
This pronoun makes in the feminine Tunc Tuutre, and in the plural 
les uns les autres, les uncs les autres: 



Tout le monde so confiait Fun d 
V autre cette confidence. Kui.m i :i:i:s. 

Tout le peuplo suivit Virginia, fas 
uns par curiosity I J attires par oon« 
Bideration pour Icilius. Vertot. 

II y a deux sortes de ruirn 
l'ouvragc du temps, I'autre l'ouvrago 
des homines. Chateaubriand. 



Every body confided one to ayiother 
this communication. 

All the people followed Virginia, 
some through curiosity, some through 
\for Icilius. 

There are two sorts of ruins ; one 
the work of time, the other (he work 
of men. 



(11.) L'un et l'autre, les uns et les actres, both. This expression 
may be used of persons and things : 



La Condamino a parcouru Tun et 
Taidre hemisphere. 1 Buffox. 

L'un et Vaulre consul suivaient 
ses etendunls. Corxeille. 

Sous Tune et Tautre epoque, il 
perit un tres grand nombre de ci- 
toyena Bartiii'.lemy. 

lis so reunissaicnt les uns et les 
autres contre 1'ennemi connnun. 

GlBAULT-DUVTVTJBB. 



La Condamine travelled over both 
hemis])heres. 

Both consuls followed his stand- 
ards. 

At both epoclis, a large number vf 
citizens perished. 

Tftey united with one another 
against the common enemy. 



(12.) Tel, telle, such, many a person, many, is an indefinite 
pronoun in the following and in similar sentences: 

1 The noun is in the singular, because the word hemisphere is under- 
stood after the word Tun. This rule is observed by the best French 
authors. 



VERBS. — § 42 . 327 

Td donne, a pleines mains, qui Many a one may give bountifully, 

n'oblige persorme. Corneille. without obliging any one. 

Td brille au second rang, qui Many a person may shine in the 

s'eclipse au premier. Voltaire. second rank, who is eclipsed in the 
first. 

Tel est pris qui croyait prendre. Many are caught while attempting 

La Fontaine. to catch others. 

Telle, sans aucun attrait pour la Many \a nun] for whom retreat 

retraite, se consacre au Seigneur par has no attractions, consecrates herself 

pure fierte. Massillox. to the Lord through mere pride. 

Tels que l'on croit d'inutiles amis, Many friends whom we think use- 

dans le besoin rendent de bons less, render us in our need valuable 

services. Boursault. services. 

(13.) Tel, in connection with monsieur, madame, etc., as monsieur 
un td, madame une telle, Mr., Mrs. such-a-one is used substantively. 

(14.) Tout, every one, every thing. This word, employed absolutely, 
is invariable. 

A la seule vertu, sois sur que Be assured that it is with virtue 

tout prospere. F. de Neufchateau. alone, that every thing prospers. 

Tout n'est pas Caumartin, Bignon, Every one is not Caumartin, 

rii d'Aguesseau. Boileau. Bignon, nor d 1 Aguesseau. 

Son grand genie embrassait tout. His great genius embraced every 

Bossuet. thing. 

§ 42. — Verbs. 

(1.) The verb is that part of speech which expresses an action 
done or suffered by the subject, or simply indicates the condition of 
the subject. 

(2.) The subject or nominative of a verb is the person or thing 
doing the action, or being in the condition expressed by the verb. It 
replies to the question qui est-ce qui? who? for persons; and qu'est- 
ce qui ? which ? what ? for tilings. 

(3.) Verbs admit two kinds of regimen ; the direct regimen and 
the indirect regimen. 

(4.) The direct regimen, or immediate object, is that which com- 
pletes in a direct manner the signification of a verb ; that is to say, 
without the aid of any other intermediate word. It answers to the 
question qui ? whom ? for persons, and quoi ? what ? for things. 

(5.) The indirect regimen, or remote object, is that which completes 
the signification of the verb by means of an intermediate word, such 
as the prepositions a, de, pour, avec, dans, etc. — a qui ? to whom ? 
de qui ? of or from whom ? pour qui ? for whom ? avec qui ? etc., 
for persons ; and a quoi ? to what ? de quoi ? of or from what ? etc., 
for things. 

(6.) Yerbs are regular, irregular, or defective. § 44, (2). 



328 TEEBS. — § 43. 

§ 43. — Different Sorts of Verbs. 

(1.) There are five sorts of verbs : active, passive, neuter, reflective 
or pronominal, and unipersonal. 

(2.) The active verb is that which expresses an action performed 
by the subject, and having some person or thing for its object. The 
object is the direct regimen of the verb. 

(3.) Every French verb after -which quelqitun, some one, quelque 
chose, something, may be placed, is an active verb. Thus, in the fol- 
lowing sentences, proUger, changer, chanter, etc., are active verbs, be- 
cause we may say proUger quelqu'un, to protect some one; changer 
quelque chose, to change something. 

Dieu protege l'innocence. Racine. God protects innocence. 

L'habit change les rnceurs. Dress changes the manners. 

Voltaire. 
Les cygnes no chantent pas leur Swans do not sing their death. 
mort. Buffon. 

(4.) The passive verb is the contrary of the active verb. The ac- 
tive verb presents the subject as performing an action immediately 
directed towards an object ; whereas the passive verb presents the 
subject as suffering or receiving an action. The passive verb is com- 
posed of the past participle of an active verb and the auxiliary ttre, 
to be. (See § 54.) 

Xos campagnes aontferUlisees pat Our fields are fertilized by the 

L'Acadkmie. ain. 

11 etait guide par la force do son He was guided by the force of his 

genie. MassILLON. genius. 

Les petits esprits sont trop blesses Little minds are too much vexed 

des petites ckoses. with trifles. 
Rochefoucauld. 

(5.) The neuter verb marks, like the active verb, an action per- 
formed by the subject; but this action can only reach the object in- 
directly; that is, by means of a preposition. Hence it is, that the 
neuter verb never has a direct regimen, and that the words quelqu ini 
and quelque chose cannot be placed after it. A neuter verb can never 
be used in the passive voice. 

Socrato passa lo dernier jour do Socrates spent the last day of his 

sa vie a discourir do l'inimortalite life in discoursing upon the immw- 

del'ame. L'Acadkmie. tality of the soul. 

Le feu qui semblo etoint, dort The Jire v:hich seems extinct, sleeps 

souvent sous sa cendre. Corneille. often wider its ashes. 

Les Plateens citerent les Lacede- Tlie Plateans cited tin' Lacedemo- 

moniens a comparaitre devant les nians to appeur bifore the Amphic- 

Amphictyona Le Gbndeb. tyons. 

(6.) The reflective or pronominal verb is conjugated with two pro- 



CONJUGATIONS OP TEEBS. — § 44, 45. 329 

nouns of the same person ; je me, tu te, il se, nous nous, voas vous, ils 
se. (See § 56.) 

Je me flatte, I flatter myself. Yous votes felicitez, you congraiu- 



II ne faut pas se flatter : les plus We should not flatter ourselves : the 

experiments ont fait des fautes ca- most experienced have coinmitted cap- 

pitales. Bossuet. Hal errors. 

Les peuples se feliciteront d'avoir The nations will congratulate them- 

un roi qui lui ressemble. selves upon having a king who re- 

Massillon. sembles him. 
II ne faut pas permettre a rhomme We should not allow a man to de- 

de se mepriser entierement. spise himself entirely. 
Bossuet. 

(7.) The unipersonal verb can only be used in the third person 
singular : II pleut, it rains ; il gele, it freezes ; il tonne, it thunders. 

Pour bien juger les grands, il faut To judge properly of the great, it is 

les approcher. Aubert. necessary to approach them. 

E faut rendre meilleur le pauvre We shoidd (it is necessary to) im- 

qu'on soulage. Saint-Lambert. prove the poor whom we relieve. 

(8.) There are two verbs called auxiliary, because they serve to 
conjugate all others. They are — avoir, to have ; and etre, to le. 

§ 44. — Conjugations. 
(1.) The French verbs are divided into four large classes or conju- 
gations : 

1st. The first conjugation comprises all verbs of which the present of the 
infinitive ends in ee ; as parler, to speak ; aimer, to love, etc. 

2d. The second conjugation embraces all those of which the infinitive 
ends in ir ; as cherir, to cherish ; punir, to punish, etc. 

3d. The third conjugation contains all the verbs, which, in the infinitive 
end in oir ; such as recevoir, to receive ; pouvoir, to be able, etc. 

4th. The fourth conjugation comprises all the verbs terminating with 
re in the infinitive ; as rexdre, to render ; prendre, to take, etc. 

(2.) The verbs are again divided into regular, irregular, and defec- 
tive : 

1st. The regular verbs are those which, in all their tenses, are conjugated 
like the model verb of the conjugation to which they belong. 

2d. The irregular verbs are those which are not, in all their tenses, con- 
jugated like the model verb. 

3d. The defective verbs are those which want certain tenses or persons. 

§ 45. — Modes and Tenses. 
(1.) There are six modes ; the indicative, the conditional, the 
imperative, the subjunctive, the infinitive, and the participle : 

1st. The indicative, whatever may be the tense, indicates or declares in 
a positive, absolute manner : j'abandonne, I abandon ; j'ai abandonne, / 
have abandoned; j'abandonnerai, I will abandon. 



330 



MODES AND TENSE S- 



45. 



2d. The conditional indicates a condition or a supposition : j'abandon- 
nerais si / would abandon if. — 

3d. The imperative is used to express a command, prayer, or exhorta- 
tion : abandonnez cet enfant, abandon that child. 

4th. The subjunctive is used after propositions expressing doubt, con- 
tingency, or necessity: il est douteux que je l'abandonne, it is not certain 
thai I ■may abandon him. 

5th. The infinitive presents the signification of the verb in an unlimited 
manner: abandonner ses enfants, to abandon one's children. 

6th. The participle, while retaining the power of the verb, at the same 
time partakes of the nature of an adjective : abandonnant ses parents, 
ahandoning his relatives; abandonne de ses enfants, abandoned by his children. 

(2.) The indicative has eight tenses : 

1st. The present: je parle, I speak ; je donne, I give. 

2d. The simultaneous past, or imperfect : je parlais, / was speaking. 

3d. The past definite: je parlai, I spoke, I did speak. 

4th. The past indefinite : j'ai parle, / have spoken ; j'ai donne, I have given. 

5th. The past anterior: j'eus parle, I had spoken. 

6th. The pluperfect: j'avais parle, I had been speaking. 

7 th. The future absolute: je parlerai, I shad, will speak. 

8th. The future anterior: j'aurai parle, I shall have spoken. 



(3.) The conditional has two tenses: 

1st. The present or future, je parlcrais, 
2d. The past, j'aurais parle, 

(■4.) The imperative has one tense : 

parle, 

(5.) The subjunctive has four tenses : 



1st. The present or future, 
2d. The imperfect, 
3d. The past, 

4th. The pluperfect, 



que je parle, 
quo je parlasse, 
que j'aie parle, 



I should, would speak. 
1 should have spoken. 



that I may speak, 
that 1 might speak. 
thai I may have spoken. 



quo j'eusse parle, that I might have spoken. 
(6.) The infinitive has two tenses: 



1st The present relative, 
2d. The past, 



parler, 
avoir parle, 



(7.) The participle has three tenses: 



1st The present relative, 
2d. The pasl active, 
3d. The past or passive, 



parlant, 
ayai it parle, 



to speak. 

to have spoken. 



speaking. 
having spoken, 
spoken. 



(8.) Tenses are simple or compound. 

1. Simple, when they are expressed in a single word: je parle, / 

npownd, when they require the assistance of the verb avoir 
or cue : j'ai parle, / have spoken ; je suis arrive', I have arr 



use oe the auxiliary verbs. — § 46. 331 

§ 46. — Use of the Auxiliary Verbs, Avoir and Etre. 
(1.) The auxiliary avoir is used : 

1. In the conjugation of its own compound tenses : j'ai eu, I have 
had. 

2. In the conjugation of the compound tenses of the verb etre : 
j'ai ete, I have been. 

3. In the compound tenses of the active verbs : j'ai aime, 1" have 
loved. 

4. In the compound tenses of most neuter verbs expressing an 
action : j'ai marche, I have walked. [See exceptions to this rule (3.) 
below.] 

5. It is also used in the conjugation of verbs which are always 
unipersonal : il a plu, it has rained ; il a grele, it has hailed, etc. 

(2.) The verb etre is used in the conjugation of: 

1. All the tenses of passive verbs: je suis aime, lam loved. 

2. The compound tenses of all reflective or pronominal verbs : je me 
suis flatte, I have flattered myself; je me suis promene, I have walked. 

3. The compound tenses of the following neuter verbs, though the 
same express action : 

aller, to go ; - nattre, to be bom ; 

arriver, to arrive ; toraber, to fall ; 

choir, to fall; venir, to come; 

deceder, to decease; parvenir, to succeed; 

mourir, to die ; devenir, to become; 

revenir, to return. 

4. A few unipersonal verbs, which are not always, but occasionally 
such : il lui est arrive un malheur, a misfortune has happened to him. 

(3.) A certain number of neuter verbs : as — 

accourir, to run toivards ; 

disparaitre, to disappear; 

croitre, to grow ; 

cesser, to cease; 

perir, to perish ; 

monter, to mount, to ascend ; 

descendre, to go down; 

take sometimes avoir, and sometimes tire. 

1. They take avoir, when we have in view the action expressed by 
the verb ; 

2. And etre, when situation or condition is the principal idea which 
we wish to express : 

Examples. 

With AVOIR. With ETRE. 

Ello a disparu subitement. Elle est disparue depuis quinze 

jours. 
She disappeared suddenly. She lias been gone a fortnight. 



entrer, 


to enter; 


sortir, 


to go out ; 


passer, 


to pass ; 


parlir, 


to depart; 


vieillir, 


to grow old; 


grandir, 


to grow ; 


rester, 


to remain, to dwell, 



332 USE OF THE AUXILIARY V E E B S . § 46 . 

La iievro a cesse hier. La fievre est cessee depuis quelquo 



The fever ceased yesterday. It is some time since the fever 
ceased. 

L3 barometro a descendu de II est descendu depuis une heure. 
plusieurs degres en peu d'heures. 

The barometer went down several He has been down one hour, 
degrees in a few hours. 

II a passe en Amerique en tel Les ckaleurs sont passees. 
temps. 

lie went to America at such a time. TJie heat is passed. 

Le trait a parti avec impetuosite. Les troupes sont partis depuis six 

L'ACADKMIE. moiS. L'ACADEMIE. 

The dart went with impetuosity. The troops have been gone six 

months. 
Le sang avait cesse de couler. Ce grand bruit est cesse. 

Boiste. Mme. de Sevigwb. 

The blood had ceased to flow. That great noise is over (has 

ceased.) 

(4.) Hester and dcmeurer, -when meaning to dwell, to reside, take the 
auxiliary avoir ; when they mean to remain, to be left, they take itrc: 

AVOIR. ETRE. 

J'ai rcste plus d'un an en Italic. Ello donnerait pour vous sa vie, 
MONTESQUIEU, lo seul bicn qui lui soit reste. 

Marmontel. 

/ resided more than a year in She would give for you, her life, 
Italy the only possession which remains to 

her. 
II a demcuro deux ans a la cam- Deux cents liommes sont de- 
pagne. L'Academie. meures sur lo champ de bataille. 

L'Acadi'mie. 
lie lived (dwelt) two years in the Two hundred men remained on the 
country. field of bat le, 

(5.) fichapper, to escape, to pass unnoticed, to be forgotten, takes the 
auxiliary avoir. In the sense of, to say inadvertent 7 //, it takes Ctre. 
AVOIR. ETRE. 

Cette difierence ne \\\a pas echap- Gemot m'esl echappd ; pardonnez 

pe. Rousseau. ma fraaeWse. Voltaire. 

Tltat difference has not escaped That w&rd escaped my tips ; excuse 
myfrtumness, 

J'ai retenu le chant, les vers m'ont Exdaeez les fautes qui pourront 

echappe. Voltaire. m'etre ecuappees. BoiLEAtJ. 

/ tamed the tune, but the verses Ex/ruse the faults which I may have 

have escaped my memory. committed inadvertently. 

(G.) Oonvenir, to become, to suit, takes avoir. When it is used in 
the sense of agreeing, or settling upon a price for an article, it takes 
Ctre. 

Cetto maison m'a convenu. Nous sommes convenus du prix. 

L'Academie. 
That house suited me. We agreed upon the price. 



AUXILIARY VERBS, 



-5 47. 



J333 



§ 47. — Paradigms of the Auxiliary Verbs. 

To familiarize the student with the frequent use made by the 
French, of the indefinite pronoun on [§ 41, (4.)], we have introduced 
it in our conjugation of the verbs. 

(1.)' AVOIR, TO HAVE.— AFFIRMATIVELY. 
Indicative Mod 



simple tenses. 

PRESENT. 



J'ai, 
Tuas, 
II a, 
On a, 

Nous 
Vous avez, 
Us ont, 



I have 

thou hast 

he has 

one has, people have 

we have 

you have 

they have 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
PAST INDEFINITE. 



J'ai eu, 
Tu as eu, 
II a eu, 
On a eu, 

Nous avons eu, 
Yous avez eu, 
lis ont eu, 



I have had 

thou hast had 

he has had 

one has had 

we have had 

you have had 

they have had 



IMPERFECT. 

J'avais, I had, was having, or I used 

to Mve 
Tu avais, thou hadst 

U avait, he had 

On avait, one had, people had 

Nous avions, we had 

Yous aviez, you had 

Ds avaient, they had 



J'avais eu, 

Tu avais eu, 
II avait eu, 
On avait eu, 
Nous avions eu, 
Yous aviez eu, 
lis avaient eu, 



I had had 

thou hadst had 
he had had 
one had had 
vje had had 
you had had 
they had had 



PAST DEFINITE. 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



J'eus, 
Tu eus, 
Heut, 
On eut, 
Nous eumes, 
Yous eutes, 
lis eurent, 



I had, or did have 

thou hadst. etc. 

he had 

one had, etc. 

we had 

you had 

they had 



J'eus eu, 
Tu eus eu, 
II eut eu, 
On eut eu, 
Nous eumes eu, 
Yous eutes eu, 
lis eurent eu, 



i" had had 
thou hadst had 
he had liad 
one had had 
we had had 
you had had 
they had had 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



J'aurai, 


/ shall or will have 


J'aurai eu, 


Tu auras, 


thou wilt have 


Tu auras eu, 


11 aura, 


he will have 


II aura eu, 


On aura, 


one will have 


On aura eu, 


Nous aurons, 


we shall have 


Nous aurons eu, 


Vous aurez, 


you will have 


Yous aurez eu, 


Us auront, 


they will have 


Us auront eu, 



I shall, will have had 

thou shalt have had 

he will have had 

one will have had 

, we will have had 

you will have had 

they will have had 



334 



AUXILIARY VERBS. 8 47. 



Conditional Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



J'aurais, 
Tu aurais, 
11 aurait, 
On aurait, 
Nous aurions, 
Vous auriez, 
lis auraient, 



I should have 

thou couldst have 

he would have 

one would have 

we would have 

you would have 

they would have 



J'aurais en, / should have had 

Tu aurais eu, thou wouldst have had 
II aurait eu, he should have had 

On aurait eu, one should have had 
Nous aurions eu, we should have had 
Vous auriez eu, you should have had 
lis auraient eu, they should have had 



Imperative Mode. 



Aie, 

Qu'il ait, 
Qu'on ait, 
Ayons, 
Ayez, 

Qu'ils aicnt, 



have thou 

let him have 

let one, people, them, have 

let us have 

have ye or you 

let them have 



Subjunctive Mode. 



PRESENT. 

Que j'aie, that I may 
Que tu aies, that thou mayest 

Qu'il ait, that he may 

Qu'on ait, that one may 

Que nous ayons, that we may 

Our vous ayez, that you may 

Qu'ils aicut, that they may 



PAST. 

Que j'aie eu, that I may 

Que tu aies ou, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait eu, that he may 

Qu'on ait eu, that one may 

Que nous ayons eu, that we may 
Que vous ayez eu, thai you may 
Qu'ils aient eu, that they may 



IMPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse, that I might ' 

Quo tu eusses, that thou mighlest 

Qu'il cut, that he might 

Qu'on eut, that one might I 

Quo nous eussions, that we might 

Que vous eussiez, that you might 

Qu'ils eussent, that they might __ 



PLUPERFECT. 



Que j'eusse eu, 
Que tu eusses 



that I might 
eu, that thou 

mightcst 
that he might 

that one 'might 



Qu'il cut eu, 
Qu'on eut eu, 
Que uous eussions eu, that we 

might 
Quo vous eussiez eu, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent cu, that they might 



Infinitive Mode. 

present. past. 

Avoir, to have | Avoir eu, to have had 

Participle. 

present. compound. 

Ayant, having | Ayant cu, having had 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Eu, had 






AUXILIARY VERBS 



47. 



335 



(2.) AVOIR, TO HA VE : CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY. 
Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



Je n'ai pas, 
Tu n'as pas, 
II n'a pas, 
Oa n'a pas, 
Nous n'avons pas 
Vous n'avez pas, 
lis n'ont pas, 



I have not 

thou hast not 

he has not 

one has not 

we have not 

you have not 

they have not 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

I have 

thou hast 

he has 

one has 

we have 

you have 

they have 



Je n'ai pas eu, 
Tu n'as pas eu, 
II n'a pas eu, 
On n'a pas eu, 
Nous n'avons pas eu 
Vous n'avez pas eu, 
lis n'ont pas eu, 



Je n'avais pas, 
Tu n'avais pas, 
Tl n'avait pas, 
Ou n'avait pas, 
Nous n'avions pas, 
Vous n'aviez pas, 
lis n'avaient pas, 



I had not 

thou hadst not 

he had not 

one had not 

we had not 

you had not 

they had not 



PLUPERFECT. 

Je n'avais pas eu, / had ' 

Tu n'avais pas eu, thou hadst 
II n'avait pas eu, he had 

On n'avait pas eu, one had 

Nous n'avions pas eu, we had 
Vous n'aviez pas eu, you had 
lis n'avaient pas eu, they had J 



PAST DEFINITE. 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Je n'eus pas, 
Tu n'eus pas, 
II n'eut pas, 
On n'eut pas, 
Nous n'eumes pas, 
Vous n'cutes pas, 
lis n'eurent pas, 



I had not I Je n'eus pas eu, I had ~\ 

thou hadst not \ Tu n'eus pas eu, thou hadst 

he had not ' II n'eut pas eu, he had \ 

one had not . On n'eut pas eu, one had - 

we had not j Nous n'eumes pas eu, vie had 

you had not , Vous n'eutes pas eu, you had 

they had not I lis n'eurent pas eu, they had J 



FUTURE. 

Je n'aurai pas, I shall not 

Tu n'auras pas, thou wilt not 

11 n'aura pas, he will not 

Ou n'aura pas, one will not 
Nous n'aurons pas, we shall not 

Vou3 n'aurez pas, you shall not 

lis n'auront pas, they will not _ - 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

Je n'aurai pas eu, I shall 

Tu n'auras pas eu, thou shall 
II n'aura pas eu, he will 

On n'aura pas eu, one will 

Nous n'aurons pas eu, we will 
Vous n'aurez pas eu, you will 
Us n'auront pas eu, they will _ 



Conditional Mode. 



Je n'aurais pas, I should " 

Tu n'aurais pas, thou wouldst 



II n'auralt pas, 
On n'aurait pas, 
Nous n'aurions pas, 
Vous n'auriez pas, 
Us n'auraient pas, 



he would 
one would 

we would 
you would 
they would „ 



PAST. 
Je n'aurais pas eu, I should 
Tu n'aurais pas eu, thou shouldst 
II n'aurait pas eu, he would 
On n'aurait pas eu, one' would 
Nous n'aurions pas eu, we would 
Vous n'auriez pas eu, you would 
lis n'auraient pas eu, they would ^ 



33G 



AUXILIARY VERBS . 8 47 . 



Imperative Mode. 



N'aie pas, 
Qu'il n'ait pas, 
Qu'on n'ait pas, 
N'ayons pas, 
N'ayez pas, 
Qu'ils n'aient pas, 



have not 
let him not have 
let one not have 
let us not have 
have not ye or you 
let them not have 



Subjunctive Mode. 



sraiPLE TEASES. 

PRESENT. 

Que je n'aie pas, that I may * 
Que tu n'aies pas, tliat thou 

mayest 
Qu'il n'ait pas, that he may 

Qu'on n'ait pas, that one may 
Que nous n'ayons pas, that we 

may 
Que vous n'ayez pas, that you 

may 
Qu'ils n'aient pas, that they may 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
PAST. 

Que je n'aie pas eu, that I may ' 
Que tu n'aies pas eu, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il n'ait pas eu, that he may 
Qu'on n'ait pas eu, that one may 
Que nous n'ayons pas eu, that 

we may 
Que vous n'ayez pas eu, that 

you may 
Qu'ils n'aient pas eu, that they 
may 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas, (toll might 

Que tu n'eusses pas, that thou 

mighiest 
Qu'il n'eut pas, that he might 
Qu'on n'eut pas, that one might 

Que nous n'eussions pas, that 

we might 
Que vous n'eussiez pas, that you 

might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas, that they 

might 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que je n'eusse pas eu, that I 

might 

Que tu n'eusses pas cu, that 

thou mighiest 

Qu'il n'eiit pas eu, that he might 

Qu'on n'eut pas eu, that one 

might 
Que nous n'eussions pas eu, that 

we might 
Que vous n'eussiez pas eu, thai 

you might 
Qu'ils n'eussent pas eu, that 
they might 



Infinitive Mode. 



Ne pas avoir, 



N'ayant pas, 



to have | N'avoir pas eu, 
Participle. 



not to have had 



COMPOUND. 

not having | N'ayant pas eu, not having 

Past or Passive. 
Pas eu, Not had 



had 



AUXILIARY VERBS. - 



47 



337 



(3.) AVOIR,— INTERROGATIVELY. 

Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 




Ai-je? 


have I? 


Ai-je eu ? 


have I " 




As-tu? 


hast thou ? 


As-tu eu? 


hast thou 




A-t-il? 1 


has he? 


A-t-il eu? 


has he 


*>. 


A-t-on I 1 


has one ? 


A-t-on eu ? 


has one 


v~3 


Avons-nous ? 


have we? 


Avons-nous eu? 


have we 




Avez-vous ? 


have you ? 


Avez-vous eu ? 


have you 




Ont-ils ? 


have they ? 


Ont-ils eu ? 


have they 




IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 




Avais-je ? 


had I? 


Avais-je eu ? 


hadl^ 




Avais-tu ? 


hadst thou ? 


Avais-tu eu ? 


hadst thou 




Avait-il ? 


had he ? 


Avait-il eu? 


had he 


IK. 


Avait-oa ? 


had one ? 


Avait-on eu ? 


had one 


"3 

■ e 


Avions-nous ? 


had we ? 


Avions-nous eu? 


had we 




Aviez-vous ? 


had you ? 


Aviez-vous eu ? 


had you 




Avaient-ils ? 


had they ? 


Avaient-ils eu ? 


had tliey , 




PAST DEETNHE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 




Eus-je? 


had I? 


Eus-je eu ? 


had I" 




Eus-tu ? 


hadst thou ? 


Eus-tu eu ? 


hadst thou 




Eut-il ? 


had lie ? 


Eut-il eu ? 


had he 


•«. 


Eut-on? 


had one ? 


Eut-on eu ? 


had one 


13 


Eumes-nous ? 


had we? 


Eumes-nous eu ? 


had we 




Eutes-vous ? 


had you ? 


Eutes-vous eu? 


had you 




Eurent-ils ? 


had they ? 


Eurent-ils eu? 


had they > 




FUTURE. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 




Aurai-je ? 


shall I have? 


Aurai-je eu ? 


shall I" 




Auras-tu ? 


shalt thou have ? 


Auras-tu eu ? 


shaU thou 




Aura-t-H? 


will he have ? 


Aura-t-il eu ? 


shall he 


5 


Aura-t-on ? 


shall one have ? 


Aura-t-on eu ? 


shall one 


►* 


Aurons-nous ? 


shall we have ? 


Aurons-nous eu ? 


shall we 


§ 


Aurez-vous ? 


will you have ? 


Aurez-vous eu ? 


shall you 


^s 


Auront-ils? 


shall they have ? 


Auront-ils eu? 


shall they _ 





Conditional Mode. 



Aurais-je ? 


should I have ? 


Aurais-je eu ? 


should I ^ 




Aurais-tu ? 


shouldst thou have ? 


Aurais-tu eu ? 


wouldst thou 


* 


Aurait-il ? 


should he have ? 


Aurait-il eu? 


would he 


1 


Aurait-on ? 


would one have? 


Aurait-on eu ? 


slwuld one 


h 


Aurions-nous ? 


would we have ? 


Aurions-nous eu ? 


should we 


1 


Auriez-vous ? 


should you have ? 


Auriez-vous eu ? 


should you 


r«S 


Auraient-ils? 


should they have ? 


Auraient-ils eu? 


would they j 





See Lesson 4, Rule 6. 



338 



AUXILIAET TKEBS, 



47. 



(4.) AVOIR,— NEGATIVELY AND INTERROGATIVELY. 
Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 


COMPOUND TENSES. 


PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 


N'ai-je pas ? 


have I not? 


N'ai-je pas eu? have I' 


N'as-tu pas ? 


hast thou not ? 


N'as-tu pas eu ? hast thou 


N'a-t-il pas ? 


has he not ? 


N'a-t-il pas eu? : has he 


N'a-t-on pas ? 


has one not ? 


N'a-t-on pas eu ? has one 


N'avons-nous pas ? 


have we not? 


N'avons-nous pas eu ? have we 


N'avez-vous pas ? 


have you not ? 


N'avez-vous pas eu? have you 


N'ont-ils pas ? 


have they not? 


N'ont-ils pas eu ? have they _ 


IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


N'avais-je pas ? 


had I not? 


N'avais-je pas eu ? had I "] 


N'avais-tu pas? 


hadst thou not? 


N'avais-tu pas eu? hadst thou 1 


N'avait-il pas? 


had he not ? 


N'avait-il pas eu ? had he 


N'avait-on pas ? 


had one not ? 


N'avait-on pas eu ? had one \ 


N'avions-nous pas ? 


had we not ? 


N'avions-nous pas eu? had we 


N'aviez-vous pas ? 


had you not ? 


N'aviez-vous pas eu ? had you 


N'avaient-ils pas? 


had they not ? 


N'avaient-ils pas eu? had they __ 


PAST DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 



N'eus-je pas ? had I not? i N'eus-je pas eu ? had I 

N'eus-tu pas ? hadst thou not ? N'eus-tu pas eu ? hadst thou 

N'eut-il pas? had he not? N'eut-il pas eu? had he 

N'eut-onpas? had one not? N'eut-on pas eu ? had one 

N'eumes-nous pas ? had we not ? N'eumes-nous pas eu ? had we 

N'eutes-vous pas? had you not? N'eutes-vous pas eu? had you 

N'eurent-ils pas ? had they not ? N'eurent-ils pas eu ? had they _ 



N'aurai-je pas? 
N'auras-tu pas? 
N'aura-t-il pas ? 
N'aura-t-on pas? 
N'aurons-nous pas ? 
N aurez- vous pas ? 
N'auront-ils pas? 



shall I - } 
shalt thou 
shall he 
shall one 
shall we 
shall you 
shall they 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

N'aurai-je pas eu ? shall I 

N'auras-tu pas eu ? shall thou 
N'aura-t-il pas eu ? shall he 
N'aura-t-on pas eu ? shall one 
N'aurons-nous pas eu ? shall we 
N'aurez-vous pas eu ? shall you 
N'auront-ils pas eu ? shall they _, 



Conditional Mode. 



past. 



N'aurais-je pas ? should I 

N'aurais-tu pas? shouldst thou 
N'aurait-il pas ? should he 

N'aurait-on pas ? should one 
N'aurions-nous pas? should we 
N'auriez-vous pas ? should you 
N'auraient-ils pas? should they 



N'aurais-je pas eu ? should I 
N'aurais-tu pas eu 1 shouldst thou 
N'aurait-il pas eu? should he 
N'aurait-on pas eu ? should one 
N'aurions-nous pas exxtskmldwe 
N'auriez-vous pas eulslwvldyou 
N'auraient-ils pas eu ? should 
they 4 



AUXILIARY VEE: 



•— § 47. 



339 



(5.) etre, to be,— affirmatively. 

Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



Jo suis,, 
Tu es, 
II est, 
On est, 

Nous sommes, 
Vous etes, 
Us sont, 



lam 

thou art 

he is 

one is 

we are 

! or you are 

they are 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



J'ai ete, 
Tu as ete, 
II a ete, 
On a ete, 
Nous avons ete, 
Vous avez ete, 
lis ont ete, 



PAST INDEFINITE. 

I have been 
thou hast been 
he has been 
one has been 
we have been 
you have been 
they have been 



PLUPERFECT. 



J'etais, 
Tu etais, 
II etait. 
On etait, 
■Nous etions, 
Vous etiez, 
Us etaient, 



I was or I used to be 

thou wast 

he was 

one was 

we were 

you were 

they were 



J'avais ete, 
Tu avais ete, 
II avait ete, 
On avait ete, 
Nous avions ete, 
Vous ayiez ete, 
Us avaient ete, 



I had been 

thou hadst been 

he had been 

one had been 

we had been 

you had been 

they had been 



PAST DEFINITE. 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Je fus, 
Tufas, 

II fat, 

On fat, 
Nous fumes, 
Vous fates, 
Us furent, 



I was 

thou wast 

he was 

one was 

we were 

you were 

they were 



J'eus ete, 
Tu eus ete, 
II eut ete, 
On eut ete, 
Nous eilmes ete, 
Vous eutes ete, 
lis eurent ete, 



I had been 

thou hadst been 

he had been 

one had been 

we had been 

you had been 

they had been 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Je serai, 
Tu seras, 
II sera, 
On sera, 
Nous serons, 
Vous serez, 
Us seront, ' 



I shall be, will be 
thou wilt be 
he shall be 
one shall be 
we shall be 
you shall be 
they shall be 



J'aurai ete, 
Tu auras ete, 
II aura ete, 
On aura ete, 
Nous aurons ete, 
Vous aurez ete, 
lis auront ete, 



I shall 
thou shalt 
he shall 
one shall 
we shall 
you will 
they will \ 



Conditional Mode. 



Je serais, 
Tu serais, 
II serait, 
On serait, 
Nous serions, 
Vous seriez, 
Us seraient, 



I should be 

thou shouldst be 

he would be 

one should be 

we would be 

you should be 

they would be 



J'aurais ete, 
Tu aurais 6te, 
II aurait ete, 
On aurait ete, 
Nous aurions ete' 
Vous auriez ete, 
lis auraient ete, 



I should 

thou shouldst 

he would 

one would 

ive would 

you should 

they should 



340 AUXILIARY VERBS. — § 47. 

Imperative Mode. 



Sois, 
Qu'il soit, 


be thou 
let him be 


Qu'on soit, 
Soyous, 
Soyez, 
Qu'ils soient, 


let one be 
let us be 
be ye or you 
let them be 



Subjunctive Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
PRESENT. 

Que je sois, that I may be 
Que tu sois, that thou mayest be 

Qu'il soit, that he may be 

Qu'on soit, that one may be 
Que nous soyons, that we may be 

Que vous soyez, that you may be 

Qu'ils soient, that they may be 



COMPOUND 
PAST. 

Que j'aie ete, that I may 

Que tu aies ete, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait ete that he may 

Qu'on ait ete, that one may 
Que nous ayons ete,that we may 
Que vous ayez ete, thai you may 
Qu'ils aient ete, that they may 



Imperfect. 

Que je fusse, that I might be 

Que tu fusses, that thou mightest be 

Qu'il filt, that he might be 

Qu'on fut, tliat one might be 

Que nous fussions, that we might be 

Que vous fussiez, that you might be 

Qu'ils fussent, that they might be 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse ete, that I might 
Que tu eusses ete, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut ete, that he might 

Qu'on eut ete, that one might 
Que nous eussions ete, that we 



Que vous eussiez ete, that you 
might 

Qu'ils eussent ete, that they 
might 



£tre, 



Infinitive Mode. 

PAST. 
to be | Avoir et€, to have been 

Participle. 

compound, 
being | Ayant ete, having been 

Past or Passive. 



tie, 



IGULAR VERBS 



§ 48 



341 



§ 48. — Regular Verbs. 
FIRST CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN JEM. 

MODEL VERB. 

CHANTEK, TO SING. 
Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 




Je chante, 


/ sing 


J'ai chante, 


I have sung 


Tu chantes, 


thou singest 


Tu as chante, 


thou hast sung 


11 chante, 


he sings 


11 a chante, 


he has sung 


On chante, 


one sings 


On a chante, 


one has sung 


Nous chantons, 


we sing 


Nous avons chante, 


we have sung 


Vous chantez, 


you sing 


Vous avez chante, 


you have sung 


Us chantent, 


they sing 


Us ont chante, 


they have sung 


IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Jo chantais, I was singing, or I 


J'avais chante, 


I had ' 






used to sing 






■^ 


Tu chantais, 


thou wast singing 


Tu avais chante, 


thou hadst 


s 


11 chantait, 


he was singing 


11 avait chante, 


he had 


I 


On chantait, 


one was singing 


On avait chante, 


one had 


- 5 


Nous chantions, 


we were singing 


Nous avions chante, 


we had 


1 


Vous chantiez, 


you were singing 


Vous aviez chante, 


you had 


rS 


lis ohantaient, 


they were singing 


lis avaient chante, 


they had _, 




PAST DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 


Je chantai, 


I sang or did sing 


J'eus chante, 


i" had sung 


Tu chantas, 


' thou sang est 


Tu eus chante, 


thou hadst sung 


11 chanta, 


he sang 


11 eut chante, 


he had sung 


On chanta, 


one sang 


On eut chante, 


one had sung 


Nous chantarnes, 


we sang 


Nous eumes chante, 


we had sung 


Vous chantates, 


you sang 


Vous eutes chante, 


you had sung 


Us chanterent, 


they sang 


lis eurent chante, 


they had sung 


FUTURE. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 


Je chanterai, 


1 shall or will sing 


J'aurai chante, 


I will * 




Tu chanteras, 


thou wilt sing 


Tu auras chante, 


thou shalt 


&J 


11 chantera, 


he will sing 


11 aura chante, 


he will 


s 


On chantera, 


one will sing 


On aura chante, 


one will 


CO 


Nous chanterons, 


we shall sing 


Nous aurons chante, 


we shall 


'1 


Vous chanterez, 


you will sing 


Vous aurez chante, 


you will 


lis chanteront, 


they will sing 


lis auront chante, 


they shall _ 





Conditional Mode. 



present. 

Je chanterais, I should, would sing 
Tu chanterais, thou shouldst sing 



11 chanterait, 
On chanterait, 
Nous chanterions, 
Vous chanteriez, 
lis chanteraient, 



he should sing 
one should sing 

we would sing 
you would sing 
they would sing 



PAST. 

J'aurais chante, I should 

Tu aurais chante, thou wouldst 
II aurait chante, he would 

On aurait chante, one would 
Nous aurions chante, we would 
Vous auriez chante, you would 
Us auraient chante, they would _ 



342 



EEGULAE VERBS. — § 48. 



Imperative Mode. 



Chante, 
Qu'il chante, 
Qu'on chante, 
Chantons, 
Chantez, 
Qu'ila chantent, 



sing thou 
let him sing 
let one sing 
let us sing 
sing ye or you 
let them sing 



Subjunctive Mode. 



SIMPLE TEASES. 

PRESENT. 

Que je chante, that I may sing 

Que tu chantes, tliat thou mayest sing 

Qu'il chante, that he may sing 

Qu'on chante, that one may sing 

Que nous chantions, that ive may sing 

Que vous chantiez, that you may sing 

Qulls chantent, tliat they may sing 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
PAST. 

Que j'aie chante, that I may 
Que tu aies chante, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il ait chante, thai he may 
Qu'on ait chante, that one may 1 § 
Que nous ayous chante. that we 

may 
Que vous ayez chante, that you 

may 
Qu'ils aient chante, that they may 



imperfect. 

Que je chantasse, that I might sing 
Que tu chantasses, that thou mightesl 

sing 
Qu'il chantat, that he might sing 

Qu'on chantat, that one might sing 
Que nous chantassions, that toe might 

sing 
Que vous chantassiez, that you might 

sing 
Qu'ils chantassent, that they might 

sing 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse chante, that I might 
Que tu eusses chante, that thou 

■in ightest 
Qu'il eiit chante, that he might 
Qu'on eut chante, that one might 
Que nous eussions chante, that 

vje might 
Que vous eussiez chante, that 

you might 
Qu'ils eussent chante, thai they 
might 



Infinitive Mode. 



Chanter, 



Chantant, 



to sing \ Avoir chante, 
Participle. 



to have sung 



COMPOUND. 

singing | Ayant chant :_ ; , having sung 



PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Chante, sung 



peculiar verbs. §49. 343 

§ 49. — Remarks on the Peculiarities op some Verbs 
of the First Conjugation. 

(1.) In verbs ending in ger, in order to retain the soft pronunciation 
of the g, 1 the e of the infinitive is preserved, whenever the g would 
come before a, or o : 

Nous mangeons, we eat ; instead of nous mangons ; 
Je mangeai, I did eat; " jemangai; 

Jugeant, judging; " jugant. 

(2.) In verbs ending in yer, the y is changed into i, before e. es : ent, 
and e (not accented), followed by r and one or more vowels : 

Je paie, i" pay ; instead of je paye ; 2 

lis essaient, they try ; " ils essayent ; 

Je paierai, I will pay; " je payer ai. 

(3.) In verbs terminating in cer, 3 to preserve to the c its soft pro- 
nunciation, a cedilla (c) is put under it, when it comes before a ov o: 

Cornmencant, commencing; instead of commencant; 

Nous placons, we place; " nous placons; 

(4.) In verbs ending in eter and eler, the i or I of the infinitive is 
doubled, when it comes before e, es, ent and e (not accented), followed 
by r and one or more vowels : 

J'appelle, IcaU; instead of fappele; 

Je jetterai, I will throw; " je jeterai ; 

J'appellerais, I would call; " j'appelerais. 

(5.) The following verbs form exceptions to the last rule : 

Acheter, to buy ; Decolleter, to uncover tJie throat ; 

Bourreler, to torment ; Etiqueter, to ticket ; 

Congeler, to congeal; Geler, to freeze; 

Colleter, to collar ; Harceler, to teaze ; 

Coqueter, to coquet; Peler, to peel; 

Deceler, to detect; Suracheter, to over buy ; 

Degeler, to throw; 

In the above verbs, when the t or I comes before e, es, ent, or e (not 
accented) followed by r and one or more vowels, a grave accent ( N ) 
is put over the e, which precedes the t or I : 

Je pele, I peel; Je pelerai, I will peel; 

J'achete, J buy; J'acheterai, I will buy; 

(6.) A grave accent is also used in verbs ending in 

ecer, emer, ener, ever: 

1 See Lesson 3, 9. 

2 Some French authors, however, retain the y in verbs of this class. 

3 This rule applies also to o and u in verbs of the third conjugation, 
ending in cevoir, Je recois, I receive ; J'apercois, i" perceive. 



344 



REGULAR VERBS. — 8 50. 



and the acute accent of the infinitive of those ending in 

ecer, egler, eler, erer, 

ebrer, egner, emer, eter, 

echer, egrer, ener, • etrer, 

eder, eguer, equer, 

is changed into a grave one, when the consonant following the first 
e of these terminations, comes before e, es } ent 1 and e {not accented), 
followed by r and one or more vowels : 

Je seme, I sow; Je mene, Head; 

Je celebrerai, I will celebrate ; II regnera, lie wiU reign. 

(7.) In the tables of peculiar, irregular, defective, and unipersonal 
verbs, we will place a model verb of each class embraced in the pre- 
ceding remarks, and also include, in the same tabic, the names of the 
principal verbs coming under these remarks, with reference to the 
models. 

§ 50. — Regular Verbs. — Continued. 

SECOND CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN IE. 

MODEL VERB. 

FINIR, TO FINISH 
Indicative Mode. 

SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



PRESENT. 


PAST INDEFINITE. 


Je finis, 


I finish 


J'ai fini, 


I have finished 


Tu finis, 


thou finishest 


Tu as fini, 


thou hast finished 


11 finit, 


he finishes 


11 a fini, 


he has finished 


On finit, 


one finishes 


On a fini, 


one has finished 


Nous finissons, 


we finish 


Nous avons fini, 


we have finished 


Vous finissez, 


you finish 


Vous avez fini, 


you have finished 


Us finissent, 


they finish 


lis out fini, 


they have finished 


IMPERFECT. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Je finissais, / was finishing, or used 


J'avais fini, 


I had finished 




to finish 






Tu finissais, 


thou wast finishing 


Tu avais fini, 


thou hadst finished 


11 finissait, 


he was finishing 


11 avait fini, 


he had finished 


On finissait, 


one was finishing 


On avait fini, 


one had finished 


Nous finissions, 


we ivere finishing 


Nous avions fini, 


ive had finished 


Vous finissiez, 


you were finishing 


Vous avioz fini, 


you had finished 


lis linissaient, 


they were finishing 


lis avaient fini, 


they had finished 


PAST 


DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 


Jo finis, 


I finished, did finish 


J'eus fini, 


I had finished 


Tu linis, 


thou didst finish 


Tu eus fini, 


thou hods! finished 


11 Unit, 


he finished 


11 out fini, 


he had finished 


On finit, 


one did finish 


On eut fini, 


one had finished 


Nous finimes, 


we finished 


Nous eiimes fini, 


we had finished 


Vous finites, 


you finished 


Vous eiites fini, 


you had finished 


lis finirent, 


they finished 


lis eurent fini, 


they hadjintshed 



EfiULAE VERBS. — 8 50. 



345 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



COMPOUND TENSES. 



FUTURE. 



Je finirai, 
Tu finiras, 
II finira, i 
On finira, 
Nous finirons, 
Vous finirez, 
lis finiront, 



I shall finish 
thou wilt finish 

he will finish 
one will finish 
we shall finish 
you will finish 
they will finish 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



J'aurai fini, 
Tu auras fini, 
II aura fini, 
On aura fini, 



I shall have 
thou wilt have 
he shall have 
one shall have 



Nous aurons fini, we shall have 
Vous aurez fini, you will have 
lis auront fini, they shall have __ 



Conditional Mode. 



Je finirais, 


I would finish 


J'aurais fini, I should "" 




Tu fiuirais, 


ihou shouldst finish 


Tu aurais fini, thou wouldst 


"8 


11 finirait, 


he ivould finish 


11 aurait fini, he might 


1g 


On finirait, 


one might finish 


On aurait fini, one should 


-4 


Nous finirions, 


we would finish 


Nous aurions fini, we would 




Vous finiriez, 


you might finish 


Vous auriez fini, you might 


1 


Us finiraient, 


they should finish 
Imperati 


lis auraient fini, they should _ 
ve Mode. 






Finis, 


finish thou 






Qu'il finisse, 


let him finish 






Qu'on finisse, 


let one finish 






Pinissons, 


let us finish 






Finissez, 


finish ye or you 






Qu'ils finissent, 


let them finish. 





Subjunctive Mode. 



Que je finisse, that I 

Que tu finisses, that thou 
Qu'il finisse, that he may 

Qu'on finisse, that one may 
Que nous finissions,#&a£ we may 
Que vous finissiez, that you may 
Qu'ils finissent, that they may d 



Que j'aie fini, that 1 may 

Que tu aies fini, that thou mayest 
Qu'il ait fini, that he may 

Qu'on ait fini, that one may 
Que nous ayons fini, that we may 
Que vous ayez &m,that you may 
Qu'ils aient fini, that they may 



IMPERFECT. 

Que je finisse, that 1 might 
Que tu finisses, that thou mightest 

Qu'il finit, that he might 

Qu'on finit, that one might 

Que nous finissions, that we 

might 
Que vous finissiez, that you 

might 
Qu'ils finissent, thai tk 



PLUPEEFECT. 

Que j'eusse fini, that I might 
Que tu eusses fini, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut fini, that he might 
Qu'on eut fini, that one might 
Que nous eussions fini, that we 

might 
Que vous eussiez fini, that you 

might 
Qu'ils eussent fini, that they might __ 



346 



EEGTHAE VEEBS. § 51 



Infinitive Mode. 
SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 



Finir, 



> finish | Avoir fini, 
Paeticiple. 



to have finished 



PRESENT. COMPOUND. 

Finissant, finishing | Ayant fini, having finished 

Past or Passive. 
Fini, 



§ 51. — Regular Veebs, — Continued. 
THIRD CONJUGATION,— ENDING IN 

MODEL verb. 

RECEVOIR, TO RECEIVE. 

Indicative Mode. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 



Je regois, 1 
Tu regois, 
11 regoit, 
On regoit, 
Nous recevons, 
Vous recevez, 
lis regoivent, 



I receive 
thou receivesi 
he receives 
one receives 
we receive 
you receive 
they receive 



IMPERFECT. 



Je recevais, / was receiving, or / 
used to receive 
thou wast receiving 
he was receiving 



Tu recevais, 
II recevait, 
On recevait, 
Nous recevions, 
Vous receviez, 
113 recevaient, 



one was receiving 
we were receiving 
you were receiving 
they were receiving 



Jo regus, 
Tu recus, 
II recut, 
On recut, 
Nous regumes, 
Tous regutes, 
lis regurent, 



past definite. 

J received or did receive 

thou receivedst 

he received 

one received 

toe received 

you received 

they received 



compound tenses, 
past indefinite. 
J'ai regu, i" have received 

Tu as regu, thou hast received 

II a regu, he has received 

On a regu, one has received 

Nous avons recu, we have received 
Vous avez regu, you have received 



lis out regu, 



they have received 



pluperfect. 
J'avais regu, I had received ' 

Tu avals regu, Mow hadst received 
II avait regu, he had received I 
On avait regu, one had received ' 
Nous avions regu, we had received 
Vous aviez regu,7/ow had received 
lis avaient regu, Me?/ had received 



J'eus regu, 
Tu eus regu, 
Jl eut regu, 
On eut regu, 
Nous cumes regu, 



PAST anterior. 

I had received 

thou hadst received 

he had received 

one had received 

we had received 



Vous elites regu, you had received 
lis eurent regu, they had received 



Seo note 2, § 49, (3.) Also, § 52. 



REGULAR VERBS . 



§51. 



347 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
FUTURE. 



Je recevrai, 

Tu 

II: 

On recevra, 

Nous recevrons, 

Vous recevrez, 

lis recevront, 



Je recevrais, 
Tu recevrais, 
II recevrait, 
On recevrait, 
Nous recevrions, 
Vous recevriez, 
lis recevraient, 



I shall receive 
thou wilt receive 

he shall receive 
one shall receive 

we shall receive 

you will receive 
they will receive 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

J'aurai regu, / shall have 

Tu auras regu, thou wilt have 
II aura regu, he will have 

On aura regu, one will have 
Nous aurons regu, we shall have 
Vous aurez regu, you tvill have 
lis auront regu, they will have _ 



Conditional Mode. 



I should receive I J'aurais regu, J should 

thou wouldst receive j Tu aurais regu, thou wouldst 

he should receive II aurait regu, he might 

one might receive On aurait regu, one would 
we should receive Nous aurions regu, we should 

you might receive Vous auriez regu, you might 

they should receive lis auraient regu, they might 



Imperative Mode. 
Regois, receive thou 

Qu'il regoive, let him receive 

Qu'on regoive, let one receive 

Recevons, let us receive 

Recevez, receive ye or you 

Qu'ils regoivent, let them receive 

Subjunctive Mode. 



Que je regoive, that I may 

Que tu regoives,/toi thou may est 
Qu'il regoive, that he may 

Qu'on regoive, that one may 
Que nous recevions, that we 

may 
Que vous receviez, that you may 
Qu'ils regoivent, that they may 



Que j'aie regu, that I may 

Que tu aies Tequ,lhat thou may est 
Qu'il ait regu, that he may 

Qu'on ait regu, that, one may 
Que nous ayons regu, that we 

may 
Que vousayez requ,lhat you may 
Qu'ils aient regu, that they may 



IMPERFECT. 




PLUPERFECT. 


Que je regusse, that I might ' 
Que tu regusses, that thou 

mighlest 
Qu'il regiit, that he might 
Qu'on regut, that one might 


.» 


Que j'eusse regu, that I might 
Que tu eusses regu, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eut regu, that he might 
Qu'on eut regu, that one might 


Que nous regussions, that we 


- s 


Que nous eussions regu, that ive 


might 


£ 


might 


Que vous regussiez, that you 

might 
Qu'ils regussent, that they might 




Que vous eussiez regu, that you 
might 

Qu'ils eussent regu, that they 
might 



348 



EEGULAE VEEBS. § 52, 53. 



Infinitive Mode, 
simple tenses. compound tenses. 



Recevoir, 



Recevant, 



PAST. 

to receive | Avoir recu, to have received 

Participle. 

compound. 
receiving | Ayant recu, having received 

PAST OR PASSIVE. 

Recu, received 



§ 52. — Remarks. 
(1.) In the verbs of this conjugation, ending in cevoir, in order to 
preserve to the c its soft pronunciation, a cedilla ( c ) is put under it, 
when it comes before a, o, u : — 

Je recois, I receive ; J'apercois, I perceive. 

(2.) There are only seven regular verbs in this conjugation. They 
are: — 



Apercevoir, 
Concevoir, 
Decevoir, 
Devoir, 



to perceive; 
to conceive; 
to deceive ; 
to owe : 



Percevoir, 
Recevoir, 
Redevoir, 



to collect duties, taxes; 
to receive ; 



§ 53. — Regular Verbs. — Continued. 
FOURTH CONJUGATION— ENDING IN RK 

MODEL VERB. 

VENDEE, TO SELL. 
Indicative Mode. 



PRESENT. 




PAST INDEFINITE. 


Je vends, 




I sell 


J'ai vendu, 


/ have sold 


Tu vends, 




thou sellest 


Tu as vendu, 


thou hast sold 


11 vend, 




he sells 


11 a vendu, 


he has sold 


On vend, 




one sells 


On a vendu, 


one has sold 


Nous vendor: s, 




we sell 


Nous avons vendu, 


we have sold 


Vous vendez, 




you sell 


Vous avez vendu, 


you have sold 


lis vendent, 




they sell 


lis out vendu, 


they have sold 


IMPERFECT. 




PLUPERFECT. 


Je vendais, I was 


selling 


or used to 


J'avais vendu, I had sold or been 






sell 




selling 


^11 vendais, 


thou wast selling 


Tu avais vendu, 


thou hadst sold 


11 vendait, 


he 


ivas selling 


11 avait vendu, 


lie had sold 


mdait, 


one 


Has selling 


On avait vendu, 


one had sold 


Sfous vendions, 


we were selling 


Nous avions vendu, 


we had sold 


Voua vendiez, 


you 


were selling 


Vous aviez vendu, 


you had sold 


lis vendaient, 


they 


were selling 


lis avaient vendu, 


they Md sold 



E E G IT L A E V E E B S .- 



§ 53. 



349 



SIMPLE 


TENSES. 


COMPOUND TENSES. 


PAST DEFINITE. 


PAST ANTERIOR. 


Je vendis, 


I sold or did sell 


J'eus vendu, 


I had sold 


Tu vendis, 


thou soldest 


Tu eus vendu, 


thou hadst sold 


11 vendit, 


he sold 


11 eut vendu, 


he had sold 


On vendit, 


one sold 


On eut vendu, 


one had sold 


Nous vendimes, 


we sold 


Nous eiimes vendi 


, we had sold 


Vous vendites, 


you sold 


Vous eiltes vendu, 


you had sold 


lis vendirent, 


they sold 


lis eurent vendu, 


they had sold 


FUTURE. 


FUTURE ANTERIOR. 


Je veridrai, 


I shall sell 


J'aurai vendu, 


I shall have sold 


Tu vendras, 


thou wilt sell- 


Tu auras vendu, 


thou wilt have sold 


11 vendra, 


he -will sell 


11 aura vendu, 


he shall have sold 


On vendra, 


one will sell 


On aura vendu, 


one will have sold 


Nous vendrons, 


we will sell 


Nous aurons vendi 


, we shall have sold 


Vous vendrez, 


you will sell 


Vous aurez vendu, 


you will have sold 


lis vendront, 


they will sell 


lis auront vendu, 


they shall have sold 



Conditional Mode. 



Je vendrais, 
Tu vendrais, 
II vendrait, 
On vendrait, 
Nous vendrions, 
Vous vendriez, 
lis vendraient, 



PAST. 



I should sell 
thou wouldst sell 
he might sell 
one would sell 
we should sell 
you might sell 
they would sell 



J'aurais vendu, I should ' 

Tu aurais vendu, thou wouldest 
II aurait vendu, he might 

On aurait vendu, one should 
Nous aurions vendu, we should 
Vous auriez vendu, you should 
lis auraient vendu, they should __ 



Indicative Mode. 



Vends, 
Qu'il vende, 
Qu'on vende, 
Vendons, 
Vendez, 
Qu'ils vendent, 



sell thou 
let him sell 
let one sell 
let us sell 
sell ye or yoz 
let them sell 



Subjunctive Mode. 






Que je vende, that I may sell 

Que tu vendes, that thou mayest sell 

Qu'il vende, that he may sell 

Qu'on vende, that one may sell 

Que nous vendions, that we may sell 

Que vous vendiez, that you may sell 

Qu'ils vendent, that they may sell 



Que j'aie vendu, that I may 
Que tu aies vendu, that thou 

mayest 
Qu'il ait vendu, that he may 
Qu'on ait vendu, that one may 
Que nous ayons vendu, that we 

may 
Que vous ayez vendu, that you 

may 
Qu'ils aient vendu, that they may J 



350 



PASSIVE VERBS, 



§ 54. 



SIMPLE TENSES. 
IMPERFECT. 

Que je vendisse, that I might sell 
Que tu vendisses, that thou mightest 

sell 
Qu'il vendit, that he might sell 

Qu'on vendit, that one might sell 

Que nous vendissions, that we 

sell 
Que vous vendissiez, that you 

sell 
Qu'ils vendissent, that they might 



COMPOUND TENSES. 
PLUPERFECT. 

Que j'eusse vendu, that I might ' 
Que tu eusses vendu, that thou 

mightest 
Qu'il eiit vendu, that he might 
Qu'on eut vendu, that one might 
Que nous eussions vendu, that 

we might 
Que vous eussiez vendu, that 

you might 
Qu'ils eussent vendu, that they 
might '. 



Infinitive Mode. 



Vendre, to sell | Avoir vendu, to have sold 

Participle. 

present. compound. 

Vendant, selling | Ayant vendu, having sold 

Past or Passive. 
Vendu, sold 

§ 54. — Conjugation of a Passive Yeeb. 

etre aime, to be loved. 

lNDiCATrv T E Mode. 

PRESENT. 

Je suis aime, m. aimee, /. / am loved 

Tu es aime or aimee, thou art loved 

II est aime, he is loved 

Elle est aimee, she is bved 

On est aime, one is loved 

Nous sommes aimes or aimees, ' we are loved 

Vous etes aimes or aimees, you are loved 

lis sont aimes, m. they are loved 

Elles sont aimees, / they are loved 



J'etais aime, m. aimee, / 

Tu etais aime or aimee, 

II etait aime, 

Elle etait aimee, 

On etait aime, 

Xous etions aimes or aimees, 

Vous etiez aimes or : 

Us e'taient aimes, m. 

Elles etaient aimees, /. 



IMPERFECT. 

I was loved, was being loved 
thou wast loved, wast being loved 
he was loved, was being loved 
she was loved, was being loved 
one was loved, was being loved 
we were loved, were being loved 
you were loved, were being loved 
they were loved, were being loved 
they were loved, were being loved _ 



PASSIVE VEKBS 54. 



351 



Je fus aime, m. aimee, / 
Tu fus aime or aimee, 
II fut aime, 
Elle fut aimee, 
On fut aime, 
Nous fumes aimes or 
Vous fates aimes or 
Us furent aimes, m. 
Elles furent aimees, /. 



J'ai ete aime or aimee, 
Tu as ete aime or 
II a ete aime, 
Elle a ete aimee, 
On a ete aime, 
Nous avons ete 
Vous avez ete aimes or 
lis ont ete aimes, m. 
Elles ont ete aimees, / 



PAST DEFINITE. 

I was loved 
thou wast loved 
he was loved 
she was loved 
one was loved 
, we were loved 

you were loved 
they were loved 
they were loved 

PAST INDEFINITE. 

I have been loved 
thou hast been loved 
he has been loved 
she has been loved 
one has been loved 
we have been loved 
you have been loved 
they have been loved 
they have been loved 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



J'eus ete aime, m. aimee, f. 
Tu eus ete aime or aimee, 
II eut ete aime, 
Elle eut ete aimee, 
On eut ete aime, 
Nous eumes ete aimes or aimees 
Vous elites ete aimes or aimees, 
Us eurent ete aimes, in. 
Elles eurent ete aimees, /. 



/ had been loved 
thou hadst been loved 
he had been loved 
she had been loved 
one had been loved 
we had been loved 
you had been loved 
they had been loved 
they had been loved 



J'avais ete aime or aimee, 
Tu avais ete aime or aimee 
II avait ete aime, 
Elle avait ete aimee, 
On avait ete aime, 
Nous avions ete aimes or 
Vous aviez ete aimes or ail 
Us avaient ete aimes, m. 
Elles avaient ete aimees, /. 



PLUPERFECT. 

I had been loved 
thou hadst been loved 
he had been loved 
she had been loved 
one had been loved 
we had been loved 
you had been loved 
they had been loved 
they had been loved 






Je serai aime, m. aimee, f. 

Tu seras aime or aimee, 

II sera aime, 

Elle sera aimee, 

On sera aime, 

Nous serons aimes or aimees, 

Vous serez aimes or ; 

seront aimes, in. 
Elles eeront aimees, /. 



FUTURE. 

J shall or will be loved 
thou shalt or wilt be loved 
he shall or will be loved 
she shall or will be loved 
one shall or will be loved 
we shall or will be loved 
you shall or will be loved 
they shall or will be loved 
they shall or will be loved 



352 



PASSIVE VEEBS; — S 54. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



J'aurai ete aime, to. aimee, /. 

Tu auras ete aime or aimee, 

II aura ete aime, 

Elle aura ete aimee, 

Ou aura ete aime, 

Nous aurons ete aimes or aimees, 

Yous aurez ete aimes or aimees, 

lis auront ete aimes, to. 

Elles auront ete aimees, /. 



I shall, will have been laved 
thou shall, wilt have been loved 
he shall, will have been loved, 
she shall, will have been loved 
one shall, will have been loved 
we shall, will have been loved 
you shall, will have been loved 
they shall, will have been loved 
they shall, will have been loved 



Conditional Mode. 



Je serais aime, to. aimee, / 
Tu serais aime or aimee, 
II serait aime, 
Elle serait aimee, 
On serait aime, 

Nous serions aimes or aimees, 
Yous seriez aimes or aimees, 
lis seraient aimes, to. 
Elles seraient aimees, /. 



I should, ivould, could, might be loved 

thou shouldst, couldst, mightest be loved 

he would or might be loved 

she might be loved 

one could be loved 

we should or ivould be loved 

you would or might be loved 

they might or should be loved 

they might, could, should be loved 



J'aurais ete aime, m. aimee, /. 
Tu aurais ete aime or aimee, 
II aurait ete aime, 
Elle aurait ete aimee, 
On aurait ete aime, 
Nous aurions ete aimes or 
Yous auriez ete aimes or aimees 
lis auraient ete aimes, to. 
Elles auraient ete aimees, /. 



Sois aime, m. aimee, /. 
Qu'il soit aime, 
Qu'elle soit aimee, 
Qu'on soit aime, 
Soyons aimes or aimees, 
Soyez aimes or aimees, 
Qu'ils soient aimes, to. 
Qu'ellea soient aimees, /. 



PAST. 

I should, would have been loved 

thou wouldst have been loved 

he would have been loved 

she ivould have been loved 

one would have been loved 

we might have been loved 

you would have been loved 

they might have been loved 

they should or might have been loved 

Imperative Mode. 

be thou loved 
let him be loved 
let her be loved 
let one be loved 
let us be loved 
be ye or you loved 
let them be loved 
let them be loved 

Subjunctive Mode. 



Que je sois aime, m. aimee, /. 

Que tu sois aime or aimee, 

Qu'il soit aime, 

Qu'elle soit aimee, 

Qu'on soit nim< : . 

Que nous soyons aimes or aimees, 

Que vous soyez aimes or aimees, 

Qu'ils soient aimes, 

Qu'elles soient aime'ea, 



that I may be loved 
that thou may est be loved 
that he may be loved 
that she may be loved 
that one may be loved 
that we may be loved 
that you may be loved 
that they may be loved 
thai they may be loved 



PASSIVE VERBS. — 8 54. 



353 



Que je fusse aime, to. aimee, /. 
Que tu fusses aime or aimee, 
Qu'il fiit aime, 
Qu'elle fut aimee, 
Qu'on fut aime, 

Que nous fussiona aimes or aimees, 
Que vous fussiez aimes or aimees, 
Qu'ils fussent aimes, to. 
Qu'elles fussent aimees, /. 



that I might be loved 
that thou mightest be loved 
that he might be loved 
that she might be loved 
that one might be loved 
that we might be loved 
that you might be loved 
that they might be loved 
that they might be loved 



Que j'aie ete aime, m. aimee, / 
Que tu aies ete aime or aimee, 
Qu'il ait ete aime, 
Qu'elle ait ete aimee, 
Qu'on ait ete aime, 
Que nous ayons ete aimes or aimeeg, 
Que vous ayez ete aimes or aimees, 
Qu'ils aient ete aimes, m. 
Qu'elles aient ete aimees, /. 



that I may have been loved 
that thou mayest have been loved 
that he may have been loved 
that she may have been loved 
that one may have been loved 
that we may have been loved 
that you may have been loved 
that they may have been loved 
that they may have been loved 



PLUPERFECT. 



Que j'eusse ete aime, m, aimee, /. 
Que tu eusses ete aime or aimee, 
Qu'il eut ete aime, 
Qu'elle eut ete aimee, 
Qu'on eut ete aime, 



thai 1 might have been loved 
that thou mightest have been loved 
that he might have been loved 
that she might have been loved 
that one might have been loved 



Que nous eussions ete aimes or that we might have been loved 



Jue vous eussiez ete aimes or that you might have been loved 



that they might have been loved 
that they might have been loved 



Qu'ils eussent ete aimes, 
Qu'elles eussent ete aimees, 



Infinitive Mode. 



Utre aime, m. aimee, /. to be loved 

PAST. 

Avoir ete aime, to. aimee, /. to have been 



Participle. 

present. 
Iltant aime, to. aimee, /. being loved 

COMPOUND. 
Ayant ete aime, to. aimee, /. having been loved 



fee aime, to. aimee, /. 



PAST. 



loved 



354 



[ELECTIVE VEKBS. § 55, 56. 



§ 55. — Rule. 

There is only one conjugation for passive verbs. It is formed of 
the auxiliary tire in all its tenses, simple and compound, and the par- 
ticiple past of the active verb which we wish to conjugate in the 
passive voice. See § 43, (4). 



56. COXJTJGATIOK OE REFLECTIVE VeEBS [§ 43, (6.)]. 

Model Verb. 

SE FLATTER, TO FLATTER ONE'S SELF. 

Indicative Mode. 



Je me flatte, 

Tu te flattes, 

II se flatte, 

On se flatte, 

Nous nous flattons, 

Vous vous flattez, 

lis se flattent, 



I flatter myself 

tlwu flaiterest thyself 

lie flatters himself 

one flatters himself or one's self 

we flatter ourselves 

you flatter yourselves 

they flatter themselves 



Jo mo flattais, 

Tu te flattais, 
II se flattait, 
On se flattait, 
Nous nous flattions, 
Vous vous flatticz, 
Ha se flattaient, 



Je mo flattai, 

Tu te flattas, 

II se flatta, 

On se flatta, 

Nous nous flattames, 

Vous vous flattates, 

lis se flatterent, 



I was flattering or used to flatter my- 
self 
thou wast flattering thyself 
he tvas flattering himself 
one was flattering one's self himself 
we were flattering ourselves 
you were flattering yourselves 
they were flattering themselves 



PAST definite. 



I flattered or did flatter myself 

thou didst flatter thyself 

he flattered himself 

one flattered one's self himself 

we flattered ourselves 

you flattered yourselves 

they flattered themselves 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Jo me suis flatte, m. flattee, / 

Tu t'es flatte or flattee, 

II s'est flatte, 

Elle s'est flattee, 

On s'est flatte, 

Nous nous sommes flattes or flattees, 

Yous vous etes flattes or flattees, 

Us se sont flattes, m. 

Elles se sont flattees, /. 



I have flattered myself 

thou hast flattered thyself 

lie has flattered himself 

she has flattered herself 

one has flattered himself or one's selj 

we have flattered ourselves 

you have flattered yourselves 

they have flattered themselves 

they have flattered themselves 



REFLECTIVE VERBS 



56 



355 



PAST ANTERIOR. 



Je me fus flatte, m. flattee, f. 

Tu te fus flatte or flattee, 

II se fut flatte, 

Elle se fut flatte'e, 

On se fut flatte, 

Nous nous fumes flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous fates flattes or l 

lis se furent flattes, m. 

Elles se furent flattees, / 



I had flattered myself 
thou hadst flattered thyself 



she had flattered herself 

one had flattered himself, one's self 

we had flattered ourselves 

you had flattered yourselves 

they had flattered themselves 

they had flattered themselves 



PLUPERFECT. 



Je m'etais flatte, m. flattee, f. 

Tu t'etais flatte or flattee, 

II s'etait flatte, 

Elle s'etait flattee, 

On s'etait flatte, 

Nous nous etions flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous etiez flattes or : 

lis s'etaient flattes, m. 

Elles s'etaient flattees, /. 



I had flattered myself 

thou hadst flattered thyself 

he had flattered himself 

she had flattered herself 

one had flattered himself, one's self 

we had flattered ourselves 

you had flattered yourselves 

they had flattered themselves 

they had flattered themselves 



Je me flatterai, 
Tu te flatteras, 
II se flattera, 
On se flattera-, 
Nous nous flatterons, 
Vous vous flatterez, 
lis se flatteront. 



I shall or will flatter myself 
thou shall or will flatter thyself 
he shall or will flatter himself 
one will flatter himself, one's selj 
we will flatter ourselves 
you will flatter yourselves 
they will flatter themselves. 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



Je me serai flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Tu te seras flatte or flattee, 

II se sera flatte, 

Elle se sera flattee, 

On se sera flatte, 

Nous nous serons flattes or flattees, 

Vous vous serez flattes or flattees, 

lis se seront flattes, m. 

Elles se seront flattees, /. 



I shall have flattered myself 
Tliou wilt have flattered thyself 
He will have flattered himself 
She will have flattered herself 
One will have flattered himself 
We will have flattered ourselves 
You will have flattered yourselves 
They will have flattered themselves 
They will have flattered, themselves 



Jo me flatterais, 

Tu te flatterais, 
II se flatterait, 
On se flatterait, 
Nous nous flatterions, 
Vous vous flatteriez, 
lis se flatteraient, 



Conditional Mode, 
present. 



I should, would, could, might flatter 

myself 
thou wouldst flatter thyself 
he would flatter himself 
one would flatter himself, one's self 
we would flatter ourselves 
you would flatter yourselves 
they would flatter themselves 



356 



REFLECTIVE VEBBSr 



5G 



Je me serais flatte, to. flattee, /. 



Tu te serais flatte or flattee, 
II se serait flatte, 
Elle se serait flattee, 
On se serait flatte, 
Xous nous serions flattes or 
Vous vous seriez flattes or 
lis se seraient flattes, to. 
Elles se seraient flattees, /. 



I should, would, could, might have 

flattered myself 
thou wouldst have flattered thyself 
he would have flattered himself 
she would have flattered herself 
one would have flattered one's self 
we might have flattered ourselves 
you would have flattered yourselves 
they would have flattered themselves 
they would have flattered themselves 



Flatte-toi, 
Qu'il se flatte, 
Qu'on se flatte, 
Flattons-nous, 
Flattez-vous, 
Qu'ils se fiattent, 



Imperative Mode. 



flatter thyself 

let him flatter himself 

let one flatter one's self, himself 

let us flatter ourselves 

flatter yourselves 

let them flatter ;" 



Subjunctive Mode. 



Que je me flatte, 
Que tu te flattes, 
Qu'il se flatte, 
Qu'on se flatte, 
Que nous nous flattions, 
Que vous vous flattiez, 
Qu'ils se fiattent, 



that I may flatter myself 
that thou may est flatter thyself 
that he may flatter himself 
that one may flatter himself 
that we may flatter ourselves 
that you may flatter yourselves 
that they may flatter themselves 



IMPERFECT. 



Que je me flattasse, 

Que tu te flattasscs, 

Quil se flattat, 

Qu'on so flattat, 

Que nous nous flattassions, 

Que vous vous 

Qu'ils so flattassent, 



that I might flatter myself 
that thou mightest flatter thyself 
that he might flatter himself 
that one might flatter himself 
that ive might flatter ourselves 
that you might flatter yourselves 
that they might flatter themselves 



Que je me sois flatte, m. flattee, / 

Que tu te sois flatte or flattee, 

Qu'il se soit flatte, • 

Quelle se soit flattee, 

Qu'on se soit flatte, 

Que nous nous soyons flattes or 

flat dees, 
Que vous vous soyez flattes or 

flattees, 
Qa'ils se soient flattes, m. 
Qu'elles so soient flattees, /. 



that I may have flattered myself 
that thou may est have flattered thyself 
that he may have flattered himself 
that slie may have flattered herself 
that one may have flattered himself 
that we may have flattered i 



that you may have flattered yourselves 

that they may have flattered themselves 
that they may have flattered themselves 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. — 8 57. 357 



PLUPERFECT. 

Que je me fusse flatte, m. flattee, /. that I might have flattered myself 

Que tu te fosses flatte or flattee, that thou mightest have flattered thy- 
self 

Qu'il se fut flatte, that he might have flattered himself 

Qu'elle se fut flattee, that she might have flattered herself 

Qu'on se fat flatte, thai one might have flattered himself 

Que nous nous fussions flattes or thai we might have flattered ourselves 



Que vous vous fossiez flattes or that you might have flattered your- 

flattees, selves 

Qu'ils se fossent flattes, m. that they might have flattered them- 

selves 
Qu'elles se fossent flattees, /. that they might have flattered them- 



Infinitive Mode. 

present, past. 

Se flatter, to flutter one's self | S'etre flatte, to have flattered one's self 

Participle, 
present. compound. 

Se flattant, flattering one's self | S'etant flatte, having flattered one's self 

PAST. 

Flatte, m. flattee, /. flattes, m. p. flattees, /. p. flattered 

§ 57. — Negative Form of the Reflective Verbs. 

NE PAS SB FLATTER, NOT TO FLATTER ONES SELF. 
Indicative Mode. 



Je ne me flatte pas, J" do not flatter ■ 

Tu ne te flattes pas, thou dost not flatter thyself 

II ne se flatte pas, he does not flatter himself 

On ne se flatte pas, one does not flatter himself 

Nous ne nous flattens pas, we do not flatter ourselves 

Vous ne vous flattez pas, you do not flatter yourselves 

lis ne se flattent pas, they do not flatter themselves 
&c. &c. &c. &c. 

"We will add a compound tense and the imperative conjugated in 
this form. 



358 



EEFIECTITE VERBS. — 8 58. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Je ne me suis pas flatte, m. flattee, /. 

Tu ne t'es pas flatte or flattee, 

II ne s'est pas flatte, 

Elle ne s'est pas flattee, 

On ne s'est pas flatte, 

Nous ne nous sommes pas flattes 

or flattees, 
Yous ne vous etes pas flattes or 

flattees, 
Us ne se sont pas flattes, m. 
Elles ne se sont pas flattees, /. 
&c. &c. 



I have not flattered myself 
thou hast not flattered thyself 
he has not flattered himself 
she has not flattered herself 
one has not flattered himself 
we have not flatten 



you have not flattered 

they have not flattered themselves 

they have not flattered themselves 

&c. &c. 



Imperative Mode. 



Ne te flatte pas, 
Qu'il ne se flatte pas, 
Qu'on ne se flatte pas, 
Ne nous flattons pas, 
Ne vous flattez pas, 
Qu'ils ne se flattent pas, 
&c. &c. 



do not flatter thyself 
let him not flatter himself 
let one not flatter himself 
let us not flatter ourselves 
do not flatter yourselves 
let them not flatter themselves 
&c. &e. 



§ 58. — Interrogative Foeji oe the Reflective Verb. 
Indicative Mode. 



Me flatte-je ? or 1 est-ce que je me 

flatte ? 
Te flattes-tu ? 
Se'flatte-t-il? 3 
Se flatte-t-on ? 
Nous flattoQS-nous ? 
Vous flattez-vous ? 
Se flattent-ils? 
&c. &c. 



do I flatter myself? 

dost thou flatter thyself t 
does he flatter himself t 
does one flatter himself? 
do we flatter ourselves ? 
do you flatter yourselves? 
do they flatter themselves? 
&c. &c. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Me suis-je flatte, m. flattee?/. 
T'es-tu flatte or flattee ? 
S'est-il flatte ? 
S'est-ellc flattee ? 
S'est-on flatte ? 

Nous sommes-nous flattes or flat- 
tees? 
Vous ("r-tcs-vous flates or flattees? 
Se sont-ils fiattes ? m. . 
Sesout-elles flattees?/. 
&c. &c. 



have I flattered myself? 
hast thou flattered thyself? 
lias he flattered himself? 
has she flattered herself? 
has one flattered himself? 
have we flattered ourselves? 

have you flattered yourselves ? 
have they flattered themselves? 
have they flattered themselves ? 
&c. &c. 



See § 98, and L. 



SeeL. 4, E. 6. 



REFLECTIVE VERBS. § 59. 



359 



§ 59.- 



-The Reflective Verb Conjugated Negatively 
and Interrogatively. 



Ne me flatte-je 



Indicative Mode, 
present. 



ne me flatte pas ? 
Ne te flattes-tu pas ? 
Ne se flatte-t-il pas ? 
Ne se flatte-t-on pas ? 
Ne nous flattons-nous pas ? 
Ne vous fiattez-vous pas? 
Ne se flattent-ils pas ? 
&c. &c. 



Est-ce que je do I not flatter my self f 



dost thou not flatter thyself? 
does he not flatter himself f 
does one not flatter himself? 
do we not flatter ourselves ? 
do you not flatter yourselves ? 
do they not flatter themselves ? 
&c. &c. 



PAST INDEFINITE. 



Ne me suis-je pas flatte, to. flat- 
tee ? /. 

Ne t'es-tu pas flatte or flattee ? 

Ne s'est-il pas flatte ? 

Ne s'est-elle pas flattee ? 

Ne s'est-on pas flatte ? 

Ne nous sommes-nous pas flattes 
or flattees ? 

Ne vous etes-vous pas flattes or 
flattees ? 

Ne se sont-ils pas flattes ? to. 

Ne se sont-elles pas flattees?/. 



have 1 not flattered myself? 

hast thou not flattered thyself? 
has he not flattered himself? 
has she not flattered herself? 
has one not flattered himself? 
have we not flatiered ourselves ? 

have you not flattered yourselves ? 

have they not flattered themselves ? 
have they not flattered themselves? 



§ 60. TABLE 
REGULAR TERMINATIONS 



Con- 
juga- 
tion. 


Infinitive. 


Pees ent 
Participle. 


Past 
paeticipi.e. 


o 

1 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 




er. 


ant 


Sing. 


1 


e, 


ais, 


1st 
ER. 


3 


s 


e, mas. 
fc ee, fern. 
o Plur. 


•S 2 
3 
1 


- es, 

w 

o ons, 


ais, 

Sait, 

w • 
o ions, 








es, mas. 


I 2 

3 


ez, 


iez, 








ees,/em. 


ent. 


aient. 




ir. 


issant. 


Sing. 


1 


is, 


issais, 








i, mas. 


■S 2 
&2 


is, 


issais, 


2d 
IR. 


A 


ft 


■ ie, /em. 
S Plur. 


3 
1 


is* 

^ issous 


^ issait> 
^ issions, 








is, mas. 


1*2 

3 


issez, 


issiez, 


■ 






ies, /em. 


issent. 


issaient. 




evoir. 


evant. 


Sing. 


1 


ois, 


evais, 








u, mas. 


•1*2 


ois, 


evais, 


3d 
OIR. 


6 


6 
3 


, ue, fern. 


3 
1 


6, oit ' 
tf evons, 


i evait, 
« evions, 








us, mas. 


i'2 

3 


evez, 


eviez, 








ues,/em. 


oivent. 


evaient 




re. 


ant. 


Sing. 


1 


s, 


ais, 








u, mas. 


.§ 2 

3} 


s, 


ais, 


4th 


p 


g 


p ue, /em. 


3 


g 


g ait, 


RE. 


> 


1 


£ Pfor. 


1 


^ ons, 


^ ions, 








us, mas. 


3 


ez, 


iez, 








ues,/em. 


ent. 


aient. 



OF THE 

OF THE FOUK CONJUGATIONS. 



PAST 
DEFINITE. 


FUTUEK. 


CONDITIONAL. 


IilPEBATTVE. 


SUB- 
JUNCTIVE. 


Impeefeot. 


ai, 
as, 

o times, 
ates, 
erent. 


erai, 
eras, 

| era , 

o erons, 
erez, 
eront. 


erais, 
erais, 
5 erait, 
© erions, 
eriez, 
eraient. 


6-1 

« ons, 
ez, 

ent. 


e, 

es, 

H 

a . 
o ions, 

iez, 

ent. 


asse, 

asses, 

Eh , 

8 assions, 
assiez, 
assent. 


is, 
is, 

|it, 

^ imes, 
ites, 
irent. 


irai, 
iras, 

■ ira, 

^ irons, 
irez, 
iront. 


irais, 
irais, 
£ irait, 
fe irions, 
iriez, 
iraient. 


is, 

. isse, 

fe issons, ' 
issez, 
issent. 


isse, 
isses, 
. isse, 
' fe issions, 
issiez, 
issent. 


isse, 

isses, 

fa issions, 
issiez, 
issent. 


us, 
us, 

d. ut - 

« umes, 

utes, 
urent. 


evrai, 
evras, 

. evra, 

w 

« evrons, 

evrez, 

evront. 


evrais, 
evrais, 
, evrait, 
« evrions, 
evriez, 
evraient. 


ois, 
, oive, 

H 

« evons, 
evez, 
oivent. 


oive, 
oives, 

i. °i ve , 
£ evions. 
eviez, 
oivent. 


usse, 
usses, 

*** 

« ussions, 

ussiez, 
ussent. 


is, 
is, 

p it. 

^ imes, 
ites, 
irent. 


rai, 
ras, 

ira, 

^ rons, 
rez, 
ront. 


rais, 

rais, 
q rait, 
^ rions, 

riez, 

raient. 


s, 

> ons, 
ez, 
ent. 


es, 

p e, 

£ ions, 
iez, 
ent 


isse, 

isses, 

p it, 

^ issions, 
issiez, 
issent. 



16 



362 formation of the tenses. § 61. 

§ 61. — Formation of the Tenses. 

(1.) The tenses are simple or compound. 

1. We call those, simple tenses, which do not borrow one of the 
tenses of the auxiliaries avoir and tire. 

2. We call those compound tenses, which are composed of the 
tenses of avoir and etre } and the participle past of a verb. 

(2.) Among the simple tenses, five are called primitive, because 
they serve to form the other tenses. They are : 

1. The present of the indicative ; 

2. The past definite ; 

3. The present of the infinitive j 

4. The participle present j 

5. The participle past. 

(3.) The other simple tenses, called derived tenses, are formed 
from the primitive. 

(4.) 1. The present of the indicative forms the imperative, by sup- 
pressing the pronouns : as, je chante, chante ; nous chantons, vous 
chantez, chantons, chantez. It will be seen that the third person of 
the singular and plural of the imperative, is properly the third per- 
son of the singular and plural of the subjunctive, used imperatively. 

(5.) The past definite forms the imperfect of the subjunctive, by 
changing i into sse for the first conjugation ; as, je chantai, que je 
chantas.se, and by adding se for the other conjugations : as, je finis, 
que je finisse ; je recus, queje regusse ; je vendis, queje vendisse. 
, (6.) The present of the infinitive forms: 

1. The future, by adding ai for the first and second conjugations : 
as, chanter, je chanterai ; finir, je finirai ; and by changing oir and 
re into raj for the other two conjugations; as, recevoir, je recevrai; 
rendre, je rendrai. 

2. The conditional present is by French grammarians formed from 
the future by the addition of s : as, je chanterai, je chanterais ; je 
fiuirai, je finirais ; je recevrai, je recevrais ; je vendrai, je vendrais. 

(7.) The participle present forms : 

1. The imperfect of the indicative, by changing ant into ais : as, 
chantant, je chantais ; finissant, je finissais ; recevant, je recevais ; 
vendant, je vendais. 

2. The present of the subjunctive, by changing ant into e: as, 
chantant, queje chante ; finissant, que je finisse ; vendant, queje vende. 

Exception : In verbs of the third conjugation the termination evani 
is changed into oive: as, recevant, queje reqoive. 



Y AVOIR.— § 61-2, 363 

(8.) This formation must not prevent the change of y into i, ac- 
cording to Rule (2.) § 49. 

(9.) The participle past forms all the compound tenses of verbs 
with the aid of the auxiliaries avoir and etre : as, j'ai chante, je suis 
aime,favais chante, fetais aime. 

§ 61-2.— Paradigm of the TJjstipeeso^al Veeb Y Avoie, 

To BE THERE. 

Indicative Mode. 

present. past indefinite. 

II y a, there is; there are | II y a eu, there has been; there have 

teen 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

II y avait, there was ; there were | II y avait eu, there had teen 

PAST DEFINITE. PAST ANTERIOR, 

II y eut, there was ; there were | II y eut eu, there had "been 

FUTURE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

II y aura, there will be | II y aura eu, there will have been 

Conditional Mode. 

present. past. 

II y aurait, there would be] H y aurait eu, there would have been 

Imperative Mode. 

Qu'il y ait, Let there be. 

Subjunctive Mode. 

present. past. 

Qu'il y ait, that there may be \ Qu'il y ait eu, that there may have 

been 

imperfect. pluperfect. 

Qu'il y eftt, that there might he \ Qu'il y eut eu, that there might have 

been 

Infinitive Mode. 

present. past. 

Y avoir, to be there \ T avoir eu, to have been there 

Participle, 
present. compound. 

Y ayant, there being \ Y ayant eu, there having been 

Past or Passive. 

Eu. 



§ 62. ALPHABET 
OF THE IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, 

SEE § 44, RULE (2.) 

The figures placed after the infinitive of the verbs 
The tenses not given in 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Impeefect. 


Past Definite. 


Abattre, 4. to 


abattant 


j'abats 


j'abattais 


j'abattis 


pull down 


abattu, /. e. 


see Battre 






Absoudre, 4. 


absolvant 


j'absous 


j'absolvais 




to absolve 


absous 


tu absous 


tu absolvais 




aux. avoir 


absout 


il absout 


il absolvait 




defective. 




n. absolvons 
v. absolvez 
ils absolvent 


n. absolvions 
v. absolviez 
i. absolvaient 




Abstenir (s') 


s'abstenant 


je m'abstiens 


je m'abstenais 


je m'abstina 


2. to abstain abstenu, /. e. 


ref. see Tenir 






Abstraire, 4. abstrayant 


j'abstrais 


j'abstrayais 




to abstract 


abstrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 






ACCOURIR, 2. 


accouraut 


j'accours 


j'accourais 


j'accourua 


to run to 


accouru, /. e. 


see courir 






Accroitre, 4. 


accroissant 


j'accrois 


j'accroissais 


j'accrus 


to increase 


accru, / e. 


see CROlTRE 


also reflective 




Accueillir, 2. 


aceueillant 


j'accueille 


j'accueillais 


j'accueillis 


to welcome 


accueilli, /. e. 


see cueillir 






ACIIETER, 1. 


achetant 


j'achete 


j'achetais 


j'achetai 


to buy 


achete, /. e. 


tu achetea 


like CHANTER 




aux. avoir 




il acbete 






§ 49, (5) 




n. achetons 






peculiar. 




v. achetez 
L achetent 






Achever, 1. 


achevant 


j'acheve 


j'achevais 


j'achevai 


to complete 


acheve,/. e. 


tu acheves 


like CHANTER 




aux. avoir 




il acheve 






§ 49, (6) 




n. achevona 






peculiar. 




v. achevez 
i. achevent 






Acquerir, 2. acquerant 


j'acquiers 


j'acquerais 


j'acquis 


to acquire 


acquis,/, e. 


tu acquiers 


tu acquerais 


tu acquia 


aux. avoir 




il acquiert 


il acquerait 


il acquit 


irregular 




n. acquerons 


n. acquerions 


n. acquimea 






v. acquerez 


v. acqueriez 


v. acquitea 






i. acquierent 


ils acqueraient 


ils acquirent 


Adjoindre, 4. adjoignant 


j'adjoins 


j'adjoignaia 


j'adjoignis 


to associate, &c. adjoint, /. e. 


see joindre 






Admettre, 4. admettant 


j'admets 


j'admettaia 


i'admia 


to admit 


admis, /. e. 


see mettre 







ICAL TABLE 

PECULIAR AND TJNIPERSONAL VERBS. 

§ 43, rule (?.) and § 49. 

indicate the conjugations to which they belong. 

this Table are not used. 



Future. 


CONDITIONAL. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Impeefect. 


j'abattrai 


j'abattrais 


abats 


j'abatto 


j'abattisse 


j'absoudrai 


j'absoudrais 




j 'absolve 




tu absoudras 


tu absoudrais 


absous 


tu absolves 




il absoudra 


il absoudrait 


q. absolve 


il absolve 




n. absoudrons 


n. absoudrions 


absolvons 


n. absolvions 




v. absondrez 


v. absoudriez 


absolvez 


v. absolviez 




i. absoudront 


i. absoudraient 


q. absolvent 


i. absolvent 




je m'abstien- 


je m'abstien- 




je m'abstienne 


je m'abstinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


abstiens-toi 






j'abstrairai 


j'abstrairais 


abstraia 


j'abstraie 




j'accourrai 


j'accourrais 


accours 


j'accoure 


j'accourusse 


j'accroitrai 


j'accroltrais 


accrois 


j'accroisse 


j'accrusse 


j'accueillerai 


j'accueillerais 


accueille 


j'accueille 


j'accueillisse 


j'acheterai 


j'acheterais 




j'achete 


j'achetasse 


tu acheteras 


tu acheterais 


achete 


tu achetes 


like 


il achetera 


il acheterait 


q. achete 


il achete 


CHANTER 


n. acheterons 


n. acheterions 


achetons 


n. achetions 




v. acheterez 


v. acheteriez 


achetez 


v. achetiez 




ils acheteront 


i. acheteraient 


q. achetent 


ils achetent 




j'acheverai 


j'acheverais 




j'acheve 


j'achevasse 


tu acheveras 


tu acheverais 


acheve 


tu acheves 


like 


il achevera 


il acbeverait 


q. acheve 


il acheve 


CHANTER 


n. acheverons 


n. acheverions 


achevona 


n. achevions 




v. acheverez 


v. acheveriez 


achevez 


v. acheviez 




ils acheveront 


i. acheveraient 


q. achevent 


i. achevent 




j'acquerrai 


j'acquerrais 




j'acquiere 


j'acquisse 


tu acquerras 


tu acquerrais 


acquiers 


tu acquieres 


tu acquisses 


il acquerra 


il acquerrait 


q. acquiere 


il acquiere 


il acquit 


n. acquerrons 


n. acquerrions 


acquerona 


n. acquerions 


n. acquission3 


n. acquerrez 


v. acquerriez 


acquerez 


v. acqueriez 


v. acquissiez 


ils acquerront 


i. acquerraient 


q. acquierent 


i. acquierent 


i. acquissent 


j'adjoindrai 


j'adjoindrais 


adjoins 


j'adjoigne 


j'adjoignisse 


j'admettrai 


j'admettrai3 " 


j'admette 


j'admisse 






admet3 







366 



IREEGUL AK, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Pabticipi.es. 


Indicative. 


Ijifekfect. 


Past Definite. 


ALLER, . 1. to 


allant 


je vais 


j'allais 


j'allai 


90 


alle, /. e. 


tu vas 


tu allais 


tu alias 


aux. etre 




il va 


il allait 


ilalla 


irregular 




n. allons 


n. allions 


n. alMmes 




v. allez 


v. alliez 


v. allates 




ils vont 


ils allaient 


i. allerent 


Amener, 1. to amenant 


j 'amene 


j'amenais 


j'amenai 


bring amene, /. e. 


§ 49, (6) 


see ACHEVER 




Amonceler, 1. amoncelant 


j'amoncelle 


j'amoncelais 


j'amoneelai 


to heap amoncele,/. e. 


§ 49, (4) 


see APPELER 




Apparaitre,4. :apparaissant 


j'apparais 


j'apparaissais 


j'apparus 


to appear 


apparu, /. e. 


see paraItre 






Appartexir,2. 


appartenaut 


j'appartiens 


j'appartenais 


j'appartins 


to belong 


appartenu,/. e. 


see TENTR 






Appeler, 1. to 


appelant 


j'appelle 


j'appelais 


j'appelai 


call 


appele,/. e. 


tu appelles 


like 


like 


aux. avoir 




il appelle 


CHANTER 


CHANTER 


§ 49, (4) 




n. appelons 






peculiar 




v. appelez 
ils appellent 






Apprendre, 4. 


apprcnant 


j'apprends 


j'apprenais 


j 'appris 


to learn 


appris, /. e. 


see PRENDRE 






Appuyer, 1. to 


appuyant 


j'appuie 


j'appuyais 


j'appuyai 


support 


appuye, /. o. 


tu appuies 


t. appuyais 


like 


aux. avoir 




il appuie 


il appuyait 


CHANTER 


§ 49, (2) 




n. appuyons 


n. appuyions 




peculiar. 




v. appuyez 
ils appuient 


v. appuyiez 
i. appuyaient 




Ass.ullir, 2. 


assaillant 


j'assaille 


j'assaillais 


j'assaillis 


to assault 


assailli, / e. 


tu assaillcs 


t. assaillais 


t. assail] is 


aux. avoir 




il assaille 


i. assaillait 


i. assaillit 


irregular 




n. assaillons 


n. assaillions 


n. assailltmes 






v. asaaillez 


v. assailliez 


v. assaillftes 






iLs assailleut 


i. assaillaient 


i. assaillireut 


Asseoir, 3. to asseyant 


j'assieds 


j'asseyais 


j 'assis 


set something assis, f. e. 


see s'asseoir 






down; to seatl 








Asseoir, (s') 3. s'asscyant 


j. m'assieds 


je m'asseyais 


j. m'assis 


to sit down assis, /. e. 


t. t'assieds 


t. t'asseyais 


t. t'assis 


aux. ctro 


i. s'assied 


i. s'asseyait 


t. s'assit 


irregular and\ 


n. n. asseyons 


n. n. asseyions 


n. n. assumes 


reflective 




v. v. asseyez 


v. v. asseyiez 


v. v. assites 






i. s'asseient 


i. s'asseyaient 


i. s'assirent 


ASTRFJNDRE,4. 


astreignant 


j'astreins 


j'astreignais 


j'astreignis 


to compel 


astreint, /. e. 


see CEIXDRE 






Atteindre, 4. 


atteignant 


j'atteins 


j'atteignais 


j'atteignis 


to attain 


atteint, /. e. 


see ceindre 






Atteler, 1. to 


attelant 


j'attclle 


j'attelais 


j'attelai 


put to,harness 


attele,/. e. 


§ 49, (4) 


see APPELER 




Attraire,4. to 


attrnyant 


j'attrais 


j'attrayais 




attract 


attrait, /. e. 


see traire 






Avexir, 2. to 


avenant 


il avient 


il avenait 


il avint 


happen 


avenu 


it happens 


it was happen-, 


it happened 


Avoir, to have 


see model, § 47 




[ing ' 





AND UNIPBESONAL VEKBS. § 62. 



367 



FUTURE. 


Conditional. 


IHPEEATITE. 


S0BJUNCXIVB. 


IlJPEBFECT. 


j'irai 


i'irais 




j'aille 


'allasse 


tu iraa 


tu irais 


va 


tu ailles 


n allasses 


il ira 


il irait 


q. aille 


il aille 


il allat 


n. irons 


n. irions 


allons 


n. anions 


n. allassions 


v. irez 


v. iriez 


allez 


v. alliez 


v. allassiez 


ils iront 


L iraient 


q. aillent 


i. aQlent 


l. allassent 


j'amenerai 


I'amenerais 


amene 


j'amene 


I'amenasse 


j'amoncellerai 


'amoncelle- 
[raig 


amoncelle 


j' amoncelle 


i'amoncelasse 


j'apparaitrai 


'apparaitrais 


apparais 


j'apparaisse 


j'apparusse 


j'appartien- 


'appartien- 




j'appartienne 


j'appartinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


appartiens 






j'appellerai 


'appellerais 




j'appelle 


j'appelasse 


tu appelleras 


;. appellerais 


appelle 


tu appelles 


like 


il appellera 


. appellerait 


q. appelle 


i. appelle 


CHANTER 


n. appellerons 


a. appellerions 


appelons 


n. appelions 




v. appellerez 


v. appelleriez 


appelez 


v. appeliez 




i. appelleront 


i. appelleraient 


q. appellant 


i. appellent 




j'apprendrai 


'apprendrais 


apprends 


j'apprenne 


j'apprisse 


j'appuierai 


'appuierais 


j'appuie 


j'appuyasse 


t. appuierag 


;. appuierais 


appuie 


tu appuies 


like 


i. appuiera 


i. appuierait 


q. appuie 


il appuie 


CHANTER 


n. appuierong 


n. appuierions 


appuyons 


n. appuyions 




v. appuierez 


v. appuieriez 


appuyez 


v. appuyiez 




i. appuieront 


i. appuieraient 


q. appuient 


ils appuient 




j'assaillirai 


i'assaillirais 




j 'assaille 


j'assaillisse 


t. assailliras 


-,. assaillirais 


assaille 


t. assailles 


t. assaillisse 


i. assaillira 


i. assaillirait 


q. assaille 


i. assaille 


i. assaillit 


n. assiillirons 


n. assaillirions 


assaillons 


n. assaillions 


n.assaillissions 


v. assaillirez 


v. assailliriez 


assaillez 


v. assailliez 


v. assaillissiez 


i. assailliront 


i. assailliraient 


q. assaillent 


i. assaillent 


i. assaillissent 


j'assierai 


,'assierais 


assieds 


j'asseie 


j'assisse 


je m'assierai 


i. m'assierais 




je m'asseie 


je m'assissQ 


t. t'assieras 


t. t'assierais 


assieds-toi 


t. t'asseies 


t. t'assisses 


i. s'assiera 


i. s'assierait 


q. s'asseie 


i. s'asseie 


i. s'assit 


n. n. assierons 


n. n. assierions 


asseyons-n. 


n. n. asseyions 


n. n. assissions 


v. v. assierez 


v. v. assieriez 


asseyez-v. 


v. v. asseyiez 


v. v. assissiez 


i. s'assieront 


i. s'assieraient 


q. s'asseient 


i. s'asseient 


i. s'assissent 


j'astreindrai 


j'astreindrais 


astreins 


j'astreigne 


j'astreignisse 


j'atteindrai 


j'atteindrais 


atteins 


j'atteigne 


j'atteignisse 


j'attellerai 


j'attellerais 


attelle 


j'attelle 


j'attelasse 


j'attrairai 


j'attrairais 


attrais 


j'attraie 




il aviendra 


il aviendrait 




il avienne 


il avint 


it will happen 


it wld. happen 




it may happen 


it mgt. happen 



368 IEEEGTJLAE, 


DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 


Infinitive. 


Paeticiples. 


Indicative. 


IiiPEEFECT. Past Definite. 


Avoir (y), to be 


y ayant 


il j a 


il y avait jil y eut 


there 


eu (unip.) 


there is, are 


there iuos, were there was, were 


Battre, 4. to 


battant 


je bats 


je battais je battis 


beat 


battu,/. e. 


tu bats 


tu battais tu battis 


aux avoir 




ilbat 


il battait il battit 


irregular 




n. battons 


n. battions 


d. battimes 






v. battez 


v. battiez 


v. battites 






ils battent 


i. battaient 


ils battirent 


Boire, 4. to 


buvant 


je bois 


je buvais 


je bus 


drink 


bu. / e. 


tu bois 


tu buvais tu bus 


aux. avoir 




il boit 


il buvait lil but 


irregular 




n. buvons 


n. buvions n. bumes 






v. buvez 


v. buviez v. butes 






ils boivent 


i. buvaient ils burent 


Bouillir, 2. to 


bouillant 


je bous 


je bouillais je bouillis 


boil 


bouilli, /. e. 


tu bous 


tu bouillais tu bouillis 


aux. avoir 




il bout 


ilbouillait il bouillit 


irre^uZar 




n. bouillons 


n. bouillions n. bouillimes 






v. bcuillez 


v. bouilliez v. bouillites 






i. bouillent 


ils bouillaient 


ils bouillirent 


BOURRELER, 1. 


bourrelart 


je bourrele 


je bourrelais 


je bourrelai 


to torment bourrele, /. e. 


§ 49, (5) 






Braire, 4. to\ 


il brait 






bray 


ils braient 






defective. 








Bruixer, 1. to bruinant 


il bruine 


il bruinait 


il bruina 


drizzle bruine 


it drizzles 


it was driz- 


it drizzled 


unipersonal 




[zling 




Bruire, 4. fobruissant 


il bruit 


il bruyait, or 




roar, rustle 






il bruissait 




defective. 






ils bruyaient 
ils bruissaient 




Caciieter, 1. 


cachetant 


je cachette 


je cachetais 


je cachetai 


to seal 


eachete, /. e. 


§ 49, (4) 






Ceixdre, 4. to ceignant 


je ceins 


jo ceignais 


je ceignis 


gird ceint, /. e. 


tu ceins 


tu ceignais 


tu ceignis 


aux. avoir 




il ceiut 


il ceignait 


il ceignit 


irregular 




n. ceignons 


n. ceignions !n. ceignimes 






v. ceignez 


v. ceigniez 'v. ce ignites 






ils ceignent 


ils ceignaient ills ceignirent 


Ciiaxceler, 1. chancelant 


je chancelle 


je chancelais je chancelai 


to stagger 


chancele, /. e. 


§ 49, (4) 


see appeler 


Citaxger, 1. to 


changeant 


je change 


je changeais je changeai 


change 


change, /. e. 


tu changes 


tu changeais tu changeag 


aux. avoir 




il change 


il changeait jil changea 


§ 49, (1) 




n. changeons 


n. changions n. changreames 


peculiar. 




v. changez 


v. changiez \v. changeates 






ils changent 


ilschansreaient ils changerent 


Circoxscrire, circonserivant 


je circonscris 


je circonscri- j. circonscrivis 


4. to circurn- (Cireonscrit, 


see lic'RiRE 


[vais 




[scribe \ [/. e. 








Circoxvexir, circonvenaDt 


j. circonviens 


jo circonve- 


je circonvins 


2. to circum- 
[yent 


circonvenu, 


see vexir 


[nais 





AND UNIPEKSOKAIi VERBS. 



62. 



369 



FUTUEE. 


Conditional. 


IilPEEATIVE. 


SUUJUNOTIVE. 


IMPEEFECT. 


il y aura 


il y aurait 




il y ait 


il y eut 


there will be 


there would be 




there may be 


there might be 


je battrai 


je battrais 




je batte 


je battisse 


tu battras 


tu battrais 


bats 


tu battes 


tu battisses 


il battra 


il battrait 


q. batte 


il batte 


il battit 


n. battrons 


n. battrions 


battons 


n. battions 


n. battissions 


v. battrez 


v. battriez 


battez 


v. battiez 


v. batissiez 


i. battront 


i. battraient 


q. battent 


i. battent 


i. battisscnt 


je boirai 


j. boirais " 




je boive 


je busse 


tu boiras 


tu boirais 


bois 


tu boives 


tu busses 


il boira 


il boirait 


q. boive 


il boive 


ilbut 


n. boirons 


n. boirions 


buvons 


n. buvions 


n. bussions 


v. boiriez 


v. boiriez 


buvez 


v. buviez 


v. bussiez 


i. boiront 


i. boiraient 


q. boivent 


i. boivent 


ils bussent 


je bouillirai 


je bouillirais 




je bouille 


je bouillisse 


tu bouilliras 


tu bouillirais 


bous 


tu bouilles 


tu bouillisses 


il bouillira 


il bouillirait 


q. bouille 


il bouille 


il bouillit 


n. bouillirons 


n. bouillirions 


bouillons 


n. bouillions 


n bouillissions 


v. bouillirez 


v. bouilliriez 


bouillez 


v. bouilliez 


v. bouillissiez 


i. bouilliront 


i. bouilliraient 


q. bouillent 


il bouillent 


i. bouillissent 


je bourrelerai 


je bourrelerais 


bourrele 


je bourrele 


je bourrelasse 


il braira 


il brairait 








ils brairont 


ils brairaient 








il bruinera 


il bruinerait 


q. bruine 


q. bruine 


q. bruinat 


it will drizzle 


it wld. drizzle 


let it drizzle 


it may drizzle 


it mgt. drizzle 


je cachetterai 


je cacbetterais 


cacbette 


je cacbette 


je cacbetasse 


je ceindrai 


je ceindrais 




je ceigne 


je ceignisse 


tu ceindras 


tu ceindrais 


ceins 


tu ceignea 


tu ceignisses 


il ceindra 


il ceindrait 


q. ceigne 


il ceigne 


il ceignit 


n. ceindrons 


n. ceindrions 


ceignons 


n. ceignions 


n. ceignissions 


v. ceindrez 


v. ceindriez 


ceignez 


v. ceigniez 


v. ceignissiez 


ils ceindront 


ils ceindraient 


q. ceignent 


ils ceignent 


i. ceignissent 


je chancellerai 


je chancelle- 
[rais 


cbancelle 


je cbancelle 


je chancelasse 


je chaugerai 


je cbangerais 




je cbange 


je changeasse 


like 




change 


tu changes 


tu changeasses 


CHANTER 




q. cbange 


like 


il changeat 






changeons 


CHANTER 


changeassions 






changez 




v. changeassiez 






q. changent 




i. changeassent 


je circonscri- 


je circonscri- 




je circonscrive 


je circonscii- 


[rai 


[rais 


circonscris 




[vLsse 


je circonvien- 


je circonvien- 




je circonvi- 


je circonvinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


circonviens 
16* 


[enne 





3Y0 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Paeticiples. 


Indicative. 


Impekfect. 


Past Definite. 


Clore, 4. to 




je clos 






close 


clos 


tu clos 






defective 




il clot 






COLLETER, 1, 


colletant 


je collete 


je colletais 


je colletai 


to collar 


collete, /. e. 


§ 49, (5) 


see ACHETER 
je combattais 




COMBATTRE, 4. 


combattant 


je combats 


je combattis 


to combat 


combattu, /. e. 


see BATTRE 






COJISIETTRE, 4. 


commettant 


je commets 


je commettais 


je conimis 


to commit 


conimis, /. e. 


see 1IETTRE 






COMPARAITRE, 


comparaissant 


je comparais 


je comparaia- 


je compares 


4. to appear 


comparu 


see PARA1TRE 


[sais 




COMPLAIRE, 4. 


complaisant 


je complais 


je complaisais 


je complus 


to humor 


complu 


see plaire 






COMPREXDRE, 


comprenant 


je comprends 


je comprenais 


je compris 


4. to under- 


compris, /. e. 


see prexdre 






stand 










COMPROIIET- 


compromet- 


je compromets je compromet-je compromis 


TRE,4.to com- 


[tant 


see ilETTRE 


[tais 




promit 


compromis,/e. 








COXCLURE, 4. 


concluant 


jo conclus 


je concluais 


je conclus 


to conclude 


conclu, /. o. 


tu conclus 


tu concluais 


tu conclus 


aux. avoir 




il conclut 


il concluait 


il conclut 


irregular. 




n. concluons 


n. concluions 


n. conclumes 






v. concluez 


v. concluiez 


v. conclutes 






i. concluent 


i. concluaicnt 


ils conclurent 


Coxcourtr, 2. 


concourant 


je concours 


je concourais 


je concourus 


to concur 


coucouru, /. e. 


see courir 






Coxdujre, 4. 


conduisant 


je conduis 


je conduisais 


je eonduisis 


to conduct 


conduit, /. e. 


tu conduis 


tu conduisais 


tu eonduisis 


aux. avoir 




il conduit 


il conduisait 


il conduisit 


irregular. 




n. conduisons 


n. conduisions 


n. conduisimes 






v. conduisez 


v. conduisiez 


v. conduisites 






ils conduiscnt 


i. conduisaient 


i. conduisirent 


Coxfire, 4. to 


conusant 


je coiiiis 


je confisais 


je confis 


preserve 


conlit, /. o. 


tu confis 


tu confisais 


tu confis 


aux. avoir 




il count 


il confisait 


il confit 


irregular. 




n. confisons 


n. confisions 


n. confimes 






v. confisez 


v. confisiez 


v. confites 






L confisent 


i. confisaient 


ils confirent 


COXGELER, 1. 


congelant 


je congele 


je congclais 


je congelai 


to congeal 


congele, /. e. 


§ 49, (5) 






Coxjoixdre, 4. 


coujoiguant 


je conjoins 


je conjoignais 


jo conjoignis 


to conjoin 


conjoint, / e. 


see CEINDRE 






Coxxaitre, 4. 


connaissant 


je connais 


jo connaissais 


je connus 


to know 


connu, /. o. 


tu connais 


tu connaissais 


tu connus 


aux. avoir 




il connait 


il connaissait 


il connut 


irregular. 




n. connaissons 


n. connaissions 


n. connumes 






v. connaissez 


v. connaissiez 


v. connutes 






i. connaissent 


i.connaissaient 


i. connurent 


Coxquerir, 2. 


conquerant 


je conquiers 


je conquerais 


je conquis 


to conquer 


conquis, / e. 


see ACQUERIR 






Coxsextir, 2. 


consentant 


je consens 


je consentais 


je consentia 


to consent 


consenti, /. e. 


see sextir 







AND UNIPEKSONAL VEBBS. 



§ 62. 



371 



FUTUER 



je clorai je clorais 

tu cloras tu clorais 

il clora, etc. il clorait, etc. 

je colleterai je colleterais 

je combattrai je combattrais 

je comiuettrai 



je comparai- 

[trai 
je complairai 

je compren- 
[drai 



Conditional. 



je commet- 

[trais 

je comparai- 
[trais 

je complairais 

je compren- 
[drais 



je compromet- je compromet 
[trai [trais 



je conclurai 
tu concluras 
il conclura 
n. conclurons 
v. conclurez 
ils concluront 
je concourrai 

je conduirai 
tu conduiras 
il couduira 
H. conduirons 
v. condurez 
ils conduiront 
je confirai 
tu confiras 
il confira 
n. confirons 
v. confirez 
L confiront 
je congelerai 

je conjoindrai 

je connaitrai 
tu connaitras 
il connaitra 
n. connaitrons 
v. connaitrez 
ils connaitront 
je conquerrai 

je consentirai 



je conclurais 
ru conclurais 
il conclurait 
n. conclurions 
y. concluriez 
il concluraient 
ije concourrais 

Ije conduirais 
tu conduirais 
il couduirait 
In. conduirions 
v. conduiriez 
i conduiraient 
Ije confirais 
tu confirais 
il confira it 
n. confirions 
v. confiriez 
ils confiraient 
je congelerais 

je conjoin- 

[drais 
je connaitrais 
tu connaitrais 
il connaitrait 
n. connaitrions 
v. connaitriez 
i.connaitraient 
je conquerrais 

je consenti- 

[rais 



collete 

combats 

commets 

comparais 

complais 

comprends 

compromets 

conclus 
q. conclue 
concluons 
concluez 
q. concluent 

concours 

conduis 
q. conduise 
conduisons 
conduisez 
q. conduisent 

confis 
q. confise 
confisons 
confisez 
q. confisenfc 

congele 

conjoins 

connais 



Subjunctive. 



je collete 

je combatte 

je commette 

je compa- 

[raisse 
je complaise 

je comprenne 



je compro- 

[mette 

je conclue 
tu conclues 
il conclue 
n. concluions 
v. concluiez 
ils concluent 
je concoure 



tu conduises 
il conduise 
n. conduisions 
v. conduisiez 
ils conduisent 
je confise 
Itu confises 
il confise 
confisions 
confisiez 
confisent 



je conjoigne 



connaissez 
q. connaissent 



conquiers 



tu connaisses 
il connaisse 
n. connaissions 



connaissent 
je conquiere 

je consente 



je colletasse 

combattisse 
je commisse 
je comparusse 
je complusse 
je comprisse 



je compro- 

[misse 

je conclusse 
tu conclusses 
il conclut 
n. conclussions 
v. conclussiez 
ils conclussent 
je concourusse 

conduisisse 
tu conduisisses 
il conduisit 
conduisissions 
v. conduisissiez 
. conduisissent 
je confisse 
tu confisses 
il conf it 
n. confissions 
v. confissiez 
ils confissent 
je congelasse 

conjoignisse 

je connusse 
tu connusses 
il connut 
n. connussions 
v. connussiez 
ils connussent 
je conquisse 

je consentisso 



Ill REGULAR, DEFECTIV. 



PECULIAR 



INFINITIVE. 



'AETIOIPI.ES. 



COXSTRUIRE, 4. 

to construct 

COXTEXIR, 2. 

to contain 

COXTRAIXDRE, 

4. to constrain 

fcoXTREDIRE,4. 

to contradict 
aux avoir 
irregular. 

COXTREFAIRE, 

4. to counter- 
feit 

COXTREVEXIR, 

2. to contra- 
vene 

C'ONVAIXCRE, 

4. to convince 

C'JXVKXIR, 2. 

to suit, fit, etc. 

COQUETER, 1. 

to coquet 

CORROMPRE, 4. 

to corrupt 

COUDRE, 4. to 

sew 

aux. avoir 

irregular. 



construisant 
construit, /. e. 
contenant 
jcontenu, /. e. 
jcontraignant 
contraint, /. e. 
contredisant 
contredit, /. e. 



contrefaisant 
contrefait, /. e, 

contrevenant 
contrevenu/.e. 

convainquant 

convaincu,/.e. 

convenant 

couvenu, /. e. 

coquetant 

coquete 

corrompant 

corrompu, /. e, 

cousant 

cousu,/. e. 



COURIR, 2. to courant 
run 

aux. avoir 



COUVRER, 2. to couvrant 



cover 

flRAINDRE, 

'." ■'■ 

R [Rl . '!. 

aux. avoir 
irregular. 



[convert, /. e. 
4. craignant 

eraint, /. e. 
focroyant 

cru,/. o. 



Croitre, 4. to 
grow 
aux. avoir & 
C tre 
irregular. 



croissant 
cru, /. e. 



Indicative. I Imperfect. Past Definite, 



je construis 
see coxdcire 
je contiens 
see texir 
je contrains 
see CEINDRE 
je contredis 
tu contredis 
il contredit 
n.contredisons 
v. contredisez 
i. contredisent 
je contrefais 
see PAIRE 

je contreviens 
see texir 

je convaincs 
see VAINCRE 
je conviens 
see texir 
je coquete 
see ACIIETER 

je oorromps 

RO.MPRE 

je couds 
tu couds 
il coud 
n. cousons 
v. cousez 
ils cousent 
je cours 
tu cours 
il court 
n. courons 
v. courez 
ils courent 
je couvre 
•see ouvrir 
je crains 
see CEIXDRE 
je crois 
tu crois 
il croit 
n. croyons 
v. croyez 
ils croient 
je crois 
tu crois 
il croit 
n. croissons 
v. croissez 
ils croissent 



je construisais 

je contenais 

je contraignais 

je contredisais 
like dire 



je contrefai- 

[sais 

je contreve 

[nais 

je convain- 

[quais 
je convenais 

je coquetais 
peculiar 
jo corrompais 

je cousais 
tu cousais 
il cousait 
n. cousions 
v. cousiez 
ils cousaient 
je courais 
tu courais 
il courait 
n. courions 
v. couriez 
ils couraient 
je couvrais 

je craignais 

je croyais 
tu croyais 
il croyait 
n. croyions 
v. croyiez 
ils croyaient 
je croissais 
tu croissais 
il croissait 
n. croissions 
v. croissicz 
ils croissaicnt 



je construisis 

je contins 

je contraignis 

je contredis 
like dire 



je contrefis 

je contrevins 

je convamquis 

je convins 

je coquetai 

je corrompis 

je cousis 
tu cousis 
il cousit 
n. cousimes 
v. cousites 
ils cousirent 
je courus 
tu courus 
il courut 
n. courumes 
v. courutes 
ils coururent 
je couvris 



je crus 
tu crus 
il crut 
n. crumes 
v. crutes 
il crurent 
je crus 
tu crus 
il crut 
n. erumes 
v. crutea 
ils crurent 



AND UNIPEESONAL VERBS. — §62 



373 



FUTDBE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


StTHJTTNCTIVE. 


Imperfect. 


je construirai 


je construirais 


construis 


je contruise 


je construisis- 
[se 


je contiendrai 


je contien- 

[drais 


contiens 


je contienne 


je continsse 


je contrain- 


je contrain- 




je contraigne 


je contraignis- 


[drai 


[drais 


contrains 




[se 


je contredirai 


je contredirais 




je contredise 


je contredisse 


like dire 


like dire 


contredis 
q. contredise 
contredisons 
contredisez 
q. contredisent 


like DIRE 


like dire 


je contreferai 


je contreferais 


contrefais 


je contrefasse 


je contrefisse 


jo contrevien- 


je contrevien- 




je contrevien- 


je contrevinsse 


[drai 


[drais 


contreviens 


[ne 




je convaincrai 


je convaincrais 


convaincs 


je convainque 


je convain- 

[quisso 


je conviendrai 


je convien- 

[drais 


conviens 


je convienne 


je convinsse 


je coqueterai 


je coqueterais 


coquete 


je coquete 


je coquetasse 


je corromprai 


je corromprais 


corromps 


je corrompe 


je corrompisso 


je coudrai 


je coudrais 




je couse 


je cousisse 


tu coudras 


tu coudrais 


couds 


tu couses 


tu cousisses 


il coudra 


il coudrait 


q. couse 


il couse 


il cousit 


n. coudrons 


n. coudrions 


cousons 


n. cousions 


n. cousissions 


v. coudrez 


v. coudriez 


cousez 


v. cousiez 


v. cousissiez 


ils coudront 


i. coudraient 


q. cousent 


i. cousent 


ils cousissent 


je courrai 


je courrais 




je coure 


je courusse 


tu courras 


tu courrais 


cours 


tu coures 


tu courusses 


il coarra 


il courrait 


q. coure 


il coure 


il courut 


n. courrons 


n. courrions 


courons 


n. courions 


n. courussions 


v. courrez 


7. courriez 


courez 


v. couriez 


v. courussiez 


ils courront 


ils courraient 


q. courent 


ils courent 


ils courussent 


je couvrirai 


je couvrirais 


couvre 


je couvre 


je couvrisse 


je craindrai 


je craindrais 


crains 


je craigne 


je craignisse 


je croirai 


je croirais 




je croie 


je crusse 


tu croiras 


tu croirais 


crois 


tu croies 


tu crusses 


il croira 


il croirait 


q. croie 


il croie 


il crut 


n. croirons 


n. croirions 


croyons 


n. croyions 


n. crussions 


v. croirez 


v. croiriez 


croyez 


v. croyiez 


v. crussiez 


ils croiront 


ils croiraient 


q. croient 


ils croient 


ils crussent 


je croitrai 


jo croitrais 




je croisse 


je crusse 


tu croitras 


tu croitrais 


crois 


tu croisses 


tu crusses 


il croitra 


il croitrait 


q. croisse 


il croisse 


il crut 


n. croitrons 


n. croitrions 


croissons 


n. emissions 


n. crussions 


v. croitrez 


v. croitriez 


croissez 


v. croissiez 


v. crussiez 


ils croitront 


ils croitraient 


q. croissent 


ils croissent 


ils crussent 



374 IRREGULAR, 


DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 


Infinitive. 


Paeticiples. 


Indicative. 1 


IilPEEFEOT. 1 


Past Definiti'. 


CUEILLIR, 2. tO 


3ueillant 


e cueille |je cueillais jje cueillis 


gather 


sueilli, /. e. 


u eueilles 


tu cueillais 


tu cueillis 


aux avoir 




il cueille 


il cueillait 


il cueillit 


irregular. 




a. cueillons 


a. cueillions 


n. cueillimes 






v. cueillez 


v cueilliez 


v. cueillites 






lis cueilleut 


Is cueillaient 


ils cueillirent 


Cuire, 4. to 


cuisant 


e cuis 


e cuisais 


je cuisis 


bake, cook, etc. 


cuit, / e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Debattre, 4. 


debattant 


e debats 


e debattais 


je debattis 


to debate 


de'battu, / e. 


see battre 






Decacheter, 


decachetant 


e decachette 


e decachetais 


je decachetai 


1. to unseal 


decachete, /. e. 


§ 49, (4) 






Dechoir, 3. to 




e dechois 


e de'choyais 


je dechus 


decay 


dechu, /. e. 


;u dechois 


;u dechoyais 


tu dechus 


aux. avoir & 




d dechoit 


1 dechoyait 


il dechufc 


etre 




n. dechoyons 


n. de'choyioDS 


u. de'chumes 


defective. 


[Bescherelle) 


v. de'choyez 


v. dechoyicz 


v. dechutes 






Os dechoient 


dsdechoyaient 


ils de'churent 


Decoudre, 4. 


de'cousant 


je decouds 


je decousais 


je decousis 


to rip 


decousu, /. e. 


see coudre 






Decouvrir, 2. 


decouvrant 


je decouvre 


je de'couvrais 


je decouvris 


to discover 


decouvert,/. e. 


see ouvrir 






Decrire, 4. to 


decrivant 


je decris 


je decrivais 


je decrivis 


describe 


decrit, /. e. 


see ECR1RE 






Dedire, 4. to 


dedisant 


je dedis 


je dedisais 


je dedis 


unsay 


dedit, / e. 


seeCOXTREDIRE 






Deduire, 4. to 


deduisant 
deduit, /. e. 


je deduis 


je deduisais 


je deduisis 


deduct 


see coxdcire 






Defaillir, 2. 


defaillant 


il defaille 


je defaulaia 


je defaillis 


to fail, faint 


defailli 


D. difaillons 


etc. 


etc. 


defective. 


(Bescherelle) 


v. defaillez 
ils defoillent 






Defaire, 4. to 


defaisant 


je defais 


je defaisaia 


je defis 


undo 


defait, /. e. 


see faire 






Degeler, 1. to 


degelant 


il dvgele 


il degelait 


il degela 


thaw 


degele, /. e. 








DEJOIXDRE, 4. 


dejoignant, 


je dejoins 


je dejoignais 


je dejoignis 


disjoin 


dejoint, / e. 


see ceixdre 






Dejiextir, 2. 


dementant 


je demens 


je dementais 


je dementis 


to belie 


demeuti, /. e. 


see sextir 






Demettre, 4. 


demettant 


je de'mets 


je demettais 


je demis 


to disjoint 


demis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






Depeixdre, 4. 


depeignant 


je depeins 


je depeignais 


jo depeignis 


to depict 


depeint, /. e. 


see ceixdre 






Deplaire, 4. 


drplaisant 


je deplais 


je deplaisais 


je deplus 


to displease 


deplu, /. e. 


see plaire 






Desappren- 


desapprenant 


je desap- 


je dcsappre- 


je desappris 


dre, 4. to un- 


de'sappris, /. e. 


[prends 


[nais 




learn 




see PREXDRE 






Desservir, 2. 


desservant 


je dessers 


je desservais 


je desservia 


to clear Hie ta- 
ble 
Deteixdre, 4. 


desservi, /. e. 


see servir 






deteignant 


je deteins 


je deteignais 


jo deteignia 


to discolor 


'deteint, /. e. 


see TEINDRE 







AND UNIPEESONAL VERES 



62. 



875 



Futuee. I Conditional. 



je cueillerai 
tu cueilleras 
il cueillera 
n. cueillerons 
v. cueillerez 
ils cueilleront 
je cuirai 

je debattrai 

je decachet- 
[terai 
je de'cherrai 
tu decberras 
il decherra 
d. de'cherrons 
v. decherrez 
ils decherront 
je decoudrai 

je decouvrirai 

je decrirai 

je de'dirai 

je deduirai 

see Bescherelle, 
Dictionnaire 
National. 

je deferai 

il degelera 

je dejoindrai 

je dementirai 

je demettrai 

je depeindrai 

je deplairai 

je desappren 
[dra 



je cueillerais 
tu cueillerais 
il cueillerait 
n. cueillerions 
v. cueilleriez 

cueilleraient 
je cuirais 



je debattrais 

je decachet- 

[terais decachette 
je decherrais 
tu decherrais dechois 



il decherrait q. dechoie 
n. decherrions dechoyons 
v. deeherriez dechoyp" 
i. decherraient 
je decoudrais 



IMPEKATIVE. 



cueille 
q. cueille 
cueillons 
cueillez 
q. cueillent 

cuis 

debats 



je decouvrirais 
je decriraia 
je dediraia 
je deduirais 



je deferais 
degelerait 
dejoindrais 



q. dechoient 

decouds 

decouvre 

decris 

dedis 

deduis 



defais 
q. degele 



demettrais 
je depeindrais 
je de'plairais 



je desservixai je desservirais 



je deteindrai 



[cka 



dejoiua 



demeta 
depeins 
deplai3 



SUiMUNCTIVE. 



je cueille 
tu cueille3 
il cueille 
u. cueilliona 
v. cueilliez 
. cueillent 
je cuise 

je debatte 

je decacbette 

je dechoie 
tu dechoies 
il dechoie 
n. dechoyions 
v. dechoyiez 
ils dechoient 
je decouse 

decouvre 

je decrive 

je dedise 

je deduise 



]6' 

il degele 



Impekfect. 



je deteindrais 



Ideteina 



demente 



e depeigne 

e deplaise 

e desappren- 
[ne 



je deteigne 



je cueillisso 
tu cueillisses 
il cueillit 
n. cueillissiona 

. cueillissiez 
ils cueillissent 
je cuisisse 

je debattisse 

je de'cache- 

je dechusse 
tu decbusses 
il dechut 
n. dechussiona 
v. dechussiez 
ils dechussent 
je decousisse 

je decouvrisse 

decrivisse 

je de'disse 

je deduisisse 



je defisse 
il degelat 
je dejoignisse 
je dementisse 
je demisse 
je depeignisse 
je deplusse 
je desapprisse 

je desservisee 

je de'teignisse 



376 IEREGTTD AE, 


DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 


Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite. 


Detenir, 2. to 


detenant 


e detiens 


e detenais 


e detins 


detain 


detenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Detruire, 4. 


detruisant 


e detruis 


e detruisais 


e detruisis 


destroy 


detruit, /. e. 


see conduire 






Devenir, 2. to 


devenant 


e deviens 


e devenaia 


e devins 


to become 


devenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Devetir, 2. to 


devetant 


e devets 


e devetais 


ie devetis 


divest 


devetu, /. e. 


see tetir 






Dire, 4. to say 


disant 


e dis 


e disais 


ie dis 


aux. avoir 


dit, /. e. 


;u dis 


;u disais 


tu dis 


irregular. 




d dit 


il disait 


il dit 






n. disons 


n. disions 


n. dimes 






v. dites 


v. disiez 


v. dites 






ds disent 


ils disaient 


ils dirent 


DlSCOURIR, 2. 


discourant 


e discours 


ie discourais 


e discounts 


to discourse 


discouru 


see codrir 






DlSPARAlTRE, 


disparaissant 


e disparais 


ie disparais- 


je disparus 


4. to disappear 


disparu, /. e. 


see CONNA1TRE 


[sais 




DlSSOUDRE, 4. 


dissolvant 


je dissous 


je dissolvais 




to dissolve 


dissous, /. te. 


see ABSOUDRE 






DlSTR.URE, 4. 


distrayant 


ie distrais 


je distrayais 




to divert 


distrait, /. e. 


see TRAIRE 






DORMIR, 2. to 


dormant 


ie dors 


|e dormais 


jo dormis 


sleep 


dormi 


tu dors 


tu dormais 


tu dormis 


aux. avoir 




il dort 


il dormait 


il dormit 


irregular. 




n. dormons 


n. dormions 


n. dormimes 






v. dormez 


v. dormiez 


v. dormites 






ils dorment 


ils dormaient 


ils dormirent 


Eciioir, 3. to 


echeant 


il echoit 




il ecliut 


fall due 


echu, / e. 


or il echet 






EOLOEE, 4. to 




il eclot 






hatch 


eclos 








EuOXDOTRE, 4. 


econduisant 


i'econduis 


j'econduisais 


j'econduisis 


to refuse 


uconduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Ecrire, 4. to 


ecrivant 


j'ecris 


j'ecrivais 


j'ecrivis 


write 


ecrit, /. e. 


tu ecris 


tu ccrivais 


tu ecrivis 


aux. avoir 




il ecrit 


il ecrivait 


il ecrivit 


irregular. 




n. ccrivons 


n. ecrivions 


n. ecrivlmes 






v. ecrivez 


v. ecriviez 


v. ecrivitos 






ils ecrivent 


ils ecrivaient 


ils ecrivirent 


Elire, 4. to 


elisant 


j'elis 


j'elisais 


j'elus 


etecf 


elu, /. e. 


see lire 






Emettre, 4. to emettant 


j'emets 


j'emettais 


j'emis 


emtf jemis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






Emmeubr, 1. to 


emmenant 


j'emmcne 


j'emmenais 


j'emmenai 


take away 


emmene, /. e. 


§ 49, (6) 


see mener 




E.UOUDRE, 4. to 


emoulant 


j'emouds 


j'emoulai3 


j'emoulu3 


s/tarpera 


emoulu, /. e. 


see MOUDRE 






Emouvoir, 3. 


emouvant 


j'emeus 


j'emouvais 


j'emus 


to excite, etc. 


emu, /. e. 


see mouvoir 






Employer, 1. 


employant 


j'emploie 


j'employais 


j'employai 


to employ 


employe, /. e. 


§ 49, (2) 


see APPUYER 




Empreindre, 


empreignant 


j'empreins 


j'empreignais 


j'empreignia 


4. to imprint 


empreint, / e. 


see CEINDRE 







AND UNIPEKSOKAIi VERBS. 



02 



377 



Future. 


Conditional.. 


Impeeative. 


SUBJUNCTIVK 


je detiendrai 


je detiendrais 


detiens 


je detienne 


je detruirai 


je detruirais 


detruis 


je detruise 


je deviendrai 


je deviendrais 


deviens 


je devienne 


je devetirai 


je devetirais 


devets 


je devete 


je dirai 


je dirais 




je dise 


tu diras 


tu dirais 


dis 


tu dises 


il dira 


il dirait 


q. dise 


il dise 


n. dirons 


n. dirions 


disous 


n. disions 


v. direz 


v. diriez 


dites 


v. disiez 


ils diront 


ils diraient 


q. disent 


ils disent 


je discourrai 


je discourrais 


discours 


je discoure 


je disparaitrai 


je disparai- 




je disparaisse 




[trais 


disparais 




je dissoudrai 


je dissoudrais 


dissous 


je dissolve 


je distrairai 


je distrairais 


distrais 


je distraie 


je dormirai 


je dormirais 




je dorme 


tu dormiras 


tu dormirais 


dors 


tu dormes 


il dormira 


il dormirait 


qu'il dorme 


il dorme 


n. dormirons 


n. dormirions 


dormons 


n. dormions 


v. dormirez 


v. dormiriez 


dormez 


v. dormiez 


ils dormiront 


ils dormiraient 


q. dorment 


ils dorment 


il echerra 


il echerrait 






il eclora 


il eclorait 




q. eclose 


j'econduirai 


j'econduirais 


econduis 


j'econduise 


j'ecrirai 


j'ecrirais 




j'ecrive 


tu ecriras 


tu ecrirais 


ecris 


tu eerives 


il ecrira 


il ecrirait 


q. ecrive 


il ecrive 


n. ecrirons 


n. ecririons 


ecrivons 


n. ecrivions 


v. ecrirez 


v. ecririez 


ecrivez 


v. ecriviez 


ils ecriront 


ils ecriraient 


q. ecrivent 


ils ecrivent 


j'elirai 


j'elirais 


elis 


j'elise 


j'emettrai 


j'emettrais 


emets 


j'emette 


j'emmenerai 


j'emmenerais 


emmene 


j'emmene 


j'emoudrai 


j'emoudrais 


emouds 


j'emoule 


j'emouvrai 


j'emouvrais 


emeus 


j'emeuve 


j'emploierai 


j'emploierais 


emploie 


j'emploie 


j'empreindrai 


j'empreindrais 


empreins 


j'empreigne 



Imperfect. 



je detmsse 

je detruisisse 

je devinsse 

je devetisse 

je disse 
tu disses 
ildit 



ils dissent 
je discourusse 



je dormisse 

tu dormisses 

il dormit 

n. dormissions 
dormissiez 
dormissent 

qu'il echut 



tu ecnvisses 
il ecrivit 
n. ecrivissions 
v. ecrivissiez 
ils ecrivissent 



jemisse 

j'emmenasse 

j'emoulusse 

j'emusse 

j'employasse 

j'empreignisse 



378 



IE REGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Exclore, 4. to 

enclose 
EXCOTJRIR, 2. 

to incur 
Exdormir, 2. 

to lull asleep 
Exduire, 4. to 

plaster 

EXFREINDRE, 

4. to infringe 
Exfuir, (s') 2. 

to run away 
Exjoixdre, 4. 

to enjoin 

EXXUYER, (s') 

1. to be weary 
Exquerir, (s') 

2. to inquire 

EXTREIIETTRE, 

(s') 4. to in- 
terpose 

EXTREPREX- 

DRE, 4. to un- 
dertake 

EXTRETEXIR, 

2. to entertain 
Extrevoir, 3. 

to glimpse at 
Exvoyer, 1. to 

send 

aux. avoir 

irregular. 

Eprendre, v s') 

4. to he smit- 
ten 

ESSATER, 1. to 

try 
Eteindre, 4. to 

extinguish 
Etixceler, 1. 

to sparkle 
Etiqueter, 1. 

to label 
Eire, 4. to be 
Etreixdre, 4. 

to press 
Exclure, 4. to 

exclude 

EXTRAIRE, 4. 

to extract 



enclos, /. e. 
encourant 
encouru, /. e. 
endorniant 
endormi, /. e, 
enduisaut 
enduit, /. e. 
enfreignant 
enfreint, /. e. 
s'enfuyant 
enfui, /. e. 
enjoignant 
enjoint, /. e. 
s'ennuyant 
ennuye, /. e. 
s'enquerant 
enquis, /. e. 



;j 'enclos 



yencours 
'see couris 
jj'endors 
• see dormir 
Ij'enduis 
I see coxduire 
Ij'enfreins 
jsee CEIXDRE 
!je m'enfuis 
jsee FtJiR 
!j 'enjoins 
jsee CEIXDRE 
■je m'ennuie 
jsee APPUTER 
je rn'enquiers 
isee ACQUERIR 
s'entremettant je m'entremets 
entremis, /. e. see mettre 



Impeefect. Past Definite. 



J 

j'endormais 
j'enduisais 
j'enfreignais 
a m'enfuyais 
j'enjoignais 



j'encourus 

j'endormis 

j'enduisis 

j'enfreignis 

je m'enfuis 

j'enjoignis 

je m'ennuyai 



jem ennuyais 

§ 49, (2) 
je ni'enqueraisje ni'enquis 

je m'entre- je m'entreniis 
[mettais 



entreprenant j'entreprends 
entrepris, /. e. see prendre 



entretenant 
entretenu,/. < 
entrevoyant 
entrevu, /. e. 
envoyant 
envoye, /. e. 



sVprcnant 
epris, /. e. 

essayant 
essaye, /. e. 
(Jteiguant 
eteint, / e. 
etincelant 
etincele, /. e. 
e'tiquetant 
i ; tiquete, /. e. 
see model 
t ; treignant 
etreint. /. e. 
excluant 
exclu, exclus 
extrayant 
extrait, /. e. 



jj'entretiens 
see texir 
j'entrevois 
'see VOIR 
ij'envoio 
tu envoies 
il envoie 
envoyons 
envoyez 
Us envoient 
je mVprcnds 
see prendre 



J 

see APPUTER 

jVteins 

see CEIXDRE 

j'etin cello 

see APPELER 

j'etiquete 

see ACHETER 

§ 47, (5) 
j'etreins 
see CEIXDRE 
j'exclus 
see COXCLERE 
j'extrais 
see trake 



j'entreprenais 

j'entretenais 

j'entrevoyais 

j'envoyais 
tu envoyais 
il envoyait 
n. envoyions 
v. envoyiez 
ils envoj^aient 
jo niY-prenais 

j'essayais 

§ 49, (2) 

j'eteignais 

j'etinccllo 

| 49, (4) 
j'etiquetais 

" 49, (5) 

j'etreignais 

j'excluais 

j'extrayais 



j 'entrepris 

j'entretins 

j'entrevis 

j'envoyai 
tu envoyas 
il envoya 
n. envoyames 
v. envoyates 
ils envoycrcnt 
je mVpris 

j'essayai 
j't'teignis 
j'etincelai 
j'etiquetai 

j'e'treignis 
j'exclus 



AND UNIPEESONAL VERB! 



62. 



379 



j'enclorai 

j'encourrai 

j'endormirai 

j'enduirai 

j'enfreindrai 

je m'enfuirai 

j'enjoindrai 

je m'ennuierai 

je ni'enquerrai 

je m'entre- 

[mettrai 

j'entrepren- 

[drai 

j'entretiendrai 

j'entreverrai 

j'enverrai 
tu enverras 
il enverra 
n. enverrons 
v. enverrez 
ils enverront 
je m'epren- 

[drai 

j'essaierai 

j'eteindrai 

j'etincellerai 

j'etiqueterai 

j'etreindrai 

j'exelurai 

j'extrairai 



Conditional. 



j'enclorais 
j'encourrais 
j'endormirais 
j'enduirais 
j'enfrein drais 
je ni'enfuirais 
j'enjoin drais 

je m'ennuie- 
[rais 

je ni'enquer 

[rais 

je m'entre- 
[mettrais 

j'entrepren- 

[drais 

j'entretien- 

[drais 
j'entreverrais 

j'eaverrais 
tu enverrais 
il enverrait 
n. enverrions 

enverriez 
ils enverraient 
je m'epren 

[drais 

j'essaierais 

j'eteindrais 

j'etineellerais 

j'etiqueterais 

ij'etreindrais 

j'exclurais 

j'extrairais 



Imperative. 



encours 

endors 

enduis 

enfreins 

enfuis-toi 

enjoins 

ennuie-toi 

enquiers-toi 

entreniets-toi 

entreprends 

entretiens 
entrevois 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



q. 

envoyons 
envoyez 
q. envoient 

eprends-toi 



etiquete 

etreins 
exclus 



j'encoure 

j'endorme 

j'enduise 

j'enfreigne 

je m'enfuie 

j'enjoigne 

je m'ennuie 

je m'enquiere 

je m'entre- 

[mette 

j'entreprenne 

j'entretienne 

j'entrevoie 

j'envoie 
tu envoies 
il envoie 
n. envoyions 
v. envoyiez 
ils envoient 
je m'eprenne 

j'eteigne 

j'etincello 

j'etiquete 



j encourusse 

j'endormisse 

j'enduisisse 

j'enfreignisse 

je m'enfuisse 

j'enjoignisse 

je m'ennuyas- 
[se 
je m'enquisse 

je m'entre- 

[misse 

j'entreprisse 

j'entretinsse 

j'entrevisse 

j'envoyasse 
tu envoyasses 
il envoyat 
n.envoyassions 
envoyassiez 
ils envoyassent 
je m'eprisse 



'exclue 
'extraie 



j'etreignis 



380 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Paeticiples. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite. 


Faillir, 2. to faillissant 


je faillis 


je faillissais 


je faillis 


fail 


failli 


now regular 


see finir, § 50 




(New form) 


(Bescherelle) 








(Old form, 


faillant 


je faux 


je faillais 


je faillis 


still used) 


failli 


tu faux 


tu faillais 


tu faillis 


irregular. 


(Academie) 


il faut 


il faillait 


il faillit 






n. faillons 


n. faillions 


n. faillimes 






v. faillez 


v. failliez 


v. faillites 






il faillent 


ils faillaient 


ils faillirent 


Faire, 4. to do, 


faisant 1 


je fais 


je faisais 1 


je fis 


to make 


fait, /. e. 


tu fais 


tu faisais 


tu fis 


aux. avoir 




il fait 


il faisait 


il fit 


irregular. 




n. faisons" 


n. faisions 


n. f irnes 






v. faites 


v. faisiez 


v. f itea 






ils font 


ils faisaient 


ils firent 


Falloir, 3. to 


fallant 


il faut 


il fallait 


il faUut 


be necessary 


fallu 


unipersonal. 






Feindre, 4. to 


feignant 


je feins 


je fcignais 


je feignis 


feign 


feint, /. e. 


see ceindre 






FlCELER, 1. to 


ficelant 


je ficelle 


je ficelais 


jo ficelai 


cord 


ficek ; , / e. 


see appeler 


§ 49.. (4) 




Frire, 4. to 




je fris 






Ay 


frit, /. e. 


tu fris 






defective. 




il frit 






FuiR, 2. to 


fuyant 


je fuis 


je fuyais 


je fuia 


flee 


fui 


tu fuis 


tu fuyais 


tu fuis 


aux. avoir 




il fuit 


il fuyait 


il fuit 


irregular. 




n. fuyons 


n. fuyions 


n. fuimes 






v. fuyez 


r. fuyicz 


v. fuites 






ils fuieut 


ils fu}-aient 


ils fuirent 


Geler, 1. to 


gelant 


il gelo 


il gelait 


il gela 


freeze, unip. 


gci.;./. c. 








Gksir, 2. to lie 


gisant 




je gisais 




defective. 




ilgit 
n. gisons 
v. gisez 
ils gisent 


tu gisais 
il gisait 
n. gisions 
v. gisicz 
ils gisaient 




GllASSETER, ]. 


grasseyant 


je grasseio 


je grasseyais 


je grasseyai 


to lisp 


grasscye 


see APPUYER 


§'49, (2) 




Grkler, 1. to 


grelant 


il grele 


il grelait 


il grela 


hail. unip. 


grele 








ClM.SU.LER, 1. 


gresEHant 


il gresille 


il gresillait 


il gresilla 


in sleet, unip. 


gresille 








Hair, 2. to 


haissant 


je hais 


je hai'ssais 


je hai's 


hate 


hai, /. e. 


tu hais 


tu hai'ssais 


tu hais 


aux. avoir 




il hart 


il haissait 


il halt 


irregular. 




n. bai'ssons 


n. hai'ssions 


n. hai'mes 






v. hai'ssez 


v. hai'psiez 


v. hai'tes 






i. haissent 


ils haissaient 


ils hai'rent 


Harceler, 1. 


harcelant 


je harcele 


jo harcelais 


jo harcelai 


to torment 


harcele,/. e. 


§ 49, (5) 







Seo note, page 179. 



AND UNIPEESONAL VERBS. — § 62. 381 






FUTUBE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je faillirai 


je Mllirais 


faillis 


je faillisse 


je faillisse 


je faudrai 


je faudrais 




je faille 


je faillisse 


tu faudras 


tu faudrais 




etc. 


etc. 


il faudra 


il faudrait 








n. faudrons 


n. faudrions 








t. faudrez 


v. faudriez 








ils faudront 


ils faudraient 








je ferai 


je ferais 




je fasse 


je fisse 


tu feras 


tu ferais 


fais 


tu fasses 


tu fisses 


il fera 


il ferait 


q. fasse 


il fasse 


ilfit 


n. ferons 


n. ferions 


faisons 


n. fassions 


n. fissions 


V, ferez 


v. feriez 


faites 


v. fassiez 


v. fissiez 


ils feront 


ils feraient 


q. fassent 


ils fassent 


ils fissent 


il faudra 


il faudrait 


q. faille 


q. faille 


q. fallut 


je feindrai 


je feindrais 


feins 


je feigne 


je feignisse 


je ficellerai 


je ficellerais 


ficelle 


je ficelle 


je ficelasse 


je frirai 


je frirais 








tu friras 


tu frirais 


fris 






il frira, etc. 


il frirait, etc. 








je fuirai 


je fuirais 




je fuie 


je fuisse 


tu fuiras 


tu fuirais 


fuis 


tu fuies 


tu fuisses 


il fuira 


il fuirait 


q. fuie 


il fuie 


it fuit 


n. fuirons 


n. fuirions 


fuyons 


n. fuyions 


n. fuissions 


v. fuirez 


v. fuiriez 


fuyez 


v. fuyiez 


v. fuissiez 


ils fuiront 


ils fuiraient 


q. fuient 


ils fuient 


ils fuisse nt 


il gelera 


il gelerait 


qu'il gele 


qu'il gele 


q. geldt 


je grasseierai 


je grasseierais 


grasseie 


je grasseie 


je grasseyasse 


il grelera 


il grelerait 


q. grele 


qu'il grele 


qu'il grelat 


il gresillera 


il gresillerait 


q. gresille 


q. gresille 


q. gresillat 


je hairai 


je hairais 




je hai'sse 


je haisse 


tu hairas 


tu hairais 


hais 


tu haisses 


tu haisses 


il haira 


il hairait 


q. haisse 


il haisse 


il hait 


n. hairons 


n. hairions 


hai'ssons 


n. haissions 


n. haissions 


v. hai'rez 


v. hairiez 


haissez 


v. haissiez 


v. haissiez 


ils hairont 


ils hairaient 


q. haissent 


ils haissent 


ils haissent 


je harcelerai 


je harcelerais 


harcele 


je harcele 


je harcelasse 



382 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR, 



Infinitive. 


Paeticipleb. 


Indicative. 


Impeefect. 


Past Definite. 


Importer, 1. 


important 


il importe 


il importait 


il importa 


to matter 


imports 


it matters 






unipersonal. 










Induire, 4. to 


induisant 


j'induig 


j'induisais 


j'induisis 


induce 


induit, /. e. 


see conduire 






Inscrire, 4. to 


inscrivant 


j'inscris 


j'inscrivais 


j'inscrrvis 


inscribe 


inscrit, /. e. 


see ecrire 






Instruire, 4. 


instruisant 


j'instrais 


j'instruisais 


j'instruisis 


to instruct 


instruit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Interdire, 4. 


inter clisant 


j'interdis 


j'interdisais 


j'interdis 


to interdict 


interdit, /. e. 


see contredire 






Interroiipre, 


interrompant 


j'interromps 


j'interrompais 


j'interrompis 


4. to interrupt 


interrompu/.e. 


see ROMPRE 






Intervener, 2. 


intervenant 


j'interviens 


j'intervenais 


j'intervins 


to intervene 


intervenu,/. e. 


see tenir 






Introduire, 4. 


introduisant 


j'introduis 


j'introduisais 


j'introduisis 


to introduce 


iatroduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Jeter, 1. to 


jetant 


je jette 


je jetais 


je jetai 


throw 


jete, /. e. 


tu jettes 


tu jetais 


tu jetas 


aux. avoir 




il jette 


il jetait 


il jeta 


peculiar. 




n. jetons 


n. jetions 


n. jetilmes 


§ 49, (4.) 




v. jetez 


v. jetiez 


v. jotates 






Ds jettent 


ils jetaieut 


ils jeterent 


JOINDRE, 4 to 


joignant 


je joins 


je joignais 


je joignis 


join 


joint, f. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Lire, 4. to 


lisant 


je lis 


je lisais 


je lus 


read 


lu, /. e. 


tu lis 


tu lisais 


tu lus 


aux. avoir 




il lit 


il lisait 


illut 


irregular. 




nous lisons 


n. lisions 


n. lumes 






vous lisez 


v. lisiez 


v. lutes 






ils lisent 


ils lisaient 


ils lurent 


Ltjire, 4. to 


luisant 


je luis 


je luisais 




shine 


lui 


see CONDUIRE 






Maintenttr, 2. 


maintenant 


je maintiens 


je maintenais 


je maintins 


to maintain 


maintenu, / e. 


see tenir 






Malfaire, 4. 


malfaisant 


seldom 


used except 


in the 


to do wrong 


malfait, /. o. 








Maudire, 4. to 


maudissant 


je maudis 


je maudissais 


jo maudis 


curse 


maudit, f. e. 


tu maudis 


tu maudissais 


like dire 


aux. avoir 




il maudit 


il maudissait 




irregular. 




n. maudissons 
v. maudissez 
ils maudissent 


n. maudissions 
v. maudissiez 
i. maudissaient 




Meconnaitre, 


meconnaissant 


je meconnais 


je meconnais- 


je meconnus 


4. to disown 


meconnu, /. e. 


see connaItre 


[sais 




Mkdire, 4. to 


medisaut 


je medis 


je medisais 


je medis 


slander 


medit 


See CONTREDIRE 






Mefaire, 4. to 


mefaisant 


je mefais 


je mefaisais 


je mens 


do wrong 


mefait 


see faire 






Memer, 1. to 


raenaut 


je mene 


je menais 


je menai 


lead, tdlce 


mene, /. e. 








Mentir, 2. to 


mentant 


je mens 


je mentais 


je mentis 


lie 


menti 


see sentir 







AND XJNIPEESOKAL YEE: 



G2. 



383 



il importera 

j'induirai 

j'inscrirai 

j'instruirai 

j'interdirai 

j'interroniprai 

j'interviendrai 

j'introduirai ' 

je jetterai 
tu jetteras 
il jettera 
n. jetterons 
v. jetterez 
ils jetteront 
je joindrai 

je lirai 
tu liras 
illira 
n. lirons 
v. lirez 
ils liront 
je luirai 

je maintien- 

[drai 
tenses 

je maudirai 
like dike 



je meconnai- 

[trai 
je medirai 



Conditional. 



je menerai 
je mentirai 



il importerait 



j'induirais 
j'inscrirais 
j'instruirais 
j'interdirais 

j'interrom- 

[prais 
j'intervien- 

[drais 
j'introduirais 

je jetterais 
tu jetterais 
il jetterait 
n. jetterions 
v. jetteriez 
ils jetteraient 
je joindrais 

je lirais 
tu lirais 
il lirait 
n. lirions 
v. liriez 
ils liraient 
je luirais 

je maintien- 

[drais 
given 

maudirais 
like dike 



je meconnai- 

[trais 
je medirais 

je meferais 

je minerals 

je mentirais 



Impeeative. 



q. importe 

induis 

inscris 

instruis 

interdis 

interromps 

interviens 

introduis 

jette 
q. jette 

jetOD.3 

jetez 
q. jettent 

joins 



q. use 
lisons 
lisez 
q. lisent 



mamtiens 
here 



q. importe 



j'induise 
j'inscriTe 
j'instruise 



maudissez 
q. maudissent 

meconnais 

medis 

mefais 



3 

j'interrompe 

j'intervienne 

j'introduise 

je jette 
tu jettes 
il jette 
n. jetions 
v. jetiez 
ils jettent 
je joigne 

je lise 
tu lises 
il lise 
n. lisions 
v. lisiez 
ils lisent 
je luise 

je maintienne 



je maudisse 
tu maudisses 
il maudisse 



v. maudissiez 
ils maudissent 



je medise 
je mefasse 
je mene 
je mente 



q. importat 



j'induisisse 



j'interdisse 

j'interromp- 

[isse 
j'intervinsse 

j'introduisisse 

je jetasse 
tu jetasses 
il jetat 
n. jetassions 
v. jetassiez 
ils jetassent 
je joignisse 

je lusse 
tu lusses 
il lut 
n. lussions 
v. lussiez 
ils lussent 



je maudisse 
:dire 



je meconnusse 
je medisse 
je merisse 
je menasse 
je mentisse 



384 IEEEGIJLAE, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR, 



Infinitive. 


Pabticiples. 


Indicative. 


Impeefect. 


Past Definite. 


Meprexdre,4. 


se meprenant 


j. m. meprends 


j. me mepre- 


ie me mepris 


(se) to mis- 


mepris,/. e. 


see prexdre 


[nais 




take, ref. 










Hetire, 4. to 


mettant 


je mets 


je mettais 


je mis 


put 


mis, /. e. 


tu mets 


tu mettais 


tu mia 


aux. avoir 




il met 


il mettait 


il mit 


irregular. 




n. mettons 


n. mettions 


n. mimes 






v. mettez 


v. mettiez 


v. mites 






ils mettent 


ils mettaient 


ils mirer.t 


Moudre, 4. to 


moulant 


ie mouds 


je moulais 


je moulus 


grind 


moulu, /. e. 


tu mouds 


tu moulais 


tu moulua 


aux. avoir 




il moud 


il moulait 


il moulut 


irregular. 




n. moulons 


n. moulions 


n. moulumes 






v. moulez 


v. mouliez 


v. moulutes 






ils moulent 


ils moulaient 


ils moulurent 


Mourir, 2. to 


mourant 


je meurs 


je mourais 


je mourus 


die 


mort, /. e. 


tu meurs 


tu mourais 


tu mourus 


aux. etre 




il meurt 


il mourait 


il mourut 


irregular. 




n. mourons 


n. mourions 


n. mourumea 






v. mourez 


v. mouriez 


v. mourutes 






ils meurent 


ils mouraient 


ils moururent 


MouvoiR, 3. to 


mouvant 


je meus 


je mouvais 


je mua 


move 


mu,/. e. 


tu meua 


tu mouvais 


tu mua 


aux. avoir 




il meut 


il mouvait 


il mut 


irregular. 




n. mouvons 


n. mouvions 


n. mumea 






v. mouvez 


v. mouviez 


v. mutea 






ils meuvent 


ils mouvaient 


ils murent 


MocvoiR, (se) 


se mouvant 


je me meus 


j. me mouvais 


je me mua 


3. to move 


mu, /. e. 


see jiouvoir 






reflective. 










NArTBE, 4. to 


naissant 


je nais 


je naissais 


je naquia 


be born 


ne,/. e. 


tu nais 


tu naissais 


tu naquia 


aux etre 




il nait 


il naissait 


il naquit 


irregular. 




n. naissons 


n. naissions 


n. naquimes 






v. naissez 


v. naissiez 


v. naquites 






ils naissent 


ils naissaient 


ils naquirent 


Negliger, 1. 


negligeant 


je neglige 


je negligeais 


je negligeai 


to neglect 


neglige, /. e. 


§ 49, (1.) 






Neiger, 1. to 


neigeant 


il neige 


il neigeait 


il neigea 


snow. unip. 


neige 








XlVELER, 1. to 


nivelant 


je nivelle 


je nivelais 


je nivelai 


level 


nivele, /. e. 


see appeler 


§ 49, (4) 




Kuire, 4. to in- 


nuisant 


je nuis 


je nuisaia 


je nuisis 


jure 


nui 


see coxduire 






Obtenir, 2. to 


obtenant 


j'obtiens 


j'obtenaia 


j'obtina 


obtain 


obtenu, /. e. 


see texir 






Offrir, 2. to 


offrant 


j'offre 


j'onxaia 


j'offris 


offer 


offert, / e. 


see ouyrir 






Oindre, 4. to 


oipnaut 


j'oina 


j'oignaia 


j'oignia 


anoint 


oint 


see CETXDRE 






Omettre, 4. to 


omettant 


j'omets 


j'omettaia 


j'omia 


mit 


omis, /. e. 


seeMETTBE 






T1R, 2. to 




j'ouis 






. zar. def. 


oui, /. e. 


il ouit 







AND UNIPEESONAL VERBS. 



62. 



385 



jo me mepren 
[drai 

je mettrai 
tu niettrag 
il mettra 
n. metfcrona 
v. mettrez 
ils mettrout 
je moudrai 
tu moudraa 
il moudra 
n. moudrous 
v. moudrez 
ils moudront 
je mourrai 
tu mo arras 
il mourra 
n. mourrong 
v. mourrez 
ils mourront 
je rnouvrai 
tu mouvras 
il mouvra 
n. mouvrons 
v. mouvrez 
ils mouvront 
je me rnouvrai 



Conditional. 



je me mepren 
[drais 



je naitrai 
tu naitras 
il naitra 
n. naitroas 
v. naitrez 
ils naitront 
je negligerai 

il neigera 

je nivellerai 

je nuirai 

j'obtiendrai 

j'ofirirai 

j'oindrai 

j'omettrai 



mettraig 
tu mettrais 
il inettrait 
n. mettrions 

mettriez 
ils mettraient 
je moudrais 
tu moudrais 
il moudrait 
u. moudrions 
v. moudriez 
ils moudraient 
je mourrais 
tu mourrais 
il mourrait 
n. mourrions 
v. mourriez 
ils mourraient 
je mouvrais 
tu mouvrais 
il mouvrait 
u. mouvrions 
v. mouvriez 
ils mouvraient 
je me mouv- 
[rais 

je naitrais 
tu naitrais 
il naitrait 

naitrions 

naitriez 
ils naitraient 
je negligeraig 

il neigerait 

je nivellerais 

je nuirais 

j'obtiendrais 

j'ofFrirais 

j'oindrais 

j'omettrais 



meprends-toi 

mets 
q. mette 
mettons 
mettez 
q. mettent 

mouds 
qu'il moule 
moulons 
moulez 
. moulent 

meurs 
q. meure 
mourons 
mourez 
q. meurent 

meus 
q. meuve 
mouvons 
mouvez 
q. meuvent 

.s-toi 



q. naissent 

neglige 
q. neige 



nivelle . 

nuis 

obtiens 

offre 

oing 



SuttJUNCTIVE. 



j. me mepren- 
[ne 

je mette 
tu mettes 
il mette 
n. mettions 
v. mettiez 
ils mettent 
je moule 
tu moules 
il moule 
n. moulions 

mouliez 

moulent 
je meure 
tu meures 
il meure 
n. mourions 

mouriez 
ils meurent 
je meuve 
tu meuves 
il meuve 

mouvioDS 

mouviez 
ils meuvent 
je me : 



je me mepns- 
[se 

je misse 
tu misses 
il mit 

n. missions 
v. missiez 
ils missent 
■je moulusse 
tu moulusses 
il moulut 
n. moulussions 
v moulussiez 
ils moulussent 
je mourusse 
tu mourusses 
il mourut 
n. mourussiong 
v. mourussiez 
ils mourussent 
je musse 
tu musses 
ilmut 

mussions 
v. mussiez 
ils mussent 
je me musse 



je naisse 
tu naisses 
il naisse 
n. naissions 
v. naissiez 
ils naissent 
je neglige 


je naquisse 
tu naquisses 
il naquit 
n. naquissions 
v. naquissiez 
ils naquissent 
je negligeasse 


qu'il neige 


q. neigeat 


|e nivelle 


je nivelasse 


ie nuise 


je nuisisse 


'obtienne 


j'obtinsse 


'onxe 


j'offrisse 


'oigne 


i'oignisse 


'omette 


'omisse 



il ouit 



388 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


PA3TICIFLES. 


Indicative. 


I.-JPESFEOT. 


Past Definite. 


Oevrir, 2. to 


ouvrant 


j'ouvre 


j'ouvrais 


j'ouvris 


open 


ouvert, /. e. 


tu ouvres 


tu ouvrais 


tu ouvris 


aux. avoir 




il ouvre 


il ouvrait 


il ouvrit 


irregular. 




n. ouvrons 


n. ouvrions 


n. ouvrimes 






v. ouvrez 


v. ouvriez 


v. ouvrites 






ils ouvrent 


ils ouvraient 


ils ouvrirent 


Paitre, 4. to 


paissant 


je pais 


je paissais 




graze 


pu 


tu pais 


tu paissais 




aux. avoir 




ilpait 


il paissait 




defective. 




n. paissons 
v. paissez 
ils paissent 


n. paissions 
v. paissiez 
ils paissaient 




Parfaire, 4. to 


parfaisant 


je parfais 


je parfaisais 


je parfis 


complete 


parfait, /. e. 


see faire 


seldom used 




Paraitre, 4 


paraissant 


je parais 


je paraissais 


je paras 


to appear 


paru 


see COXNA1TRE 






Parcourie, 2.|pareourant 


je parcours 


je parcourais 


je parcourus 


to go through parcouru, /. e. 


see courir 






Partir, 2. to partant 


je pars 


je partais 


je partis 


depart ! parti, /. e. 


see SENTTR 






Parvexir, 2. iparvenant 


je parviens 


je parvenais 


je purvins 


to succeed, &c. 'parvenu, /. e. 


see texir 






Pater, 1. to ipayant 


je paie 


je pavais 


je payai 


pay P a ye, /• e. 


see apptjter 


§ 49, (2) 




Peixdre, 4. to peignant 


je peins 


je peignais 


je peignis 


paint jpeint, /. e. 


see ceixdre 






Peler, 1. to pelant 


je pele 


je pelais 


je pelai 


peel pele, /. e. 


§ 49, (4) 






Permettre, 4. permettant 


je permets 


je pennettais 


je permis 


to permit ipermis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






Plaixdre, 4. plaignant 


je plains 


je plaignais 


je plaignis 


to pity plaint, / e. 


see ceixdre 






Plaixdre, (se) se plaignant 


je me plains 


je me plai- 


je me plaignis 


4.to complain, plaint, /. e. 




[gnais 




reflective. 










Plaire, 4. to 


plaisant 


je plais 


je plaisais 


je plus 


phase 


plu 


tu plais 


tu plaisais 


tu plus 


aux. avoir 




il plait 


il plaisait 


il plut 


irregular. 




n. plaisons 


n. plaisions 


n. plumes 






v. plaisez 


v. plaisiez 


v. pi Cites 






ils plaisent 


ils plaisaient 


ils plurent 


Pleuvoir, 3. 


pleuvant 


il pleut 


il pleuvait 


il plut 


to rain, unip.lplu 








Poixdre, 4 to\ 


il point 






daivn. def. 








PouRSUlVRE,4.'poursuivant 


je poursuis 


je poursuivais 


je poursuivis 


to pursue |poursuivi, /. e. 


see scivre 






POUUVOIR, 3. 


pourvoyant 


je pourvois 


je pourvoyais 


je pourvus 


to provide 


pourvu,/. e. 


tu pourvois 


tu pourvoyais 


tu pourvus 


aux. avoir 




il pourvoit 


il pourvoyait 


il pourvut 


irregular. 




n. pourvoyons 


n. pourvoyions 


n. pourvumes 






v. pourvoyez 


v. pourvoyiez 


v. pourvutes 






ils pourvoient 


i. pourvoyaient 


ils pourvurent 



AND UNIPERSONAL VEKES, 



§ 62. 



387 



FUTUEE. 


Conditional. 


Impeeative. 


Subjunctive. 


Impebfect. 


j'ouvrirai 


j'ouvrirais 




j 'ouvre 


j'ouvrisse 


tu ouvriras 


tu ouvrirais 


ouvre 


tu ouvres 


tu ouvrisses 


il ouvrira 


il ouvrirait 


q. ouvre 


il ouvre 


il ouvrit 


n. ouvrirons 


n. ouvririons 


ouvrons 


n. ouvrions 


n. ouvrissions 


v. ouvrirez 


v. ouvrii'iez 


ouvrez 


v. ouvriez 


v. ouvrissiez 


ils ouvriront 


ils ouvriraient 


q. ouvrent 


ils ouvrent 


ils ouvrissent 


je paitrai 


je paitrais 




je paisse 




tu paitras 


tu paitrais 


pais 


tu paisses 




il paitra 


il paitrait 


q. paisse 


il paisse 




n. paitrons 


n. paitrions 


paissons 


n. paissions 




v. paitrez 


v. paitriez 


paissez 


v. paissiez 




ils paitront 


ils paitraient 


q. paissent 


ils paissent 




je parferai 


je parferais 


parfais 


je parfasse 
obsolete 


je parfisse 


je paraitrai 


je paraitrais 


parais 


je paraisse 


je parusse 


je parcourrai 


je parcourrais 


parcours 


je parcoure 


je parcourusse 


je partirai 


je partirais 


pars 


je parte 


je partisse 


je parviendrai 


je parviendrai s 


je parvienne 


je parvinsse 






parviens 






je paierai 


je paierais 


paie 


je paie 


je payasse 


je peindrai 


je peindrais 


peins 


je peigne 


je peignisse 


je pelerai 


je pelerais 


pele 


je pele 


je pelasse 


je permettrai 


je permettrais 


permets 


je permette 


je permisse 


je plaindrai 


je plaindrais 


plains 


je plaigne 


je plaignisse 


je me plain- 


je rne plain- 




je*me plaigne 


je me plai- 


[drai 


[drais 


plains-toi 




[gnisse 


je plairai 


je plairais 




je plaise 


je plusse 


tu plairas 


tu plairais 


plais 


tu plaises 


tu plusses 


il plaira 


il plairait 


q. plaise 


il plaise 


ilplut 


n. plairous 


a. plairions 


plaisons 


n. plaisions 


n. plussiona 


v. plairez 


v. plairiez 


plaisez 


v. plaisiez 


v. plussiez 


ils plaironfc 


ils plairaieut 


q. plaisent 


ils plaisent 


ils plussent 


il pleuvra 


il pleuvrait 


q. pleuve 


q. pleuve 


q. plut 


il poindra 


il poindrait 








je poursuivrai 


je poursuivrais 


poursuis 


je poursuive 


je poursuivisse 


je pourvoirai 


je pourvoirais 




je pourvoie 


je pourvusse 


tu pourvoiras 


tu pourvoirais 


pourvois 


tu pourvoies 


tu pourvusses 


il pourvoira 


il pourvoirait 


q. pourvoie 


il pourvoie 


il pourvut 


n. pourvoirons 


n. pourvoirions 


pourvoyons 


n. pourvoyions 


n. pourvussions 


v. pourvoirez 


v. pourvoiriez 


pourvoyez 


v. pourvoyiez 


v. pourvussiez 


ils pourvoiront 


i. pourvoiraient 


q. pourvoient 


ils pourvoient 


ils pourvussent 



388 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR, 



Pourvoir, (se) 

3. to provide 
Pouvoir, 3. to 

be able 

aux. avoir 

irregular. 



Predire, 4. 

predict 
Prendre, 4 to 

take 

aux. avoir 

irregular. 



Prescrire, 4. 

to prescribe 
Pressentir, 2. 

to foresee 
PRiiVALOIR, 3. 

to prevail 
PRliVENlR, 2. 

to prevent 
Prkvoir, 3. to 

foresee 
Produire, 4. 

to produci 
Projeter, 1. 

to project 
PROMEriRE, 4 

to promise 
Projiouyoir, 

3. to promote 
Proscribe, 4. 

to proscribe 
Provenir, 2. 

to proceed 
QvEHiR,to fetch 
Kabattre, 4. 

to abate 
Racheter, 1. 

to buy again 
Rappeler, 1. 

to recall 
Rapprendre, 
A.to learn again 

RATrEINDRE,4. 

to reach again 
Rebattre, 4. 

to beat again 
Reoonduire, 

4. to conduct 
again 



PaBTICII'LES. 



se pourvoyant !je me pour- 



pourvu, / 

pouvant 

pu 



predisant 
predit, /. < 
prenant 
pris, f. e. 



prescrivant 
prescrit, /. e. 
pressentant 
pressenli,/. e 
prevalant 
prevalu 
prevenant 
prevenu,/. e. 
prevoyant 
prevu, / e. 
produisant 
produit, /. e. 
projetant 
projete, /. e. 
promettant 
promia, f. e. 
promouvant 
promu, /. e. 
proscrivant 
proscrit, /. e. 
provenant 
provenu, /. o. 
only use< 
rabattaut 
rabattu, / e. 
rachetaut 
rachete, / e. 
rappelant 
rappele, /. e. 
rapprenant 
rappris, /. o. 
ratteignant 
ratteint, /. e. 
rebattant 
rebattu, /. e. 
reconduisant 
reconduit, /. e 



[vois 
je puis 
tu peux 
il peut 
n. pouvona 
v. pouvez 
ils peuvent 
je predis 
see contredire 
je prends 
tu prends 
il prend 
u. prenons 
v. prenez 
ils prennent 
je prescris 
see ecrire 
je pressens 
see sentir 
je prevaux 
see valoir 
je previens 
see tenir 
je pre vois 
like voir 
je produis 
see CONDUIRE 
je projetto 
see JETER 
je promets 
see JIETTRE 
je promeus 
see mouvoir 
je proscris 
see ecrire 
je proviens 

in the infinitive 
je rabats 

see BATTRE 

je rachete 

ee ACHETER 
je rappelle 
see APPELER 
je rapprends 

je ratteins 

je rebats 

see BATTRE 

je reconduis 

CONDUIRE 



je me pour- 

[voyais 
je pouvais 
tu pouvais 
il pouvait 
n. pouvions 
v. pouviez 
ils pouvaient 
je predisais 

je prenais 
tu prenais 
il prenait 
n. prenions 
v. preniez 
ils prenaient 
je prescrivais 

je pressentais 

je prevalais 

je prevenais 

je prevoyais 
like voir 
je produisais 

jo projetais 

§ -19, (4) 

je promettais 

jo promouvais 

je jiroscrivais 

je provenais 

except in the 
je rabattais 

) rachetais 

§ 49, (5.) 
jo rappelais 

§ 49, (4.) 
jo rappronais 

je ratteignais 

jo rebattais 

je recondui- 

[sais 



Past Definite. 



je me pourvus 

je pus 
tupus 
il put 
n, pumes 
v. putes 
ils purent 
je predis 

je pris 
tu pris 
il prit 
n. primes 
v. prites 
ils prirent 
je prescrivis 

je pressentis 

je prevalus 

je previns 

je previs 
like voir 
je produisis 

je projetai 

je promis 

je promus 

je proscrivis 

je provins 

composition of 
je rabattis 

je rachetai 

je rappelai 

je rappris 

je ratteignis 

rebattis 

je reconduisia 



AND UNIPEKSONAL VERBS. § 62. 



389 



FUTUBE. 


Conditional. 
je me pour- 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Imperfect. 


je rne pour- 




je me pour- 


je me pour- 


[voirai 


[voirais 


pourvois-toi 


[voie 


[vusse 


je pourrai 


je pourrais 




je puisse 


je pusse 


ta pourras 


tu pourrais 




tu puisses 


tu pusses 


il pourra 


il pourrait 




11 puisse 


ilput 


n. pourrons 


n. pourrions 




n. puissious 


n. pussions 


v. pourrez 


v. pourriez 




v. puissiez 


v. pussiez 


ils pourront 


ils pourraient 




ils puissent 


ils pussent 


je predirai 


je predirais 


predis 


je predise 


je predisso 


je prendrai 


je prendrais 




je prenne 


je prisses 


tu prendras 


tu prendrais 


prends 


tu prennes 


tu prisses 


il prendra 


il prendrait 


q. prenne 


il prenne 


il prifc 


n. prendrons 


n. preudrions 


prenons 


n. prenions 


n. prissions 


v. prendrez 


v. prendriez 


prenez 


v. preniez 


v. prissiez 


ils prendront 


ils prendraient 


q. prennent 


ils prennent 


ils prissent 


je prescrirai 


je prescrirais 


prescris 


jo prescrive 


je prescrivisso 


je pressentirai 


je pressenti- 

[rais 




je pressento 


je pressentisse 


je prevaudrai 


je prevaudrais 


prevaux 


je prevale 


je prevalusse 


je previendrai 


je previen- 

[drais 


previena 


je previenne 


je previnsse 


je prevoirai 


je prevoirais 




je prevoie 


je previsse 


like pourvoir 


like pourvoir 


prevois 


like voir 


like toir 


je produirai 


je produirais 


produis 


je produise 


je produisisse 


je projetterai 


je projetterais 


projette 


je projette 


je projetasse 


je promettrai 


je promettrais 


promets 


je promette 


je promisse 


je promouvrai 


je promou- 

[vrais 


promeus 


je promeuve 


je promusse 


je proscrirai 


je proscrirais 


proscris 


je proscrive 


je proscrivisse 


jo proviendrai 


jo provien- 

[drais 


proviens 


je provienne 


je provinsse 


other verbs 










je rabattrai 


jo rabattrais 


rabats 


je rabatte 


je rabattisse 


je racheterai 


je racheteraia 


rachete 


je rachete 


je rachetasse 


je rappellerai 


je rappellerais 


rappelle 


je rappelle 


je rappelasse 


je rapprendrai 


je rappren- 

[drais 


rapprends 


je rapprenne 


je rapprisse 


je ratteindrai 


je ratteindrais 


ratteins 


je ratteigne 


je ratteignisse 


je rebattrai 


je rebattrais 


rebats 


je rebatte 


je rebattisse 


je reconduirai 


je recondui- 
[rais 


reconduis 


je reconduise 


je recondui- 
[sisse 



390 IEEEGTJXAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR, 



Infinitive. 


Paeticiples. 


Indicative. 


Impebfect. 


Past Definite. 


Eeconnaitre, 


reconnaissant 


je reconnais 


je reconnais- 


je reconnus 


4. to recognize 


reconnu, /. e. 


see CONNA1TRE 


[sais 




Eeconquerir, 


reconquerant 


je reconquiers 


je reconque- 


je reconquis 


2. to conquer 


reconquis, /. e. 


see acquerir 


[rais 




again 










Eeconstruire 


reconstruisant 


je reconstruis 


je reconstrui- 


je reconstrui- 


4. to recon- 


reconstruit,/e. 


see CONDUIRE 


[sais 


[sis 


struct 










Eecoddre, 4. 


recousant 


je recouds 


je recousais 


je recousis 


to sew again 


recousu, /. e. 








Eecourir, 2. 


recourant 


je recours 


je recourais 


je recounts 


to have re- 


recouru 


see courir 






course 










Eecouvrir, 2. 


recouvrant 


je recouvre 
see ouvrir 


je recouvrais 


je recouvris 


to cover again 


recouvert, /. e. 






Eecueillir, 2. 


recueillant 


je reeueille 


je recueillais 


je recueillia 


to reap 


recueilli, /. e. 


see CUEILLIR 






Eedire, 4. io 


redisant 


je redis 


je redisais 


je redis 


say again 


redit, /. o. 


see DIRE 






Redutre, 4. to 


reduisant 


je reduis 


je reduisais 


je reduisis 


reduce 


reduit,/. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Eefaire, 4. to 


refaisant 


je refais 


je refaisais 


je refis 


make again 


refait, / c. 


see faire 






Rejoindre, 4. 


rejoignant 


je rejoins 


je rejoignais 


je rejoignis 


to rejoin 


rejoint, /. e. 


see CEINDRE 






Eelire, 4. to 


relisant 


je relis 


je relisais 


je relua 


read again 


relu, /. c. 


see lire 






Eeluire, 4. to 


reluisant 


je reluis 


jo reluisais 


jo reluisis 


shine 


relui 


see luire 






Eemettre, 4. 


remcttant 


je remets 


je remettais 


je remis 


to remit 


remis, / e. 


see METTRE 






Eemoudre, 4. 


remoulant 


je remouds 


je remoulais 


je remoulus 


to grind again 


rcmoulu, /. e. 


see MOUDRE 






Eexaitke, 4. 


renaiasant 


je renais 


je renaissais 


jc renaquis 


to revive 


rene, /. e. 


see naItre 






Rendormir, 2. 


rendormatit 


je rendors 


je rendormais 


je rendormis 


io lull to sleep 


rendormi, /. e. 


see DORMIR 






Rentraire, 4. 


rentrayant 


je reutrais 


je rentrayais 




to darn 


rentrait, /. e. 


set TRAIRE 






Eexvoyer, 1. 


renvoyant 


je renvoie 


jo renvovais 


je renvoyais 


to send back 


renvoyc./. e. 


see ENVOTER 


§ 49, (2.) 




Bepaitre, 4. 


repaissant 


je repais 


jo repaissais 


jo repus 


to feed 


repu 


see paJtre 




&c. 


Eei-artir, 2. 


repartant 


jo repars 


je repartais 


jc repartis 


to set off again 


reparti, /. c. 


see sentir 






Eepeindre, 4. 


repeignant 


je repeins 


je repeignais 


jo repeignis 


to paint again 


rcpcint, /. e. 


see ceindre 






Eepexttr, (se) 


se repentant 


je me repens 


jo me repen- 


jo me repentis 


2. to repent, ref. 


repenti, /. e. 


see sentir 


[tais 




Eeprendre, 4. 


reprenant 


je reprends 


je reprenais 


je repris 


to take again 


repris, /. e. 


see PRENDRE 






Eeproduire,4. 


reproduisant 


je reproduis 


je reprodui- 


jo reproduisia 


to reproduce 


reproduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 


[sais 





AND UNIPBES01TAL VERBS. 



62. 



391 



FUTUBE. 


Conditional.. 


je reconnai- 

[trai 
je reconquer- 
[rai 


je reconnai- 

[trais 

je recoaquer- 
[rais 


je reconstrui- 


je reconstrui- 


[rai 


[rais 


je recoudrai 


je recoudrais 


je recourrai 


je recourrais 


je recouvrirai 


je recouvrirais 


je recueillerai 


je recueille- 


je redirai 


[rais 
je redirais 


je reduirai 


je reduirais 


je referai 


je referais 


je rejoindrai 


je rejoindrais 


je relirai 


je reliraig 


je reluirai 


je reluirais 


je remettrai 


je remettrais 


je remoudrai 


je remoudrais 


jo renaitrai 


je renaitraia 


je rendormirai 


je rendormi- 


je rentrairai 


[rais 

je rentrairaia 


je renverrai 


je renverrais 


je repaitrai 


je repaitrais 


je repartirai 


je repartirais 


je repeindrai 


je repeindrais 


je me repenti- 
[rai 
je reprendrai 


je me repenti- 

[rais 

je reprendrais 


je reproduirai 


je reprodui- 

[rais 



reconquiers 

reconstruis 

reeoud3 
recours 

recouvro 

recueille 

redi3 

redui3 

refais 

rejoLn3 

relis 

reluis 

remeta 

remouds 

renais 

rendora 

rentrais 



repars 
repeins 
repens-toi 



je reconstrui 
[se 

je recouse 

je recoure 

e recouvre 
e recueille 
e redise 
e reduise 



reproduis j 



Subjunctive. 



je reconnaisse 
je reconquiere je 



je reconnusse 



e reluise 
remette 
e remoulo 



e rendorme 
e rentraie 
e renvoie 
e repaisse 
e reparte 
e repeigne 
me repente 
reprenne 
reproduise 



je reeonstrui- 
[sisse 

je recousisse 

je recourussa 

je recouvrisae 
je recueillisse 
je redisse 
je redmsisse 
je refisse 
je rejoignisse 
je relusse 
je reluisisse 
je remisse 
je remoulusse 
je renaquisse 
je rendormisse 

je renvoyasse 

je repusse 

&c. 
je repartisse 

je repeignisse 

je me repen- 
[tisae 



je reprodui- 

[sisae 



392 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Pasticipi.es. 


Indicative. 


IMPEEFECT. 


Past Definite. 


Eequerir, 2. 


requerant 


je requiers 


je requeraia 


je requis 


to require 


requis, /. e. 


see ACQUERIR 






Eesoudre, 4. resolvant 


je resous 


je resolvais 


je resolus 


to resolve Iresolu, resous 


see absoudre 






Eessextir, 2. ressentant 


je ressens 


je ressentais 


je ressentia 


to resent ressenti. /. e. 


see sextir 






Eess.ORTir, 2. Iressortant 


je ressors 


je ressortais 


je ressortia 


to go out again ressorti, /. e. 


see sortir 






Eessodtenir, 


se ressouve- 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


je me ressou- 


(se) to remem- 


[nant 


[viens 


[venais 


[vin3 


ber, reflective. 


souvenu, / e. 


see TEXTR 






Eestreixdre 


restrcignant 


je restrains 


je restrei- 


je restreignia 


4. to restrain 


restreint, /. e. 


see ceindre 


[gnais 




Eetesir, 2. to 


retenant 


je retiens 


je retenais 


je re tins 


retain 


retenu, /. e. 


see teste 






Eetraire, 4. 


retrayaut 


je retrais 


je retrayais 




to redeem 


retrait. /. e. 


see TRAIRE 






Eevenir, 2. to 


revenant 


je reviens 


je revenais 


jo revins 


return 


rovenu, /. o. 


see vexir 






Eevktir, 2. to revetant 


je revets 


je revetais 


jo revetis 


clothe revetu, /. e. 


see vktir 






Eevivre, 4. to revivant 


je re vis 


je rcvivais 


jo revecus 


live again revecu 








Eevoir. 3. to revoyant 


je revois 


je revoyais 


je revia 


see again 


rcvu, /. c. 


see voir 






Eire," 4. to 


riant 


je ris 


je riais 


je ria 


laugh 


ri 


tu ris 


tu viais 


tu ris 


aux. avoir 




il rit 


il riait 


il rit 


irregular. 




n. rions 


n. riions 


n. rimes 






v. riez 


v. riiez 


n. rites 






ils rient 


ils riaient 


ils rircnfc 


Eomtre, 4. to 


rampant 


je romps 


je rompaia 


je rompia 


break 


rompu, /. c. 


tu romps 


tu rompais 


tu rompia 


aux. avoir 




il rompt 


il rompait 


il rompit 


irregular. 




n. rompons 


n. rompions 


n. rompimes 






v. rompez 


v. rompiez 


v. rompites 






ils rompeut 


ils rompaient 


ils rompirent 


Eouvrir, 2. to rouvrant 


je rouvre 


je rouvrais 


je rouvris 


re-open 


rouvert, /. e. 


see ouvrir 






Saiixir, 2. to 


sailiant 


il saille 


il saillait 




project 


aailli 








Satisfaire, 4. 


satisfaisant 


je satisfais 


jo satisfaisais 


je satisfis 


to satisfy 


satislait,/. e. 


see faire 






Savoir, 3. to 


sachant 


je sais 


je savaia 


je sua 


know 


su, /. e. 


tu sais 


tu savais 


tU SU3 


aux. avoir 




il sait 


il savait 


il sut 


irregular 




n. savons 


n. savious 


u. siimes 






v. savez 


v. saviez 


v. siites 






ils savent 


ils savaient 


ils surent 


Secourir, 2. to 


secourant 


je secours 


je secourais 


je secourua 


succor 


secouru, /. e. 


see courir 






Seduire, 4. to 


seduisant 


je seduia 


je seduisaia 


je seduisia 


seduce 


seduit, /. e. 







A5TD UNIPEESONAL VERBS. — § 62. 393 



FUTUBE. 


Conditional. 


Impebative. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Impekfect. 


je requerrai 


ie requerrais 


requiers 


je requiere 


ie requisse 


je resoudrai 


[e resoudraia 


je resolve 


je resolusse 






resou3 




&c. 


je ressentirai 


ie ressentirais 


ressens 


je ressente 


je ressentisse 


je ressortirai 


je ressortirais 


ressors 


je ressorte 


ie ressortisse 


je me ressou- 


ie me ressou- 




je me ressou- 


ie me ressou- 


[viendrai 


[viendrais 


ressouviens-toi 


[vienne 


[vinsse 


je restreindrai 


je restrein- 




je restreigne 


je restrei- 




[drais 


restreins 




[g-nisse 


je retiendrai 


ie retiendrais 


retiens 


je retienne 


je retinsse 


je retrairai 


[e retrairais 


retrais 


je retraie 




je reviendrai 


je reviendrais 


reviens 


je revienne 


ie revinsse 


je revetirai 


je revetiraia 


revets 


je revete 


je revetisse 


je revivrai 


je revivrais 


revis 


je revive 


|e revecusse 


je reverrai 


je reverrais 


revois 


je revoie 


je revisse 


je rirai 


je rirais 




je rie 


ie risse 


tu riras 


tu rirais 


ris 


tu ries 


tu risses 


ilrira 


il rirait 


q. rie 


ilrie 


il rit 


n. rirons 


n. ririons 


rions 


n. riions 


n. rissions 


v. rirez 


v. ririez 


riez 


v. riiez 


v. rissiez 


ils riront 


ils riraient 


q. rient 


ils rient 


ils rissent 


je romprai 


je romprais 




je rompe 


je rompisse 


tu rompras 


tu romprais 


romps 


tu rompes 


tu rompissea 


il rompra 


il romprait 


q. rompe 


il rompe 


il rompit 


n. romprons 


n. romprions 


rompons 


n. rompions 


n. rompission3 


t. romprez 


v. rompriez 


rompez 


v. rompiez 


v. rompissiez 


ils rompront 


ils rompraient 


q. rompent 


ils rompent 


ils rompissenfc 


je rouvrirai 


je rouvrirais 


rouvre 


je rouvre 


je rouvrisse 


il saillera 


il saillerait 




q. saille 


q. sailllt 


je satisferai 


je satisferais 


satisfais 


je satisfasse 


je satisfisse 


je saurai 


je saurais 




je sache 


je susse 


tu saura3 


tu saurais 


sache 


tu saches 


tu susses 


il saura 


il saurait 


q. sache 


il sache 


ilsut 


n. saurons 


n. saurions 


sachons 


n. sachions 


n. sussiona 


v. saurez 


v. sauriez 


sachez 


v. sachiez 


v. sussiez 


ils sauront 


ils sauraient 


q. sachent 


ils sachent 


ils sussent 


je secourrai 


je secourrais 


secours 


je secoure 


je secourusse 


je seduirai 


je seduirais 


seduia 


je seduise 


je seduisisse 



394 



IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR, 



Infinitive. 


Pakticipi.es. 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite. 


Sejier, 1. to 


semant 


je seme 


je semais 


je semai 


sow. peculiar. 


seme,/ e. 








Sentir, 2. to 


sentant 


je sens 


je sentais 


je sentis 


feel 


senti, /. e. 


tu sens 


tu sentais 


tu sentis 


aux. avoir 




il sent 


il sentait 


il sentit 


irregular. 




n. sentons 


n. sentions 


n. sentimes 






v. sentez 


v. sentiez 


v. sentites 






ils sentent 


ils sentaient 


ils sentirent 


Seoir, 3. to fit, 


seyanfc 


il sied 


il seyait 




become, unip. 


sis 








Servir, 2. to 


servant 


je sers 


je servais 


je servis 


serve 


servi, /. e. 


tu sers 


tu servais 


tu servis 


aux. avoir 




il sert 


il servait 


il servit 


irregular. 




n. servons 


n. servions 


n. servimes 






v. servez 


v. serviez 


v. servites 






ils servent 


ils servaient 


ils servirent 


Sortir, 2. to 


sortant 


je sors 


je sortais 


je sortis 


go out 


sorti, /. e. 


see SENTIR 






SOUFFRIR, 2. to 


souffrant 


je souffre 


je souffrais 


je soufiris 


suffer 


souffert, /. e. 


see odvrir 






Soumettre, 4. 


soumettant 


je souinets 


je soumettais 


je soumis 


to submit 


soumis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






SOURIRE, 4. to 


souriant 


je souris 


je souriais 


je souris 


smile 


souri 


see rire 






SOUSCRIRE, 4. 


souscrivant 


je souscris 


je souscrivais 


je souscris 


to subscribe 


souscrit 


see ecrire 






Soustraire, 4. 


soustrayant 


je soustrais 


je soustrayais 




to subtract 


soustrai.t, / e. 


see traire 






S0UTEN7R, 2. 


souteuaut 


je soutiens 


je soutenais 


je soutins 


to sustain soutenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Souvenir, (se) se souvenant 


je me souviens 


je me souve- 


je me souvins 


H. to remember 


souvenu, /. e. 


see tenir 


[nais 




StTBVEXIR, 2. 


subtenant 


je subviens 


je subvenais 


je subvins 


to relieve 


snbvenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






SUFFIRE, 4. to 


sutfisant 


je sums 


je suffisais 


je sums 


suffice 


suffi 


tu sums 


tu suffisais 


tu sums 


aux. avoir 




il suffit 


il suffisait 


il suffit 


irregular 




n. suffisons 


n. suffisions 


n. suffime3 






v. suffisez 


v. suffisiez 


v. suffites 






ils suffisent 


ils suffisaient 


ils suffirent 


Sutvre, 4. to 


suivant 


je suis 


je suivais 


jo suivis 


follow 


suivi, /. e. 


tu suis 


tu suivais 


tu suivis 


aux. avoir 




il suit 


il suivait 


il suivit 


irregular 




n. suivons 


n. suivions 


n. suivimes 






v. suivez 


v. suiviez 


v. suivltes 






ils suivent 


ils suivaient 


ils suivirent 


Surfatre, 4. to 


surfaisant 


je surfais 


je surfaisais 


je surfis 


exact 


surfait,/ e. 


see faire 






StJRPRENDRE, 


surprenant 


je surprends 


je surprenais 


je surprig 


4. to surprise 


surpris, /. e. 


see PRENDRE 







AND FNIPEKSONAL VERBS. § 62. 



395 



FuTTJBE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


Subjunctive. 


Impeefect. 


je semerai 


je semerais 


seme 


je seme 


je semasse 


je sentirai 


je sentirais 




je sente 


je sentisse 


tu sentiras 


tu sentirais 


sens 


tu sentes 


tu sentisses 


il sentira 


il sentirait 


q. sente 


il sente 


il sentit 


n. sentirons 


n. sentirions 


seritons 


n. sentions 


n. sentissions 


v. sentirez 


v. sentiriez 


sentez 


v. sentiez 


v. sentissiez 


ils sentiront 


ils sentiraient 


q. sentent 


ils sentent 


ils sentissent 


il siera 


il sierait 




q. siee 




je servirai 


je servirais 




je serve 


je servisse 


tu serviras 


tu servirais 


sers 


tu serves 


tu servisses 


il servira 


il servirait 


q. serve 


il serve 


il servit 


n. servirons 


n. servirions 


servons 


n. servions 


n. servissions 


v. servirez 


v. serviriez 


servez 


v. serviez 


v. servissiez 


ils serviront 


ils serviraient 


q. servent 


ils servent 


ils servissent 


je sortirai 


je sortirais 


sors 


je sorte 


je sortisse 


je souffrirai 


je souffrirais 


souffre 


je souffre 


je soufirisse 


je soumettrai 


je soumettrais 




je soumette 


je soumisse 




soumets 






je sourirai 


je sourirais 


souris 


je sourie 


je souriss8 


je souscrirai 


je souscrirais 


souscris 


je souscrive 


je souscrivisse 


je soustrairai 


je soustrairais 


soustrais 


je soustraie 




je soutiendrai 


je soutiendrais 


soutiens 


je soutienne 


je soutinsse 


je me souvien- 


je me souvien- 




je me souvien- 


je me sou- 


[drai 


[drais 


souviens-toi 


[ne 


[vinsse 


je subviendrai 


je subvien- 

[drais 


subviens 


je subvienne 


je subvinsse 


je suffirai 


je suffirais 




je suffise 


je suffisse 


tu suffiras 


tu suffirais 


suffis 


tu suffises 


tu suffisses 


il suffira 


il suffirait 


q. suffise 


il suffise 


il suffit 


n. suffirons 


n. suffirions 


suffisons 


n. suffisions 


n. suffissions 


v. suffirez 


v. suffiriez 


suffisez 


v. suffisiez 


v. suffissiez 


ils suffiront 


ils suffiraient 


q. suffisent 


ils suffisent 


ils suffissent 


je suivrai 


je suivrais 




je suive 


je suivisse 


tu suivras 


tu suivrais 


suis 


tu suives 


tu suivisse3 


il suivra 


il suivrait 


q. suive 


il suive 


il suivit 


n. suivrons 


n. suivrions 


suivons 


n. suivions 


n. suivission3 


v. suivrez 


v. suivriez 


suivez 


v. suiviez 


v. suivissiez 


ils suivront 


ils suivraient 


q. suivent 


ils suivent 


ils suivissent 


je surferai 


je surferais 




je surfasse 


je surfisse 




surfaia 






je surprendrai 


je surpren- 

[drais 


surprends 


je surprenne 


je surprisse 



IBEEGCLAE, DEFECTIVE, PECUIIAE, 



Infinitive. 


PA2TICIPI.EB, 


Indicative. 


Imperfect. 


Past Definite. 


Surseoir, '3. 


sursoyant 


je sursois 


je sursoyais 


je sursis 


to supersede 


sursis./. e. 


tu sursois 


tu sursoyais 


tu sursis 


aux. avoir 




il sursoit 


il sursoyait 


il sursit 


irregular. 




n. sursoyons 


n. sursoyions 


n. sursimes 






v. sursoyez 


v. sursoyiez 


v. sursites 






ils sursoient 


ils sursoyaient 


ils sursirent 


Suevexir, 2. 


survenant 


je surviens 


je survenais 


je survins 


to happen, etc. 


survenu, /. e. 


see tenir 






Scrvivre, 4. 


survivant 


je survis 


je survivais 


je survecus 


to survive 


survecu 


see vivre 






Taibb, (se) 4. 


se taisant 


je me tais 


je me taisais 


je mo tus 


to 6e silent 


tu, /. e. 


see plaire 






Teindre, 4. to 


teignant 


je terns 


je teignais 


je teignis 


dye 


teint, /. e. 


see ceixdre 






Texir, 2. to 


tenant 


je tiens 


je tenais 


je tins 


fa>&2 


tenu, / e. 


tu tiens 


tu tenais 


tu tins 


aux; avoir 




il tient 


il tenait 


il tint 


irregular. 




n. tenons 


n. tenions 


n. tinmes 






v. tenez 


v. teniez 


v. tintes 






ils tienncnt 


ils tenaient 


ils tinrent 


TOX.NER, 1. to 


tonnant 


il tonne 


il tonnait 


il tonna 


thunder, unip. 


tonne 








I'UADUIRB, 4. 


traduisanr, 


jc traduis 


je traduisais 


je traduisis 


to translate 


traduit, /. e. 


see CONDUIRE 






Traire, 4. to 


t rayant 


je trais 


jo trayais 




milk 


trait 


tu trai3 


tu trayais 




aux. avoir 




il trait 


il trayait 




defective. 




n. t rayons 
v. trayez 
ils traient 


n. trayions 
v. trayiez 
ils trayaient 




Transcbirb, 4. 


transcrivant 


je transcris 


jo transcrivais 


je transcrivis 


to //'/ 


transcrit 


see iiCRiRE 






Th \XSUE1TRE, 


transmettant 


je transmet3 


je transmettais 


je transmis 


1. 


transmis, /. e. 


see METTRE 






'i I: 'SSULLIR, 


tressaillant 


je tressaillo 


je tressaillais 


jo tressaillis 


2. to start 


tressailli 


see ASSAILLIR 






VAiXCRE, 4. to 


vainquailt 


je vaines 
tu vaines 


je vainquais 


je vainquis 




vaincu, /. e. 


tu vainquais 


tu vainquis 


voir 




il vainc 


il vainquait 


il vainquit 


tor. 




n. vainquons 


n. vainquions 


n. vainquime8 






v. vainquez 


v. vainquiez 


v. vainquites 






ils vainquent 


ils vainquaient 


ils vainquirent 


V \LOIR, 3. to 


valant 


je vaux 


je valais 


je valus 


le worth 


valu 


tu vaux 


tu valais 


tu valus 


avoir 




il vaut 


il valait 


il valut 






n. valons 


n. valions 


n. valiimes 






v. valez 


v. valiez 


v. valutes 






ils valeut 


ils valaient 


ils valurent 


Yi-xir, 2. to 


venant 


je viens 


je venais 


je vins 


come • 


venu. /. e. 


see texir 






aux. etro 











AND UNIPEK SONAL VERBS 



§ 62. 



397 






Future. 


CONDITIONAL. 


IMPERATIVE. 


Subjunctive. 


Impeekect. 


je surseoirai 


je surseoirais 




je sursoie 


je sursisse 


tu surseoiras 


tu surseoirais 


sursois 


tu sursoies 


tu sursisses 


il surseoira 


il surseoirait 


q. sursoie 


il sursoie 


il sursit 


n. surseoirons 


n. surseoirions 


sursoyons 


n. sursoyions 


n. sursissions 


v. surseoirez 


v. surseoiriez 


sursoyez 


v. sursoyiez 


v sursissiez 


ils surseoiroat 


i. surseoiraient 


q. sursoient 


ils sursoient 


ils sursissent 


je surviendrai 


je surviendrais 


surviens 


je survienne 


je survinsse 


je survivrai 


je survivrais 


survia 


je survive 


je survecusse 


jeme tairai 


je me tairais 


tais-toi 


je me taise 


je me tusse 


je teindrai 


je teindrais 


teina 


je teigne 


je teignisse 


je tiendrai 


je tiendrais 




je tienne 


je tinsse 


tu tiendras 


tu tiendrais 


tiens 


tu tiennes 


tu tinsses 


il tiendra 


ii tiendrait 


q. tienne 


il tienne 


il tint 


n. tiendrons 


n. tiendrions 


tenons 


d. tenions 


n. tinssiona 


v. tiendrez 


v. tiendriez 


tenez 


v. teniez 


v. tinssiez 


ils tiendronfc 


ils tiendraient 


q. tiennent 


ils tiennent 


ils tinssent 


il tonnera 


il tonnerait 


q. tonne 


q. tonne 


q. tonnat 


je traduirai 


je traduirais 


traduis 


je traduise 


je traduisisse 


je trairai 


je trairais 




je traie 




tu trairas 


tu trairais 


trais 


tu traies 




il traii'a 


il trairait 


q. traie 


il traie 




n. trairons 


n. trairions 


trayons 


n. trayons 




v. trairez 


v. trairiez 


trayez 


v. trayiez 




ils trairont 


ils trairaient 


q. traient 


ils traient 




je transcrirai 


je transcrirais 


transcris 


je transcrive 


je transcri- 

[visso 


je transmet- 


je transmet- 




je transmette 


je transmisse 


[trai 


[trais 


transmets 






je tressaillirai 


je tressaillirais 


tressaille 


je tressaille 


je tressaillisse 


je vaincrai 


je vaincrais 




je vainque 


je vainquisse 


tu vaincras 


tu vaiucrais 


vaincs 


tu vainques 


tu vainquisses 


il vaincra 


il vaincrait 


q. vainque 


il vainque 


il vainquit 


n. vaincrons 


n. vaincrions 


vainquons 


n. vainquions 


n.vainquissions 


v. vaincrez 


v. vaincriez 


vainquez 


v. vainquiez 


v. vainquissiez 


ils vaiucrout 


ils vaincraient 


q. vainquent 


ils vainquent 


i. vainquissent 


jo vaudrai 


je vaudrais 




je vaille 


je valusse 


tu vaudras 


tu vaudraia 


raux 


tu vailles 


tu valusses 


il vaudra 


il vaudrait 
n. vaudrions 


q. vaille 


il vaille 


il valut 


n. vaudrons 


valons 


n. valions 


n. valussions 


v. vaudrez 


v. vandriez 


valez 


v. valiez 


v. valussiez 


ils vaudront 


ils vaudfaient 


q. vaillent 


ils vaillent 


ils valussent 


je viendrai 


je viendrais 




je vienne 


je vinsse 




viens 







398 



IB REGULAR, DEFECTIVE, PECULIAR 



Infinitive. 


Participles. 


Indicative. 


IjIPEEFECT. 


Past Definitk. 


Ykhr, 2. to 


vetant 


je vets 


je vetais 


je vetis 


clothe 


vetu, /. e. 


tu vets 


tu vetais 


tu vetis 


aux. avoir 




il vet 


il vetait 


il vetit 


irregular. 




n. vetons 


n. vetions 


n. vetimes 






v. vetez 


v. vetiez 


v. vetites 






ils vetent 


ils vetaient 


ils vetirent 


Vbttr, (se) 2. 


se vetanfc 


je me vets 


je me vetais 


je me vetis 


io clothe one's 


vetu,/. e. 


etc. 


etc. 


etc. 


self. ref. 










Vivre, 4. to 


vivant 


jevis 


je vivais 


je vecus 


live 


vecu 


tu vis 


tu vivais 


tu vecus 


aux. avoir 




il vit 


il vivait 


il vecut 


irregular. 




n. vivons 


n. vivions 


n. vecumes 






v. vivez 


v. viviez 


v. vecutes 






ils vivent 


ils vivaient 


ils vecurent 


Voir, 3. to 


voyant 


je vois 


je voyais 


je vis 


see 


vu, /. e. 


tu vois 


tu voyais 


tu vis 


aux. avoir 




il voit 


il voyait 


il vit 


irregular. 




n. voyons 


n. voyions 


n. vimes 






v. voyez 


v. voyiez 


v. vites 






ils voient 


ils voyaient 


ils virent 


VorjLoiR, 3. io 


voulant 


je veux 


je voulais 


je voulus 


be willing 


voulu 


tu veux 


tu voulais 


tu voulus 


aux. avoir 




il veut 


il voulait 


il voulut 


irregular. 




n. voulons 


a. voulions 


n. voulumes 






v. voulez 


v. vouliez 


v. vouliites 






ils veulent 


ils voulaient 


ils voulureut 



Aller. 
Bexir 



Tleurir. 



POUTOIR 



Eejiarks. 

The Academy gives in the past participle of this verb, absou-s 
and absout, and seems to prefer the latter form. The best 
writers, however, prefer the former. 

The form, je vas, I go, is obsolete. 

has two participles, the regular one, beni, blessed; and the 
irregular form, Unit, consecrated. 

This verb retains the old form in the present participle and 
imperfect, fiorissant, je florissais, etc., when it is used figura- 
tively. 

has two forms in the present of the indicative, je puis and je 
peuz. The former is preferable, except when the second nega- 
tive is put after the verb. 



AND UNIPEESOUAL VERBS. — 8 62. 



399 



FUTURE. 


Conditional. 


Imperative. 


SUUJUNCTIVE. 


Imperfect. 


je vetirai 


je vetirais 




je vete 


je vetisse 


tu vetiras 


tu vetirais 


vets 


tu vetes 


tu vetisses 


il vetira 


il vetirait 


q. vete 


il vete 


il vetit 


n. vetirona 


n. vetirions 


vetons 


n. vetiona 


n. vetissions 


v. vetirez 


v. vetiriez 


vetez 


v. vetiez 


v. vetissiez 


ils vetiront 


ils vetiraient 


q. vetent 


ils vetent 


Os vetissent 


je me vetirai 


je me vetirais 




je me vete 


je me vetisse 


&c. 


&c. 


vets-toi - 


&c. 


&c. 


je vivrai 


je vivrais 




je vive 


je vecusse 


tu vivras 


tu vivrais 


vis 


tu vives 


tu ve cusses 


il vivra 


il vivrait 


q. vive 


il vive 


il vecut 


n. vivrons 


n. vivrions 


vivons 


n. vivions 


n. vecussions 


v. vivrez 


v. vivriez 


vivez 


v. vlviez 


v. vecussiez 


ils vivront 


ils vivraient 


q. vivent 


ils vivent 


ils vecussent 


je verrai 


je verrais 




je voie 


je visse 


tu verras 


tu verrais 


vois 


tu voies 


tu visses 


il verra 


il verrait 


q. voie 


il voie 


il vit 


n. verrons 


n. verrions 


voyons 


n. voyions 


n. vissions 


v. verrez 


v. verriez 


voyez 


v. voyiez 


v. vissiez 


ils verront 


ils verraient 


q. voient 


ils voient 


ils vissent 


je voudrai 


je voudrais 




je veuille 


je voulusse 


tu voudras 


tu voudrais 




tu veuilles 


tu voulusses 


il voudra 


il voudrait 




il veuille 


il voulut 


n. voudrons 


n. voudrions 




n. voulions 


n. voulussions 


v. voudrez 


v. voudriez 


veuillez 


v. vouliez 


v. voulussiez 


ils voudront 


ils voudraient 




ils veuillent 


ils voulussent 



Eemarks. 

R^partir (with an accent), is regular and means to divide. It should not 
be confounded with repartir, to set off again. 

RIssoudre has two past participles, resolu, resolved upon, and resous, re- 
solved into. 

Ressortir, to depend upon, to oe within the jurisdiction, is regular. It must 
not be confounded with ressortir, to go out again, which is con- 
jugated like sortir. 

Tistre, to weave, is only used in the past participle, tissu, woven. 



400 THE PARTICIPLE. — § 63, 64, 65, 66. 

§ 63. — The Participle. 

(1.) The participle is so called, because it participates of the na- 
ture both of the verb and of the adjective. It partakes of the nature 
of the verb, in having its signification and regimen, and of the na- 
ture of the adjective in relating, like the latter, to nouns and pro- 
nouns. 

(2.) There are two sorts of participles ; the present and the past. 

§ 64. — The Participle Present. 

(1.) The participle present, which denotes continuance of action 
answers to the English participle in ing. 

(2.) This participle is invariable; always terminating in ant; as, 
chantant, singing ; finissant, finishing ; recevant, receiving ; vendant, 



une dame rnarchant, a lady walking; 

des hommes marchant, men walking. 

J'ai vu lea vents grondant su'r ces I have seen the winds roaring over 

moissons superbes, those superb harvests, root up the 

Deraciner lea bles, so disputer les grain, and contend for the sheaves. 
gerbes. Delille. 

§ 65. — Verbal Adjectives ending in ant. 

(1.) The verbal adjective in ant expresses merely the condition, 
the manner of being, the qualify of the noun. It never denotes ac- 
tion. 

(2.) This adjective varies in gender and number. We give below 
examples of the same words, used as participles and as adjectives : — 

Adjectives. Participles. 

Une femrae obligeante est aime'e Une femme olligeant tout le 

do tout le monde. monde est generalement aimee. 

An obliging woman is loved by A woman obliging every body is 

every person. generally loved. 

Les tribus errantes de l'Afrique. Les tribus errant dans l'Afrique. 

The wandering tribes of Africa. The tribes wandering in Africa. 

II n'y a que les natures aimantes Les natures aimant la solitude, 

qui soient propres a l'etude de la aiment generalement l'etude. 
nature. Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Affectionate natures (dispositions) Natures (dispositions) loving soli- 
only, are fit for the study of nature. tude, are in general fond of study. 

§ 66. — The Participle Past. 

(1.) The participle past denotes the completion of the action. 
(2.) It is susceptible of variations for gender and number. 
(3.) The participle past, used without an auxiliary, agrees in gen- 
der and number with the noun which it qualifies, whether the noun 



ADVERBS— § 67, 68. 401 

precedes or follows. In short, all that we have said of the agree- 
ment of the adjective with the noun, may be applied to this par- 
ticiple. 

des enfants cheris, beloved children ; 

des femmes estimees, esteemed women; 

Comme une lampe d'or, dans l'azur Like a golden lamp, suspended in 

suspendue, the azure vault, the moon balances 

La lune se balance aux bords de herself in the confines of the horizon; 

l'horizon ; her weakened rays sleep on the turf. 

Ses rayons affaiblis dorment surle 
gazon. Lamartdte. 

(4.) For further rules on the past participle, see Syntax, § 134, and 
following. 

§ 67. — The Adverb. 

(1.) The adverb is an invariable word joined to verbs, adjectives, 
or to other adverbs, to modify their signification. 

(2.) Adverbs are divided into seven classes : 

1. Of manner ; doucement, softly ; sagement, wisely ; etc. 

2. Of order; premierement, first; d'abord, at first ; ensuite, af- 

terwards; etc. 

3. Of place ; ici, here ; ou, where ; la, there ; ailleurs, else- 

where; etc. 

4. Of time; hier, yesterday; aujourd'hui, to-day; demain, to- 

morrow ; etc. 

5. Of quantity; peu, little; trop, too much; tant, so much; etc. 

6. Of comparison ; plus, more ; moins, less ; tres, very. 

1. Of affirmation, ne- oui, yes ; eertes, certainly ; non, no ; nullement, by 
gation and doubt. no means; peut-etre, perhaps; ne, pas, point, 
not; etc. 

(3.) A few adjectives are sometimes used adverbially. They are 
then invariable : 

chanter juste, to sing in tune ; 

couter cher, to cost dear ; 

parler haut, to speak loud. 

(4.) Several words united together, and having the force of an ad- 
verb, are called an adverbial phrase : 

tout a coup, suddenly ; 

peu a, peu, by degrees; 

tout a, l'heure, immediately ; 

de temps en temps, now and then, etc. 

§ 68. — Formation oe Adverbs prom Adjectives. 

(1.) — Adverbs ending in merit, may be formed from adjectives in 
the following manner : 

(2.) "When the adjective ends in the masculine with a vowel, ment 
is added to form the adverb : 






402 



ADVERBS.— § 69, 10. 



utile, 
Poli, 



fou, 
mou, 
nouveau, 
traitre, 



Adjective. 

useful; utilement, usefully; 

polite ; poliment, politely ; 

easy ; aisement, easily. 

(3.) Exceptions. 

beautiful ; bellement, "beautifully; 

foolish ; follement, foolishly ; 

soft ; mollement, softly ; 

new ; nouvellement, newly ; 

treacherous ; traitreusement, treacherously. 

(4.) When the adjective ends in the masculine with a consonant, 
the syllable ment is added to its feminine termination, as, 
masc. fern. 

bon, bonne, good; bonnement, in a good manner; 

doux, douce, soft; doucement, softly; 

heureux, heureuse, happy; heureusement, happily. 
(5.) Adjectives ending in nt, change that termination into mment: 
prudent, prudent ; prudemment, prudently ; 

elegant, elegant; elegamment, elegantly. 

Exceptions. 
lent, slow; lentement, slowly; 

present present; presentenient, presently. 

(6.) The following adverbs require an acute accent over the e pre- 
ceding ment, which e is mute in the adjective : 



aveuglement, 

commodement, 
communement, 
conformement, 
confusement, 

diffusemeut, 
eDornu-ment, 



blindly ; 
commodiously ; 
commonly ; 
conformably ; 
confusedly ; 
diffusely ; 
enormously ; 



expressement, 

importunement, 

incommodement, 

obscurement, 

opiniatrement, 

precisement, 

profondement, 



expressly; 
importunately ; 
incommodiously ; 
obscurely ; 
obstinately ; 
precisely ; 
profoundly. 



§ 69. — Degrees of Signification in Adverbs ending in 

MENT. 

(1.) Adverbs ending in ment, are, like all the adjectives from which 
they are formed, susceptible of three degrees of signification ; the 
positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 

(2.) The first expresses the manner simply. 

(3.) The second expresses it in a degree of equality, superiority, 
or inferiority, by adding to the adverb the words, si, so ; aussi, as; 
plus, more ; moins, less. 

(4.) The third, by the addition of the words, bien, tres, fort, very, 
carries the signification to the highest degree. 
8 *70. — Adverbs making of themselves a Comparison. 



com me, 
de meme, 
pareillement, 



j. 



the same manner : 



ainsi, 
plus, 
davantage, 



thus ; 



PREPOSITIONS. — § 11,12. 



403 



De plus, 

Moins, 

Mieux, 

Pis, 

Tres, 



besides , 
less; 
better ; 
worse ; 
very ; 



NI plus ni moins, neither more nor 

less ; 
Presque, ) 
Quasi, J 



A peu pres, 
Pour le plus, 
Tout au plus, 
A qui mieux 

mieux, 
A l'envi, 
De mieux 

mieux, 



nearly; 
for the most; 
at most ; 

! vying with one 
another ; 

en better and better. 



§ 11. — The Preposition. 
(1.) The preposition is an invariable word, used to express the re- 
lations of things. 

(2.) The preposition conveys by itself no distinct meaning. The 
preposition and the word which it governs, form what is called an in- 
direct regimen. 

8 12. — Table op the Principal Prepositions. 



A, 

A cause de, 


to, at, in ; 
on account of; 


Excepte, ) 
Hormis, ) 


except, but; 


Apres, 


after ; 


Hors, 


save ; 


Attendu, vu, 


on account of; 


Jusqu'a, ) 
Jusques a, J 


until, as far as; 


Aupres de, 


near ; 


Autour de, 


about, around; 


Loin de, 


far from; 


Avant, 


before, (earlier) ; 


Le long de, 


along ; 


Avec, 


with ; 


Malgre, 


in spite of; 


Chez, 


at the house of 


Moyennant, 


by means of; 


Contre, 


against ; 


Nonobstant, 


notwithstanding; 


Dans, 


in, within; 


Outre, 


besides ; 


D'apres, 


from, after ; 


Par, 


by, through; 


D'avec, 


from; 


Pardevant, 


before, (law term) , 


De, 


of from, with ; 


Parmi, 


among, amongst; 


Dela, au dela de 


) beyond, on that 
J side of; 


Pendant, 


during ; 


De dela, par dela 


Pour, 


for; 


Depuis, 


since, for ; 


Pres de, 


near, close by; 


Derriere, 


behind; 


Proche,proche 


de, near by ; 


Des, 


from ; 


Quant a, 


as far, with respect, 


Devant, 


before, opposite; 


Sans, 


without ; 


Durant, 


during ; 


Sauf, 


saving, except; 


En, 


in, at, to ; 


Selou, 


according to; 


En deca de, 1 


this side ; 


Sous, 


under ; 


De deca, par > 


on this side ; 


Suivant, 


according to; 


deca, J 




Sur, 


upon, on; 


Entre 


between ; 


Touchant, 


touching ; 


E avers, ) 
A l'egard de, ) 


towards * 


Concernant, 


concerning; 




Vers, 


towards, to; 


Environ, 


about; 


Vis-a-vis de,- 


opposite. 


(2.) The prepositions are divide< 


1 into several classes. 


(3.) Among 


those denoting plac 


e are — 






( Ce n'est qu'aw 


tour de lui que 


vole la victoire. 


Autour, around 


; ] 




Eacine. 




( Around him a 


hne hovers victory. 



404 



PREPOSITIONS. 



72. 



Chez, with; at the 
house of; among ; 
(spud of the Latin.) 

Dans, in ; 



Parmi, among; 
Vers, towards; 



j Enfin, chez les Chretiens les moeurs sont innocen- 
( tes. Corneille. 

\ Among Christians, finally, the manners are innocent. 
\ Chez mon pere, at my father's house. 
\ Rome n'est plus dans Rorne. Corneille. 

\ Rome is no longer in Rome. 

[ Parmi les rochers, vers le milieu de ces montagnes 
j escarpees. Fenelon. 



| Among the rocks, towards the middle of those steep 

[ mountains. 

f L'autel couvert de feux, tombe et fuit, sous la 
J terre. Voltaire. 

j The altar covered with fire, falls and disappears un- 

(_ der the earth. 

fLes riches ne sont sur la terre que pour faire du 
< bien. Fenelon. 

[ The rich are placed on the earth merely to do good. 

(4.) Some, denoting time, are — 
Durant, \ j ur ^ na . j Dm ant la nuit, elle n'a point dormi. Corneille. 
Pendant, \ 1 During the night she has had no sleep. 

(5.) Some mark place and time, as — 



Sous, under; 



Sur, upon; 



Des, from ; 
" (place;) 

" (time;) 



Depuis, from ; since 
" (place;) 



(time ;) 



Avant, before; 

(at an earlier time ;) 



Apres, after ; 

Entre, between; 

Derriere, behind; 

Devant, before; 
(in front of; 



j Des Orleans. Des sa source. L'Academie. 

} From Orleans; from its source; 

fL'homme, des sa naissauee, a lo sentiment du plaisir 

et de la douleur. Massillon. 

1 Man from his birth has the sensation of pleasure and 
^ of pain. 

C La France s'etend depuis le Rhin jusqu'a l'Ocean. 
< L'Academie. 

[_ France extends from the Rhine to the Ocean. 
' En Orient, en Occident, depuis deux mille ans, on 

ne parle que d' Alexandre. Massillon. 

In the East, in tlie West, since hco thousand years, 
(_ they speak continually of Alexander. 

Dan?, en, sous, vers, etc., may also be placed under this head. 
(6.) Some prepositions mark order, as — 

La conscience nous avertit, en ami, avant de nous 

punir. Stanislas, 

Cu/tsrir/ice warns us, as a friend, before punishing us. 

Je crams Dieu, et apres Dieu, je crains principale- 

ment celui qui ne le craint pas. Sadi. 

I fear God, and, after God, I fear principally the man 
who does not fear him. 

C L'hommo est place libre entre le vice et la vertu. 
Marmontel. 
Man is placed free between vice and virtue. 

II se met toujours derriere celui qui parle. 
La Bruykre. 

He places himself always behind the speaker. 
Fais marcher devant toi l'ango exterminateur. 

Voltaire. 
Send before thee the exterminating angeL 



PREPOSITIONS. — 8 72. 



405 



Avec, with; 



Outre, besides : 



Excepte, except ; 
Hormis, except; 
Hors, except; 



without , 



Sauf, save; except;- 



Contre, against ; 



Malgre, in spite of; 



Nonobstant, not- 
withstanding. 



f Je veux 
(^ 1 will livt 



(7.) The prepositions marking union, are : 

vivre avec elle, avec elle expirer. 

CORNEILLE. 

live with her, die with her. 
Outre restime de soi-meme, l'honnete homme possede 
encore l'estime et la confiance universelles. 

Marmontel. 

I Besides self-esteem, the honest man possesses universal 
[ esteem and confidence. 
(8.) Those of separation, exception, are: 

'II travaille toute la semaine, excepte le dimanche. 

LAcademie. 
He works the whole week, except Sunday. 
' Hormis toi, tout le monde est content. 
All are pleased, except you. 
' Nul n'aura de l'esprit, hors nous et nos amis. 

MOLIERE. 
No one shall have wit, out ourselves and our friends. 
' Point de vertu sans religion, point de bonbeur sans 

vertu. Diderot. 

No virtue without religion, no happiness without 

virtue. 
' On peut tout sacrifier a l'amitie, sauf l'bonnetete et 
la justice. Marmontel. 

We may sacrifice all to friendship, except honesty and 
justice. 
(9.) The prepositions of opposition are : 

' Le travail est une meilleure ressource contre l'ennui 

que le plaisir. Trublet. 

Labor is a better resource against ennui than pleas- 
ure. 
Nous suivrons malgre nous le vainqueur de Lesbos. 

Racine. 
We shall follow against our will the conqueror of 
Lesbos. 
f La verite, nonobstant le prejuge, l'erreur et le mensonge, 
J se fait jour a la fin. Marmontel. 

1 Truth, prejudice error and falsehood notwithstanding, 
\_ conies at last to light. 
(10.) The prepositions of conformity are : 

'Laterre, cette bonne mere, multiplie ses dons selon 
le nombre de ses enfants. Fenelon. 

The earth, that good mother, multiplies her gifts accord- 
ing to the number of her children. 
Les talents produisent suivant la culture. 

Marmontel. 
_ Talents produce according to their cultivation. 
(11.) Several words placed together and performing the part of a 
preposition, are called a prepositional phrase : 

A l'egard de, with regard to ; 

En faveur de, in favor of; 

A la reserve de, reserving; etc. 



Selon, 
Suivant. 



accord- 
ing to ; 



406 



CONJUNCTIONS. — § 73, 



§ 73. — The Conjunction. 

(1.) Conjunctions are invariable words which serve to connect 
words and sentences. 

(2.) French grammarians divide the conjunctions into nine 



'et, and; ni, nor; que, that; desorte que, so 

that; etc. 
mais, but; quoique, though; cependant^ 

yet; etc. 
ou, or ; ou bien, else ; ni, neither ; etc. 
savoir, namely; comme, as; c'est a dire, 

that is to say ; etc. 
quand, lorsque, when ; pendant que, while ; 
si, if; sans quoi, ivithout which; suppose 

que, supposing that, etc. 
car, for ; puisque, since ; pourquoi, why ; 

wherefore; etc. 
or, done, therefore; ainsi, thus; d'ailleurs, 

besides, etc. 
^que, that. 



1 Copulative, 

2 Adversative, 

3 Disjunctive, 

4 Explanatory, 

5 Circumstantial, 

6 Conditional, 

T Causal, 

8 Transitive, 

9 Determinative, 



(3.) We here present a list of the conjunctions and conjunctiva 
phrases most commonly used in French. We will divide them into 
two classes. 

1. Conjunctions and conjunctive phrases which may be placed in 
the first or in the second part of a period : 



A cause que, 
A moins que, 
Aussitot que, 
Au cas que, 
Apres que, 
Ainsi que, 
Attendu que, 
Afin que, 
Au reste, 
Avant que, 

Cependant que, 
De crainte que, 
De meme que, 
De peur que, 
Depuis que, 
De sorte que, 
Durant que, 
En eas que, 
Encore que, 



because ; 
unless ; 
as soon as; 
in case that, if; 
after that; 
as, as well as ; 
whereas ; 
in order that; 
besides ; 
before that, 

than; 
although ; 
for fear that, lest; 
in the same way as; 
for fear that, lest; 
since that; 
so that; 
while ; 
in case thai ; 
although ; 



Jusqu'a. ce que, 
Lorsque, 
Ou bien, 
Outre que, 
Pendant que, 
Parce que, 
Pourvu que, 
Puisque, 
Quand, 
Quoique, 
Si, 

Sans que, 
Sitot que, 
Soit que, 
i Si ce n'est que, 
Suppose que, 
Tant que, 
Tandis que, 
Vii que, 



until that; 
if, when; 
or, else; 
besides tliat ; 
while that ; 
because ; 
provided; 
since ; 
if, when ; 
although, though 

if; 

unless ; 

provided thai ; 
be it that; 
unless ; 

supposing that ; 
provided that; 
while that; 
provided that. 



2. The conjunctions and conjunctive phrase3 which usually co; 



INTERJECTIONS. — S 14. 



401 



between two parts of a sentence, or at the commencement of a dis- 
course momentarily interrupted, are : 



Aussi bien que, 


as well as ; ' 


En effet, 


in fact; 


Apres tout, 


nevertheless ; 


Et puis, 


and then ; 


A condition que 


on condition that; 


Mais, 


but; 


Au surplus, 


besides ; 


Partant, 


therefore ; 


C'est pourquoi, 


therefore ; 


Par consequent, 


consequently ; 


Cependant, 


however ; 


Pourtant, 


however ; 


C'est a dire, 


that is to say ; 


Sans quoi, 


unless that; 


C'est a savoir, 


that is ; 


Savoir, 


to wit; 


Car, 


for, because; 


Sinon, 


unless ; 


Done, 


therefore ; 


Touteibis, 


nevertheless. 


See Lesson 100 — Examples on 


the different uses of conjunctions. 



(1.) The interjections indicate some sudden affection or emotion 
of the mind. They are exclamations which seem to take the place of 
entire propositions. 

(2.) Some imply astonishment : 

Beaux arts, eh! dans quels lieux n'avez-vous droit 

de plaire? Delille. 

Fine arts, ah! in what place have you not a right 
to please ? 
(3.) Some express derision, irony, distrust, etc. : 

Ouais ! ce maitre d'armes vous tient bien au coeur. 
Moliere. 



Ah! eh! etc. 



Ouais, ah! indeed! 
Qui da, truly, etc. 



Ah ! indeed! this fencing master displeases you much. 



(4.) Others express contempt, aversion and disapprobation :' 

Foin du loup et de sa race ! La Fontaine. 



Foin ! away with, etc. 
Tout beau! softly ! 



Away with the wolf and his race ! 
tout beau ! 



Moliere^ 



Tout oeau, monsieur ; 
Softly, sir; softly! 
(5.) We shall carry no further this classification, but content our- 
selves with giving a list of the most usual interjections : 



Ah! 


ah! 


Oh! 


oh! 


AM! 


eigh ! 


Ouais ! 


ah, indeed! 


Bah! 


bah! 


Ouf! 


eigh ! 


Chut! 


silence! hist! 


Paf! 


crack ! 


Eh! 


eh! 


St! 


hist! 


Pi! 


fy-' 


Sus! 


quickly ! 


Garel 


take care ! 


Zest! 


quickly! 


Ha! 


ha! 


Pi done ! 


fy then ! 


Helas ! 


alas! 


Ho ca ! 


holla ! 


Heu! 


alas! 


He bien ! 


now then! 


Hola! 


holla ! 


Eh bien ! 


well then ! 


Ho! 


ho! 


Ouida! 


truly ! 


Hem! 


hem! 


Or ca! 


quickly ! 


Hein! 


eh! 


Tout beau I 


softly ! 


Hum I 


hum! 


Silence! Paix! 


silence ! 




&c. 




&c. 



408 . SYNTAX.— § 15, 16. 

§ 15.— SYNTAX. 

(1.) Syntax treats of the agreement, government, and arrangement 
of words in sentences. 

(2.) One word is said to agree with another, when it takes the 
same modification of gender, number, and person. 

(3.) One word governs another, when by the influence of the 
former the latter is made to assume a particular form or place. 

(4.) The proper arrangement of words consists in placing them in 
the order sanctioned by grammatical rules, deduced from the best 
reputable custom. 

(5.) For the cases adopted by the modern French grammarians, 
the student is referred to § 2, and § 42, (2,) (3,) (4,) (5.) 

§ *76. — The Noun. — Place of Nouns. 

(1.) In French, as well as in English, a noun used as the subject 
or nominative of an affirmative or negative sentence, generally pre- 
cedes the verb : 

Lliomme le plus obscur aime la The most humble man loves liberty. 
liberte. Chateaubriand. 

L'esperance tient lieu des biena Hope takes the place of the benefits 

qu'elle promet. La Ciiaussee. which it promises. 

(2.) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject is sometimes 
placed after the verb : 

II n'est point de noblesse, ou Nothing noble can exist, where 

manque la vertu. Crebillon. virtue is wanting. 

La fortune est a. craindre, ou Where wisdom is wanting, fortune 

manque la sagesse. Boursault. is to be feared. 

(3.) In interjected sentences, that is, in sentences which we, 
while repeating the words of a person, throw among other sentences, 
to indicate that person as the speaker, the subject, in French, must 
always follow the verb : 

Heureux, disait Mentor, le peuple Happy, said Mentor, the people 
qui est conduit par un sage roi ! who are governed by a wise king. 

Fenelon. 

(4.) In interrogative sentences, the noun generally precedes the 
verb, which must be immediately followed by a pronoun correspond- 
ing in gender and number with the noun : 

La mort est-elle nn. mal ? "La, vie Is death an evil? Is life a bene- 
est-elle un bien ? Crebillon. fit ? Literally, Death, is it an evil f 

etc. 

(5.) When the sentence commences with one of the following 
words, ou, where ; que, what ; combien, how much ; quand, when ; 



SYNTAX or NOUNS. — § 76. 409 

the noun may be placed immediately after the verb, or in accord- 
ance with the last rule : 

Oh est votre^re.* or ) WJ ^ is your father f 
Ou votrejpere est-il? ) J 

Mais que sert un long regne, a Of what use is a long reign, un- 

moins qu'il ne soit beau ? less it be glorious ? 
Boursault. 

(6.) The noun, used as a direct regimen, has the same place in the 
sentence in French as in English : 

La force fonde, etend, et main- Power founds, extends, and main- 
tient un empire. Saukin. tains an empire. 

(7.) When there are, in the same sentence, two nouns, one used 
as direct, the other as indirect regimen, and those nouns with the 
words qualifying or modifying them, are of equal length, the direct 
regimen should precede the indirect : l 

Le malheur ajoute un nouveau Misfortune adds a new lustre to the 

lustre a la gloire des grands horn- glory of great men. 
mes. Fenelon. 

Avez-vous donne les livres a, mon Have you given the books to my 

frere? Girault-Duvivier. brother. 

(8.) "When, however, the qualifying or explanatory words render 
the direct regimen longer than the indirect, the regime indirect is 
placed first : 

Avez-vous donne d mon frere les Save you given my brolJier the 

livres que vous lui aviez promis ? books, which you had promised him t 

Les hypocrites parent des dehors Hypocrites adorn with the appear- 

de la vertu, les vices les plus honteux. ance of virtue, the most shameful 

Noel. vices. 

(9.) The indirect regimen precedes the direct regimen, when the 
meaning would otherwise be doubtful : 

Tachez de ramener par la douceur Try to bring back by mildness, 
ces esprits egares. these erring spirits. 

Bescherelle. 
Any other construction would render the sentence equivocal, 
(10.) In English, the name of the possessor frequently precedes 
the name of the object possessed, and the two are connected by 
means of 's (the old Saxon genitive termination). In French the 
order is always different. The name of the object precedes that of 
the possessor, and the connecting link is a preposition : 

Les livres de mon ami. My friend's books. 

Vous avez vu la montre de ma You have seen my sister's watch. 
soeur. 

This must also be the case, when the regime direct is shorter than the 
18 



410 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. — § 11. 

(11.) The name of an object always precedes the name of the 
substance of which it is formed, or which it contains. The preposi- 
tion de comes between them : 

Une table de marbre. A marble table. 

La France a beaucoup de carrieres France has many marble quarries. 
de marbre. 

Un bouteUle de vin. A bottle of wine. 

(12.) The word representing an individual always precedes that 
describing his particular occupation, or the merchandise of which he 
disposes : 

TJn maitre de danse. A dancing master. 

Un maitre de langues. A teacher of languages. 

TJn marchand de drap. A draper, or dealer in cloth. 

(13.) The name of a vehicle, boat, mill, etc. always precedes the 
noun representing the power by which it is impelled, or the purpose 
to which it is adapted. The connecting preposition is generally cb : 

Un moulin a vent. A wind-mill. 

Un moulin a, farine. A grist-mill 

Des moulins a eau. Water-mills. 

Une voiture a vapeur. A steam carriage. 

Un bateau a vapeur. A steamboat. 

Une voiture a deux chevaux. A two horse carriage. 

(14.) The name of an object precedes the noun representing its 
particular produce, use, or appendages, etc. ; d generally connects 
these nouns : 

Le gout du fruit de Varbre d pain The taste of the fruit of the bread- 

resseinble celui de l'artichaut tree resembles that of the artichoke. 
Bern'ardin de St. Pierre. 

Lo nom de vertu, dans la bouche The name of virtue, in the mouth 

de certaines personnes, fait tressail- of certain persons, makes one shud- 

lir, comme le grelot du serpent d der, like the noise of a rattle-snake, 
sonnetles. Mme. Necker. 

Lcs bites a comes ne sont pas si Horned animals (neat cattle) are 

nombrcuses que les betes a laine. not so numerous as sheep (wool ani- 
mals). 

La salle a, manger. The dining room. 

Du bois a bruler. Fire wood. 

Un verre a eau. A water glass, L e.. glass for water. 
See § 81, (2.) 

§ 11. — The Article. — Use of the Article. 
(1.) The article 1 must be used in French before every noun em- 
ployed in a general sense, or denoting a whole species of objects, 
although in similar cases the article is not used in English. Ex : 

1 The student will recollect that the French have only one article, le. 
The word un being, by modern French grammarians, very properly classed 
with the numeral adjectives. 



SYNTAX OE THE ARTICLE. — §77. 411 

Les bienfaits peuvent tout sur Benefits are all powerful with a 

une ame biea nee. Voltaire. well disposed mind. 

i'honneur, aux grands cceurs, est Honor is,with magnanimous hearts, 

plus cher que la vie. Corneille. more precious than life. 

La houte suit toujours un lache Shame always folloius a cowardly 

desespoir. Crebillon. despair. 

(2.) The article is used in French, as in English, before a noun 
denoting a particular object, or taken in a particular sense : 

Le bonheur des mediants comme The happiness of the wicked runs 

un torrent s'ecoule. Racine. away like a torrent. 

i'arbrisseau le plus sain a be- The healthiest shrub needs culiiva- 

soin de culture. Hon. 
Fabre d'^glantine. 

Le moment du peril est celui du The time of peril is the time for 

courage. La Harpe. courage. 

(3.) The article is used before the names of countries, provinces, 
rivers, winds and mountains : 

La France est bornee au midi France is bounded on the south 

par les Pyrenees et la Mediterranee; by the Pyrenees and the Mediterra- 

d Vest par la Suisse et la Savoie ; nean ; on the east by Switzerland 

au nord par la Belgique, et a Z'ouest and Savoy ; on the north by Bel- 

par Z'Ocean. Ses principales rivieres gium, and on the west by the Ocean. 

sont la Meuse, le Rhin, la Seine, la Its principal rivers are the Meuse, 

Loire, la Garonne et le Rhone. the Rhine, the Seine, the Loire, the 
Garonne and the Rhone. 

(4.) Those countries which take their name from their capital, or 
some other city within their boundaries, take no article : 

Naples est un pays delicieux. Naples is a delightful country. 

Venise etait un etat puissant. Venice was a powerful state. 

New -York est un etat sain. New York is a healthy state. 

(5.) The French use the article before titles prefixed to names : 

Le general Cavaignac. General Cavaignac ; 

Le president Bonaparte. President Bonaparte. 

(6.) The article is also used before the names of dignities, of cer- 
tain bodies, systems of doctrine, and with other words mentioned 
below : 

La monarchic, monarchy ; 
Le parlement, parliament ; 
Le gouvernement, government ; 
Le christianisme, Christianity ; 
L'episcopat, episcopacy ; 

A l'eglise, at church ; 

(7.) Before the names of the seasons, and the following expres- 



L'annee prochaine, next year ; L'automne dernier, last fall ; 
L'annee derniere, last year ; La semaine derniere, last week ; 

Le printemps prochain, next spring ; &c. &c. 



A l'ecole, 


at school ; 


Au college, 


at college ; 


Au marche, 


at, to market ; 


Au lit, 


in bed ; 


&c. 


&c. 



412 SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. — § 78. 

(8.) The names of several cities take the article. Those nouns 
have generally a meaning, and indicate often natural objects : 

Le Havre, Havre ; La Rochelle, JRochelle ; 

La Haie, The Hague; Le Detroit, Detroit; 

(9.) In speaking of the parts of the body, or of the qualities of the 
mind, the French use the article in cases where the English use a 
possessive adjective, or the indefinite article : 

Votre frere a les chevaux noirs. Your brother has black hair. 

II s'est blesse a la main. He has hurt his hand. 

Charles a la memoire excellente. Charles has an excellent memory. 

§ 78. — Use of the Article before "Words taken in a 
Partitive Sense. 

(1.) A word, when used to denote an entire object or class of ob- 
jects, is said to have a general sense ; when, however, it is employed 
to indicate a part of any thing or class of things, considered in refer- 
ence to the whole, it is said to have a partitive sense. Before a word 
taken partitively, the word some or any, is, or may, in English, often 
be employed. If, for example, I use the words courage and wood, 
abstractedly, I take them in the general sense ; but if I say, give me 
wood; your brotlier has courage, I use them in the partitive sense, that 
is, I ask for a part of that substance called wood, and attribute to 
your brother something of that quality called courage. 

(2.) The article accompanied by, or in combination with the prepo- 
sition de, called by some grammarians the partitive article [§ 13, (10.)] 
is used before nouns taken in a partitive sense 

Du pain et de l'eau lui suffisent Bread and water are sufficient for 

him ; that is, some bread. 

Apportez-nous du sel et du vi- Bring us salt and vinegar; that 
naigro. is, some salt. 

Toujours la patrie a des charmes My native land has always (some) 
pour moi. La Haepe. charms for me. 

(3.) The preposition de only, is used when the noun taken in a 
partitive sense, is preceded by an adjective: 

II possede de belles maisons. He possesses fine houses. 

Proposons-nous a nous-memes de Let us propose to ourselves rather to 

grands exemples a imiter, plutot imitate great examples, than to 

que de vains systemes a suivre. follow vain systems. 
J. J. Rousseau. 

(14.) When, however, the noun preceaed by the adjective, is con- 
nected with it, and the two form a compound noun, that noun takes 
the article according to rule (2.), as, 

Des jeunes gens ; des grands Young people ; great men (some.) 



SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. § *79 , 80. 413 

Heureux, si de son temps, pour do Fortunate would it have been, if, in 

bonnes raisons, his time, (Alexander's) Macedon had 

La Macedoine eut eu des petites- had lunatic asylums. 
1 1 Boileaxt. 



(5.) The preposition alone is used before a noun ; when it is pre- 
ceded by a collective word or by an adverb of quantity : 

tTne multitude de peuples. A multitude of nations. 

Beaucoup de personnes. Many persons. 

A quoi bon tant rf'amis? Of what use are so many friends? 

Un seul nous suffit s'il nous aime. A single one suffices if he loves us. 
Floriax. 

(6.) The article, however, is used, when the noun preceded by a 
collective word, is limited by what follows. The words, la plupart, 
the most; bien, many ; and infiniment, infinitely, form also excep- 
tions to the preceding rule : 

Un grand nombre des personnes Many of the persons whom I have 

que j'ai vues. Noel. seen. 

II me reste peu, des livres qui I have few left, of the hooks which 

m'ont ete donnes. Noel. have been given me. 

Les mediants ont bien de la peine The wicked have much trouble to 

eL demeurer unis. Fenelon. remain united. 

(7.) The preposition is used alone before a noun placed after a 
verb conjugated negatively, but not interrogatively at the same 
time: 

Je ne vous ferai pas de reproches. I shall cast upon you no reproaches. 

L'on ne dit jamais que l'on n'a We never say, that we have no wit. 
point (f esprit. Bocrsault. 

On ne fait jamais de bien a Dieu, We never can do good in respect to 
en faisaut du mal aux hommes. God, by doing evil to men. 

VOLTAIRE. 

(8.) The commencement of rule (6.) will also apply to this sen- 
tence : 

Ne donnez jamais des conseils Never give advice which is danger- 
qu'il soit dangereux de suivre. ous to follow. 

GIRAULT-DUVIVIER. 

§ 79. — English Indefinite Article A or An. 
The French numeral adjective, un, masc. une, fern, answers to the 
English article a or an [§ 13, (4.) (11.)]. 

The restrictions to its use are specified in the remarks on the 
article. 

§ 80. — Repetition of the Article. 
(1.) General Rule. The article 1 is repeated before every noun 
and every word used as a noun, having a separate meaning : 

1 This rule applies to the determinative adjectives, mon, ion, son, ce, 
cet, etc. 



414 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. — § 81. 

Le cceur, Z'esprit, les mceurs, tout The heart, the mind, the manners, 

gagne a la culture. every thing improves by cultivation. 

Le pere et la mere semblaient ex- The father and mother seemed to 

titer leur petite compagne a s'en excite their little companion to feed 

repaitre la premiere. Buffon. upon it first. 

(2.) The article will, therefore, be repeated, when one of two ad- 
jectives, united by the conjunction et, qualifies a noun expressed, and 
the other a noun understood : 

Z'histoire ancienne et la moderne. Ancient and modem history. 

that is, l'histoire ancienne et l'histoire moderne. 

Les pnilosophes anciens et les mo- Ancient and modern philosophers. 
denies. 

Le premier et le second etages. The first and second stories. 

(3.) Should, however, the tvro adjectives qualify the same ex- 
pressed word, the article must not be repeated. 

Le sage et pieux Fenelon a des TJie wise and pious Fenelon has well 

droits bien acquis a I'estime gene- established rights to general es- 

rale. Girault-Duvivier. teem. 

A ces mots il lui teud le doux et At these icords he presents to him the 

tendre ouvrage. Boileau. sweet and tender book. 

(4.) When two nouns are joined by the conjunction ou, and the 
second is merely a repetition or explanation of the first, the article 
should not be repeated. 

Les joues ou cotes de la tetc du The cheeks or sides of the head of the 

condor, sont couvertes d'un duvet condor, are covered with black down. 

noir. BUFFON. 

On distinguait parmi les nobles les Tliey distinguished among the nobles 

palatins ou gouverneurs des pro- the palatines or governors of pro- 

vincea. J. J. Rousseau. vinces. 

§ SI. — Miscellaneous Remarks on tiieUse of the Article. 
(1.) The article is not used before numbers placed after the names 
of sovereigns, to designate their order of succession [§ 26, (3.)]. 
Louis dix-huil, Charles dix. Louis the eighteenth, Charles the tenth. 

(2.) The French put no article before nouns placed in apposition 
with, or explanatory of, other preceding nouns : 

Louis treize, fils de Henri quatre, fut Louis the thirteenth, the son of Henry 
bien different de son pere. the fourth, was very different from 

his father. 
Lc Tartufe, comedie de Moliere. The Tartufe, a comedy of Moliere, 

Lamartine, celebre poete et prosa- Lamartine, a celebrated French poet 

tew francais. andprose tenter. 

Jo suis franoai?, vous ttes americain. L atn a Frenchman, you are an 
American. 

(3.) If the explanatory word be itself qualified or restricted by 
other words, the un is then placed before it : 



SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. § 81. 415 

Cet homme est un Francais, That man is a Frenchman, of an 

d'une famille illustre, mais malheu- illustrious, but unfortunate family. 
reuse. 

Ces messieurs sont des marchands Those gentlemen are merchants from 

de Lyon. Lyons. 

(4.) Under the second rule of this Section may also be placed the 
words mentioned in § 76, Eules (11.) (12.) (13.) and (14.) : 

une raontre d'or, a gold watch ; 

un maitre de dessin, a drawing-master; 

un moulin a vapeur, a steam mill ; 

une chambre a coucher, a bed-room. 

(5.) Some exceptions to rule (2.) will be better explained by ex- 
amples than by precepts : 

un magasin a foin, a hay loft ; 

une bouteille d vin, a wine bottle. 

are a loft intended for hay, a "bottle intended for wine, but not actu- 
ally containing hay or wine. 

un magasin au foin, a hay-loft ; 

la bouteille au vin, the wine-bottle. 

That is, the loft actually used for hay, the bottle now used for 
wine. 

un magasin de foin, a loft ) .„ , ( hay ; 

une bouteille de vin, a bottle y u °* (wine; 

(6.) Proper names of persons do not receive the article, unless it 
forms a part of the name ; as, Lebrun, Lamartine, La Harpe, La 
Fontaine ; as also in some gallicised Italian names ; as Le Tasse, 
Tasso, Le Dante, Dante, etc. An adjective, however, coming before 
proper names, is generally preceded by the article. 

Le bon et naif La Fontaine. The good and candid La Fontaine. 

Le pieux Fenelon. T/ie pious Fenelon. 

(7.) It has been seen [§ 12, (1.) Examples] that the plural article 
is often placed in elevated style before the names of renowned indi- 
viduals : 

Nous avons vu a la fois, a la tete We have seen at once, at the head 

des escadrons imperiaux, les Murat, of the imperial squadrons, Murat, 

les Kellermann, les Lassalle, les Mon- Kellerman, Lassalle, Montorun. 
torun. Le General Foy. 

(8.) Names of kingdoms and provinces, when preceded by the 
preposition en, take no article : 

En France, en Amerique. In France, in America. 

(9.) No article is placed after en preceding a noun used indeter- 
minately, or after the word ni standing before a noun, which is the 
direct regimen of a verb, preceding the negative : 



416 



YKTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 8 §2. 



Nous irons en voiture. We shall go in a carriage. 

Vous etes en peine. You are in trouble. 

Nous n'avons ni or ni argent. We have neither gold nor silver. 

(10.) The article is omitted before plus and rnoins in comparative 
sentences, where, in English, it would, in the corresponding place, be 
inserted : 

Plus une action est utile, plus The more useful an action is, the 
elle est louable. more praiseworthy it is. 

(11.) The article precedes plus and rnoins to express comparison 
in the highest degree, and agrees in gender with the noun : 

Votre soeur ne pleurait pas, quoi- Tour sister did not weep, although 
qu'elle fut la plus affligee de toutes she was the most grieved of all those 
ces dames. ladies. 

(12.) The article remains invariable when it stands before a super- 
lative, in which, however, no direct comparison is intended : 

Votre soeur ne pleure pas, lors Tour sister does not weep, even 
meme qu'elle est le plus affligee. when she is most grieved. 

Noel. 

(19.) To give more force to the diction, the article is often omitted 
in a rapid enumeration of individuals : 

Citoyens, etraugers, amis, enne- Citizens, strangers, friends, ene- 
mis, tous le reverent. mies, all reverence him. 

8 82. — Idioms in wnicn the Article is omitted. 



Ajouter foi, 
Avoir besoin, 
Avoir chaud, 
Avoir coutume, 
Avoir dessein, 
Avoir dispute, 
Avoir envie. 
Avoir appctit, 
Avoir Mm, 
Avoir froid, 
Avoir honte, 
Avoir mal, 
Avoir patience, 
Avoir peur, 
Avoir pitie, 
Avoir raison, 
Avoir sommeil, 
Avoir soil) 
Avoir soin, 
Avoir sujet, 
Avoir tort, 
Chercher fortune, 

Courir risque, 
Demander justice. 



to give faith ; 
to have need ; 
to be warm ; * 
to be accustomed ; 
to intend ; 
to have difficulties , 
to wish, to desire; 
to have an appetite, 
to be hungry ; 
to be cold; 
to be ashamed; 
to have pain ; 
to have patience ; 
to be afraid; 
to take pity ; 
to be right ; 
to be sleepy; 
to be thirsty; 
to take care ; 
to have reason; 
to be wrong ; 
to seek one's for 

tune ; 
to run the risk ; 
to demand justice 



Demander pardon, to beg pardon; 
Donner avis, ) . . , 
Faire part, \ ^ inform; 
Entendre raillerie, 1 to bear jokes ; 
Faire attention, to pay attention; 
Faire bonne cherc,to live well; 
Faire credit, to give credit ; 

Faire envie, to excite envy ; 

Faire honneur, to honor ; 
Faire horreur, to inspire horror ; 



Faire peur, 
Faire mention, 
Fairo naufrage, 
Faire place, 
Faire plaieir, 
Faire present, 
Faire reflexion, 
Faire tort, 
Mettre fin, 
Mcttre ordre, 
Perdre courage, 
Porter envie, 
Porter mainour, 

Prendre conge, 



to frighten ; 
to mention ; 
to suffer shipwreck; 
to make room ; 
to oblige ; 
to present ; 
to reflect; 
to injure; 
to put an end; 
to arrange; 
to lose courage ; 
to envy ; 

to cause misfor- 
tune ; 
to take leave ; 



1 Entendro la raillerie, is also said, but it means to understand joking. 



SYNTAX 


OF THE ADJECTIVE. — 


■§83,84. 417 


Prendre feu, 


to catch fire ; 


Tenir lieu, 


to take place; 


Prendre garde, 


to take care ; 


Tenir parole, 


to keep one's word; 


Prendre kaleine, 


to take breath; 


Trouver moyen, 


to find means ; 


Prendre medecine, to take medicine ; 


Avec ardeur, etc., 


with ardor ; 


Prendre racine, 


to take root ; 


Par depit, etc., 


through spite ; 


Rendre compte, 


to account; 


Pour recompense, 


as a reward; 


Rendre justice, 


to render justice ; 


etc., 




Rendre service, 


to oblige ; 


Sans peine, 


without difficulty ; 


Rendre visite, 


to visit; 


Sans souci, 


without sorrow, 


Tenir compagnie, 


to accompany ; 




without care. 



§ 83. — The Adjective. 

(4.) We have seen [§ 18, Eule (3.)] that an adjective, relating to 
two substantives of the same gender, must agree with them in gen- 
der, and be put in the plural ; 

(2.) And Eule (4.) that an adjective, relating to two or more nouns 
of different genders, must be put in the masculine plural. 

(3.) When, however, nouns, united or not by the conjunction et, 
are somewhat synonymous; when the writer wishes actually to 
qualify only the last ; or when the mind, more particularly occupied 
with the last noun, seems to forget the others, the adjective will as- 
sume the gender and number of the last noun only. 

Toute sa vie n'a ete qu'un travail, His whole life has been nothing but 



qu'une occupation continuelle. 

Massiixon. 

Je ne connais point de roman, 
point de comedie espagnole, sans 
combats. Elorian. 

Le fer, le bandeau, la flamme est 
toute prete. Racine. 



continual labor and occupation. 

I know no romance, no Spanish 
comedy, without combats. 

The sword, the band, the flame is 
all ready. 



(4.) Sometimes the adjective, preceded by two or more substan- 
tives joined by the conjunction et, qualifies the last only. It must 
then, of course, agree with that noun only. 



The good taste of the Egyptians 
made them like solidity and un- 
adorned regularity. 

Tlie smile is a mark of good-will, 
of applause, and of inward satisfac- 
tion. 



Le bon gout des flgyptiens leur 
fit aimer la solidite et la regularite 
toute nue. Bossuet. 

Le sourire est une marque de 
bienveillance, d'applaudissement, et 
de satisfaction interieure. 

BUEFOIT. 

§ 84. — Remarks on the Peculiarities of several Ad- 
jectives. 
(1.) The adjective feu (late, deceased), is invariable, when placed 
before the article or adjective determining a noun, but varies when 
placed after the determining word : 

J'ai oui' dire a, feu ma sceur, que I have heard my late sister say, 
sa fille et moi naquimes la meme that her daughter and I were born 
Montesquieu. the same year. 
18* 



418 



YNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — § 84. 



Le due de . . . doit a la bienveil- The duke of . . . owes to the good- 
lance dont l'honorait la feue reine, will of the late queen towards him, 
les bonnes graces de l'empereur. the good graces of the emperor. 
De Salvandy. 

(2.) The adjectives nu, bare, and demi, half, are invariable when 
placed before the noun, and are connected with it by a hyphen : 

II etait WM-tete ; les pieds chausses He tvas bare-headed ; he wore on 

de petites sandales. Voltaire. his feet small sandals. 

line ^emj'-heure apres avoir quitte Half an hour after having left the 

le vaisseau, je foulai le sol ameri- ship, I trod the American soil. 
cain. ' Chateaubriand. 

(3.) The adjectives nu and demi, when coming after the noun 
agree with it : 

Accoutumez vos enfants a demeu- Accustom your children to remain 

rer ete et hiver, jour et nuit toujours summer and winter, day and night, 

tete nue. J. J. Rousseau. always bare-headed. 

Opimius paya la tete de Caius Opimius paid for the head of Caius 

Gracchus, dix-sept livres et demie Gracchus, seventeen pounds and a 

d'or. Vertot. half of gold. 

(4.) The adjectives excepte, except; passe, past; y-compris, in- 
cluding ; ci-joint, ci-inclus, annexed, inclosed ; franc de port, postage 
free ; come under the two last rules : 



Vous trouvorez ci-joint la copie 
de la lettre que M. . . m'a ecrite. 
J. J. Rousseau. 

Le dessin dc cet oiseau m'a ete 
envoye d'Angleterre, avec la de- 
scription ci-jointe. Buffon. 

Vous trouverez ci-inclus, copie de 
ma lettre. Domergues. 

Je vous recommande les cinq 
lettres ci-incluses. 

Rerxardin de St. Pierre. 

J'ai reeu, franc de port, une lettre 
aDonyme. J. J. Rousseau. 

Lo Contrat social est imprime, 
et vous en recevrez douze exem- 
plaires, francs de port 

The Same. 

(5.) An adjective used adverbially, that is, modifying a verb, is of 
course invariable [§ G7, (3.)] : 

In Lapland the skin of the ermine 
costs four or five sous ; the flesh of 
this animal smells very bad. 



You will find annexed the copy of 
the letter ivhich M. . . has written to 
one. 

The draiving of that bird came to 
me from England, with the descrip- 
tion here annexed. 

You will find inclosed a copy of 
my letter. 

I recommend lo you the five letters 
inclosed. 

I received, postage free, an anony- 
mous letter. 

The Social Contract is printed, and 
you toill receive twelve copies free of 
postage. 



En Laponie, uno peau d'hermino 
coute quatro ou cinq sous; la 
chair de cet animal sent tres mau- 
vais. Regnard. 

De ma vie je n'ai entendu des voix 
de femme monter si haut. 

M«ie. DE SfiVIGNE. 



Never in my life have I heard 
women's voices sound so loud. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. — § 85. 419 

§ 85. — Place of the Qualifying Adjective. 

(1.) No invariable rule can be given for the place of the adjective 
in French, although it follows the noun much more frequently than 
it precedes it. 

(2.) The adjectives which are generally placed after the noun are: 

1. All participles present and past, used adjectively : 

une personne reconnaissante, a grateful person ; 

une bistoire amusante, an amusing history ; 

un enfant cheri, a beloved child ; 

de la viande rotie, roast meat ; 

2. All adjectives expressing the form, the shape : 
une table ronde, a round table ; 
une chambre carree, a square room ; 

(3.) Adjectives explaining the matter of which an object is com- 



acide sulfurique, sulphuric acid; 

corps aerien, aerial body ; 
(4.) Those expressing color, taste, or relating to hearing and 
touching : 

un habit noir, a black coat; 

du fruit amer, bitter fruit ; 

des sons harmonieux, harmonious sounds ; 

de la cire molle, soft wax ; 

(5.) Adjectives which may be used substantively: 

un homme riche, a rich man ; 

une femme aveugle, a blind woman; 

(6.) Adjectives representing nation :* 

un grammaire francaise, a French grammar; 

un dictionnaire allemand, a German dictionary; 

(7.) Adjectives expressing the defects of the body and mind: 

un homme boiteux, a lame man ; 

un esprit aliene, an unsound mind ; 

(8.) Almost all adjectives ending in a\ able, ible, ique, and if. 

un homme liberal, a liberal man ; 

une nation paisible, a peaceful nation ; 

un esprit fanatique, a fanatical spirit; 

un soldat fugitif, a fugitive soldier. 

(9.) It must not be inferred from the rules above that the adjective 
always comes after the noun. The deviations are quite frequent ; 

1 The French often use the name of the country instead of the adjective 
of nation ; particularly when speaking of the produce of the country : 
De la laine d'Espagne, Spanish wool. 

Du fromage d 1 Angleterre, English cheese. 



420 



TNT AX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 8 86. 



and often no other reason than taste can be assigned for them. We 
give a few examples, in which the same adjective is, by different 
authors, placed before and after the noun : 



Before the Noun. 
Jamais nous ne goutons de par~ 
faiie allegresse. Corneille. 

We never enjoy perfect (unalloyed) 
pleasure. 

II fallut reveiller d'un profond 
sommeil cet autre Alexandre. 

Bossuet. 

It was necessary to rouse from a 
profound sleep that second Alexan- 
der. 

Craignez, d'un vain plaisir les 
trompeuses amorces. Boileatj. 

Fear the deceitful allurements of a 
vain pleasure. 

(10.) We find, however, in our best writers, few examples of a 
long adjective placed before a short nouu, although they often place 
the adjective before the noun to give variety or force to the diction ; 
they never, for instance, would say (in prose) d'imaginaires lois, for 
des lois imaginaires, imaginary laws. 

(11.) The following adjectives when used in a literal sense, gene- 
rally precede the noun. See § 144, Note : 



After the Noun. 
Qu'a-t-il dit, qu'a-t-il fait? 
Qui ne promette a Rome un empe- 

reur parfait. Racine. 

What has he said, what has he 
done which does not promise to Borne 
a perfect emperor 1 

Dans un sommeil profond ils ont 
passe leur vie. Boileau. 

Tliey spent their life in a profound 
sleep. 

Le monde est une figure trompeuse 
qui passe. Buffon. 

The world is a deceitful picture, 
which passes before us. 



Beau, 


fine, handsome; 


*Mauvais, 


bad; 


*Bon, 


good ; 


*Mechant, 


wicked; 


*Brave, 


brave ; 


Meilleur, 


better; 


•Cher, 


dear (loved); 


Moindre, 


less ; 


Chetif; 


mean ; 


JtPetit, 


small ; 


*Grand, 


tall; 


Saint, 


holy ; 


Gros, 


large ; 


Yieux, 


old; 


*Jeune, 


young ; 


*Vrai, 


true, real. 


Joli, 


pretty ; 







Those marked with an asterisk are included in the following table. 

2 86. — List of Adjectives having a Different Meaning, 
according as they precede or follow the noun. 

Un homme bon, a good, benevolent 

man (un homme de bien) ; 
Un homme brave, a brave man ; 
Une histoire certaine, a reliable 

story ; 
Une robe chere, an expensive dress /""" 
Une commune voix, a unanimous Une voix commune, an ordinary 
voice ; voice ; 



Un bon homme, a simple, artless 

man ; 
Un brave homme, a worthy man ; 
Une certaine histoire, a certain 

story ; 
Un cher enfant, c dear child ; 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. S 87. 



421 



Un cruel homme, a tiresome man ; 

La derniere annee, the last year (of 
a series) ; 

Une fausse clef, a false key; an imi- 
tation key ; 

Un furieux menteur, an excessive 
liar ; 

Un galant homme, a gentleman; 

Un grand homme, a great man ; 

Le grand air, the air of good society ; 

Le haut ton, a haughty tone; 

Un honnete homme, an honest man; 

Le jeuno Pline, young Pliny ; 

Un malhonnete homme, a dishonest 

man; 
Mauvais air, awkvjard appearance ; 

Un mediant livre, a poor book; 

Morte eau, lovjesi tides ; 

Un nouveau livre, a new book (ano- 
ther book) ; 

Un pauvre liistorien, a wretched his- 
torian ; 

Un plaisant homme, a ridiculous 
man ; 

Un petit homme, a man of small size; 

Mes propres mains, my own hands; 

Un seul enfant, a single child; 

Un simple soldat, a private soldier ; 

Un triste homme, a pitiful man ; 

Un unique tableau, a single pic- 
ture ; 

Un vilain homme, an ugly, unpleas- 
ant man; 

Une vraie histoire, a mere story ; 



Un homme cruel, a cruel man ; 
L'annee derniere, last year ; 

Une clef fausse, a key belonging to 

another lock, (the wrong key) ; 
Un lion furieux, a furious lion ; 

Un homme galant, a man attentive 
to the ladies; 

Un homme grand, a tall man ; 

L'air grand, a noble appearance ; 

Le ton haut, a loud tone ; 

Un homme honnete, a polite man ; 

Pline le jeune, Pliny the younger ; 

Un homme malhonnete, an unpolile 
man ; 

L'air mauvais, malicious appear- 
ance; 

Un livre mediant, a biting, caustic 
book; 

Eau morte, stagnant water ; 

Un livre nouveau, a book recently 
published; 

Un historien pauvre, a historian 
without pecuniary means; 

Un homme plaisant, an agreeable 
man; 

Un homme petit, a mean man ; 

Mes mains propres, my clean hands; 

Un enfant seul, a child alone ; 

Un soldat simple, a foolish soldier ; 

Un homme triste, a sorrowful man ; 

Un tableau unique, a matchless pic- 
ture ; 

Un homme vilain, a sordid, miserly 
man; 



Une histoire vraie, a true history. 
§ 87. — Regimen of Adjectives. 
(1.) The regimen or complement of adjectives is a noun or a verb 
completing or denning their sense. Between the noun and the ad- 
jective comes one of the prepositions, a, de, dans, en, sur, etc : 

Get homme est digne de louange. This man is worthy of praise. 

Ce general est digne de commander. Thai general is worthy to command. 

In the first phrase, louange ; in the second, commander, is the regi-» 
men of the adjective digne. 

(2.) The regimen is not always necessary to the adjective. It is 
added to it only to give it a particular limitation : 

Wiilwul a regimen. With a regimen. 

Cet homme n'est pas content. Cet homme n'est pas content de 



That man is not pleased. 



That man is not pleased with his son. 



422 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE.- 



88. 



(3.) As may be seen in the last sentence, an adjective is not al- 
ways, in French, followed by the same preposition as the correspond- 
ing adjective in English. Thus, after the adjective content, the 
French use the preposition de (of), while after its English represen- 
tative (pleased), the preposition with must be employed. M. Bes- 
cherelle and several other French grammarians, while acknowledging 
the difficulty, give us the consoling assurance, that " L'usage et les 
dictionnaires les feront connaitre" (use and dictionaries will make its 
acquainted with them) ; that is, with the prepositions required after 
the adjectives. As the student will scarcely be saiisfait de cela, we 
give a rule or two on this difficult subject, and add fists of adjectives 
with their proper accompanying prepositions. 

(4.) When an adjective follows the verb etre, used unipersonally, 
the preposition de is placed after that adjective, and before the verb 
folio wing: 



It is sxoeet to die for one's country. 
It is easier to be wise for another 
than for one's self. 

It is more glorious to conquer one's 
self, than to conquer others. 



11 est doux de mourir pour son pays. 

II est plus aiss d'etre sage pour les 
autres que pour soi-meme. 

La Rochefoucauld. 

II est plus glorieux de se vaincre 
soi-meme, que de vaincre les autres. 
Scudert. 

(5.) It should be recollected, that it is only when the verb etre is 
unipersonal, that it thus seems to influence the choice of the prepo- 
sition. In other cases, the adjective must be followed by the prepo- 
sition proper to it. See § 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, below. 

Cela est doux au toucher. That is soft to the touch. 

Cela n'est pas aise d faire. That is not easy to be done (easily 

done.) 
§ 88. — List of Adjectives requiring the Preposition DE. 



Absent de, 
Ambitieux de, 
Amoureux de, 
Avido de, 
Approchaut de, 
Capable de, 
Cheri de, 
Complice de, 
Content de, 
Curieux de, 
Desireux de, 
Dedaigneux do, 
Desole de, 
Different de, 
Digne de, 
Envieux de, 
Eloigne de, 
Esolave de, 



absent (from) 
ambitious of 
in love with 
eager for 

approaching, near 
capable of, 
beloved by 
accomplice in 
pleased with 
curious to 
desirous to, of 
disdaining to 
grieved with 
different from 
worthy of, to 
envious of 
remote, far from 
a slave to 



Exempt de, 
Fache de, 
Fatigue de, 
Fier de, 
Fort de, 
Fou de, 
Glorieux de, 
Honteux de, 
Impatient de, 
Incapable de, 



exempifrom 
sorry for 
tired with, of 
proud of 
confident in 

elyfond of 

of 

ashamed of 
impatient of 
incapable of 



Inconsolable de, inconsolable for 



Indigne de, 
Indigne de, 
Inquiet de, 
Ivre de, 
Las de, 
Mecontent de, 
Parent de, 



unworthy of 
indignant with 
uneasy about 
intoxicated with 
weary of 
displeased with 
related to 



SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. §89,90. 



423 



Plein de, full of Soigneux de, careful of, to 

Ravi de, glad to, of Sur de, sure of 

Rassasie de, satiated with Surpris de, surprised of 

Reconnaissant de, grateful for Tributaire de, tributary to 

Rempli de, filled with Victime de, victim to, of 

Redevable de, indebted for Vide de, void of 

Qui vit content de rien, posse 
toute chose. Boileau 

II n'est pas de Romain, 

Qui ne soit desireux de vous dormer sirous to reach you his hand. 

la main. Cokneille. 

§ 89. — List of Adjectives Requiring the Preposition A 



Re who lives content with a little, 
possesses all. 

There is no Roman that is not de- 



Accessible a, 


accessible to 


Formidable a, 


formidable to 


Accoutume a, 


accustomed to 


Fatal a, 


fatal to 


Adherent a, 


adhering to 


Importun a, 


importunate to 


Agreable a, 


agreeable to 


Impenetrable a, 


impenetrable to 


Ajuste a, 


fitted to 


Indispensable a, 


indispensable to 


Anterieur a, 


prior to 


Interesse a, 


interested in 


Aise a, 


easy to 


Invisible a, 


invisible to 


Ardent a, 


zealous for 


Insensible a, 


insensible to 


Assidu a, 


assiduous to 


Naturel a, 


natural to 


Attentif a, 


attentive to 


Necessaire a, 


necessary to 


Bon a, 


good for, fit for 


Nuisible a, 


hurtful to 


Cher a, 


dear to 


Odieux a, 


odious to 


Conforme a, 


similar to 


Posterieur h, 


posterior to 


Contraire a, 


contrary to 


Preferable a, 


preferable to 


Cruel a, 


cruel towards 


Propice a, 


propitious to 


Difficile a, 


difficult to 


Propre a, 


fit for 


Enclin a, 


prone to 


Rebelle a, 


rebellious towards 


Etranger a, 


a stranger to 


Redoutable 4, 


formidable to 


Exact a, 


exact in 


Semblable a, 


similar to 


FacOe a, 


easy to 


Sujet a, 


subject to 


Favorable a, 


favorable to 







Ignorance is always ready to ad- 
mire itself. 

Insensible to life, insensible to death, 
he does not know when he is awake, 
or when he sleeps. 



L'ignorance toujours est prete a 
s'admirer. Boileatj. 

Insensible d la vie, insensible d la 

mort, 
II ne sait quand il veille, il ne sait 

quand il dort. Racine. 

§ 90. — Adjectives requiring a Different Preposition 
in French and in English, not included in the above 
List, with the following Signification. 

Bon pour, kind towards, de- Ignorant en, not versed in 

voted to 
Celebre pour, par, celebrated for 
Civil envers, polite to 

Quand on est bon pour tout le 
monde, on ne l'est pour personne. 
C Delavigne. 
II fut celebre par sa doctrine, au- 
tant que par sa naissance. 

BOSSUET. 



Indulgent pour, indulgent 
Insolent avec, insolent to 

Poli envers, polite to 

When one is devoted to every body 
one is so towards nobody. 

He was celebrated for his doctrine, 
as well as for his birth. 



424 SYNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE. — §91,92,93. 



§ 91. — Remark. 

It must not be forgotten, that when the verb tire is used uniper- 
sonally before the adjectives contained in the two preceding sections, 
these adjectives become subject to rule (4.) § 87. 

II est indispensable d'etudier It is indispensable to study much, 
beaucoup, pourdevenir savant. to become learned. 

§ 92. — Important Rules. 

(1.) A noun may be followed by two or more adjectives, having 
one and the same regimen, provided these adjectives require the 
same prepositions after them ; thus we may say : 

Ce pere est utile et cher d sa fa- That father is useful and dear to 

mille. Girault-Duvivier. Ms family. 

La religion est necessaire et na- Religion is necessary and natural 

turelle a l'homme. Anonymous. to man. 

These two sentences are correct, because the adjectives, utile, and 
cher, in the first, and necessaire and naturel, in the second, require 
the same preposition, a. 

(2.) We could not in the first of these two sentences, substitute 
the adjective chcri (beloved) for the word cher, and say as in English, 
That father is useful to, and beloved by his family. Such a construc- 
tion in French, is never admissible. We must say, That father is use- 
ful to his family, and is beloved by them ; because the adjective chcri, 
requires the preposition de, or its substitute, the relative pronoun en 
[§ 39, (17.)]. 1 Ce pere est utile a sa famille et en est cheri, i. c, est 
chiri cVelle. 

§ 93. — Determining Adjectives. — Demonstrative Ad- 
jectives. 
The demonstrative adjective, which must not be confounded with 
the demonstrative pronoun [§ 36.], always precedes the noun, and 
must be repeated before every substantive. It assumes the gender 
and number of the word which it determines [§ 20, (1.)] : 

Cet air pur, ces gazons, cette voute That pure air, that turf that chang- 

mobile ; ing arch ; here every thing pleases 

Ici tout plait an cceur, tout enchante the heart, and charms the eyes. 
les yeux. Castel. 

1 The rule, with regard to the regimen of verbs is equally imperative. 
"We could not say in French, as in English. Every week I write letters to, 
and receive letters FROM my brother. We must say, Every week, I write let- 
ters to my brother, and receive some from him. Toutea les semaines, j'ecris 
des lettres a mon frere, et j'en recois de lui. 



syntax op the adjective. — §94,95. 425 

§ 94. — Agreement, Repetition, and Place op the Pos- 
sessive Adjective. 
We have said [§ 21, (2.)] that the possessive adjective assumes the 
gender and number of the object possessed, and (4.) that it must be 
repeated before every noun. The place of the possessive adjective 
is the same in Trench, as in English, that is, before the noun. These 
adjectives must not be confounded with the possessive pronouns 
[§34,(2.)]: 

Mon pere, ma mere, et mes sceurs My father, mother, and sisters have 
sont arrives. arrived. 

§ 95. — Remarks, 
(1.) It has been said [§ 77, (9.)] that the French use the article in- 
stead of the possessive adjective, when alluding to the parts of the 
body. This, however, must only take place where the possession is 
otherwise sufficiently explained. We must say, for instance : 

J'ai mal a la tete. My head aches (I have a pain in 

the head). 
Charles s'est casse le bras. Charles has broken his arm. 

because the possession is sufficiently explained by the pronouns j'e, 
in the first sentence, and se in the second. But, we must say, 

Je vois que mon bras s'enfle, J see that my arm swells. 

because without the mon, the possession of the arm would not be 
indicated. 

(2.) The English expressions, a hooh of mine, a cousin of his, can- 
not be translated literally into French. We must say, un de mes 
amis, one of my friends ; un de ses cousins, one of his cousins. 

Cinna et Carbon, un de ses lieute- Cinna and Carlo, a lieutenant of 
nants, se camperent sur les bords du his, encamped on the banks of the 
Tibre. Veetot. Tiber. 

(3.) In familiar or jocose style, we sometimes use the possessive 
pronoun, mien, tien, sien, without the article, to express the same 
relation : 

A travers d'un mien pre, certain Through a meadow of mine, a 

anon passa. Racine. young ass passed. 

Un mien cousin est juge-maire. A cousin of mine is judge and 

La Fontaine. mayor. 

(4.) When the possessor is an inanimate object, the adjectives son, 
sa, ses, leurs, should be placed before the object possessed only when 
the possessor is the subject of the same proposition : 

La campagne a ses agrements. The country has its pleasures. 

Ces langues ont leurs beautes. Those languages have their beauties. 



426 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. §96,97. 

(5.) When the (inanimate) possessor is not the subject of the 
proposition, in which the possession is expressed, but of a preceding 
one, the article and the relative pronoun en are used [§ 39, (17.) 
§ 110.] : 

Ce livre est bien imprime, le pa- That book is well-printed, its paper 
pier en est excellent. (the paper of it) is excellent. 

J'habite la campagne, les agre- / inhabit the country, its pleasures 
ments en sont sans nombre. (the pleasures of it) are without num- 

ber. 

Ces langues sont riches, fen ad- Those languages are rich ;■ I admire 
mire les beautes. Noel. their beauties (the beauties of them). 

(6.) Exception. The possession may be expressed by son, sa, ses, 
leurs, although the possessor be not the nominative of the same 
proposition, when the object possessed is the regimen of a prepo- 
sition : 

Paris est une ville remarquable ; Paris is a remarkable city ; for- 
les etrangers admirent la beaute de eigners admire the beauty of its edi- 
ses edifices. Noel. fices. 

§ 96. — Numeral Adjectives. 

(1.) The cardinal number used simply to indicate number, not 
order, precedes the noun. 

(2.) When used to indicate order [§ 26, (3.)], the cardinal number 
generally follows the noun (except when indicating the day of the 
month) [§ 26, (1.)] r 

Leon dix. Chapitre dix. Leo the tenth. Chapter ten. 

(3.) The ordinal number is placed before the noun : 

La dixieme annee. The tenth year. 

(4.) It follows the words chapitre, livre, article, page, etc., in the 
division of a book. 

Livre sixieme, chapitre dixieme. Sixth book, tenth chapter. 
§ 97. — Indefinite Adjectives. 

(1.) Quelque is written in three ways : 

1. Followed by a verb, it is written in two words, quel que ; the 
first, quel, which is an adjective, agrees in gender and number with 
the subject of the verb, and the second, que, which is a conjunction, 
is invariable. 

Mais quels que soient ton culte et ta But, whatever may be thy religion 

patrie, or thy country, sleep in security under 

Dors sous ma tente avec securite. my tent. 
Campenon. 
Get homme, quelle que fut sa for- That man, ivhatever his fortune or 

tune ou son merite, ne put reussir his merits might be, could not succeed 

dans ses entreprises. Boniface. in his undertakings. 



SYNTAX OE THE ADJECTIVE. § 97. 427 

2. Followed by a noun, it is then an adjective [§ 30, (12. jj, and 
agrees in number with that noun : 

Princes, quelques raisons que vous Princes, whatever reasons you may 
puissiez me dire. Racine. give me. 

3. Quelque followed by an adjective, or an adverb, is invariable. 
Les jeux de hasard, quelque me- Games of chance, however trifling 

diocres qu'Os paraissent, sont tou- they may seem, are always expensive 
jours chers et dangereux. and dangerous. 

Mme. de G-enlis. 

(2.) Mime is an adjective or an adverb : 

It is an adjective [§ 30, (5.)] : 

1. When it precedes the noun, and means same : 

Vous retombez toujours dans les Tou always fall into the same ap- 
mimes alarmes. Racine. prehensions. 

2. When it follows a noun or pronoun, and has the sense of him- 
self, herself, themselves, even, very, and cannot be turned into de la 
meme maniere, in the same manner : 

Les dieux eux-memes devinrent The gods themselves became jealous 

jaloux des bergers. Fenelon. of the shepherds. 

Ces murs mimes, seigneur, peu- These very walls, my lord, may 

vent avoir des yeux. Racine. have eyes. 

(3.) It is an adverb and is invariable, when it modifies a verb, an ad- 
jective, or a participle. It has then the sense of aussi, also ; quoique, 
although, or, de la meme maniere, in the same manner : 

Frappez, Tyriens et mime Israel- Strike Tyrians and Israelites also. 
ites. Racine. 

Leurs vertus et mime leurs noms . Their virtues, as well as their 
etaient ignores. names, were unknown. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Exempts de maux reels, les hom- When exempt from real misfor- 
mes s'en forment mime de chimeri- tunes, men create to themselves imagi- 
ques. nary ones. 

(4.) We have seen that tout, when an adjective, that is, when sig- 
nifying every, all, is variable [§ 30, (15,) (16)]. 

(5.) Tout, when it means entirely, quite, nothing hut, is an adverb, 
and, as such, invariable : 

Le lion est tout nerfs et muscles. The lion is nothing but nerves and 

Buffon. muscles. 

II montra, pour rimer, des chemins He showed us, in poetry, paths en- 
tout nouveaux. Boileau. lirely new. 



Le cluen est tout zele, lout ardeur, The dog is nothing but zeal, ardor 
tout obeissance. Buffon. and obedience. 

(6.) But, here, is the same invariable word, variable by euphony 
before a feminine word, commencing with a consonant or an h as- 
pirate : 

Les plaisanteries ne sont bonnes Jokes are only good when they are 
que quand elles sont servies toutes served up quite warm. 
chaudes. Voltaire. 



428 SYNTAX OF 1UE PKONOUIf. § 98. 

The following extract (for the historical accuracy of which we do 
not vouch), offers an example on the last rule, and on the excep- 
tion : 

La vanite est sortie toute paree de Vanity issued quite adorned from 

la ih® des femmes, comme Minerve woman's head, as Minerva issued 

est sortie tout armee de la tete de quite armed from the head of Ju- 

Jupiter. Saint-Lambert. piter. 

§ 98. — The Pronoun. — Place of the Personal Pro- 
noun, used as Subject of the Verb. 

(1.) Personal pronouns, used as subjects of verbs, are in French 
as well as in English, placed before them, in affirmative and negative 
sentences : 

J'inventai des couleurs, j'armai la I invented colors, I armed calumny, 

calomnie, I touched his glory; he trembled for 

J'iuteressai sa gloire ; il trembla pour his life. 
sa vie. Racine. 

(2.) In affirmative or negative sentences commencing with au 
moins, a peine, encore, peut-ttre, en vain, du moins, combien, etc., the 
pronoun may elegantly be placed after the verb, although this con- 
struction is not imperative : 

Peut-etre avez-vous raison. Noel. Perhaps you are right. 

Peut-etre vous entrctieudrai-j'e Perhaps I will converse with you 

aussi de l'astronomie. on astronomy. 
Aime-Martin. 

Combien (l'homme) perd-# do IIoiv many wishes he loses, how 

vceux, combien C&it-il de pas ! many steps he takes ! 
La Fontaine. 

(3.) In exclamations, the nominative pronoun is often placed after 
the verb in French, as well as in English 

Puissc-je de mes yeux y voir torn- May I with my own eyes see the 
ber la foudre! Corneille. thunder crush it! 

(4.) In interrogative sentences, the nominative pronoun is placed 
immediately after the verb, in the simple tenses, and between the 
auxiliary and the participle, in the compound: 

Ou Buis-/e ? qu'ai-ye fait ? que dois- Where am I? ivhat have I done ? 
je faire encore ? what have I yet to do ? 

(5.) In interrogative sentences with verbs having only one 1 sylla- 
ble, in the first person singular of the indicative present, and with 
some verbs having more than one syllable, but in which that person 
ends with an s preceded by a consonant, and in a number of other 

1 We may say, however, suis-je? am I? ai-je? have I? que fais-je? 
what am I doing t dois-je? should I? ought I? vois-je? do I see? vais-je? 
do I go? entends-je? do I heart puis-je? can It may It 



SYNTAX OF THE PEOKOUN, — § 99. 429 

verbs, the pronoun je is not placed after the verb. In such case 
another construction must be given to the sentence : 

Esirce que je cours ? Do I run ? literally, Is it that I 

run ? 
Est-ce que je dors ? Do I sleep ? 

Est-ce que je comprends ? Do I understand ? 

(6.) The same construction is admissible, in conversation, with all 
the persons and tenses which may be used interrogatively. 

§ 99. — Repetition and Omission of the Nominative 
Puonoun. 

(1.) It is proper to repeat the personal pronouns je, tu, il, nous, vous, 
ils, before every verb : 

Je lis, f ecris, je me promene. I read, write, and walk. 

(2.) The omission of the pronouns je, tu, il, nous, vous, ils, before 
the second or third verb of a sentence, is a matter of choice and sub- 
ject to the following restrictions : 

Those pronouns must be repeated : 

1. When the verbs are not in the same tense : 

Je pretends et je pretendrai tou- I maintain and will always main- 
jours. tain. 

2. When the first verb is in the negative, and the second in the 
affirmative : 

Je ne plie pas, etje romps. I do not bend, and I break. 

3. When the propositions are connected by conjunctions other 
than et, and ; ou, or; ni, nor; mais, but: 

Nous detestons les mechants, par- We detest the wicked because we 
ce que nous les craignons. fear them. 

(3.) Although we would advise the student to follow the 1st rule 
of this §, particularly with regard to the pronouns je, tu, nous, vous, 
and thereby avoid all uncertainty, we give a few examples, where 
the pronouns after the first are 

Repeated. Omitted. 

Je veux qu'on dise un jour aux II s'arrache les cheveux, se roule 
peuples effrayes, sur le sable, reproche aux Dieux 

II fut des Juifs, il fut une insolente leur rigueur, appelle en vain a son 
race. Eacine. secours la cruelle mort. 

I wish that they may one day say Fenelon. 

to the frightened nations, there were lie (Telemachus) tears his hair, 
Jews, there was an insolent race. rolls on the sand, reproaches the Gods 

with iheir rigor, and calls in vain 
cruel Death to his aid. 



430 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. §100, 



B s'e'coute, il se plait, il s'adonise, 
il s'aime. J. B. Rousseau. 

He listens to himself, he pleases 
himself, he adorns himself he loves 
himself. 

Nous avons dit, et nous allons 
prouver, qu'il n'y a pas de bonheur 
sans vertu. Beauzee. 

We have said, and we are going to 
prove, that there is n 
without virtue. 



L'Eternel est son notn, le monde est 

son ouvrage, 
II entend les soupirs de l'humble 

qu'on outrage, 
Juge tous les niortels avec d'egales 

lois, 
Et du haut de son trone interroge 

les rois. Racine. 

The Eternal is his name, the world 
is his work ; he listens to the sighs 
of the humble oppressed, judges all 
mankind with equal laws, and in- 
terrogates the mighty from his lofty 
throne. 

§ 100. — Place of Personal Pronouns used as Regi- 
mens of Verbs. 
(1.) The personal pronoun used as regime direct, (direct object or 
accusative) [§ 42, (4.)], and the pronoun used as regime indirect, (in- 
direct object) with the preposition to, expressed or understood, in 
English, (dative of the Latin), [§ 42, (3.)] are in French placed be- 
fore the verb : 

Indirect Regimen. 
Je vous parle, / speak to you ; 
Yous leur parlez, you speak to them. 
A ce prix je leur permeta do 
vivre. Racine. 

On that condition I allow them to 
live. 

II faut compter sur l'ingratitude 
des homines, et ne laisser pas do 
hur faire du bien. Fenelon. 

We should expect ingratitude from 
men, but not cease, on that account, to 
do them good. 



Direct Regimen. 
Jo vous vois, I see you; 
Vous les voyez, you see them. 

Madame, enfin le ciel pros de 
vous me rappclle. Racine. 

Madam, at last heaven recalls me 
near you. 

Pauvre science humaine ! 
Un fil tf'anvto helas I commo lo 

moucherou 
Du bon Jean La Fontaine. 

Aime Martin. 

Alas ! poor human science ! a web 
stops thee, like the gnat of the good 
Jean La Fontaine. 



(2.) 1st Exception : When the verb is in the second person singu- 
lar, or in the first or second person plural of the imperative, used af-* 
firmatively, these pronouns must be placed after it : 

Pariez-Zewr, speak to them., 



Make me a Christian and free, 
suhnit to every thing. 

Let us divest ourselves also from a 
vain pride. 

Go, conduct her into the next room. 



Voyez-fos, see them. 

Rends-?7iot chretienne et libre, a 
tout je mo soumets. Voltaire. 

Depouillons-wous aussi d'une vaine 
ii.it,. Boileau. 

Allez, eonduisez-Za dans la cham- 
brc prochaine. Racixe. 

(3.) Remark: But if the verb, in those persons of the imperative, 
be used negatively, the pronouns will be placed according to 
Rule(L): 
Ne les voyez pas, do not see them. Ne leur parlez pas, do not speak to them. 



SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. — 8 100. 



431 



Si Ton vous propose de faire une If they propose to you to commit a 

mauvaise action, ne la faites pas. had action, do it not. 

Dissipe tes douleurs, Dissipate thy grief, and trouble me 

Et ne me trouble pas par ces in- not by these unworthy tears. 

dignes pleurs. Boileatj. 

(4.) 2d Exception : With reflective verbs, when the regime indi- 
rect 1 is a person, the pronoun representing it must follow the verb. 
This must also be the case with the following verbs : 



Aller a., to go to, towards. 



Accourir 



to run to, towards 



Courir a, 

Je m'adresse a lui, a eux. 
Je vais a vous ou a eux. 
Vous courez a lui ou a elle. 
Elle vient d moi ou d vous. 
Vous pensez a nous ou a lui. 
lis songent d eux et d vous. 



Venir a, to come to. 
Boire a, to drink to. 
Penser a, songer a, to think of. 

I apply to him, to them. 
I go to you or to them. 
You run to him or to her. 
She comes to me or to you. 
You think of us or of him. 
Tliey think of tliem and of you. 



(5.) The pronoun, used as the indirect regimen of the French, 
which answers to the indirect object of the English, preceded by a 
preposition other than to, and to the genitive and ablative cases of 
the Latin, is always, in French, placed after the verb, and preceded 
by one of the prepositions, de, of; pour, for ; avec, with, etc. 

Je parle de lui et de vous. 

J'ecris pour lui et pour elle. 
Qui rit d'autrui, 
Doit craiudre qu'en revanche on rie 

aussi de lui. Moliere. 

(6.) When two imperatives, used affirmatively, are joined together 
by the conjunction et, the pronoun regimen of the second may be 
placed before it, or after it, as in English : 



of him and of you. 
I write for him and for her. 

He who laughs at others must fear 
that in their turn, they may also laugh 
at him. 



After the Verb. 

Sortez et laissez-wioi dormir. 

Go out, and let me sleep. 

Marche. et suis-nous, du moins, oh 
l'honneur nous appelle. Boileau. 

March and follow us, at least, where 
honor calls us. 

Cessez, vous dis-je et laissez-moi, 
Madame, executer les volontes du 

roi. Racine. 

Cease, I tell you, and suffer me, 
Madam, to execute the commands of 
the king. 



Before the Verb. 

Sortez et me laissez dormir. 

Go out, and let me sleep. 

Laissez-moi cette chaine. ou m'ar- 
rachez le jour. La Haepe. 

Leave me this chain, or deprive me 
of life. 
Vous attendez le roi ; parlez et lui 

montrez, 
Contre le fils d'Hector tous les Grecs 

conjures. . Racine. 

You expect the king ; speak and de- 
pict to him all the Greeks conspiring 
against the son of Hector. 



1 Object of the verb preceded in English by to, expressed or under- 
stood, dative of the Latin, 



432 SYNTAX OF THE PEONOUN. — § 101. 

§ 101. — Respective Place op the Pronouns, when two 
occur with one verb. 

(1.) When two pronouns occur, one regime direct (accusative) and 
the other regime indirect (dative), the pronoun regime indirect, if not 
in the third person singular or plural, must precede the pronoun re- 
gime direct : 

II me le donnera. He will give it to me. 

II te le pretera. He will lend it to thee. 

lis nous les montreront. They will show them to us. 

Yous nous le direz. You will say it to us. 

Quand je puis obliger, ma joie est When I can oblige, my joy is great 

assez grande, enough, without my wishing to wait 

Pour n'attendre jamais que l'on until they command me (i. e., they 

me le commande. Boursault. command it to me). 

Je vous le dis encore, vous n'aurez I repeat it to you : you can obtain 

l'estime des homines que par une the esteem of men only by real virtue. 
solide vertu. M™e. De Maintenon. 

(2.) When the pronoun regime indirect is in the third person singu- 
lar or plural, it must then be placed after the regime direct : 

On le lui donnera. They will give it to him. 

Vous le lui preterez. You will lend it to him. 

Nous ne le leur preterons pas. We ivill not lend it to them. 

Vous le leur ecrirez. You will write it to them. 

Le plus sur appui do 1'homme est The surest support of man is God, 

Dieu, et vous voulez le lui ravir. and you wish to deprive him of it. 
Boiste. 

(3.) Remark: The reflective pronoun se, used as an indirect regi- 
men, makes an exception to the above rule, as it takes precedence of 
the direct regimen : 

Si les hommes pensent mal les Jf men think ill of each other, at 
uns des autres, du moins ils ne se le least they do not say it to each other. 
disent pas. Anonymous. 

(4.) The Rules (1.) and (2.), also the Exception (3.), apply to the 
imperative used negatively ; but Rule (1.) cannot apply to the im- 
perative used affirmatively. 

Examples of the Imperative used Negatively. 

Ne nous le donnez pas [Rule (1.)]. Bo not give it to us. 

Ne le leur pretez pas [Rule (2.)]. Do not lend it to them. 

Qu'ils no se le disent pas [Remark Let them not say it to themselves. 
(3.)]. 
Du sang de tant de rois c'est l'u- Of the blood of so many kings, it is 

nique heritage ; my only inheritance ; do not envy it 

Ne me Tenviez pas, laissez-moi mon (to me), leave me my portion. 

partage. Voltaire. 

(5.) When the imperative used affirmatively has two regimens, 



SYNTAX OF THE PEONOUH. 8 102, 103. 433 



the pronoun regime direct precedes the regime indirect in all the 
persons : 

Envoyez- fe-moi. 

Donnez-le-nous. 

Qu'ils h lui donnent. 

~Montrez-le-moi, ce mortel privi- 
legie. Ballanche. 

ilets-le-ioi dans l'esprit: qui fait 
mal, trouve mal. Anonymous. 

8 102.- 



Send it to me. 

Give it to me. 

Let them give it to him. 

Show him to me, that privileged 
mortal. 

Put this into thy mind: he who 
does evil, finds evil. 

-Rule. 

When two pronouns in different cases, representing rational be- 
ings, occur, and the pronoun in the regime direct is in the first, or in 
the second person, this pronoun must be placed according to the 
general rules ; and the pronoun in the regime indirect must follow 
the verb, and be preeeded by the proper preposition : 

II nous a recommandes d eux. He has recommended us to them, 

II vous a presente a elle. He has presented you to her. 

Nul ne peut se comparer a lui, pour No one can compare himself to him, 

faire en peu de temps, un travail for doing in a short time, a very 

fort inutile. La Bruyere. useless piece of work. 

§ 103.— Rule. 
(1.) The personal pronouns lui, elle, eux, elles, used as indirect re- 
gimens of verbs and preceded by a preposition, can only relate 
to persons, and not to things. The expressions of or from it; of or 
from them, when relating to things, should be rendered by en [§ 39, 
(17.)]: 



J'era parle ; j'era donne. 

J'aime trop la valeur, pour en etre 
jaloux. La Harpe. 

Celui qui est dans la prosperite 
doit craindre d'en abuser. 

Fenelon. 

(2.) The relative pronoun y [§ 39, (18.) § 111], is used in French 
in relation to things, for the indirect regimen, expressed in English 
by at or to (dative). It means at or to it ; or to them ; thereto, etc. : 



I speak of it, of them; I give of it 
{some). 

I prize valor too highly to he jealous 
of it. 

He who is in prosperity should fear 
to abuse it. 



J'y songerai, / will think of it. 

C'est lorsque nous somn 
de notre pays, que nous sentons 
surtout l'instinct qui nous y at- 
tache. Chateaubriand. 

Tous nos jours vont a la mort, le 
dernier y arrive. Montaigne. 



Les choses de la terre ne valent 
pas qu'on sty attache. Nicole. 



Faites-y attention, Pay attention to it. 
It is when we are far from our 
country that we feel, above all, the in- 
stinct which attaches us to it. 

All our days travel towards death, 
the last one arrives at it (reaches 
it). 

The things of the earth are not 
worth our attachment to them. 



19 



434 STSTTAX OF THE PRONOUN. — §104,105,106. 

(3.) T is sometimes used adverbially, -with the sense of la, there. 

Allez-vous a New-York ? Do you go to New York ? 

J'y vais, 1 go (there). 

(4.) In order to avoid its meeting with the vowel i, y is not used 
in connection with the future and conditional of aller, to go ; we say : 
J'irais, nous irions, instead of j'y irais, nous y irions, etc., I should 
go there, we should go there, etc. 

§ 104.— Place of En and Y. 

(1.) The place of en and y is the same as that prescribed by Eule 
(1.) § 100, for the personal pronouns. They are also subject to Ex- 
ception (2.) and Remark (3.) of the same §. See examples above. 

(2.) En and y are always placed after the other pronouns re- 
gimes : 

II nous en a parle. He has spoken to us of it. 

U lui en a dit quelque chose. He has told him something of it 

Tarlez-lui-en. Speak to him of it. 

Ne nous en parlez pas. Do not speak to us of it. 

Je Vy ai renvove. J have referred him to it. 

Henvoyez-nous-y. Refer, or send us back to it. 

Ne nous y renvoyez pas. Do not refer us to it. 

§ 105. — Repetitions of the Pronouns n£GiyrES. 
These pronouns must, in French, be repeated before every verb : 

Ah ! mon enfant, que je voudrais Ah! my child, how I would like to 

bien vous voir un peu, vow enten- see you for a short time, to hear you, 

dre, vous embrasser. vous voir pas- to embraceyou, see you pass. 
ser. Mme. De Sevigxi;. 

Je veux le voir, le prier, Represser, 1 will see him, entreat him, press 

Z'importuner, le flechir. him, importune him, bend him. 
Bescherelle. 

§ 106. — The Possessive Pronoun. 
(1.) The possessive pronoun, in French, is always preceded by 
the article [§ 34, (2.) (3.)] which, as well as the pronoun itself, agrees 
in gender and number with the noun represented [§ 35, (1.)]: 

L'ambition ni la fumee ne tou- Neither ambition nor smoke have 

client point un coeur comme le mien, power on such a heart as mine. 
J. J. Rousseau. 

An lieu de deplorer la mort des Instead of bewailing the death of 

mitres, je veux apprendre de vous a others, I wish to learn from you how 

leuJre la mienne sainte. to render my own holy. 



(2.) The pronouns le noire, le voire [§ 34, (3.)], etc., unlike the 
adjectives notre, votre, etc., always take the circumflex accent: 

La musique des anciens Grecs The music of the ancient Greeks 
ctait tres different© de la ndtre. was very different from ours. 

Yoltaiee. 



SYNTAX OF THE PEOlfOUIf. — §l°f« 435 

(3.) When the English possessive pronouns, mine, thine, etc., 
come after the verb to be, they are often rendered into French by 
the indirect pronouns, a moi, a toi : 

Ce livre est a moi. That book is mine. 

Ces plumes sont-elles a vous ? Are these pens yours 1 

§ 107. — The Demonstrative Pronoun. 
(1.) The demonstrative pronouns [§ 36], can never be placed be- 
fore nouns. They merely represent them : 

La meilleure lecon est celle des The best lesson is that of examples. 
exemples. La Harpb. 

N'oublie jamais les bienfaits que Never forget the benefits which thou 

tu as recus ; oublie promptement hast received ; forget quickly those 

ceux que tu as accordes. Boiste. which thou hast conferred. 

(2.) The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, as has been said [§ 37, 
(2.)], are often used absolutely, not only in the nominative, but also 
in the regimes, direct and indirect. They have then the sense of he 
who, him whom, of whom ; that which, of which. They apply, in this 
sense, as well to things as to persons : 

Celui qui compte dix amis, n'en He who reckons ten friends, has not 

a pas un. Malesherbes. one. 

On ne saurait forcer celui qui ne We cannot compel him who will not. 
veut pas. 

L'harmonie la plus douce est la The sweetest harmony is the voice 

voix de celle gw'on aime. of her whom we love. 
La Bruyere. 

(3.) The French use celui, celle, ceux, celles, indifferently for this, 
that. When they institute a contrast or a comparison, they suffix 
the adverbs 1 ci (ici) and Id to the pronouns [§ 37, (3.)] : 

Corueille nous assujettit a ses Gorneille subjects us to his charac- 

caracteres et a ses idees; Eacine ters and to his ideas; Racine con- 

se conforme aux notres. Celui-ld forms himself to ours. That one {the 

peint les hommes, comme ils de- former) paints men as they should be, 

vraieut etre, celui-ci les peint tels this one (the latter) paints them as 

qu'ils sont. La Bruyere. they are. 

(4.) Celui-ci, celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci, may be used absolutely in 
French in the sense of this one, that one, etc. 

On la vit, toutes les semaines, es- Every week, she was seen wiping 

surer les larmes de celui-ci, pour- the tears of this one, providing for 

voir aux besoins de celui-ld. the wants of that one. 
Flechier. 

1 The same adverbs produce the same difference in meaning with the 
demonstrative adjectives ce, cet, etc. They are not placed immediately- 
after those adjectives, but after the nouns which they determine: cet 
homme-ci, this man, cet homme-la, that man. The commencement of 
Remark (3.) applies also to the adjectives ce, cet, cette, ces, etc. 



436 SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUN. — § 108. 

(5.) Ceci and cela are always used absolutely. They serve to 
point out things only. They can, of course, never be prefixed to a 
noun [§ 37, (5.)] : 

Tant que le jour est long, il gronde TJie livelong day he mutters be- 

entre ses dents, tween his teeth, do this, do that, go, 

Pais ceci, fais cela, va, viens, monte, come, go up, come down. 
descends. Begnard. 

Je suis un peu surpris de tout ceci. J am a little surprised at all this. 

Massillon. 

Yous n'avez pu desavouer cela. You have not been able to disavow 

Pascal. that. 

§ 108. — Remarks on the Demonstrative Pronoun CE. 

(1.) Ce, when used as a demonstrative pronoun, is almost always 
construed with the verb tire, or followed by a relative pronoun : 

C'est un poids bien pesant qu'un A great name is a very heavy weight 

grand nom a soutenir. to sustain. 
Montesquieu. 

Ce qui me plait c'est sa modestie. That which pleases me is her mod- 

Levizac. esiy. 

(2.) Ce is used for he, she, they, preceding any part of the verb to 
le, when that verb is followed by a noun, or an adjective used sub- 
stantively and preceded by the, a or an, or a possessive or demon- 
strative adjective. 

(3.) Observe, that the verb ttre following the pronoun ce, is put in 
the plural, when the noun following that verb is plural The pro- 
noun ce, however, remains unchanged. 

(Test un trompeur. He is a deceitful man. 

C'est la femme que je cherehe. She is the woman whom I seek. 

C'etaient mes amis. They were my friends. 

Ce seraient paroles exquises, They would be exquisite words, 

Si c'etait un grand qui parlat. If a great man were to speak them. 

MOLlfcRE. 

NYtaient-ce pas les memes horn- Were they not the same men ? 
mes ? Chateaubriand. 

All those sentences are elliptical ; a noun being understood after 
the ce : 

Get homme est un trompeur. That man is a deceitful one. 

Cette femme est la femmo que jo That woman is the woman whom I 
clierche. seek. 

(4.) This is, that is, these are, those are, may also be rendered by 
e'es/ ici, ce sont la : 

(Test ici la place. Tliis is the place. 

Ce sont Id mes enfants. Those are my children. 

Yoici, voihi, are, however, to be preferred to c'est ici, etc. : 

Void la place. This is the place. 

Voild mes enfants. Those are my children. 



SYNTAX OF THE PKONOUN. — §109. 437 

(5.) Ce answers to the English pronoun it, when this latter word 
stands as the nominative of the verb to be, without definite reference 
to an antecedent : 

Ce n'est que par les sens que It is only through the senses that the 

l'ame peut s'instruire. Fontanes. mind can receive instruction. 

Ce fut d'une retraite de patres et It was from a refuge for shepherds 

d'aventuriers, que sortirent les con- and adventurers, that emerged the 

querants de l'univers. Rollin. conquerors of the world. 

Cest un defaut capital qu'il faut This is a capital defect which should 

eviter dans quelque sujet que ce soit. be avoided in whatever subject it may 

Voltaire. be. 

(6.) When the verb etre, however, is used unipersonally, and fol- 
lowed by an adjective [§ 87, (3.)], the pronoun it is not rendered by 
ce, but by the pronoun used with all unipersonal verbs (il) : 

II est necessaire d'etudier. It is necessary to study. 

11 est plus difficile pour les na- It is more difficult for nations than 

tions que pour les individus, de re- for individuals to recover the esteem 

couvrer l'estime de leurs voisins, of their neighbors, when they have 

quand elles Tout perdue. Boiste. lost it. 

§ 109. — The Relative Pbonoun. 
■ (1.) The relative pronoun que, tuhom, which, can in French never 
be suppressed like the corresponding English pronouns i 1 

Les louanges que nous donnons, The praises (which) we give, have 

se rapportent toujours par quelque always in some way a relation to our' 

chose a nous-memes. selves. 
Massillon. 

(2.) The pronouns quel, que, quoi, lequel, represent the English 
pronouns which or what used interrogatively. 

1. Quel is used before a noun in a determinative sense : 

Quel livre lirons-nous ? What or which book shall we readf 

Quel est done votre mal ? What then is your ailment ? 

Molieee. 

2. Que is used before a verb : 

Que dites-vous ? What do you say ? 

3. Quoi is used as an exclamation : 

Quoi ! est-ce vous ? What ! is it you ? 

4. Lequel, used interrogatively, means which one : 

Voici deux plumes ; laquelle vou- Here are two pens ; which (which 
lez-vous ? one) will you have ? 

(3.) Qui is also used interrogatively for the regime direct, and 

1 The conjunction that, is often omitted in English ; its equivalent que, 
must always be expressed in French. 

Je crois qu' il est ici. I believe (that) he is here. 



438 SYNTAX OF THE PEONOUN. §110-112. 

preceded by a preposition, for the regime indirect. It then means 
whom, of whom, to whom, whose, etc. : 

Qui avez-vous vu ? Wliom have you seen 1 

De qui tenez-vous cette nouvelle? From whom have you this news ? 

A qui est ce livre ? Whose book is this ? 

§ 110.— The Pronoun En. 

(1.) We have already [§ 39, (17.) § 95, (5.) § 103, Rule (1.)] made 
several remarks on this pronoun. 

(2.) En signifies of it, from it, with it, about it, of them, from them, 
etc., expressed or understood. Though en is by some French writers 
often used in relation to persons, their example should be imitated 
in such cases only as that presented by the example in § 92, (2.) 

(3.) En, used as an equivalent for the English some or any, ex- 
pressed or understood, preserves its nature of an indirect regimen, 
and has, in the same manner as the French article placed before a 
noun used partitively, the sense of of it, of them ; the word partie 
being understood : 

Avez-vous des pommes ? Have you apples f 

That is, some, or rather, of the, apart of the apples. 

J'en ai. 7" have, I have some ; I have of 

them or I have (a part) of them. 

(4.) En sometimes recalls the whole or part of a proposition : 

L'on ne saurait voir, sans en etre We cannot see, without being 

pique, piqued, anotlier person in possession 

Posseder parun autre un bien qu'on of goods ivhich we have failed in ob- 

a manque. Moliere. iaining. 

N'era disputons plus, chacun a sa Let us no longer argue about this, 

pensee. Moliere. every one has his own opinion. 

§ 111.— The Pronoun Y. 

Some remarks have already been made on this pronoun [§ 39, 
(18.) § 103, (2.)]. Y means to it, at it, to them, at them. It is seldom 
used in relation to persons or animals, but frequently in relation to 
things : 

Je recois votre lettre, ma chere I receive your letter, my dear child, 

enfant, et j'y fais rtiponso avec and answer it (inake answer thereto) 

precipitation. M'»e- de Sevigxe. in haste. 

Tirer vanite de quelque chose, To feel vanity on account of any 

e'est prouver qu'on rx'y est pas thing, is proving that we are not ac- 

accoutume. Boiste. customed to it. 

Chargez-vous de cette affaire; Take this affair upon yourself; 

douuez-y tous vous soins. give all your care to it. 
BOXIFACE. 

§ 112. — Place of the Pronouns En and Y. 
See § 104, (1.) (2.) 



SYNTAX OF THE PEONOUN. §H3. 439 

§ 113. — The Indefinite Pkonoun On [§ 41, (4.)]. 

(1.) On, which is very extensively used in the French language, is 
said only of persons. The verb, of which it is always the nomina- 
tive, must be in the singular. Tins pronoun is of the masculine 
gender. [See (2.)] On is used in French for people, one, some one, 
we, they, whenever these words have a general and indefinite mean- 
ing, and do not refer to any particular word : 

On pardonne aisement le mal We {people, they, etc) easily for- 

involontaire. De la Botjtraye. give involuntary injuries. 

On cherche les rieurs, et moi je People (they, we) seek laughing or 

les evite. La Fontaine. merry people, and I avoid them. 

Another translation of the above sentences, will show us that the 
pronoun on often enables the French to make use of the active voice, 
which they always prefer to the passive. 1 Thus, the two examples 
last given may be rendered as follows : 

Active Voice in French. Passive Voice in English. 

On pardonne aisement le mal Involuntary injuries are easily for- 
involontaire. given. ' 

On cherche les rieurs, mais moi Merry or joyful people are generally 
je les evite. sought; for my part I avoid them. 

A few more examples, from some of the best French authors, 
elucidating the use of this pronoun, will be useful to the student : 

Quand on est chretien, de quelque A Christian, of whichever sex he 

sexe que Von soit, il n'est pas permis may be, is not allowed to be cowardly. 
d'etre lache. Penelon. 

On peut etre honnete homme, et One may be a worthy man, and 

faire mal des vers. Moliere. make bad verses. 

On aime peu celui qui n'ose aimer We feel but little love for him who 

personne. Delille. dares love nobody. 

A-t-on jamais pleure d'avoir fait Have we ever grieved on account 

son devoir ? Chamfort. of having done our duty ? 

Quand on a meme but, rarement Those who have the same aim, 

on s'accorde. Lebrun. rarely agree. 

Artistes, ecrivains, poetes, si vous Artists, writers, poets, if you air 

vous copiez toujours, on ne vous ways copy each other, no person will 

copiera jamais. copy you. 
Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

(2.) If the word on denotes definitely a female, the adjective re- 
lating to it, takes the feminine termination : 

Quand on est belle, on ne l'ignore When one (a lady) is handsome, 
pas. L'Academie. she is not ignorant of it. 

1 On dit, it is said; on rapporte, it is related; on craint, it is feared; 
etc. Cela se fait ainsi, literally, that makes itself thus, that is made in this 
manner, etc. 



440 SYNTAX OF THE TEEB. — § 114. 

(3.) The pronoun on, must be repeated before every verb : 

On leve l'ancre, on part, on fuit loin They raise the anchor, they depart, 

de la terre, they flee far from the land, already 

On decouvrait deja. les bords de they discovered the shores of England. 
l'Angleterre. Voltaire. 

§ 114. — The Verb. — Agreement of the Verb with its 
Subject. 
(1.) The verb agrees with its nominative or subject, whether that 
nominative precedes or follows : 

L'homme est ne pour regner sur Man is lorn to reign over all the 

tous les animaux. Voltaire. animals. 

Les hommes sont encore enfants a. Men are still children at sixty. 
soixante ans. Aubert. 

Par ces portes sortaient les fieres Through those gates issued the 

legions. Saint- Victor. proud legions. 

(2.) When a verb has two or more singular nominatives connected 
by the conjunction et, the verb is put in the plural : 

La colere et la precipitation sont Anger and precipitation are two 
deux choses fort opposees a la pru- things very much ojiposed to pru- 
dence. Fenelon. dence. 

La violence et la vertu ne peuveut Violence and virtue have no power 

rien l'uno sur 1' autre. Pascal. over each other. 

(3.) When a verb has several singular nominatives not connected 
by et, it is put in the singular or in the plural, according to circum- 
stances : 

1. It is put in the singular, if the nominatives are in some way 
synonymous : 

La douceur, la bonte du grand The mildness, the goodness of the 

Henri, a eto cele'breo do inille great Henry, has been celebrated by a 

louanges. Pelisson. thousand praises. 

D'ou pent venir cct ennui, ce Whence can proceed that ennui, 

degout ? that disgust ? 
Colin d'IIarleville. 

(2.) When, in a series of nominatives, the last has more force 
or interest attached to it, and therefore, makes us, as it were, over- 
look the others : 

Ce sacrifice, votro interet, votre Tliis sacrifice, your interest, your 
honneur, Dieu vous le commande ! honor, God commands it ! 

3. The verb is put in the plural, when the affirmation is intended 
to be made of all the nominatives taken collectively, and not of each 

in particular : 

La douceur, les soupirs de cette TJie sweetness, the sighs of that un- 
femme infortunee ne purent le fortunate woman could not move 
flechir. Wailly. him. 



SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. § 115,116. 441 

Savez vous, si demain, Do you know, if to-morrow, his 

Sa liberie, ses jours, seront en votre liberty, his life, will be in your 
main? Bacine. power ? 

(4.) On the form of the verb when preceded by several subjects 
connected by ou, See Lesson 84, 2, 3. 

§ 115. — Number of the Veeb aftee a Collective Noun. 
(1.) Every verb, having, as its subject, a general collective noun 
[§ 3, (6.)], preceded by the article, such as la totalite, I'infiniie, etc., 
takes the number of that noun : 

L'armee des infideles fut entiere- The army of the infidels was en- 

ment detruite. L'Academie. tirely destroyed. 

La multitude des bonnes choses The multitude of the good things 

que Ton trouve dans un ouvrage, which we find in a work, makes us 

fait perdre de vue la multiplicite lose sight of the multiplicity of the 

des mauvaises. Caminade. bad ones. 

(2.) When a partitive collective noun [§ 3, (6.)] occurs as the sub- 
ject of a proposition, the verb agrees with that noun, if it occupies 
the first rank in the thought of the speaker or writer. 

The verb agrees, on the contrary, with the plural noun following 
the collective word, if the collective acts only a secondaiy part, or 
if it is employed only to add an accessory idea of number : 

Agreement with the Collective. Agreement with the following Noun. 

Une troupe d'assassins entra dans Une troupe de nymphes couron- 

la ekambre de Coligny. nees de fleurs, nageaient autour de 

Voltaiee. son char. Fenelon. 

A gang of assassins entered Co- A troop of nymphs, crowned with 

ligny's chamber. flowers, were swimming around her 
chariot. 

Une nuee de traits obscurcit l'air. Une nuee de barbares desolereni 

le pays. L' Academe. 

A cloud of arrows darkened the A cloud of barbarians desolated the 

air. country. 

Cette espece de paons parait avoir Cette espece de chiens qu'on ap- 

eprouve les memes effets par la pelle chiens de Laconie, ne vivent 

meme cause. Buffon. que dix ans. Boileau. 

That species of peacocks seems to That species of dogs which they 

have experienced the same effects call Laconian dogs, live only ten 

through the same cause. years. 

§ 116. — Number of the Veeb Etee aftee the Peo- 

noun Ce. 
(1.) The verb etre, preceded or followed by ce, as the grammatical 
subject, takes the number of the noun placed in apposition with that 
pronoun [§ 108, (3.)] : 

Ce sont les mceurs qui font la It is morals which form good com- 
bonne compagnie. La Chaussee. pany. 



442 SYKTAI OF THE VERB. — § llY, 118T. 

Sont-ce des religieux et des pre- Are they monks and priests who 
tres qui parlent ainsi ? sont-ce des speak so ? are they Christians 1 
Chretiens ? Pascal. 

(2.) The verb etre may also be put in the plural, when the pro- 
nouns eux and dies are put in apposition with the pronoun ce. This 
rule, however, is optional, as the examples will show. Before nous 
and vous similarly plaoed, the verb is always in the singular ; c'est 
nous : c'est vous. 

Singular. Plural. 

Cest eux qui ont bati ce superbe Ce sont eux qui viennent. 
labyrinthe. Bossuet. Bescherelle. 

It is they who have built that su- It is they who come. 
perb labyrinth. 

§11 7. — The Verb relating to several Subjects in Dif- 
ferent Persons. 
A verb having several subjects in different persons, is put in the 
plural, and assumes the termination of the first person in preference 
to that of the second, and that of the second in preference to that of 
the third. It may then be preceded by the plural pronoun of the 
person preferred, recapitulating, as it were, all the other subjects : 

Totro pere et moi, nous avons ete Tour father and I, have long been 

longtemps enneniis l'uu de l'autre. enemies to each other. 
Fenelon. 

Allez ; vous ct vos semblables Go ; you and such as you are not 

n'etes point faits pour etre trans- fit to be transplanted. 
plantes. Montesquieu. 

§ 118. — Use of the Tenses. — The Present of the 
Indicative. 

(1.) This tense denotes what exists, or is taking place at the time 
we speak : 

Jelis; vous parlez. I read ; you speak. 

(2.) The French have only one form of the indicative present : 

Jo lis means, therefore, / read, do read, or am reading. 

(3.) The indicative present is used in French, as well as in Eng- 
lish, for expressing things which are and will always be true : 

Dieu est eternel, sa puissance est God is eternal, his power is bound- 
sans homes, et sa cle'raence est less, and his clemency is great. 
grande. Gikault-Duvivier. 

(4.) It is often used to express a proximate future : 

Jo suis do retour dans un mo- I shall be back in a mommt. 
mcnt. MouftRE. 

Si Titus a parle, s'il Yepouse, je If Titus has spoken, if he marries 

pars. Racine. her, I go (will go). 



SYNTAX OF THE VERB. — §119,120. 443 

(5.) The present is frequently used for the past, to awaken atten- 
tion, and place the event, as it were, before the reader : 

J'ai vu, seigneur, j'ai vu votre I saw, my lord, I saw your un- 

malheureux fils, fortunate son dragged by the horses 

Traine par les chevaux que sa main lohich his own hand has fed ; he 

a nourris; wishes to recall them, but his voice 

II veut les rappeler, mais sa voix frightens them. 
les effraie. Racine. 

§ 119. — The Imperfect. 

(1.) The imperfect, or simultaneous past,- is used to express some- 
thing which was in progress, while another thing was taking place. 
It leaves the beginning, duration, and end of an action undeter- 
mined : 

J'ecrivais, quand je recus votre I was writing, when I received 
lettre. your letter. 

(2.) The French imperfect, as may be seen in the above example, 
represents the English past tense formed of the auxiliary to be, and 
the participle present of a principal verb. 

(3.) The imperfect is also used to express repeated or customary 
action. It may then often be rendered in English by the infinitive 
of the verb preceded by " used to" : 

Lorsque fetais a Londres, $allais When I was in London, I walked 

me promener le matin, ensuite je {used to walk) in the morning, after- 

dtnais, et je passais le reste de la wards dined (usually dined), and 

journee a lire et a ecrire spent (usually) the remainder of the 

day in reading and writing. 

(4.) The use of this tense will be further explained in the next 
Section. 

§ 120. — The Past Definite. 
(1.) The past definite indicates an action performed at a time en- 
tirely past : 

J'allai a Londres, oil je vis votre / went to London, where I saw 

pere; je finis mes affaires dans your father ; I finished my businees 

cette ville, et revins aussitot ici. in that city, and returned hither im- 
mediately. 

M. un tel ecrivit hier au soir un Mr. such-a-one wrote last evening 

sixain a Mademoiselle une telle. six verses to Miss such-a-one. 
Moliere. 

(2.) The past definite can only be used, as we have seen above, 
when the time at which an action took place is entirely elapsed. 
We cannot, therefore, use it in connection with the words to-day, 
this morning, this week, this month, this year, etc., [See § 121, Past 



444 SYSTAX OF THE TEEE. § 120. 

Indefinite.] We may use it in speaking of yesterday, last week, last 
year, etc. : 

Je vous envoie, mon eher frere, I send you, my dear brother, a let- 
une lettre que j'ecrivis hier pour ter which J wrote yesterday for l£c- 
Madame de Laval. Fenelox. dame de Laval. 

(3.) The imperfect may almost always be rendered in English by 
the participle present of the verb and the auxiliary to be ; or by pre- 
fixing " used to" to the infinitive mood. The past definite can never 
be so rendered. 

(4.) The imperfect might be called the descriptive tense of the 
French. 

(5.) The past definite might be called the narrative tense. It ex- 
presses that which took place at some time fully past. We will 
endeavor to illustrate this difference between these two tenses: — A. 
traveller has entered a wood and discovered a retired cottage ; he 
wishes to describe what he saw there, and makes use of the imper- 
fect or descriptive tense ; he says : 

Un vieillard se promenail sous les An old man was walking under the 

arbres; il teaait un livre a la main; trees; he held (was holding) a book in 

de temps eu temps, il elevait les his hand; from time to time he raised 

yeux vers le ciol, ou les couvrait do his eyes towards heaven, or concealed 

la main, et semblait s'abimer dang them with his hand, and seemed to 

une profonde reverie. Devant la sink into a profound reverie. Before 

porte de la cabane etait assise une the door of the hut, sat (icas sitting) 

femme qui bercail un enfant sur ses a female, rocking (who was rocking) a 

genoux ; clle etait pale ; ses cheveux child on her knees ; she was pale ; Iter 

flotlaient au gre du vent ; des larmes hair waved (was leaving) at the mercy 

coulaient le long de ses joues, etc. of the wind; tears flowed (were flow- 
ing) down her cheeks, etc. 

The traveller has here drawn a picture of what presented itself to 
his eyes, as he approached the cottage. Not content with represent- 
ing merely the then present situation of things, he wishes also to 
narrate what took place. lie has described the theatre on which the 
occurrence took place, which lie is going to relate ; he now proceeds 
to the narrative, and uses the past definite or narrative tense : 

Je m'approchai du vieillard ; lors- I approached the old man ; when he 

qu'il m'apercut, il s'avanca vers moi, perceived me he came towards me, 

me sahta. et me pria de no pas trou- greeted me, and besought me not to 

ile retraite du mal- disturb this peaceful retreat of the 

heur. II retourna a ] i cabane, prit unfortunate. He returned to the cnt- 

l'enfant des bras de la femme, et tage, took the child from the woman's 

rentra; elle le suivit, etc. arms and went in; she followed him. 



YNTAX OE THE V E E B . §121. 



445 



Another example might be taken from La Fontaine's well-known 
fable : 



THE RAVEN AND THE FOX. 

Master raven perched upon a tree, 
held (was holding) in his beak a 
cheese; waster fox, attracted by the 
smell, addressed him nearly in thefd- 
words. 



LE CORBEAH ET LE RENARD. 

Maitre corbeau sur un arbre per- 

che, 
Tenait en son bee un fromage ; 
Maitre renard, par l'odeur alleehe, 
Lui lint a peu pres ce langage. 

Here the poet uses the imperfect of tenir in describing the situa- 
tion in which the fox found the raven, but in relating the action of 
the fox, La Fontaine uses the narrative tense of the same verb. 

The commencement of the first book of Telemaque, offers an ex- 
cellent illustration of what we have here advanced, on the use of the 
imperfect, and the past definite. 

§ 121. — The Past Indefinite. 

(1.) The past indefinite expresses an action entirely completed, 
but performed at a time of which some part is not yet elapsed, as to- 
day, this month, this year, etc 

day 



Le roi m'o nomine aujourd'hui ar- 
ckeveque de Cambray. Fenelon. 

Ce matin j'ai trouve le pave si glis- 
saut, que j'ai pense que si je veuais 
a, tomber sur le bras droit, je serais 
tout a fait desempare. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

Je Vai defendu (see (2.) below) cent 
fois de racier ton mediant violon; 
cependant, je Vai entendu ce matin — 
Ce matin ? Ne vous souvient-il pas 
que vous me le mites [§ 120 (2.)] 
lrier en pieces ? Palaprat. 

(2.) The past indefinite is also used with regard to a time en 
tirely past, but not specified : 



The Mng appointed me 
archbishop of Cambray. 

This morning /found the street so 
slippery, that I thought, in case 1 
happened to fall on my right arm, 1 
should then be completely helpless. 

I have forbidden thee a hundred 
times to scrape thy wretched violin ; ne- 
vertheless. I heard thee this morning. 
— 27ms morning! Bo you not re- 
collect that you broke it to pieces yes- 
terday ? 



Les fruits de la terre ont ete la 
premiere nourriture des hommes. 
Giratjlt-Duvivier. 

Les Prancais ont gagne la bataillo 
de Marengo. 



27ie fruits of the earth were the 
first aliments of mankind. 

Tlie French gained the battle of 
Marengo. 



(3.) When the time is specified and entirely elapsed, the past in- 
definite is by many of the best French writers, used indifferently 
with the past definite *. 

Past Definite : Past Indefinite. 

Huit jours apres son depart, il Je vous ai ecrit, il y a quinze 

m'ecrivit unc lettre. jours. The Same. 
Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

A week after his departure, he ivrote 1 wrote to you a fortnight ago. 
me a letter. 



446 SYNTAX OF THE Y E E B . §122,123,124. 

Je fus bien fache bier, ma cbere Hier en travaillant a, mon qua- 

cousine, de vous avoir quittee avec trieme dialogue, j'ai eprowe un vrai 

tant de precipitation. Fenelox. plaisir. Miraeeau. 

I was very sorry yesterday, my Yesterday, ivhile working at my 

dear cousin, for having left you in so fourth dialogue, I experienced real 

much haste. pleasure. 

(4.) When the first verb of a sentence is put in the past indefinite, 
every other verb of that sentence, and of the sentences referring to 
it, should be in the same tense : 

Ou avez-vous ete t WJiere have you been ? 

J'ai d'abord ete d l'eglise, ensuite J first went to church, and then 
je suis venu diner. came home to dinner. 

§ 122. — The Past Axteeioe. 

The past anterior expresses what took place immediately before 
another event which is also past, the latter event being usually the 
result of, or dependent upon the former : 

Quand feus reconnu mon erreur, Wlien I had perceived my error, I 

je fus honteux des mauvais precedes was ashamed of my lad conduct tc- 
que j'avais eus pour lui. wards him. 

GrlRAULT-DuVTVTER. 

See (3.) of the § below. 

§ 123. — The Pluperfect. 

(1.) The pluperfect marks an event not only past in itself, but ag 
past with regard to another past event : 

J'avais dejeiine, quand vous vintes I had breakfasted, when you came 
me demander. Girault-Dcvivier. to inquire for me. 

(2.) The pluperfect having as its auxiliary the imperfect of the 
verbs avoir, or tire, partakes of the signification of that tense. It 
may, therefore, often be used to denote customary action : 

Des que j'avais lu quelques pages, As soon as 1 had read a few pages, 
je me promenais. / used to take a walk. 

In such cases it generally precedes or follows another verb in the 
imperfect. 

(3.) When the action is not a customary one, and the sentence 
commences with one of the adverbs, quand, lorsque, aussitot que, des 
que, etc., the past anterior is generally used : 

Des que jVus lu quelques pages, As soon as 1 had read a few pages, 
je sortis. ' I went out. 

§ 124.— The Two Futuees. 
(1.) The future simple is used to signify what will be, or will take 
place, at a time not yet come : 
Yotre frere pariira demain. Tour brother will go to-morrow. 



SYNTAX OF THE VEKB. — § 125,126. 447 

(2.) The future is used, in French, after an adverb of time, in cases 
where the English use the present of the indicative : 

Quand vous viendrez, vous appor- When you come, you will bring my 
terez mon livre. look. 

(3.) It has sometimes the sense of the imperative in sentences like 
the following : 

Croira qui voudra l'historien Ca- Believe who will the historian Ca- 

pitolin et quelques autres ecrivains, pitolinus and several other writers, 

qui font danser les elephants sur la who make elephants dance on a rope. 
corde. Feraud. 

(4.) The future anterior is used to signify what will have been at 
a future period ; it is also used after an adverb of time in cases where 
the past indefinite is used in English : 

Quand faurai fini mes affaires, je Wlien I have finished my affairs, 1 
vous irai voir. Girault-Duvtvier. will go and see you. 

§ 125. — The Two Conditionals. 
(1.) The conditional present denotes what would take place under 
a certain condition : 

Nous gouterions bien des jouis- We should have many enjoyments, 

sances, si nous savions faire un bon if we knew how to make a good use 

usage du temps. of time. 
GlRAEXT DUVIVIER. 

(2.) The conditional past denotes what would have taken place, 
at a time past, if the condition on which it depended, had been ful- 
filled : 

II serait alle a la campagne, si le He would have gone into the coun- 
temps le lui avait permis. try, if the weather had allowed him. 

(3.) The two futures, and the two conditionals, cannot, in French, 
follow the conjunction si, meaning in case that. The indicative pres- 
ent is then used instead of the future, and the imperfect instead of 
the conditional. This rule is often violated by the French, but sel- 
dom by the Americans or English, who have acquired a good knowl- 
edge of the French language. 

§ 126. — The Imperative. 
(1.) The imperative is used to express a command, exhortation, 
permission or entreaty : 

Connais-moi tout entiere. Know me entirely. 

CORNEILLE. 

Ah ! demeurez, seigneur, et daignez Ah ! remain, my lord, and deign 
m'ecouter. Bacine. to listen to me. 



448 SYNTAX OF THE VEEE. § 127. 

2$e tardons plus, marchons, et s'il Let us tarry no longer, let us pro- 

faut que je meure, ceed, and, if I must die, let us die. 

Mourons. Racine. 

§ 12 1. — The SuEJtnsrcTivE. 
(1.) The subjunctive is the mode of doubt or indecision : 

Obeis, si tu veux qu'on t'obeisse Obey, if thou wishest that one day 
un jour. Voltaire. others may obey thee. 

(2.) A verb, which is governed by the conjunction que, must be 
put in the subjunctive mode in French, though it may be in the in- 
dicative or conditional in English : l 

1. When the part of the sentence, which precedes que, being in- 
terrogative or negative, expresses a doubt : 

Pensez-vous que vous reussissiez Do you think that you may succeed 

daus cette affaire ? in this affair? 

Je ne voudrais pas assurer, qu'on I would not affirm, that it shouldbe 

le doive ecrire. Boileau. written. 

Croyez-vous qu'il vienne ? Do you believe he will come ? 

2. When the verb preceding que expresses consent, command, doubt, 
desire, surprise, want, duty, necessity, fear, apprehension: 

Je permets, je souhaite, je doute, je I permit, I wish, I doubt, I desire, 

veux, fordonne, je suis surpris quo I order, lam suriyrised, that you may 

vous ceniez. or should come. 

Des ee memo moment, ordonnez Order, that I may depart this very 

quejejparfe. Racine. moment. 

Tu veux qu'en ta faveur nous Tlwu wishest that for thy sake we 

croyions impossible. Corxeille. may believe in impossibilities. 

Je suis ravi quo nous logions en- lam delighted that we happen to 

semble. Destoucues. live together. 

3. When the first verb expresses fear or apprehension, the verb 
preceded by que, must also be preceded by ne : 

Je crains, je tremble, j'appre- J fear, I tremble, I apprehend, 1 
kendo, j'ai peur, qu'il ne vienne. am afraid he may come. 

GlKAULT-DUVIVIER. 

(3.) The pronouns qui, que, lequel, dont, and the word ou, meaning 
in which, should be followed by the subjunctive, when that part of 
the sentence which precedes them, expresses an interrogation, or im- 
plies a wish, a doubt, or a condition. They must also be followed 
by the verb in the subjunctive, when they are preceded by a super- 
lative relative [§ 14, (9.)] . 

T a-t-il quelqu'un qui ne respecie Is there any one who does not re- 
lo malheur. sped misfortune. 

1 When two verbs are united by the conjunction que, the second is put 
in the indicative, if the first expresses something certain, positive: 

On m'assure que vous avez recu They assure me that you have re- 
une lettrc do votro pcro. ceived a letter from your father. 



SYNTAX Or THE VERB. — § 128. 449 

La meilleure chose que vous puis- The best thing that you can do. 
siez faire. 

Choisissez une retraite ou vous Choose a retreat in which you may 

soyez tranquille. • enjoy repose. 

(4.) A verb preceded by que and one of the unipersonal verbs 
falloir, importer, convenir, suffire, valoir mieux, or by the verb etre, 
used unipersonally in connection with the adjectives fdcheux, juste, 
injuste, suprenani, possible, or with a propos, temps, a desirer, a 
souhaiter, etc., must be put in the subjunctive [see L. 73, E. 1.] : 

II faut que vous veniez. You must come, or it is necessary 

that you should come. 

II est temps que vous partiez pour It is time that you should go to 
Rome. Rome. 

II ne me plait pas que vous alliez It does not please me that you 
la. La Academie. slwuld go there. 

II riest pas certain que vous ayez It is not certain that you are right. 



(5.) After the expressions quelque . . . que, quel que, si . . . 
que, quoique, the verb is always put in the subjunctive : 

^we^w'eflfbrt que /assent les horn- Whatever effort men may make, 
mes, leur neant parait partout. their nothingness appears everywhere. 

Bossuet. 

Qui que ce soit, parlez, et ne le Wlwever he may be, speak, and do 
craignez pas. Racine. not fear him. 

Si mince qu'il puisse etre, un che- However thin it may be, a hair has 
veu fait de l'ombre. Villefre. a shadow. 

(6.) For the other conjunctions which must be followed by the 
subjunctive, see § 143. 

§ 128. — The Infinitive. 

(1.) The infinitive represents the being, action or passion, in an in- 
definite manner, and without number or person : 

Vouloir tromper le ciel, c'est folie To wish to deceive Heaven, is folly 
a la terre. La Fontaine. in men. 

L'ardeur de vaincre cede a la The ardor of conquest (to conquer) 
peur de mourir. Corneille. yields to the fear of death (to die). 

Hair est un tourment. Segur. To hate is a torment. 

(2.) The infinitive is often used substantively : 
Ou plutot, que ne puis-je au doux Or rather, ivhy can I not at the 
tomber du jour ? Lamartine. sweet close of the day ? 

(3.) The infinitive present is used, in French, after certain verbs, 
which are, in English, joined to other verbs by the conjunction and : 

Allez chercher mon pere. Go and fetch my father. 

(4.) We might give as a general rule, that a verb immediately pre- 
ceded and governed by another verb (avoir and etre excepted) or by 
a preposition (en excepted) is put in the present of the infinitive : 

Tout ce qu'elle s'imaginait tenir, All that she fancied that she held, 
lui echappait tout a coup. Fenelon. escaped her suddenly. 



450 



YKTAX OF THE VERB. § 129, 130. 



Vos raisons sont trop bonnes Tour reasons are too good in ihem- 

d'elles-memes. sans etre appuyees de selves, to need that foreign assistance. 

ces secours etrangers. Racine. You think that you know every- 

Vous pensez tout savoir. Pieyre. thing. 

Croit-il le pouvoir rompre ? Does he believe he can break it ? 
Th. Corneille. 

(5.) The French language, preferring the active to the passive 
voice, requires the use of the active verb in the following and similar 
cases wherein the English use the passive voice : 

Cette dame est bien a plaindre. That lady is much to be pitied. 

Cette maison est d vendre. This house is to be sold. 

La chose est de trop peu de con- The matter is of too little conse- 

se'quence pour la traiter serieuse- quence to be treated seriously. 
ment. Voltaire. 

§ 129. — Government of Yerbs. 
Some verbs are, in English, governed by prepositions different 
from those which connect or govern the same verbs in French. 
Some, again, which are, in English, joined by prepositions, require 
none between them in French. We give below, lists of verbs with 
the appropriate prepositions, according to the bestFrench authorities: 

§ 130. — Verbs requiring no Preposition before another 
Verb in the Infinitive. 



Accourir, 


to run 


Observer, 


to notice, to observe 


Aimer mieux, 


to prefer 


Oser, 


to dare 


A Her, 


to go 


Paraitre, 


to seem 


Apercevoir, 


to perceive 


Penser, 


to think, to fancy 


Assurer, 


to assure 


Pouvoir, 


to be able 


Avouer, 


to confess 


Pretcndre, 


to pretend 


Compter, 


to intend 


Prelercr, 


to prefer 


Confesser, 


to confess 


Protester, 


to protest 


Courir, 


to run 


Rappelcr (se), 


to remember 


Croire, 


to believe 


Rapporter, 


to report 


Daigner, 


to deign 


Reconnaitro, 


to acknowledge 


Declarer, 


to declare 


Regarder, 


to look at 


Desirer, 


to desire 


Retourncr, 


to return 


Devoir, 


to be obliged 


Revenir, 


to come back 


Ecouter, 


to hear, to listen 


Savoir, 


to know 


Entendre, 


to hear 


Sembler, 


to seem 


Envoyer, 


to send 


Sentir, 


to feel 


Esperer, 


to hope 


Souhaiter, 


to wish 


Faire, 


to make 


Soutenir, 


to maintain 


Falloir, 


to be necessary 


Temoigner, 


to testify 


[maginer, (s') 


to imagine 


Valoir mieux, 


to be belter 


Laieser, 


to let, to suffer 


Vcnir, 


to come 


Mener, 


to take, to lead 


Voir, 


to see 


Nler, 


to deny 


Vouloir, 


to be willing 


Je pretends 


vous traitei- commo 


/ intend to treat you as my own 


mon propre fils 


Racine. 


son. 





YNTAX OF T II E VERB 



■§ 131. 



451 



Et le Rhin do ses flots ira grossir And the Rhine will go and swell 
la Loire, the Loire with its waves, before the 

Avant que tes faveurs sortent do remembrance of thy goodness leaves 
ma memoire. Boileau. my memory. 

§ 131. — Verbs requiring the Preposition A before an 
Infinitive. 
The (se) placed after the verb shows it to be reflective. 



Abaisser (s'), 


to stoop 


Etre, etre a lire, 


) to be reading, writ- 
) ing, etc. 


Aboutir, 


to end in 


a ecrire, etc. 


Accorder (s'), 


to agree 


Entendre (s'), 


to be expert in 


Accoutumer, 


to accustom 


Evertuer (s'), 


to strive 


Acharner (s'), 


to strive 


Exceller, 


to excel 


Admettre, 


to admit, to permit 


Exciter, 


to excite 


Aguerrir (s'), 


to become inured 


Exhorter, 


to exhort 


Aider, 


to help in 


Exposer (s'), 


to expose one's self 


Aimer, 


to like 


Fatiguer (se), 


to weary one's self 


Appliquer (s'), 


to endeavor, to apply 


Habituer (s'), 


to become used to 


Apprendre, 


to learn 


Hasarder (se), 


to venture 


Appreter (s'), 


to prepare 


Hesiter, 


to hesitate 


Aspirer, 


to aspire 


Instruire, 


to instruct 


Assigner, 


to summon 


Interesser, 


to interest 


Assujettir (s') ( 


to subject one's self 


Inviter, 


to invite 


Attacher (s'), 


to apply 


Mettre, 


to set, to put 


Attendre (s'), 


to expect 


Mettre (se), 


to commence 


Attendre, 


to put off 


Montrer, 


to show, to teach 


Augmenter (s'), 


to increase 


Obstiner (s'), 


to persist in 


Autoriser, 


to authorize 


Offrir (s'), 


to offer 


Avilir (s'), 


to debase one's self 


Pencher, 


to incline 


Avoir, 


to have 


Penser, 


to think, to intend 


Avoir peine, 


to have difficulty in 


Perseverer, 


to persevere 


Balancer, 


to hesitate 


Persister, 


to persist 


Borner (se), 


to confine one's self 


Plaire (se). 


to delight in 


Chercher, 


to endeavor 


Prendre plaisir 


to take pleasure 


Complaire, 


to delight in 


Preparer (se), 


to prepare 


Concourir, 


to co-operate 


Porte?, ( 
Provoquer, ) 


to induce, to excite, 


Condamner (se), 


to condemn one's 


to urge 




self 


Pousser, 


to urge 


Condescendre, 


to condescend 


Reduire, 


to constrain 


Consentir, 


to consent 


Reduire (se), 


to tend, to end 


Consister, 


to consist 


Renoncer, 


to renounce 


Conspirer, 


to conspire 


Repugner, 


to be repugnant 


Consumer, 


to destroy 


Resigner (se), 


to be reconciled 


Contribuer, 


to contribute 


Rester, 


to tarry too long 


Convier, 


to invite 


Reussir, 


to succeed 


Couter, 


to cost 


Risquer, 


to risk 


Determiner, 


to induce 


Servir, 


to serve 


Determiner (se), 


to resolve 


Songer, 


to think, to intend 


Disposer (se), 


to prepare one's self 


Suffire (not unip.), to suffice 


Divertir (se), 


to amuse one's self 


Tarder, 


to tarry 


Employer, 


to employ, to devote 


Tendre, 


to tend 


Encourager, 


to encourage 


Tenir, 


to intend, to aim 


Engager, 


to induce 


Travailler, 


to labor 


Enhardir, 


to encourage 


Viser, 


to aim 


Enseigner, 


to teach 


Youer, 


to devote 



452 



YNTAX OF THE V 33 E B . § 132. 



L' homme n'aime point a s'occu- 
per de son neaut, et de sa bassesse. 
Massillon. 
Avez-vous jamais pense a offrir a 
Dieu toutes ces souffrances ? 

The same. 
§ 132. — Verbs requiring the Preposition De before 
an Infinitive. 



Man does not like to contemplate 
his nothingness, and his vileness. 

Have you ever thought of offering 
all these sufferings to God ? 



Abstenir (s') f 
Accuser (a'), 
Achever, 
Affecter, 
Affliger (s'), 
Agir (s'), unip., 
Applaudir (s'), 
Apprehender, 
Avertir, 
Aviser (s'), 
Avoir besom, 
Avoir coutume, 
Avoir dessein, 
Avoir eavie, 
Avoir garde, 
Avoir houte, 
Avoir intention, 
Avoir le temps, 
Avoir le courage, 
Avoir pear, 
Avoir raison, 
Avoir regret, 
Avoir tort, 
Avoir sujet, 
Avoir soin, 
13 LI m er, 
Bruler, 
Censurer, 

Chagriaer (s:), 
C i trger, 
Charger (se), 
Chaisir, 
Commander, 
Conjurer, 
Ctinseiller, 
Coateater (so), 
ConvaincrQj 
Coavenir, 
Corrig :r, 
Craindre, 
D ioo irager, 
■ gner, 
Defer) ire, 
Defen Ire (se), 
Defier, 
Depccher (se), 



to abstain 

to accuse one's self 

to finish 

to affect 

to grieve 

to be the question 

to rejoice 

to apprehend 

to warn 

to bethink one's self 

to want 

to be accustomed 

to intend 

to wish 

to tafce care 

to be ashamed 

to intend 

to have time 

to have courage 

to be afraid 

to be right 

to regret 

to be ivrong 

to have reason 

to take care 

to blame 

to wish ardently 

to censure 

to cease 

to grieve one's self 

to desire, to intrust 

to take on one's self 

to choose 

to command 

to beseech 

to advise 

to be satisfied 

to convince 

to become, suit 

to correct 

to fear 

to discourage 



to forbid 

to decline 

to challenge, to dare 

to hasten 



Desaccoutumer 

(se), 
Desbabituer 

(se), 
Desesperer, 
L'esoler, (se), 
Detourner, 
Di&erer, 
Dire, 

Disconvenir, 
Discontinue^ 
Dispenser, 
Dispenser (se), 
Disculper (se), 
Dissuader, 
Douter, 
Efforcer (s'), 
Effrayer (s'), 
Empiaher, 
Empresser (s'), 
Epouvanter (s'), 
Eutreprendre, 
Enrager, 
Etonucr (s'), 
Eviter, 
Excuser (s'), 
Feliciter, 
Fcimliv, 
Flatter (se), 
Fremir, 
Garder (se), 
Ci'mir, 
Glorifier (se), 
Hasarder (se), 
I later (se), 
Imputer, 
Indigner (s'), 
[ngerer (s'), 

Tnspirer, 
Jurer, 
Manquer, 
Mediter, 
Meier, (se), 
Menacer, 
Meriter, 
Moquer (se), 



to leave off 

to despair 

to grieve 

to dissuade 

to put off 

to say. tell 

to deny 

to discontinue 

to dispense 

to forbear 

to apologize 

to dissvade 

to doubt 

to endeavor 

to be frightened 

to prevent 

to hasten 

to be frightened 

to undertake 

to be vexed 

to ivonder 

to avoid 

to excuse one's self 

to congratulate 

to feign 

to flatter one's self 

to shudder 

to take care 

to lament 

to pride one's self 

to venture 

to hasten 

to impute 

to be indignant 

to take into one's 

head 
to inspire 
to sioear 
to fail 

to think, to intend 
to meddle 
to threaten 
to deserve 
to laugh at 



YNTAX OF THE V E H B . 



8 133. 



453 



Ifourir (used 


(• to long 


Reeommander, 


to recommend 


figuratively), 


Refuser, 


to refuse 


Negliger, 


to neglect 


Regrefcter, 


to regret 


Nier, 


to deny 


Rejouir (se), 


to rejoice 


Pardonner, 


to excuse 


Remercier, 


to thank 


Parler, 


to speak 


Repentir (se), 


to repent 


Passer (se), 


to do without 


Reprendre, 


to censure 


Permettre, 


to permit 


Reprimander, 


to reprimand 


Persuader, 


to persuade 


Reprocher (se), 


to reproach one's 


Piquer (se), 


to take pride in 




self 


Plaindre, 


to pity 


Resoudre, 


to resolve 


Plaindre (se), 


to complain 


Ressouvenir (se) 


to remember 


Prendre garde, 


to take care, heed 


Rire, 


to laugh 


Prendre soin, 


to take care 


Rougir, 


to blush 


Prescrire, 


to prescribe 


Scandaliser (se), 


to take offence 


Presser, 


to urge 


Seoir (unip.), 


to become, suit 


Presser (se), 


to hasten 


Sommer, 


to summon 


Presumer, 


to presume 


Soupconner, 


to suspect 


Prier, 


to desire 


Souvenir (se), 


to remember 


Promettre, 


to promise 


Suffire (unip.), 


to suffice 


Proposer, 


to propose 


Suggerer, 


to suggest 


Proposer (se), 


to intend 


Supplier, 


to beseech 


Protester, 


to protest 


Tenter, 


to attempt 


Punir, 


to punish 


Trembler, 


to tremble 


Rebuter (se), 


to be weary 


Yanter (se), 


to boast 



II vaut nrieux hasarder de sauver It is better to run the risk of spar- 

un coupable, que de condamner un ing a guilty person, than to condemn 

innocent. Yoltaire. an innocent one. 

Le monde se vante de faire des The vjorld boasts that it can render 

heureux. Hassillon. men happy. 

§ 133.— Rule. 
(1.) Two or more verbs may govern the same object, provided 
they require the same regimen : 

Nous aimons, nous instruisons, et We love, we instruct, and we praise 
nous louons nos enfants. our children. 

This sentence is correct, because aimer, instruire, and louer, being 
active verbs, govern one and the same case, the direct regimen. 

(2.) But when the verbs require different regimens, they cannot 
govern one and the same noun ; and therefore another form must be 
given to the sentence. We could not say in French — Un grand 
nombre de vaisseaux entrent et sortent de ce port tout les mois — A 
great number of vessels enter and go out of this port every month, be- 
cause the verb entrer reaches its regimen by means of the preposition 
dans, and sortir by means of the preposition de. We should say : 

Un grand nombre de vaisseaux A large number of vessels enter this 
entrent dans ce port, et en sortent port, and leave it every month, 
tous les mois. 

See § 92, (1.) (2.), also note, and § 140. 



454 



SYNTAX OF THE PAETICIPLE 



134. 



§ 134. — The Participle Past. 
(1.) We Lave seen [§ 66, (3.)] that the participle past, not accom- 
panied by an auxiliary, assumes the gender and number of the noun 
■which it qualifies : 

Les inimities gourdes et cachees Quiet and concealed enmity is 
sont plus a craindre que les baines more to be feared than open and de- 
liveries et declarees. Noel. dared hatred. 

(2.) The participle past accompanied by the auxiliary etre, agrees 
in gender and number with the subject of the verb, whether the sub- 
ject be placed before or after it. [See § 135, (1.)]. 



Le fer est emousse; les buchers 
sont eteints. Voltaire. 

La vertu obscure est souvent 
mcprisee. Massillox. 

Les Grecs etaient 2^rsuades que 
l'uine est immortelle. 

BARTHELEMT. 

Quand il vit l'urne ou etaient 
renfermees les cendres d'Hippias, il 
versa un torrent de larmes. 

FliXELOX. 



The sword is blunted; the piles are 
extinguished. 

Humble virtue, is often despised. 

TJie Greeks were persuaded that 
the soul is immortal. 

Wlien he perceived the urn in 
which were enclosed the ashes of Hip- 
pias, he shed a torrent of tears. 



(3.) The participle past, having avoir as its auxiliary, never agrees 
with the nominative : 



Vous ricz ? Lcrivcz qu'elle a ri. 

Racixe. 
Mes amis ont parte; leurs coeurs 
sont attend ris. Voltairr 

Mes cousines ont lu. 

Bescherelle. 



Tou laugh f Put down that she 
laughed. 

My friends have spoken; their 
hearts are moved. 

My cousins have read. 



(4.) The participle past, having avoir for an auxiliary, agrees with 
its direct regimen, when that regimen precedes the participle : 

La lcttre que vous avez tcrite. 

lVdro, qu'as tu fait de nos mon- 
tures ? Seigneur, je les ai attachees 
a la grille. Le Sage. 

Les meilleures harangues sont 
celles que lo coeur a dictees. 

Marmoxtel. 

Je les ai cherches dans tons les 



T/ie letter which you have written. 

Pedro, what hast thou done with 
our horses? My lord, I have tied 
them to the railing. 

The best addresses are those which 
the heart has dictated. 



coins, et je ne les ai pas trouves. 

Mme. Be Gexlis. 



I have sought them in every corner, 
but have not found them. 



(5.) Tint, if the direct regimen is placed after the participle, this 
participle remains invariable : 

J'ai refit votre lettre. I have received your letter. 

O'est la vt ; rite elle-meme qui lui It is truth itself which has dictated 

a dictc ces belles paroles. to him those fine words. 
Bossuet. 



SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. — §135. 455 

Les dieux ont attache presque The gods have attached almost as 
autaut de malheurs a la liberte, qu'a many misfortunes to liberty, as to ser- 
in servitude. Montesquieu. vitude. 

§ 135. — Remarks on the Foregoing Rules. 

(1.) Although the compound tenses of the reflective or pronominal 
verbs [§ 43, (6.), § 46, (2.), § 56] take etre as an auxiliary, the past 
participle of those verbs does not follow the rule (2.) of the preceding 
section, but comes under the same rules with those conjugated with 
avoir. It agrees with the direct regimen, when that regimen comes 
before it, and is invariable when that regimen succeeds : 

Votre soeur s'est acheie de belles Your sister has bought (herself) 

robes. handsome dresses, i. e., for herself. 

Cette femme s'est rendue mal- That woman has rendered herself 

lieureuse. unhappy. 

Acheie, in the first example, does not vary, because se, placed before 
it, is an indirect regimen or dative, while the direct regimen or accu- 
sative, robes, is placed after the participle. Rendue, in the second ex- 
ample, varies, because the word se, representing femme, is a direct 
regimen, and precedes the participle. 

We will add a few extracts as examples : 

REFLECTIVE PRONOUNS. 
Used as indirect Objects. Used as direct Objects. 

Us ne se sont propose, pour exem- Elles se sont proposees comme des 

pie, que la constitution la plus sim- modeles de douceur, 
pie des auciens. Voltaire. Quoted by Bescher. 

They have proposed to themselves, They have proposed themselves as 

as an example, only the most simple patterns of gentleness, 
constitution of the ancients. 

II est vrai. qu'elle et moi nous La langue latine et la langue 

nous sommes parte des yeux. grecque se sont longtemps^arte'es. 

MOLIERE. LEMARE. 

It is true, that she and I have The Latin and Greek languages 
spoken to each other with our eyes. were long spoken. 

Neanrnoins, il s'etait conserve La vie pastorale qui s'est conser- 
l'autorite principale. Bossuet. vee dans l'Asie, n'est pas sans opu- 
lence. Voltaire. 
Nevertheless, he had preserved to Tlie pastoral life which has been 
himself the principal authority. preserved in Asia, is not without opu- 
lence. 

(2.) When pronominal or reflective verbs, of which the second 
pronoun is an indirect regimen, are accompanied by another pronoun, 
or by a noun, used as a direct regimen, the participle agrees with this 
latter pronoun or noun, when it is preceded by it, and remains inva- 
riable, when the regime direct follows. See Rules (4.) (5.) of the 
preceding section : 



456 SYNTAX OF. THE PARTICIPLE. § 135. 

Variable. Invariable. 

L'indiscretion que nous nous Nous nous soromes reproehe l'in- 
sommes reprochee. discretion. 

The indiscretion with which we We have reproached ourselves with 
have reproached ourselves. the indiscretion. 

Or to render in English the relations the same as in French : 

The indiscretion which we have re- We have reproached to ourselves 
proached to ourselves. the indiscretion. 

(3.) The participle past conjugated with avoir, and preceded by a 
direct regimen, is sometimes followed by an infinitive. In such 
cases, when the direct regimen is under the government of the in- 
finitive rather than of the participle, the latter of course remains 
unchanged : 

La regie que j'ai commence & ex- Tlie rule which I commenced to ex- 
pliquer. plain. 

(4.) The verb in the infinitive is sometimes understood ; yet the 
participle must follow the same rule, as if it were expressed. The 
participles fait, followed by an infinitive, and laisse, followed by the 
infinitive of an active verb, are always invariable : 

EUe a obtenu toutes les faveurs She obtained all the favors ivhich 
qu(j]\a a voulu (obtenir). she tvished (to obtain). 

La maison que j'ai/atf batir. The house which I have had built. 

Ces hommes se sont laisse bat These men have suffered themselves 

to be beaten. 

(5.) In some cases, it may be difficult to ascertain whether the 
regime direct is under the government of the participle, or of the 
infinitive. 

If the rigime direct is to be represented as performing the action 
expressed by the infinitive, the participle is made to agree with that 
regime in gender and number : 

Jc les ai vus secourir leurs ennc- J saw them relieving their enemies. 
mis. 

In this example it will be seen that les (the rigime direct) is repre- 
sented as actually doing what is expressed by the infinitive, and that 
the infinitive itself is translated by the present participle. 

If, however, the regime direct is to be represented as suffering the 
action expressed by the infinitive, then the participle will remain un- 
changed, and the infinitive will be translated as a passive. Thus : 

Je les ai vu secourir par leurs I saw them relieved by their ene- 

ennemis. mies. 

Further examples : 

Variable. Invariable. 

Jo les ai vus repousscr les enne- Jo les ai vu repousser par les 

mis. cniieniis. 

I saw them repel (repelling) Vie I saw them repelled by the ene- 

enemies. mies. 



SYNTAX OF THE PABTICIPLE. § 135. 457 

Je Us ai vus prendre la fuite. Je les ai vu prendre sur le fait. 

I saw them taking flight. I saw them taken in the deed. 

Je les ai vus frapper. Je les ai vu frapper. 

I saw them striking. I saw them struck. 

Les personnes que j'ai entendues Les chansons que j'ai eniendu 
chanter. chanter. 

The persons whom 1 heard sing- Tlie songs which I heard sung, 
ing. 

(6.) The participles past of neuter verbs, conjugated -with avoir, 
and those of unipersonal verbs, are always invariable : 

Que de bien n'a-t-elle pas fait, How much good has she not done, 
pendant le peu de jours qu'elle a during the few days that she reigned 1 
regne ! Flechiee. 

Les chaleurs excessives qu'il a Tlie excessive heat which we have 
fait, out cause beaucoup de mala- had, has caused much sickness. 
dies. t Condillac. 

(7.) The past participle never agrees with en, because en can have 
no other relation to the participle than that of an indirect regimen. 1 
The presence of en does not, of course, prevent the agreement of the 
participle with a direct regimen preceding the verb : 

Avez-vous mange des fruits ? Have you eaten of the fruits ? 1 
J'en ai mange. have eaten of them. 

Tout le monde m'a offert des Every body tendered me services, 
services, et personne ne m'ere a and no person rendered me any. 
rendu. Mme. de Maintenon. 

En, preceded by the direct Regimen of the Participle. 

Cassius naturellement tier et im- Cassius, naturally proud and im- 
perieux, ne cherchait dans la perte perious, sought in the death of Cesar 
de Cesar que la vengeance de quel- only revenge for some injuries which 
ques injures qiCil en avait recues. he had received from Mm. 

Yertot. 

Rendez graces au ciel qui nous en Render thanks to Heaven vshich has 
avenges. Oorneille. revenged us for it. 

(8.) Le peu has in French two meanings ; it signifies a small 
quantity, or the want of. 

When it signifies a small quantity, the participle agrees with the 
noun which follows le peu : 

Le peu d'affection que vous lui The little affection which you have 
avez temoignee, lui a rendu le cou- shown him, has restored his courage. 
rage. 

i Noel and Chapsal, page 165. Several grammarians call en at times a 
regime direct. "We think with Bescherelle (Dictionnaire national, page 
1114), that era does not represent the entire direct regimen, but only a 
part of it, or rather merely refers to it, the direct regimen being itself 
understood. Ex. Avez-vous des livres ? J'en ai. Have you books ? I 
have some. In the latter sentence, the word quelques uns, the direct object 
is understood after the verb. J'en ai quelques uns, and en is rather a re- 
ference to it, than a substitute for it. The literal translation of the sen- 
tence will show this : / have of them a few. 
20 



458 SYNTAX OF THE ADVEEB. — §136,137. 

When le peu is used in the sense of the want of, the participle re- 
mains unaltered. 

Le peu d'affection que vous lui The want of affection which you 
avez temoigne, l'a decourage. have shown him, has discouraged him. 

§ 136. — The Adveeb. — Rules. — Place op the Adverb. 

(1.) In French, the adverb used to modify a verb in a simple tense, 
is generally placed after ihe verb : 

Que de gens prennent hardiment How many people assume boldly 
le masque de la vertu ! Scuberi. ihe mask of virtue ! 

(3.) Adverbs of place, and those used in interrogation, have the 
same place in French as in English : 

Oil est votre frere ? H est id. Where is your brother f He is here. 

(3.) In compound tenses, the adverb is placed between the auxil- 
iary and the participle : 

Vous avez mal fait. You have done wrong. 

II nous a bien recus. He received us well. 

(4.) Adverbs of manner ending in ment, may, in compound tenses, 
be placed before the participle or after it, when they are not very 
long, or followed by other modifying words. When, however, they 
are followed by such words, they must be placed after the par- 
ticiple : 

Cela est heureusemtni expnme. ) ~, . . , 

Cela est exprime heureusement. \ ^ w ha PP lh J caressed. 

II est venu heureusement d temps. He came fortunately in time. 

(5.) The adverbs aujourd'hui, to-day ; demain, to-morrow; hier, 
yesterday, may be placed before or after the verb, but never between 
the auxiliary and the participle. The adverb davantage, more, must 
always follow the participle : 

Nous sommos arrives aujourd'hui. We came to day. 
Votre frere s'est blesse hier. Tour brother hurt himself yester- 

day. 
Aujourd'hui il fait beau-temps; To-day, it is fine weather; to- 
demain il pleuvra. morrow it ivill rain. 

Girauxt-Duvivier. 

§ 137. — Obseevations. 

(1.) The adverbs of comparison, plus, moins, must be repeated be- 
fore every adjective which they modify : 

II est moins paresseux et moins He is less idle and obstinate than 
obstine que son frere. his brother. 



SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB.— § 138. 459 

(2.) These adverbs, and the adverbs of quantity, need not be re- 
peated before every noun ; but the preposition de, which must always 
come between peu, trop, beaucoup, tant, plus, moins, and a noun or 
an adjective used substantively, must be repeated in every case : 

II n'y aurait pas tant de peine et Tfiere would not be so much trou- 

de misere dans ce monde ... lie and misery in the world. . . . 

Ce libraire a beaucoup de bons This bookseller has many good and 

et de mauvais ouvrages, dans eon bad works, in his establishment. 



(3.) The adverbs mieux, better ; pis, worse, must not be confounded 
with the adjectives meilleur and pire. See note § 14, (7). 

§ 138. — Advekbs op Negation. 

(1.) The negation is composed of ne, placed before the verb, and 
pas or point, after it in the simple tenses. The second negative comes 
between the auxiliary and the verb, in the compound tenses : 

Le ciel sur nos souhaits ne regie Heaven does not regulate things ac- 

pas les choses. Corneille. cording to our wishes. 

Rome ^'attache point le grade a Borne does not by any means con- 
la noblesse. Corneille. fine offices to the nobility. 

L'estime est le vrai principe de Esteem is the true principle of con- 
la, consideration, qui w'est pas tou- sideration, which is not always at- 
jours attache aux dignites. tached to office. 

FONTENELLE. 

Les rois ne sont point proteges Kings are by no means protected by 
par les lois. Chenier. laws. 

It will be seen in the above examples, that the negative point, is 
stronger than pas. The meaning of these two words, which are in 
fact substantives used adverbially to strengthen the negative ne, will 
sufficiently explain this : 

N^allez pas, means riallez un pas, do not go or move one pace or 
step. N'allez point, means n'allez un point, do not go or move a 
point or dot. 

(2.) The second negative may be suppressed after the verbs pou- 
voir, oser, savoir and cesser : 

Non, deesse ; je ne puis soufirir, No, goddess ; I cannot suffer that 

qu'un de leurs vaisseaux fasse nau- a single one of their vessels perish. 
frage. Fenelon. 

Dans son appartement elle n'osait She dared not re-enter her apart- 

rentrer. Voltaire. ment. 

Qui vit hai' de tous, ne saurait He who lives hated by all, cannot 

long-temps vivre. Corneille. exist long. 

La liberte ne cesse d'etre aima- Liberty cannot cease to be worthy 

ble. Corneille. of love. 

(3.) Pas or point is suppressed, when the verb is modified by an- 
other negative word, such as jamais, guere, nul, nullement, aucun 7 



460 SYNTAX OF THE ADVEEB. — §138. 

personne, ni, etc., or followed by que, meaning only, and plus used 
negatively : 

L'ambition, seigneur, n'a guere de Ambition, my lord, has scarcely 

limites. Boursault. any limits. 

Nul n'est heureux, s'il ne jouit No one is happy, unless he can es- 

de sa propre estime. teem himself. 
J. J. Rousseau. 

Personne n'aime a reeevoir de No one likes to receive advice. 
conseils. De Segur. 

Un mediant ne sait iamais par- A wicked man never knows how to 

donner. Noel. forgive. 

(4.) Ne used Idiomatically, [§ 127, (2,) 3.] 

The negative ne, is used without any negative sense, after the 
conjunctions, a moins que, unless ; de peur que, de crainte que, for 
fear that: 

A moins que vous ne lui parliez. Unless you speak to Mm. 

De peur qu'on ne vous trompe. For fear, or lest you might he de- 

L'Academie. ceived. 

(5.) Ne is used in the same manner after autre, different; autre- 
ment, otherwise ; plus, moins, mieux, forming a comparison, and after 
the verbs craindre, avoir peur, trembler, apprehender, empecher : 

II est tout autre qu'il n'etait. He is very different from what he 
was. 

II parlc autrement qu'il n'agit. He speaks and acts very differently. 

II est plus modeste qu'il ne le He is more modest than he appears. 
parait. 

Jo crains presque, jo crains, qu'un I am almost afraid that (lest) a 

songe ne m'abuse. Racine. dream is deceiving me. 

Vous avez bien peur que je ne You fear much lest I may change 

change d'avis. Marivaux. my mind. 

La pluie empecha qu'on ne se T)ie rain prevented their taking a 

promenat dans les jardins. walk in the gardens. 
Racine. 

(6.) Remark. — Ne is not used when the verb of the preceding pro- 
position is accompanied by a negative : 

II ne parte pas autremont qu'il He does not speak otherwise than 

agit. he acts. 

II n'est pas plus modeste qu'il le He is not more modest than lie ap- 

parait. pears. 

(7.) After craindre, apprehender, avoir peur, trembler, we put pas 
after the ne when we wish for the accomplishment of the action ex- 
pressed by the second verb : 

Je crains qu'il ne vienne pas. I fear that he may not come. 

J'ai peur quo mon frere n'arrive / am afraid that my brother may 
pas. not come. 



YNTAX OF THE PEEPOSITIOK. — §139. 461 



§ 139. — The Preposition. — Regimen op Prepositions 
and Prepositional Phrases. 

(1.) Prepositions may be divided, according to their regimen, into 
three classes : 

1st. Prepositions governing nouns without the aid of another pre- 
position. They are : x 



A, 


at or to, 


Hors, 


\ except, {see hor3 
\ below) 


De, 


of, from 


Hormis, 


Des, 


from, 


Malgre, 


in spite of 


Apres, 


after 


Moyennant, 


by means of 


Attendu, 


on account of 


Joignant, 


joining 


Avant, 


before 


JSTonobstant, 


notwithstanding 


Avec, 


with 


Outre, 


besides 


Chez, 


with, at the house 


Par, 


by 




of 


Pour, 


for 


Concernant, 


touching 


Parmi, 


among, amongst 


Contre, 


against 


Pendant, 


during 


Dans, 


in 


Sans, 


without 


Depuis, 


since 


Sauf, 


safe, save 


Derriere, 


behind 


Selon, 


according to 


Dessus, 


above 


Sous, 


under 


Dessous, 


under 


Suivant, 


according to 


Devers, 


towards 


Sur, 


upon 


Devant, 


before 


Touchanfc, 


touching 


Durant, 


during 


A travers, 


through 


En, 


in 


Vers, 


towards 


E litre, 


between 


Yoici, 


here is 


En vers, 


towards 


Voila, 


■ there is 


Excepte, 


except. 


Vu, 


considering 


2d. Prepositions requiring the ; 


reposition de after them : a 


Aupres, 


near 


A la reserve, 


reserving 


Autour, 


around 


A l'exception, 


excepting 


Ensuite, 


after 


A l'exclusion, 


excluding 


Faute, 


for want 


A l'egard, 


with regard 


Hors, 


out of 


A l'insu, 


unknown 


Loin, 


far 


A l'opposite, 


contrary 


Pres, 


near 


A moins, 


unless, for less 


Proche, 


near 


A raison, 


by reason, at the 


A cause, 


on account 




rate 


A cote, 


by the side 


Au rez, 


on a level 


A couvert, 


under cover 


Au deca, 


this way 


A fleur, 


even with 


Au dela, 


that way, beyond 


A force, 


by dint 


Au dessous, 


under 


A la faveur, 


by means 


Au dessus, 


above 


A l'abri, 


under shelter 


Au dedans, 


within 


A la mode, 


according to the 


Au dehors, 


without 




fashion 


Au devant, 


before, to meet 



Governing the accusative. 
Governing the genitive or ablative. 



462 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. §140,141. 



through 

at the expense 

in the neighborhood 

in spite 

along 

opposite 



Au milieu, in the middle Au travers, 

Au lieu, instead Aux depens, 

Au nioyen, l/y means Aux environs 

Au niveau, on a level En depit, 

Au peril, at the peril Le long, 

Au prix, at the price Vis-a-vis, 

Au risque, at the risk 

3d. The prepositions followed by a are : 

Attenant, joining I Par rapport, with regard 

Jusque, as far as | Quant, as to 

(2.) Many of the prepositions which govern the regime direct, are 
formed from active verbs. Almost all the prepositions requiring de 
before the regimen, are formed of a preposition and a noun. Those 
requiring the preposition a, have a relation of tendency, of aim, etc. 

§ 140. — Remark. 

The rules which we have given, [§ 92, (1.) (2.) note, and § 133], 
with regard to the regimen or government of verbs and adjectives, 
apply also to prepositions. When two prepositions require the 
same regimen, it is useless to repeat this regimen after each one, 
but, if they require a different regimen, it is necessary to give to 
each its proper object. It would, therefore, be incorrect to say — Un 
magistrat doit toujours juger suivant et conformement aux lois : — A 
magistrate should always judge in accordance with, and conformably 
to, the laws; because the preposition suivant governs the noun in the 
regime direct, that is without the aid of another preposition, and 
conformement governs the noun in the regime indirect by means of <l. 
"We should say : 



Un magistrat doit toujours juger A magistrate should always judge 

suivant les lois, et conformement d in accordance with the laws, and con- 

ce qu'elles prescrivent. formally to what they prescribe. 
Marjiontel. 

§ 141. — Repetition of Prepositions. 

1. The prepositions a, de, en and sans, must bo repealed before 
every regimen, be it a noun, a pronoun or a verb : 

Co monde ci n'cst qu'unc lotcrie Tliis world is but a lottery of 
de biens, de rangs, de dignites, de goods, of ranks, of dignities, of 
droits. Voltaire. 

LYUoquence est un art tns 
serieux, destine d instruire, « n- 

primcr les passions, a corriger les sions, to correct maimers, to support 
moeurs, a soutcnir les lois, etc. the laws, etc. 

Fexelon. 

Telle est la multitude, et sans Such is the multitude, without re- 
frein ct sans lois. La Harpe. siraint and without laws. 



Eloquence is a very important art, 
destined to instruct, to repress pas- 



SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. — §142,143.463 

2. The other prepositions must also be repeated before every 
noun, pronoun, or verb, unless the words used as regimens, have 
a similarity of meaning, in which case the prepositions may be 
placed before the first regimen only, or before all, at the option of 
the speaker : 

Je vous donne ceci pour vous et I give you this for you and for 

pour votre frere. your brother. 

II perd sa jeunesse dans la mol- Be wastes his youth in effeminacy 

lesse et (dans) la volupte. and voluptuousness. 

§ 142. — Observations on several Prepositions. 

(1.) Avant marks a priority of time and place ; — Devani means 
simply opposite, in front of: 

SI walk before you, i. e., / walk 
earlier than you. or I have the prece~ 
dence of you in walking. 
Je marche devant vous. I walk in front of you. 

(2.) En, a, dans. — The sense of en is more indefinite, more exten- 
sive than that of dans. En is generally used before the name of a 
division of the earth, a kingdom, etc. ; a before the name of a town, 
and dans before a word restricted by an article or a determinative 
adjective : 

En Europe, en France, d Paris, In Europe, in France, in Paris, 

dans ma chambre. in my room. 

En Amerique, ce sont les bisons In America, the bisons have a 

qui ont une bosse sur le dos. bunch on their back. 

BUFFON. 

Dans 1' Amerique meridionale, le In South America, the ox was en- 
bceuf etait absolument inconnu. tirely unknown. 

BUFFON. 

(3.) Chez, might be rendered in English by at the house of, with, 
among, etc. : 

Chez votre pere; chez vous. At your father's ; at your house. 

La condition des comediens etait The condition of comedians was 

infame chez les Bomains, et hono- infamous among the Romans, and 

rable chez les Grecs. honorable with the Greeks. 
La Bruyere. 

1 143, — The Conjunction. — Government of Conjunc- 
tions. [See § 127.] 
(1.) Conjunctions govern the verbs following them, in the infini- 
tive, the indicative, and the subjunctive modes. 

1. The infinitive must be put after every conjunction which is fol- 
lowed by the preposition de, and after all those which differ from 



464 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION 



143. 



prepositions only because they are followed by a verb, instead of a 
noun : 

Etudiez diligemmert afin de sur- Study diligently that you may (in 
passer vos compagnons. order to) surpass your companions. 

We think with M. Bescherelle that the words described in the 
preceding rule, belong more properly to the prepositions than to the 
conjunctions. 

(2.) The following conjunctions always require the subjunctive 
after them in French, whatever mode they may take in English. 
Those marked with an asterisk require ne before the verb [§ 138, 
(403: 



Afin que, 
*A moins que, 
Au cas que, 
Avant que, 
Bien que, 
*De crainte que, 
*De peur que, 
En cas que, 
Encore que, 
Jusqu'a ce que, 
Loin que, 
Quoiqu'd peine 
puisse resister, 



in order that 

unless 

if 

lefore that 



for fear 
lest 

in case 
although 
till, until that 
far from, not that 



que, 

Nonobstaut que, 
Non que, 
Non pas que, 
Tose que, 
Pour que, 
Pourvu que, 
Quoiquc quo, 

Soit que, 
Suppose que, 



although 
notwithstanding 
not that 
not that 
siqiposing that 
that, in order that 
provided that 
although, though 
without that 
whether 
supp>ose that 



mes maux jo Although I can scarcely bear my 
misfortunes, I would rather suffer 



J'aime mieux les souffrir, quo de les under them, than deserve them. 

m enter. Racine. 

En, cas que vous persisiiez, il fau- In case you persist, I must men- 

dra que j'allegue au prince et au tion your bad health to the prince and 

roi memo votre mauvaise sante. even to the king. 

FlXKLON. 

(3.) The following conjunctions: Dc maniure que, de sorte que, 
en sorte que, so that ; tellement que, in such a manner that; si ce 
n'est que, sinon que, unless that, but that ; govern the following verb 
in the indicative or conditional modes, when the preceding verb ex- 
presses a positive assertion ; but they govern the subjunctive, when 
the preceding verb expresses a desire or a command : 

II se conduisit tres mal, de sorte lie behaved very ill, so that he was 
qtfilfut contraint de so retirer. obliged to withdraw. 

Eaites en sorte qu'on. soii content Behave in such a manner that pro- 
do vpus. pie may be pleased toith you. 

(4.) When there are in a sentence two or more verbs governed 
by a conjunction, que must be placed before the second and the fol- 
lowing verbs, or the conjunction itself may be repeated : 

ruisqiCon plaide, qiCon meurt, et Since we plead, we die and we be- 

.qu'on devient malade, come sick, we must have physicians, 

II faut des medecins, il faut des we must have lawyers. 
avocats. La Fontaine. 



COLLOCATION OF WORDS. — §144. 465 

Si vous partez, et que vous vou- If you go, and wish to take me 
liez me prendre avec vous. with you. 

Eescheeelle. 

(5.) The other conjunctions generally govern the same tense in 
French as in English : 

Fais du bien aujourd'hui puisque Do good to-day, since thou yet 

tu vis encore. Villefre. livest. 

Itien n'eblouit les grandes ames, Nothing dazzles great minds, be- 

parce que rien n'est plus haut cause nothing is higher than they. 
qu'elles. Massillojt. 

(6.) With regard to the conjunction si, see § 125, (3.) 

§ 144. — Collocation of Words. 
(1.) The place of the different parts of speech has been mentioned 
in the Syntax, under their several heads, and in various other parts 
of the work. A resume of the principal rules of construction may, 
however, not be unacceptable here. 

(2.) The collocation of words, is the order according to which the 
several words which form a sentence should follow one another. 
This order is fixed for the several forms of sentences, affirmative, 
negative, and interrogative, by the genius of the language, and the 
practice of the best writers. 

(3.) The construction of the affirmative sentence is as simple in 
French as it is in English. The following is the arrangement of the 
words : 

1. Tlie Subject. 2. The Verb. 3. The Adverb 

Le marchand est ici. 

The merchant is here. 

(4.) When the subject is accompanied by an adjective, or another 
attribute, the order is as follows : 



1. The Subject. 


2. Its Attribute. 1 


3. The Verb. 


4. The Adverb. 


Le marchand 
The merchant 


anglais 
English 


est 
is 


icL 
here. 


■ Le fils 
The son 


de votre ami 
of your friend 


est 
is 


ici. 
here. 


Le marteau 
The hammer 


defer 
of iron 


est 
is 


ici. 
here. 


Le bateau 
The boat 


a vapeur 
steam 


est 
is 


la. 
there. 



1 Some adjectives [§ 85, (11.)] are generally placed before the noun, 
when used alone with a noun ; but when another adjective comes with 
them, they follow the noun: — un petit homme, a little man; un homme 
petit et gros, a short, stout man ; others have a different meaning before 
the noun or after it [§ 86.] 



466 COLLOCATION OF TTOEDS. — §144. 

(5.) When the attribute is placed in apposition with the subject, 
the construction is the same in the two languages : 

1. The Subject. 2. The Verb. 3. The Attribute. 

Le marchand est anglais. 

The merchant is English. 

(6.) When the verb is in a compound tense, many adverbs are 
placed between the auxiliary and the participle : 
1. The Subject. 2. The Auxiliary. 3. TJie Adverb. 4. The Participle. 
Nous avons souvent lu. 

We have ofkn read. 

(7.) Long adverbs of manner, ending in ment, other long adverbs, 
and the adverbs of time and place, aujourd'hui, demain, hier, ici, la, 
are not placed between the auxiliary and the participle [§ 136, 
Lesson 41, 5.] : 

Nous avons ecrit aujourd'hui, We have written to-day. 

(8.) When there is a direct regimen in the sentence, it is placed 
after the verb : 
1. Subject. 2. Attribute. 3. Verb. 4. Adverb. 5. Regime Direct. 

L'ecolier attentif apprend toujours sa lecon. 

The scholar attentive learns always his lesson. 

(9.) When there are two regimens of equal length, or nearly so, 
the direct precedes the indirect : 
1. Subject. 2. Verb. 3. Direct Regimen. 5. Indirect Regimen- 

Jean a donne lo livro a mon pere. 

John has given the book to my father. 

(10.) Should the direct regimen be followed by a relative pronoun, 
or by attributes rendering it longer than the indirect regimen, the 
latter is placed first : 
1. Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Regimen. 4. Direct Regimen. 

Joan a donne a mon pere le livre qu'il lui avait promis. 

John has given to my father the book which he had %>romised him. 
(11.) The pronouns representing the direct regimen, and those 
representing the indirect regimen, preceded by to, expressed or un- 
derstood in English, are placed before the verb in French : 
1. Subject. 2. Direct Reg. 3. Verb. 1. Subject. 2. Ind. Reg. 3. Verb. 

Nous lea voyons. I Nous leur parlons. 

We them see. We to them speak 

(12.) In the imperative used affirmatively, those pronouns follow 
the verb : 

1. Verb. 2. Direct Reg. 1. Verb. 2. Ind. Reg. 

Voyez- les. Parlez- leur. 

See them. Speak to them. 



COLLOCATION OF WORDS. — §144. 467 

(13.) When two personal pronouns are used as regimens in a sen- 
tence, the indirect, if in the first or second person, precedes the 
direct : 
1. 



Subject. 


2. Ind. Reg. 


3. 


Direct Reg. 


4. Verb. 


Paul 


nous 




le 


donne. 


Paul 


to us 




it 


gives. 


Paul 


vous 




lo 


donne. 


Paul 


to you 




it 


gives. 



(14.) Should however, the indirect regimen be in the third person, 
it is placed after the direct : 

1. Subject. 2. Direct Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 4. Verb. 
Paul le lui donne. 

Paul it to him gives. 

(15.) In the imperative used affirmatively, the direct regimen pre- 
cedes always the indirect : 

1. Subj. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 1. Verb. 2. Dir. Reg. 3. Ind. Reg. 
Donnez- les- nous. Donnez- les- lui. 

Give them to us. Give them to him. 

(16.) The pronoun representing a noun in the oblique cases, gen- 
erally preceded in English by a preposition other than to, is, in French, 
placed after the verb : 



1. Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Reg. 
Je parle de lui. 

I speak of him. 



1. Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Ind. Reg. 
Je parle avec lui. 

I speak with him. 



(17.) To render a sentence negative, ne is placed immediately be- 
fore the verb, and pas, jamais, rien, etc., after it : 

1. Subject. 2. Negative. 3. Verb. 4. Negative. 
Je ne vois pas. 

I not see not. 

Je ne lis jamais. 

/ not read never. 

(18.) "When the verb is in a compound tense, the first negative is 
placed before the auxiliary, and the second between that auxiliary 
and the participle : 

5. Negat. 6. Participle. 
pas vu 

not seen. 

jamai3 parle. 

never spoken. 

rien donne. 

nothing given. 

(19.) The pronouns used as direct regimens, and as indirect regi- 
mens, are placed before the imperative used negatively. They are 
subject to the rules of precedence, (13.) and (14.) 



1. Subject. 
Je 


2. Negat. 
ne 
not 


3. Reg. 4. Am 
V ai 

Mm have 


Je 
I 


ne 
not 


leur ai 
to them have 


Je 

/ 


ne 

not 


leur ai 
to them have 



463. 



COLLO C ATI O N" 



O F W OEDS . § 144. 



[Rule (14.)] 



]Sot 

Xe 
Not 



nous 
to us 

le 
it 



1. Negai. 2. Reg. 3. Reg. 4. Verb. 5. Negat. 
[Rule (13.)] ISfe nous le donnez pas. 

it give not. 

lui donnez pas. 

to him give not. 

(20.) The construction of an interrogative sentence, which has a 
noun for its subject, differs in the two languages. The following ex- 
amples will show the order of the words in French: 

1. Tlie Subj. 2. Verb. 3. Duplicate Subj. 

Le marchand recoit- il 

The merchant receives he 



4. Regimen. 
son argent. 
7/ is money. 



Mon frere 
My brother 



ecnt- 

wriles 



des lettres ? 
letters f 



(21.) When the sentence commences with oii, where ; que, what ; 
quel, what, which; combien, how much, how many ; the noun may 
be placed after the verb : 



Ou est votre ami ? 
Q.ie dit votre pere? 



Where is your friend? 
1\7iat says your father t 



Subject. 

vous 
you 


4. Direct Reg. 
notre argent? 
our money ? 


4. Part, 

donne 

given 


5. Direct Reg. 
cet argent ? 
that money ? 



(22.) The construction of interrogative sentences, in which the 

subject of the verb is a pronoun, is very simple. The pronoun is 

placed after the verb in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in 
compound tenses : 

1. Jnd. Regimen. 2. Verb. 3. 

Nous cnvoyez- 

To us send 

1. Tad. Reg. 2. Aux. 3. Subj. 
Lcur avez- vous 

To them have you 

(23.) The order of the words in a sentence, at once negative and 
interrogative, is as follows : 

1. 1st. Neg. 2. Reg. Prn. 3. Verb. 4. Subj. 5. Id Keg. 6. Direct Reg. 
No nous envoyez- vous pas de l'argent ? 

Not to us send you not money 1 

(24.) In a compound tense : 

1. 1st Neg. 2. Reg. Prn. 3. Verb. 4. Subj. 5. 2d Neg. G. Part. 1. Dir. Reg. 

Ne nous avez- vous pas envoye de l'argent ? 

Noi to us have you not sent money ? 

(25 ) The first person singular of the present of the indicative of 
most verbs which have in that person only one syllable, and of a few 
more than one syllable, cannot admit of the construc- 
tion mentioned in the 22d rule of this Section. To render the sen- 



USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. §145. 469 

tence interrogative, est-ce que is prefixed to the affirmative form of 
the verb : 

Est-ce que vous parlez ? 
Is it that you speak ? 
Do you speak t 

Est-ce queje pretends lui parler? 

Is it that I pretend to speak to him ? 

Do I pretend to speak to him? 

(26.) Every person of a tense susceptible of being conjugated in- 
terrogatively, may be rendered so by prefixing est-ce que to the 
affirmative form : 

Est-ce que vous lisez ? Do you read? 

Est-ce que votre frere est arrive ? Is your brother arrived! 

(27.) In poetry and in elevated prose, the subject of an affirmative 
sentence is sometimes placed after the verb : 

Tout-a-coup au jour vif et bril- Suddenly to the vivid and brilliant 
lant de la zone torride, succede day of the torrid zone, succeeds a 
line nuit universelle et profonde ; a universal and profound night ; to the 
la parure d'ua printemps eternel, attire of an eternal spring, the naked- 
la nudite des plus tristes hivers. ness of the saddest winters. 
Eaynal. 

(28.) The article, the demonstrative and the possessive adjective 
are repeated before every word which they determine [Lesson 86]. 

(29.) Pronouns, used as subjects of verbs, may be repeated before 
every verb [§ 99, Lesson 87]. 

(30.) Pronouns, used as regimens of verb3, must be repeated be- 

e every verb [§ 105, Lesson 87]. 

(31.) Prepositions are generally repeated before every word which 
they govern [§ 141]. 

§ 145. — Use of Capital Lettees. 

The only important difference existing in the two languages, in the 
use of capital letters, is that the French do not use a capital for an 
adjective, unless it be used substantively, and applied to a person or 
persons, or unless it form an integral part of a name : 

Ce monsieur est-il francais ? Is that gentleman French ? 

C'est un Francais ? He is a Frenchman ? 

Est-il francais ? Is he French ? 

Cette dame est-elle anglaise ? » Is that lady English ? 

C'est une Anglaise. She is an English lady ? 

Elle est anglaise. She is English ? 

Apprenez-vous le francais ? Do you learn French ? 

Je n'apprends pas l'anglais. I do not learn English ? 

J'attends le Francais qui demeure I am waiting for the Frenchman 

ici. who lives here. 

Le departement des Basses- Alpes. The department of the Lower Alps. 

Le royaume des Pays-Bas. The kingdom of the Netherlands. 



470 analogy of english and french. — §147 

§ 146. — Elision. 
(1.) Elision is the suppression of the final vowel of a word, and 
the substitution of an apostrophe ( ' ), before words commencing with 
a vowel or an h mute : 

A is only elided in la, article or pronoun : — L'ame, the soul, in- 
stead of la time; l'humilite, humility, instead of la humilite — 
je l'admire, je l'honore, I admire her, I honor her, instead of 
je la admire, je la honore. 
E is elided in le, article or pronoun, in je, te, me, se, ce, (meaning, 
it, dem. prn.), de, ne, que, parce que, quoique, puisque, jusque, 
quelque : — l'ami, the friend; l'homme, the man. 
I is only elided in si coming before il, he / ils, they. 
o and u are never elided. 

(2.) Although the words onze and onzicme commence with a 
vowel, the article is not elided before them ; le onze, le onzieme. 

§ 147. — Analogy between many English and French 
Words. 

(1.) Most words ending in al, ce, de, ge, le, me, ant, ent, ion, are the 
same in both languages : 
al Mineral, general, animal, principal, fatal. 
ce Eace, prudence, notice, sacrifice, edifice. 
de Parade, grade, ambuscade, parricide, prelude. 
ge Courage, page, vestige, orange, deluge. 
le Docile, capable, table, possible, fertile, ridicule. 
ne Doctrine, mine, scene, famine, machine, heroine. 
ant Dormant, vigilant, constant, instant, arrogant. 
ent Present, content, accident, president, resident 
ion Question, fraction, legion, pension, religion. 

(2.) Most words ending in ary, ory, gy, ncy, ty, ous, or, ine, ive, 
become French by changing : 
art into aire Necessaire, militaire. 

Memoire, gloire, victoire. 
Energie, geologie, effigie. 
demence, ddcence, excellence. 
Charite, alacrite, divinite*. 
Industrieux, curieux, fameux. 
Candeur, ardeur, acteur. 
Masculin, feminin, clandestin. 
Actif, passif, massif. 



ORT 


" 


OIRE 


GT 


<( 


GIE 


NCY 


" 


NCE 


TT 


u 


TE 


OUS 


" 


EUX 


OR 


11 


EUR 


INE 


" 


IN 


IVE 


II 


IF 



IDIOMATIC PHRASES.- 



148. 



471 



§ 14S. — Gallicisms or Idiomatic Phrases. 

Gallicisms, or idioms peculiar to the language, are very numerous 
in French. We have already in the first part of this work, presented 
a considerable number of such expressions, and will here give a 
somewhat extended list of those not placed in the examples and ex- 
ercises. In proverbial sayings, we have endeavored to give the equi- 
valent English phrase. We would advise the student to analyze 
carefully the following idiomatic sentences, and particularly those 
which do not admit of a literal or near translation. Idioms and pro- 
verbial phrases give a great insight into the character and customs of 
a nation, and their analysis is often of great assistance in the acqui- 
sition of a language : 

Ce piano n'est pas d'accord. 
Arrangez cette affaire a l'amiable. 
Nous sommes d'accord sur ce point. 
Quel age donneriez-vous a cet 

homme ? 
Cela fera bien mon affaire. 
Allons au fait. 

Vous mettez ma patience a bout. 
Ce sont deux tetes dans un bonnet. 
Vous avez toujours ces propos a la 

bouche. 
Entre nous soit dit, ce n'est pas la 

mer a boire. 
Yous ne savez plus de quel bois 

faire fleche. 
J'avais ce mot sur le bout des 

levres. 
C'est son bras droit. 
II nous a ferme la porte au nez. 
Vous allez toujours droit au but. 
En tout cas, je leur remettrai votro At all events, I will give them your 

lettre. letter. 

Ne voyez-vous pas qu'il rit EOU3 Do you not see thai he laughs in his 



This piano is out of tune. 

Settle that busi7iess amicably. 

We agree upon that point. 

Sow old would you take that man to 

be? 
That will suit me exactly. 
Let us come to thepoint. 
You exhaust my patience. 
Tliey are both of the same mind. 
You always use ih 



Between ourselves, the thing is not so 

very difficult. 
You are put to your last shift. You 

are at your wifs end. 
I had that word at my tongue's end. 

He is his right hand. 

He shut the door in our face. 

You come always to the main point. 



cape? 

Nous avons pique des deux 
Nous en sommes sur ce chapitre. 
Oh ! pour le coup, vous avez raison. 
Cet orateur bat la campagn^ 

Parlez-moi a coeur ouvert. 
Nous avons couche a la belle etoile. 
Je n'ai que faire de son argent. 
J'ai fait si bien mon compte, que 

j'ai obtenu cet argent. 
Cela ne me fait rien du tout. 
Faites-moi grace de tous ces details. 
C'en est fait. 
Comme vous voila, fait! 



sleeve ? 

We put spurs to our horses. 

We are speaking about this matter. 

Oh ! for this time, you are right. 

That speaker wanders from his sub- 
ject. 

Speak to me without reserve, openly. 

We slept in the open air. 

I do not want his money. 

I managed matters so well, that I ob- 
tained that money. 

That is nothing at all to me. 

Spare me all those particulars. 

It is all over. All is gone. 

What a condition you are in I 



4*72 



IDI OM ATI C PHEA! 



.— 6 148. 



II m'a prie de vous faire ses amities. 

En attendant, faites-lui mes com- 
pliments. 

Chemin faisant, nous le rencon- 
trames. 

Le plus fort est fait. 

Ce soldat n'a jamais vu le feu. 



II s'est bien tire d' 

Nous sommes au fort de l'hiver. 

Qu'allait-il faire dans cette galere ? 

C'est un homme comme il faut. 

Ce drap est hors de prix. 

11 se fie jour a travers les ennemis. 

Je vois cela dans un autre jour. 

Dites-moi au juste ce qu'il en est. 

II ne laisse pas de de'penser beaucoup. 

C'est une autre paire de manches. 

C'est un tour de son metier. 

Vous Favcz mis au pied du mur. 

Voila, qui va le mieux du monde. 

Revenons a, nos moutons. 

Cela est d'un bon nature! 

Ces arbustes grandissent a vuo d'ceil. 

Je regarde cela d'un autre ceil. 

II a vendu sa montre pour un mor- 

ceau de pain. 
Vous lui avez donne la monnaio do 

sa piece. 
II a trouve a qui parler. 
Vous ttes un hommo do parole. 
Je lui ai coupe la parole. 
Vous avez cela sur le cceur. 
II se creuse la ccrvelle. 
Lc jeu n'en vaut pas la chandelle. 
Vous avez pris le change. 
Chansons que tout cela. 
Les bons comptes font les bons amis. 
II met la charrue devant les bceufs. 
Vous batissez des chateaux en Es- 

pagne; 
Jo Buia au comblc de la joie. 
Ce n'est pas a vous do lui reprocher 

sa faute. 
II est tombc do Scylla en Charybde. 

Cct liommo cherche a vous en conter. 
Nous sommes en pays do connais- 

sance. 
La sentinelle nous coucha en joue. 
Cc malade nVn reviendra pas. 
Nous sommes au courant do tout 

cola. 
Cola fait dresser les cliovoux 
lis chantont sur une antro note. 
Co vera est frappo au bon coin. 



He wished me to give his love to you. 
In the mean while, present my com- 
pliments to him. 
Going along, we met him. 

The most difficult part is done. 
That soldier has never smelt gun- 
powder. 
He came off very well. 
We are in the depth of winter 
What business had he there t 
He is a gentleman. 
Tliat cloth is extravagantly dear. 
He forced his ivay through the enemy. 
I see that in a different light. 
Tell me exactly hoiu the matter stands. 
He spends a great deal, nevertheless. 
Tliat is quite another thing. 
That is one of his tricks. 
You left him no excuse. 
That is going on finely. 
Let us resume our subject. 
That besjjeaks a good disposition. 
Those shrubs grow jierceptibly. 
I look upon thai in a different light. 
He sold his watch for a mere song. 

You paid him in his own coin. 

He met with his match. 

You are a man of your tcc-rd. 

I cut him short. 

You cannot digest that. 

He racks his brain. 

The toll is more than the grist. 

You started upon the wrong scent. 

Tfial is all nonsense. 

Short reckonings make long friends. 

He puts the cart before the horse. 

You build castles in the air. 

lam overjoyed. 

It does not become you to reproach 

him with his fault. 
He fell from the frying pan into the 

fire. 
Tliat man is trying to deceive you. 
We are here among acquaintances. 

Tlie sentinel levelled his gun at us. 

That sick man will not recover. 

We are perfectly acquainted with all 

that. 
That makes one's hair stand on end. 
They have, changed their tone. 
That verse bears the right stamp. 



IDIOMATIC P UKASES. — S 148. 



473 



Je lui ai donne le clef des champs. 

II ne sait ou donner de la tete. 

Vous vous donnez toujours raison. 

II a donne dans le piege. 

Cela lui donne de l'kumeur. 

Je n'entre point la dedans. 

II entre dans vos interets. 

Je m'embarrasse fort peu de cela. 

Son arnitie est a, toute epreuve. 

Vos propos m'echauffent les oreilles. 

Finissez ce badinage. 

Reposez-vous-en sur moi. 

Cette marchandise n'a point de debit. 

11 est toujours sur le qui-vive. 

Cette maison est a vendre au plus 

offrant et dernier encherisseur. 
De quelle part ce dome3tique vient- 

il? 
Doublons le pas ; il se fait tard. 

J'y vais de ce pas. 

Passe pour ceci. 

II faut en passer par la. 

Vous ra'avez peint avec de beaux 

traits. 
Pour moi, je m'y perds. 
Peu s'en fallut qu'il ne me frappat. 
Dites-moi un peu ce que vous en 

pensez. 
II nous jette de la poudre aux yeux. 
Vous seriez bien embarrasse, si on 

vous prenait au mot. 
Ne vous en prenez pas a moi. 
Le malade n'en pouvait plus. 
Je l'ai envoye promener. 
Le bon homme que c'est I 
Brisons-la dessus. 
II en fut quitte pour la peur. 
Vous en etes quitte a bon marche. 
Cela n'est pas de refus. 
Je l'ai entrevu ce matin. 
Je ne m'en soucie guere. 
II a des affaires par dessus la tete. 
Qu'a cela ne tienne. 
A la bonne heure. 
Tout fin qu'il est, il s'est trompe. 
Ce n'est pas la un trait d'ami. 
Treve de compliments. 
Je vous vois venir, monsieur. 
Voila comme vous etes. 
Tout cela va le mieux du monde. 
Vous n'y etes pas. 
Vous voila bien avance. 



I sent him about his 

He does not know which way to turn. 

You pretend to be always in the right. 

He fell into the snare. 

That puts him out of temper. 

That is no business of mine. 

He interests himself for you. 

I care very little about that. 

His friendship will stand any test. 

Your expressions provoke my anger. 

Put an end to this trifling. 

Trust to me about this matter. 

TJiis article has no sale. 

He is always on the watch. 

That house is to be sold to the highest 

bidder. 
WJio sent that servant ? 

Let us mend our pace ; it is growing 

late. 
I am going thither this moment. 
Let this pass. 

We must submit to those terms. 
You have given a fine account of me. 

As for me, I cannot see into it. 
He came very near striking me. 
Just tell me what you think of it. 

He casts a mist before our eyes. 

You would be at a great loss, if you 

were taken at your word. 
Do not blame me about this. 
The patient was quite exhausted. 
Hold him to mind his business. 
What a simple man he is ! 
No more of this. 
He escaped, though frightened. 
You came off cheaply. 
That is not to be refused. 
I had a glimpse of him this morning. 
I care but little about it. 
He is over head and ears in business. 
TItat shall not make us disagree. 
Well and good. 

Cunning as he is, he made a mistake. 
That is not acting like a friend. 
No more compliments. 
I see what you are about, sir. 
That is the way with you. 
All goes on as well as possible. 
That is not it. 
You are much the better for it. 



For a very copious collection of Gallicisms, the student is referred to 
the second part of the Author's Manual of French Conversation. 



READING LESSONS, 



[The manner of dividing \rords into syllables is not the same in French and in 
English. A practical illustration of the French mode v^ill not be unacceptable to the 
student. In the following fables the hyphen is placed to separate the syllables.] 

I.— FABLES. 

1. LE CHE-NE ET LE SY-CO-MO-RE. 

TJn che-ne e-tait plan-te pres d'un sy-co-mo-re. Le der-nier 
pous-sa des 1 feuil-les des le com-men-ce-ment du prin-temps, et me - - 
pri-sa 1' in-sen-si-bi-li-te du 2 pre-mier. Yoi-sin, dit 3 le che-ne, no 
comp-te pas trc-p sur les ca-res-ses de cha-que ze-phyr in-eons-tant. 
Le froid peuf re-ve-nir. Pour inoi, je ne suis pas pres-se de pous-ser 
des feuil-les ; j'at-tends que la cha-leur soit cons-tan-te. II a-vait 
rai-son ; 5 une ge-lee de-trui-sit* les beau-tes nais-san-tes du sy-co- 
mo-re. Eb bien ! dit l'au-tre, n'a-vais-je pas rai-son de ne me pas 
pres-scr ? 

Ne comp-tez ni sur les ca-res-ses ni sur les pro-tes-ta-tions ex-ces- 
si-ves 7 ; elles sont or-di-nai-re-ment de cour-te du-ree. Perrin. 

1 Lesson 12, Rule 3. a L. 5, R. 1. s From dire, page 37G. * From povr 
voir, page 3S8. 6 L. 8, R. 1. • From delruire, page 37G. 7 L. 13, R. 5. 

2. LE LOUP DE-GUI-SE. 

TJn loup, la ter-reur d'un trou-peau, ne sa-vait 1 com-ment fai-re 
pour at-tra-per des 2 mou-tons ; le ber-ger e-tait con-ti-nuel-le-ment 
sur ses gar-des. L'a-ni-mal vo-ra-ce s'a-vi-sa de se de-gui-ser de la 
peau d'u-ne bre-bis qu'il a-vait en-le-veV quel-ques jours au-pa-ra- 
vant. Le stra-ta-ge-me lui 4 reus-sit pen-dant quel-que temps ; mais 
en-fin, le ber-ger de-cou-vrit l'ar-ti-fi-ce, a-ga-ca les chiens con-tre lui ; 
Qa lui 1 ar-ra-cbe-rent la toi-son dedes-sus les d-pau-les, et le 6 mi-rcnt« 
en pie-ces. 

Ne vous fiez pas tou-jours a, 1'ex-te-rieur. TJn bom-me de ju-ge- 
ment et de pe-ne-tra-tion ne ju-ge pas se-lon les ap-pa-ren-ces. 

Perrin. 

* From saroir, page 392. » L. 12, R. 3. s L. 42, R. 7. 
L. 27, R. 2. 6 L. 27, R. 1. « From mettre, p. 384 



HEADING LESSONS. 4*75 

3. L'i-NE ET SON MAi-TEE. 

Un a-ne trou-va par ha-sarcl une peau de lion, 1 et s'en 2 re-ve-tit, 
(revttir, 2. ir.) Ainsi de-gui-se il al-la dans les lo-rels, et re-pan-dit 
par-tout la 3 ter-reur et la cons-ter-na-tion. Tous les a-ni-maux fuy- 
aient* de-vant lui. Enfm il ren-con-tra son mai-tre qu'il vou-lut 
e-pou-van-ter aus-si ; mais le bon hom-me a-per-ce-vant quel-que 
cho-se de 5 long, aux deux co-tes de la te-te de l'a-ni-mal, lui dit : 
mai-tre bau-det, quoi-que vous sc-yez 6 ve-tu com-me un lion, vos 
o-reil-les vous tra-his-sent et mon-trent que vous n'e-tes re-el-le-ment 
qu'un u-ne. 

Un sot a tou-jours un en-droit qui le de-cou-vre et le rend ri-di- 
cu-le. L'af-fec-ta-tion est un jus-te su-jet de me-pris. Perrin. 

i L. 5, E. 3. ^ § 30, (IT.) s L. 8, E. 2. * From fuir, page 380. 
5 L. 18. E. 3. 6 L. 13, E. 4. 

4. LAI-GLE ET LE HI-BOU. 

L'ai-gle et le lii-bou, a-pres a-voir 1 fait long-temps la guer-re con- 
vin-rent d'u-ne paix; les ar-ti-cles pre-li-mi-nai-res a-vaient e-te 
pre-a-la-ble-ment si-gnes par des 2 am-bas-sa-deurs : l'ar-ti-cle le plus 
es-sen-tiel e-tait que le pre-mier ne man-ge-rait pas les pe-tits de 
l'au-tre. — Les con-nais-sez 3 -vous ? de-man-da le hi-bou. — ISTon, re- 
pon-dit l'ai-gle. — Tant pis. — Pei-gnez*-les-moi 5 ou me lesmon-trez; 
foi d'hon-ne-te ai-gle je n'y 6 tou-che-rai ja-mais. Mes pe-tits, re- 
pon-dit l'oi-seau noc-tur-ne, sont mi-gnons, beaux, bien faits ; ils ont 
la voix dou-ce et me-lo-dieu-se ; 7 vous les re-con-nai-trez ai-se-ment 
a ces mar-ques. — Tres bien, je ne l'ou-blie-rai pas. II ar-ri-va un 
jour que l'ai-gle a-per-cut dans le coin d'un ro-cher de 8 pe-tits mons- 
tres tres laids, re-chi-gnes, avec un air tris-te et lu-gu-bre. Ces en- 
fants, dit-il, n'ap-par-tien-nent pas a no-tre a-mi; man-geons-les J 
aus-si-tot il se mit a en 9 fai-re un bon re-pas. L'ai-gle n'a-vait pas 
tort. 10 Le hi-bou lui a-vait fait une faus-se pein-ture de ses pe-tits ; 
ils n'en a-vaient pas le moin-dre trait. 

Les pa-rents de-vraient e-vi-ter avec soin ce fai-ble en-vers leurs 
en-fants, il les rend sou-vent a-veu-gles sur leurs de-fauts. 

Perrin. 

1 L. 21, E. 2. 2 L. 12, E. 3. s From connaitre, page 370. * From 
pemdre, page 386. 5 L. 28, E. 4. 6 § 39, (18.) 7 L. 13, E. 5. 

s L. 8, E. 4. 9 L. 15, E. 1. 10 L. 8, E. 1. 

5. LE PAT-SAN ET LA COU-LEU-VEE. 
Un pay-san, al-lant au bois a-vec un sac pour y 1 met-tre des noi- 
set-tes, c'e-tait* la sai-son, trou-va u-ne cou-leu-vre. All 1 ah I dit le 



476 READING- LESSOXS. 

man-ant, je te tiens 3 a pre-sent ; tu ne m'e-chap-pe-ras pas ; tu vien- 
dras (venir, 2. ir.) dans ce sac et tu mour-ras. 4 L'a-ni-mal per-vers ; 
je veux dire 5 la cou-leu-vre, et non pas l'hom-me ; lui dit : qu'ai-je fait 
pour me-ri-ter un pa-reil trai-te-ment ? — Ce que tu as fait ? Tu es le 
sym-bole de l'in-gra-ti-tu-de, le plus o-dieux de tous les vi-ces. — S'il 
faut" que les in-grats meu-rent, re-pli-qua har-di-ment le rep-ti-le, 
vous vous con-dam-nez vous-meme ; de tous les a-ni-maux l'hom-me 
est le plus in-grat— r L'hom-me ! dit le pay-san, sur-pris de la har- 
dies-se de la cou-leu-vre ; je pour-rais 7 t'e-cra-ser dans l'ins-tant, roais 
je veuxs m'en rap-por-ter a quel-que ju-ge. — J'y con-sens.* U-ne 
va-che e-tait a quel-que dis-tan-ce ; on 10 l'ap-pel-le, el-le vient; 11 on 
lui pro-po-se le cas. — C'e-tait bien la pei-ne de m'ap-pe-ler, dit-el-le ; 
la cho-se est clai-re ; la cou-leu-vre a rai-son. Je nour-ris l'hom-me 
de mon lait ; il en fait du beur-re et du fro-ma-ge ; et pour ce bien- 
fait, il man-ge mes en-fants. A pei-ne sont-ils nes 12 qu'ils sont e-gor- 
ges" et cou-pes en mil-le mor-ceaux. Ce n'est pas tout : quand je 
suis vieil-le, et que je ne lui don-ne plus de lait, l'in-grat m'as-som-me 
sans pi-tie; ma peau me-me n'est pas a l'a-bri de son in-gra-ti-tu-de ; 
il la tan-ne et en fait des bot-tes et des sou-liers. De la, je cou-clus 
que l'liom-me est le vrai sym-bo le de l'in-gra-ti-tu-de. A-dieu ; j'ai 
dit ce que je pen-se. 

L'hom-me, tout e-ton-ne, dit au rep-ti-le : je ne crois pas ce que 
cet-te ra-do-teu-se a dit; elle a per-du l'es-prit : rap-por-tons-nous-en 
a la de-ci-sion de cet ar-bre. — De tout mon cceur. — L'ar-bre e-tant 
pris pour ju-ge, ce hit bien pis en-co-re. Je mets l'hom-inc a 1'a-bii 14 
des o-ra-ges, de la eha-leur, et de la pluie. En e-te, il trou-ve 
sous mes bran-ches u-ne om-bre a-gre-a-ble ; je pro-duis des flours et 
du fruit; ce-pen-dant, a-prcs mil-le ser-vi-ces, un ma-nant me fait 
tom-ber a Goupa de ha-Ghe : il cou-pc tou-tes mes bran-ches, en fait 
du feu, et re-serve mon corps, pour e-tre sci-e en plan-ches. L'hom- 
me se voy-ant ain-si con-vain-eu : je suis bien sot, dit-il, d'e-cout-er 16 
u-ne ra-do-teu-se et un ja-seur. Aus-si-tot il fou-la la cou-leu-vre 
aux pieds et l'e-cra-sa. 

Le plus fort a tou-jours rai-son, il op-pri-me le plus fai-ble. La 
for-ce et la pas-sion sont sour-des a la voix de la jus-ti-ce et de la 
vc-ri-te. Perrin. 

1 * ■•■>. (18.) s L. 82, R. 1. s From tenir, pnjre 396. 

_' Prom mourir, pa.cje 3S4. » L. 32, R. 5. « From falloir, page 380. 

■ From pouvtiir, page 388. 8 From vouhir, pacro 398. » ? 39, (18.) 
" L. 36, II. 1,2. H From venir, page 396. >* From naUre,v>age 384. 
13 L. 42, R 6. m L. 69, R. 1. i, L. 21, R 2. 



READING LESSONS 477 



G. LE SIN-GE. 



Un vieux sin-ge ma-lin e-tant mort, son om-bre des-cen-dit dans 
la soin-bre de-meu-re de Plu-ton, ou el-le de-man-da a, re-tour-ner 
par-mi les vi-vants. Plu-ton vou-lait la ren-voy-er dans le corps 
d'un a-ne pe-sant et stu-pi-de, pour lui 6-ter sa sou-ples-se, sa vi-va- 
ci-te, et sa ma-li-ce. Mais el-le fit tant de tours plai-sants et La-dins, 
que l'in-fle-xi-ble roi des en-fers ne put 1 s'em-pe-cher de ri-re, et lui 
lais-sa le choix d'unj con-di-tion. El-le de-man-da a, en-trer dans 
le corps d'un per-ro-quet. — Au moins, di-sait-el-le, je con-ser-ve-rai 
par-la quel-que res-sem-blan-ce a-vec les hom-mes que j'ai long-temps 
i-mi-tes. E-tant sin-ge je fai-sais des ges-tes com-me eux ; et e-tant 
per-ro-quet, je par-le-rai a-vec eux dans les plus a-gre-a-bles con- 
ver-sa-tions. 

A pei-ne l'om-bre du sjn-ge fut in-tro-dui-te dans ce nou-veau me- 
tier, qu'u-ne vieil-le fem-me cau-seu-se l'a-che-ta. II fit 2 ses de-li-ces ; 
el-le le mit dans une bel-le3 ca-ge. II fai-sait bon-ne che-re, et dis- 
cou-rait tou-te la jour-nee a-vec la vieil-le ra-do-teu-se, qui ne par-lait 
pas plus sen-se-ment que lui. II joi-gnit 4 a son nou-veau ta-lent 
d'e-tour-dir tout le mon-de ; je ne sais 5 quoi de son an-cien-ne pro-fes- 
sion. II re-mu-ait sa t6-te ri-di-cu-le-ment, il fai-sait cra-quer son 
bee, il a-gi-tait ses ai-les de cent fa-cons, et fai-sait de ses pat-tes plu- 
sieurs tours qui sen-taient en-co-re les gri-ma-ces de Pa-go-tin. La 
vieil-le pre-nait a tou-te heu-re ses lu-net-tes pour l'ad-mi-rer ; el-le 
e-tait bien fa-chee d'etre un peu sour-de, et de per-dre quel-que-fois 
des pa-ro-les de son per-ro-quet, au-quel el-le trou-vait plus d'esprit 
qu'a per-son-ne. Ce per-ro-quet ga-te de-vint ba-vard, im-por-tun, 
et fou. II se tour-men-ta si fort dans sa ca-ge, et but 6 tant de vin 
a-vec la vieil-le, qu'il en mou-rut. x 

Le voi-la re-ve-nu de-vant Plu-ton, qui vou-lut 7 cet-te fois le faire 
pas-ser dans le corps d'un pois-son. Mais il fit en-co-re une far-ce 
de-vant le roi des om-bres, et les prin-ces ne re-sis-tent gue-re 8 aux 
de-man-des des mau-vais plai-sants qui les fiat-tent. Plu-ton ac- 
cor-da done a ce-lui-ci, qu'il i-rait 9 dans le corps d'un hom-me ; mais 
com-me le dieu eut hon-te de 10 l'en-voy-er dans le corps d'un hom-me 
sa-ge et vert-u-eux, il le des-ti-na au corps d'un ha-ran-gueur en-nuy- 
eux et im-por-tun, qui men-tait, qui se van-tait sans cesse, qui 
fai-sait des ges-tes ri-di-cu-les, qui se mo-quait de tout le mon-de, 
qui in-ter-rom-pait tou-tes les con-ver-sa-tions les plus po-lies et les 
plus so-li-des, pour di-re rien, ou les sot-ti-ses les plus gros-sie-res. 
Mer-cu-re qui le re-con-nut n dans ce nou-vel e-tat, lui dit en riant : — 
Ho! ho! je te re-con-nais; tu n'es qu'un com-pose du sin-ge et du 



478 HEADING LESSONS. 

per-ro-quet que j'ai vus 12 au-tre-fois. Que 13 t'6-te-rait tes ges-tes et 
tes pa-roles ap-prises par coeur sans ju-ge-ment, ne lais-se-rait rien de 
toi. D'un jo-li sin-ge et d'un bon per-ro-quet on n'en fait qu'un sot 
hom-me. Fenelon. 

1 From pouvoir, page 388; see also § 138, (2.) a From /aire, p. 3S0. 

3 L. 13, R. 6. 4 From joindre, page 382. 5 From savoir, page 392. 

9 From boire, page 368. 7 From vouloir, page 398. 8 L. 17, R. 5. 

9 From aller, page 366. 10 L. 21, R. 4. » From reconnaitre, page 390. 

12 L. 42, R, 7. 13 § 39, (5.) 



n.— APOLOGUES ET ALLEGORIES. 

1. LE BERGER ET LE TROUPEAU. 

Quand vous voyez quelquefois un nombreux troupeau, qui, repandu 
sur une colline, vers le declin d'un beau jour, pait 1 tranquillement le 
tliym et le serpolet, ou qui broute dans une prairie une herbe menue 
et tendre, qui aechappe a. la faux du moissonneur; le berger, soigneux 
et attentif, est debout aupres de ses brebis ; il ne les perd pas de 
vue ; il les suit, 2 il les 3 conduit, il les change de paturage ; si elles se 
dispersent, il les rassemble ; si un loup avide parait, il luche son chien 
qui le met en fuite ; il les nourrit, il les defend ; l'aurore le trouve 
dc'ja en pleine campagne, d'oii il ne se retire qu'avec le soleil. Quels* 
soins ! quelle vigilance ! quelle servitude I Quelle condition vous 
parait la plus delicieuse et la plus libre, ou du berger, ou des brebis ? 
Le troupeau est-il fait pour le berger, ou le berger pour le troupeau ? 
Image naive des peuples, et du prince qui les gouverne, s'il est bon 
prince. ^ A Bruyere. 

1 From padre, page 386. 2 From suivre, page 394. 3 L. 27, R. 7. 
4 § 30, (10.) B L. 13, R. 5. 

2. LES PARVENUS. 
Ni les troubles, Zenobie, qui agitent votre empire, ni la guerre quo 
vous soutenez virilement contre une nation puissante, depuis la mort 
du roi votre epoux, ne diminuent rien de votre magnificence. Vous 
avez preTere i toute autre contree les rives de 1'Euphrate, pour y 
clever un ,-uperbe gdifice; fair y est sain et lempCre, la situation en 
est riante, un bois sacre l'ombrage du cote du couchant ; les dieux de 
Syrie, qui habitent quelquefois la terre, n'y auraient pu choisir une 
plus belle demeure. La campagne autour, est couverte' d'hotnines 
qui taillent et qui coupent, qui vent 3 et qui viennent,* qui roulent ou 
qui charrient le bois du Liban, l'airain et le porphyre; les grues et les 



READING LESSONS 479 

machines gemissent dans l'air, et font esperer a ceux qui voyagent 
vers l'Arabie, de revoir, a, leur retour en leurs foyers, ce palais acheve, 
et dans cette splendeur ou vous desirez le porter, avant de l'habitcr, 
vous et les princes vos enfants. N'y 5 epargnez rien, grande reine, 
employez-y For et tout l'art des plus excellents ouvriers ; que les 
Phidias et les Zeuxis de votre siecle deploient toute leur science sur 
vos plafonds, et sur vos lambris. Tracez-y de vastes et delicieux 
jardins, dont l'enchantement soit tel, qu'ils ne paraissent pas faits de 
la main des hommes. Epuisez vos tresors et votre industrie sur cet 
ouvrage incomparable ; et, apres que vous y aurez 7 mis, Zenobie, la 
derniere main, quelqu'un cle ces patres qui habitent les sables voisins 
de Palmyre, devenu riche par les peages de vos rivieres, achetera« un 
jour a deniers comptants cette royale maison, pour l'embellir et la 
rendre plus digne de lui et de sa fortune. La Brutere. 

1 § 39, (17.) 2 § 134, (2.) 3 From aller, page 366. * Prom venir, page 396 
« § 39, (18.) ° § 49, (2.) ■> L. 61, R. 5. 8 § 49, (5.) 

3. LE PALAIS DE LA RENOMMEE. 

Aux extremites du monde, sous le pole, dont 1 l'intrepide Cook 
mesura la circonference, a, travers les vents et les tempetes; au 
milieu des terres australes qu'une barriere de glace derobe a, la curio- 
site des hommes, s'eleve 3 une montagne, qui surpasse en hauteur les 
sommets les plus eleves des Andes, dans le Nouveau-Monde, ou du 
Thibet, dans l'antique Asie. 

Sur cette montagne, est bati un palais, ouvrage des puissances in- 
fernales. Ce palais a mille portiques d'airain ; les moindres bruits 
viennent 3 frapper les domes de cet edifice, dont le silence n'a jamais 
franchi le seuil. 

Au centre du monument, est une voute tournee en spirale, comme 
une conque, et faite de sorte que tous les sons qui penetrant dans 
le palais, y aboutissent ; mais, par un effet du genie de l'architecte 
des mensonges, la plupart de ces sons se trouvent 4 faussement repro- 
duits; souvent une legere rumeur s'enfle et gronde en entrant par la 
voie preparee aux eclats du tonnerre ; tandis que les roulements de 
la foudre expirent en passant par les routes sinueuses 5 destinees aux 
faibles bruits. 

C'est la, que, l'oreille placee a l'ouverture de cet immense echo, 
est assis sur un trone retentissant, un demon, la renommee. Cette 
puissante fille de Satan et de l'orgueil, naquit 6 autrefois pour annoncer 
le mal. Avant le jour ou. Lucifer leva l'etendard contre le Tout- 
Puissant, la renommee etait inconnue. Si un monde venait a, 
s'animer ou a s'eteindre ; si l'i)ternel avait tire un univers du neant, 



480 BEADING LESSONS. 

ou replonge un de ses ouvrages dans le chaos ; s'il avait jete un soleil 
dans l'espace, cree un nouvel ordre de seraphins, essaye 7 la bonte 
d'une lumiere, toutes ces choses etaient aussitot connues 8 dans le ciel, 
par un sentiment intime d'admiration et d'amour, par le chant mys- 
terieux de la celeste Jerusalem. Mais, apres la rebellion des mauvais 
anges, la renommee usurpa la place de cette intention divine. Bientot, 
precipiteeo aux enfers, ce 10 fat elle qui publia dans l'abyme la nais- 
sance de notre globe, et qui porta l'ennenii de Dieu a tenter la chute 
de l'bomme. Elle vint sur la terre avec la mort, et des ce moment 
elle etablit sa demeure sur la montagne, ou elle entend et repete con- 
finement ce qui se passe sur la terre, aux enfers, et dans les cieux. 

Chateaubriand. 

I L. 31, R. 8. 2 § 49, (6.) 3 From venir, page 396. ■» L. 36, R. 2. 
*L. 13, R.5. 6 From naltre, page 384. '■ § 49, (2.) 8 L. 42, R. 6. 
* § C6, (3.) >° L. 81, R. 1. 

4.— L'ACADEMIE SILENCIEUSE OU LES EMBLEMES. 

II y avait 1 a Amadan une ce*lebre academie, dont le premier statut 
etait concu eu ces termes : Les academiciens penseront beaucoup, 
Ccriront peu, el «e a parleront que le moins possible. On 3 l'appelait 
T Academie silencieuse, et il n'etait point en Perse de vrai savant qui 
n'eiit l'ambition d'y etre admis. Le docteur Zeb, auteur d'uu petit 
livre excellent, intitule le Bullion, apprit* au fond de sa province, 
qu'il 5 vaquait une place dans 1' Academic silencieuse. II part aussitot ; 
il arrive a Amadan, et, se presentant a la porte de la 6alle ou les 
academiciens sent assemble.-, il prie l'buissier de remettre au president 
ce billet : Le docteur Zeb demande humblement la place vacante. 
L'huissier s'acquitta sur-le-champ de la commission; mais le docteur 
et son billet arrivaient trop tard, la place etait deja remplie. 

L'academie fut desolee de ce contre-temps ; elle avait recu un peu 
malgre" elle un bel* -esprit dont 7 l'dloquence vive et legere faisait 
l'admiration de la cour, et elle se voyait 8 rcduite a refuser le docteur 
Zeb, le fleau des bavards, une tete si bien faite, si bien meublee ! Le 
president charge d'annoncer au docteur cette nouvelle desagreable ne 
pouvait presque s'y resoudre, et ne savait comment s'y prendre. 
Aprda avoir un peu reve, il fit remplir d'eau une grande coupe, mais 
si bien remplir, qu'une goutte de plus eut fait deborder la liqueur ; 
puis il fit signe qu'on introduisit le candidat. II parut>° avec cet air 
simple et modeste qui annonce presque toujours le vrai merite. Le 
president se leva, et, sans proferer une seule parole, il lui montra 
d'un air afflige la coupe emblematique, cette coupe si exactement 
pleine. Le docteur comprit" de reste, qu'il n'y avait plus de place u 



READING LESSONS. 481 

l'academie ; mais, sans perdre courage, il songeait a, faire comprendre 
qu'un academicien surnurneraire n'y derangerait rien. II voit a ses 
pieds une feuille de rose, il la ramasse, il la pose delicatement sur la 
surface de l'eau, et fait si bien, qu'il n'en echappe pas une seule 
goutte. 

A cette reponse ingenieuse, tout le monde battit des main?, on 
laissa dormir les regies pour ce jour-la, et le docteur Zeb fut rem 
par acclamation. On lui presenta sur-le-champ, le registre ou. les 
recipiendaires devaient s'inscrire eux-memes. II s'y inscrivit done, 
et il ne lui restait plus qu a prononcer selon l'usage une phrase de 
remerciment. Mais, en academicien vraiment silencieux, le docteur 
Zeb remercia sans dire mot. II ecrivit 12 en marge le nombre cent; 
e'etait celui de ses nouveaux confreres; puis, en mettant un zero 
devant le chiffre, il ecrivit au dessous : lis n'en vaudront 13 ni moins ni 
plus (0100). Le president repondit au modeste docteur avec autant 
de politesse que de presence d'esprit. II mit le chiffre un devant le 
nombre cent, et il ecrivit: Us en vaudront dix fois davantage (1100). 

L'abbe Blanchet. 

1 § 61, 2. 2 L. 19, R. 2. s § 41, (4.) 4 From apprendre, page 366. 
fi tJnipersonal, that there was a place vacant. 6 L. 13, 6. 7 L. 31, 8. 
8 From voir, page 398. 9 L. 32, R. 3, 4. 10 From paraitre, page 386. 
11 From comprendre, page 310. 12 From ecrire, page 3?6. is From valoir, 
page 396. 



HI. ANECDOTES. 

1. LE BON MTNISTRB. 

Le puissant Aaron-al-Raschid commencait a soupconner que son 
visir Giafar ne meritait pas la confiance qu'il lui avait donnee :' les 
femmes d' Aaron, les habitants de Bagdad, les courtisans, les derviches, 
censuraient le visir avec amertume. Le caiife aimait G-iafar ; il ne 
voulut point le condamner sur les clameurs de la ville et de la cour. 
B visita son empire ; il vit partout la terre bien cultivee, la campagne 
riante, les hameaux opulente, les arts utiles en honneur, et la jeunesse 
dans la joie. II visita ses places de guerre et ses ports de mer ; il vit 
de nombreux vaisseaux qui menacaient 2 les cotes de l'Afrique et de 
TAsie ; il vit 3 des guerriers disciplines et contents. Ces guerriers, le3 
matelots, et les peuples des campagnes s'ecriaient : O Dieu ! be'nissez 
}es fideles en prolongeant les jours dAaron-al-Raschid et de son visir 
21 



482 BEADING LESSONS. 

Giafar ; ils maintiennent dans l'empire la pais, la justice, et l'abon- 
dance ; tu manifestes, grand Dieu, ton amour pour les fideles, en leur 
donnant un calife comme Aaron, et un visir comme Giafar! Le 
calife, touche de ces acclamations, entre dans une mosquee, s'y preci- 
pite a, genoux, et s' eerie: Grand Dieu! je te rends graces: tu m'as 
donne un ministre dont mes courtisans me disent du mal, et dont 
mes peuples me disent du bien. Saint-Lambert. 

i § 134, (4.) 3 § 119. 3 From voir, page 393. 

2. BONAPARTE ET LA SENTINELLE.* 
Apres avoir gagne la bataille d' Arcole, qui avait dure 1 trois jours, 
Bonaparte, toujours infatigable, parcourait son camp, sous un vete- 
ment fort simple, qui ne decelait point en lui le general en cbef, a, 
I'erTet d'examiner par lui-meme si les fatigues de trois journees aussi 
penibles que cette bataille, n'avaient rien fait perdre a, ses soldats de 
leur discipline et de leur surveillance babituelles. 2 Le general trouve 3 
une sentinelle endormie, lui enleve doucement son fusil sans 1'eVeiller, 
et fait faction a, sa place. Quelques 4 moments apres, le soldat se 
reveille ; se voyant aiusi desarmu et reconnaissant son general, il 
s'ecrie: Je suis perdu ! — Rassure-toi, lui dit Bonaparte avec douceur, 
apres tant de fatigues, il peut etre permis a, un brave tel que toi de 
succomber au sommeil ; mais une autre fois cboisis mieux ton temps. 
i § 135, (6.) > § 18, (3.) s § 118, (5.) * L. 88. 

3. BIENFAISANCE. 

Le due de Montmorenci, qui fut decapite a, Toulouse, aimait a, re- 
pandre des bienfaits. Ce seigneur, voyageant 1 en Languedoc, apercut 
dans un champ, quatre laboureurs qui dinaient a, l'ombre d'un 
buisson. Approchous-nous de ces bonnes gens, dit-il a ceux qui le 
suivaient, et demandons-leur s'ils sc croient heureux. Trois re- 
pondirent que bornaut leur felicitc a, certaines commodity de leur 
condition, que Dieu leur avait donnees,* ils ne soubaitaient rien 
dans le monde. Le quatrieme avoua franchement qu'une chose 
manquait a. son bonheur : e'etaitde pouvoir acquerir certain heritage 
que ses peres possedaient. — Et si tu l'avais, 9 cet heritage, dit M. do 
Montmorenci, serais-tu content? — Autant que je le 4 puis etre, re- 
ponditle paysan.— Combien vaut*-il? demanda le due. — Deux millc 
francs, repondit le paysan. — Qu'on" leslui donne, repritlcdue, et qu'il 
soit dit quo j'ai rendu un homme heureux en ma vie. Le VassoR. 

1 § 49, (1 .) 5 L. 42, R. 7. * L. G2, R. (6.) * L. 4G, R. 4, 5. 

• From valoir, page 396. • L. 28. 

* The word nentini'Ut i* always feminine. 



BEADING LESSONS. 483 



IV.— MAXIMES ET REFLEXIONS. 

1.* La religion clonne a la vertu les plus douces esperances, au 
■vice impenitent de justes alarmes, et au vrai repentir les plus puis- 
santes consolations ; mais elle tache surtout d'inspirer aux hommes de 
l'amour, de la douceur, et de la pitie pour les hommes. 

Montesquieu. 

2. Aimez et observez la religion, le reste meurt, elle ne meurt ja- 
mais. , Fenelon. 

3. Les vertus nees de la religion, se cachent dans la religion meme. 

Lacretelle. 

4. La religion est encore plus necessaire a, ceux qui commandent, 
qu'a ceux qui obeissent. Bossuet. 

5. Prier ensemble, dans quelque langue, dans quelque rite que ce 
soit, c'est la plus touchante fraternite d'esperance et de sympathie 
que les hommes puissent contracter sur cette terre. 

Mme. DE Stael. 

6. La conscience est un juge place dans l'interieur de notre etre. 

Segue. 

7. La conscience est la voix de Fame, les passions sont la voix du 
corps. «T. J. Rousseau. 

8. La vertu obscure est souvent meprisee, parce que rien ne la re- 
leve a, nos yeux. Massillon. 

9. La vertu est un effort fait sur nous-memes, pour le bien d'au- 
trui, dans l'intention de plaire a, Dieu seul. 

Bernardin de St. Pierre. 

10. H y a une amitie chretienne que la philosophie humaine ne 
comprend guere ; c'est l'association de deux ames qui mettent en 
commun leur foi et leurs prieres, et s'elevent ensemble vers Dieu. 

Laurentie. 

11. La modestie est au merite, ce que les ombres sont dans un 
tableau ; elle lui donne de la force et du relief. La Bruyere. 

12. La verite n'a jamais besoin de l'erreur, et les ombres n'ajoutent 
rien a la lumiere. Lamartine. 

13. On n'est pas digne d' aimer la verite, quand on peut aimer 
quelque chose plus qu'elle. Massillon. 

14. La flatterie est une fausse monnaie qui n'a de cours que par 
notre vanite'. La Rochefoucauld. 

* Tbis extract and several of the.follownig, furnish excellent illustra- 
tions of the Rules on the use of the article. 



484 BEADING LESSONS. 

15. On ne triomphe de la calomnie qu'en la dedaignant. 

Mme. DE MAINTENON. 

16. Ce n'est que pour l'innocence, que la solitude peut avoir des 
charmes. Leczinska. 

17. Les conseils agreables sont rarement des conseils utiles. 

Massillon. 

18. Ceux qui donnent des conseils sans les accompagner d'exem- 
ples, ressemblent a ces poteaux de la campagne, qui indiquent les 
chemins sans les parcourir. Rivarol. 



V.— POESIE. 

HYMNE DE L'ENFANT A SON REVEIL. 

O Pebe qu' adore mon pere 1 
Toi qu'on ne nomine qu'a genoux, 
Toi dont le nom terrible et doux, 
Fait courber le front de ma mere j 

On dit que ce brillant soleil 
N'est qu'un jouet de ta puissance ; 
Que sous tes pieds il se balance 
Comme une lampe de vermeil. 

On dit que c'est toi qui fais naitre 
Les petits oiseaux dans les champs, 
Et qui donncs aux petits enfants, 
Une ame aussi pour te connaitre. 

On dit que c'est toi qui produis 
Les fleurs dont le jardin se pare ; 
Et que sans toi, toujours avare, 
Le verger n'aurait point de fruits. 

Aux dons que ta bonte* mesure, 
Tout l'univers est convie" ; 
Nul insecte n'est oublid, 
A ce festin de la nature. 

L'agneau broute le serpolet ; 
La chevre s'attacbe au cytise ; 
La mouche, au bord du vase, puise 
Les blanches gouttes de mon lait 



BEADING LESSONS 485 

L'alouette a la graine amere 
Que laisse envoler le glaneur, 
Le passereau suit le vanneur, 
Et l'enfant s'attache a sa mere. 

Et, pour obtenir chaque don 
Que chaque jour tu fais eclore, 
A midi, le soir, a l'aurore, 
Que faut-il ? — prononcer ton nom. 

Dieu ! ma bouche balbutie, 
Ce nom, des anges redoute, 
Un enfant meme est ecoute, 
Dans le chceur qui te glorifie ! 

Ah ! puisqu'il entend de si loin 
Les vceux que notre bouche adresse, 
Je veux lui demander sans cesse 
Ce dont les autres ont besoin. 

Mon Dieu I donne l'onde aux fontaines, 
Donne la plume aux passereaux, 
Et la laine aux petits agneaux, 
Et l'ombre et la rosee aux plaines. 

Donne aux malades la sante, 
Au mendiant le pain qu'il pleure, 
A l'orphelin une demeure, 
Au prisonnier la liberte. 

Donne une famille nombreuse 

Au pere qui craint le Seigneur, 

Donne a, 1 moi sagesse et bonheur 

Pour que ma mere soit heureuse. Lamarttke. 

2. LA FEUILLE. 
De ta tige detachee, 
Pauvre feuille dessechee, 
Ou vas tu ? — Je n'en sais rien : 
L'orage a brise le chene 
Qui seul etait mon soutien. 
De son inconstante haleine 
Le zephyr ou l'aquilon, 

1 The d in this line is a poetical license. 



486 BEADING LESSONS. 

Depuis ce jour me promene, 

De la foret a la plaine, 

De la montagne au vallon ; 

Je vais ou le vent me mene, 

Sans me plaindre ou m'effrayer ; 

Je vais ou va toute chose, 

Ou. va la feuille de rose, 

Et la feuille de laurier. Arnault. 

3. LE MOXTAGNARD EMIGRE. 
Combien j'ai douce souvenance 
Du joli lieu de ma naissance 1 
Ma sceur, qu'ils etaient beaux ces jours 

De France ! 
O mon pays, sois mes amours ! 

Toujours. 

Te souvient-il que notre mere, 
Au foyer de notre chaumiere, 
Nous pressait sur son sein joyeux, 

Ma chere ? 
Et nous baisions ses blonds cheveux, 

Tous deux. 

Ma sceur, te souvient-il encore, 
Du chateau que baignait la Dore, 
Et de cette tant vieille tour, 

Du More, 
Ou l'airain sonnait le retour 

Du jour? 

Te souvient-il du lac tranquille 
Qu'eftleurait l'hirondelle agile, 
Du vent qui courbait le roseau 

Mobile, 
Et du soleil couchant, sur l'eau, 

Si beau ? 

Te souvient-il de cette amie, 
Douce compagne de ma vie ? 
Dans les bois en cueillant la fleur 

Jolie, 
Helene appuyait sur mon cceur 

Son cceur. 



READING LESSONS. 487 

Oh ! qui me rendra mon Helene, 
Et la montagne et le grand chene ? 
Leur souvenir fait tous les jours 

Ma peine. 
Mon pays sera mes amours 

Toujours. Chateaubeiand. 

4. STANCES. 
Et j'ai dit dans mon cceur, que faire de la vie ? 
Irai-je encor, suivant ceux qui m'ont devance, 
Corame l'agneau qui passe ou sa meYe a passe, 
Imiter des mortels l'immortelle folie ? 

L'un cherche sur les mers les tresors de Memnon, 
Et la vague engloutit ses voeux et son navire ; 
Dans le sein de la gloire ou son genie aspire, 
L' autre meurt, enivre par 1'echo d'un vain nom. 

Avec nos passions formant sa vaste trame, 
Celui-la, fonde un trone, et monte pour tomber ; 
Dans des pieges plus doux aimant a succomber, 
Celui-ci lit son sort dans les yeux d'une femme. 

Le paresseux s'endort dans les bras de la faim ; 
Le laboureur conduit sa fertile charrue ; 
Le savant pense et lit; le guerrier frappe et tue; 
Le mendiant s'assied sur le bord du cliemin. 

Ou vont-ils cependant ? — Us vont ou va la feuille 
Que chasse devant lui le souffle des hivers. 
Ainsi vont se fletrir dans leurs travaux divers 
Ces generations que le temps seme et cueille. 

Us luttaient contre lui, mais le temps a vaincu. 
Comme un fleuve engloutit le sable de ses rives, 
Je l'ai vu devorer leurs ombres fugitives. 
Us sont nes, ils sont morts. Seigneur, ont-ils vecu ? 

Pour moi, je chanterai le maitre que j'adore, 
Dans le bruit des cites, dans la paix des deserts, 
Couche sur le rivage, ou flottant sur les mers, 
Au declin du soleil, au lever de 1'aurore. 

La terre m'a crie : Qui done est le Seigneur ? 
— Celui dont Fame immense est partout repandue, 
Celui dont un seul pas mesure l'etendue, 
Celui dont le soleil emprunte sa splendeur; 



488 READING LESSONS. 

Celui qui du neant a tire la matiere, 
Celui qui sur le vide a fonde l'univers, 
Celui qui sans rivage a renferme les mers, 
Celui qui d'un regard a lance la lumiere ; 

Celui qui ne connait ni jour, ni lendemain, 
Celui qui de tout temps de soi-meine s'enfante, 
Qui vit dans l'avenir comme a l'heure presente, 
Et rappelle les temps echappes de sa main. 

C'est lui, e'est le Seigneur ! Que ma langue redise 
Les cent noms de sa gloire aux enfants des mortels 1 
Comme la harpe d'or pendue a ses autels, 
Je cbanterai pour lui, jusqu'si, ce qu'il me brise I 

Lamartine. 

5. LAFAYETTE EN AMERIQUE. 

Republicans, quel cortege s'avance ? 

— Un vieux guerrier debarque parmi nous. 

— Vient-il d'un roi vous jurer l'alliance? 

— II a des rois allume le courroux. 

— Est-il puissant? — Seul il francbit les ondes. 

— Qu'a-t-il done fait ? — II a brise des fers. 

Gloire immortelle a, l'homme des deux mondes I 

Jours de triompbe, eclairez l'univers ! 

Europeen, partout sur ce rivage 

Qui retentit de joyeuses clameurs, 

Tu vois rdgner, sans trouble et sans servage, 

La paix, les lois, lc travail, et les mceurs. 

Des opprimds ces bords sont le refuge : 

La tyrannie a peuple nos deserts, 

L'bomme et ses droits ont ici Dieu pour juge. 

Jours de triompbe, eclairez l'univers ! 

Mais que de sang nous couta ce bien-etre ! 
Nous succombions ; Lafayette accourut, 
Montra la France, eut Washington pour maitre, 
Lutta, vainquit, et l'Anglais disparut. 
Pour son pays, pour la liberie sainte, 
II a depuia grandi dans les revers. 
Des fers d'Olmutz, nous effacons l'empreinte. 
Jours de trigrxipbe, eclairez l'univers 1 



BEADING LESSONS. 489 

Ce vieil ami que tant d'ivresse accueille, 
Par un heros, ce heros adopt e, 
Benit jadis, a sa premiere feuille, 
L'arbre naissant de notre liberte. 
Mais aujourd'bui. que l'arbre et son feuillage 
Bravent en paix la foudre et les hivers, 
II vient s'asseoir sous son fertile ombrage. 
Jours de triomphe, eclairez l'univers ! 

Autour de lui, vois nos chefs, vois nos sages, 
Nos vieux soldats se rappelant ses traits ; 
Vois tout un peuple, et ces tribus sauvages, 
A son seul nom sortant de leurs forets. 
L'arbre sacre, sur ce concours immense, 
Forme un abri de rameaux toujours verts. 
Les vents au loin porteront sa sentence. 
Jours de triompbe, eclairez l'univers 1 

L'Europeen que frappent ces paroles, 

Servit des rois, suivit des conquerants ; 

Un peuple esclave encensait ces idoles ; 

Un peuple libre a des honneurs plus grands. 

Helas ! dit-il, et son ceil sur les ondes 

Semble cbercber des bords lointains et cbers ! 

Que la vertu rapprocbe les deux mondes ! 

Jours de triomphe, eclairez l'univers ! Berangee. 

6. LA MAKSEILLAISB. 

Allons, enfants de la patrie : 

Le jour de gloire est arrive: 

Contre nous de la tyrannie 

L'etendard sanglant est leve. 

Entendez-vous dans les campagnes 

Mugir ces feroces soldats? 

Us viennent j usque dans vos bras 

Egorger vos fils, vos compagnes. 
Aux armes ! citoyens ; formez vos bataillons ; 
Marchez ; — qu'un sang impur abreuve vos sillons ! 

Ghceur. 
Aux armes ! citoyens ; formons nos bataillons ; 
Marcbons ; — qu'un sang impur abreuve nos sillons ! 



490 BEADING LESSONS. 

Que veut cette horde d'esclaves, 
De traitres, de rois conjures ? 
Pour qui ces ignobles entraves, 
Ces fers des longterups prepares ? 
— Francais, pour nous, ah ! quel outrage, 
Quels transports il doit exciter ! 
C'est nous qu'on ose menacer 
De rendre a l'antique esclavage ! 
Aux armes, etc. 

Quoi ! des cohortes etrangeres 
Feraient la loi dans nos foyers ! 
Quoi ! ces phalanges mercenaires 
Terrasseraient nos tiers guerriers I 
Grand Dieu ! par des mains enchafnees 1 
ISTos fronts sous le joug se plieraient I 
De vils despotes deviendraient 
Les maitres de nos destinees ! 
Aux armes, etc. 

Tremblez, tyrans ! et vous, perfides, 
L'opprobre de tous les partis ; 
Tremblez I . . . vos projets parricides 
Tont enfm recevoir lcur prix. 
Tout est soldat pour vous combattre, 
S'ils tombent, nos jeunes heros, 
La France en produit de nouveaux, 
Contre vous tout prets a se battre. 
Aux amies, etc. 

Francais ! en guerriers magnanimeg, 
Portez ou retenez vos coups : 
Epargnez les tristes victimes, 
A regret s'armant contre vous ; — 
Mais ces despotes sanguinaires, 
Mais les complices de Bouilld . : . 
Tous ces tigres qui, sans pitie, 
DSohirerit le sein de leur mere . . . 
Aux armes, etc. 



1 Literally, by chainedrhands, i. >.. by the hands of slaves, of mercenary 
The meaning of this word has often itch misunderstood. The. 
style of the Marseillaise Hymu, is perhaps, in one or two places, not 
strictly correct 



BEADING LESSONS. 491 

Amour sacre de la patrie, 
Conduis, soutiens nos bras vengeurs, 
Liberte, liberte cherie 
Combats avec tes defenseurs. 
Sous nos drapeaux, que la victoire 
Accoure a tes males accents; 
Que nos ennemis expirants, 
Voient ton triomphe et notre gloire ! 

Aux armes, etc. Eouget de L'isle. 



1. LE EETOUR DANS LA. PATRIE. 

Qu'il va lentement le navire, 
A qui 1 j'ai confie mon sort ! 
Au rivage ou mon cceur aspire, 
Qu'il est lent a trouver un port ! 

Prance adoree ! 

Douce contree ! 
Mes yepx cent fois ont cru te decouvrir, 

Qu'un vent rapide 

Soudain nous guide 
Aux bords sacres ou je reviens mourir 
Mais enfin le matelot crie ; 
Terre, terre, la-bas, voyez ! 
Ah ! tous mes maux sont oublies. 

Salut a ma patrie ! 

Oui, voila les rives de France ; 
Oui, voila, le port vaste et sur, 
Voisin des champs ou mon enfance 
S'ecoula sous un chaume obscur ! 

France adoree 1 

Douce contree ! 
Apres vingt ans, enfin je te revois ; 

De mon village 

Je vois la plage, 
Je vois fumer la cime de mes toits. 
Combien mon ame est attendrie ! 
La furent mes premieres amours; 
La ma mere m'attend toujours, 

Salut a ma patrie ! 

A poetical license ; this should be auquel § 39, (2.) 



492 READING LESSONS. 

Au bruit des transports d'allegresse, 
Enfin le navire entre au port. 
Dans cette barque ou Ton se presse 
Hatons-nous d'atteindre le bord. 

France adoree ! 

Douce coutree 1 
Puissent tes fils te revoir ainsi tousl 

Enfin j'arrive, 

Et sur la rive, 
Je rends au ciel, je rends grace a genoux. 
Je t'embrasse, 6 terre cberie ! 
Dieu ! qu'un exile doit souffrir ! 
Moi, desormais, je puis mourir. 

Salut a ma patrie ! Beranger. 



VOCABULARY FOR THE READING LESSONS. 





ABBREVIATIONS. 




adj. 


adjective. 


P- 


participle. 


adj. v. 


verbal adjective. 


pi. 


plural. 


adv. 


adverb. 


pre. 


preposition. 


art. 


article. 


prn. 


pronoun. 


conj. 


conjunction. 


v. a. 


active verb. 


f. 


feminine gender. 


v. a. & n. 


active and neuter verb. 


ind. p. 


present of indicative. 


v. aux. 


auxiliary verb. 


int. 


interjection. 


v. unip. 


unipersonal verb. 


m. 


masculine gender. 


v. ir. or ir. 


irregular verb. 


n. 


noun. 


v. n. 


neuter verb. 


p.d. 


past definite. 


v. r. 


reflective verb. 




The numbers after the verbs indicate the conjugation. 



A-AD. 

A, a (with a grave accent), pre. at or 
to. 

Abondance, n. f. abundance, plenty. 

Aboutir, v. n. 2. to end in, to come 
to. 

Abreuver, v. a. 1. to water, to fill. 

Abyme or abime, n. m. abyss, depth. 

Abri, n. m. shelter. 

Academicien, n. m. Academician. 

Academie, n. f. academy. 

Accent, n. m. accent, pi. voice. 

Acclamation, n. f. acclamation. 

Accompagner, v. a. 1. to accompany. 

Accorder, v. a. 1. to grant (s') v. r. 
to agree. ' 

Accourir, v. n. ir. 2. to run, to has- 
ten to. 

Accueillir, v. a. ir. 2. to welcome. 

Acheter, v. a. 1. to buy. 

Achever, v. a. 1. to achieve, com- 
plete. 

Acquerir, v. a. ir. 2. to acquire. 

Acquitter (s'), v. r. 1. to acquit one's 
self of, to discharge. 

Adieu, int. & n. m. adieu, farewell, 
leave. 

Admettre, v. a. ir. 4. to admit. 

Admiration, n. f. admiration. 

Admirer, v. a. 1. to admire. 

Adopter, v. a. 1. to adopt. 

Adorer, v. a. 1. to adore. 



Adresser, v. a. 1. to address; (s'), ref. 



to 

Affectation, n. f. affectation. 

Afflige, p. & adj. v. grieved, af- 
flicted. 

Afrique, Africa. 

Agacer, v. a. 1. to entice, to tease. 

Agile, adj. nimble, light. 

Agiter, v. a. to agitate, to shake. 

Agneau, n. m. lamb. 

Ah ! int. Ah. 

Aigle, n. m. eagle. 

Aile, n. f. wing. 

Aimer, v. a. 1. to love, to like: 

Ainsi, adv. thus, so. 

Air, n. m. air. 

Airain, n. m. brass. 

Aisement, adv. easily. 

Ajouter, v. a. 1. to add. 

Alarm, n. f. alarm. 

Allegorie, n. f. allegory. 

Allegresse, n. {.joy. 

Aller, v. n. ir. 1. (ind. p., je vais,) 
to go. 

Alliance, n. f alliance. 

Allumer, v. a. 1. to light, kindle. 

Alouette, n. f. lark. 

Ambassadeur, n. m. ambassador. 

Ambition, n. f. ambition. 

Ame, n. f. soul. 

Amer, e, adj. bitter. 



494 



AM-AT. 



AT-BE. 



Amerique, America. 
Amitie, n. f. friendship. 
Amertume, n. f. bitterness, sorrow. 
Ami, e, n. m. & £ friend. 
Amour, n. m. love. 
Ane, n. m. ass, donkey. 
An, n. m. annee, f. year. 
Ancien, m. adj. ancient, old. 
Ange, n. m. angel 
Anglais, e, adj. English. 
Animal, (pi. aux.) n. m. animal. 
Animer, v. a. 1. to animate, to excite. 
Annoncer, v. a. 1. to announce. 
Antique, adj. ancient, antique. 
A peine, adv. scarcely, hardly. 
Apercevoir, v. a. 3. to perceive. 
Apologue, n. m. apologue. 
Apparence, n. f. appearance. 
Apparteuir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind. p. j'ap- 

partiens), to belong. 
Appeler, v. a. 1. to call. 
Appreudre, v. a. 4. (p. appris), to 

learn. 
Approcher, v. a. 1. to bring near, (s'), 

v. r. to approach. 
Appuyer, v. a. 1. to lean. 
Apres, pre. after. 
Aquilon, n. m. north wind. 
Arabie, Arabia. 
Arbre, n. m. tree. 
Arcbiteote, n. m. architect. 
Anner, v. a. 1. to arm (a?), v. r. to arm 

one 8 self. 
Arracher, v. a. 1. to tear. 
Arriver, v. n. 1. to arrive. 
Art. ii. in. art. 
Article, n. m. article. 
Artilico, n. m. artifice, cunning, 

trick. 
Asie, Asia. 

Aspirer, v. n. 1. to aspire. 
Aflfl imbler, v. a. 1. to assemble. 
Asseoir (s'), v. r. ir. 3. (ind. p. jo 

m'assieds, p. assis), to sit down. 
Association, n. f. association, com- 

pony. 
AflBommer, V. a. 1. to strike down, 

to kll. 
Alia iher, v. a. 1. to attach. 
Ai'a i ■, adj. attached. 
Attei id re, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j'at- 

teignis), t" reach, to hit. 

Alt"! [re, I. to mi-till, to e/pect. 
An. 'ii hi, e, a. v. p. moved, graved. 
Atteutif, vc, adj. attentive. 



Attraper, v. a. 1. to catch. 

Au, art. at or to the. 

Aujourd'hui, adv. to-day. 

Auparavant, adv. before. 

Aupres, pre. & adv. near. 

Auquel, prn. to which. 

Aurore, n. £ dawn, aurora. 

Aussi, conj. & adv. as, so, also. 

Aussitot, adv. immediately. 

Austral, e, adj. austral. 

Autaut, adv. as much, as many. 

Autel, n. m. altar. 

Auteur, n. m. author. 

Autour, pre. & adv. round, around. 

Autre, adj. other. 

Autrefois, adv. formerly. 

Autrui, prn. other, others. 

Aux, art. at or to tlie. 

Avancer (s'), v. r. 1. to advance, 

approach 
Avant, pre. before. 
Avare, n. & adj. miser, avaricious. 
Avcc, pre. with. 
Avenir, n. m. future. 
Aveugle, adj. blind. 
Avide, adj. arixious, eager. 
Aviser (s'), v. r. 1. to think, to take 

into oiie's head. 
Avoir, v. aux. & a. ir. (p. d. j'eus), 

to have. 
Avouer, v. a. 1. to confess. 



B. 



Badin, e, adj. playful. 

Baigner, v. a. 1. to bathe. 

Baillon, s. ni. gag. 

Baiser, v. a. 1. to kiss. 

Balancer, v. n. 1. to balance, hesi- 
tate. 

Balbutier, v. a. & n. 1. to stammer. 

Barque, n. f. bark, boat. 

Barriere, n. f. gate. 

Bataille, n. f. battle. 

Bataillon, n. m. battalion. 

Batir, v. a. 2. to build. 

Battre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. battu,) to beat. 

Baudot, n. m. donkey. 

Bavard, e, n. & adj. talkative, prat- 
tler. 

Beau, bel, C belle, adj. fine, hand- 

Beaucoup. adv. much, many. 
BeauU ; , n. f. beauty. 



BE-CE. 



CE-CO. 



495 



Bee, n. m. beak. 

Bel-esprit, n. m. wit. 

Benir, v. a. 2. to bless. 

Bergcr, n. m. shepherd. 

Besoin, n. m. need, want. 

Beurre, n. m. butter. 

Bien, n. m. property, adv. well. 

Bien-etre, n. m. welfare, comfort. 

Bienfaisance, n. f. beneficence, be- 
nevolence. 

Bienfait, n. m. benefit. 

Bientot, adv. soon. 

Billet, n. m. note. 

Blanc, blanche, adj. white. 

Boire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je bus, p. 
bu) to drink. 

Bois, n. m. wood, forest. 

Bon, ne, adj. good, kind, simple 

Bonheur, n. m. happiness. 

Bonne-chere, n. f. good living. 

Bonte, n. f. goodness, kindness. 

Bord, n. m. border, shore. 

Borner, v. a. 1. to confine, to bound. 

Botte, n. f. boot, bundle. 

Bouche, n. f. mouth. 

Bouillir, v. n. ie. 2. to boil, to bubble. 

B ranch e, n. f. branch. 

Bras, n. m. arm. 

Brave, adj. brave, worthy. 

Braver, v. a. 1. to brave, affront. 

Brebis, n. f. sheep. 

Brillant, e. adj. shining, brilliant. 

Briser, v. a. 1. to break. 

Brouter, v. a. & n. 1. to browse, to 
graze. 

Bruit, n. m. noise. 

Buisson, n. m. bush. 



C, pm. it. 

Cacher, v. a. 1. to hide, conceal; (se), 

v. r. to hide one's self. 
Cage, n. f. cage. 
Calife, n. m. calif. 
Calomnie, n. f. calumny. 
Camp, n. m. camp 
Campagne, n. f. country, campaign. 
Candidat, n. m. candidate. 
Caresse, n. f. caress. 
Cas, n. m. case. 

Causeur, se, adj. talker, talkative. 
Ce, pro. & adj. this, that. 
Celebre, adj. celebrated. 



Celeste, adj. celestial. 

Celui, pm. this, that. 

Censurer, v. a. 1. to censure. 

Cent, adj. num. hundred. 

Centre, n. m. centre. 

Cependaut, conj. however. 

Certain, adj. certain. 

Ces, adj. these, those. 

Cesse (sans), without ceasing. 

Cette, adj. this, that. 

Ceux, prn. these, those. 

Chaleur, n. f. heat. 

Champ, n. m. field. 

Changer, v. a. & n. 1. to change. 

Chant, n. m. so?ig, singing. 

Chanter, v. a. & n. 1. to sing. 

Chaos, n. m. chaos. 

Chaque, adj. each. 

Charger, v. a. 1. to charge, load. 

Charme, n. m. charm. 

Charrier, v. a. 1. to transport, carry. 

Chasser, v. a. & n. 1. to hunt, to chase, 

to drive away. 
Ch&teau, n. m. castle, villa. 
Chaume, n. m. thatch. 
Chaumiere, n. f. cottage. 
ChefJ n. m. chief. 
Chemin, n. m. way, road. 
Chene, n. m. oak. 
Cher, e, adj. dear. 
Chercher, v. a. 1. to seek. 
Chere, f. fare; faire bonne-chere, to 

live well. 
Cheri, adj. cherished, beloved. 
Cheveux, n. m. pL hair. 
Chevre, n. f. goat. 
Chien, n. m. dog. 
Chiffre, n. m. figure. 
Chceur, n. m. choir, chorus. 
Choisir, v. a. 2. to choose. 
Choix, n. m. choice. 
Chose, n. f. thing. 
Chretien, n. & adj. Christian. 
Chute, n. f. fall. 
Ciel, n. m. (pi. cieux,) heaven. 
Cime, n. f. peak, top. 
Circonference, n. f. circumfei 
Cite, n. f. city. 
Citoyen, n. m. citizen. 
Clair, e, adj. clear, n. m. light. 
Clameur, n. f. cry, clamor. 
Coeur, n. m. heart. 
Cohorte, n. f. cohort. 
Coin, n. m. corner. 
Colline, n. f. hill. 



496 



CO-CO. 



Combattrc, v. a. & n. 4. to combat, 
to fight. 

Commander, v. a. 1. to command, to 
order. 

Combien, adv. how much, hoio many. 

Comme, adv. & conj. as, like, when. 

Commencement, n. m. beginning. 

Commencer, v. a. 1. to begin. 

Comment, adv. how. 

Commission, n. f. commission. 

Commodite, n. f. convenience. 

Comrnun, c, adj. common, usual. 

Compagne, n. f. companion. 

Complice, n. m. accomplice. 

Composer, v. a. 1. to compose. 

Comprendre, v. a. ir. 4. to under- 
stand, to comprise. 

Comptant, adj. & adv. ready, for cash. 

Compter, v. a, 1. to count, to intend. 

Concevoir, v. a. 3. to conceive. 

Conclure, v. a. ir. 1. to conclude. 

Concours, n. m. concourse, assembly. 

Condamner, v. a. 1. to condemn. 

Condition, n. £ condition. 

Conduire, v. a. ir. 4. to conduct. 

Confiance, a. £ confidence, depen- 
dence. 

Confier, v. a. 1. to trust, to confide. 

Confrere, n. m. brother, fellow. 

Confinement, adv. confusedly. 

Conjure, a. v. sworn together. 

Counaitre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. jo con- 
nus, p. connu), to know, to be ac- 
quainted with. 

Conque, n. £ shell. 

Conquerant, n. m. conqueror. 

Conscience, n. f. conscience. 

Conseil, n. m. advice, counsel 

Consentir, v. n. 2. to consent, agree. 

Conscrver, v. a. 1. to preserve. 

Consolation, n. £ consolation. 

Constant, e, adj. constant. 

Consternation, n. f. consternation. 

Content, e, adj. pleased, content. 

Continuellement, adv. continually 

Contracter, v. a. 1. to contract. 

Contre, pre. against. 
Contive, n. f. country, district. 

Contre-temps, n. m. disappointment. 
Convainore, v. a. ir. 4. to convince. 
Convonir. v. n. 2. to agree, to suit, 

to confess. 
Conversation, n. £ conversation. 
Convier, v. a. 1. to invite. 
Corps, n. m. body, corps. 



Cortege, n. m. retinue. 

Cote, n. f. coast. 

C6te, n. m. side. 

Couchant, n. m. West. 

Coucher, (se), v. rtf. 1. to lie down. 

Couleuvre, n. f snake, adder. 

Coup, n. m. blow. 

Coupe, n. f. cup, vessel. 

Couper, v. a. 1. to cut. 

Cour, n. f. court. 

Courage, n. m. emirage. 

Courber, v. a. 1. to bend, to bow. 

Courroux, n. m. anger. 

Court, e, adj. short. 

Cours, n. m. course. 

Courtisan, n. ru. courtier. 

Coiiter, v. n. 1. to cost. 

Couvrir, v. a. ir. 2. to cover. 

CraLndre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je craignis, 

p. craint), to fear. 
Craquer, v. a. & n. 1. to crack, to snap. 
Creer, v. a. 1. to create. 
Crier, n. a. 1. to cry. 
Croire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je crus, p. 

cm), to believe. 
j Croquer, v. a. 1. to eat greedily. 
Cueillir, v. a. ir. 2. to gather, to 

pick. 
Cultiver, v. a. 1. to cultivate. 
Curiosite, n. £ curiosity. 
Cytise, n. m. ajtisus. 



D. 

Dans, pre. in, into. 
Pavantage, adv. more. 
De, pre. of or from. 
I>< barquer, v. a. & n. 1. to land. 
Deborder, v. n. 1. to run over. 
Debout, adv. standing. 
Decapiter, v. a. 1. to behead. 
1 Verier, v. a. 1. to discover. 
Dechircr, v. a. 1. to tear. 
Decision, n. £ decision 
Declin, n. m. decline, fall. 
Decouvrir, v. a. ir. 2. to discover, un- 
cover. 
P 'daifrner, v. a. 1. to disdain. 
Defaut, n. m. defect. 
Defendre, v. a. 4. to defend, to forbid. 
Defenseur, n. m. defender, protector. 
Deeuiser, v. a. 1. to disguise. 
I>ej;'i. adv. already. 
Delicat, c, adj. delicate. 



DE-DI. 



DI-EM. 



49"7 



Delicatement, adv. delicately. 

Delice, n. m. delight. 

Delices, n. f. pi. delight. 

Delicieux, se, adj. delightful, deli- 
cious. 

Demands, n. f. request, question. 

Demander, v. a. 1. to ask, to request. 

Deineure, n. f. abode, dwelling. 

Demon, n. m. demon. 

Deniers, n. m. p. money, means. 

Deployer, v. a. ]. to display. 

Depuis, pre. since. 

Daranger, v. a. 1. to disturb, to put 
out of order. 

Dernier, e, adj. last, latter. 

Derober, v. a. 1. to steal, to conceal. 

Derviche, n. m. dervise. 

Des, pre. from. 

Desagreable, adj. disagreeable. 

Desarme, adj. v. disarmed. 

Descendre, v. n. 4. to descend, to 
come down. 

Desert, n. m. desert. 

Desirer, v. a. 1. to wish, to desire. 

Desoler, v. a. 1. to distress, to grieve, 
to desolate. 

Desormais, adv. henceforth. 

Dessecher, v. a. 1. to dry up, to 
drain. 

Dessous, adv. under. 

Dessus, adv. above. 

Destinee, n. f. fate. 

Destiner, v. a. 1. to destine. 

Detacher, v. a. 1. to detach, to sepa- 
rate. 

Detruire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je de- 
truisis), to destroy. 

Deux, adj. two. 

Devancer, v. a. 1. to outstrip, to come 
before. 

Devaut, pre. before, opposite. 

Devenir, v. n. 2. to ' 

Devoir, v. a. 3. to owe. 

Divorer, v. a. 1. 

Dieu, n. m. God. 

Digne, adj. worthy. 

Diminuer, v. a. 1. to diminish. 

Diner, n. m. dinner. 

Diner, v. n. to dine. 

Dire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. dit.) to say, tell 

Discourir, v. n. ir. 2. to discourse. 

Discipline, n. f. discipline. 

Disparaitro, v. n. ir. 4. to disappear. 

Disperser, v. a. 1. to disperse. 

Distance, n. f. distance. 



Divers, adj. diverse, different. 

Divin, e, adj. divine. 

Dix, adj. ten. 

Docteur, n. m. doctor. 

Dome, n. m. dome. 

Don, n. m. gift. 

Done, conj. therefore, then. 

Donner, v. a. 1. to give. 

Dont, prn. of which, of whom. 

Dorer, v. a. 1. to gild. 

Dormir, v. n. ir. 2. to sleep. 

Doucement, adv. softly, sweetly. 

Douceur, n. f. softness, sweetness. 

Doux, ce, adj. soft, sweet. 

Drapeaux, n. m. p. colors, standards. 

Droit, n. m. right. 

Droit, adj. & adv. straight. 

Du, art. of or from the. 

Due, n. m. duke. 

Duree, n. f. duration. 

Durer, v. n. 1. to last, to endure. 



E. 

Eau, n. f. water. 
Echapper, v. n. 1. to 
Echo, n. m. echo. 
Eclairer, v. a. 1. to light. 
Eclat, n. m. brightness, splendo 
Eclore, v. n. ir. 4. to hatch. 
Ecouler (s'), v. r. 1. to 

pass. 
Ecouter, v. a. 1. to listen, to hear. 
Ecraser, v. a. 1. to crush. 
Eerier (s'), v. r. 1. to exclaim. 
Ecrire, v. a. ir. 4. to write. 
Edifice, n. m. edifice. 
Effacer, v. a. 1. to efface. 
Effet, n. m. effect. 
Effleurer, v. a. 1. to graze, to touch 



Effort, n. m. effort, endeavor. 

Effrayer, v. a. 1. to frighten, (s') ref. 
to be frightened. 

forger, v. a. 1. to slaughter, to mur- 
der, to cut the throat. 

Eh bien ! int. well ! 

Elever, v. a. 1. to raise. 

Elle, prn. she, it, her. 

Eloquence, n. f. eloquence. 

Embellir, v. a. 2. to embellish. 

Emblematique, adj. emblematical. 

Embleme, n. m. emblem. 

a. 1. to embrace, to kiss. 



498 



EAI-ET. 



Emigre, n. & adj. emigrant. 
Emp*clier, v. a. 1. to prevent. 
Empire, n. m. empire. 
Employer, v. a, 1. to employ, to 

use. 
Empreinte, n. £ mark, print. 
Emprunter, v. a. 1. to borrow. 
En, pre. in, into, at, to. 
Ed, rel. prn. of it, of them, etc. 
Encenser, v. a. 1. to flatter, to worship. 
Enehainer, v. a. 1. to chain. 
Eneliantement, n. m. enchantment, 

charm. 
Encore, adv. yet, stilt, again. 
Endormir, v. a. ir. 2. to put or lull to 

sleep, (s') re£ to go to sleep. 
Endroit, n. m. spot, place. 
Enfant, n. m. child. 
Eufanter, v. a. 1. to produce. 
En for, n. m. hell. 
Enfers, n. m. pi. infernal regions. 
Enlin. adv. at last, finally. 
Enfler, (s') v. r. 1. to swell, to increase. 

itir, v. a 2. to swallow up. 
Enivrer, v. a. 1. to intoxicate. 
Enlever, v. a. 1. to lake or carry 

away. 
Eimc-mi. n. m. & adj. enemy, in- 

Ennuyeux, sc, adj. tiresome, weari- 
some. 

Me, adv. tojether. 

Entendre, v. a. 4. to hear, to under- 
stand. 

Eatravee, n. f. pi. bonds, obstacles, 

Entrer, v. n. I. to enter, to go in. 
Knvers, pre. towards, to. 

r. {>'i. v. r. 1. to fly away. 
Gpargner, v. a. 1. to spare. 
Epaule, n. f. shoulder. 
E|><>uvaiiter, v. a. 1. to frighten. 

Be, n. rn. & f. husband, wife. 
Epuiser, v. a. 1. to exhaust, 
Erreur, n. f. error. 
Enclave, n. m. t 
K-p;iiv. n. id. *pace. 
Eaperanee, a C 
E-ji irer, v. a. 1. to hope. 
Esprit, n. in. v i: 

r, v. a. 1. to try, attempt. 
El, I'onj. and. 
Etablir, v. a. 2. to establish. 

d m. state, condition, trade. 
Ei ; , u. in. summer. 



Eteindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. j"e'teignis), 

to extinguish, put out. 
Etendard, n. in. ttaudard. 
Etendue, n. f. extent. 
Eteruel, le, adj. & n. eternal 
Etonner, v. a. 1. to astonish. 
Etourdir, v. a. 2. to stun, to disturb. 
Etre, v. aux. & n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je 

suis, p. d. je rus), to be. 
Etre, n. m. being. 
Euphrate, Euphrates. 
Europeen, ne, n. & adj. European. 
Eux, prn. m. pi. them. 
Eveiller, v. a. 1. to awake. 
Eviter, v. a. 1. to avoid. 
Exactement, adv. exactly. 
Examiner, v. a. 1. to examine. 
Excellent, e, adj excellent. 
Exccssif, ve, adj excessive. 
Exciter, v. a. 1. to excite. 
Exeniple, n. m. example. 
Exile, u. m. & adj. exile, exiled. 
Expirant, adj. v. expiring, dying. 
Expirer, v. n. 1. to expire. 
Exterieur, n. m. outside, exterior. 
Exterieur, e, adj. exterior. 
ExtrCmite, n. £ extremity. 



F. 

Faelie, e, adj. v. angry, sorry. 
Facon, n. f. fashion, way. 
Faction, n. f. faction, watch. 
Fagotiu, m. a name often given in 

l-'ronr,- to monb'ys. 
Fail ile, adj. weak, feeble. 
Eaim. n. f. hunger. 
Eaire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je fis), to 

make, to do, to cause. 
Falloir, v. nnip. ir. 3. (ind. p. il faut), 

to be necessary. 
Famille, n. f. family. 
Farce, n. f farce, trick, 
Farouche, adj. uild, stern. 
Fatigue, n. f. fatigue, weariness. 
FausaeiiHiit, adv. falsely. 
FaUX, n. f. scythe. 
Faux, Be, adj. false. 
Felicite, n. f. happiness, felicity. 
l'emnic, n. £ woman, wife. 
Fers, ii. in. pi. chains, irons. 
Fertile, adj. fruitful, fertile. 
Feu. n. rn fire. 
Feuillage, n. m. foliage. 



GE-HO. 



499 



Feuille, n. f. leaf. 

Festin, n. m. sumpituous meal, repast. 

Fidele, n. m. & adj. faithful. 

Fier, e, adj. proud, formidable. 

Fier, (se), v. r. 1. to trust, to confide. 

Fille, n. t' daughter, girl. 

Fils, n. m. son. 

Flatterie, n. f. flattery. 

Fleau, n. m. scourge. 

Fletrir, v. a. & n. 2. to fade, wither. 

Fleur, n f. flower. 

Fleuve, n. m. river, stream. 

Flotter, v. n. 1. to float, to wave. 

Foi, n. f. faith. 

Fois, n. f. time. 

Folie, n. f. folly. 

Fond, n. m. bottom. 

Fonder, v. a. 1. to 

Fontaine, n. f. fountain, spring. 

Force, n. f. strength, force. 

Foret, n. f. forest, wood. 

Former, v. a. 1. to form. 

Fort, e, adj. strong. 

Fortune, n. f. fortune. 

Foudre, n. f. thunderbolt. 

Fou, folle, adj. & n. m. & f. fool, 
foolish. 

Fouler, v. a. 1. to tread under foot. 

Foyer, n. m. hearth. 

Foyers, n. m. pi. hearth, home, na- 
tive country. . 

Franc, n. m. franc. 

Francais, e, adj. French. 

Franchement, adv. frankly. 

Franchir, v. a. 2. to step over, to pass 
over. 

Frapper, v. a.. 1 . to strike. 

Fraternite, n. f. brotherhood. 

Froid. n. m. cold. 

Fromage, n. m. cheese. 

Front, n. m. forehead, brow. 

Fruit, n. m. fruit. 

Fugitif, ve, adj. fugitive. 

Fuite, n. f. flight. 

Fumer, v. n. & a. 1. to smoke. 

Fusil, n. m. gun. 



G. 

Gagner, v. a. 1 . to tvin, gain. 
Garde, n. f. guard, watch, care. 
Gate, adj. v. spoiled. 
Gelee, n. f. frost. 
Gemir, v. n. 2. to moan, groan. 



General, n. m. & adj. general. 

Generation, n. f. generation. 

Genie, n. in. genius. 

Genou, n. m. knee. 

Gens, n. pi. people. 

Gestes, n. m. pi. gestures. 

Glace, n. f. ice, looking-glass. 

Glaneur, d. m. gleaner. 

Globe, n. m. globe. 

Gloire, n. f. glory. 

Glorifier, v. a. 1. to glorify, praise. 

Goutte, n. f. drop. 

Gouverner, v. a. 1. to govern. 

Graces, n. f. pi. graces, thanks. 

Graine, n. f. grain. 

Grand, e, adj. great, large. 

Grandir, v. n. 2. to grow. 

Grimaces, n. f. pi. grimaces, faces. 

Grander, v. a. & n. 1. to scold, to roar. 

Gros, se, adj. large. 

Grassier, e. adj. coarse. 

Grue, n. f. crane. 

Guere, adv. but little, but few. 

Guerre, n. f. war. 

Guerrier, n. m. warrior. 

Guide, n. m. guide. 



Habitant, n. m. inhabitant. 

Habiter, v. a. 1. to inhabit. 

Habituel, le, adj. usual, habitual. 

Hache, n. f. axe. 

Haleine, n. f. breath. 

Hameau, n. m. hamlet. 

Harangueur, n. m. orator. 

Hardiesse, n. f. boldness. 

Hardiment, adv. boldly. 

Harpe, n. f. harp. 

Hasard, n. m. chance. 

Hater, v. a. 1. to hasten. 

Hauteur, n. f height, haughtiness. 

Herbe, n. f. herb, grass. 

Heros, n. m. hero. 

Heure, n. f. hour. 

Heritage, n. m. inheritance, property. 

Heureux, se, adj. happy, fortunate. 

Hibou, n. m. owl. 

Hirondelle, n. f. swallow. 

Hiver, n. m. winter. 

Homme, n. m. man. 

Honnete, adj. honest, polite. 

Honneur, n. m. honor. 

Honte, n. f. shame. 



500 



HO-JA. 



Horde, n. £ horde, troop. 
Hujssier, n. m. dourke per, attendant. 
Humaiu, e, adj. human, humane. 
Humblement, adv. humbly. 
Hymne, n. £ hymn. 



Idole, n. £ idol. 

Ignob'e. adj. mean, low, debasing. 

II, lis, prn. lie. it. they. 

image, n. f. image, resemblance. 

Iiniter, v. a. 1. to imitate. 

I.umense, adj. immense, vast. 

Immortal, ie. adj. immortal. 

Impenitent, adj. impenitent, unrepent- 
ing. 

ImportUQ, e, adj. importunate, trou- 
ble-"' 

Impur, e, adj. impure. 

Incomparable, adj. incomparable, 
matchless. 

Inconno, e, adj. unknoion. 

idj. inconstant, change- 
able. 

Indiquer, v. a. 1. to indicate, to point 
out 

Industrie, n f. industry. 

- lie, adj. indefatigable, w.tir- 

Infernal, o, adj. inf-rnal. 

We, unbending. 
■ 

if' nil. 
Ingratitu i tu<k. 

■ nee. 
i scribe. 

Instant, a. m. inatani, moment. 

on, 7>i' auing. 
Intenenr, a adj. .\ n. 
[nterrompre, v. a. ir. I to interrupt 
Intime, adj. intimate, close. 
Intitule, adj. v. ■ 

. adj. intrepid. 

B ir 4. (p. d. j'intro- 
duisis), to i'.' '■•luce. 
. 

J. 

Jadia, adv. formerly. 
Jamais, adv. never. 



Jardin, n. m. garden. 
Jaseur, se, n. in. & f. talker, prattler. 
Je, j', prn. I. 

Jeter, v. a. 1. to throw, cast. 
Jeunesse, n. £ youth. 
Joie, n. £ joy. 

Joindre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je joignis, 
p. joint), to join, to connect, to add. 
Joli, e, adj. pretty. 
Juuet, n. m. plaything, sport. 
Joug, n. m. yoke, subjectio?i. 
Jour, n. m. day. l«jht. 
Journee, n. t. day, day's work. 
Joyeux, se, adj. joyful, glad. 
Juge, n. m. judge. 
Jugement, n. m. judgment, decision 
Juger, v. a, 1. to judge, to decide. 
Jurer, v. a. .':■ n. 1. to sivear,to promise. 
Jusque, pre. as far, as far as. 
Juste, adj. & n. just. 
Justice, n. f. justice. 



La. T, art. the. 

La, 1', prn. //•/•, it 

La, adv. there : la-baa, yonder. 

Laboureur, n. iu. husbandman. 

Lac, n. in. lake. 

. v. a. 1. to lose hold of, to let 
go. 
Laid, e, adj. ughj. 
Lame, n. C "•<"■/. 
Laisser, v. a. 1. to lave, to let. 

I.ail. Ii. I 

Lambris, n. ni. wainscot. 

l. .imi v. ii. f. lamp. 

Lancer, v. a. 1. to dart, to send forth 

with vioU nee, to launch. 
Langue, n. f. tongue, language. 
Laurier, n. m. laurel 

'he. 

Le, Y, les, prn. it, them, 

I. gi r, e. a<lj. light 

Lendemain, n. m. nert day, morrow. 

Lea, art. pL the; lea, prn. them. 

Leur, adj. pi. I 

Leur, prn. to ^em. 

Lever, v. a L. to raise, (se), v. r. to 

arise. 

Lever, n. m. rising. 

Lilian, /.'/'"rv n 

Liberie*, n. C liberty, freedom. 

Libre, adj. free. 



501 



Lieu, n. m. place, spot. 

Lion, n. m. lion. 

Liqueur, n. f. liquor, liquid. 

Livre, n. m. hook. 

Loi, n. f! law. 

Loin, adv. far. 

Lointain, e, adj. remote, distant. 

Long, ue, adj. long. 

Long-temps, adv. long, long lime. 

Loup, n. m. wolf. 

Lugubre, adj. mournful, sad. 

Lui, prn. to him, to her 

Lumiere, n. f. light. 

Lunettes, n. f. pi. spectacles. 

Lutte, n. f. struggle, contest. 

Lutter, v. n. 1. to contend with, to 



M. 

Ma, adj. pos. f. my. 

Machine, n. f. machine. 

Magnanime, adj. magnanimous. 

Magnificence, n. f. magnificence. 

Main, n. f. hand. 

Maintenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je 
maintiens, p. d. je maintins), to 
maintain. 

Mais, conj. but. 

Maison, n. f. house. 

Maitre, n. m. master. 

Mai, n. m. evil, adv. badly. 

Malade, n. & adj. patient, sick. 

Male, adj. manly, dignified. 

Malgre, pre. in spite of. 

Malice, n. f. cunning, malice. 

Malin, inaligne, adj. sarcastic, sly. 

Manant, n. m. peasant, clown. 

Manger, v. a. 1. to eat. 

Manifester, v. a. 1. to manifest, to tes- 
tify, to show. 

Manquer, v. a. & n. 1. to miss, to fail. 

Marcher, v. n. 1. to walk, to march. 

Marge, n. f. margin. 

Marque, n. f. mark. 

Marseillaise, n. f. Marseillaise hymn. 

Matelot, n. m. sailor. 

Matiere, n. f. matter. 

Mauvais, e, adj. bad. 

Maxime, n. f. maxim. 

Me. prn. me, to me. 

Melodieux, se, adj. melodious. 

Meme, adj. & adv. same, self, even. 

Menacer, v. a. 1. to threaten. 



Mendiant, n. m. beggar. 
Mener, v. a. 1. to lead, to take 
Mensonge, n. m. falsehood. 
Mentir, v. n. ir. 2. to lie, to tell a 

falsehood. 
Menu, e, adj. small, short. 
Mepris, n. m. contempt. 
Mepriser, v. a. 1. to despise. 
Mer, n. f. sea. 

Mercenaire, adj. mercenary. 
Mercure, Mercury. 
Mere, n. f. -mother. 
Merite, n. m. merit. 
Meriter, v. a. 1. to merit, to deserve. 
Mes, adj. pos. pi. my. 
Mesurer, v. a. 1. to measure. 
Metier, n. m. trade, occupation. 
Mettre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. je mets, 

p. d. je mis, p. mis), to put, to 

set. 
Meubler, v. a. 1. to furnish. 
Midi, n. m. south, noon. 
Mignon, ne, adj. delicate, pretty. 
Milieu, n. m. middle. 
Mille, adj. num. thousand. 
Ministre, n. m. minister. 
Mobile, adj. movable, light. 
Modeste, adj. modest. 
Mceurs, n. f. pi. morals, manners. 
Moi, prn. me. 
Moindre, adj. lesser, less. 
Moins, adv. less, (au) least. 
Mois, n. m. month. 
Moissonneur, n. m. harvest-man, 

reaper. 
Moment, n. m. moment. 
Monde, n. m. world, people, (tout le) 

every body. 
Monnaie, n. f. money, change. 
Monstre, n. m. monster. 
Montagnard, n. m. mountaineer. 
Montagne, n. f. mountain. 
Monter, v. a. & n. 1. to ascend, to 

mount. 
Montrer, v. a. 1. to show, to point 

out. 
Monument, n. m. monument. 
Moquer, (se), v. r. 1. to laugh at, to 

mock. 
Morceau, n. m. piece, morsel 
Mort, n. f. death, n. m. dead. 
Mosquee, n. f. mosque. 
Mot, n. m. word. 
Mouche, n. f. fly. 
Mourir, v. n. ir. 2. to die. 



502 



MO-OB. 



OP-PA. 



Mouton, n. m. sheep. 
Hugir, v. n. 2. to roar. 
Mysterieux, adj. mysterious. 



K 

Na'.f, re, adj. artless, unaffected, 

sni, pit, innocent. 
Naissance, n. I birth. 
Nnis-aut, c, adj. v. rising, growing. 
Naitre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je nais, 

p. d. je naquis, p. ne), to le born. 
Nation, n. f. nation. 
Nature, n. i. nature. 
Navire, n. m. ship, vessel. 
Ne, adv. not, 
Ne, p. born. 
Ne — pa?, adv. not. 
N — que, adv. cm/i/, &u£. 
Neant, n. m. nothingness, nothing. 
lire, adv. necessary. 
lire, n. m. necessaries of life. 
Ni, conj. nor, neither. 
Nocturne, adj, nocturnal, nightly. 

i.. f. hazel-nut. 
Nombre, a. m. number. 
Nummcr, v. a. 1. to name, to call. 
Non, adv. no. 
Nos, adj. wur. 

Nourrir, v. a. 2. to feed, to nourish. 
Nous. prn. we, as. 
Nouveau, nouvcl, nouvelle, adj. 

nerc. 
Nouvelle. n. f. news. 



0. 

Obelr, v. n. 2. l-> obey. 

B, adj. darti^ obscure. 
Observer, v. a. 1. to observe, to take 

->■ of. 
Obtenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. d. j'ob- 
-. p. d. j'obtins), I" obtain. 
. hateful 
OeU, ii. in. (pi. yeux), eyes. 
. n. in. bird. 
■ 

'tad*, to shelter. 

On, prn. ind 

; en dit, it is laid (one says). 
Onde, n t wave, water, 

Opprime, adj. v. oppressed. 



Opprobre, n. m. opprobrium, shame. 
OpuleDt, e, adj. rich, wealthy. 
Or, n. m. gold. 
Orage, n. m. storm. 
Ordinairement, adv. commonly. 
Oi'dre, n. m. order. 
Oreille, n. f. car. 
Orgueil, n. m. pride. 
Orplielin, c, n. m. & f. orphan. 
Oter, v a. 1. to take away, to de- 
prive of. 
Ou, conj. or. 

Ou, adv. where, in which, wherein. 
Oublier, v. a. 1. to forget, to neglect. 
Outrage, n. m. outrage, offence, shame. 
Ouverture, n. f. opening. 
Ouvrage, n. m. work. 
Ouvrier, n. m. workman. 



Pairre, v. a. & n. 4. to graze. 

Paix, n. f peace. 

Palais, n. in. palace. 

Palmyre, Palmyra. 

Par, pre. by. 

Paraitre, v. n. ir. 4. (p. paru), to ap- 
pear. 

rarce que, conj. because. 

Parcourir, v. a. ir. 2. to travel over, 
to cross, to look onr. 

Pared, lc, adj. equal, similar, such. 

Parer (se), v. r. 1. to adorn one's 
self. 

Paresseux, se, adj. idle, lazy, indo- 
but. 

Tarler, v. n. 1. to speak. 

Parmi, pre. among, amongst. 

Parole, n. f. word. 

Parricide, adj. patricidal 

Parti, n. in. pari, party, resolution. 

Partir, v. n. ir. 2. to set out, to leave, 
to depart. 

Partout, adv. everywhere. 

Parvenu, adj. v. (used as a noun), 
upstart. 

Pas, adv. not, n. m. step, pace. 

Passer, v. n. 1. to 

au, n. in. sparrow. 

Passion, n. E , i 

Patre, n. in. herdsman, shepherd. 

Patrie, n. f. country, native country. 

Patte, n. f. paw. 

PAturagp, rj. m. pasture, pasturage. 



PL-m. 



503 



Pauvre, adj. poor. 

Pays, n. m. country. 

Pa/san. n. m. peasant, countryman. 

Peage, n. in. foW. 

Pea i, n. f. skin. 

Peliidre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. jepeins, 

p. d je peignis), to paint, describe. 
Peine, n. f. trouble, pain. 
Pe;n.', (a), ad/, hardly, scarcely. 
Peniblej adj. laborious, painful. 
Pendant, pre. during. 
Pendre, v. a. & n. 4. to hang. 
Penetration, n. (.penetration. 
Penetrer, v. a. 1. to penetrate. 
Penser, v. n. 1. to think. 
Pere, n. m. father. 
Perfide, adj. perfidious, treacherous. 
Perdre, v. a 4. to lose. 
Permettre, v. a. ir. 4. to permit, al- 
low. 
Perroquet, n. m. parrot. 
Perse, Persia. 
Personne, prn. ind. nobody. 
Pervers, a Ij. perverse. 
Petit, e, adj. small, little. 
Pesant, adj. v. heavy. 
Peu, adv. Utile. 
Peuple, n. m. people. 
Peupler, v. a. 1. to people. 
Phalange, n. m. phalanx. 
Philosophic, n. f. philosophy. 
Phrase, n. f. phrase, sentence. 
Piece, n. f. piece. 
Pied, n. m. foot. 
Pieg>, n. ra. trap, snare. 
Pis, adv. worse, taut pis, so much 

the worse. 
Pitii, n. f. pity. 
Place, n. f. place, spot. 
Placer, v. a. 1. to place. 
Plafond, n. m. ceiling. 
Plage, n. f. sJiore, beach. 
Plain ire (se), v. r. ir. 4. (ind. p. je me 

plains, p. d. je me plaignis), to 

complain. 
Plaine, n. f. plain. 
Plaire, v. n. ir. 4. (p. d. je plus, p. 

plu), to please. 
Plaisanfc, n. m. wag, joker. 
Planter, v. a. 1. to plant. 
Plein, e, adj. full, open. 
Pleurer, v. a. & n. 1. to weep, to 

mourn. 
Plier, v. a. 1. to low, to bend. 
Pluie, n. £ rain. 



Plume, n. f. feather, pen. 

Plupart (la), n. col. the most, most. 

Plus, adv. more. 

Plusieurs, adj several. 

Pluton, Pluto. 

Point, n. m. point, adv. not. 

Poisson, n. m.Jish. 

Pole, n. m. pole. 

Poli, e, adj. polite, polished. 

Politesse, n. i'. politeness. 

Porphyre, n. m. porphyry. 

Port, n. m. port. 

Porter, v. a. 1. to carry, to bear. 

Portique, n. m. portico. 

Poser, v. a. 1. to lay, to set, to place. 

Posseder, v. a. 1. to possess. 

Possible, adj. possible. 

Poteau, n. m. stake, post. 

Pour, pre. for. 

Pousser, v. a. L to push, to hasten. 

Pouvoir, v. n. ir. 3. (ind. p. je puis, p. 
d. je pus, p. pu), to be able. 

Prairie, n f. meadow. 

Prealablement, adv. previously. 

Precipiter, v. a. 1. to hasten, precipi- 
tate. 

Preferer, v. a. 1. to prefer. 

Preliminaire, n. & adj. preliminary. 

Premier, e, adj. first. 

Prendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je pris. p. 
pris), to take; (s'y) ref. to com- 
mence, to open the matter. 

Preparer, v. a. 1. to prepare. 

Pres de, pre. near, nearly. 

President, n. m. president. 

Presence, n. f. presence. 

Present, n. m. present. 

Presenter (se), v. r. 1. to present 
one's self. 

Presque, adv. almost. 

Presser, v. a. & r. 1. (se), to hasten, to 
press. 

Pret, e, adj. ready, prepared. 

Prier, v. a. & n. 1 . to pray, to entreat. 

Priere, n. f. prayer. 

Prince, n. m. prince. 

Printemps, n. m. spring. 

Prisonnier, n. m. prisoner. 

Prix, n. m. price, prize. 

Produire, v. a. ir. 4. to produce. 

Proferer, v a. 1. to utter, to speak. 

Profession, n. f. profession. 

Projet, n. m. project. 

Prolonger, v. a. 1. to extend, to con- 
tinue, to lengthen. 



504 



PR-RE. 



RE— RE. 



Promener, v. a. 1. to carry about. 
Pronoucer, v. a. 1. to pronounce. 
Protestation, n. £ protest, protesta- 
tion. 
Province, n. f. province, district. 
Publier, v. a. 1. to publish. 
Puis, adv. then. 
Puiser, v. a. 1. to dip, to find. 
Puisque, conj. since. 
Puissance, n. f. power. 
Puissant, e, adj. powerful. 



Q. 

Quand, adv. when. 

Quatre, adj. num. four. 

Qu', que, conj. that, prn. which, 



Quel, adj. what, which. 
Quelque, adj. some, adv. however. 
Quelque chose, n. m. something. 
Quelquefois, adv. sometimes. 
Qui, pm. who, which. 
Quoi, prn. which, what. 
Quoi I int. what I 
Quoique, conj. altlwugh, though. 



Radoteur, Be, a m. kt dotard. 
Raison, n. f. reason, rigid. 
Bamaaser, v. a. 1. to pick up, to col- 
lect. 
Rameau, n. m. branch. 
Bappeler, v. a. L to reeaB, to re- 
mind, (se) v. r. to remember, to re- 
collect, 
Rapporter; v. a. 1. to bring back, to 

relate. 
Rapprocher, v. a. 1. to bring near or 

together, 
Raroment, adv. rarely, seldom. 
Rasa mbler, v. a. 1. to collect, to 
together. 

r fee), v. r. 1. '<> take cour- 
' i rlieer up, to settle. 
:••. v. a. ;'.. to r# 
i , adj. gruff, awkward, re- 

idaire, n. m. candidate, one 

, a. ir. 4. to recognize, 
know again. 



Redire, v. a. ir. 4 to say again, re- 
peat. 

Redoute, adj. v. dreaded, feared. 

Reduire, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je redui- 
sis, {to reduce, to compel. 

Reellenient, adv. really. 

Reflexion, n. f. reflection. 

Refuge, n. m. refuge, asylum. 

Refuser, v. a. 1. to refuse. 

Regard, n. ru. look. 

Registre, n. m. register, book. 

Regie, n. f. rule, regulation. 

Reguer, v. n. 1. to reign, to prevail. 

Regret, n. m. regret. 

Reine, n. f. queen. 

Religion, n. f. religion. 

Relever, v. a. 1. to raise again. 

Relief, n. m. en relief, raised, em' 
bossed. 

Remerciment, n. m. thank. 

Remettre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je re- 
mis, p. remis), to replace, to give, 
to hand, to deliver. 

Remplir, v. a. 2. to fill, to fulfill 

Remucr, v. a. 1. to move, to stir. 

Rencontrer, v. a. 1. to meet. 

Rendre, v. a. 4. to render, to return, 
to give back. 

Renfermer, v. a. 1. to inclose, to con- 
tain. 

Renommee, n. {.fame, report. 

Renvoyer, v. a. ir. 1. to send back, 
to send again. 

Repandre, v. a. 4. to spread, spill, 
shed. 

Repas, n. m. repast, meal 

Repentir, (se), v. r. 2. to repent. 

Repeter, v. a. 1. to repeat. 

Repliquer, v. a. 1. to reply. 

Replongor, v. a. 1. to plunge, or cast 
again. 

Repondre, v. a. 4. to answer, reply. 

Reposse, n. £ reply. 

Reproduire, v. a. ir. 4. to reproduce. 

Reptile, n. m. reptile. 

Republlcail), n. & ailj. republican. 
r, v. a. 1. to reserve, to keep. 
r, v. n. 1. to resist. 
. v. a. A n. ir 4. (p. d. jo 
reaolus, p. r>. : solu), to resolve, to 

lance, n. f. retembhmoa, 

Reste, n. in. rest, remainder, rem- 

nai.i. 



KE-SA. 



SA-SO. 



505 



Reste, (de), adv. sufficiently, fully, 
besides. 

Hester, v. n. 1. to remain, to dwell. 

Rctenlir, v. n. 2. to resound. 

Rcteutissant, adj. v. resounding. 

llctirer (se), v. r. 1. to retire, with- 
draw. 

Retour, n. m. return. 

Retourner, v. n. 1. to return, to go 
back. 

Reussir, v. n. 1. to succeed. 

Reveil, n. m. act of aioaking. 

Reveiller (se), v. r. 1. to awake. 

Revenir, v. n. ir. 2. to return, come 
back. 

Rever, v. n. 1. to dream, to think. 

Revers, n. m. reverse, wrong side. 

Revetir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je re- 
vets), to clothe, invest. 

Revoir, v. a. ir. 3. (p. revu), to see 
again. 

Riant, adj. v. laughing, smiling, 
pleasant, cheerful. 

Ricbe, adj. rich, wealthy. 

Ridicule, n. m. ridicule, adj. ridicu- 
lous. 

Ridiculement, adv. ridiculously. 

Rien, adv. nothing. 

Rite, n. m. rite. 

Rivage, n. ra. bank, shore. 

Rive, n. IT bank, shore. 

Rire, v. n, ir. 4. (ind. p. je ris, 
ri), to laugh. 

Rocher, n. m. rock. 

Roi, n. m. king. 

Rose, n. f. rose. 

Roseau, n. m. reed. 

Rosee, n. f. dew. 

Route, n. f. road, way, path. 

Roulement, n. m. rolling. 

Rouler, v. a. & n. 1. to roll. 

Royal, e, adj. royal, kingly. 

Rumeur, n. f. rumor, report, noise. 



s. 



Sa, adj. poss. f. his, her, its. 
Sable, n. m. sand. 
Sac, n. m. sack, bag.. 
Sacre, e, adj. sacred, holy. 
Sage, adj. wise, good. 
Sagesse, n. f. wisdom. 
Sain, e, adj. healthy, wholesome. 
Saint, e, adj. holy. 



Saison, n. f. season. 

Salle, u. f. hall, parlor, room. 

SalutI int. Hail! good luck! 

Sang, n. in. blood. 

Sanguinaire, adj. bloodthirsty, san- 
guinary. 

Sanglant, e adj. bleeding, bloody. 

Sans, pre. without. 

Saute, n. f. health. 

Sauvage, adj. wild,' savage. 

Savant, adj. & n. m. learned, learned 
man. 

Savoir, v. a. ir. 3. (ind. p. je sais, p. 
d. je sus, p. su), to know. 

Science, n. f. knowledge, science. 

Scier, v. a. 1. to saw. 

Se, prn. him, her, himself, herself. 

Seigneur, n. m. Lord. 

Sein, n. m. bosom. 

Selon, pre. according to. 

Sembler. v. n. & unip. 1. to seem, to 
appear. 

Semence, n. f. seed. 

Semer, v. a. 1. to sow, to scatter. 

Sensement, adv. sensibly. 

Sentiment, n. m. sentiment, thought. 

Sentinelle, n. f. sentinel. 

Sentir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. je sens), to 
feel, smell. 

Seraphin, n. m. seraphim. 

Serpolet, n. m. wild thyme. 

Servage, n. m. bondage. 

Servir, v. a. & n. 2. (ind. p. je sers), to 
serve, to be used. ■ 

Servitude, n. f. servitude, slavery. 

Ses, adj. pos. pi. his, her, its. 

Seul, e, adj. alone, only. 

Seuil. n. m. threshold, door-step, sill. 

Si, conj. if, adv. so. 

Siecle, n. m. age, time, century. 

Signe, n. m. sign. 

Signer, v. a. 1. to sign. 

Silence, n. m. silence. 

Silencieux, se, adj. silent, not loqua- 
cious. 

Sillon, n. m. furrow. 

Simple, adj. simple. 

Singe, n. m. ape, monkey. 

Sinueux, se, adj. sinuous, winding. 

Situation, n. f. situation. 

Soigneux, se, adj. careful. 

Soi-meme, prn. himself, one's self. 

Soin, ri. m. care. 

Soir, n. m. evening. 

Soldat, n. m. soldier. 



506 



SO-STT. 



Soleil, n. m. sun. 

Solide, adj. strong, solid. 

Solitude, n. f. solitude. 

Sombre, adj. dark, gloomy, sad. 

Sommeil, n. m. sleep. 

Sommet, n. m. summit, top, pinnacle. 

Son, n. ra. sound. 

Sou, adj. pos. m. s. his, Iter, its. 

Sourer, v. n. 1. to dream, to think. 

Sonner, v. n. 1. to ring. 

Sort, u. ra. lot, fate. 

Sorte, n. f. kind; de sorte, adr. so 

that. 
Sortir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind p. je sors), to 

(J) out. 
Sot, sotte, n. & adj. fool, foolish. 
Sottise, n. f. nonsense. 
Soudaiu, e, adj. sudden, unexpected, 

adv. suddenly. 
Souffle, n. m. breath, tvind. 
Souffrir, v. a. ir. 1. to suffer, to bear. 
r, v. a. 1. to wish, to desire. 
Soulier, n. m. shoe. 
Soup ;onner, v. a. 1. to stispect. 
Souplesse, n. f. suppleness, docility. 
Sour J, e, adj. deaf. 
Sous, pre. under. 
Bo itenir, v. a. ir. 3. (ind. jo soutiens), 

in sustain, to sup>port, to bear, to 

maintain. 
Soutien, el ra. support. 

u. f. remembrance, re- 
Hon. 
ir, n. m. remembrance, re- 

coHea 
Souvenir (ae), v. r. ir. 2. (ind. p. jeme 

souviens), to remember, recullecl. 
Souvent, adv. often. 
Spirale (en), wi i 
Splendeor, n. f. brilliancy, sptlcndor. 

Statut, n. in. v 

Stratagems, n. m. stratagem, trick. 

Stupide, adj. stupid, s 1'y. 

v. a. ir. i. (ind. p. jo suis), to 

. ,v n. subject. 
. adj. proud, superb, magnifi- 
an'. 

ij. sure, certain, safe. 
Bur, pee. on, upon. 
Bur-le-chatnp, adv. immediately. 
Bortaoe, n. f. surface. 
Sumumeraire, adj. supernumerary. 



Surpasser, v. a. 1. to surpass. 
Surprendre, v. a. ir. 4. (p. d. je sur- 

pris, p. surpris), to surprise. 
Surpris, e, adj. v. surprised. 
Surtout, adv. above all. 
Surveillance, n. f. watch, care. 
Symbol, n. m. symbol. 
Sycomore, n. m. sycamore. 
Sympatliie, n. f. sympathy. 
Syrie, Syria. 



T. 



Tableau, n. m. table, picture. 

Tacher, v. u. 1. to endeavor, to try. 

Tailler, v. a. 1. to cut, to shape. 

Talent, n. m. talent. 

Tandis, adv. while* 

Tanner, v. a. 1. to tan. 

Tant, adv. so much. 

Tant mieux, adv. so much the better. 

Tant pis. adv. so much the worse. 

Tard, adv. late. 

Tc, prn. thee. 

Tell, telle, adj. such. 

Temper^, e, adj. temperate. 

Tempete, n. f. tempest. 

Temps, n. in. time, weather. 

Tendre, adj. tender, kind. 

Tenir, v. a. ir. 2. (ind. p. jo tiens, p. 

d. je tins, p. tenu), to hold. 
Tenter, v. a. 1. to tempt, to attempt, 

to try. 
Terme, n. m. term, end, expression. 
Terrasser, v. a. 1. to throw down. 
'lYrro, n. f. land, earth. 
T. rreur, n. f. fear, terror. 
Terrible, adj. terrible. 
Tete, ii. E head. 
Tliyin, n. ni. thyme. 
Tip', ii. f. stalk, stem. 
Tigre, n. in. tiger. 
Tirer, v. a. 1. to draw, to extract, to 

fire, to 
Toi, prn. thee, thou. 
'I'nis. .n. n. L fleece. 
Toil, ii. in. roqf. 
Tomber, v. n. 1. tofalL 
'Ion, adj. thy. 
Tonnerte, n. ni. thunder. 
Tort, n. in. wrong. 

r, v. a. 1. to touch 
Toujour.*, adv. always. 
Tour. n. f. tower. 



507 



Tour, n. m. trick, turn. 

Tourmenter, v. a. 1. to torment, to 
tease. 

Tourner, v. a. 1. to turn. 

Tout, e, adj. all, every. 

Tout, adv. entirely, quite. 

Tracer, v. a. 1. to trace, to mark. 

Trahir, v. a. 2. to betray. 

Trait, n. m. feature, trait, arrow. 

Traitement, n. m. treatment, 

Traitre, n. m. & adj. traitor, treacher- 
ous. 

Trame, n. f. woof, plot. 

Tranquille, adj. quid, tranquil. 

Trail quillement, adv. quietly, tran- 
quilly. 

Transport, n. m. transport, carriage. 

Travail, n. m. work, labor. 

Travers (a), pre. through, across. 

Trembler, v. n. 1. to tremble, to shud- 
der. 

Tres, adv. very. 

Txesor, n m. treasure. 

Tribu, n. f. tribe. 

Triomphe, n. m. triumph. 

Triste, adj. sad, sorrowful. 

Trois, adj. num. three. 

Trone, n. m. throne. 

Tvo]}, adv. too much, too many. 

Trouble, n. ni. trouble, vexation, dis- 
turbance. 

Troupeau, n. m. flock, herd. 

Trouver, v. a. 1. to find; (se), v. r. to 
happen to be, to be present, to 
appear. 

Tu, prn. thou. 

Tuer, v. a. 1. to kill, slay. 

Tyrannic, n. f. tyranny. 

u. 

Tin, une, adj. num. one, a, an. 
Unir, v. a. 2. to unite. 
Univers, n. m. universe. 
Usage, n. m. custom, use. 
Usurper, v. a. 1. to usurp. 
Utile, adj. useful. 



Y. 

Vacant, e, adj. vacant, unoccupied. 
Vache, n. f. cow. 
Vague, n. f. wave, billow. 



Vain, e, adj. vain. 

Vaincre, v. a. ir. 4. (ind. p. jo vaincs, 
p. d. je vaiaquis, p. vaincu), to 
vanquish, to conquer, to overcome. 

Vaisseau, n. m. vessel, ship. 

Vallon, n. m. valley, vale. 

Valoir, v. n. ir. 3. (ind. je vaux, p. 
d. je valus), to be worth. 

Vanite, n. f. vanity. 

Vanneur, n. m. winnower. 

Vanter (se), v. r. 1. to boast. 

Vaquer, v. unip. & n. 1. to be vacant. 

Vase, n. m. vase, vessel. 

Vaste, adj. vast. 

Vengeur, n. in. avenger. 

Venir, v. n. ir. 2. (ind, p. je viens, p. 
d. je vins), to come. 

Vent, n. m. wind. 

Verger, n. m. orchard. 

Verite, n. f. truth. 

Vermeil, n. m. silver gilded. 

Vers, pre. towards. 

Vert, adj. green. 

Vertu, n. f. virtue. 

Vertueux, se, adj. virtuous. 

Vetement, n. m. garment. 

Vt'tir, v. a. ir. 2. to clothe. 

Vice, n. m. vice. 

Victime, n. f. victim. 

Vide, adj. empty, n. m. empty space. 

Vie, n. f. life. 

Vieux, vieil, vieille, adj. old, anti- 
quated. 

Vif, ve, adj. lively, quick. 

Vigilance, n. t vigilance. 

Vil, e, adj. vile, mean, low. 

Village, n. m. village. 

Ville, n. f. town, city. 

Virilement, adv. manfully, coura- 
geously. 

Visir, n. m. vizier. 

Visiter, v. a. 1. to visit. 

Vivacite, n. f. vivacity. 

Vivant, e, adj. v. living. 

Vivre, v. n. ir. 4. (ind. p. je vis, p. 
d. je vecus, p. vecu), to live. 

Vceu, n. m. vow, wish. 

Voici, pre. here is, this is. 

Voila, pre. there is, that is. 

Voler, v. n. 1. to fly, v. a. to steal. 

Voie, n. f. ivay, path, road. 

Voir, v. a. ir. 3. (p. d. je vis, p. vu), 
to see, to perceive. 

Voisin, n. m. neighbor. 

Voix, n. f. voice. 



508 



vo-vu. 



Vorace, adj. greedy, voracious. 

Vos, adj. pos. pi. your. 

Votre, adj. p. your. 

Vouloir, v. a. & n. ir. 3. (ind. p. je 

veux, p. d. je voulus, p. voulu), 

to wish, to be willing. 
You?, prn. you. 
Vbfite, n. f. vault, arch. 
Voyager, v. n. 1. to travel 
"V'rai, e, adj. true. 
V raiment, adv. truly. 
Yue, n. f. view, sight. 



Y, adv. there. 

Y, prn. to it, to them, at it, at them, 

in it, in them. 
Y avoir, v. unip. 3. il y a, there is, 

there are ; il y a un an, a year ago. 
Teux, n. m. p. (plui-al of ceil), eyes. 



Zenobia, Zenobia. 

Zephyr, n. in. light wind, zephyr. 

Zero, n. m. zero, naught. 



PUBLISHED BY IVIS0N, PHINNEY & CO., NEW YORK. 

FASQUELLE'S 
FRENCH SERIES. 

By LOUIS FASQUELLE, LL.D., 

Professor of Modem Languages in the University of Michigan. 



CHARACTERISTIC FEATURES. 

1. The plan of this popular Series embraces a combination 
of the two rival systems ; the Oral, adopted by Ollendorff, 
Robertson, Manesca, and others, with the old Classical, or 
Grammatical System. One of its principal features is a con- 
stant comparison of the construction of the French and English 
Languages. 

2. Another important feature consists in the facility with 
which the instructor or student can elect in the course of study 
the practice and theory combined, or as much or as little of 
either as he deems proper. 

3. The " Course" commences with a complete though short 
treatise on pronunciation, presenting the power of each letter 
as initial, medial, or final, and also its sound when final and 
carried to the next word, in reading or speaking. 

4. The changes in the words are presented in the most simple 
manner, and copiously exemplified by conversational phrases. 

5. The rules of composition, grammatical and idiomatical, 
are introduced gradually, so as not to offer too many difficulties 
at one time. 

6. The verbs are grouped by tenses, and comparisons insti- 
tuted, showing their resemblance or difference of termination 
in the different conjugations. 

7. The second, or theoretical part, offers, in a condensed 
form, a solution of the principal difficulties of the language. 

8. The Rules are deduced from the best authorities, and illus- 
traded by short extracts from the best French writers. 

9. A treatise on gender is given, containing rules for determin- 
ing gender by the meaning of words, and also by the termination. 

10. The Irregular, Defective, and Peculiar verbs are pre- 
sented in an Alphabetical Table, producing a Complete Dic- 
tionary of these verbs. 



PUBLISHED BT IVISOK, PHINSTEY & CO., NEW YORK. 
FASQUELLE'S FRENCH SERIES. 



I. FASQUELLE'S FRENCH COURSE: 

OB, HIW METHOD OF LEAEXnJG TEE FEENCH LANGUAGE. 

Revised and enlarged. Price, $1 25. 

Embracing both the Analytic and Synthetic modes of In- 
struction. By Louis Fasquelle, LL.D., Professor of Modern 
Languages in the University of Michigan. 

This work is on the plan of " Woodbury's Method with Ger- 
man." It pursues the same gradual course, and comprehends 
the same wide scope of instruction. It is the leading book in 
the best literary institutions in the United States, and has also 
been reprinted in England, where it has an extended sale. 



H. A KEY TO THE EXERCISES IN FASQUELLE'S 
FRENCH COURSE. 

Price, 75 cents. 



ni. FASQUELLE'S COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER. 

260 Pages. Duodecimo. Price, 75 cents. 

Containing Interesting Narratives from the best French 
writers, for translation into English, accompanied by Conver- 
sational Exercises. With Grammatical References to Fasquelle's 
New French Method ; explanation of the most difficult passages, 
and a copious Vocabulary. 



IV. FASQUELLE'S TELEMAQUE. 

Ylni<>. Price, 75 cents. 

Les Aventures de Tulemaque. Par M. Fenelon. A New 
Edition, with notes. The Text carefully prepared from the 
most approved French Editions. 

Tho splendid production of Fcn61on Is hero presented In a beautiful mechanical 
dress, with copious references to Fasquelle's Grammar, full notes explanatory of diffi- 
culties In the text, and a full vocabulary. 



V. NAPOLEON. BY ALEXANDER DUMAS. 

Price, 75 cents. 

Arranged for the use of Colleges and Schools; with Conver- 
sational Exercises on the plan of Fasquelle's Colloquial French 
Reader, Explanatory Notes, and Idiomatical and Grammatical 
References to the " New French Method." By Louis Fasquelle, 
LL.D. 

2 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON, PIIINNEY & CO., NEW YORK. 
FASQUELLE'S FRENCH SERIES. 



VL FASQUELLE'S CHEFS D'CEUVRE DE RACINE. 

832 Pages, 12-mo. Price, 75 cents. 

For Colleges and Schools. "With Explanatory Notes and 
Grammatical References to the " New French Method." 

This Edition contains five of Racine's best plays : Les Plai- 
deurs, Andromaque, Iphigenie, Esther, and Athalie. The 
Notes will be found, in all the plays, sufficiently full, without 
being diffuse ; in Les Plaideurs, the only comedy written by 
Racine, the explanations, however, are much fuller than the 
others. 



VII. FASQUELLE'S INTRODUCTORY FRENCH COURSE. 

lSmo. Price, 56 cents. 

A new work, on the plan of the larger " Course," adapted 
to Beginners. 



Vni. FASQUELLE'S MANUAL OF FRENCH CONVER- 
SATION. 

12w? o. Price, T5 cents. 

A Complete Manual of Conversation, Idioms, etc., with refer- 
ences to Fasquelle's Course. 



Testimonials of Teachers and Professors. 

Fasquelle's French Series has been recommended by State 
Superintendents and Boards of Education, by hundreds of 
distinguished Professors and Teachers, whose testimonials 
would fill a volume. The following are specimens : 

Joseph Wm. Jenks, Professor of Languages in the University 

of Urbana, 0., says : — " I have taught many classes in the French language, and do 
not hesitate to say, that 'Fasquelle's French Course' is superior to any other French 
Grammar I have met with, for teaching French to those whose mother-tongue is 
English. It combines, in an admirable manner, the excellences of the old, or classic, 
and the new, or Ollendorffian methods, avoiding the faults of both." 

Messrs. Guillaume H. Talbot, T. A. Pelletier, E. H. Vian, 

H. Sest, and N. B. De Montkaeciit, well known to the community as among the 
most eminent teachers in BOSTON, unite in a testimonial in which they "heartily 
and unanimously testify, that the work is held in high esteem and approbation among 
us, and that we consider it the very best heretofore published on the subject of which 
it treats. For the true interest of all engaged in the study of the spoken French, we 
rould advise its universal adoption." 



PUBLISHED- BY IVIS0N, PHINNEY <fc CO., NEW YORK. 
FASQUELLE'S FBENCH SERIES. 



Messieurs Masset and Yilleplait, Professors of the French 

Language in New York, write : — " TVe consider 'Fasqrjelle's French Course' a valu- 
able and appropriate addition to the different grammars of the French Language. 
The arrangement adopted is systematic, and so simplified as greatly to facilitate the 
progress of the student." 

Prof. Alphonse Brtjnner, of Cincinnati, says : — " Having 

been a teacher of my vernacular tongue — the French — for ten years, in my opinion, it 
is the best book yet prepared. I recommend it as superior to tho old theoretical 
grammars." 

Prof. J. B. Torricelli, of Dartmouth College, writes : — " I 

tike pleasure in recommending to the teacher as well as to tho private student, 
* Fasquelle's New Method,' as the best yet published. Its adoption in our Colleges 
and Seminaries has given entire satisfaction. Mr. Fasquelle dcsorves tho thanks of 
all lovers of the French language." 

Rev. Charles Collins, DP)., President of Dickinson College, 

Pa. : — "We have introduced Fasquelle's French Series with very decided approbation." 

Prof. Everett, of Bowdoin College, Me.: — "Fasquelle's 

French Conrse is decidedly the best grammar ever published." 

Edward North, A.M., Professor of Languages, Hamilton 

Collese, N. Y. :— " Fasquelle's French Course I continue to use, and to like. It is 
Worthy of its immense popularity." 

Rev. Gborgb B. Jbwbtt, late Professor of Modern Lan- 
guages, Amb'T-t College:—"! have examined Fasquelle's French Series with much 
:i. They form an admirable series.*' 

Prof. Charles Gobblle, Professor of Modern Languages, 

Newburv Female Colli VI : — " I have been using Fasquelle's French 

Conrse during tbe pasl two years in one of the best schools In Mew England. It is 

k 1 know of for Instruction In the French language." 

Prof, T. Pbyrb Ferry, Teacher of French in the New Jersey 
Normal School, Trenton ; — " Fasquelle's Course Is the best work c\ er published of the 

kind. It enables the pupil to acquire a practical knowledge of the French language.' 1 

Rev. G. W. QrjBRBAU, A.M., Principal of Conference 8am> 

nary, Greenwich, R. I. :—" Fasquelle's Conrse Is our standard text-book in French. 
We use it because we think it best. I speak with some confidence, and am satisfied 
tl.at li Is deoldi any other book of the kind." 

Jambs !'•. Ajtgbll, A.M.. Professor of Modern Languages in 

Brown University, writes:— " I gladly testify to the excellence of Ifasquelle's Treses 

I I in my nlaiwnn for three rears." 

P. \. Lboendre, Professor of French, New Haven, < "t., 

siys : — "Never has a work oome under my notice, that blends SO happily and har- 
moniously the great rival dements of the language. My pupils study it with plea 

E. .1. P. Wohranoe, Professor of Modem Languages in tho 

ff. Y. Central College, v . time original 

and complete in Itself, supers* now In use." 

The A". )'. - says: — "Prof. F. is somewhat of 

an enthusiast a* to bis metho I of teaching, and b ling bli 1 with as much >• 

experience, makes a better arranged text-book, and grades the difficulties mete bap 
plly than any other modern teaober. H 

The Philadelphia Daily News Bpenks of the "Napoleon," as 

M a very concise and Interesting French history which, edited as it is by Prof. Foa> 

quelle. Van n.it fail to prove a very popular school-book. Tho narrative U In Dumas' 
most brilliant and attrai 

The X. P. Tndejh of the " Napoleon" : — "It com- 

tbe student, a good French 
style and grammatical and critical exercises and annotation* '' 



PUBLISHED BV IVISON, PHINNEY & CO., NEW YORK. 



WOODBURY'S 
GERMAN SERIES. 

By W. H. WOODBURY, A.M. 



I. New METiroD-wiTn German,.. 1 50 
II. Key to tub New Method,.... 50 

III. Shorter Course, 75 

I V. Key to Shorter Counsrc, 50 

V. Elementary German Header, 75 



VI. Eclectic German Reader,.. 1 00 

VII. German English Reader,... 25 

VIII. New Method for Germans,.. 75 

IX. Glauhensklf.e's Grammar,.. 75 

X. Glaubensklee's Header,.. .. 50 



This system is founded on similar principles with Fasquelle's 
French Series, and is highly popular. Our Catalogue and 
Circulars present cordial testimonials from a large number of 
eminent educators and scholars, among whom are : 

Prof. Schmidt of Columbia College, who says : — " The 

* Method 1 is truly admirable, and with willing learners, can not fail to accomplish the 
most satisfactory results." 

Prof. Arthur L. Perry, Professor of Modern Languages, 

"Williams College, Mass., writes, Sept. 19, 1857 : — "I have introduced 'Woodbury's 
New Method," in my German classes with the best results. It is very nearly a per- 
fect book for beginners. I am also entirely satisfied with his entire ' Series.' " 

W. H. Allen, LL.D., President of Girard College, pro- 
nounces it " all that is necessary to make the acquisition of German easy and delight- 
ful to the student. Its style is perspicuous, its arrangement natural, and its method, 
combining, as it does, the practical with the theoretic, is well adapted to all classes 
of learners." 

Rev. George B. Miller, D.D., Professor of Theology in the 

ITartwick, N. Y., Lutheran Seminary, an accomplished and experienced German 
teacher, writes, June 13, 1S57:— " Having used 'Woodbury's New Method' for several 
years, I consider it to be far in advance of the old Ollendorf Method, and so far as I 
know, the best system of teaching German that is extant." 

Prof. Torricelli, of Dartmouth College: — "Having for 

the past two years used it in the College, and in the Female Seminary in this place, 
I find that nothing bettor can be desired. No German teacher will hesitate to adopt 
it in preference to any others." 

Prof. Peissner, Professor of German in Union College, 

writes: — "With great delight I see the publication of a German Grammar somewha 
different from the systems hitherto followed. I admire in Mr. Woodbury's work the 
logical arrangement, and the use of practical phrases and exercises. It is, in short, 
just the work which we have been in need of, and I do not hesitate to recommend it 
to every one who studies with me, or asks my advice. Professor Foster, a German 
scholar of great perfection, confirms my opinion." 

Rev. Dr. Nast, Editor of Christliche Apologete ; Hon. R. 

Allyn, Commissioner of Rhode Island ; President Allen, Girard College; and many 
other well-known German teachers, with many notices from the press, among which 
we cite the following: 

The Bibliotheca Sacra, edited by Rev. Professors Park 

and Taylor, Andover, Mass., says: — "We can confidently commend this Grammar 
as one of the best we have seen on any modern language. It bears the mark of intel- 
ligent and conscientious labor on every page. We observe that it is highly spoken of 
by educated Germans among us." 

Recommendations from the following are excluded for want 

of space: Pres. Hoshotjr, N. W. C. College ; Prof. B^eemann, Troy Female Semi- 
nary ; Prof. Picard, Illinois College ; Prof. Fasquelle, University Michigan ; Profc 
Jabman, Union University, Tenn., and others. 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON, PHINXEY & CO., NEW YORK. 

GRAY'S 

BOTANICAL SERIES. 

The most full, scholarly, and attractive apparatus for the study of Botany to ho 
found in the language. The hooks have recently been warmly endorsed by Profs. 
AOASeiZ, Sii.um.\n\ Tor.r.KV. HlTcnooCK, Henry, and nearly every scientist of emi- 
nence in this country, and by Drs. Linim.f.y. Hooker, and other distinguished Botan- 
ists in Europe. They are us"e<l in hundrc Is of Colleges, Academies, i nd Institutes in 
this country, and in the Univrrsity of Cambridge, England; University of Edin- 
bbro, Scotland; Trinity Coixkgr, Dublin, Sx. 

&R AY'S "HOW PLANT8 GROW." For Yonrtff People. 500 cuts $ 75 

GllAVS LESSONS l.\ BOTANY. f><',_< drawings 1 N 

OKAYS MANUAL OF BOTANY ion.) 1 W 

(ill.W'S MANUAL AND LES80NS, in 1 vol 9 85 

GKAYS MANUAL WITH MOSSES. ETC. Illustrated I 60 

GRAYS STRUCTURAL AND BYBTEMATIC BOTANY. (Beoised and 

improved Edition of "Botanical Text-Book") 2 00 



WELLS' 
SCIENTIFIC SERIES. 

I'.y DAVID A. WELLS, A.M., Editor of "Annual of Scientific Discovery.'* 
" Knowledge la Power," Ac. Embodying the latest researches In physical science, 
and excelling in their lucid style, numerous facts, copious illustrations (over 7i»o. 
and practical app the arts of every -day life, and endorsed hy 

hundreds of oinlnent and successful practical Educators in all parts of the country, 
and tin- P 

Mr. Wells 1 scientific qualifications have been approved by the most eminent 
scholars In the country among them Profs. Bj Henry, Hoksiord, 

Wvmax, Llenl oonl Mai 

it li H( i: OP COMMON THINGS. With cut- * 75 

WKLLS' NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 87:2 cuts. Isold).... 1 00 

WELLS' PRIN< IPLES OP CHEMISTRY. 212 cut* 1 («> 

WKLLS' FIRST PRINCIPLES OF GEOLOGY. 75 



OOLTON AND FITCH'S 

GEOGRAPHIES. 

Thlsscrle< |a the most full, practical, aeenrnte, and satisfactory, ever published. 

Ir inn .m :i unit' •no system of scales, 

ley arc I ho 

in the country, and have hecn nfllclaUy 

T1IK PRIMED OF GEOGRAPHY $ 25 

INTRODUCTORY GEOOKAPIIY. -'I M UM N 

MODKKN SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY. 48 Maiw 75 

AMI RICAN BCllOOL GEOGRAPHY AND ATLAS 1 so 

L GEOGRAPHY 1 00 



• WILL 
SCHOOL HISTORIES. 

monlala have '■■ 

In different 

■ 

WILLSOrTS PRIMARY AMERICAN niSTORY $ 84 

WILLSON'S HISTORY '>r THE INI I ED STA IT- I, and 



WILLSON'S AMERICAN HISTORY. 1 N 

WIL1.SOVS AMERICAN HISTORY. 

WILL-" J OF HISTORY. 1 '-'5 

WILLSON - "i II. INI - OF HISTOID 

WILLSON'S CHART OF AMERICAN HISTORY. (Rollers) 8 00 

G 



PUBLISHED BY IVISON, PI1INNEY & CO., NEW YORK. 

ROBINSON'S 

COMPLETE MATHEMATICAL SERIES. 

By HORATIO N. ROBINSON, A.M., late Prof, of Mathematics in the U. S. Navy. 

Most of the books of the series have been thoroughly revised and corrected, and 
published in superior style. For extent of research, and facility and aptness of illus- 
tration, the author is unsurpassed, and his long experience as a practical mathemati- 
cian and teacher guarantees the utility and sound science of his works. They have 
received the unqualified approval of most eminent educators, including several State 
Supf.rintkndents of PuiiLtc Instruction, and many Presidents and Professors in 
Colleges. They are already used and preferred to any others in thousands of the best 
Colleges, Academies, and High Schools throughout the Union. 

ROBINSON'S PROGRESSIVE PRIMARY ARITHMETIC $ 15 

ROBINSON'S PROGRESSIVE INTELLECTUAL ARITHMETIC 25 

ROBINSON'S THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC 50J 

ROBINSON'S KEY TO PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC 5ll 

ROBINSON'S HIGHER ARITHMETIC. (In press) 75 

ROBINSON'S KEY TO HIGHER ARITHMETIC. (In press.) 75 

ROBINSON'S ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA 75 

ROBINSON'S NEW ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA 75 

ROBINSON'S KEY TO NEW ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA 75 

ROBINSON'S UNIVERSITY ALGEBRA 1 25 

ROBINSON'S KEY TO UNIVERSITY ALGEBRA 1 00 

ROBINSON'S GEOMETRY AND TRIGONOMETRY 1 50 

ROBINSON'S SURVEYING AND NAVIGATION 1 50 

ROBINSON'S ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY AND CONIC SECTIONS.... 1 50 

ROBINSON'S MATHEMATICAL OPERATIONS 2 25 

ROBINSON'S ELEMENTARY ASTRONOMY • 75 

ROBINSON'S UNIVERSITY ASTRONOMY 1 75 

ROBINSON'S DIFFERENTIAL AND INTEGRAL CALCULUS. (In press.) 
ROBINSON'S KEY TO ALGEBRA, GEOMETRY, SURVEYING, AND 
CALCULUS. 



SPENCERIAN PENMANSHIP. 

77ie Spencerian System of Penmanship is a scientific, methodical, beautiful and 
complete series of writing books, eminently practical, and admirably adapted to im- 
part a correct knowledge of the art. They have been adopted as the text-book on 
penmanship by many of the Commercial Colleges in the United States, among which 
are Bryant <fc Stratton's Chain of Commercial Colleges at New York, Philadelphia, 
Albany, Buffalo, Cleveland, Detroit, Chicago, St. Louis, and Pittsburgh (the most ox- 
tensive Chain of Colleges in the world), and have recently been adopted in the Public 
Schools of the cities of Buffalo, Cleveland, Detroit, St. Louis, Rochester, Oswego, and 
other large cities and towns. The School Series is complete in the first five Nos. 
SPENCERIAN PENMANSHIP. Newly engraved. In 9 Nos. 

Nos. 1, 2, S— BEGINNERS' COURSE $ 12i 

No. 4— CAPITALS 124 

No. 5— SENTENCES AND REVIEW OF CAPITALS 124 

No. 6— ANALYTICAL AND SYNTHETICAL REVIEW OF THE SYS- 
TEM, with Short Business Forms 124 

No. 7— GENERAL BUSINESS FORMS (containing nearly 150 lines) 124 

No. S— ANALYSIS OF THE SYSTEM IN ITS APPLICATION TO 

LADIES' PENMANSHIP ]2>- 

No. 9— LADIES 1 BOOK OF FORMS FOR PRACTICE is| 

(The first five Nos. constitute the '" Common School Series f- the last four 
Nos. the "Commercial and High School Series. 11 ) 
COMPENDIUM OF THE^ SPENCERIAN SYSTEM. 60 pages (over 
400 lines), illustrating Chirography in its analytical, practical, 

and ornamental forms. Paper 1 00 

Cloth ' 1 so 

Cloth, full gilt 2 00 

SPENCERIAN CHART OF LETTERS. Size, 3S by 44 inches: 

Mounted on rollers and varnished 2 00 

Canvas back (not mounted) , 1 £0 

This Chart is designed to suspend in the School-room, from which to give 
general explanations of the Elements and Rules of the System. The Ele- 
ments are all given and numbered, — their slope, shading, and proportions, 
together with their combinations, giving the perfectly formed letters, are 
fully elucidated ; 30 that when the pupil has fixed in his mind a perfect ideal 
of the elements and letters as here exhibited, he becomes a teacher unto 
himself. 



/ 



PUBLISHED BY IVIS0N, PHIXXEY fc CO., NEW YORK. 

HITCHCOCK'S 

Inatomy and physiology. 

FOR COLLEGES, ACADEMIES, AND SCHOOLS. 

By Edward Hitchcock, D.D., LL.D., President of 

Amherst College, author of " Geology," &c, and 

E. Hitchcock, Jr., M.D. 

Illustrated it/ nearly 400 engraving*. 441 pages. Retail price $1 00. 

The authors give the leading principles and facts in such 
works as Carpenter's Human Physiology, his Comparative 
Physiology and Anatomy, Hassall's Microscopic Anatomy, 
Griffith and Henfrey'8 Micrographic Dictionary, Peaslee's His. 
tology, Todd and Bowman's Physiological Anatomy, Wilson's 
Anatomy, Draper's, Dunglison's, and Dalton's Physiologies, 
the works of Cuvier, Owen, and Wagner, on Comparative Anat- 
omy, also those ^\ Agassis, Van Dor Hoeyen, Siebold, &c 

< tf several important new features of this book, one is Micro- 
tcopic Anatomy, and an unusually full treatment of Comparative 
my and Physiology, Hygiene, Gh/mnastiee, <fcc, <fec 

Among the commendatious from eminent Educators, we 
have only room for the following: 

From Pres. Collins, D.D m Dickinson College, Penn., March, 

imy and Physiology, 1 and am 

, me I., tt.-r as I liose sciences Hum any work 

■ , . t Comparative Ann- 

j worthy of tUo 

who would keep np with tlio i. 

Prom the Mi* Educational Journal, 

I knowledge of tlio 

nd tin- I k very strongly. Thla branch of atndy 

. tually studied In our 
la low." 

|.' r ,, !u t i,. tn:— "The most full and 

• has oome to oar knowledge, l 
, i, become the general text-book lu our 

F , Prof. W. D. Wilson, D.D. of Hobart Free Coll 

nslder II much superior t«. anytl 

and ai a manual for goneral reference, oxoeyt 

l'r-.ni- tin- X. V. Evening Post: — "There has been no 

the win'i, of advanced students who n 1 mora than 

- ■ 

■ ong testimonials from manj al 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 



111! I II 111 II1III I 

003 116 763 2 



■ 



